§ 

#! 

# 

JL 
T 


Sj 


THE  UNIVERSITY 
•^F  ILLINOIS 
LIBRARY 


435 

V z8  K 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/highschoolgerman00vand_0 


II  -i  ->  ' • 1 1 

£ 


THE  HIGH  SCHOOL 


GERMAN 


GRAMMAR 


WITH  APPENDICES, 

EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION , AND  VOCABULARIES 


BY 

W.  H.  VAN  DER  SMISSEN,  M.  A. 

LECTURER  ON  GERMAN,  UNIVERSITY  COLLEGE,  TORONTO 

AND 


W.  H.  FRASER,  B.  A. 

LECTURER  ON  ITALIAN  AND  SPANISH,  UNIVERSITY  COLLEGE,  TORONTO 
LATE  FRENCH  AND  GERMAN  MASTER,  UPPER  CANADA  COLLEGE 


NEW  YORK  :•  CINCINNATI  :•  CHICAGO 

AMERICAN  BOOK  COMPANY 


A vw-v- 


4S5" 

VZ2k 

PREFACE. 

In  presenting  this  Grammar  to  the  Public,  the  authors  ven- 
ture to  express  the  hope  that  it  will  be  found  adapted  to  the 
S wants,  not  only  of  High  School  teachers  and  pupils,  but  also  to 
those  of  students  of  German  in  general. 

The  Lessons  and  Exercises  have  been  made,  as  far  as  possible, 
strictly  progressive,  so  that  the  beginner  may  not  at  the  outset 
be  overburdened  and  impeded  by  too  copious  vocabularies,  or  by 
too  difficult  exercises.  At  the  same  time  each  separate  subject, 
as  for  instance  the  declension  of  substantives,  is  fully  treated 
before  being  dissmissed.  Copious  examples  are  given  in  illus- 
tration of  each  rule. 

In  the  Exercises,  especial  care  has  been  taken  that  no  gram- 
matical point  shall  occur  in  any  sentence  on  which  the  pupil 
has  not  been  previously  instructed,  and  also  that  every 
Exercise  shall  contain  thorough  practice  in  applying  the  princi- 
ples, not  only  of  the  corresponding  lesson,  but  also  of  past 
lessons. 

An  oral  exercise,  consisting  of  questions,  to  which  the  pupil 
should  be  required  to  supply  the  answers,  accompanies  each 
lesson.  These  oral  exercises  may  be  extended  at  will  by  the 
teacher. 

The  supplementary  lessons  contain  chiefly  special  cases  in 
grammatical  usage,  and  are  mainly  for  reference.  These  les- 
sons should  be  omitted  by  the  elementary  pupil,  and  should 
not  in  any  case  be  taken  up  on  the  first  reading. 

The  grammar  of  the  substantive,  the  adjective,  the  verb  (in- 
cluding the  passive  voice),  the  pronouns  and  the  principal  pre- 
positions, is  disposed  of  in  the  first  twenty-two  lessons,  together 
with  the  fundamental  principles  of  word  order,  so  that,  with  the 
completion  of  Lesson  XXII,  the  pupil  will  be  fully  equipped 


■XuO 


fv 


PREFACE. 


for  reading  easy  German  texts.  The  Modal  Auxiliaries,  how- 
ever, could  not  be  introduced  in  their  proper  connection  until 
the  strong  verbs  had  been  disposed  of,  and  where  they  occur 
in  reading  texts  must  be  treated  as  anomalous  forms  until  Lesson 
XXXIII  is  reached. 

Special  care  has  been  taken  to  call  attention  to  and  explain 
those  points  in  which  German  differs  from  English  usage, 
particularly  with  regard  to  the  prepositions  and  their  puzzling 
idioms,  the  use  of  participles  and  the  construction  of  participial 
clauses,  the  order  of  words  and  construction  of  sentences. 
The  Historical  Sketch  in  Lesson  LII  does  not  claim  to  be 
more  than  rudimentary,  and  such  terms  only  are  employed  in 
explaining  phonetic  laws  as  are  likely  to  be  familiar  to  junior 
pupils. 

In  the  Vocabulary,  only  such  meanings  of  words  are  given 
as  occur  in  the  exercises ; for  the  principal  parts  of  strong  and 
irregular  verbs  the  pupil  is  referred  to  the  proper  section  of  the 
Grammar.  Similar  references  are  given  under  the  prepositions 
and  pronouns. 

The  Index  has  been  made  as  full  as  possible,  and  it  is  hoped 
that  it  will  be  of  no  little  assistance  to  both  teacher  and  pupil. 

In  writing  this  Grammar,  the  authors  have  freely  consulted, 
among  others,  the  grammars  of  Heyse,  Whitney  and  Brandt, 
Vernaleken’s  “ Deutsche  Syntax,”  and  the  various  works  of 
Sanders,  especially  his  great  “ Dictionary,”  his  “ Sprachbriefe,” 
and  his  “Satzbau  und  Wortfolge  der  deutschen  Sprache.” 
For  some  of  the  examples  in  Lesson  XLIX,  as  well  as  the  sen- 
tences in  Exercise  G,  the  authors  are  indebted  to  Buchheim's 
“German  Prose  Composition.” 

University  College, 

Toronto,  May,  i883w 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 


Preface 

•Introduction.  — Alphabet 

« 

Examples  of  Pronunciation 

6 

u 

General  Remarks  on  Pronunciation  . 

8 

« 

Quantity  of  Vowels  .... 

9 

« 

Accentuation 

. 10 

(1 

Orthography 

. 11 

u 

German  Script  . . • • 

• 13 

LESSON 

PART  I. 

PAGE 

§§ 

I. 

Present  Indicative  of  fjahett,  to  have 

17- 

1,  2 

II. 

Use  of  Cases.  — Definite  Article  . 

18. 

3-5 

UI. 

liefer  Model.  — Imperf.  Indie,  of  fjatiett,  to 
have 

20. 

6,7 

IV. 

SHein  Model.  — Indef.  Article.  — Present  and 
Imperf.  Indie,  of  (till,  to  be 

22. 

8-15 

V. 

Declension  of  Substantives  : — SJialCt  Model, 
or  -\,  -m,  -It,  -t  Stems  .... 

25. 

16-18 

VI. 

Present  and  Imperfect  of  ttlCtUeit,  to  become. 
— Construction  of  Principal  Sentences 

28. 

19,  20 

VII. 

Declension  of  Substantives:  — 0o!jtt  Model. 
— Question  Order 

32. 

21-23 

VIII. 

Conjugation  of  Jjafirn,  to  have.  — Place  of 
Participle  and  Infinitive  .... 

36* 

24-26 

IX. 

Weak  Conjugation  : ioften.  — Dependent  Sen- 
tences. — Prepositions  with  Accusative  only 

41. 

27-34 

X. 

Weak  Verbs  (continued).  — Declension  of 
Substantives : — Sotf  Model,  or  Plural  in  -cr 

47- 

35-37 

LESSON 

XI. 

XII. 

XIII. 


A. 

XIV. 


XV. 

B. 

XVI. 

C. 

XVII. 

XVIII. 

XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 

XXII 

XXIII. 

XXIV. 

XXV. 

XXVI. 

XXVII. 

D. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

§§ 

Personal  Pronouns 

52* 

38-42 

Possessive  Adjectives.  — Use  of  Articles 
Construction  of  Sentences : — Place  of  Ob- 
jects, Adverbs,  etc.  — Prepositions  with  Da- 

58. 

43>  44 

tive  only 

Additional  Remarks  on  Personal  Pronouns 

64. 

45>  46 

and  Prepositions 

Conjugation  of  feitt,  to  be. — Declension  of 
Substantives  : — Weak  or-n  Stems: 

70. 

47-51 

Model 

Mixed  Declension. — Double  Plurals. — Pre- 

72. 

52-59 

positions  governing  Dative  or  Accusative  . 

80. 

60-65 

Anomalies  of  Declension  .... 

Declension  of  Substantives:  Recapitulation. 
— Proper  Names.  — Prepositions  with  Gen- 

87. 

66-69 

itive 

89. 

70-75 

Proper  Names.  — Foreign  Substantives  . 
Gender  of  Substantives.  — Interrogative  Pro- 
nouns and  Adjectives.  — Indirect  State- 

95- 

76-78 

ments  and  Questions  ..... 
Gender  of  Substantives  (concluded).  — Gen- 

97- 

79-88 

eral  Remarks.  — Double  Gender 

105. 

89-91 

Relative  Pronouns. — Irregular  Weak  Verbs 
Declension  of  Attributive  Adjectives : Strong 

111. 

92-99 

Form.  — Conjugation  of  Strong  Verbs 

n8. 

IOO-III 

Passive  Voice 

Declension  of  Adjectives : Weak  and  Mixed. 

112-114 

— Strong  Verbs:  Beiftcn  Model  . 
Possessive  Pronouns. — Strong  Verbs  : BlciBctt 

134- 

115-118 

Model 

Declension  of  Adjectives  (concluded) : Table, 
General  Remarks.  — Strong  Verbs:  fd)tej)cit 

1 19, 120 

and  fcdjteit  Models 

Comparison  of  Adjectives.  — Strong  Verbs: 

147. 

121-124 

friercit  Model 

Demonstrative  Pronouns.  — Strong  Verbs: 

XS4* 

125-131 

futfleit  Model 

Indefinite  Pronouns.  — Strong  Verbs : fftilt* 

162. 

132  144 

ItCtt  and  Ijdfen  Models  .... 

171. 

MS'1 59 

On  Certain  Adjectives  and  Pronouns 

178. 

160-163 

CONTENTS. 


PAGE 


Yll 


LESSON 


XXVIII. 

XXIX. 

XXX. 

XXXI. 

XXXII. 


XXXIII. 

XXXIV. 

XXXV. 

XXXVI. 

E. 

XXXVII. 

XXXVIII. 

XXXIX. 

XL. 

F. 


Numerals:  — Cardinals  and  Ordinals. — 
Strong  Verbs:  fjitcdjCIt  Model 
Indefinite  Numerals. — Strong  Verbs:  cffcit 

Model 

Derivative  Numerals.  — Time,  Measure, 
Date.  — Strong  Verbs  : ftfylagcit  Model  . 
Adverbs.  — Strong  Verbs:  fatten  Model  . 
Adverbs  (continued):  Formation  and  Com- 
parison.— Table  of  Strong  Verbs  and 
General  Remarks  on  the  same 
Adverbs  (continued) : Idioms.  — Irregular 

Strong  Verbs 

Modal  Auxiliaries 

Modal  Auxiliaries  (continued) : Idioms  . 

Compound  Verbs 

On  Certain  Prefixes 

Reflexive  and  Impersonal  Verbs . • • 

Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive  • • 

Prepositions  (continued) : — Idioms  • • 

Conjunctions.  — Interjections  . . • 

Conjunctions.  — Additional  Remarks  . 


180. 

189. 

196. 

204. 


210. 

217. 
225. 
2 33- 
239- 
246. 
249. 
257. 
264. 
273- 
282. 


PART  II. 

SYNTAX. 

XLI.  Syntax  of  the  Cases.  — Nominative  and 

Genitive 286. 

XLII.  Syntax  of  the  Cases.  — Dative  and  Accusa- 
tive   291. 

XLIII.  Indicative  Mood : Syntax  of  its  Tenses  . 299. 

XLIV.  Subjunctive  and  Conditional  Moods  . . 304. 

XLV.  Imperative  and  Infinitive  Moods.  • .311. 

XLVI.  Infinitive  Mood  (continued)  • . . 318. 

XLVII.  The  Participles 325. 

XLVIII.  Concord  and  Apposition  . . • . 334. 

XLIX.  Apposition  (continued):  Appositive  Ad- 
jectives. — Syntax  of  the  Preposition  . 341. 

L.  Word-Order 348. 

G.  Complex  Sentences.  — Clause-Order  . . 360. 


§§ 

163-167 

1 68-1 8 1 

182-186 
187, 188 


189-194 

195, 196 
197-199 
200-202 
203-208 
209-213 
214-220 
221-224 
225-234 
235-240 
241 


242-247 

248-255 

256-262 

263-268 

269-272 

273-278 

279-284 

285-289 

290,  291 
292-301 
302-306 


CONTENTS. 


Till 

PART  III. 

WORD-FORMATION  AND  HISTORICAL  SKETCH. 

LESSON  PAGE  §§ 

LI.  Word-Formation: — Derivation  and  Composition  364.  307-321 
LII.  Historical  Sketch  of  the  Language,  Grimm’s  Law, 


Umlaut 

• 

374- 

322-326 

APPENDICES. 

A.  Substantives  of  SDIater  Model  with  Umlaut  . 

381. 

17 

B.  Masculine  Monosyllables  of  §Uttb  Model  • 

. 

381. 

22 

C . Feminines  of  @ol)n  Model  .... 

. 

382. 

22 

D . Irregular  Foreign  Substantives  . . . 

• 

382. 

22 

E.  Neuter  Monosyllables  of  §unb  Model  • • 

• 

382. 

22 

F.  Weak  Masculines  not  ending  in  -t  . • 

• 

383- 

57 

G.  Substantives  of  Mixed  Declension 

. 

383- 

61 

G * Double  Plurals  with  Different  Meaning  • 

. 

384- 

64 

H.  Plurals  of  Abstract  Substantives  . 

. 

384- 

66 

7.  Exceptions  to  the  Rules  on  Gender 

. 

385. 80,89,90 

/.  Double  Genders 

K.  Monosyllabic  Adjectives  without  Umlaut  in  Com- 

388. 

9i 

parison 

125 

Z.  Strong  Verbs  not  given  in  the  Lists  • • 

389- 

192 

PAGE 

Exercises  in  Composition 

Abbreviations 

( German-English  .... 
Vocabulary:  1 ^ ^ 

• 

• 

. 405 

i English- German  .... 

• 

# 

. 423 

Index 

INTRODUCTION, 

(For  Reference  only.) 


THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET. 


Characters. 

Name. 

Sound. 

Observe  the  dif- 
ference between 

« a 

ah 

like  a in  father;  never  as  in 
ball,  h at,  care. 

21  and  U. 

© 6 

bay 

as  in  Eng.,  except  at  end  of 
word  or  syll.,  when  pron. 
like  p . 

23  and  23; 
£>,  I),  i)  and 

V. 

a t 

t say 

before  d,  e,  t,  and  ty,  like  ts  ; 
otherwise  like  k;  in  words 
from  French,  before  e and  i, 
like  ss. 

6 and 
c and  e. 

2)  b 

day 

as  in  Eng.,  except  at  end  of  word 
or  syll.,  when  pron.  like  t. 

® and  D, 

<B  t 

ay 

long,  like  a in  game;  short, 
like  e in  p^n ; when  final  or 
in  unaccented  prefixes,  like 
short  d in  Louis#. 

© and  6; 
e and  c. 

§ f 

eff 

as  in  English. 

f and  f. 

© 0 

gay 

always  hard,  before  all  vowels 
and  before  l,  m,  n,  r,  like  g 
in  .give;  at  end  of  words  and 
sylls.,  or  before  other  con- 
sonants, like  Germ.  dE) ; in 
words  from  French,  before  e 
and  i,  like  s in  pleasure. 

© and  0. 

2 


7- 


THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET. 


Characters. 

Name. 

Sound. 

Observe  the  dif- 
ference between 

£ P 

hah 

always  aspirated  before  vowels, 
as  in  hat ; silent  before  con- 
sonants, after  t,  between 
vowels,  and  when  final. 

h,  1 ),  to  and 

V- 

3 i 

ee 

long,  like  e in  he;  short,  like  i 
in  skm. 

3 i 

yot 

like  y in  jyet;  in  words  from 
French,  like  s in  pleasure. 

$ f 

kah 

$ and  9t. 

8 I 

ell 

8ft  m 

em 

3ft  and  23; 
m and  \o. 

81  tt 

en 

'as  in  English. 

32  and  32. 

D o 

V P 
O q 

0 

pay 

koo 

9i  t 

err 

like  Eng.  r with  strong  guttural 
roll ; formed  by  making  the 
tongue  convex,  and  check- 
ing the  breath  by  gently 
pressing  the  middle  of  the 
tongue  against  the  roof  of 
the  mouth. 

31  and 
r and  £. 

<&  fs 

ess 

before  vowels,  like  z in  zone, 
or  s in  dairy ; before  conson- 
ants, and  when  final,  like  s in 
yes;  but  see  fd),  ft,  f!p,  below. 
3 is  used  at  the  end  of  words, 
otherwise  f. 

f and  f. 

THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET. 


3 


Characters. 

Name. 

Sound. 

Observe  the  dif- 
ference between 

2 t 

tay 

as  in  Eng. ; tfy  also  like  t;  ti  in 
foreign  words,  preceding  an- 
other vowel,  like  tse. 

tt  u 

00 

long,  like  oo  in  boot ; short,  like 
oo  in  loot. 

U and  21. 

S3  t> 

fow 

like  Eng. f in  Germ,  words;  in 
foreign  words,  like  Eng.  v . 

23  and  23; 

»/  9,  9- 

SB  to 

vay 

like  Eng.  v,  except  after  \<&)  and 
g,  when  pron.  like  Eng.  w . 

* 5 

iks 

like  ks,  even  when  initial. 

E and  t. 

d 9 

ypsilo?i 

like  the  Germ,  vowel  i ; or 
like  ii. 

3 s 

tset 

like  ts . 

i 

MODIFIED  VOWELS  (UMLAUTS). 


Characters. 

Sound. 

K(«e)  ii 

like  the  Germ,  vowel  e.  (The  forms  2le,  etc., 
are  replaced  by  2f,  etc.,  in  modern  ortho- 
graphy.) 

6(©e)  3 

about  like  u in  murder ; nearly  like  French  eu, 
but  with  lips  rounded  and  nearly  closed. 

U(Ue)  ii 

nearly  like  French  u;  there  is  no  corresponding 
sound  in  Eng.  Pronounced  with  lips  rounded 
and  pointed,  as  for  whistling. 

4 


THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET. 


DOUBLE  VOWELS. 


Characters. 

Sound. 

8la 

aa 

like  long  a (a  in  form). 

(Be 

ee 

“ “ e ( a “ c#re). 

Go 

CO 

“ “ o (never  like  Eng.  oo). 

DIPHTHONGS. 


Characters. 

Sound. 

m 

<£i 

at 

| like  i in  f/re. 

ei 

an 

like  ou  in  hour. 

$u(2ieu)  Uw 

} 

(Bu 

tn 

r like  oy  in  joy. 

it 

like  ie  in  Held  (not  round  at  the  beginning  of 

words) ; in  the  unaccented  sylls.  of  foreign 
words,  i and  e are  pronounced  separately. 

CONSONANTAL  DIGRAPHS  AND  TRIGRAPHS. 


Characters. 

Sound. 

6$  d) 

after  a,  0,  u,  au,  like  ch  in  Scotch  loch; 
softer  after  a,  e,  i,  o,  i\,  au,  eu;  it  does 
not  occur  at  the  beginning,  except  in  for- 
eign words,  where  it  is  pronounced  like  k 
before  a,  o,  u,  and  like  final  cf)  before  e,  i. 
In  French  words  it  has  the  sound  of  sh9 
as  in  French ; when  in  one  syll.  ~ x* 

THE  GERMAN  ALPHABET. 


5 


Characters. 

Sound. 

d 

like  Eng.  ck ; when  divided  between  two 
lines,  is  written  f-f;  not  found  at  begin- 
ning. 

*pf 

ft 

pronounce  both  p and  f distinctly. 

m 

as  in  Eng. ; in  foreign  words  only. 

S# 

% 

like  sh  in  Eng. ; but  when  the  § is  in  a 
distinct  syll.,  pron.  separately. 

Sp 

ft) 

like  soft  slip  in  Eng.  at  the  beginning ; other- 
wise like  sp. 

St 

ft 

like  soft  sht  in  Eng.  at  the  beginning ; other- 
wise like  st. 

If  § 

like  ss;  £ replaces  ff  after  long  vowels  in  the 
middle  of  a word,  and  always  when  final/ 
Hence  guff  (long  u),  gen.  ; but  gluj* 

(short  u),gen.  gluffeS;  and  bet  gen,  bifj,  cje* 
bi[j$n.  Diphthongs  are  always  followed  by 
f$.  Not  found  at  the  beginning. 

like  ts.  It  stands  for  33.  Not  found  at  the 
beginning. 

6 


EXAMPLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION. 


EXAMPLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION. 

Simple  Vowels. 

81  long : gar.  Bat,  fam ; short : fait,  2Jlann,  $amm. 
d long : Be r,  ben,  bem ; short : §err,  benn,  Sett. 

In  formative  sylls.  foil,  by  a consonant  shorter  still: 
genftcr,  Baben,  ©fcl. 

In  final  syll.  not  foil,  by  a consonant,  like  a,  in  Louisa : 
©nbe,  tQabc,  ©abe.  Also  in  prefixes,  as  in  the  first  syll. 
of  gcB«ngen,  gefaHen,  ©ebanfen.  Befallen,  Bebenfen. 

3 long : mir,  bir,  Sfitne ; short : ftiff,  mit.  Bitten. 

C long : £on,  loben,  Bolen ; short : SConne,  fommen,  foil. 

U long : §ut,  bit.  Slut  eg ; short : 2)lutter,  bumrn,  unter. 
long : ©tjnami't,  $oll)'B ; short : SKtjrte,  ©tjfte'm. 

. Double  Vowels  (all  long). 

8la : §aar,  8lal,  ©taat.  | de : $tee,  leer,  Sect. 

Do  ••  Soot,  SJtoog,  Soog. 


Modified  Vowels  (Umlauts). 

§(  long : 33ar,  fame,  ^riigen ; short : B<itte,  $iimme,  fiillt. 

D long : DI,  Sone,  ©triime ; short : fiinnte,  ©otter,  offnen. 
it  long : §iite,  fiir,  libel ; short : §iitte,  fiiHen,  miiffen. 


Diphthongs  (all  long). 


8K  : 3Jlat,  §atn,  3Jiain. 
di  : mein.  Better,  BleiBen. 
Slu : £aut,  Slue,  Blau. 

Siu : §iiute,  33iiume,  lauten. 


du : Beute,  neu,  Scute. 

3e : bie.  Bier,  tief  (in  some 
foreign  words,  pron. 

i-e:  gamtlie, 

Sinie). 


EXAMPLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION. 


7 


Simple  Consonants. 


b final  (=  p) 

r soft  (=  ts) 

fc  final  (=  /) 

r(=g  in  give) 

«](-<*) 

(.  (=  zh  in  French  words)  . 

Ij  mute 

(=  y) 

(=  zh  in  French  words)  . . 


f initial  and  medial  (==  s in 
daiiy)  ....... 

$ final  (=  s in  yes)  . . . . 

t in  foreign  words  before  i 

(=  *) 

in  Germ,  words  (=/)  . . 
in  foreign  words(=  v)  . . 

to  { (=  Ens-  ®)  • • • • ■ 

L (after  fcf)  and  3 = Eng.  w)  . 
£ initial  (=  ks)  . . . . , 

a (=  *)  • • • • . • • • • 


aB,  ©raB,  oB. 

©afar,  ©eremonte,  ©icero. 
3fiab,  2fob,  £ieb. 

gebett,  beginnen,  S£age§. 

£ag,  bog,  giitig,  SJtagb. 
©enie,  ©age,  ^Bage. 

§otje,  Sotje,  $ratje,  fiifpen, 
fafj,  Saljn,  Srfjiire,  Staler, 
SRat(§),  SJtuifl). 

jeber,  jemanb,  3afob. 
3aloufie,  journal. 

f rebe,  murren,  $aar,  ©tern, 
1 ©rbe,  ifkebiger. 

Sonne,  biefer,  Sattel,  §aufer. 
§aul,  biel,  el,  Softer,  lelbat. 

national,  patient, 
bon,  Sater,  Setter. 

■Kobember,  btbtbteren,  2Ibbofat. 
toenn,  toer,  too,  toie. 
©cfytoefter,  fitter,  3toei,3toecf. 
£eryel,  Jenopljon. 
gierbe,  ju,  jtoanjig,  $orn. 


Remark.  — In  the  above  list,  only  those  consonants  are 
given,  which  differ  in  pronunciation  from  their  equivalents 
in  English.  Below  are  given  also  certain  consonantal  com- 
binations, most  of  which  do  not  occur  in  English. 


8 


GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  PRONUNCIATION. 


Consonantal  Digraphs  and  Trigraphs. 

' initial  (=  k) Character,  (Sljor,  Gljrtfi. 

“ (=cf)  guttural)  . . (Sljiru'rg,  Gfjemie'. 

medial  and  final  (guttural)  S a®'  Sot^'  ^ 

; 1 fileid),  it(j,  Sodjer,  SBii^er. 

in  French  words  (=  sh ) . ©jarlatan,  Cjjtcane. 

I (in  same  syll.  = x)  . . SDatfjg,  Ddj8,  £ad)S,  2tdjfe. 

pf ipferb,  pfennig,  Ijityfen. 

’ Stfjaf,  Srfjnee,  Sdf|iff;  but 

pron.  8 separately  when 
.....  . . «{  it  belongs  to  a different 

syll.,  as : §aug=ctjen,  ©cm3* 
cfjen. 

Stanb,  fie^ert,  Stengel,  StuBe. 
fjmren,  Spriidje,  S^iorn. 
miiffen,  fitffen,  laffen,  SOteffe. 


n 

r 


initial  (=  sht  softened)  . 
initial  (=  slip  softened)  . 
(preceding  vowel  short)  . 


medial  (preceding  vowel  long)  grower,  ftofjen,  frajjett. 
final  (preceding  vowel  long)  2Jtaff,  gro§,  gufj  (gen.  gatfjeS). 

final  Inrecedinp-  vowel  shnrD  I (gen‘  M**)/  (gen- 

final  (preceding  vowel  short)  j ^ (gen.  g(uffe§)< 


A.  CENERAL  REMARKS  ON  PRONUNCIATION. 

1.  The  acquisition  of  a correct  and  pure  pronunciation  of 
the  vowels  is  the  most  important  point  to  be  attended  to; 
especially  that  of  the  vowel  a,  which  must  never  have  a shade 
of  the  sound  of  the  Eng.  a in  hat,  b<zll,  or  came.  Look  after 
your  vowels,  and  the  consonants  will  look  after  themselves. 

2.  The  most  difficult  vowel-sounds  are  the  Umlauts , or 
modified  vowels , especially  3 and  ii,  which  must  be  learned 
from  the  teacher. 


QUANTITY  OF  VOWELS. 


9 


3.  The  only  difficult  consonant-sounds  are  1 
r,  with  strong  guttural  roll. 

f,  initial,  and  medial  before  vowels,  which  is  like  s in 
dairy,  or  z in  zone. 
g final  = ss  in  English, 

dj  (and  g final),  which  must  be  learned  from  the 
teacher. 


4.  The  pronunciation  of  the  following  consonants,  though 


not  difficult,  differs  from  the 
ft  final  = p. 
c before  a,  e,  i = ts. 
b final  = t. 

g never  like  g in  gesture, 
g final  see  above. 


English  pronunciation : 
j = y in  yet. 
ft  =/in  Germ,  words, 
ft)  = v,  except  after  and  $. 
j = ts. 


5.  There  are  no  silent  letters  in  German,  except  lj  before 
consonants,  after  t (see  below),  and  between  vowels ; thus  e 
is  never  silent.  Hence  @nb-c,  ©a£)-e  are  dissylls, ; and  g,  f 
in  ©nabe,  ^nabe  must  be  heard. 

B.  QUANTITY  OF  VOWELS, 


Long:  Double  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  always  long. 
Simple  vowels  are  long  before  a single  consonant ; before  a 
consonant  preceded  by  Ij ; when  not  followed  by  a consonant ; 
also  before  and  after  tlj. 

Exceptions  : Articles,  pronouns,  prepositions,  and  other  unaccented 
monosylls.,  also  unaccented  prefixes,  and  inflexional  sylls.  in  e and  i,  have 
the  vowel  short  before  a single  consonant. 

Short:  Vowels  followed  by  a double  consonant  (but  see 
note  2 below),  or  by  more  than  one  consonant,  vowels  of  un- 
accented words  and  prefixes,  and  of  formative  and  terminal 
sylls.,  are  short ; also  most  vowels  before  dj,  and  all  vowels 
before  {dj- 
2 


IO 


ACCENTUATION. 


Exceptions  : Long  vowels  before  several  consonants : Hbler,  eagle ; 
erft,  ‘first’;  ©eburt,  ‘birth’;  §erb,  ‘hearth’;  §erbe,  ‘herd’;  §uften, 
‘cough’;  Softer,  ‘convent’;  frebg,  ‘crab’;  9ftagb,  ‘maid’;  Tftoitb, 
‘moon’;  Tiebft,  ‘besides’;  Dbft,  ‘fruit’;  Oft,  ‘east’;  Oftern,  ‘Easter’; 

‘pope’;  $ferb,  ‘horse’;  ^3robft,  ‘prebendary’;  @(f)ufter,  ‘ shoe- 
maker’; ©cfymert,  ‘sword’;  ftetg,  ‘continually’;  tobt,  ‘dead’  (now 
spelt  tot);  Xx oft,  ‘consolation ’;  $ogt,  ‘ governor  ’ ; 2Bufte,  ‘desert’;  also 
©tabt,  ‘town,’  which  has  the  vowel  short  in  the  sing.,  lengthens  it  in  the 
plur.  ©tabte.  Long  vowels  before  dj : fhtdjett,  ‘to  curse’;  Ijocf),  ‘high’ 
(but  short  in  §od)£eit,  wedding);  ©d)tuad),  ‘disgrace’;  ©prad)e,  ‘speech.* 

Notes. — i.  Long  radical  vowels  remain  long  even  before  two  or  more 
consonants ; thus : loben,  (bit)  lob-ft,  (er)  lob-t,  ge-Iob-t,  all  with  long 
vowel,  according  to  the  quantity  of  the  stem. 

2.  Before  ff  all  vowels  are  short ; before  $ medial,  long ; before  ft 
final,  a,  0,  U are  sometimes  long,  sometimes  short ; e and  i always  short. 

3.  The  vowel  a is  always  long  before  r. 

Exercise  in  Quantity  of  Vowels. 

(Accent  on  first  syll.  of  dissylls.) 

§aare,  9trt,  cffen,  loben,  lobt,  5Krt,  flee,  SBier,  tbutt,  burnrn,  9ftoog, 
Sftcbel,  jOfen,  £)fen,  obr,  of  ter,  nett,  itdfjt,  faitn,  log,  f aljn,  flatter,  dl)nlid), 
£tebe,  fiber,  bfimt,  SDiine,  2oog,  bann,  2)cine,  £)Ijr,  getnorben,  Uljr,  23eere, 
maljrenb,  meljr,  ber,  bag,  eg,  benn,  fern,  gerne,  mnnter,  ©tabt,  ©table, 
©tatt,  ©taat,  33ett,  SBeet,  mfiffen,  gfifte,  gtfiffe,  ftorett,  fteftr,  Ijer,  §eer, 
f amine,  lame. 

C.  ACCENTUATION. 

The  principal  accent  is  on  the  radical  syll.  in  simple  Germ, 
words,  whether  primitive  or  derived. 

Exceptions: — 1.  Substantives  in  -et  have  the  principal  accent  on  the 
termination. 

2.  The  following  adjectives  are  accented  on  the  last  syll.  but  one : 
lebenbig,  roaljrftaftig,  balfamifd),  lutberifcf);  also  verbs  in  -teren. 

3.  Most  foreign  substantives  which  have  undergone  a change  of  form 
are  accented  on  the  last  syll.,  unless  they  end  in  -e,  -cl,  ~tt,  -OX,  when 
they  are  generally  accented  on  the  last  syll.  but  one.  Those  in  -ie  are 
accented  on  the  last  syll.,  except  those  which,  like  ^anttli-e,  ^ragobt-e, 
St omobi-e,  2ini-e,  are  directly  from  the  Latin,  the  t-e  being  pron.  sepa- 
rately. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


II 


NOTES.  — I.  With  these  few  exceptions,  formative  sylls.  are  always 
unaccented. 

2.  In  compound  substantives,  adjectives  and  verbs,  the  first  component 
generally  has  the  principal  accent ; in  other  compounds  (prepositions,  ad- 
verbial conjunctions,  etc.),  generally  the  last  component. 

3.  The  following  prefixes  are  never  accented:  foe-/  CI-,  emj)-,  ent-, 

ge-,  bet-,  $er- 


Exercises  in  Accentuation. 

1.  Simple  words  : 9Mnigung,  (SfyrUdjfeit,  (Sfet,  ginfterniS,  giitig,  foar* 
fant,  ©parfamfeit,  §eimat,  SReidjtum,  reinlid),  SReinlidjfeit,  £ugenb,  tugenb* 
ijaft,  2tr$nei. 

2.  Compound  words : 2ht§gang,  aufftepen,  9htgenb(icf,  entgepen,  Huf* 
entljaft,  aufbdjalten,  SSerbienft,  ©efette,  (Sifenljammer,  merhiuirbig,  IjerauS, 
bineittgeljen,  ©djmaramalb,  baljer,  anfanglid),  SBettelftab,  Sftontag,  SDfttteib, 
auSgegangen. 

3.  Foreign:  ©tubent,  ^rofeffor,  ^vofcfforctt,  SJicloMe,  gamilie,  3n|fru* 
ment,  Wax,  $arbinaf,  Nation,  national,  Uui&erjttdt,  ©ofbat,  marfdjieren, 
religion  Monument,  monumental. 


D.  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Use  of  Capitals.  The  following  words  are  written  with 
capital  letters : 

1.  Words  beginning  a paragraph  or  sentence  (after  a 
period),  and  the  first  word  of  each  line  in  poetry. 

2.  All  substantives  and  words  used  as  such,  as : ber  2Betfe, 
‘ the  wise  man  ’ ; ba3  ©terben,  4 dying/  etc. 

Note.  — Substantives  used  as  adverbs  are  not  written  with  capitals, 
as : morgen§,  abenbs. 

3.  The  personal  pronoun  and  possessive  adjective  of  the 
third  plur.  when  used  in  address. 

Note.  — The  pronouns  of  the  second  person  (sing,  and  plur.)  are  often 
written  with  a capital,  and  must  be  so  in  writing  to  persons. 

4.  Ordinal  numerals  and  pronouns  in  titles,  as : ^rtebrtcfy 
ber  ©rofte,  ‘Frederick  the  Great';  $arl  ber  gftnfte,  ‘Charles 


12 


ADDITIONAL  REMARKS. 


the  Fifth 9 ; £$re  SKajeftfit,  ‘Her  Majesty';  (Seine  ®urcf)a 
laucfyt,  4 His  Serene  Highness.' 

5.  Adjectives  from  names  of  persons,  as : bie  ©oetfyejcfyen 
©ebid^te,  1 Goethe’s  poems.' 

Notes.  — 1.  Adjectives,  with  the  above  exceptions,  are  never  written 
with  capitals,  as:  Jjrcitjjijd),  ‘Prussian’;  cnrjtifrf),  ‘ English.’ 

2.  The  numeral  etit,  ‘one,’  is  sometimes  spelt  with  a capital,  to 
distinguish  it  from  the  indef.  art.  eitt,  4 a,’  4 an.* 

E.  RECENT  CHANGES  IN  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

These  changes  relate  chiefly  to  the  rejection  of  lengthening 
!j  after  t,  which  takes  place  : 

1.  in  derivative  sylls. : ^ortujtum,  Ungetiim,  etc. 

2.  after  t medial  and  final : 2ltem,  9^at,  rot,  Inert,  etc. 

3.  before  diphthongs : 2ier,  teuer,  2eil,  etc. 

4.  before  short  vowels  : !£urm,  etc. 

Note.  — In  the  majority  of  text-books,  the  pupil  will  still  meet  with 
the  old  orthography;  but  in  the  High  School  German  Reader,  and  in 
the  present  senior  author’s  editions  of  texts,  the  (j  is  invariably  rejected 
after  t. 

F.  ADDITIONAL  REMARKS. 

1.  The  use  of  Italics  being  unknown  in  German  print,  an 
emphasized  word  is  printed  with  larger  spaces  between  the 
letters,  as:  icfy  fyabe  rutr  einen  ©ofyn,  ‘I  have  but  one  son/ 

2.  The  double  vowels  never  take  Umlaut ; hence : Stout, 
plur.  3S3te. 

3.  The  modified  vowels  as  capitals  are  always  written 
D,  U,  not  (as  formerly)  %t,  ©e,  Ue. 


THE  GERMAN  SCRIPT. 


& 

SIMPLE  LETTERS. 

0>/j> 

202 

syJ 

202 

2*- 

L/ 

& ^ 

0T 

f r 

f"T 

?/ 

& ^ 

/ r 

14 


THE  GERMAN  SCRIPT. 


UMLAUTS. 

// 


// 


DOUBLE  VOWELS. 


Or. 


DIPHTHONGS. 


Oz 


<y 


/Z/y  //  // 


tf 


<^y  //  /?  <_y  t^y 

yzy/y  ^'tiy/zzzy 


CONSONANTAL  DICRAPHS  AND  TRIGRAPHS. 


THE  GERMAN  SCRIPT. 


15 


Observe  carefully  the  Difference  between  s 

CAPITALS. 

and  % se  and  ^ f and 

••  ^ 


SMALL  LETTERS. 


SPECIMEN  OF  GERMAN  SCRIPT.* 


* These  sentences,  with  the  exception  of  the  last  two,  are  identical 
with  those  of  Ex.  IV.,  A. 


1 6 THE  GERMAN  SCRIPT. 


Remarks.  — i.  Observe  the  angularity  of  the  small  letters. 

2.  Observe  the  manner  in  which  the  letters  are  joined  to 
each  other. 

3.  The  strokes  connecting  the  different  letters  should  be 
made  longer  than  those  connecting  the  different  parts  of  the 
same  letter.  This  is  particularly  necessary  where  several 

9s  or  follow  each  other. 

4.  Never  omit  the  hook  over^^O^  7 which  alone  distin- 


guishes it  from  . 

5.  The  most  difficult  letters  to  make  neatly  are 


GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 


PART  FIRST. 


LESSON  I. 


1.  Present  Indicative  of 
Sing,  id)  babe,  I have 
bu  £;aft,  thou  hast 
er  I;at,  he  has 
fie  bat,  she  has 
e3  bat,  it  has 
Plur . \mx  baben,  we  have 
i^r  babt,  ye  have 
fie  baben,  they  have 


fjnSen,  to  have. 

J;abe  id),  have  I ? 
baft  bu,  hast  thou 
bat  er,  has  he 
bat  fie,  has  she 
bat  e£,  has  it 
babert  totr,  have  we 
babt  ibr,  have  ye 
baben  fie,  have  they 


2.  Rule  i.  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number 
and  person,  as:  icb  babe,  I have;  er  bat,  he  has ; fie  baben,  they 
have. 

2.  Words  used  in  a partitive  sense , i.  e.,  indicating  only  a 
part , not  the  whole,  of  anything,  have  no  article  before  them 
in  German,  and  the  English  some  or  any  remains  untrans- 
lated, as: 


Has  he  (any)  bread  ? I have  (some)  gold. 

£>at  er  33rot?  $$  fyabe  ©olb. 


bread,  33rot 
meat,  gletfcb 
gold,  ©olb 
flour,  -JJtebl 
milk,  2JJUcb 


Vocabulary. 
silver,  ©ilber 
water,  SBaffer 
wine,  SBetn 
and,  unb 
or,  ober 


also,  aucfy 
what,  toa§? 
but,  aber 
yes,  ja 
no,  nein 
not,  nid^t 


i8 


LEtSSON  II, 


I§§3~ 

EXflRCISB  I. 

A . 1.  <gat  er  23rot?  2 . ga,  er  l)at  53rot,  aber  fotr  fyaben 
gleifcfy.  3.  §aben  fie  3JiiId;?  4.  ^ein,  aber  fie  Ijaben  9Jief)l. 
5.  §at  fie  ©otb?  6.  ©ie  tyai  ©olb  unb  fie  I)at  aud)  ©tlber. 
7.  ©r  fyai  SBaffer,  aber  id)  I)abe  SBetn. 

B . 1.  Have  we  any  bread  ? 2.  No,  but  she  has  some 

bread.  3.  Have  they  any  gold  or  silver?  4.  They  have 
some  silver.  5.  Has  he  water  and  wine  ? 6.  He  has  only 

wine ; he  has  not  water.  7.  I have  milk  and  flour,  but  I have 
not  meat. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  I. 

(The  pupils  will  supply  the  answer  to  each  question,  with  books  closed.) 

1.  Was  hat  er?  2.  Was  haben  wir?  3.  Was  haben  sie? 
4.  Was  hat  sie? 


LESSON  II. 

USE  OF  CASES.  - DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

3.  Use  of  the  Cases.  — Every  declinable  word  in 
German  has  two  numbers,  the  Singular  and  the  Plural , 
and  in  each  number  four  cases,  viz. : Nominative,  Genitive, 
Dative,  and  Accusative. 

The  Nominative  is  the  same  as  the  English  Nominative,  or 
Subjective,  and  answers  the  question  who  l or  what?  as: 
Who  (or  what)  is  there  ? The  boy  (the  book). 

The  Genitive  corresponds  to  the  English  Possessive,  or 
Objective  with  of,  and  answers  to  the  question  whose ? oj 
whom  ? or  of  what  ? as : Whose  book  ? The  boy’s  book,  the 
book  of  the  boy. 

The  Dative  corresponds  to  the  Indirect  Object  in  English, 
and  answers  the  question  to  whom  ? as:  To  whom  does  he 
give  the  book  ? He  gives  you  (dat.)  the  book,  he  gives  the 
boy  (dat.)  the  book,  he  gives  it  to  the  boy  (dat.). 


51 


DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


19 


The  Accusative  corresponds  to  the  Direct  Object  in  Eng- 
lish, and  answers  the  question  whom  ? or  what  ? as  : Whom 
(what)  do  you  see?  I see  the  man  (the  house). 


4.  Declension  of  the  Definite  Article. 


Singular. 

Plural . 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  ber 

bie 

ba§ 

bte,  the 

Gen.  beg 

ber 

m 

ber,  of  the 

Dat.  bem 

ber 

bem 

ben,  (to,  for)  the 

Acc.  ben 

bie 

ba§ 

bie,  the 

5.  Rule  i.  The  Definite  Article,  like  every  determinative 
word,  agrees  with  its  substantive  in  Gender,  Number,  and 
Case,  as:  her  9J?ann,  ‘the  man’  (masc.);  bic  grau,  ‘the 
woman ’ (fern.)  ; bag  Stub,  ‘ the  child  ’ (neuter). 

2.  Articles  and  other  determinative  words  should  be  re- 
peated before  each  substantive  in  the  singular,  as : 25er 
2Jlann  unb  bie  $rau  ; ber  Server  unb  ber  ©emitter. 


Vocabulary.* 


(N.  B.  Always  learn  the  definite  article  with  each  German  substantive.) 


dog,  ber  §unb 
boy,  ber  Ifncibe 
teacher,  ber  2e6ver 
teachers,  bie  Server 
scholar,  pupil,  ber  ©djitler 
scholars,  pupils,  bie  ©cfjuler 
stick,  ber  ©tod 
mother,  bie  9J?utter 
pen,  feather,  bie  $eber 


flower,  bie  33Iutne 
horse,  bfl§  ipferb 
book,  ba§  33ucf) 
girl,  ba§  SRabcfien 
girls,  bie  9Rabd)en 
knife,  bas  SRefjer 
knives,  bie  SReffer 
who,  toer  ? 
only,  nut 


* The  article  is  omitted  in  the  English  portions  of  all  Vocabularies, 
being  indeclinable. 


20 


LESSON  III. 


[§§6- 


E XEECISE  II. 

A.  1.  §at  fie  ba§  33udj  ober  bie  $eber?  2.  2Bir  f)aben  b a3 
Sud),  aber  fie  t?at  bie  geber.  3.  ©er  Setter  bat  bie  3Jieffer  ber 
©cbuler.  4.  ©ern  Secret  ber  9J?ab$en.  5.  ©ie  ©c^iiler  E;aben 
ben  £mnb,  abet  fie  Ijaben  nidjt  ba§  $ferb.  6.  %d)  !jabe  ben 
©tocf,  ba§  33uc^  unb  bie  geber ; aber  ber  $nabe  fyai  nur  ba£  33ud) 
unb  bie  geber. 

B . 1.  Have  we  not  the  book  of  the  mother?  2.  We  have 
the  book  of  the  mother.  3.  Have  the  pupils  the  dog  and  the 
horse,  or  have  they  only  the  horse  ? 4.  They  have  the  horse, 
but  they  have  not  the  dog.  5.  Has  the  mother  of  the  girls 
the  flower  ? 6.  She  has  not  the  flower,  but  she  has  the  book 
of  the  girls,  and  they  have  the  pen.  7.  To  the  mother  and 
to  the  teacher. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  II. 

1.  Was  hat  der  Hund?  2.  Wer  hat  den  Hund?  3.  Wer 
hat  Schuler?  4.  Was  haben  die  Lehrer ? 5.  Was  hat  das 

Madchen  ? 6.  Hat  er  den  Stock? 


LESSON  III. 

©defer  model. -imperfect  indicative y liaben,  to  have. 
6.  Declension  of  biefer,  this,  that. 

Singular . PluraL 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUTER.  ALL  GENDERS. 

Norn,  biefer  biefe  biefe£,  this  biefe,  these 

Gen.  biefc0  biefer  biefe$,  of  this  biefer,  of  these 

Dat.  biefem  biefer  biefem,(to,for)this  biefen,  (to,  for)  these 

Acc.  biefen  biefe  biefeS,  this  biefe,  these 

In  the  same  way  decline  jener,  that;  jeber,  every; 
toelcfyer,  which  ? 


7l 


imperfect  of  I)a6en. 


21 


Remark.  — The  accusative  of  declinable  words  differs 
in  form  from  the  nominative  in  the  masculine  singular  only. 


7.  Imperfect  Indicative  of  fyabett,  to  have. 


Sing.  id)  fyatte,  I had 

bu  tyattcfi,  thou  hadst 
er  Ijattc,  he  had 
fie  fyatte,  she  had 
e3  fyatte,  it  had 
Plur.  fair  fatten,  we  had 
ifyr  fyattei,  ye  had 
fie  fatten,  they  had 


Ijatte  id),  had  I ? 
fyatteft  bu,  hadst  thou 
Ijaite  er,  had  he 
fyatte  fie,  had  she 
^atte  e£,  had  it 
fatten  fair,  had  we 
fyattet  il)r,  had  ye 
fatten  fie,  had  they 


Vocabulary. 


brother,  her  33ruber 
garden,  ber  ©arten 
gardens,  bie  ©iirten 
bone,  ber  $nod)en 
bones,  bie  $no$en 
reader,  ber  Sefer 
readers,  bie  Sefer 
man,  ber  9Jicmn 
son,  ber  ©oI)n 
father,  ber  93ater 


woman,  bie  $rau 
sister,  bie  ©d)toefter 
daughter,  bie  £od)ter 
daughters,  bie  $i)d)ter 
newspaper,  bie  3e^un8 
house,  ba§  £)au£ 
two,  gtoei 
three,  brei 
four,  bier 


EXERCISE  III. 

A.  1.  $d)  fyattebiefe  3^iiung.  2.  ®ief er  §unb  !)atte  $nod&en. 

3.  2)iefer  Sef)rer  fyat  bier  ©cfyiiler,  aber  jerter  Setter  [;at  nur 
brei.  4.  ®er  Sruber  biefer  grau  £^atte  fene§  £>au3,  unb  er  fyatte 
au d)  jene  ©arten.  5.  33uc^  hat  Sefer.  6.  2Beld)e3  93ud) 

fatten  biefe  SKabcfjen?  7.  S)er  ©d)toefter  itnb  bent  Srutfer. 

B.  1.  Which  newspaper  had  the  father  of  these  girls? 

2.  The  dog  had  these  bones,  but  he  had  not  this  stick.  3. 
Which  stick  has  this  man  ? 4.  Which  man  has  this  stick  ? 

5.  This  father  had  three  daughters,  but  that  woman  had  only 


22 


LESSON  IV. 


two.  6.  The  son  of  that  woman  had  this  dog  and  horse.  7.  We 
had  the  book  of  those  p-upils.  8.  To  the  brother  of  those  girls. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  III. 

1.  Welches  Madchen  hatte  die  Zeitung?  2.  Welches  Buch 
hatten  die  Madchen  ? 3.  Wer  hatte  das  Buch  dieser  Schuler  ? 

4.  WelcJ^^Feder  hatte  dieser  Knabe?  5.  Welchen  Hund 
hatte  "Jener  Mann  ? 6.  Was  hat  dieser  Lehrer? 


LESSON  IV. 

SMn  MODEL-INDEFINITE  ARTICLE-PRESENT  AND 
IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  OF  fetlt,  to  be. 


8.  Declension  of  mein,  my. 


Singular . 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  mein 

meinc 

mein 

meine,  my 

Gen.  tneineS 

meiner 

meincS 

meiner,  of  my 

Dat.  meinern 

meincr 

meinern 

meinen,  (to,  for)  my 

Acc.  meinen 

meine 

mein 

meine,  my 

9.  The  following  words  are  declined  like  mein:  feirt, 4 no 9 ; 
fein,  ‘his,  its’;  ifyr,  ‘her,  its,  their’;  unfer,  ‘our.’ 


The  indefinite  article  ein,  eine,  ein 
same  way,  but  has  no  plural,  thus : 

is  also  declined 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

Nom.  ein 

eine 

ein 

Gen.  eine£ 

einer 

eine§ 

• Dat.  einem 

einer 

einem 

Acc.  einen 

eine 

ein 

Remark.  — This  model  differs  from  the  biefer  model  only 
in  having  no  distinctive  ending  in  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  and 
neuter,  or  in  the  acc.  neuter.  Thus,  while  we  say  biefer 


13] 


23 


PRESENT  AND  IMPERFECT  OF 


•JJtarm,  but  biefe£  93x1$,  we  say  etn  (fein,  mein,  etc.)  9JJamt, 
and  also  r in  (fein,  etc.)  33ucfy. 


10.  Present  and  Imperfect 
Present. 

Sing.  tcf)  bin,  I am 

bu  tuft,  thou  art 
er  ift,  he  is 
fie  ift,  she  is 
e3  ift,  it  is 

Plur.  fair  finb,  we  are 
ifyr  fetb,  ye  are 
fie  finb,  they  are 
bin  \S),  am  I ? etc. 


DicATivEjOF  feitt,  to  be. 

Pmperfect. 

\§  toar,  I was 
bu  toarft,  thou  wast 
er  to  ax,  he  was 
fie  toar,  she  was 
e§  toar,  it  was 
toir  toaren,  ye  were 
if?r  toaret,  ye  were 
fie  toaren,  they  were 
toar  id),  was  I ? etc. 


11.  Time  before  Place.  Rule.  — In  German  sen- 
tences, expressions  of  time  always  precede  those  of  place , as  : 

This  man  was  here  to-day. 

®iefer  Tlann  toar  fyeute  Ijier. 

12.  Place  of  the  Negative  Rule.  — The  nega- 

tive nid)t  precedes  that  member  of  the  sentence  which  it 
negatives.  Hence : r 

@r  toar  geftern  nicfji  fyier,  he  was  not  here  yesterday. 


13.  Agreement  of  Pronouns.  Rule.  — Pronouns 
agree  in  gender,  number  and  person  with  the  substantive 
to  which  they  refer,  as  : 

$>er  §ut  (masc.)  ift  nicf;t  groj$,  er  ift  flein, 

the  hat  is  not  large,  it  is  small ; but 

bte  ^eitung  (fem.)  ift  nid)t  gro£,  fie  ift  flein, 

the  newspaper  is  not  large,  it  is  small. 

The  English  pronoun  it  must  therefore  be  rendered  by  er 
when  it  refers  to  a masc.  substantive,  by  fie  when  it  refers  to 
a fem.,  and  by  c£  when  it  refers  to  a neuter. 


24 


LESSON  IV. 


[§§  14- 


14.  Observe  : In  the  sentence  * the  boy  is  good/  good  is 
a predicative  adjective. 

Rule.  — Predicative  Adjectives  are  not  declined. 

15.  A substantive  following  the  verb  to  be  is  of  course 
subject , not  object,  and  must  therefore  be  put  in  the  ?iominative, 
and  not  in  the  accusative,  as : (£r  iff  cut  (not  eincn)  3Jiann,  he 
is  a man. 

Vocabulary. 

^ friend,  bet  ftreunb 
gentleman,  ber  §err 
bird,  ber  33ogel 

carriaSe’  I ber  2Bagett 
wagon,  ) 

carriages,  bie  SBagert 

city,  bic  ©tabt 

dress'  Itosflleib 
garment,  ) 

weather,  baS  2Better 

old,  alt 

pleasant,  agreeable,  angenefym  to-day,  fyeute 
great,  large,  big,  tall,  grof$  still,  yet,  nod)  (referring  to  time) 
for,  benn 

EXERCISE  IV. 

A.  1.  @in  33ater  unb  fein  $inb  finb  jetjt  bier.  2.  Sine  Gutter 
unb  iljr  $inb  toaren  geftern  bier.  3.  9Kein  SBruber  fein  33ud), 
aber  er  l)at  ein  SD?effer.  4.  Unfer  $reunb  mar  ber  Sefyrer  biefer 
©c^lifer.  5.  ®iefe  $rau  ift  meine  ©$toefter,;imb  fte  ift  aud)  bte 
•JJtutter  biefer  2Rabd)en.  6.  2Bir  finb  flein,  aber  fie  finb  grofe. 
7.  Unfer  Secret  ift  mube,  benn  feme  ©cfyuler  toaren  fefyr  trage.  8. 
Unfere  ©tabt  ift  feljr  fefyon,  aber  fie  ift  ni$t  fe^r  grofc.  9.  2Jieinem 
SSater  unb  tneiner  2Jlutier. 


pretty,  fyubfd? 
cold,  fait 
small,  little,  flein 
tired,  rrtiibe 
beautiful,  fine,  fefyon 
strong,  fiarf 
idle,  trage 
warm,  inarm 
windy,  ioinbig 
very,  very  much,  fe^r 
yesterday,  ge'ftern 


J7] 


declension:  — 3KaIcr  model. 


25 


B.  1.  I am  the  sister  of  those  girls.  2.  Where  are  my 
books  and  newspaper  ? 3.  Our  brother  and  his  dog  are  big 

and  strong,  but  our  sister  and  her  bird  are  small  and  pretty. 
4.  Which  gentleman  was  here  yesterday  ? 5.  The  friend  of 

our  brothers  was  here  to-day,  but  he  was  not  here  yesterday. 
6.  My  sister  had  her  book,  but  she  had  not  her  pen.  7.  Our 
father  and  mother  have  still  their  carriage,  but  they  have 
no  horse.  8..  The  weather  was  cold  and  windy,  but  it  is 
now  warm  and  pleasant.  9.  To  my  brother  and  sister. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  IV. 

1.  Wo  ist  unsere  Mutter?  2.  Wann  war  sie  liier?  3.  Wer 
war  gestern  hier?  4.  Was  ist  .sein  Vater  ? 5.  Wer  ist  die 

Mutter  dieser  Schuler?  6.  Wer  sind  diese  Madchen? 


LESSON  V. 

DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES : — MODEL, 

OR  -I,  -nt,  — It,  -r  STEMS. 

16.  Declension  of  her  9Mer,  the  painter. 


Singular . 


Plural . 

bte  SRaler,  the  painters 


Nom.  ber  Sftaler,  the  painter 
Gen.  be§  9JiaIer§,  the  painter's, 
of  the  painter 

Dat.  bem  dialer,  (to,  for)  the 
painter 

Acc.  ben  -JJtaler,  the  painter 

Observe  : The  only  changes  are  additional  -£  in  the  gen, 
sing.,  and  -it  in  the  dat.  pi. 


ber  ^Dialer,  the  painters', 
of  the  painters 
ben  Sftalern,  (to,  for)  the 
painters 

bie  SDcaler,  the  painters 


1 7.  In  the  same  way  are  declined : 


26 


LESSON  V. 


1.  Masc.  and  neuter  substantives  ending  in  -cl,  -Cttt,  -Ctt, 
-er,  and  diminutives  in  -djeit  and  — letlt  (these  last  being 
always  neuter). 

2.  Neuters  beginning  with  ©e-  and  ending  in  -C,  as : ba<3 
©emdlbe,  the  painting. 

3.  Two  feminines  : bte  Gutter,  the  mother,  and  bie  ©ocfyter, 
the  daughter. 

4.  ©er  $dfe,  the  cheese. 

(a)  But  many  masculines  with  fl,  d,  U in  the  root,  the  two 
feminines  Gutter  and  ©od;ter,  and  one  neuter,  ba3  Softer, 
‘the  convent/  take  also  Umlaut  (modified  vowel)  in  the 
plural,  as : — 

Sing.  n.  d.  a.  ©ruber,  g.  ©ruberS ; Plur . n.  g.  a.  ©ruber, 
d.  ©rubertt. 

( b ) Substantives  in  -n  do  not  add  n in  the  dat.  plur.,  as: 
Sing.  N.  d.  a.  ^idbcben,  g.  afldb$en£ ; Plur . n.  g.  d.  a. 

3fldbd;en. 

(c)  In  feminine  substantives  all  cases  are  alike  in  the  sing. 
Hence,  ^flutter  and  ©ocfyter  are  thus  declined : 

Sing.  n.  g.d.a.  Gutter;  Plur.  n. g. a.  Gutter,  d.  afliittern. 
Sing.  n. g.d.a.  ©ocfder;  Plur.  n.g.  a.  ©iicfyter,  d.  ©od;tern. 

Further  examples : 

©er  ©ogel,  the  bird : Sing.  n.  d.  a.  ©ogel,  g.  ©ogelS ; Plur . 
n.g. a.  ©ogel,  d.  ©ogeln. 

©er  ©Bagert,  the  carriage : Sing.  n.  d.  a.  JBctgert,  g.  23agen3; 
Plur.  n.  g.  d.  a.  2®agen. 

©a3  $enfter,  the  window : Sing.  n.  d.  a.  genfter,  g.  genfterS; 
Plur.  n.  g.  a.  genfter,  d.  genftern. 

©aS  ©emdlbe,  the  painting:  Sing.  n. d. a.  ©emdlbe,  G. 
©emalbeS ; Plur.  n.  g.  a.  ©emdlbe,  d.  ©emdlbetu 


18] 


declension  : — Staler  model. 


2 7 


Decline  with  Umlaut : ber  33ater,  the  father ; ber  ©cfitoager, 
the  brother-in-law ; ber  the  apple ; ber  ©arten,  the 

garden  ; ber  SUantel,  the  cloak. 

Note.  — For  a complete  list  of  Substantives  of  this  declension  that 
take  Umlaut  in  the  plur.,  see  App.  A. 

Decline  without  Umlaut:  ber  Setter,  the  teacher;  ber 
©dfntfer,  the  scholar;  ber  3(bler,  the  eagle;  ba§  9Jteffer,  the 
knife;  ber  ©ommer,  the  summer;  ber  ©inter,  the  winter; 
ber  £)nfel,  the  uncle. 

Note.  — The  preposition  in  is  contracted  with  the  dat.  sing.  masc. 
and  neut.  of  the  def.  art.,  when  not  emphasized,  thus:  in  bem  = int ; in 
bem  ©arten,  contr.  im  ©arten ; iit  bent  SSaffer,  contr.  im  SBaffer. 

18.  Rule  of  Construction.  — If  the  verb  is  in  a simple 
tense,  the  predicate  adjective  comes  at  the  end. 


Vocabulary. 


tree,  ber  Sgum 

fire,  ba3  getter 

spring,  ber  grilling 

autumn,  ber  £>erbft 

stove,  ber  Dfen 

diligent,  industrious,  fleifng 

poor,  arm 

hot,  bei$ 

ill,  fran! 

rich,  reid^ 


ripe,  retf 

weak,  fdEjhmcfy 

satisfied,  ) - . . 

\ Mufnebett 
contented,  ) 

quickly,  fdEjnett 

not  at  all,  gar  ni$t 

not  yet,  nod)  nidjt 

with,  mit  (gov.  dat.) 

in,  in  (gov.  dat.) 

whose,  toeffen? 


EXERCISE  V. 

A.  1.  2)ie  Safer  biefer  9Jtabcf)en  ioaren  mitbe.  2.  ©§  tnar 
geftern  fait,  aber  ftnr  fatten  fein  getter  im  £)fen.  3.  35ie  ©e* 
ntalbe  biefe^  9Jtaler3  finb  gar  nid^t  fd;on.  4.  Uttfere  ©arten  finb 
fdEjon,  benn  ba3  ©etter  iff  inarm.  5.  3)ie  SJlutter  biefer  ©dottier 
inar  arm.  6.  9Jtit  ben  gliigeln  biefer  SSbgel.  7.  2)ie  ©confer 


28 


LESSON  VI. 


[§§  19 


biefeS  2efyrer§  toaren  Iran!.  8.  $ie  2Jl8nteI  metner  Stod^ter  firib 
alt.  9.  SDie  ©drten  in  biefer  Stab t finb  fe^r  fcfydn. 

j B.  1.  The  father  of  this  girl  was  my  teacher.  2.  Our 
father  and  mother  are  old  and  weak.  3.  The  gardens  of  my 
brother-in-law  are  very  beautiful,  but  his  carriages  are  not  at 
all  beautiful.  4.  My  uncle  is  not  at  all  satisfied  with  his 
daughters.  5.  These  apples  are  not  yet  ripe.  6.  The 
teacher  of  these  pupils  was  not  very  rich.  7.  With  the  wings 
of  this  bird.  8.  The  weather  is  hot  in  the  summer,  but  it  is 
cold  in  the  winter.  9.  The  eagle  is  a bird. 


1.  Wann  ist  das  Wetter  kalt?  2.  Mit  welchen  Schtilern 
sind  die  Lehrer  zufrieden  ? 3.  In  wessen  Haus  sind  die 

Briider  dieses  Madchens?  4.  Wo  waren  sie  im  Herbst  ? 5. 

Sind  diese  Madchen  trage  oder  fleiszig  ? 6.  Ist  die  Blume 

schon  ? 


LESSON  VI. 

PRESENT  AND  IMPERFECT  OF  ttJCrbnt,  to  become.  — CON- 
STRUCTION OF  PRINCIPAL  SENTENCES. 

19.  Present  and  Imperfect  of  focrben,  to  become. 


ORAL  EXERCISE  V. 


Present  Indicative . 


Present  Subjunctive . 


plur.  fair  toerbcn,  we  become 


Sing,  i toerbe,  I become 


ifyi  toerbct,  ye  become 
fie  teerbeit,  they  become 


bu  ftirft,  thou  becomest 
er  toirb,  he  becomes 


idE)  toerbe 
bu  toerbeft 
er  toerbe 
fair  toerben 
tfyr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


20] 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  PRINCIPAL  SENTENCES.  2( } 


Imperfect  Indicative . 


Imperfect  Subjunctive • 


*SV>^.  t$  tourbe  or  tuarb,  I became  t$  toiirbe 

bu  tt>urbeft  or  toarbft,  thou  becamest  bu  foiirbeft 
er  tourbc  or  toarb,  he  became  er  toiirbe 
Plur . fair  tmirben,  we  became  frur  toiirben 

il)r  tourbet,  ye  became  xfyr  toiirbet 

fte  tourben,  they  became  fie  tr>iirben 


Observe:  i.  the  persistent  e in  the  subjunctive  endings; 

2.  the  Umlaut  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive; 

3.  the  second  form  (toarb,  etc.)  in  the  singular  only  of  the 
imperfect  indicative. 


20.  Construction  of  Principal  Sentences.  — Place 
of  Verb  and  Subject. 

Rule.  — In  principal  sentences  containing  a statement,  the 
verb  is  the  second  idea  in  the  sentence,  as : 

SUBJECT.  VERB.  PREDICATE.  SUBJECT.  VERB.  PREDICATE. 

3$  fiiit  f)ter.  iff  frctnf. 

I am  here.  He  is  ill. 

Observe:  i.  The  verb  is  the  second  idea,  not  necessarily 
the  second  word , in  the  sentence.  Thus  the  subject  with  its 
attributes  and  enlargements  constitutes  but  one  idea,  as : 

1 2 3 

SUBJECT  AND  ATTRIBUTE.  VERB.  ADVERB. 

£er  3?ater  btefe3  Server*  tear  Ijier. 

2.  The  subject  (or  subjects)  with  attributes  and  enlarge- 
ments may  come  either  in  the  first  or  in  the  third  place,  as  : 

SUBJECT.  VERB.  ADVERB.  ADVERB.  VERB.  SUBJECT. 

3$  bin  Ijier;  or:  §ier  bin  id). 

3.  The  predicate  adjective  is  placed  last,  when  the  verb  is  in 
a simple  tense,  as  : 


30 


LESSON  VI. 


[§  20 


I am  satisfied  with  my  daughters. 

$dj  bin  mit  nteinen  £5cf)tern  jufricbctt. 

Remarks.  — i.  Any  other  member  of  the  sentence  may 
occupy  the  first  place,  but  in  that  case  the  subject  is  thrown 
after  the  verb,  which  still  occupies  the  second  place.  Thus  : 

ADV.  PHRASE.  VERB.  SUBJECT.  PREDICATE. 

$ru£;ling  finb  bte  ©iirtcn  fcfyon. 

2.  In  English,  on  the  contrary,  the  subject  precedes  the 
verb,  which  is,  in  such  cases,  in  the  third  place,  as : 

ADV.  PHRASE.  SUBJECT.  VERB.  PREDICATE. 

In  the  spring  the  gardens  are  beautiful. 

3.  This  fixed  position  of  the  verb  as  the  second  idea  in  every 
German  principal  sentence  should  never  be  forgotten . 

4.  The  conjunctions  unb,  aber,  ober,  benn  do  not  count  as 
members  of  the  sentence. 


Vocabulary. 


sleigh,  ber  ©dE)litten 
thunder-storm,  ba§  ©eft>iiter 
attentive,  aufmerffam 
green,  grim 
new,  neu 
young,  jung 

inattentive,  unaufmerffam 
unpleasant  ) u„  ^ 
disagreeable,  ) 


dissatisfied,  unjufriebert 
after,  ncicfy  (with  dat.) 
therefore,  on  that  account, 
be£l)alb 
never,  me 
so,  fo 

why,  toarurn  ? 
again,  toieber 
well,  toofyl 


EXERCISE  VI. 

A . 1.  9iadE)  bent  ©emitter  tourbe  ba§  SSetter  fd£)on  unb  toarm. 
2.  ©eftern  tourben  nteine  Gutter  unb  il)re  ©cfytoefter  franf,  aber 
je^t  finb  fie  toofyl.  3.  ©ein  3Sater  Ijat  ein  §au3  unb  einen 
©arten  unb  er  fyat  au$  2Bagen  unb  ©d;litten.  4.  SBetter 


C 


20]  CONSTRUCTION  OF  PRINCIPAL  SENTENCES.  3 1 

toarb  geftern  uttangenefym  unb  Unrtbtg ; aber  e3  ift  fyeute  toteber 
ganj  \d)'6n  unb  Inarm.  5.  3)er  Setter  tnirb  unjufrieben,  benn 
feme  ©cfyiiler  toerbert  unaufmerffam.  6.  S3  arum  toirb  unfer 
S5ater  je$t  fo  fdfiuad;?  7.  6r  totrb  fefyr  alt,  unb  totrb  bef$alb 
aucf)  fdfiuad;.  8.  Unfere  SJtutter  ift  nid^t  jung,  aber  fie  ift  nodj 
fcfyon.  9.  S3aren  bie  93rliber  biefer  Seljrer  in  ^Berlin  ober  in 
Hamburg  ? 10.  ©ie  toaren  in  Hamburg,  aber  fie  toaren  nie  in 
Berlin. 

B.  1.  The  brother  of  these  pupils  became  our  teacher.  2. 
Teachers  often  become  dissatisfied  with  their  pupils.  3.  In 
the  spring  our  garden  becomes  beautiful.  4.  Our  brothers- 
in-law  were  in  Paris ; they  are  now  in  London.  5.  This  tree 
becomes  green  very  quickly.  6.  The  pupils  of  this  teacher 
became  very  attentive.  7.  My  daughters  are  not  contented 
with  their  cloaks.  8.  In  the  autumn  (the)*  apples  become  ripe. 
9.  The  father  of  these  girls  becomes  old  and  weak.  10.  With 
the  feathers  of  an  eagle.  11.  We  became  rich,  but  he  became 
poor.  12.  The  eagle  is  a bird ; it  is  large  and  strong.  13. 
The  cloaks  of  those  girls  were  new,  but  now  they  are  getting 
(say : become)  old. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  VI. 

1.  Wer  ist  in  dem  Schlitten  ? 2.  Wer  hat  das  Messer 

ihres  Onkels?  3.  Wann  waren  seine  Brtider  in  Hamburg? 
4.  Wann  werden  die  Apfel  reif  ? 5.  Wird  der  Baum  im 

Sommer  grim  ? 6.  Wann  wird  das  Wetter  kalt  ? 


* Words  in  ( ) are  omitted  in  English,  but  not  in  German;  words  in  £ J 
are  omitted  in  German,  but  not  in  English. 


33 


LESSON  VII. 


t§§  21- 


LESSON  VII. 


DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES MODEL. 
QUESTION  ORDER. 


21. 


Declension  of 


( bet  ©oljn,  the  son; 
1 ber  §uttb,  the  dog. 


(a)  With  Umlaut  in  the  plural : 


Singular. 

Nom.  ber  ©ofyn,  the  son 
Gen.  be§  ©ofyn(c)8,  the  son's, 
of  the  son 

Dat.  bem  ©ol)n(c),  (to,  for) 
the  son 

Acc.  ben  ©oljn,  the  son 


Plural. 

bte  ©iifyne,  the  sons 
ber  ©fifyne,  the  sons',  of  the 
sons 

ben  ©ofmen,  (to,  for)  the  sons 
bte  ©otme,  the  sons 


Observe  : i.  The  -c§  of  the  gen.,  and  -e  of  dat.  sing. 

2.  The  Umlaut  and  -e  of  the  plur. 

3.  The  additional  -n  of  the  dat.  plur. 

4.  The  -t  may  be  dropped  in  the  dat.  sing.,  and  (except 
after  sibilants)  in  the  gen  sing.,  but  is  usually  retained  in 
monosyllables. 


( [l fi)  Without  Umlaut : 
Singular. 

Nom.  ber  §unb,  the  dog 
Gen.  be§  §unb(c)§/  the  dog's, 
of  the  dog 

Dat.  bem  £unb(c),  to  the  dog 
Acc.  ben  §unb,  the  dog 


Plural. 

bte  §unbe,  the  dogs 
ber  §unbc,  the  dogs',  of  the 
dogs 

ben  §unben,  (to,  for)  the  dogs 
bte  §unbe,  the  dogs 


22.  In  this  way  are  declined  : 

1.  Most  masculine  monosyllables:  generally  add  Umlaut 
(see  App.  B.) 


23] 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  DIRECT  QUESTIONS. 


33 


2.  Masculines  in  -at,  -id),  -tg,  -ittg,  -ling : never  add 
Umlaut. 

3.  Many  feminine  monosyllables  with  a,  It,  or  att  in  the 
root : always  add  Umlaut  (for  list,  see  App.  C.) 

4.  Substantives  in  -ni£  and  -fat : never  add  Umlaut. 

5.  Many  neuter  monosyllables  (all  those  in  -r) : never 
add  Umlaut,  except  Gfyor,  Soot  (Sote  or  Soote)  App.  E. 

6.  Foreign  masculines,  with  accent  on  last  syll.,  in  -at, 
-att,  -at:  generally  without  Umlaut;  in  -aft,  with  Umlaut; 
in  -icr,  -ait,  -at,  and  foreign  neuters  in  -at : never  with  Um- 
laut (for  exceptions,  see  App.  D.) 

Further  examples : 

SDie  £>anb,  the  hand:  Sing.  n.g. d.  a.  §anb ; Plur.  n. g.  a 
£mnbe,  d.  £tinben. 

(Observe  again:  Feminines  have  all  cases  of  the  sing,  alike.) 

23egrabni§,  the  burial,  funeral : Sing.  n.  a.  23egrabni§, 
g.  SBegrcibniffcS,  d.  S3egrdbnif(fe) ; Plur.  n.  g.  a.  SBegvabmffc, 
d.  33egrdbnif|cu. 

(Observe  the  doubling  of  the  final  -8  when  a termination  is  added.) 

3)er  IRonat,  the  month : Sing.  n.  a.  Sftonat,  g.  2Ronat(c)l, 
d.  Sftonat(c) ; Plur.  n.  g.  a.  SRonatc,  d.  3Jionaten. 

5Da§  gal;r,  the  year : Sing.  n.  a.  galjr,  g.  $jafyi(e)S,  d.  ^af)r(c) ; 
Plur.  n.  g.  a.  lyafue,  d.  ^at;rcu. 

®er  Sfpfelbautn,  the  apple-tree : Sing.  n.  a.  2fpfeI6aum,  g. 
2fpfelbaum(e)§,  d.  2tpfelbaum(e)  ; Plur.  n.  g.  a.  2lpfelbaume,  d. 
21pfelbaumcit. 

(Observe  that  in  compounds  only  the  last  component  is  varied,  and  is 
declined  as  when  standing  alone). 

23.  CONSTRUCTION  OF  DIRECT  QUESTIONS. 

Examples : 

12  12 

1.  Has  the  dog  meat?  2.  Which  man  is  old? 

£>at  ber^unb  gdetfd)?  2Belcf;er  2)fann  if t aft  ? 


34 


LESSON  VII. 


[§  23 

12  12  8 

3.  Who  is  in  the  garden?  5.  What  has  the  teacher  ? 

2Ber  ift  inbem©arten?  22a§  l)at  ber  Setter? 

12  8 12  8 

4.  Where  is  my  father  ? 6.  When  was  the  pupil  here  ? 

2Bo  ift  mein2$ater?  2 Bann  toar  ber  ©dealer  Ijier  ? 

Observe  from  these  examples  : 

1.  That  the  construction  of  Direct  Interrogative  Sentences 
is  exactly  the  same  in  German  as  in  English,  as  far  as  the 
position  of  Verb  and  Subject  is  concerned. 

2.  That  in  both  languages  the  question-word  always  begins 
the  sentence. 

Vocabulary. 


(An  Asterisk  (*)  after  a word  signifies  that  the  plural  has  Umlaut.) 


Tuesday,  SMens'tag 

enemy,  bcr  geinb 

finger,  ber  finger 

Friday,  ^ret'iag 

foot,  ber  gatft  * 

general,  ber  ©erteral' 

young  man,  youth,  ber  $>ung'ltng 

emperor,  ber  $atfer 

acquirements,  bie  ^enntniffe 

king,  ber  Sonig 

Wednesday,  ber  TOitt'tood) 

Monday,  ber  SffJon'tag 

officer  (military)  ber  Dfftjter' 

town,  city,  bic  ©tabt* 

Sunday,  ber  ©onn'tag 

Saturday,  * ©onn'abenb, 

* '(  or  ©amS  tag 


marsh,  swamp,  ber 
day,  ber  STag 
carpet,  ber  £e!ppidB 
curtain,  ber  SSor^ang  * 
week,  bie  2 2o$e 
room,  ba§  ftimmx 
thirty,  brei^ig 
five,  flinf 
long,  lang 
new,  neu 

magnificent,  J>ra$ftg 
red,  xot 
seven,  fteben 
white,  tt>et^ 
where,  too? 
twelve,  gtoolf 


§23] 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  DIRECT  QUESTIONS. 


35 


EXERCISE  VII. 

A . 1.  6in  Satyr  tyat  jtoolf  9ftonate  unb  in  jebem  3Jlonat  ftnb 
breijng  2;age.  2.  SDie  §dnbe  biefer  3Kabctyen  fxnb  Hein.  3.  3)ie 
©drten  tn  biefert  ©tabten  tourben  im  grueling  fctyon.  4.  ©ie 
Sage  ftnb  im  Sommer  laitg,  aber  im  SBinter  merben  fie  !urj  unb 
fait.  5.  5Die  9Jiuiter  meine3  greunbe£  foar  geftem  in  ber  ©tabt. 
6.  Sie  $enntniffebe§  SetyrerSfinb  grcjs.  7.  2)ie  SSortyange  btefeS 
3immer§  ftnb  toeift,  aber  bie  Sepptctye  ftnb  rot.  8.  SDie  ©ctyioager 
biefer  Dfftjiere  ftnb  ©enerale. 

B . 1.  The  horses  and  dogs  of  this  young  man  are  hand- 
some. 2.  We  have  two  feet  and  two  hands,  and  each  hand 
has  five  fingers.  3.  The  emperor  and  the  king  were  enemies, 
but  now  they  are  friends.  4.  These  trees  are  old,  but  they 
are  still  beautiful.  5.  The  curtains  and  carpets  in  this  room 
are  new  and  magnificent.  6.  Every  week  has  seven  days: 
Sunday,  Monday,  Tuesday,  Wednesday,  Thursday,  Friday, 
Saturday.  7.  The  sons  are  tall,  but  the  father  is  not  quite 
so  tall.  8.  The  funeral  of  the  king  was  magnificent.  9.  My 
father  has  two  apple-trees  in  his  garden.  10.  Where  are  the 
frogs  ? In  the  spring  they  are  in  the  marshes. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  VII. 

1.  Wo  waren  die  Briider  seiner  Mutter  gestern  ? 2.  Sind 

die  Vorhange  weisz  oder  rot?  3.  Was  hat  sein  Vater  im 
Garten?  4.  Wer  war  gestern  in  der  Stadt?  5.  Wessen 
Schwager  sind  Offiziere?  6.  Welche  sind  die  Tage  der 
Woche? 


3<S 


LESSON  VIII. 


[§24 


LESSON  VIII. 

CONJUGATION  OF  tjnliett,  to  have.  - PLACE  OF 
PARTICIPLE  AND  INFINITIVE. 

24.  Paradigm  of  Ijnlicn,  to  have. 

Principal  Parts. 

Pres.  Infin.  fyabett  Impf.  Indic.  I;  a tie  Past  Part.  geljabt 


Indicative. 

icfl  fiabe,  I have 
bu  I)  aft,  tliou  hast 
er  f)at,  he  has 
totr  tjabcn,  we  have 
iE>r  fiabt,  ye  have 
fie  fyabeit,  they  have 


Present. 


Subjunctive. 

icf'  I'iil'C,  I (may)  have,  etc. 

bu  I)abejt_ 

er  f)abe 

toir  fiabett 

ifr  f)abcF~ 

fie  fiaben 


td^  Ijatfe,  I had 
bu  fiattcji,  thou  hadst 
er  Ijatte,  he  had 
loir  flatten,  we  had 
tfir  fiattct,  ye  had 
fie  flatten,  they  had 


Imperfect. 

id)  biitte,  I had  (might  have), 
bu  fitttteft  [etc. 

er  fiatte 
hrir  fatten 
ibr  fiiittet 
fie  flatten 
Perfect. 

(Pres,  of  tjaben  + P.  Patt.) 


I have  had,  etc. 
id)  I)abe 
bu  Ijaft 
er  fiat 
hoir  f>aben 
if)r  fi  abt 
fie  fyaben 


> geljalit 


I (may)  have  had,  etc. 
icf)  fiabe 
bu  fiabeft 
er  fiabe 
fair  fiaben 
ifir  fiabet 
fte  fjaben 


>getjaM 


PARADIGM  OF  Ijciktl. 


37 


§*,] 


Indicative. 


Pluperfect. 
(Imperf.  of  Ijabeit  + P.  Part.) 


Subjunctive. 


I had  had,  etc. 
icf>  Ijatte 
bu  fyatteft 
er  Eiatte 
toir  fatten 
tf>r  £;attet 
fie  fatten 


I had  (might  have)  had,  etc. 
id)  fyatte 


► gcljaBt 


bu  fyatteft 
er  ^atte 
toir  fatten 
ifir  fjattet 
fie  fatten 

Future. 

(Pres,  of  toerben  + Infin.  of  Ijabra.) 

I shall  have,  etc.  I shall  have,  etc. 


geljnBt 


td)  nserbe 
bu  toir  ft 
er  toirb 
toir toerben 
i^r  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


id)  toerbe 
bu  toerbeft 
er  toerbe 
toirtoerben 
ibr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 

Future  Perfect. 
(Future  of  Ijabeit  + P.  Part.) 


> JjaBett 


I shall  have  had,  etc. 
id)  toerbe 
bu  toir  ft 
er  toirb 
toir  toerben 
Ujr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


> geljoBt  IjaBeit 


Simple. 

(Impf.  Subj.  of  tnerbeit  -f-  Infin. 
of  tjabcn.) 

I should  have,  etc. 
id)  toiir&e 
bu  toiirbeft  ) V 


Conditional. 


I shall  have  had,  etc. 
td;  toerbe 
bu  toerbeft 
er  toerbe 
toir  toerben 
ibr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


geljalii  fjulien 


Compound. 

(Simple  Cond.  of  fyaben  -+■  Past 
Part.) 

I should  have  had,  etc. 

id)  toiirbe  ) jaM  BnBen 
bu  toiirbeft  f * * ¥ 


38 


LESSON  VIII. 


[§§*5- 


Conditional. 


er  iciitbe 


er  tniirbe 


fie  toiirben  . 


fie  toiirbett  . 


Imperative. 

fyabe  (bu),  have  (thou) 
^abf  (ibr),  have  (ye) 


(ju)  fjaben,  (to)  have 
gefjafit  (ju)  fyaben,  (to)  have 


Infinitives 


had 


Participles. 


Pres,  fyabenb,  having 


Past,  gefyabt,  had. 


25.  Use  of  Auxiliaries  of  Tense.  — 1.  forms 

the  perfect  tenses  of  all  transitive  and  most  intransitive 
verbs  precisely  as  above. 

In  any  verb  not  conjugated  with  fetrt  (see  4,  below) : 

The  Present  of  fyabert  -f-  P.  Part,  of  any  verb  form  the 
Perfect  of  that  verb. 

The  Imperfect  of  f>abett  — P.  Part,  of  any  verb  form  the 
Pluperfect  of  that  verb. 

2.  SHkrben  forms  the  Future  and  Simple  Conditional 
thus : 

The  Present  of  toerben  + Infin.  of  any  verb  form  the 
Future. 

The  Imperf.  Subj.  of  Herbert  -f-  Infin.  of  any  verb  form 
the  Simple  Conditional. 

3.  The  Future  of  Ijaben  -f-  P.  Part,  of  any  verb  (not  con- 
jugated with  fern)  form  the  Future  Perfect. 

The  Simple  Conditional  of  fyaben  -f-  P.  Part,  of  any 
verb  (not  conjugated  with  feirt)  form  the  Compound  Con- 
ditional. 

4.  ©ein  replaces  fyaben  in  the  Perfect  Tenses  of  many 
Intransitive  Verbs.  (See  § 53.)  Compare  the  English  ‘He 
is  come.* 


26] 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  COMPOUND  TENSES. 


39 


26.  Construction  of  Compound  Tenses.  — Place 
of  Participle  and  Infinitive. 


Rule  of  Construction . — In  every  principal  sentence  the 
Participle  and  Infinitive  come  at  the  end ; but  if  both  be 
present,  the  Participle  precedes  the  Infinitive,  which  is  always 
last,  as : 

1 2 3 4 

SUBJECT.  VERB.  PART.  OBJECT. 

( Engl'. ) My  teacher  has  had  money. 

1 2 3 4 

SUBJECT.  VERB.  OBJECT.  PART. 

(Germ.)  Sttetn  Seljrer  fyat  ©elb  geljabt. 


1 2 

SUBJECT.  VERB. 

(Engl.)  We  shall 

1 2 

SUBJECT.  VERB. 

(Germ.)  28ir  toerben 

l 


3 4 

INFIN.  OBJECT. 

have  a storm. 

3 4 

OBJECT.  INFIN. 

etnen  ©turmljafien. 

2 3 4 


5 


SUBJECT.  VERB.  INFIN.  PART.  OBJECT. 

(Engl.)  The  beggars  would  have  had  no  shoes. 

1 2 3 4 6 


SUBJECT.  VERB.  OBJECT.  PART.  INFIN. 

(Germ.)  ©ie  Settler  toitrbett  feine  ©dfmfye  geljabt  fallen. 


Remember  : In  compound  tenses,  the  auxiliary  is  the 
verb,  and  occupies  the  second  place  in  a principal  sen* 
tence  (see  § 20,  Rule  1,  above). 


Vocabulary. 


evening,  ber  2T6enb 
beggar,  ber  Settler 
holiday,  ber  gei'ertag 
fish,  ber  $tf$ 
fruit,  bie  $rucf)t  * 


money,  ba§  ©elb 
guest,  ber  ©aft* 
harbour,  ber  §afert* 
glove,  ber  §anb'fcfmfy 
basket,  ber  $orb  * 
nut,  bie  9iufs  * 


40 


LESSON  VIII. 


L§S  26- 


to  be  right,  Slecfyt  baben 
sailing-ship,  bag  ©e'gclfcbiff 
chair,  ber  ©tu(d  * 
storm,  ber  ©turm  * 
stocking,  ber  ©trumpf  * 
shoe,  ber  ©d;ufy 
table,  ber  TifdE; 
animal,  bag  £ier 
to  be  wrong,  ttn'redjt  fmben 
pleasure,  bag  2?ergnugen 
wolf,  ber  Solf  * 


out  of,  aug  (gov.  dat.) 
to  become  of,  aug . . . iuerben 
poor,  arm 
bad,  fc^lecfd 
to-morrow,  morgen 
the  day  after  to-morrow,  it'ber* 
morgen 
much,  t)iel 
already,  fcfyon 
when,  toann  ? 


EXERCISE  VIII. 

A.  1.  !Jd>  Ijabe  Die!  ©elb  geb^abt,  aber  jetst  bin  idj  arm.  2. 
SDie  grii$te  toerben  im  §erbft  reif.  3.  Sirb  ber  $nabe  einen 
£ifd)  unb  ©tittle  in  feinetn  dimmer  fyabeit  ? 4.  §!)re  §anbfcfnd?e 
tourben  f$led;t,  benn  fte,  toaren  fd^on  alt.  5.  (§g  iff  angencfym, 
greunbe  ju  fjaben.  6.  2Ba§  tourbe  aug  bent  ©obne  beg  Sefyrerg? 
@r  tourbe  aud)  Server.  7. 2>d)  toerbe  fjeinbe  unb  aud)  g-reunbe  fyabett. 
8.  i£>ie  ©afte  in  unferer  ©tabt  murben  miibe,  benn  bag  Setter 
mar  fefyr  fyeijj.  9.  SBerben  mir  !£eppicfye  unb  23orI;ange  in  unferm 
3immer  Ijaben?  10.  @r  batte  greunbe  gefyabt.  11.  ©ie  merben 
in  biefem  Saljre  biel  3Sergniigen  gel;abt  Ijaben.  12.  £)ie  ©oEjne 

beg  ^onigg  Ijaben  i|3ferbe  unb  Sagen,  aber  bie  Softer  beg  93ett= 
lerg  fyaben  feine  ©cf)uf)e  unb  feine  ©triimpfe.  13.  Sir  fatten 
Slecfyt  geljabt,  aber  er  Ijatte  Unrest  geljabt.  14.  Sliit  meinen 
greunben  fmbe  id)  biel  SSergnitgen  gefjabt.  15.  llnfere  $reunbe 
toerben  geftern  biel  SSergniigen  gefyabt  Ijaben,  benn  bag  Setter  tear 
fdjmn  unb  toarm. 


B.  1.  The  sailing-ships  are  in  the  harbour.  2.  We  had 
thirty  fishes  in  our  baskets.  3.  He  would  have  friends.  4. 
The  evening  was  fine,  but  the  weather  became  cold.  5.  We 
have  had  two  storms.  6.  Where  are  our  guests  ? They  hecan-  • 
tired  and  are  now  in  the  garden.  7.  To-morrc 


PARADIGM  OF  loBcn. 


41 


Vi 

a holiday,  for  it  is  Saturday.  8.  We  were  in  the  garden 
yesterday,  and  the  trees  are  already  green.  9.  What  has  he 
had  ? He  has  had  apples  and  nuts.  10.  Dogs,  wolves,  and 
foxes  are  animals. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  VIII. 

1.  Wer  hatte  Recht  und  wer  hatte  Unrecht  ? 2.  Wann 
werden  wir  einen  Feiertag  haben?  3.  Wo  sind  die  Segel- 
schiffe?  4.  Wessen  Sohne  haben  Wagen  und  Pferde?  5. 
Warum  wurden  die  Gaste  miide?  6.  Welche  Gemalde  sind 
schon? 


LESSON  IX. 

WEAK  CONJUGATION:  fflkit.  - DEPENDENT  SENTENCES.  - 
PREPOSITIONS  WITH  ACCUSATIVE  ONLY. 

27.  The  stem  of  a verb  is  what  is  left  when  the  termina- 
tion of  the  Present  Infinitive  (-en  or  — n)  is  dropped,  as : 
fyab-en,  stem  Ijab ; lob-ert,  stem  lob. 

28.  The  Principal  Parts  of  a verb  are  the  Present  In- 
finitive, Imperfect  Indicative,  and  Past  Participle. 

29.  Any  verb,  when  these  principal  parts  are  given,  may 
be  conjugated  throughout,  by  using  the  auxiliaries,  precisely 
as  in  the  paradigm  of  fjaben  in  Less.  VIII. 

30.  Weak  verbs  are  those  which  form  the  Imperfect 
by  adding  -fe,  and  the  Past  Participle  by  prefixing  ge-  and 
adding  -f  to  the  stem,  as:  Icb-en,  to  praise  (stem  lofi). 
Imperfect  lob-te,  P.  Part,  pe— lob— t ; tabel-tt,  to  blame  (stem 
tabel),  Imperf.  tabel-te,  P.  Part,  ge-tabel-1 

Note.  — Weak  verbs  are  also  called  Regular  or  Modern . 

31.  Paradigm  of  Men,  to  praise. 

Principal  Parts. 

Pres.  Infin.  lobctt  Impf.  Indic.  lobte  Past  Part,  gclobt 
4 


42 


LESSON  IXo 


Indicative,  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

id;  lobe,  I (may)  praise 


t<$  lobe,  I praise  (am  praising, 
cto  praise) 

bu  lob(e)ft,  ^ou  praisest*  etc. 
er  Iob(e)i,  praises 
totr  lobcn,  we  praise 
if)X  tob(e)t,  ye  praise 
fie  lobcn,  they  praise 


bu  lobcfi,  thou  (mayest)  praise 
er  lobe,  he  (may)  praise 
loir  lobcn,  we  (may)  praise 
iljr  lobct,  ye  (may)  praise 
fie  lobcn,  they  (may)  praise 


Imperfect. 

(Same  form  for  both  moods.) 


td)  lobte,  I praised  (was  praising,  etc.) 

bu  lobteft,  thou  praise dst 

er  lobte,  he  praised 

Vox r lobtcn,  we  praised 

iE>r  lobtet,  ye  praised 

fie  lobtcn,  they  praised 


Perfect. 

(Pres,  of  I)aben  + P.  Part  of  loBert.) 

id)  fxxbe  geWSt,  I have  praised  (been  id)  Ijabe  geToSt 
praising) 

bu  Ijaft  gelobt,  thou  hast  praised,  etc.  bu  Ijabeft  gelobt,  2c. 
Pluperfect. 

(Imperf.  of  fyaben  P.  Part.  loben.) 
id)  fyatte  gelcbi,  I had  praised  (been  id)  ^citte  gclflbt,  K. 
praising),  etc. 

Future. 

(Present  of  UJetbeit  + Infin.  of  lobett.) 

id;  toerbe  Mien,  I shall  praise  (be  id;  toerbe  foSctt 
praising) 

bu  toirft  loben*  thou  wilt  praise,  etc. 


bu  toerbeft  loben,  *c. 


§3i] 


PARADIGM  OF  loben. 


43 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 

Future  Perfect. 


(Future  of  Jja&cit  + P.  Part,  of  toben.) 


id)  toerbe  gelobt  fyaben,  I shall  have 
praised 

bu  toirft  gelobt  ^aben,  thou  wilt  have 
praised,  etc. 


id)  toerbe  gelobt  Ijaben 

bu  tuerbeft  gelobt 
Ijaben,  ac. 


Conditional. 

Simple.  Compound. 

(Xmpf.  Subj.  of  luerben  + Infill.  (Simple  Cond.  of  I)dben  + P*  Part, 
of  toben.)  of  toben.) 


id)  hhirbe  Men,  I should 
praise(be  praising)  etc. 


id)  loiirbe  gelobt  fyaben,  I should 
have  praised,  etc. 


Imperative. 

lobe  (bu),  praise  (thou) 
lobe  er,  let  him  praise 
loben  loir,  let  us  praise 
Iobt  (il;r),  praise  (ye) 
loben  fie,  let  them  praise 


Infinitive. 

(ju)  loben,  (to)  praise, 
gelobt  ($u)  fyaben,  (to)  have 
praised 


Participles. 

Pres . fobcitb,  praising  Past . gelobt,  praised 

Remarks.  — i.  e is  sometimes  found  in  the  terminations  of 
the  following  parts  : Pres.  Ind.  bu  Iob(c)ft,  er  iob(e)t,  ibr  Iob(e)t ; 
Impf.  (Ind.  and  Subj.)  id)  tob(e)te,  etc. ; P.  Part.  ge!ob(e)t,  etc. ; 
and  is  always  retained  in  certain  verbs.  (See  § 35,  Rem.  2, 
below.) 

2.  Note  again  the  persistent  c of  the  Pres.  Subj. 

3.  English  periphrastic  forms  of  the  verb  are  to  be  avoided 
in  German ; thus  : 

I praise  \ (praise  I ?)  \ 

I am  praising  >-  id)  lobe  am  I praising  ? y lobe  id)  ? 

I do  praise  ) do  I praise?  ) 


44 


LESSON  IX. 


I have  been  praising,  etc.,  id)  [;abe  gelobt,  etc. 

Had  I been  praising?  petite  id)  gelobt ? 

4.  The  only  true  Imperative  forms  are  those  of  the  2.  sing, 
and  2.  plur.,  lobe,  lobt.  For  the  other  persons,  the  pres.  subj. 
is  used,  as:  lobe  er,  let  him  praise;  loben  loir,  let  us  praise; 
loben  fie,  let  them  praise;  — the  verb  preceding  the  pronoun. 

Construction  of  Dependent  Sentences. 

32.  The  Verb  in  a Dependent  Sentence  comes  last \ as: 


Remember:  that  the  auxiliary  is  the  verb  in  compound 


33.  In  compound  tenses  the  Participle  and  Infinitive 
immediately  precede  the  verb ; if  both  be  present,  the  Parti- 
ciple precedes,  as  in  principal  sentences,  thus : 


%d)  glaube,  baft  er  ©elb  grfjabt  Ijat, 

I believe,  that  he  has  had  money. 

%d)  glaube,  baft  er  ©elb  ftaku  toirb, 

I believe  that  he  will  have  money. 

glaube,  baft  er  ©elb  gdjabf  f >aben  toirb, 

I believe  that  he  will  have  had  money. 


Note.  — The  place  of  the  Subject,  in  a Dependent  Sentence,  is 
usually  the  same  as  in  English. 

34.  Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative  only. 

burdj,  fitr,  gegeu,  ofyne,  mu,  toiber. 
big,  (1)  till,  until  (time),  as:  I shall  not  come  until  to- 


%d)  glaube,  baft  er  ©elb  Ijat, 

I believe  that  he  has  money. 


tenses. 


morrow  (big  morgen). 


34-1  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE.  45 


(2)  up  to,  as  far  as  (fllace),  as : He  travelled  with  us 
as  far  as  (61 8)  Montreal. 

butd),  through ; as : He  rode  through  the  forest  (burdj 
ben  SB  alb). 

fur,  for;  as:  That  is  for  my  friend  (fiit  tnetnen  $reunb); 
the  scissors  are  not  a toy  for  children  (fiit  $inber). 

gcgen,  towards,  against  (not  necessarily  denoting  hos- 
tility), as : The  enemy  advanced  towards  (or 

against)  the  bridge  (gcgen  bte  Sritcfe). 

uljne,  without ; as  : We  cannot  travel  without  money  (oljne 
©elb). 

UlU,  (i)  around,  about;  as:  We  drove  around  the  town 
(urn  bte  Stabi). 

(2)  at,  about  (, time ),  as : He  came  at  four  o’clock 
(um  bier  Ufyr);  it  happened  at  (or  about) 
Christmas  (um  3Beil)nacfitcn). 

toiber,  against  ( opposition , hostility ),  as:  He  swam  against 
the  stream  (UsiOcr  ben  Strom);  the  soldiers  were  fighting 
against  the  enemy  (miner  ben  geinb). 

Remark.  — ©urd),  fitr,  and  um  are  generally  contracted 
with  the  Neuter  of  the  unemphasized  Definite  Article,  thus: 


burd;  ba^  = burtf)3  (burcf)’S) 
fur  baS  = furS  (fur’s) 
um  baS  = um8  (urn’s) 


Vocabulary. 


believe,  glauben 


love,  IteBen 


hope,  Ijoffen 
buy,  faufen 
laugh,  Iad)en 
live,  leben 
learn,  lernen 


send,  fcfytcfen 
play,  fyielen 
sell,  berfaufen 


make,  do,  rnac^en 
say,  fa  gen 


46 


LESSON  IX. 


r§§  34- 


weep,  cry,  toetnen 
bishop,  ber  SBi'fdjjof* 

German,  ®eutfd) 
servant,  ber  ©ierter 
industry,  diligence,  ber  $letf$ 
young  lady,  Miss,  ba§  graulein 
cardinal,  ber  ^arbitral 
noise,  ber  Sarm 
Latin,  ba§  Satein 
palace,  ber 
pope,  ber  $apft  * 


place,  square,  ber  $Iat*  * 

ring,  ber  3itrtg 

walk,  ber  ©pa^ier'gcmg  * 

time,  bte  3d* 

good,  kind,  gut 

merry,  merrily,  lufitg 

sad,  iraurtg 

that  (conj.),  baft 

because,  toetl 

if,  ftenn 

why,  to  arum'  ? 


Idiom:  to  take  a walk,  eittett  0pajfergang  ntadieti* 

Note.  — A past  tense  after  tuenn  (‘if’)  is  put  in  the  subj.  mood. 

EXERCISE  IX. 

A.  1.  3)ie  ^arbinale  unb  23ifcf)bfe  toaren  geftern  im  ifklafle 
be§  $ugfte§.  2.  ©a§  grauleiti  luirb  biefe  Stinge  laufen,  benn  fie 
finb  fd)6it.  3.  ®er  Staler  itmrbe  biefe§  ©emcilbe  nicfrt  berfaufen. 
4.  3;dj)  toiirbe  biefen  Sting  lattfen,  luenn  id;  veid^j  tuare.  5.  $at  er 
e§  geglaubt?  @r  t>at  e§  geglaubt,  lueil  fern  SSater  e§  gefagt  f>at. 
6.  ®ie  ©dottier  l>aben  Die!  Sarnt  gemacfit.  7.  22ir  loben  ben 
bungling,  toeil  er  fleifsig  ift.  8.  ®er  3tbnig  tuirb  feine  ©ene* 
tale  gegen  ben  $cinb  fcfnden.  9.  9Jteine  ©cfytoefter  iuirb  §anb= 
fcfmlje  laufen,  benn  ifyre  §>anbfdj)uf}e  finb  fcfnecfyt.  10.  2Bir  tuiirben 
fjeute  einen  ©pajiergang  burd)  bie  ©tabt  maiden,  toenn  ba§  Setter 
fdjbn  tncire.  11.  ©ie  itmrben  aucb  einen  ©pajiergang  gemad;t 
Ijaben,  toenn  fie  3eit  geljabt  fatten.  12.  ©ie  ft>irb  fagen,  bajf  id^ 
9tecl)t  Babe.  13.  3cb  fyabe  imtner  gebofft,  bag  er  lernen  hutrbe. 
14.  ©ie  liebt  ifyren  93aier  unb  ifyre  Gutter,  benn  fie  finb  gut.  15. 
@r  itmrbe  ba§  ©ernalbe  nidjt  gelobt  Ijaben,  benn  ed  tear  nicfd  fc^on. 

B.  1.  What  were  they  doing  yesterday  ? They  were  playing 
in  the  garden.  2.  This  gentleman  will  praise  his  servants, 
for  they  are  industrious.  3.  We  have  taken  a walk  about 


35^ 


ENDINGS  OF  WEAK  VERBS* 


47 


the  town.  4.  The  squares  in  those  cities  are  very  fine.  5. 
Where  were  the  daughters  of  the  officers  ? They  were  living 
in  a convent.  6.  Without  industry  we  shall  not  learn  much. 
7.  The  boy  was  playing  with  the  dog.  8.  The  gentleman  has 
sold  his  horses  and  carriages.  9.  What  are  the  young  ladies 
doing  now?  10.  Why  was  she  crying?  She  was  crying 
because  she  was  sad.  11.  They  are  laughing  because  they 
are  merry.  12.  We  shall  have  learned  much  in  a week.  13. 
I am  laughing  because  the  child  is  playing  so  merrily.  14. 
To-day  we  are  learning  German,  to-morrow  we  shall  learn 
Latin.  15.  We  have  bought  shoes  and  stockings  for  the 
beggars. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  IX. 

1.  Weshalb  hat  sie  gelacht  ? 2.  Wer  machte  so  viel  Larm? 
3.  Wo  haben  die  Fraulein  einen  Spaziergang  gemacht  ? 4. 

Was  hat  die  Frau  gekauft?  5.  Weshalb  hat  seine  Schwester 
Handschuhe  gekauft?  6.  Was  werden  wir  morgen  machen? 


LESSON  X. 

WEAK  VERBS  (continued).  DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES  ? 
— 2>arf  MODEL,  OR  PLURAL  in  ~er. 


35.  Endings  of  Weak  Verbs  in  Simple  Tenses. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Imperative. 

Indicative. 

SUBJUNCT. 

Ind.  and  Subj. 

Sing.  2.  — c 

Sing.  1.  — c 

— e 

— (c)te 

Plur . 2.  — (e)t 

2.  — (C)ft 

-eji 

-(e)tc  U 

Infinitive, 

3.  — (e)t 

— e 

— (e)te 

— en 

Plur.  1.  — en 

— en 

— (c)feu 

Participles. 

^ -(e)t 

— cf 

— (e)tft 

Pres.  — ntb 

3.  — ctt 

— ut 

— (c)tcn 

Past.  0C— (C)i 

48 


LESSON  X. 


Remarks.  — i.  Observe  the  following  endings  : 

(a)  Final  -t  of  the  3.  sing,  occurs  only  in  the  Pres.  Indie. 

(b)  The  2.  sing,  has  -ft  except  in  the  Imperative. 

( c ) The  2.  plur.  has  -t  throughout. 

2.  Verb-Stems  in  -b  or  -t  (flj),  or  in  -nt  or  -n  preceded  by 
another  consonant,  retain  -c  throughout  after  the  stem,  as : 

rcben,  to  speak. 

Pres.  Ind.  Imperfect.  Imperative. 

Sing.  2.  bu  rebeft  Sing.  1.  id)  rebete  Plur.  2.  rebet  (tljr) 
3.  er  rebet  2.  bu  rebeteft 

Plur.  2.  tljr  rebet  etc. 

Thus : arbeiten,  to  work : tef)  arbeitete ; atmert,  to  breathe : 
bu  atmeft ; regnen,  to  rain : eg  regrtet. 

3.  Verb-Stems  in  a sibilant  (8,  fcj),  jj,  j,  j)  retain  -c  in  the 
2.  sing.  Pres.  Ind.  and  Subj.  only,  as  : 

tartjen,  to  dance : bu  tanjfft ; retfert,  to  travel : bu  reifbft. 

4.  Verb-Stems  in  -el  and  -er  drop  c of  the  stem  before 
terminations  in  -c  (i.  e.  in  1.  sing.  Pres.  Ind.,  1.  and  3.  sing. 
Pres.  Subj.,  and  2.  sing.  Imper.),  and,  except  in  the  Subjunc- 
tive, never  insert  c after  l or  it,  as  : 


tubeltt,  to  blame. 


Pres.  Ind. 

Pres.  Subj. 

Imperfect. 

id)  table 

table 

idj  tabelte,  etc. 

bu  tabelft 

tableft 

Imperative. 

er  tabelt 

table 

table 

toir  tabeln 

ta blen 

tabelt 

iljr  tabelt 

tablet 

P.  Part. 

fie  tabeln 

tablcn 

getabclt 

5.  Foreign  verbs  in  -tereit  (~irett)  do  not  take  the  prefix 
rje-  in  the  P.  Part.,  as ; ftub-ieren,  to  study : P.  Part,  ftubierl 


37]  declension:  ©orf  model.  49 


(not  ge-ftubiert) ; bombarbieren,  to  bombard:  P.  Part,  bom* 
barbicrt. 

6.  Verbs  with  the  prefixes  be-,  Ct-,  em|3-,  ettf-,  ge-,  bet-, 
get-  also  omit  the  prefix  ge-  in  the  P.  Part.,  as : bejaljleit, 
P.  Part,  bcjaijft;  berfdfhnenben,  berfdjtoenbet. 


36.  Declension  of  bag  ©erf,  the  village. 


Singular . 

Norn.  bag  ©orf,  the  village 
Gen.  beg  ©orf(e)g,  of  the 
village 

Dat.  bem  ©orf(e),  (to,  for) 
the  village 

Acc.  bag  ©orf,  the  village 


Plural . 

bte  ©iirfer,  the  villages 
ber  ©iirfer,  of  the  villages 

ben  ©iirfcrn,  (to,  for)  the 
villages 

bte  ©iirfer,  the  villages 


Remarks.  — 1.  The  Singular  is  formed  precisely  as  in  the 
©oljn  model.  (See  § 21.) 

2.  Observe  -cr  of  the  Plural,  with  the  additional  -n  of  the 
Dative. 

3.  All  Substantives  of  this  Declension  with  a , 0,  u or  cm 
in  the  stem  take  Umlaut. 


37.  In  this  way  are  declined  : 

1.  Most  neuter  monosyllables  (exceptions  in  App.E.). 

2.  Substantives  ending  in  -t((j)uut. 

3.  Five  neuters  with  prefix  ©e-,  viz. : 

bag  ©emad),  the  apartment  bag  ©efyenft,  the  spectre 
bag  ©emut,  the  temper,  dis-  bag  ©etoanb,  the  garment 
position  (also  ©efid;t;  see  § 64) 

ba§  ©efc^lecfyt,  the  sex 

4.  Two  foreign  neuters, * viz. : bag  Regiment,  the  regiment; 
bag  ^otyital  (or  ©pital),  the  hospital. 


r 


LESSON  X. 


[§  37 


So 


5.  The  following  nine  masculines  : 


ber  Sbfetoidd,  the  villain 
ber  ©eift,  the  spirit 
ber  ©ott,  the  God 
ber  £eib,  the  body 
ber  5Jlarm,  the  man, 
husband  (Lat.  vir) 


ber  9tanb,  the  edge,  margin 
ber  SSormurtb,  the  guardian 
ber  Salb,  the  forest 
ber  Surm,  the  worm 
(also  ®orn,  Drt ; see  App. 

E.) 


Further  examples  (Sing,  like  ©ofyrt)  : 

2)ag  ©cblof},  the  castle,  palace:  Plur . n. g. a.  ©dEdiiffcr, 
d.  ©cfylofiertt. 

©ag  SSud;,  the  book  : Plur . n.  g.  a.  Sitdjer,  d.  33u$erit. 

®er  9Jiann,  the  man,  husband:  Plur . n.  g.  a.  banner,  p. 
SSJicinnern. 

©ag  $inb,  the  child  : Plur . n.  g.  a.  $inbet,  D.  ^inbern. 

©ag  §aug,  the  house : Plur . n.  g.  a.  ^aufer,  d.  £>aufertt. 


Vocabulary. 


to  row,  rubern 
shake,  fdhitteln 
waste,  fcerfcfytoenben 
exercise,  task,  bie  Slufgabe 
leaf,  bag  SBlatt 
egg,  bag  @i 

possession,  property,  bag 
©gentum 
earth,  bie  ©rbe 
gardener,  ber  ©artner 
fowl,  ba3  §ul)n 


child,  bag  $inb 
dress,  bag  $Ieib 
clothes,  f)k  of  £Ietb 
song,  bag  £ieb 
courage,  spirit,  ber  5Rut 
woman,  wife,  bag  Seib 
yellow,  gelb 
enough,  genug 
well  (adv.),  gut 
a long  while,  lange 
too,  ju 


EXERCISE  X. 

A.  1.  §erbft  Herbert  bie  flatter  gelB,  bertn  bag  Setter  iji 

fait.  2.  table  biefe  9Jtabd?en,  toeil  fie  ifyre  3tufgabe  ni d;t 

ftubiert  Ijaben.  3.  Sinter  ftubierien  bie  iguttglinge;  im 


1 


§ 37]  DECLENSION  : MODEL.  5 I 

(Sommer  arbeiteien  fie.  4.  ruberft  nid)t  fd)neff  genug,  metn 
33ruber,"  fagte  id).  5.  3)ie[e  banner  liebert  i£;re  SBetber  unb 
$inber.  6.  2)er£el)rer  fagte,  baj$  bie  briber  ju  toiel  2arm  marten. 

7.  ©er  $onig  rebete  mii  ben  ©erteralert,  unb  lobte  ben  2Jlut  tfyrer 
fftegimenter.  8.  S)te  SSormunber  biefer  Slinber  finb  $5[emid)ter, 
benn  fie  fyabert  ba§  ©tgentum  ber  $tnber  fc>erfd)ft>enbet.  9.  ®ie 
SBurmer  leben  in  ber  ©rbe,  aber  bie  $ifd)e  leben  im  28affer.  10. 
2Bo  finb  bie  ©ter  ber  $ul)ner?  ©ie  ftnb  in  unferen  $orben.  11. 
25cf)  toerbe  mtibe,  rnetf  id)  gegen  ben  ©from  rubre.  12.  S)er  ^aifer 
fyat  bie  ©enerale  gefabelt,  aber  il)re  3tegimenter  I)at  er  gelobt. 

B.  1.  The  general  has  bombarded  the  town.  2.  The 
woman  was  buying  books  and  clothes  for  her  children.  3. 
The  gardener  is  shaking  the  apple-tree.  4.  The  children 
were  learning  songs.  5.  The  boy  is  industrious ; he  has 
studied  well.  6.  The  apartments  of  the  palaces  are  magni- 
ficent, 7.  It  rained  yesterday,  but  it  will  not  rain  to-day. 

8.  We  have  rowed  a long  while  against  the  stream.  9.  These 
men  travelled  through  towns  and  villages.  10.  The  hospitals 
in  London  are  large  and  fine.  11.  The  leaves  of  these  trees 
are  large  and  beautiful.  12.  This  gentleman  would  buy  my 
houses,  if  he  had  money  enough. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  * 

1.  Weshalb  werden  die  Blatter  gelb?  2.  Wessen  Regi- 
menter  hat  der  Konig  getadelt?  3.  Was  sagte  der  Lehrer? 
4.  Wo  leben  die  Wiirmer?  5.  Was  lernten  die  Kinder?  6. 
Wiirde  dieser  Herr  das  Hau^  kanfen  ? 


52 


LESSON  XI. 


[§§  33- 


LESSON  XI. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


38.  Declension  of  Personal  Pronouns. 


First  Person. 

* Sing.  N.  id),  I 

G.  meiner  (mein),  of  me 
D.  mir,  (to,  for)  me 
A.  mid),  me 
Plur . N.  fair,  we 

G.  unfer  (unfrer),  of  us 
D.  un§,  (to,  for)  us 
A.  un£,  us 

Third  Person. 

Singular . 


Second  Person, 
bu,  thou 

beiner  (bein),  of  thee 
bir,  (to,  for)  thee 
bid;,  thee 
t£)V,  ye,  you 
euer  (eurer),  of  you 
eud),  (to,  for)  you 
eud;,  you 


MASC. 


FEM. 


N.  er,  he 
G.  feiner{fein), 
of  him' 

D.  if;m,(to,for) 
him 

A.  iljn,  him 


fie,  she 
tf^rer  (ifyr), 
of  her 
i^r,  (to,  for) 
her 

fie,  her 


NEUTER. 

e§,  it 

feiner  (fein, 
e3),  of  it 
il;m,(to,  for) 
it 

e3,  it 


REFLEXIVE 
(ALL  genders). 


fid),  (to,  for)  himself, 
herself,  itself 
fid),  himself,  herself, 
itself 


Plural . 

N.  fie,  they 
G.  ifyrer  (iljr),  of  them 
D.  i tmen,  (to,  for) 
them 

A.  fie,  them 

Remarks. — i.  The  forms  mein,  bein,  fein,  if)r,  unfrer,  eurer 
are  poetical  or  archaic. 

2.  The  form  e§  of  the  3.  sing.  gen.  neuter  is  only  used  in  cer- 
tain phrases,  as : bin  C0  miibe,  I am  tired  of  it. 


FOR 

ALL  GENDERS 


ft$,  (to,  for)  them- 
selves 

fid),  themselves 


39] 


IDOMATIC  USES  OF  e3. 


53 


3.  The  gen.  and  dat.  of  the  3.  sing,  neuter  do  not  occur, 
except  when  referring  to  persons  (e.  g.  SJtabcfyen,  grautein). 

4.  The  Pronouns  of  the  3.  sing,  must  agree  in  gender  with 
the  substantive  to  which  they  refer,  as : 


§aft  bu  ben  iQut? 

Hast  thou  the  hat  ? 

$aft  bu  bic  Slurne? 

Hast  thou  the  flower  ? 

2Bo  iff  ba$  3Kdb$en? 

Where  is  the  girl  ? 


3<t,  §abe  iljn. 

Yes,  I have  it. 

9lein,  id;  babe  fie  niefyt. 
No,  I have  it  not. 

(£3  iff  irn  ©arten. 

She  is  in  the  garden. 


5.  The  Pronouns  of  the  3.  person  are  not  used  after  Prepo- 
sitions, when  referring  to  inanimate  objects , but  are  replaced 
by  the  adverb  ba(t),  there,  before  the  Preposition,  the  r being 
inserted  if  the  Preposition  begins  with  a vowel,  as  : 

Sift  bu  ntit  biefem  SBudje  gufrieben?  3a,  bin  bamit 
gufrieben.  Art  thou  satisfied  with  this  book?  Yes,  I 
am  satisfied  with  it  ( therewith :). 

How  much  did  you  pay  for  this  hat?  I paid  two  dollars 
for  it,  bafiir  {therefor). 

What  have  you  in  your  purse  ? I have  money  in  it 
(b  atilt,  there  in). 


39.  Idiomatic  Uses  of  cS. 

1.  Before  the  verb,  representing  the  real  subject,  which 
follows  the  verb,  and  with  which  the  verb  agrees,  as : 

Who  is  it  ? It  is  my  cousin  ; it  is  my  cousins. 

SBer  iff  c§?  d§  iff  mein  Setter ; e3  finb  meine  SSettem. 

(&§  leucfdet  bie  ©onne,  the  sun  shines,  i.  e.,  it  is  the  sun 
that  shines. 

dg  leuc^tcn  bie  ©terne,  (it  is)  the  stars  (that)  shine* 


54 


LESSON  XI. 


Remark,  — ©§  in  this  construction  is  often  rendered  by 
1 there  ’ in  English,  as  : 

There  is  a bird  in  this  cage. 

@3  ift  ein  SSogel  in  biefem  Sauer. 

There  are  three  books  on  this  table. 

@8  finis  brei  Slider  auf  biefem  3nf dj. 

(See  also  e§  giebt,  Less.  XXXVII.) 

2.  When  the  real  subject  represented  by  is  a personal 
pronoun,  with  the  verb  to  be , e§  follows  the  verb,  which 
agrees  with  the  real  subject  in  person  and  number,  as : 


It  is  I, 

Bin  e§. 

r 2)u  Bift  e§. 

It  is  you, 

■j  $$r  fci&  e§. 

( ©ie  fiub  e§. 

It  is  we, 

loir  fiub  e§. 

It  is  they, 

fie  fiub  e§. 

Is  it  you  ? 

fiub  ©ie  e§? 

3.  After  the  verb,  representing  a predicate  or  a clause, 
and  corresponding  to  the  English  ‘one’  or  ‘so/  as: 

Is  your  father  a soldier?  Yes,  he  is  one  (e§). 

We  are  free,  and  you  shall  be  so  (e§)  too. 

40.  Use  of  Pronouns  in  Address. 

1.  2>U  is  used  only  in  addressing  persons  with  whom  we 
are  very  intimate,  or  towards  whom  we  use  no  ceremony; 
also  in  addressing  the  Supreme  Being,  as : 

SBo  bift  bit,  lieber  greunb  ? 

Where  are  you,  dear  friend? 

2Ba3  macfyft  bit,  mein  Stub? 

What  are  you  doing,  my  child? 

SEir  loben  $>idj,  0 ©ott ! We  praise  Thee,  o God ! 


55 


^ REFLEXIVE  AND  RECIPROCAL  PRONOUNS. 

2.  (plur.  of  btt)  is  used  in  addressing  a number  of  per- 
sons, each  of  whom  we  should  address  by  feu,  as : 

2Ba3  met#!  iljr,  $ittber? 

What  are  you  doing,  children? 

3.  In  all  other  cases  we  use  for  ‘you’  in  German,  whether 
sing,  orplur.,  the  pronoun  of  the  Third  Plural : ©ie,  %i)XCV, 
.QljUCit,  ©ie,  distinguished  by  a capital  letter . (See  also 
§ 43-) 

41.  Paradigm  of  loScit  with  Reflexive  Pronouns. 


Present  Indicative. 


Sing.  1.  id)  lobe  tni$, 

2.  bu  lobft  bid), 

3.  er  ) 

fie  > lobt  ft ti), 
e3  ) 


I praise  myself 
thou  praisest  thyself 
he  \ ( himself 

she  Upraises  ■<  herself 
it  ) ( itself 


Plur . 1.  loir  loben  nn§,  we  praise  ourselves 

2.  t()r  lobt  Club/  ye  praise  yourselves 

3.  fie  loben  fid),  they  praise  themselves 
So  throughout  the  verb,  as: 

Perfect:  ^d)  l;abe  mid^>  gelobt,  bu  $aft  bidE>  gel obt,  er  ^at  fi$ 
gelobt,  etc. 


42.  Reflexive  and  Reciprocal  Pronouns  — fcfijfh 

1.  The  Pronouns  of  the  First  and  Second  Persons  express 
reflexive  action  without  a special  form,  as  shown  by  the  above 
paradigm,  but  those  of  the  Third  Person  have  the  form  (1$. 

2.  These  pronouns  are  also  used  in  the  Plural  to  express 
reciprocal  action,  as  : 

We  met  each  other  ; they  will  see  each  other  again. 
ffiBir  begegneten  uu£;  fie  toerben  fi$  ftheberiefyen. 


LESSON  XI. 


56 

But  when,  to  prevent  ambiguity,  it  is  necessary  to  dis- 
tinguish reciprocal  from  reflexive  action,  we  use  eimtltbcr  as 
the  reciprocal  pronoun  for  all  persons,  thus : 

We  love  each  other  (one  another),  3S$ir  Ixebert  cittattbcr. 
(2Btr  Hebert  U11§  might  mean  e we  love  ourselves .’) 

3.  To  emphasize  and  strengthen  the  reflexive  pronouns, 
and  give  them  an  exclusive  sense,  as  well  as  further  to  distin- 
guish them  from  reciprocal  pronouns,  the  indeclinable  word 
felflft  (or  felbcr)  is  used,  as: 

Know  yourselves,  ©rfennet  cud)  fclbft. 

(Srfertnet  end)  might  mean  4 know  one  another l) 

He  has  injured  himself,  @r  Ijat  fid;  fclfift  befd)dbigt. 

Remark.  — This  word  felbft  is  in  apposition  to  the  subject 
(or  object,  as  the  case  may  be),  as  : 

©er  $onig  fel&ff  iff  uid )t  immer  gfudlicfy. 

The  king  himself  is  not  always  happy. 

It  is  also  used  adverbially  (==  Eng.  4 even  ’),  as: 

Even  the  king  is  not  always  happy. 

©rib  ft  ber  $bnig  iff  nid)t  immer  gludUcfy. 


Vocabulary. 


behave  one’s  self  properly  (of 
children),  artig  fein 
meet,  begegnen  (dat.) 
visit,  befud)en 
pay,  be§ab>Iert 

have  finished  (with),  fertig 
fein  mit 

belong  (to),  gefyoren  (dat.) 
be  ashamed  of,  ficfy  fcfydmen 
(gen.) 


seat  one’s  self  (sit  down),  fid) 

fe^en 

punish,  ftrafen 
work,  labour,  bie  Sfrbeit 
parents,  bie  ©Item  (no  sing.) 
patience,  bie  ©ebulb 
gentleman,  master,  Mr.,  ber 
hat,  bonnet,  ber  §ui*  [§en 
John,  ^o^ann 
Charles,  $arl 


§42]  REFLEXIVE  AND  RECIPROCAL  PRONOUNS.  57 


uncle,  ber  D'fyeim 
dollar,  ber  Staler 


artist,  ber  Sunftler 
Mary,  Sftarie 


away,  gone,  fort 
here,  I;ier 

ever,  at  any  time,  je,  jemalS 
never,  nie,  niemaU 


EXERCISE  XI. 


A.  1.  Set  artig  Sari,  bu  mac^ft  ju  t)iel  Sarm.  2. -Sene  banner 

ftnb  fefyr  reici;,  benn  biefe  £>aufer  geljoren  ifynen.  3.  ©effort  b a§ 
5{5ferb  $$nen?  9tein,  e3  gefyort  mir  nid;t,  e§  gel)ort  bem  Dffijier. 
4.  Unfer  Dljeim  fyat  un§  23ud£)er  gefauft.  5.  §abt  ©ebulb.  Sin* 
ber,  id£)  toerbe  eud£)  morgen  Sfyfel  unb  9Wiffe  faufen.  6.  toerbe 
morgen  einen  (Spa§teraang  mit  $bnen  macben.  7.  @r  glaubt,  baf$  id) 
mir  ba§  ^3ferb  gefauft  I;abe.  8.  9J?orgen  fterben  toir  einen  geier* 
tag  I)a ben,  unb  loir  toerben  unfre  ©Item  befudjen.  9.  S<f)  toerbe  tf>r 
fagen,  bafi  if)re  Gutter  fort  ift.  10.  2$aren  ©ie  jemal3  in  biefer 
Sirdfye?  gd;  Sarnie  barin.  11.  Sari  unb  ^ofyann  begegneten 
fid;  geftern  im  SBalbe.  12.  gft  $$r  33ater  nod;  Irani?  9?ein, 
mein  SSater  ift  jetjt  toobl.  13.  ik'arie,  liebft  bit  beine  ©Item?  %a, 
unbfie  lieben  mid;  aud).  14.  ^d)  hntrbe  einen  ©hajiergang 
^I)nen  macfyen,  toenn  id;  $eit  I;dtte.  15.  £>at  ber  £el;rev  SJtarie 

getabelt?  3 a,  er  §at  fie  getabelt.  16.  ©ie  ©driller  loben  fid) 

felbft,  toeil  fie  ifyre  2lufgabe  fo  fdmeU  gemad;t  babcn.  17.  2Bir 
toiirben  un3  felbft  and)  loben,  toenn  loir  unfre  Sltifgabe  gemacbt 
fatten.  18.  ©r  Vuurbe  fidE)  fd;dmen,  toenn  er  nut  feiner  ?Iufgabe 
nid;t  fertig  toare.  19.  SBeSfyalb  loben  biefe  Sunftler  einanber? 
©ie  loben  einanber,  toeil  ifyre  ©emalbe  fdfjon  ftnb.  20.  ©inb  ©ie 
mit  meiner  2lrbeit  jufrieben?  sJJein,  id)  bin  ni qt  bamit  jufrieben. 

B.  1.  Is  the  table  large  ? \ No,  it  is  small.  2.  Her  father 

has  bought  her  a ring.  3.  Were  the  fishes  in  your  basket? 
Yes,  they  were  in  it.  4.  Who  has  told  it  [to]  her?  5.  John, 

have  you  my  shoes  ? No,  I have  them  not.  6.  We  sit  down 

because  we  are  tired.  7.  Even  the  beggars  of  this  city  have 
shoes  and  stockings.  8.  Who  has  bought  this  hat?  9.  I 
bought  it  myself  in  the  city,  and  paid  four  dollars  for  it.  10. 


58 


LESSON  XII. 


* m 43- 


Charles  and  his  teacher  love  each  other  very  much.  11. 
Mother,  have  you  bought  me  apples  or  nuts  ? 12.  Mr.  A., 
here  is  a chair  for  you  ; sit  down.  13.  Has  the  teacher  blamed 
him?  Yes,  he  had  not  done  his  exercise.  14.  Do  you  believe 
that  this  milk  is  good  ? Yes,  it  is  very  good.  15.  The  teacher 
is  ashamed  of  her,  because  she  has  not  finished  (with)  her  work. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XI. 

1.  Wiirden  sie  einen  Spaziergang  mit  mir  machen  ? 2. 

Weshalb  loben  Sie  sich  so  viel  ? 3.  Was  sagten  Sie  mir  ? 

4.  Sind  Sie  mit  meiner  Arbeit  zufrieden  ? 5.  Was  werden 

wir  morgen  machen  ? 6.  Werden  Sie  morgen  Ihre  Eltern 

besuchen  ? 


LESSON  XII. 

POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. -USE  OF  ARTICLES. 

43.  Possessive  Adjectives. 

First  Person.  Second  Person. 

Sing,  mein,  my  beitt,  thy 

Plur.  imfcr,  our  cuer,  your 

Third  Person. 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUTER.  ALL  GENDERS. 

Sing,  fein,  his  (its)  ibr,  her  (its)  fetU,  its  Plur.  iljr,  their 
Poss.  Adj.  of  Polite  Address : ${jr. 

Remarks.  — i.  The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  the  Genitive 
Cases  of  the  respective  Personal  Pronouns,  declined  after  the 
mein  Model.  (See  § 8,  above.) 

2.  Unfer  and  cuer  may  drop  e of  the  stem  when  inflected ; 
or  they  may  drop  c of  the  termination,  unless  the  termination 
is  -e  or  -er,  as : uvtfcre  or  unfre ; urtfere£,  unfrc3  or  unfer§. 

3.  Observe  the  correlatives  of  the  Pronouns  of  Address: 

bit  — bein 


44l 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLES. 


59 


Thus  we  say : 


bu  tyaft  bettte  9Iufgabe  gelernt, 
tljr  I)abt  cure  „ „ 

©te  fyaben  ;§ljrc  „ „ 


}you  have  learnt  your 
lesson 


Note.  — The  last  example  shows  the  use  of  the  Pers.  Pron.  and  Poss. 
Adj.  of  Third  Plural  as  Pronoun  of  Address. 

4.  Observe  also  the  correlatives  of  the  Third  Person  : 


Referring  to  subst.  masc . sing . fettt  jwhether animate 

“ “ “ fem . “ iljr  ) or  inanimate 

" “ ki  neuter  “ feitt 

“ tosubsts.  plur.  (all  genders)  ifjt 
Thus  we  say  : 

2>er  £>unb  tyat  fctitcit  $no$en  fcerlorert  (lost) 

S)ic  33lume  „ ifjre  flatter  „ 

2>a§  23ud;  „ feitte  „ „ 

5.  The  possessive  adjectives  agree  in  gender  with  both  the 
possessor  and  the  thing  possessed.  The  termination  will 
depend  on  the  gender  (number  and  case)  of  the  substantive 
they  qualify  (the  thing  possessed ) ; the  ste?n  (as  above)  on  the 
gender  of  the  substantive  to  which  they  refer  (the  possessor ). 

Note.  — Feminine  diminutives,  such  as:  3ftcib(f)en,  girl,  grcutlein,  young 
lady,  generally  take  the  possessive  adjective  referring  to  them  in  the 
feminine,  agreeing  with  the  sex  rather  than  the  gender,  as: 

2)a3  sJEftabd)ett  tiebt  ifjre  gutter. 

The  girl  loves  her  mother. 


For  Possessive  Pronouns,  see  Less.  XXIII. 


44.  Use  of  the  Articles. 

The  Definite  Article  is  required  in  German,  contrary  to 
English  usage,  in  the  following  cases : 

1.  Before  all  substantives  used  in  the  full  extent  of 
their  signification  (i.  e.  in  a general  as  well  as  in  a par- 
ticular sense);  hence 


6o 


LESSON  XII. 


[§  44 


(a)  Before  nouns  (sing,  or  plur.)  denoting  a whole  class, 
as : 

Set  2Kenf$  ift  fterblid),  Man  is  mortal; 

Sic  SSogel  fya&en  defter.  Birds  have  nests. 

( b ) Before  names  of  materials,  abstract  nouns,  etc., 
used  in  their  unlimited  sense,  not  partitively,  as  : 

Sa§  ©lag  ift  burdjficfhtg. 

Glass  is  transparent; 

Sag  ©olb  ift  foertoofter  alg  bag  ©ilber. 

Gold  is  more  valuable  than  silver  ; but : 

@db  unb  Sillier  t;af>e  id)  nicfyt, 

Gold  and  silver  I have  not  (have  none  of). 

Sic  9tot  ift  bie  stutter  bet  ©rfinbung. 

Necessity  is  the  mother  of  invention; 

Sic  SJcufi!  ift  eine  3\unft, 

Music  is  an  art ; but : 

©r  ftubiert  SJJufif, 

He  studies  music  (limited  sense). 

Note.  — In  Proverbs  and  Enumerations  this  article  is  omitted,  as: 

$ot  fennt  !etn  Oebot, 

Necessity  knows  no  law; 

SKuftf  unb  2Raleret  ftitb  fcfyone  $iin(te, 

Music  and  painting  are  fine  arts. 

2.  Before  names  of  mountains,  lakes,  seas,  rivers, 
forests,  streets,  seasons,  months  and  days  of  the  week, 
as: 

2)cr  33efut>,  Mount  Vesuvius. 

SDcr  Ontario,  Lake  Ontario. 

5)ic  S^emfe,  the  Thames. 

SDcr  ©peffart,  the  (forest  of)  Spessart 
2>ic  gfriebricfyftrafte,  Frederick  Street. 


§44] 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLES. 


61 


3m  grilling,  in  spring. 

Scr  ^anuar  ift  fait,  January  is  cold. 

Sim  Stontag,  on  Monday. 

Also  before  §ttnmel,  Cstbe,  §oHe,  as : 

^nt  £>immel,  in  heaven  ; 

^ur  @rbe,  to  earth  ; 
and  before  places  of  public  resort,  as : 

$ur  ©cfyule  geljeit,  to  go  to  school. 

3>cf)  tear  in  bcr  Sfircfye,  I was  at  church. 

3.  Before  names  of  countries  when  not  neuter,  or  when 
preceded  by  an  adjective,  as: 

Sic  ©djihxt 5,  Switzerland. 

2>o§  fdjone  gtanfreid),  fair  France. 

Note.  — Further  information  on  the  article  with  Proper  Names  is 
given  in  §§  73,  74,  76. 

4.  The  English  Indefinite  Article  is  replaced  by  the  Definite 
Article  in  German  when  used  distributively  (=  each),  as: 

gtoeimal  be§  twice  a year. 

®rei  Staler  bie  ©He,  three  dollars  a yard. 

5.  The  Indefinite  Article  is  omitted  before  the  unqualified 
predicate  after  fern  or  toerben,  as : 

©r  ift  (tourbe)  ©olbat,  he  is  (became)  a soldier ; 

but: 

©r  ift  cut  ta^ferer  ©olbat,  he  is  a brave  soldier. 

6.  (a)  The  Definite  Article  replaces  the  Possessive 
Adjective  when  no  ambiguity  would  result  as  to  the  pos- 
sessor, as : 

©r  ftecfte  bie  §cmb  in  bie  £afcfje. 

He  put  bis  hand  into  his  pocket; 

©r  fcfmttelt  ben 
He  shakes  his  head. 


62 


LESSON  XII. 


[5  44 


©eben  ©ie  mir  bie  §anb,  Give  me  your  hand. 

( b ) With  parts  of  the  person,  clothing,  etc.,  the  Dative  of 
the  Personal  Pronoun  -f-  Definite  Article  replace  the  Pos- 
sessive Adjective,  as : 

©in  ©tem  fiel  iljm  auf  ben  $opf, 

A stone  fell  on  his  head ; 

©in  9iagel  I)at  mtr  ben  9to cf  gerrtffen, 

A nail  has  torn  my  coat. 

Note.  — If  the  subject  is  the  possessor,  the  rejlexive  pronoun  is 
used,  as : 

(Sr  Ijat  ftcl)  in  ben  ginger  gefdjnitten,  He  has  cut  his  finger. 


Vocabulary. 


to  cost,  foften 
hurt,  wound,  berlei$en 
cry,  weep,  toeinen 
draw,  jeicfynen 

doctor,  physician,  ber  Sfrjt* 
axe,  bie  # A K £ t 
mountain,  hill,  ber  33erg 
lead-pencil,  ber  SSIeifttft 
iron,  ba3  ©ifen 
window,  b genfter 
wing,  ber  glugel 
purse,  ber  ©clbbeutel 
hope,  bie  §offnung 
merchant,  ber  ^aufmann 
farewell,  (ba3)  Sebetoof?! 


master,  ber  SJteifter 
Mont  Blanc,  ber  9Jlont  33lanc 
music,  bie  3JUtfif 
coat,  ber  9?oc!* 
Schiller-street,  bie  ©cfjiller* 
ftraf$e  J <2  i ,r  $e 

tailor,  ber  ©cfyneiber 
cloth,  ba§  ©ucf) 
exercise,  practice,  bie  Ubung 
hot,  be if* 
light,  leicf)t 
dear,  teuer 
as,  when,  al3 
often,  oft 


EXERCISE  XII. 

A.  1.  ilbung  mafyt  ben  3Jteifter.  2.  ©ie  SJtufif  unb  bie  9)?alerei 
finb  ^unfte.  3.  $inber,  fyabt  if>r  eure  2tufgaben  gemac£)t?  3a/ 
mir  fyaben  fie  gemacbt.  4.  ©er  9Jtont  33Ianc  ift  ein  23erg  in  ber 
©cfymeij.  5.  3ft  biefe£  £ucfy  teuer?  3a/  ^ foftet  brei  X^aler 


§44] 


USE  OF  ARTICLES. 


63 


bie  @lle.  6.  3)te  9Jtutter  fc^icft  tfjre  Kinber  jur  ©$ule.  7.  §aben 
©ie  ©olb  in  2$rem  ©elbbeutel?  fyabe  !ein  ©olb,  aber  icfy 
fyabe  ©tlber.  8.  2Ba§  lernt  ba£  30?abd)en?  ©ie  lernt  tljre  2luf* 
gabe.  9.  T>er  33ater  fcfjutielte  feinem  ©ofme  bie  iganb  unb  fagie 
ifym  Sebetootyl.  10.  S)ie  gliigel  ber  SSogel  ftnb  fe^r  Ieicfyt  unb 
ftarf.  11.  §at  ber  ©djneiber  S^ren  Stotf  na d)  £aufe  gefcfjicft? 
12.  Slein,  er  fyat  iljn  nod)  nicfyt  gef  deleft,  aber  er  totrb  ifyrt  morgen 
fd;iden.  13.  Unfere  ©Item  reiften  in  ®eut[cf)lanb  unb  in  ber 
©cfytoeij.  14.  guli  ift  ba§  SSetter  oft  fefyr  fyetft.  15.  ®a§ 
©ifen  luirb  rot,  toenn  e§  fjeiji  toirb.  16.  ©lauben  ©ie,  baft  id} 
9f ed£)t  fyabe?  17.  Karl  uerle^te  fi d)  bie  §anb,  al§  er  mit  einer 
2ljt  arbeitete.  18.  %d)  frmrbe  ©olbat  toerben,  toenn  id)  alt  genug 
todre.  19.  2Bir  tulirben  greunbe  gcfyabi  tyaben,  toenn  loir  reic^ 
geiuefen  todren. 

j B.  1.  Gold  is  yellow,  but  silver  is  white.  2.  Mary  is 
studying  music  and  painting.  3.  Are  your  parents  still 
living  in  Frederick-Street  ? 4.  No,  they  are  now  living  in 
Schiller-Street.  5.  Mont  Blanc  is  a mountain  in  Switzerland. 
6.  The  girl  is  crying;  she  has  hurt  her  hand.  7.  Is  your 
father  a doctor  ? No,  he  is  a merchant.  8.  Glass  is  trans- 
parent, and  we  make  windows  of  it.  9.  What  are  you  doing 
with  your  lead-pencil  ? I am  drawing  a flower  with  it.  10. 
The  emperor  is  satisfied  with  his  generals.  11.  I blame  you, 
because  you  are  not  industrious.  12.  What  are  you  drawing 
now  ? I am  drawing  a bird.  13.  Why  are  you  crying,  my 
child?  14.  The  doctor  shook  his  head,  for  he  had  no  hope. 
15.  Would  you  buy  a horse,  if  you  were  rich  ? 16.  Miss  B. 

has  sent  her  mother  a present.  17.  The  girl  will  visit  her 
parents. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XII. 

1.  1st  das  Gold  weisz  ? 2.  Weshalb  weint  das  Madchen? 

3.  Werden  Sie  sich  ein  Haus  kaufen  ? 4.  Sind  Sie  Soldat?  5. 
Wo  wohnen  Sie  jetzt  ? 6.  Was  machen  Sie  mit  Ihrem  Gelde? 


64 


LESSON  XIII. 


LESSON  XIII. 

CONSTRUCTION  OF  SENTENCES:  PLACE  OF  OBJECTS,  AD- 
VERBS,  etc.  - INDIRECT  NARRATION.  - PREPOSITIONS 
GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE  ONLY. 

45.  Rules  for  Position  of  Objects,  Adverbs,  etc. 

Rule  i.  {a)  Pronouns  first  of  all,  unless  governed  by 
a preposition,  when  they  come  after  all  other  objects,  ad- 
verbs, etc. 

{b)  Adverbs  or  Adverbial  Expressions  of  Time  precede 
everything  except  Pronouns  without  Prepositions,  thus  : 

1 2 3 4 5 

{Germ.)  fcfjicfte  iljm  geffern  (biefe  Shufje)  einen  Srtef, 

1 2 3 4 5 

{Engl?)  I sent  him  a letter  yesterday  (this  week); 
but: 

1 2 3 4 5 

{Germ?)  fcf)icfte  geftcrn  einen  Srtef  an  iljn, 

1 2 3 4 5 

{Engl.)  I sent  a letter  to  him  yesterday; 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

{Germ?)  %$)  fyabe  c£  fjeitfe  metner  ©cfytoefter  gefcfyicft, 

1 2 3 4 5 G 

{Engl.)  I have  sent  it  to  my  sister  to-day. 

Rule  2.  Of  Nouns,  persons  (unless  governed  by  pre- 
positions) before  things , as  : 

1 2 3 4 5 

{Germ?)  $5$  fcfyicfte  geftern  meincrn  Safer  einen  Srief, 

1 2 3 4 6 

{Engl.)  I sent  my  father  a letter  yesterday; 
but: 

1 2 3 4 5 

{Germ?)  fcfncfte  ge[tern  einen  Srief  an  meinen  Safer, 

1 2 8 4 5 

(Engl.)  I sent  a letter  to  my  father  yesterday. 


46] 


PLACE  OF  OBJECTS,  ETC. 


65 


Rule  3.  Of  Pronouns,  Personal  before  all  other  Pro- 
nouns, as : 

3$  Ijabe  iljm  bug  (Demonstr.  Pron.)  gegeben, 

I have  given  him  that. 

Rule  4.  Of  Personal  Pronouns,  Direct  Object  before 
Indirect  Object,  as : 

1 2 3 4 6 

{Germ.)  fyabe  eg  tfpu  gegeben, 

1 2 8 4 5 

( Engl. ) I have  given  it  to  him. 

Rule  5.  Adverbs  of  place,  cause  and  manner  follow  ob- 
jects in  the  order  named,  as  : 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

{Germ.)  @r  Ijat  bag  SBucfj  ju  |>aufc  feljr  ficipg  ftubiert, 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

(. Engli ) He  has  studied  the  book  very  diligently 

7 

at  home. 

Remember:  i.  That  in  compound  tenses  all  these  objects, 
adverbs,  etc.,  come  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle  or 
infinitive. 

2.  That  any  of  these  members  of  a sentence  may  occupy  the 
Jirst  place  instead  of  the  subject,  especially  an  adverb  of  time, 
etc.,  and  that  the  subject  (see  § 20,  Obs.  2)  is  then  thrown 

after  the  verb,  as : 

1 2 3 4 5 

©eftern  fcfyid'te  id)  iljm  etnen  23rtef. 

1 2 8 4 5 

2>icfe  fdjirfte  id;  etnen  23rtef  an  tfyn. 


46.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  only. 


2lu$,  nufter,  bet,  t nit, 
tt ad),  feit,  bon,  $u 


govern  the  Dative  Case. 


dug,  (1)  out  of  (motion),  as:  He  came  out  of  the  house  (aug 
bent  §auje). 


65 


LESSON  XIII. 


[§48 


(2)  of  ( made  of),  as:  This  house  is  built  of  wood  (ott8 

§oIj). 

(3)  from  ( origin ),  as:  He  comes  from  England  (ait£ 

(Snglanb)  ; from  the  town  (au3  bcr  ©tabt). 

(4)  from  (< cause ),  as : I did  it  from  fear  (au§  $urd;t). 

GUjjer,  (1)  outside  of  (rest),  as : The  table  is  standing  out- 
side of  the  room  (au§er  bent  ^burner). 

(2)  except,  besides,  but,  as:  I had  nothing  except 

(besides,  but)  my  stick  (au§er  rnetncm  ©tode). 

6ct,  (1)  (near)  by,  as : The  chair  stands  (near)  by  the  table 
(bei  bent  or  6etm£ifdje). 

(2)  at  (the  house , etc.,  of,  = Fr.  ekes),  with,  as  : He 

lives  at  the  house  of  (or:  with)  his  uncle  (or: 
at  his  uncle’s),  er  toofmt  bet  feinetn  Ditfel. 

(3)  about  (one’s  person),  with,  as : I have  no  money 

about  (with)  me  (bci  tntr). 

tnit,  with,  as  : He  is  coming  with  (along  with)  his  friend 
(wit  feinent  gteunbe) ; he  struck  the  dog  with  a 
stick  (tnit  etnent  ©tocfe). 

Had),  (1)  after  (time,  order),  as : He  arrived  after  his  brother 
(nad)  feinent  ©ruber). 

(2)  to  (with  names  of  places ),  as  : He  is  going  to  Quebec 

(uadj  Quebec);  to  England (mujj  (gnglanb);  home- 
wards) (natf)  §aufe). 

(3)  according  to  (often  follows  its  case  in  this  sense), 

as : This  is  wrong  according  to  my  opinion  (nad) 
metner  SJleinung,  or  meiner  SOteinung  narfj). 

felt,  since,  as  : He  has  not  been  here  since  the  war  (felt  bent 
$rtege) ; felt  ^unbert  for  the  last  hundred 

years. 


§46]  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE  ONLY.  67 

(1)  from,  as : He  has  just  come  from  dinner  (turn  bem, 

1 10m  S)iittag3ejfen). 

(2)  of,  as  : We  were  speaking  of  our  mother  (bon  unferct 

STiuiter). 

(3)  ^ (w^b  personal  agent  after  the  passive  voice),  as : 

Children  are  loved  by  their  parents  (bon  ifyreit 
@liern). 

JU,  (1)  to  (persons),  as : He  went  to  his  friend,  or  to  his 
friend’s  (ju  feinein  ^reunbe)  ; he  spoke  to  me  (ju 
mir). 

(2)  to  (places,  if  not  proper  names  ; see  na$,  above),  as: 

He  was  going  to  the  town  (jn  ber,  or  jnr  Stabt). 

(3)  at  (with  proper  names  of  towns  only),  as : He  lives 

at  Ottawa  (ju  Dttatoa);  at  home  (ju  §aufe). 

Remarks.  — i.  Set,  bon  and  ju  (and  sometimes  auf$er)  are 
contracted  with  the  Dative  Sing.  Masc.  and  Neuter  of  the 
unemphasized  Definite  Article,  thus  : bet  bem=  betm,  bon  bem  = 
bom,  ju  bem  = jum ; ju  is  also  contracted  with  the  Dat.  Sing. 
Fern.,  thus : ju  ber  ='  jitr. 

2.  The  -e  of  the  Dat.  Sing,  is  never  used  when  a preposi- 
tion (except  ju)  stands  before  a substantive  without  an  article, 
pronoun  or  adjective  preceding,  as:  cm3  §olj,  of  wood;  mit 
g[etf$,  on  purpose ; but  nndj  §aufe,  home  ; ju  §aufe,  at  home. 

3.  Observe  the  following : 

(Germ.)  Eer  33rtef  metncS  DnfelS, 

(Engl.)  The  letter  of  my  uncle  = My  uncle’s  letter. 

(Germ.)  Eer  33rtef  bon  moment  Dnfel, 

(Engl.)  The  letter  from  my  uncle. 

The  English  preposition  of  with  a substantive  must  gen- 
erally be  rendered  in  German  by  a Genitive  case  without  a 
preposition,  whenever  it  can  be  turned  into  the  English  Posses- 
sive case,  as  above ; otherwise  by  bon,  as : 


63 


LESSON  XIII. 


[§46 


He  was  speaking  of  his  mother  (turn  I’cincr  3Jt utter). 

4.  Observe  also  the  following : 

(Engl.)  Show  the  book  to  me  = Show  me  the  book, 

(Germ.)  .geigen  ©ie  inif  bag  23  ud;  (Dat.  without  Preposition). 

The  English  preposition  to  with  a substantive  must  be 
rendered  in  German  by  the  Dative  without  a preposition  when- 
ever the  subst.  can  be  turned  into  the  English  Indirect  Objec- 
tive, as  above ; otherwise  (generally)  by  the  preposition  ju,  as: 
He  spoke  to  me  (ju  mir). 


Vocabulary. 


to  answer,  antioorten 
honour,  efyren 
show,  jeigen 
picture,  bag  23ilb 
letter,  ber  SSrief 
Germany,  ©eutfcfslanb 
present,  bag  ©efdjenf 
glass,  bag  ©lag 
war,  ber  $rieg 


dinner,  bag  9)lit'taggeffen 
journey,  bie  Dieife 
Roman,  ber  Corner 
aunt,  bie  2kmte 
thankful,  grateful,  banfbar 
(gov.  dat.) 

ready,  finished,  fertig 
quiet,  still,  ftitt 
there,  ba 


Idiom : It  is  I,  3d)  bin  cd* 


EXERCISE  XIII. 

A.  1.  <3eit  bem  $riege  firtb  meine  ©tftlociger  feftr  arm.  2. 
SSir  ftaben  ung  jiuei  §aufer  in  ber  ©tabt  gefauft.  3.  28 o ift  beine 
Sfufgabe?  §ier  ift  fie.  4.  2Bir  marten  nad)  bem  SRittaggeffen 
einen  Spajiergang  mit  unfcreit  ©aften.  5.  2Jiein  23gter  Ijat  mir 
ein  ©efdjenf  gefdjidt  uttb  id)  bin  ifmt  bafiir  fefjr  banfbar.  6.  23ift 
bu  mit  beiner  Strbeit  fertig  ? ■JJein,  idf)  bin  nod)  nidjt  bamit  ferttg. 
7.  2Bir  toerben  morgen  mit  gljnen  nad;  2Rontreal  reifen.  8.  ®arf 
lernt  feit  bier  SRonaten  ®eutfd).  9.  „©et5t  eud;  unb  feib  ftiff,"  fagte 
bie  2Rutter  ju  if>ren  2u5d)tern.  10.  2Biirben  Sie  biel  fiir  biefe 
Sutler  bejaljfen  ? gcfi  tourbe  fiinfiEIjaler  bafiir  bejaljlen.  11. 


§46]  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  DATIVE.  69 

©inb  bte  3Kabd^en  ju  £aufe?  3 a,  tyre  9J?utter  ftyidte  fie  urn  fiinf 
lll)r  nacfy  §aufe.  12.  @[;re  beinen  SSater  unb  betne  Shutter.  13. 
S3et  meinem  Dnfel  rebeten  fair  immer  bid  bom  $rtege.  14.  ©inb 
©ie  e§,  §err  ©tymibt?  $a,  id)  bin  e§.  15.  §aben  ©ie  in 
©eutfd;Ianb  bid  SSergmigen  gei)abt?  ©ie  fagen  nicfyt  bid 
bon  Sfyrer  SReife.  16.  33ei  3^men  I)aben  immer  biel  33er* 
gniigen.  17.  ©iefer  SJZann  lobt  fid)  ju  biel.  18.  3JJeine  Jante 
if i i efct  bei  mir;  id;  toerbe  tyr  bie  ©tabt  jeigen.  19.  SJiein  Sruber 
itnb  meine  ©d)ftefter  finb  gu  £aufe.  20.  23aS  toiirben  ©ie  fur 
biefe  ©Infer  bejctyten  ? 3d)  tolirbe  nid;t  biel  baflir  bejctylen. 

B . 1.  Here  is  my  uncled  letter.  2.  Is  he  for  me  or  against 
me  ? 3.  Our  servant  is  from  Germany.  4.  4 Buy  me  an 
apple/  said  the  child  to  its  mother.  5.  Have  you  sold  your 
horses  ? 6.  The  teacher  speaks  of  the  gods  of  the  Romans. 

7.  Charles,  you  have  answered  well,  sit  down.  8.  My  son 
always  sends  me  the  newspaper  from  Chicago.  9.  My  friend 
showed  me  his  pictures.  10.  Buy  me  this  ring ; it  is  mag- 
nificent. 11.  Who  is  in  the  garden  ? It  is  she.  12.  I be- 
lieve that  Charles  has  bought  himself  a hat.  13.  Here  is  the 
letter  from  my  uncle.  14.  I am  ashamed  of  you,  because  you 
are  not  industrious.  15.  My  father  would  send  me  to  the 
city,  if  I were  old  enough. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XIII. 

1.  Weshalb  schamen  Sie  sich  meiner  ? 2.  1st  es  Karl  oder 
sein  Bruder  ? 3.  Seit  wann  lernen  Sie  Deutsch  ? 4.  Wer  hat 
mir  diese  Zeitung  geschickt?  5.  Was  machte  ich  nach  dem 
Mittagsessen  i 6.  Wo  hat  mein  Vater  dieses  Buch  gekauft? 


70 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  A. 


[§§  47- 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  A. 

ADDITIONAL  REMARKS  ON  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  AND 
PREPOSITIONS. 

47.  Pronouns  in  Address. 

1.  The  pronouns  tJU  and  tljt  are  the  usual  pronouns  of  address  in 
foetry  and  the  drama , if)V  being  used  for  one  person  or  more,  as : 

2)er  SBecfjer  ift  bcin, 

Unb  biefeit  S^ing  nod)  bcftimm’  id)  bir, 

The  goblet  is  thine, 

And  this  ring  too  I’ll  keep  for  thee. 

(Schiller,  „$er  $cm$er.*) 

2a6t,  $ater,  genug  fein  ba§  gvaufamc  @piel. 

(5r  t)at  eud)  beftanbert,  ioa8  feiner  beftebt, 

# Hub  fonnt  i(jr  be3  ©elufteu  nid)t  cabmen,  u.  f.  to., 

Enough,  father,  of  this  cruel  sport. 

He  has  ventured  for  you  what  none  will  venture, 

And  if  you  cannot  subdue  the  desire  of  your  heart,  etc.  (Ibid,) 

2.  @r  and  Sie  (3.  sing.)  were  formerly  regularly  used  as  pronouns  of 
address  towards  inferiors,  with  the  verb  agreeing  in  3.  sing.,  and  they 
are  often  found  so  used  in  the  classics,  being  spelt  with  a capital. 
Their  use  may  imply  contempt;  so  Faust  says  to  his  servant  Wagner, 
who  is  otherwise  addressed  as  „if)r"  : 

0ei  (Sr  fern  fd)dlenlauter  STfjor, 

Don’t  be  a jingling  fool.  (Goethe,  ^auft.") 

3.  (Sr  and  @ie,  also  il)r,  are  still  used  in  complimentary  address,  correspon- 
ding to  the  polite  use  of  ©ie  (3.  plur.),  by  people  of  the  lower  orders. 

48.  The  forms  meine§gleicf)Cl1,  beineSgleicfjeit,  etc.,  = 4 a person,  or 
persons,  like  me,  you,’  etc.  (vulg.  ‘the  like  of  me  ’),  are  used  as  indeclinable 
substantives,  either  as  object  or  as  predicate,  as  : 

2Bir  toerbett  feincgglcidjen  nte  toicber  feben, 

We  ne’er  shall  look  upon  his  like  again. 

£>u  bift  nid)t  nmne£gleid)en, 

You  are  not  (a  person)  like  me  (my  equal). 

(For  the  use  of  be$gleid)en,  bergletdjen,  see  §§97,  139.) 

49.  In  addressing  persons  of  rank,  the  proper  title,  as : ®naben, 

•Your  Honour’;  (Sure  (abbrev.  (£u>.)  (§£ceUen$,  ‘Your  Excellency’;  (5ur? 


PREPOSITIONS  WITH  DATIVE. 


51] 


7 T 


2)urcf)faucfjt,  ‘Your  Serene  Highness’;  (Sure  Sftajeftat,  ‘ Your  Majesty,’ 
etc.,  is  used,  also  without  the  poss.  adj.,  and  with  the  verb  in  the  plur. 
It  was  this  plur.  use  of  complimentary  titles  that  gave  rise  to  the  use  of 
©ie  as  the  pronoun  of  polite  address.  The  old  forms  3f)ro,  SDero,  are 
now  obsolete. 

50.  Prepositions  with  Accusative. 

1.  The  preposition  fonfccr  takes  the  accusative^  but  is  of  rare  occurrence. 

2.  ©egen  has  an  obsolete  form  gett,  now  used  only  in  certain  phrases, 
as:  geit  pummel,  heavenwards;  gcu  Corbett,  northwards,  etc. 

3.  £)f)lte  has  a dative  in  the  phrase  ofynefcott,  ‘ at  any  rate.* 

4.  S8i§  may  be  followed  by  another  preposition,  indicating  motion  or 
direction  to  (itctd),  gu,  an,  auf,  etc.) ; if  this  preposition  is  one  governing 
dat.  or  acc.,  it  will  always  take  the  accusative  when  combined  with  bi§,  as : 


The  following  additional  prepositions  take  the  Dative  only : 

1.  SBimten,  within  (of  time),  as:  SBiltneit  gttfei  Stagen,  within  two  days. 
Notes.  — 1.  Simten  sometimes  governs  the  genitive. 

2.  93tnncn  is  used  of  time  only;  innerljalb  (see  § ) of  space  and  time. 


4-  ©Cgenu&er,  opposite  (to),  follows  the  case,  as  : 

$cm  £f)ore-gegemiber,  opposite  the  gate. 

Note.  — The  case  is  sometimes  placed  between  the  two  parts  of  the  preposition,  as: 
gegen  bent  SC^ore  tiber ; but  this  is  not  to  be  imitated. 

5.  ©Cmtifb  according  to,  agreeably  to,  precedes  or  follows  its  case,  ass 

©einem  2Bunfd)e  gentdjg  (or  gemdg  feinem  SBunfcfje), 
Agreeably  to  his  desire. 

6.  ©leicf),  like,  precedes  or  follows  its  case,  as : 

©ie  ladjelte  gfeidj  einem  (Srtgel  (einent  (§ngel  gletdf))# 

She  smiled  like  an  angel. 


(Sr  ging  bis  an’S  £f)or,  he  went  as  far  as  the  gate. 


51. 


Prepositions  with  Dative. 


# I Seiner  9?eiguitg  entgegen  (guroiber), 


l contrary  to  my  inclination. 


7.  9?a(f)flor 
Stntddjfl 


j-  next  to  (1)  of  proximity  (=  Itcbetl),  as : 


LESSON  XIV. 


[§§5I- 


(£r  jag  nacf)ft  mtr  (or  mtr  aunadjff). 

He  sat  next  to  me. 

(2)  of  succession,  as : 

9?ddjft  kern  Men  ttebt  er  bte  G$:ljve, 

Next  to  life  he  loves  honour. 

Note.  — 3uniicf)ft  usually  follows  its  case ; rttidjft  is  the  commoner  of  the  two  as  pre- 
position, especially  in  the  senses  under  (2). 

9^  Stunt  1 t0£ether  with>  alops  with>as : 

$er  §err  fam  rtcbfi  feincrn  greunbe, 

The  gentleman  came  along  with  his  friend. 

2)er  ter  famt  jeinen  $ittbent, 

The  father  together  with  his  children. 

Note  i.  Distinguish  nebft,  along  with,  and  rte&ett  (alongside  of,  near). 

2.  <Samt  is  used  of  objects  naturally  belonging  together,  as  above. 

10.  Cfo  is  poetical  and  obsolete  for  fiber,  and  denotes: 

(1)  above  (of position ),  as:  £)b  bent  2f(tare,  above  the  altar. 

(2)  about,  concerning,  as:  Gmtrilftet  ob  biefettt  5re^e^/  indignant 

about  (at)  this  outrage. 

Note.  — In  the  latter  sense  it  also  takes  a genitive. 


LESSON  XIV. 

CONJUGATION  OF  feilt,  to  be.  - DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTAN- 
TIVES. -WEAK  OR  -it  STEMS:- tiwfie  MODEL. 


Principal  Parts. 

Pres.  Infin.  join  Impf.  Indic.  ioor  Past  Part.  gettJffcR 


52. 


Paradigm  of  feilt,  to  be. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


id)  6tn,  I am 


tef)  fet,  I (may)  be,  etc. 


bu  Sift,  thou  art 
er  tft,  he  is 


bu  feieft 
er  fet 


toir  finb,  we  are 
tfyr  feib,  ye  are 
fte  finb,  they  are 


toir  feien 
ifir  feiet 
fie  feien 


52] 


PARADIGM  OF  fein. 


73 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 

Imperfect. 


i$  ttmr,  I was 

bu  toarft,  thou  wast 
er  toar,  he  was 
toir  toaren,  we  were 
if;r  toaret,  ye  were 
fie  toaren,  they  were 


id)  toiire,  (if)  I were  (might 
be),  etc. 

bu  toareft,  thou  wert 
er  toiire,  he  were 
toir  toiiren,  we  were 
il)r  boaret,  ye  were 
fie  toiiren,  they  were 


Perfect. 


(Pres,  of  fein  -f-  P.  Part.) 

I have  been,  etc.  I (may)  have  been,  etc. 


id)  ton 
bit  toft 
er  ift 
toir  finb 
il)r  fetb 
fie  finb 


gemcfeu 


0CU)efeu 


I had  been,  etc. 
id)  its  at 
bu  toarft 
er  toar 
toir  toaren 
tl)r  toar et 
fie  toaren 


id)  fct 
bu  feieft 
er  fei 
toir  feien 
il)r  f eiet 
fie  feien 

Pluperfect. 

(Imperf.  of  fein  *f  P*  Part.) 

I had  (might  have)  been, 


► gctoefen 


id)  toiire 
bu  toareft 
er  toiire 
toir  toaren 
ibr  toaret 
fie  toitren 


[etc. 


y geusefen 


Future. 

(Pres,  of  tuerben  4-  Infin.  of  fein.) 

I shall  be,  etc.  I shall  be,  etc. 


bu  toirft 


bu  toerbeft 


74 


LESSON  XIV. 


Indicative, 
er  toirb 
fair  toerben 
iljr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


fcitt 


fcin 


I shall  have  been,  etc. 
i$  toerbe 
bu  Voirft 
er  toirb 
toir  toerben 
i^r  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


gctocfcn  fcin 


gctocfen  fcin 


Simple. 

(Impf.  Subj.  of  tt)erben  + Infin. 
of  fein.) 

I should  be,  etc. 
id;  toiirbe 
bu  toiirbeft 
cr  toiirbe 
lr>tr  toiirben 
i^r  toiirbet 
fie  toiirben 


> fcin 


Subjunctive. 

er  toerbe 
toir  toerben 
iljr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 

Future  Perfect. 

(Future  of  fcin  + P.  Part.) 

I shall  have  been,  etc. 
id)  toerbe 
bu  toerbeft 
er  toerbe 
toir  toerben 
iljr  toerbet 
fie  toerben 

Conditional. 

Compound. 

(Simple  Cond.  of  fcin  + Past 
Part.) 

I should  have  been,  etc. 
idj  toiirbe 
bu  toiirbeft 
er  toiirbe 
toir  toiirben 
iljr  toiirbet 
fie  toiirben 


gctocfen  fcin 


Imperative, 
fei  (bu),  be  (thou) 
feib  (iljr),  be  (ye) 


Indicative. 

(ju)  fein,  (to)  be 

gctocfcn  (ju)  fein,  to  have  been. 

Participles. 

Past . gensefett,  been 


Pres,  feienb,  being 

Remarks.  — i.  Observe  the  absence  of  the  Subjunctive -e 
in  the  i,  and  3.  sing.  Pres. 


53]  use  of  fein  as  auxiliary  of  tense.  75 

2.  The  above  paradigm  shows  the  use  of  fetlt  in  forming 
its  own  perfect  tenses,  in  precisely  the  same  way  as  fyabert  is 
used  with  most  verbs,  ©eiit  is  used  in  the  same  way  with  the 
verbs  mentioned  in  the  following  Section. 

53.  Use  of  fein  as  Auxiliary  of  Tense. 

©eitl  replaces  Ijaben  as  auxiliary  of  the  perfect  tenses  with 
the  following  neuter  verbs  : 

(a)  With  those  expressing  a change  of  condition,  as: 

fterben,  die  toacfyfen,  grow 

genefen,  recover  (from  illness)  tnerben,  become. 

( b ) With  neuter  verbs  of  motion  when  a change  of 
place  is  specified  or  implied,  as : 

fasten,  drive,  go  (in  a conveyance)  fommen,  come 

geljen,  go,  walk  jiefyen,  move,  go,  proceed. 

(c)  ©cin,  to  be;  Bleiben,  to  remain;  Begegnen,  to  meet; 
folgen,  to  follow. 

( d ) The  impersonal  verbs : gelingen,  gluien,  to  succeed; 
gefdjeljen,  to  happen. 

Remarks. — i.  The  proper  auxiliary  to  use  with  such 
verbs  is  always  given  in  the  dictionary. 

2.  Other  verbs  of  this  sort  only  take  fein  when  the  change 
of  place  is  specified. 

3.  Most  of  them  (except  fommen)  take  fyaben  when  they 
denote  an  action  merely,  and  not  a specific  change  of  place,  as: 

6r  fyat  biel  gereift,  he  has  travelled  a great  deal. 

4.  Compounds  do  not  necessarily  take  the  same  auxiliary 
as  the  simple  verb.  Thus,  Begefyen,  being  transitive,  takes 
fyaben,  the  prefix  changing  the  nature  of  the  verb. 


76 

54. 


LESSON  XIV. 


54- 


Declension  of  ber  ^italic,  the  boy. 


Singular. 

Nom.  ber  $nabe,  the  boy 
Gen.  be£  Slnaben,  the  boy’s,  of 
the  boy 

Dat.  bem  $naben,  (to,  for)  the 
boy 

Acc.  ben  $naben,  the  boy 


Plural. 

bie  $naben,  the  boys 
ber  ^nabett,  the  boys’,  of 
the  boys 

ben  $naben,  (to,  for)  the 
boys 

bie  $naben,  the  boys 


Observe  : i.  All  cases  end  in  -n,  except  Nom.  Sing. 
2.  No  Umlaut  added  in  Plural. 


3.  The  only  change  is  the  addition  of  -n. 


Remark. — The  Plural  ox-en  is  a remnant  of  the  -n  declen- 
sion in  English. 

55.  Substantives  ending  in  a consonant  add  -en,  as : 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  ber  ©raf,  the  count  bte  ©rafcn,  the  counts 

Gen.  be3  ©rafcn,  of  the  count  ber  ©rafeil,  of  the  counts 

Dat.  bem  ©rafcn,  (to,  for)  the  ben  ©rafcn,  (to,  for)  the 

count  counts 

Acc.  ben  ©rafcn,  the  count  bie  ©rafcn,  the  counts 

56.  Feminines  do  not  vary  in  the  singular,  as : 

Smgular.  Plural. 

Nom.  bie  Slume,  the  flower  bie  Slumett,  the  flowers 

Gen.  ber  SSIumc,  of  the  flower  ber  SSIumen,  of  the  flowers 

Dat.  ber  33Iumc,  (to,  for)  the  ben  S3lumen,  (to,  for)  the 

flower  flowers 

Acc.  bie  SBhtme,  the  flower  bie  Slumen,  the  flowers. 

57.  In  this  way  are  declined  : 

1.  All  masculines  ending  in-c,  except  ber  $afe,  cheese  (see 
§ 17),  and  the  doubtful  ones  in  § 61. 


57] 


declension  : — $nabe  model. 


77 


2.  Certain  masculines  which  have  dropped  the  final  -c,  as: 

ber  23ar,  bear  ber  Jpelb,  hero 

ber  Sauer,  peasant  ber  ^err,  gentleman,  master 

ber  Gfyrift,  Christian  ber  §irt(e),  herdsman,  shep- 

ber  ©efefi(e),  fellow,  companion,  herd 

journeyman  ber  SFlenfcf),  man  (human  be- 

ber  @raf,  count  ing  = Lat.  homo) 

A full  List  of  these  Substantives  is  given  in  App.  F. 

3.  All  feminines,  except  SJtutter,  £o$ter  (§  17,  3),  the 
monosyllables  under  § 22,  3,  and  those  in  -ni$  and  -lat 
(22, 4)- 

4.  No  Neuters  (but  see  §§  62,  63). 

5.  Foreign  Masculines  accented  on  the  last  syllable,  except 
those  in  -al,  -ait,  -at,  etc.  (§22,  6). 


Further  Examples : 

Like  $na&e : 

Singular . 

Plural. 

n.  ber  Sole,  messenger 

g.  d.  a.  93oten  n. 

G.  d.  a.  Soten 

ber  hare 

Safen 

£afett 

ber  3tiefe,  giant 

Siiefen 

3?iefen 

ber  SRuffe,  Russian 

Buffett 

Sluffen 

Like  ©raf : 

n.  ber  23ar,  bear 

g.  d.  a.  SBarctt  N. 

g.  d.  a.  Sarcit 

ber  fyiirft,  prince 

giirftctt 

giirften 

ber  $elb,  hero 

£elben 

£>elben 

ber  -JRenfcfy,  man 

■Menfcfyett 

9-k'enfc^ett 

ber  ©tubent',  student 

©tubentett 

©tubenteit 

ber  ©olbat',  soldier 

©oibaten 

©olbatcit 

Remark  i.  “Der  §err,  gentleman,  master,  lord,  adds-n  only 
in  the  sing.,  but  -ctt  in  plur. 


78 


LESSON  XIV. 


Singular. 

n.  g.  d.  a.  ©hmte 
^iicfje 
©djbnljett 
£f>at 

SBiffenfd^aft 


Like  23Iume : 

Plural. 

n.  g.  d.  a.  Sttumeit 
^irdjett 
<Sct)bnl?eiteit 
Staten 
SBiffenfd^aften 


Remark  2.  Feminines  in  -el,  -ft  add  -tt  only  in  the  Plur.,  as: 
Sing,  bie  $eber,  pen  Plur.  ^ebertt 

bte  ©abel,  fork  ©abeltt 

bte  ©cfytoefter,  sister  ©cfytoefterit 

Remark  3.  Feminines  in  -in  double  the  n in  the  plur.,  as : 
Sing,  bte  ©raftit,  countess  Plur.  ©rafintteit 


Vocabulary. 


admire,  betounbern 
hasten,  eilen 
hunt,  jagen 

dwell,  reside,  live,  hiofmcn 
astrologer,  ber  Slftrolog' 
lady,  bie  Lame 
influence,  ber  ©n'flufj* 
heathen,  ber  £>etbe 
comet,  ber  hornet' 
landscape,  bte  2anbfd)aft 


monarch,  ber  9Jlonar<$' 
news,  bie  $RadE)rtd;t 
nephew,  ber  -Jleffe 
planet,  ber  ipianet' 
Prussian,  ber  $reu{je 
raven,  ber  SRabe 
valley,  ba§ 
happy,  gludlid) 
when,  al§,  toenn 
when  ? inann  ? 


58.  When  = ItiCttlt  always  with  Present,  Perfect  and 
Future ; and  also  with  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect,  of  a 
habitual  or  repeated  occurrence  (=  whenever),  as : 

I always  rose,  when  (i.  e.  whenever,  tocittt)  the  sun  rose. 
When  = ttl§  with  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  only , of  a 
single , definite  occurrence,  as  : 

I rose  yesterday , when  (ol§)  the  sun  rose. 


5g]  DECLENSION  I — Jhtabe  MODEL.  79 

When?  interrogative  = tt) unit?  as: 

When  was  your  father  here? 

SBantt  tear  3ityr  SSater  f?ter  ? 

Note.— Remember  that  menu  also  = “if.” 

59.  When  a conditional  or  “if”  sentence  precedes  the 
principal  sentence  on  which  it  depends,  the  principal  sentence 
is  usually  introduced  by  the  particle  fo,  which  is  not  to  be 
translated  into  English,  or  counted  as  a member  of  the  sent. 

Note.  — A principal  sentence  preceded  by  a subordinate  clause  has 
the  subject  after  the  verb,  the  subord.  clause  being  reckoned  as  a single 
idea  (see  § 20),  as : SDSettn  id)  @etb  tjatte,  fo  murbe  id)  greunbe  Ijabett. 

EXERCISE  XIV. 

A.  1.  SSir  toerben  morgen  gu  unferer  ©ante  in  Dttatoa  reifen. 
2.  ®ie  Stolen  bel  2)tonarctyen  finb  mit  ber  Stactyrictyt  natty  fjtoril 
geeilt.  3.  ®ie  2lrme  einel  bRicfen  finb  fetyr  lang  unb  ftarf.  4. 
$ie  33aume  in  biefen  SBalbern  finb  fetyr  fctyon  getoefen,  after  jetyt 
finb  bie  flatter  getb  getoorben.  5.  ®er  3Sater  ift  in  ber  ©tabt 
getoefen  unb  tyat  feinen  $naben  S3itctyer  gefauft.  6.  ^cty  betounbre 
bie  ©ctyimtyeit  biefer  Sanbfctyaften.  7.  ®ie  ©ctyiiler  unb  ityr  Setyrer 
rebeten  toiel  bon  ben  ©tyaten  ber  §elben.  8.  ©ie  ©ctyiiler  toerben 
gliicflicty  fein,  toenn  fie  mit  ityrer  Slrbeit  fertig  finb.  9.  ©inb  bie 
Sluffen  §eiben?  Klein,  fie  finb  Gtyriften.  10.  -Klein  Kleffe  mar 
lange  in  ^Berlin  getoefen  unb  tyatte  bort  bie  SSiffenfctyaften  ftubiert. 
11.  -JJleine  ©ctytoefter  toar  mit  ityrer  Sfrbeit  nictyt  fertig,  all  icty 
geftern  bei  ityr  toar.  12.  ©ie  Slftrologen  rebeten  biel  bom  (Sinfluty 
ber  $ometen  unb  fplaneten.  13.  ©er  Setyrer  lobte  feine  ©ctyiiler 
unb  fagte  ju  itynen : „^tyr  feib  fleityig  getoefen."  14.  SSenn  icty 
nacty  ©eutfctylanb  reife,  toerbe  icty  meine  Dtyeime  unb  meine  ©anten 
befuctyen.  15.  ©ie  $naben  tyatten  biel  SSergniigen,  all  fie  bie 
ifjafen  unb  fjtidtyfe  burcty  SBalber  unb  ©tyciler  jagten.  16.  ©ie 
©rafinnen  toaren  fetyr  gliicflicty,  all  fie  bie  Klactyrictyt  bon  ityrem 
SSater  tyorten.  17.  ©iefe  £erren  toerben  arm  toerben,  toenn  fte  ityr 


8o 


LESSON  XV. 


[§§  60- 


©elb  fo  berfd^toenben.  18.  Unfere  5Jieffen  fxrtb  lange  bet  un§ 
getoefen. 

B . 1.  The  castles  of  the  count  are  magnificent.  2.  The 
churches  of  this  city  are  large  and  beautiful.  3.  When  will 
your  brother  be  at  home  ? 4.  Are  these  soldiers  Prussians  ? 

No,  they  are  Russians.  5.  The  bears  live  in  the  forests. 
6.  The  boys  have  two  ravens  and  three  hares.  7.  The 
ladies  have  been  in  the  church,  but  they  are  now  at  home. 
8.  Who  was  right?  9.  For  a boy  of  (bon)  five  years  he  is 
very  large.  10.  I should  be  happy,  if  I were  rich.  11.  He 
has  not  been  at  home  to-day.  12.  When  she  was  in  the  city 
she  lived  at  her  aunt’s.  13.  Would  the  girl  be  contented,  if 
she  were  with  her  mother?  14.  The  students  became  tired, 
because  they  had  studied  too  much. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XIV. 

1.  Was  hat  Ihr  Neffe  in  Berlin  gemacht?  2.  Hatte  ich 
Recht?  3.  Wer  eilte  mit  der  Nachricht  nach  Paris?  4. 
Haben  Sie  jemals  Hasen  oder  Fiichse  gejagt?  5.  Wann 
wird  mein  Bruder  zu  Hause  sein  ? 6.  Wiirde  ich  gliicklich 

sein,  wenn  ich  reich  ware  ? 


LESSON  XV. 


MIXED  DECLENSION.  — DOUBLE  PLURALS.  — PREPOSITIONS 
GOVERNING  DATIVE  OR  ACCUSATIVE. 

60.  Declension  of  ber  9lamc,  the  name. 


Singular . 

Nom.  ber  Sftarne,  the  name 
Gen.  be3  -JiamenS,  of  the  name 
Dat.  bem  Barnett,  (to,  for)  the 
name 

Acc.  ben  9£ameit,  the  name 


Plural \ 

bie  seamen,  the  names 
ber  SRameit,  of  the  names 
ben  Barnett,  (to,  for)  the 
names 

bte  Barnett,  the  names 


63] 


declension  : — 9Zame  model. 


8i 


Observe:  i.  -c  in  the  Nom.  Sing,  and  -ot§  in  Gen.  Sing. 

2.  — cit  all  other  cases. 

3.  No  Umlaut,  except  in  ©cfyabe  (see  below). 
Note.  — The  Nom.  Sing,  sometimes  has  -Jt. 


61.  In  this  way  are  declined  the  following  masculines : 


ber  Sucf;ftabe,  letter  (of  the  Al- 
phabet) 

ber  fyrxebe,  peace 
ber  gfunfe,  spark 
ber  ©laube,  faith,  belief, 
creed 


ber  ©ebanfe,  thought,  idea 
ber  §aufe,  heap 
ber  ©ante,  seed 
ber  ©cfyabe,  harm,  injury 
[pi.  ©cf)ttben] 
ber  SBiffe,  will 


Also  one  neuter : bag  §erj,  the  heart  (Acc.  Sing,  iperj). 


62.  Some  masculine  and  neuter  substantives  follow  the 
model  of  SJJaler  (§  16)  or  ©oljn  (§  21)  in  the  singular,  and 
that  of  HttaBe  (§  54)  or  ©raf  (§  55)  in  the  plural,  as  : 

©er  9?a$bar,  the  neighbour:  Sing.  n. da.  9Za$bar,  g. 
barg;  Plur . 9Ja$barit. 

®ag  Dfyr,  the  ear : Sing.  n.  a.  Dfyr,  g.  DIjr(e)g,  d.  £)ljr(e) ; 
Plur . Dfyrett. 


63.  In  this  way  decline  also : 

1.  Certain  masculines,  as  : 

ber  ©taat,  state  ber  Setter,  (male)  cousin 

ber  ©trafyl,  beam,  ray 

2.  Certain  neuters,  as  : 

bag  2Iuge,  eye  bag  Cube,  end 

bag  Sett,  bed 

(A  full  List  of  these  substantives  will  be  found  in  App.  G.^ 

3.  Foreign  (Latin)  masculines  in  unaccented  -or,  as  : 

ber  $Profeffor,  the  professor:  g.  $)3rofe[iorg;  Plur.  Srofeffo'rcit. 
ber  ©of tor,  the  doctor:  g.  ©ottorg;  Plur . ©ofto'rett. 


82 


LESSON  XV. 


[§§64- 


64.  Substantives  with  Double  Plural. 


The  following  have  double  forms  of  the  Plural,  with  a 
different  meaning  for  each  : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

ba§  Sanb,  ribbon 

Sanbcr 

ba§  Sanb,  tie,  bond 

Sanbe 

(ber  Sanb,  volume 

Sanbe) 

bie  Sanf,  bank  (commercial) 

Sanlcit 

bie  San!,  bench 

Siinfe 

ba§  ©efic^t,  face,  countenance 

©eficfhcr 

ba3  ©efic^t,  vision 

©eftdEjte 

ber  Saben,  shop 

Saben 

ber  Saben,  shutter 

Saben 

ba§  Sanb,  land,  country 

Sitrtber 

ba§  Sanb,  province 

Sanbe 

ba3  28ort  ( words  considered  separately 

, ' \ -ffiortc,  words  considered  connectedly 

\ (as  making  sense) 

Remark.- — The  plural  Sanbe  is  also  used  in  poetical  lan- 
guage; and  in  the  compound  bie  9faeberlanbe,  the  Netherlands 

(=  Lower  Provinces). 

65.  Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  or 

Accusative. 

The  following  nine  prepositions  govern  the  Dative  when 

they  indicate  locality  merely,  or 

answer  the  question 

‘ where  ? 9 or  ‘ in  what  place  ? 9 ; the  Accusative  when 
they  imply  motion , direction  or  tendency  (figurative  motion) 

towards,  or  answer  the  question 
place  or  person  ? ’ : 

‘whither?’  or  ‘to  what 

ait,  auf,  gutter, 

iit,  ttebcn. 

iiber,  sinter,  nor  and 

65]  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  DATIVE  OR  ACCUSATIVE.  83 


an,  1.  (of  place)  : 

(a)  With  dat.,  on,  upon  (adjacent  to),  as : 

The  picture  hangs  on  the  wall  (an 
ber  SBanb). 

( b ) With  acc.,  to,  towards,  on,  as  : 

I hang  the  picture  on  the  wall  (an 
bie  23anb). 


surface 
► non- 
horizontal. 


2.  (of  time , date ) with  dat.  only,  on,  upon,  as : 

I was  born  on  the  eighteenth  of  August  (am 
adbt^eljnten  Sluguft). 

He  will  arrive  on  Monday  (am  SRontag). 
Observe  : that  in  this  use  the  Prep,  and  Article  are  always 
contracted. 


auf,  (of  place ) : 

(a)  With  dat.,  on,  upon  (on  top  of),  as  : 
The  book  lies  on  the  table  (auf 
bem  Sifcf)). 

(J?)  With  acc.,  to,  towards,  on,  as : 

I lay  the  book  on  the  table  (auf 
belt  3:ifcf>) . 

Ijinter,  behind : 


surface 

horizontal 


(a)  With  dat.,  as : The  dog  lies  behind  the  stove 

(Ijinter  bent  Dfen). 


( b ) With  acc.,  as  : The  dog  goes  behind  the  stove 
(Ijinter  ben  Dfen). 

in,  x.  (of  place ) : 

(a)  With  dat.,  in,  as : The  gardener  is  in  the  garden 

(im  ©arten). 

( b ) With  acc.,  into,  as : The  gardener  goes  into  the 

garden  (in  ben  ©arten). 


84 


LESSON  XV. 


[§  65 

2.  (of  time)  in  (with  dat.  only),  as : God  made  the 
world  in  seven  days  (in  jteben  Shgcit), 

ftrfien,  near,  alongside  of,  by : 

(a)  With  dat.,  as : The  chair  stands  near  (by)  the 
table  (neben  bent  Sifcfjc). 

(£)  With  acc.,  as : I place  the  chair  near  the  table 
(neben  be n £tfcf>). 

fiber,  1.  (of  place)  over,  above  : 

(a)  With  dat.,  as : The  bridge  is  over  the  river  (fiber 

btm  gluffe). 

( b ) With  acc.,  as  : I go  over  the  river  (liber  bett  gluf$). 

2.  (of  excess ) over,  above  (with  acc.  only),  as : He 

remained  over  (more  than)  two  days  (fiber 
Sage). 

3.  about,  concerning  (with  acc.  only),  as:  He  spoke 

with  me  about. his  journey  (iiber  feine  SJleife). 
tUtter,  1.  (of  place ),  under,  beneath,  below : 

(a)  With  dat.,  as  : The  cat  lies  under  the  chair  (tinier 

bent  ©tiiljlc). 

( b ) With  acc.,  as  : The  cat  creeps  under  the  chair 

(untcr  ben  ©tul)l). 

2.  (of  number)  among: 

(< a ) With  dat.,  as:  The  wolf  is  among  the  sheep 
(unter  ben  ©cfjafen). 

(J?)  With  acc.,  as : The  wolf  mingles  among  the 
sheep  (nnter  bie  ©cfyafe). 
fear,  1.  (of  place ) before,  in  front  of  : 

(a)  With  dat.,  as : The  chair  stands  before  the  win- 
dow (bar  bent  genfter). 


§65]  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  DATIVE  OR  ACCUSATIVE.  8 5 


(£)  With  acc.,  as  : Place  the  chair  before  the  window 
genfter). 

2.  (of  order)  before  (with  dat.  only),  as:  He  came 
before  me  (fear  mir). 


3.  (of  time)  before,  ago  (with  dat.  only),  as  : 

He  came  before  two  o’clock  (fear  jtoet  XU) r). 
He  came  two  hours  ago  (fear  jmet  ©tunbeu). 


jfejifdjcn,  between  (of  two  objects) : 

(0)  With  dat.,  as : The  chair  stands  between  the 
door  and  the  window  (jtoijdjcn  her  Satire  unb 
hem  genfter). 

( b ) With  acc.,  as:  Put  the  chair  between  the  door 
and  the  window  (jnufdjcu  hie  Satire  unb  baS 
genfier). 

Remark.  — Observe  the  following  contractions  with  the 
unemphasized  Definite  Article : 


an  bem  = nut 
an  b as  = anS 
auf  ba§  = aufS 
Also  the  following,  which  are 
Winter  bem  = (jinterm 
Winter  baS  = fyinterS 
iiber  bem  = iiberm 
fiber  baS  = iiberS 


in  bem  = tm 
in  baS  = inS 

of  less  frequent  occurrence: 
unter  bem  = unterm 
unter  baS  = unterS 
feor  bem  ==  feorm 
feor  baS  = feov3 


Vocabulary. 


please,  lit.,  (I)  beg,  (I)  pray, 
(i<f>)  bitte 

hang  (trans.),  fyangen 
fetch,  bring,  get,  fyolen 
hear,  [)oren 

hunt,  chase,  pursue,  jagen 


lay,  legen 

put,  place,  set  (down),  fe^ett 
put,  place,  set  (upright), 
fteffen 

seek,  look  for,  fuc^en 
kill,  toten 


86 


LESSON  XV. 


[§§  65- 


wait  (for),  toarten  (auf  -f-  acc.) 
strawberry,  bie  ©rbbeere 
fire,  bad  {yeuer 
Netherlands,  bte  -Jlieberlanbe 
philosophy,  bie  iPfyilofopfyie' 
stove,  ber  Dfen* 
school,  bie  ©cbule 
door,  bie  3dj)ur(e) 
difference,  ber  ttnterfcbieb 
university,  bie  llniberfitat 
dictionary,  bad  -JBorterbudb 


open,  offen 
heavy,  hard,  f defter 
ten,  jel;n 

thereupon,  on  it,  etc.,  barauf 
first,  not  before,  erft 
if  you  please,  gefafiigft 
no  longer  (lit.,  not  more), 
nid)t  meljr. 
where,  too 

in  order  to,  urn  (foil,  by  infin. 
with  ju  at  end  of  clause) 


EXERCISE  XV. 

A.  1.  Igener  gjiann  fetjte  ficb  gegen  meineit  SBiffert  auf  bie 
©anf.  2.  ©er  9leffe  bed  ?profefforS  mar  lange  ©tubent,  aber  er 
ift  jeitf  ©oftor  ber  ipijilofopfyie.  3.  Sffiarum  baben  tneine  ©ettern 
fiber  (at)  mid)  gelacfjt  ? 4.  -Klein  SSater  toirb  und  am  ©lontag 
ober  (am)  ©iendtag  in  bie  ©cbule  fdjicfen.  5.  ©er  ©obn  unb 
bie  ©ocbter  unfer(e)d  Slacbbard  fudfiten  ©lumen  unb  ©rbbeeren  im 
SBalbe.  6.  -Klein  SSater  unb  meine  3Jlutter  finb  feit  bret  2Bod)en 
auf  bem  Sanbe.  7.  ©ie  ©anfen  toerben  erft  morgen  urn  gefmllfto 
offen  fein.  8.  Segen  ©ie  gefafiigft  biefe  ©anbe  neben  mid)  auf 
bie  ©anf.  9.  ©er  Stonig  ber  Klieberlanbe  reifte  burdt?  feine 
©taaten  unter  bem  Klanten  eined  ©rafen.  10.  ©er  ffriebe  bed 
§errn  fei  mit  eucfi.  11.  ©er  ©raf  fd^idte  feitten  ©ofm  auf  bie 
llniberfitat.  12.  ©ad  Slinb  ift  fef;r  franf  unb  bie  Gutter  fiat 
jtoei  ©oftoren  gebolt.  13.  SBedbalb  toarten  ©ie  fo  lange  bor  ber 
©Imre  ? 14.  ©ie  §erren  jagten  ben  ©aren  Winter  ben  28alb,  too 
fie  i£;tt  toteten.  15.  Qm  SBinter  fetjen  toir  und  oft  bor  bad  ffeuer 
unb  betounbern  bie  gmnfen.  16.  llnfere  fper^en  toerben  immer 
traurig,  toenn  toir  9lacbrid;t  bom  $riege  boren.  17.  23ad  ift  ber 
llnterfcbieb  jtoifd)en  ben  SSortern  ©anfen  ttnb©dnfe?  18.  ©ie 
2lugen  bed  ©tubenten  finb  fditoacf),  toeil  er  ju  bid  ftubiert  bat. 
19.  ©efcen  ©ie  fidb  auf  biefen  ©tub l,  btnn  ©ie  finb  mfibe.  20. 


66] 


ANOMALIES  OF  DECLENSION. 


S7 


23itte,  ftellen  ©ie  mix  biefert  ©tuljl  Winter  ben  Dfett.  21.  2)ie 
©tubenten  (emeu  bom  $)3rofeffor  bie  5ftamen  ber  ©otter  ber  Corner. 

B.  1.  The  children  were  playing  before  the  house.  2. 
What  is  the  name  of  this  professor  ? His  name  is  Schmidt. 
3.  Hang  the  picture  of  my  father  over  the  door.  4.  Every 
human  being  has  two  eyes  and  two  ears.  5.  Why  do  the 
professors  praise  their  students?  6.  The  professors  praise  the 
diligence  of  their  students.  7.  The  difference  between  my 
brother  and  me  is  not  great.  8.  I laid  the  pens  upon  the 
table,  but  they  are  no  longer  there.  9.  Our  neighbours  sent 
their  children  into  the  wood  to  search  for  flowers.  10.  Our 
cousin  lived  happy  and  in  peace  with  his  neighbours.  11. 
The  pupils  would  look  for  the  words  in  a dictionary,  if  they 
had  time.  12.  Your  eyes  are  tired,  because  you  have  studied 
too  much.  13.  These  words  are  hard  to  learn,  for  every 
word  has  ten  letters.  14.  Place  this  chair,  if  you  please,  be- 
hind the  stove  for  me.  15.  If  Charles  is  not  ready,  we  shall 
go  (reifert)  without  him  to  Germany. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XV. 

1.  Wann  wird  Ihr  Vater  Sie  auf  die  Universitat  schicken  ? 
2.  Weshalb  hat  die  Mutter  die  Doktoren  geholt?  3.  Was 
lernten  die  Studenten  von  den  Professoren  ? 4.  Werden  Sie 

ohne  mich  nach  Chicago  reisen  ? 5.  Wo  reiste  der  Konig 
der  Niederiande?  6.  Wann  werden  die  Kirchen  offen  sein? 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  B. 

ANOMALIES  OF  DECLENSION. 

66.  Substantives  without  Plural. 

The  following  classes  of  substantives  are  used  in  the  singular  only : 

1.  Proper  names,  unless  they  denote  a class  (as:  bie  Utdfaefe,  painters 
like  Raphael),  or  several  individuals  of  the  same  name  (as:  bie  bier  erfteu 
^einritfje,  the  first  four  Henries,  i.  e.9  kings  of  that  name). 


83 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  B, 


[§§66- 


2.  Names  of  materials,  etc.,  unless  they  denote  different  kinds  of  the 

same  material  (as : ©rcifer,  different  kinds  of  grass,  salt),  or  when 

they  have  a special  meaning  (as:  ©elber,  sums  of  money;  ^apiere,  docu- 
ments). 

3.  Abstract  Substantives,  unless  they  have  a concrete  ( particular ) 
meaning,  as:  Sugenben,  virtues;  ©djonfyeiten,  beauties,  etc. 

Note. — Many  nouns  of  this  sort,  when  used  in  a concrete  sense,  use  the  plurals  of 
other  words,  generally  compound,  as:  ber  &ob,  death  ; bie  ^obesfcifle,  deaths  (i.  e.  cases 
of  death). 

A list  of  these  is  given  in  App.  H. 

For  the  plural  of  nouns  of  measure,  etc.,  see  Less.  XXX. 

07.  Substantives  without  Singular. 

The  following  classes  of  substantives  are  used  in  the  plural  only: 

1.  Names  of  certain  diseases : 2)ie  Slattern,  the  small-pox;  bteSftafern 
or  fttbtcln,  the  measles. 

2.  The  following  names  of  festivals,  etc.:  Seil)rtad)ten,  Christmas; 
gaften,  Lent;  Dftern,  Easter;  *j3ftngften,  Pentecost  (Whitsuntide). 

3.  Those  plural  by  meaning,  viz. : 9Hpen,  Alps ; 23einf teiber,  trou- 
sers; 23rieffd)aften,  documents;  (Siufiinfte,  income,  revenue;  (gftern, 
parents;  gerien,  holidays;  ©liebmaften,  limbs;  §efeit,  dregs,  yeast; 
Soften,  Unfoften,  expenses ; £eute,  people ; SJtolfcn,  curds. 

68.  Irregular  Compounds.  1.  Substantives  having  -maitlt  as  the 
last  component  form  the  plural : 

(а)  Regularly,  when  denoting  male  individuals  or  occupations , as: 
(El)emaiuter,  husbands;  (Sfyrenm tinker,  men  of  honour;  ©taatsmdnner, 
statesmen. 

(б)  By  changing  -manri  into  -lettfc,  when  used  collectively  or  in  a 
general  sense,  or  to  include  both  sexes,  as : Slrbeitsleutc,  working-people; 
(Sfydeute,  married  people;  §anbef§feufc,  trades  - people ; £anblcutc, 
country-people;  £anb§leutC,  people  of  the  same  country;  9ftiet$IcutC, 
lodgers  (male  and  female). 

Notes.  — 1.  With  words  of  common  occurrence,  such  as  ^aufmartn,  merchant,  £of* 
tttemn,  courtier,  the  plur.  with  -Icutc  only  is  used. 

2.  The  form  with  -leute  is  the  plur.  of  the  fern,  compound  with  -frau  (e.  g.  eft  (tu, 

married  woman),  as  well  as  of  that  with  -mamt. 

2.  $Die  Df)nmad)t,  the  fainting-fit,  and  bie  the  power-of- 

attorney  (from  2ftad)t,  pi.  9ftdd)te),  have  the  pi.  -madj ten ; bie  SCnttnort, 
the  answer  (from  ba§  Sort,  pi.  Sorte  and  Sorter),  has  pl.-en. 


70]  SUMMARY  OF  DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES.  89 


69.  Special  Cases.  1.  A few  substantives  in  -m,  viz.:  2Item, 
Dbem,  SBrobem,  breath ; iBrofattt,  crumb ; (£tbam,  son-in-law,  follow  the 
Staler  model  (§  16)  in  the  sing.  The  plur.,  if  it  occurs,  ends  in  c (§itnb 
model,  § 21,  by  no  Umlaut),  except  $3rojam,  which  is  more  commonly 
weak  in  the  plur.  (— eit). 

2.  Weak  feminines  are  often  found  with  the  old  weak  gen.  and  dat.  in 
-Ctt,  especially  when  used  without  article  after  a preposition,  as:  auf 
(Srbeit , on  earth  (but  auf  her  (Srbe,  on  the  earth) ; gu  C^reit,  in  honour  of; 
in  ©Itabeit,  in  mercy,  etc. 


LESSON  XVI. 

DECLENSION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES  :-RECAPITULATION.-PROPER 
NAMES.  — PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 

70.  Summary  of  Declension  of  Substantives. 

The  following  tables  show  the  endings  of  the  various  forms 
of  Substantive  Declension  : 


A.  Strong  Declension. 


I.  ^Mer  Model. 

II.  ©ofm  Model. 

III.  $orf  Model. 

(Contracted  Form.) 

(Primary  Form.) 

(Enlarged  Form.) 

Sing . 

Plur . 

Sing . 

Flur. 

Sing . 

Plur . 

Nom.  

— C 

— cr 

Gen. g 

— (e)§ 

-e 

— (e)§ 

— cr 

Dat.  

-(n) 

-(e) 

— eit 

-(e) 

— ent 

Acc.  

— c 

— cr 

Remarks.  — i.  The  term  ‘ Strong  Declension ’ is  applicable 
to  all  the  three  forms  given  above. 

2.  The  (2o!f)n  Model  is  sometimes  called  the  Primary 
Form  of  the  Strong  Declension,  and  shows  the  -g  of  Gen. 
Sing,  and-e  of  the  Plur.  From  this  are  derived  the  other  two 

forms,  viz. : 

7 


90 


LESSON  XVI. 


[§§7»- 


3-  By  contraction  (dropping  -e  of  the  termination),  the 
Staler  Model,  hence  called  also  the  Contracted  Form  of 
the  Strong  Declension ; and 

4.  By  enlargement  (adding  -r  in  the  Plur.,  the  Sing,  remain- 
ing the  same),  the  ©orf  Model,  hence  also  called  the  En- 
larged Form  of  the  Strong  Declension. 

5.  Feminines  remain  unchanged  in  the  Sing. 

6.  The  Umlaut  may  occur  in  any  of  these  forms,  viz.: 
generally  in  masc.  monosyllables,  regularly  in  feminines  and 
in  Enlarged  Form  ; never  in  neuter  monosyllables  of  Primary 
Form.  (See  Lists,  App.  A.,  B.,  C.,  E.) 

B . Weak  Declension, 
itna&e,  ©raf,  331ume  Model. 


Sing.  Nom. (e) 

Gen.  (c)lt 

Dat. (c)n 

Acc.  (e)tt 


Plur. (e)n 

(e)n 

(e)« 

(c)n 


Observe:  i.  The  persistent  -it.  2.  The  absence  of  Um- 
laut. 3.  Uniformity  of  Cases.  4.  Feminines  unchanged  in 
Sing. 

C.  Mixed  Declension. 


I.  5ftame  Model. 

Sing.  N.  — e Plur.  — tt 

G.  — — n 
D.  — tt  — n 

A.  — tt  — tt 


II.  9ta$f>ar,  Dfyr  Model. 
Sing. Plur.  — (e)tt 

—(e)*  — (c)tt 

-(e)  — (e)n 

— (c)n 


Remarks.  — i.  All  three  follow  the  $rtabe  Model  in  the  Plur. 


2.  The  9tame  Model  is  a Mixture  of  the  -Staler  and  $nabe 
models  in  the  Sing.,  usually  taking  -§  in  the  Gen.,  sometimes 
-n  in  the  Nom. 


7*1 


DECLENSION  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 


9r 


3.  The  -Jlacfybar  Model  follows  the  SDJaler  Model  in  the 
Sing. 

4.  The  DI)r  Model  follows  the  ©ofm  Model  in  the  Sing. 

71.  The  Essential  Parts  for  the  Declension  of  a Sub- 
stantive are : 

The  Nominative  Singular, 

The  Genitive  Singular,  and 
The  Nominative  Plural. 

These  being  given,  the  remaining  cases  of  the  noun  can  be 
formed  from  the  above  Tables,  with  the  assistance  of  the 
following : 

Remarks.  — 1.  All  Feminines  are  unchanged  in  the  Sing. 

2.  The  Nom.  and  Acc.  Sing,  are  always  alike,  except  in 
the  Weak  Declension  (^nabe,  ©raf  and  Carrie  models). 

3.  The  Gen.  Sing,  ends  in  -8  in  Masculines  (except  in 
the  Weak  Declension)  and  in  all  Neuters. 

4.  The  Nom.,  Gen.  and  Acc.  Plur.  are  always  alike. 

5.  The  Dat.  Plur.  always  ends  in  -it. 

Decline  the  following  substantives  throughout : 

2)aS  23ucf),  bie  ©djinifjeit,  ber  ©titrm,  bie  £od)ter,  ber  ©cf)tDager,  ber 
SSctter,  bag  Slegimeut,  bie  ©tabt,  baS  2lugc,  ber  Skarnt,  ber  Sftenfd),  ber 
$ataft',  ber  planet',  ber  ©pa^iergang,  bag  ©djaf,  bie  grau,  bag  grciidein, 
ber  geiertag,  bie  ©djtoefter,  ber  ©laube. 

Declension  of  Proper  Names. 

72.  Geographical  Proper  Names: 

1.  If  never  used  without  an  article,  etc.  (see  § 44,  2,  3),  are 
declined  like  common  nouns,  as : ber  S^eirt,  G.  be3  9ttyein(e)8, 
d.  bem  9t&ein(c);  bie  ©d) toetj,  g.  ber  ©d^ueij,  d.  ber  ©cfytoetj,  etc. 

2.  If  not  generally  used  with  an  article,  etc.,  they  take  no 
ending  except  -8  in  the  Gen.  Sing,  (unless  they  end  in  a 


92 


LESSON  XVI. 


sibilant),  as:  ©eutj’ cf)tanb,  Germany,  G,  ©eutfcfjlanbg ; gran!* 
reicfy,  France,  g.  granfretd^g ; 9Iom,  Rome,  g.  3iomg. 

3.  If  they  end  in  a sibilant  (£,  fdf),  $,  y),  the  Gen.  is 

replaced  by  the  preposition  turn,  as:  ®ie  ©efeftigungen  tom 
SPang',  the  fortifications  of  Paris. 

4.  ©on  may  replace  the  Gen.  with  other  names  also,  and 
is  always  used  after  titles,  as : ®te  ^ortigin  bott  Cttglanb,  the 
Queen  of  England ; ber  ©urgermeifter  bon  Toronto,  the  Mayor 
of  Toronto. 

5.  When  the  Name  of  a Place  is  preceded  by  a common 
noun,  they  are  in  apposition  to  each  other,  but  the  proper 
name  is  not  inflected,  as : SDie  ©tabt  fionbott  (not  turn  Sons 
bon),  the  City  of  London,  g.  ber  ©tabtSonbon.  ®ag  $onigretd£) 
$renf;cn,  the  Kingdom  of  Prussia,  g.  beg  ^onigretcfyg  SPreu^en. 

6.  Proper  Names  of  Places  are  not  used  in  the  Plural. 

73.  Proper  Names  of  Persons  are  now  inflected  in  the 
Gen.  Sing,  only,  as  follows : 

1.  If  preceded  by  an  article,  etc.  (which  shows  the  case), 
they  remain  unchanged,  as : The  letters  of  Cicero,  bie  ©riefe 
beg  Cicero. 

2.  If  not  preceded  by  an  article  showing  case,  etc.,  those 
ending  in  a sibilant,  and  Feminines  in  -c,  add  -(c)ng  in  the 
Gen. ; all  others  add  -g  only,  as : 9Jiay,  G.  9fta£eng ; Soutfc,  G. 
Soutfcttg ; $arl,  g.  $arlg. 

Remark.  - — Surnames  and  classical  names  in  a sibilant 
now  commonly  take  an  apostrophe  instead  of  —eng,  as: 
Dpi#  SBerfe,  Opitz’s  works. 

74.  Family  Names  are  used  in  the  Plural  with  added  -g, 
as  in  English,  but  without  article,  as  : the  Schmidts,  ©cfymibtg 
(meaning  the  members  of  the  Schmidt  family). 

Further  Remarks  on  the  Declension  of  Proper  Names  and  of  Foreign 
Substantives  will  be  found  in  Supp.  Less.  C.,  below. 


75]  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 


93 


75.  Prepositions  Governing  the  Genitive. 


1.  SBcgeit,  on  account  of,  on  behalf  of,  for  the  sake  of 
(sometimes  follows  its  case),  as : I remained  at  home  on 
account  of  (for  the  sake  of)  my  child,  (tticgcn  meitiel 
5Unbe§). 

Note.  — 28egett  always  follows  the  Gen.  of  the  Pers.  Prons.,  which 
are  then  written  in  one  word  with  the  preposition,  and  have  special  forms 
ending  in  -t,  as : meilteitDcgen,  for  my  sake ; ifyrehnegen,  for  her  (their) 
sake;  unfertftcgen,  for  our  sake,  etc.;  also  with  the  Relative  and 
Demonstr.  fcct : bcrc(ii)ttt>cgeu  (Sing.  Fern,  and  Plur.  for  the  sake  of 
whom,  which,  that,’  etc.). 

2.  SBS^renb,  during,  as : We  went  out  walking  during  the 
rain  (tMfjrenb  be§  9tegen3). 

3.  Staft,  or  ailfiatt,  instead  of,  as : He  will  come  instead 
of  his  friend  (ftfctt,  or  anfiatt  fetneS  greuttbeS). 

The  other  preps,  with  gen.  will  be  found  in  Lesson 
XXXVIII. 

Vocabulary. 


give,  present,  make  a present 
of  (foil,  by  dat.  of  person 
and  acc.  of  thing),  fcfjenfert 
library,  bte  SJibliotfyeF 
bookseller,  ber  Sud^fyanbler 
cousin  (fern.),  bie  Goujtne 
Elizabeth,  ©lifabetfy 
Europe,  @uro'!pa 
festivity,  bte  $eftItcT;fett 
Frederick,  grtebrtcfy 
Fred,  Freddy,  $rt§ 
poem,  ba$  ©ebicfyt 
George,  ©eorg 
Greece,  (ba§)  ©rtecfjerdanb 
capital  (city),  bie  §au^tftabt* 


Henry,  §etnrtd) 

Ireland,  (ba8)  Srlartb 
Margaret,  -Sftargarete 
speech,  oration,  bte  SJtebe 
St.  Lawrence,  ber  St.  (Sanct) 
So'rettj 
Sarah,  Sara 
Scotchman,  ber  Sd^Otte 
street,  bie  Strafe 
Thames,  bte  Sfyemfe 
work,  ba§  SSkrf 
William,  JBtlljelm 
broad,  wide,  breit 
high,  fyodj 
clear,  liar 


94 


LESSON  XVI. 


[§§  75* 


turbid,  muddy  (of  water),  soon,  batb 

triibe  everywhere,  uberalF 

Idioms:  to  be  on  a visit  at  (any  one’s),  auf  35efud)  fern  bei;  as  a birth- 
day present,  311m  ©eburtStag. 

EXERCISE  XVI. 

A.  1.  SDer  ®aifer  bon  ©eutfdjlanb  ift  audf  Hbnig  bon  ipreufjen. 
2.  ®ie  93erge  Gnglanbd  unb  ^rlanbS  finb  nicE)t  Ijod;,  aber  bie 
Serge  ber  ©dftoeij  finb  fyocf)  unb  pracfdig.  3.  2Sir  ftubiercn  bie 
Sriefe  bed  Gicero.  4.  ©arad  Goufine  tear  bei  iljr  auf  23efucf), 
aber  je^t  ift  fie  fort.  5.  -Hiutlerd  toaren  geftern  bei  und,  aber 
tbir  toaren  nidjt  ju  §aufe.  6.  28 ad  ift  ber  9?ame  bed  Siirger* 
meifterd  bon  Sonbon?  1.  9J?ein  Sater  ffat  mir  Seffingd  SBerfe 
unb  Seined  Sieber  jum  ©eburtdtag  gefebenft.  8.  2tuf  meiner 
Sieife  befucfde  id)  bie  ©tabte  Sonbon,  iparid,  Serlin  unb  9iom. 
9.  ®ie  f^Iitffe  Ganabad  finb  groft,  aber  bie  fyli'iffe  ©riedjenlanbd 
finb  flein  unb  furj.  10.  28ir  toerben  bie  Slumen  fiir  ©opine  auf 
ben  S£ifd;  ftellen.  11.  f$iriebrid;d  SDiutter  fcfycnlt  if;m  ^lopftodd 
SBerfe,  benn  E>eute  ift  fein  ©eburtdtag.  12.  £)ad  2Baffer  bed 
©anct  Sorenj  ift  flar,  aber  bad  2Baffer  ber  St^emfe  ift  triibe.  13. 
Souife,  bole  ©opljie  unb  ©tifabetE>  unb  toir  toerben  einen  ©pajier* 
gang  im  SBalbe  madden.  14.  ©iefer  ©djotte  rebet  toiel  non 
Surnd’  ©ebicf'ten.  15.  §einridjd  fyreunbe  toerben  balb  nadj 
Gitglanb  reifen,  unb  fie  toerben  aud)  fyranfreid)  befuefyen.  16.  ®ie 
©traffen  SCorontod  toaren  toabrenb  ber  geftlidjdeiten  fefyr  fd;on. 
It.  SBedljalb  ftubieren  ©ie  bie  Sieben  bed  ©emoftljened  ? 18. 
21m  ftreitag  ober  ©onnabenb  toerben  toir  nad>  $ingfton  reifen 
urn  Souife  unb  SJiargarete  ju  befudien.  19.  ©eorg  ift  feijt  bei 
feinem  Setter  gritt  auf  Scfud;.  20.  21m  ©onntag  toaren  toir 
toegen  bed  ©turmed  ju  §aufe.  21.  2d>  fyabe  in  ber  ©djtoeij  nid;t 
biel  Sergntigen  geljabt,  toeil  id)  auf  ber  Steife  franf  toar. 

B.  1.  Charles,  bring  Freddy  and  Max,  and  we  shall  play 
in  the  garden.  2.  We  have  looked  for  William’s  book  every- 
where. 3.  The  streets  of  Paris  are  wide  and  beautiful.  4. 


76] 


DECLENSION  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 


95 


Who  has  bought  these  gloves  for  Emma?  5.  The  city  of 
Ottawa  is  the  capital  of  Canada.  6.  We  live  in  Canada,  but 
our  parents  live  in  Germany.  7.  We  have  presented  flowers 
to  Elizabeth  and  Mary.  8.  You  have  Goethe’s  works  in 
your  library.  9.  I bought  Schiller’s  William  Tell  at  (bet)  a 
bookseller’s  in  Hamilton.  10.  We  learn  in  this  book  the 
names  of  the  gods  of  the  Romans.  11.  The  Schmidts  visited 
us  yesterday.  12.  What  is  the  capital  of  Switzerland?  13. 
My  father  sent  me  instead  of  Max,  because  Max  was  too  tired. 
14.  The  city  of  Berlin  is  the  capital  of  the  kingdom  of 
Prussia.  15.  Would  you  be  happy,  if  you  were  rich  ? 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XVI. 

2.  Wer  ist  Konig  von  Preussen?  2.  Wo  war  Saras  Cou- 
sine?  3.  Was  hat  Ihr  Vater  Ihnen  zum  Geburtstag  ge- 
schenkt  ? 4.  Sind  die  Strassen  Torontos  immer  schon  ? 5. 
Weshalb  waren  wir  am  Sonntag  zu  Hause  ? 6.  Was  ist  die 

Hauptstadt  Canadas  ? 

SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  C. 

PROPER  NAMES. -FOREIGN  SUBSTANTIVES. 

76.  Further  Remarks  on  Declension  of  Proper  Names. 

1.  Proper  names  of  towns,  governed  by  a preposition  in  the  genitive, 
do  not  take  as : limned  §ambltrg,  not  far  from  Hamburg. 

2.  Names  of  persons,  even  if  preceded  by  an  article,  etc.,  take  -§  in 
the  genitive  before  a governing  noun,  as:  be$  fleiueit  $ad0  23iid)ev  (but 
bte  23iid)er  beS  fleinen  $ad). 

3.  Feminine  names  frequently  take  — (e)tt  in  the  dat.  and  acc.,  especially 
if  they  end  in  -c,  as : 2oui(e,  d.  a.  2oui}en. 

4.  Family  names  (and  even  Christian  names)  formerly  added  — (e)lt  in 
the  dat.  and  acc.,  and  are  usually  so  found  in  the  classics,  as: 

©oetfye,  d.  a.  ©octfyen 

©filler,  “ ©cf)iUerit 

$ad,  “ rln 

£cf|titg,  “ £effingcu 

Note.  — This  inflection  is  now  obsolete  and  not  to  be  imitated. 


96 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  C. 


[§§ 


5.  In  the  case  of  proper  names  in  the  genitive,  preceded  by  a common 
noun  as  title : 

(a)  If  the  governing  word  follows , the  proper  name  takes  the  genitive 
ending,  the  title  remaining  undeclined  and  having  no  article,  as : $oilig 
£einrid)0  0ol)ne,  King  Henry’s  sons. 

(b)  If  the  governing  word  precedes , the  title  has  the  article  and  the 
genitive  ending,  the  proper  name  remaining  undeclined,  as : bie  ©ol)ue 
be0  $onig$  §eittrid). 

Note.  — The  title  $err  takes  -tt  in  the  genitive  in  both  these  cases,  as:  §errrt 
©djmibtS  §au§,  or  ba§  §au3  be§  £errn  (Scfymibt. 

6.  In  the  case  of  a Christian  name  without  article,  connected  with  a 
family  name  preceded  by  bon  (indicating  noble  rank) : 

(a)  When  the  governing  word  follows , the  family  name  only  is  de- 
clined, as : griebrid)  Don  ©d)itter$  ©ebidjte. 

(b)  When  the  governing  word  precedes , only  the  Christian  name  is 
declined,  as : 2>te  ©ebidjte  $:riebrid)3  bon  ©djiUer. 

7.  The  names  of  the  Saviour,  3efu8  (£l)riftu§,  usually  both  follow  the 

Latin  declension,  thus  : N.  SefltS  £t)riftU0,  G.  3efit  D.  3eflt 

a.  Scfurn  (Sfyviftum,  Voc.  3efu  GEIjrifte. 

Note.  — Other  biblical  names,  if  without  article,  also  follow  the  Latin  inflection,  espe- 
cially in  the  gen.,  as : ©oangeltunt  (St.  ^lattljai,  the  Gospel  of  St.  Matthew. 

77.  Declension  of  Foreign  Substantives. 

1.  Most  foreign  substantives  follow  one  or  other  of  the  regular  forms 
of  declension,  all  feminines  being  weak . 

2.  Most  masculines  and  neuters  from  the  Latin,  ending  in  -u0,  have 
the  classical  plural,  but  with  no  case-inflection  in  either  number,  as : 
ber  9J£obuS,  the  mood:  n.g. d.a.  Sing.  3ftobu0,  Plur.  9ftobt ; beu  (£afii0, 
the  case:  n.g.  d.  a.  Sing.  Gutfttg,  Plur.  (£afu0  ; baS  $em{>U0,  the  tense: 
n.g. d.a.  Sing.  £etnpu0,  Plur.  Sempora. 

Notes.  — 1.  Others  change -u§  to  — Clt  in  the  plur.,  as:  ©lo buZ,  Plur.  ©lobeit  (such 
forms  as  ©lobuffe  should  be  avoided  as  barbarous). 

2.  ©er  2Itla§  has  pi.  bie  2ltlanten. 

3.  The  Hebrew  words  Cherub  and  SerapI)  have  the  Hebr.  PI.  in  -im  and  take  -3  in 
the  gen.  sing. 

3.  Neuters  in  -a  from  the  Greek,  and  in  -ttttt  from  the  Latin,  take  -0 
in  the  gen.  sing.,  and  change  -a  or  — uitt  into  -eit  in  the  plur.,  as  : brt§ 
§)rama,  the  drama,  g.  Sing.  2)rama0,  Plur . 2)ramett ; ba$  Sterna,  tho 


80]  GENDER  ACCORDING  TO  MEANING.  97 

theme,  Plur . £f)cmett ; b(l8  Snbitubuuttt,  the  individual,  G.  Sing.  3nbit>b 
buumS,  Plur.  3nbi&ibuen  ; ba§  SBerbum,  the  verb,  Plur.  bie  $evbcn. 

Note.  — $>a§  Jtlima,  the  climate,  has  pi.  5Uimata  or  $Iimatett. 

4.  Neuters  from  Latin  Substantives  with  plur.  in  -ia  add-§  in  the  gen. 
sing.,  often  dropping  the  Latin  sing,  termination,  and  form  the  plur.  in 
-ten,  as:  bd3  2lbt>erb(ium),  the  adverb,  G.  Sing.  $lbt)erb(utnt)$,  Plur. 
herbicn;  ba§  $articip(ium),  the  participle,  g.  Sing.  ^ai’ttcip(iitm)£,  Plur . 
^avticipien;  ba§  goffil',  the  fossil,  Plur.  goffiUcn;  ba$  jJJftneval',  the 
mineral,  Plur.  2Jftneralten. 

Notes.  — 1.  These  words  formerly  followed  the  full  forms  of  Latin  declension,  gram - 
Tnatical  terms  (e.  g.  33er6itm,  etc.)  retaining  these  forms  longest. 

2.  The  German  word  ba§4Ueinob,  the  jewel,  has  Plur.  5Ueincbtcn  as  well  as  the  regular 
Plur.  tfleinobe. 

5.  Masculines  and  neuters  of  recent  introduction  from  modern  lan- 
guages take  -§  in  the  gen.  sing.,  and  add  -§  to  form  the  plur.,  as : SovbS, 
(Slub3,  ©ofcig,  33anquier0,  portrait#,  (SofoS,  etc. 

Note.  — Italian  words  are  also  found  with  their  proper  foreign  plur.,  as  <2oIi,  Conti. 

78.  The  Article  with  Names  of  Persons. 

Besides  the  cases  specified  in  § 73,  I,  above,  the  article  is  used  with 
names  of  persons : 

1.  Colloquially  and  familiarly , as:  fcCt  $arf,  btC  £onife. 

2.  When  they  denote  a class , as:  cilt  SBelUnqtOU,  a (man  like)  W el- 
lington. 

3.  Before  names  of  paintings,  etc.,  named  from  a pers.,  etc,  as : cilt 
Rafael,  a ( painting  by)  Rafael;  trie  23eitU3  t»0U  2Jd(o,  the  (statue  of) 
Venus  of  Milo. 


LESSON  XVII. 

GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES.  - INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS 
AND  ADJECTIVES. 

79.  The  Gender  of  Substantives  is  determined  in  German : 
I.  by  Meaning ; or 

II.  by  Form  (Ending,  etc.). 

80.  I.  Gender  as  determined  by  Meaning. 

1.  Masculine  are  names  of  : 

(a)  Males,  as : bet  9J?ann,  the  man ; bet  §elb,  the  hero. 


LESSON  XVII. 


[§§  80- 


o3 

Remark:  But  diminutives  in-^cil  and -lent  are  neuter,  as: 
bag  2)iannletn  or  2Rannd)en. 

(J?)  Seasons , months  and  days , as:  ber  £)erbft,  the  autumn; 
ber  3anuar/  January;  bet  SKitttoodj,  Wednesday. 

(<r)  Points  of  the  compass , as:  ber  2iorb(en),  the  north. 

(//)  Precious  stones  and  mountains,  as : ber  35iamant,  the 
diamond  ; ber  53rocfen,  the  Brocken. 

2.  Feminine  are  names  of  : 

(a)  Females,  as : bie  §rau,  the  woman ; bie  Softer,  the 

daughter. 

Remark  : But  bag  SBetB,  the  woman,  is  neuter ; also  diminu- 
tives in  -sfjctt  and  — leiu,  as:  bag  Socfytercfyen,  the  little 

daughter;  bag  9Jicib$en,  the  girl;  bag  grauletn,  the  young 
lady. 

( b ) Trees,  plants,  fruits  and  flowers  generally,  as  : bic  ©ct)e, 
the  oak ; bic  Sfteffel,  the  nettle  ; bie  SSirne,  the  pear  (but  bet 
Styfel,  the  apple);  bic  2iofe,  the  rose. 

(<r)  Cardinal  Numerals  used  as  substantives,  as  : bie  Sing, 
the  (number  or  figure)  one ; bic  ©ecfjg,  the  six  (at  dice,  etc.). 

3.  Neuter  are  names  of : 

(a)  Metals  almost  always,  as  : bag  S3let,  lead;  bag  ©fen,  iron. 

Note. — steel,  is  Masc. 

(p)  Collectives  almost  always,  as  : bag  SSolf,  the  people ; bag 
^peer,  the  army  ; especially  when  beginning  with  @e-,  as ; bag 
©ebtrge,  the  mountain-chain. 

(c)  Countries  and  provinces  almost  always,  as  : (bag)  ©tro^a, 
Europe  ; (bag)  San  aba ; islands,  cities,  towns,  villages,  etc., 
always,  as : (bag)  Hamburg  ; (bag)  21  om,  Rome. 

Remarks.  — 1.  Names  of  countries  and  provinces  in  -ei, 
-att  and  -j  are  feminine,  as:  bie  Xlirfei,  Turkey;  bie  ©djtoeij, 
Switzerland. 


82]  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES.  99 

2.  Names  of  countries,  etc.,  when  not  neuter,  always  have 
the  definite  article  (see  § 44,  3). 

( d ) Infinitives,  letters  of  the  alphabet,  and  other  parts  of 
speech  (except  Adjectives  used  of  persons,  and  Cardinal 
Numerals;  see  2,  c,  above),  used  as  Substantives,  as:  bag 
Sadden,  the  (act  of)  laughing;  bag  % the  (letter)  A;  bag  3$/ 
the  I;  bag  2Benn  itnb  bag  2tber,  (the)  ‘if’  and  (the)  ‘but.’ 

Give  the  gender  of  the  following  Substantives,  assigning  the  rule  in 
each  case:  2lpvif,  (Mb,  (Srbbecre,  £od)ter,  Qhiropa,  23ifd)of,  bonbon,  3nra, 
9tnbiu  (ruby),  SSalladjei  (Wallachia),  Unrest,  @iibeu  (South),  (Mb, 
ilaufett,  ©o  nutter. 


81.  Interrogative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives. 
The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  : 

1.  toeldjer?  which?  — Definite. 

2.  tocr?  who? 

3.  Itmg?  whatl 


- Indefinite. 


82.  SMdjer?  is  declined  after  the  biefer  Model,  but,  as 
Pronoun,  lacks  the  Gen.,  thus  : 


Singular . 

Plural ’ 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  ft>elcf;cr 
Gen.  

toeld;e 

toeld&cS 

tbelc^e,  which 

Dat.  toeldjcm 

toeld;cr 

toefdiem 

toeldjctt,  (to,  for) which 

Acc.  tt>eld£)en 

toeld;e 

toeld;c§ 

toeld^e,  which 

Remarks.  — ■ 

1.  SBeldjer? 

asks ‘which  of  a number?’  of 

persons  or  things,  and  agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun  follow- 
ing it,  as: 

2BeId;er  bon  biefen  SKSnncrn  iff  Ijter  getoefen? 

Which  of  these  men  has  been  here  ? 

SBeldkg  bon  biefen  SBiisfico  fyaben  Sie  ge^abt? 

Which  of  these  books  have  you  had? 


ICO 


LESSON  XVII, 


[§§  82^ 


2.  The  neuter  sing.  UiClif)C£  is  used  before  the  verb  ‘to  be/ 
irrespectively  of  the  gender  or  number  of  the  subject  (com- 
pare the  similar  use  of  e§,  § 39,  1),  as  : 

Which  is  your  sister  (brother)? 

2BeI$c8  ift  3$re  Scfytoefter  ($$r  Sruber)  ? 

Which  are  the  children  of  the  count  ? 

2£el$e§  fittb  bie  $inber  be3  ©rafen  ? 

83.  2Bct?  and  Uw§  ? are  used  in  the  Sing,  only,  and  are 
declined  as  follows : 


MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUTER. 

Nom. 

luer,  who  ? 

toa§,  what? 

Gen. 

toeffen  (or  ft>e3),  whose,  of 

tocff  en  (or  toe3),  of 

whom 

what 

Dat. 

toern,  (to,  for)  whom 

Acc. 

toert,  whom 

toa3,  what 

Remarks.  — 1.  SScr  is  used  of  persons  only,  for  all  gen- 
ders and  both  numbers,  as : 

Sing.  m.  23  er  ift  biefer  8JJamt?  f.  jene  §rau?  n.  biefe3  Siinb? 

Plur.  2Ber  finh  biefe  SWiinncr?  etc. 

2.  is  not  used  of  persons. 

3.  is  never  used  in  the  Dative.  In  the  Dat.  or  Acc. 
with  prepositions,  ft>a§  is  replaced  by  (toor  before  vowels), 
placed  before  the  preposition  (compare  § 38,  Rem.  5,  for 
similar  use  of  fea),  as  : 

SBotauf  fii$ert  ©ie?  On  what  (whereon)  are  you  sitting? 

28of)on  ff)ted;en  ©ie?  Of  what  (whereof)  are  you  speaking? 

Note.  — SSftrnnt?  =for  what,  wherefore,  why?  not  toOrum. 

4.  With  prepositions  governingthe  Gen.,  Uie£  is  used  before 
the  preposition,  as:  fticSfyalb,  tocStoegen?  on  what  account, 
wherefore,  why  ? 

5.  The  neuter  Gen.  toeffen?  is  rarely  used,  except  as  above. 


86]  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES.  10 1 


6.  is  sometimes  used  (as  interrog.  advl)  for  toarum,  why? 
(For  the  use  of  WaZ  for  etma§,  see  under  et-toaS,  § 149,  1.) 

84.  The  Interrogative  Adjectives  are  : 

1.  toddler,  Incite,  tudtfjcS?  which?  what?  — Definite. 

2.  ftm§  fiir  tin,  fiir  einc,  Um§  fiir  ein?  ) what  kind  of? 

Plur , nw§  fill*  ? ) — Indefinite. 

85.  2®ctcf)Cr,  as  Interrogative  Adjective,  follows  the 
biefer  Model  throughout,  as  : 


Singular , 

Plural, 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  toelcfjer 

toelcfie 

toelcfied 

toetefye,  which 

Gen.  toeldf)e§ 

tuclckr 

toelcfyed 

toelcfyer,  of  which 

Dat.  toelcfyetn 

U>eld;er 

toeld;em 

toeltf;en,  (to,  for  which) 

Acc.  foeldjen 

toe lefye 

toetdjed 
Examples : 

toeld;e,  which 

Which  man  was  here  ? 

SBeltfjer  3Jlcmn  tear  bier  ? 

What  books  have  you? 

2Be(d|C  23iicfyer  fya&en  Sie? 

Remarks.  — 1.  2Belrf;er  is  also  used  in  exclamatory  sen- 
tences (=what!),  sometimes  without  termination,  as: 
2BcWj(c§)  33ergnugert ! What  pleasure  ! 

2.  The  stem  toelcfy  is  also  followed  by  ein,  and  is  unin- 
flected, as: 

$Beldj  ein  (Sturm ! What  a storm ! 

86.  In  declining  Wa§>  fur  ein,  \m§  remains  unchanged, 
while  cilt  agrees  with  the  substantive,  as : 

n.  m.  2Ba3  fur  ein  §ut?  a.  2Sa§  fur  einc n §ut?  What  kind 
of  (a)  hat  ? d.  28a3  fur  eincm  §ut?  To  what  kind 
of  a hat  ? 


102 


LESSON  XVII. 


[§§86- 


G.  f.  2Ba<8  fur  etner  33lume  ? Of  what  kind  of  (a)  flower,  etc. 

In  the  Plur.  fur  is  used  without  article,  as  : 

N. a.  2Ba3  fur  ^tnber?  What  kind  (sort)  of  children? 

d.  2Ba£  fiir  ^inbern  ? To  what  kind  of  children  ? 

The  ein  is  also  omitted  before  names  of  materials  and 
other  words  used  partitively,  as  : 

fiir  ^olj  ? fiir  SBetter? 

What  kind  of  wood  ? What  sort  of  weather? 

87*  Indirect  Statements. 

Direct  Statement  or  Quotation  * 

He  said:* I am  tired.* 

Indirect  Statement  or  Quotation  : 

He  said  (that)  he  was  tired. 

1.  An  Indirect  Statement  is  always  a subordinate  clause. 

2.  In  Indirect  Statements,  the  Verb  is  usually  in  the  Sub- 
junctive (especially  if  the  verb  of  the  principal  clause  be  in 
the  Impf.),  and  has  the  same  tense  which  it  would  have,  if 
statement  were  made  directly , as  : 

©te  fagten,  bajs  e§  toafyr  fei  (i.  e.,  fie  fagten : iff  toafyr/ 

pres.),  They  said  that  it  was  true. 

©r  anttoortete,  ba§  er  geftern  angefommen  fei  (i.  e.,  er  anttoor* 
fete : 6in  geftern  angefommen,"/^/),  He  answered, 

that  he  had  arrived  yesterday. 

Note.  — In  English,  on  the  other  hand,  a past  tense  is  always  fol- 
lowed by  a past  tense,  as  in  the  above  examples. 

3.  The  conjunction  bafj  may  be  omitted  in  such  clauses, 
which  then  have  the  construction  of  a principal  sentence 
(i.  e.,  verb  in  second  place),  as : 

6r  fagte,  er  fei  geftern  angefommen. 


88] 


INDIRECT  STATEMENTS  AND  QUESTIONS. 


I03 


88.  Indirect  Questions. 


Direct  Question  i 
Who  is  there  ? 

Indirect  Question  s 
He  asked  who  was  there  ? 

1.  In  Indirect  (or  Dependent)  Questions  the  con- 
struction is  that  of  a dependent  clause  (verb  last ). 

2.  If  the  verb  of  the  principal  sentence  be  in  the  Impf., 
that  of  the  question  will  be  in  the  subjunctive , and  have  the 
same  tense  which  it  would  have  in  the  direct  question,  as : 

©agen  ©ie  mtr  gefaffxgft,  too  jerter  £err  toofmt  (Dir.  Qu. : 
9Bo  toofmt  jjener  §err?  pres .),  Tell  me,  if  you  please, 
where  that  gentleman  lives  ? 

©r  fragte  tnicfj,  toefcfyer  Don  biefen  §erren  mein  23ruber  fct.  He 
asked  me  which  of  those  gentlemen  was  my  brother  (Dir. 
Qu. : 28efcf;er,  etc.,  ift  93ruber  ? pres.) 

Vocabulary. 


***  The  article  will  be  supplied  by  the  pupil,  according  to  preceding 
rules,  where  not  given. 


to  use,  Braucficrt 
march,  marfdjiercit 
save,  retten 

answering,  b — SCntittorten 
paying,  b — Sejafylen 
jewel,  precious  stone,  b — 
Cbelftein 

asking  (of  questions),  b — 
ftragen 
Italy,  ^talien 
fire-place,  b—  Namin' 
elm,  b — lllme 
blue,  Blau 
light,  easy,  Iet$t 
useful,  miMick 


buying,  b—  ftaufett 
life,  b — SeBeit 

learning  (act  of),  b—  Sernett 
lily,  b — Silie 
market,  ber  SRarft 
morning,  ber  9-Rorgett 
afternoon,  ber  9?ad)mtttag 
plum,  b—  $ftaume 
emerald,  b — ©maragb' 
winter-month,  ber  2Bintermof* 
nat 

valuable,  precious,  tuertboll 
generally,  usually,  getoofynltdj 
etc.,  u.f.  in.  (=  unb  fo  toctter, 
i.  e.  “ and  so  further  ”) 


104 


LESSON  XVII. 


Gadverb'alth  l *n  ^ morn^nS’  n'orgcnS  or  bc§  9)iorgen§ 

a force.4  ) m the  afternoon,  nacfjmittagS  or  be»  TacBmittagS 

The  Cardinal  Points  of  the  Compass  (=  bie  bier  §immel§s 
gegenben) : North,  (ber)  Corbett;  South,  (ber)  ©iiben;  East, 
(ber)  Dften ; West,  (ber)  SBeften. 

Names  of  the  Months:  ber  iffjanuar,  ber  fyebruar,  ber  SJtfirj, 
ber  2©rU',  ber  Sltai,  ber  $>u'ni,  ber  ^u'li,  ber  Sluguft',  ber  ©ep» 
tember,  ber  DftoBer,  ber  StobemBer,  ber  ©ejember. 

Idiom : I saved  his  life,  lit.  I saved  to  or  for  him  the  life, 

3d)  rettetc  i \)  in  t>  a $ £eben.  See  § 44,  6 (£). 

EXERCISE  XVII. 

A.  1.  SBer  If  at  ba§  23itb  toon  mcinem  SHeffen  iiber  ba§  $amin 
gelfangt?  2.  SBad  fur  eineit  Tifcf;  I;at  lyobann  auf  bem  9Jiarfte 
gefauft?  3.  2fuf  ioelc^e  93anf  toerbcn  itotr  un§  fe^en?  4.  2BeU 
dfem^naben  ge[;ortbiefe§  9Reffer?  ge^ort  2BiIlfeIm.  5.  ^ene§ 
■Btabdfen  auf  ber  ©trafje  iff  ba§  Jodfitercfien  unfere§  9tad;bar§. 

6.  2Ba§  madfen  ©ie  geibofmlicfi,  toenn  ©ie  einen  fyeiertag  Ifaben? 

7.  ®e§  SRorgenS  ftubiere  idf,  unb  be§  9tad£)mittag§  rubre  idf  auf 
bem  gduffe.  8.  SBeldfed  fittb  bie  Stamen  ber  fieben  Sage  ber 
2Bocf>e?  -JRontag,  u.  f.  in.  9.  2Bem  fdfideit  ©ie  biefen  SBrief  ? 
10.  $jdf  fcbide  i£?u  bem  33ucfd;anbler.  11.  SBoriiber  Ifabeit  bie 
§erren  gelacfit  ? 12.  SBer  ift  bie  grau  neben  meiner  Sante  auf 
ber  23anf?  13.  2Ba§  fiir  3tugen  fjat  ber  ©tubent  ? ©eine  Slugeit 
finb  blau.  14.  SBoraud  maclfen  luir  ©dfiffe?  SBir  macfien  fie 
au§  ©fen  unb  ©tafd.  15.  Slarl  tft  mit  bem  Sernen  feiner  Stuf^ 
gabe  nicfit  fertig.  16.  SBorauf  fyaben  bie  ©dfiiiler  fief)  gefefd? 
©ie  Ijaben  ficff  auf  bie  SBriide  gefeht.  17.  2Ba§  fiir  Sbelfteine 
fiaben  ©ie  ba  ? 18.  fyabe  einen  SDiamant(en),  einen  9tubin, 
unb  einen  ©maragb.  19.  S)a§  §eer  ift  bon  gtanfreidf  nad; 
Qtalien  marfcfiiert.  20.  -Rafioleon  fcfndte  bem  ©rafen  einen  2)ia* 
mant(en),  toed  ber  ©raf  iljm  ba3  Seben  gerettet  fyatte. 

B,  1.  Which  of  your  sisters  are  learning  German?  2.  For 
whom  is  this  diamond?  It  is  for  the  countess.  3.  Which 


8g] 


GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 


105 


are  your  pens  ? 4.  The  asking  of  questions  is  very  easy,  but 

the  answering  is  very  difficult.  5.  The  north,  the  south,  the 
east,  and  the  west  are  the  four  cardinal  points  of  the  compass. 
6.  Which  of  these  students  is  Mr.  Braun  ? 7.  The  boy  buys 

himself  pears  and  plums  in  the  market.  8.  My  uncle  has 
three  children — a girl  and  two  boys.  9.  June,  July,  and 
August  are  very  hot  in  Canada.  10.  Buying  is  pleasant,  but 
paying  is  very  disagreeable.  11.  Iron  and  steel  are  very 
useful.  12.  The  rose  and  the  lily  are  flowers,  but  the  oak 
and  the  elm  are  trees.  13.  I blame  Mary  because  she  wastes 
her  money.  14.  What  would  you  do  with  your  money,  if  you 
were  rich  ? 15.  We  always  hoped  that  William  would  learn 

German. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XVII. 

1.  Wo  hangt  das  Bild  von  Ihrem  Neifen?  2.  Wer  ist  das 
Madchen  vor  unserm  Hause  ? 3.  Weshalb  sthickte  der 

Konig  dem  Biirgermeister  einen  Diamant(en)?  4.  Was  fur 
Augen  hat  der  Student  ? 5.  Ist  das  Fragen  leicht  ? 6.  Was 

wiirden  Sie  machen,  wenn  Sie  einen  Feiertag  hatten  ? 


LESSON  XVIII. 

GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES  (concluded).  - GENERAL  REMARKS. 
-DOUBLE  GENDER. 

89.  Gender  of  Substantives  as  determined  by  Form. 
1.  Masculine  are : 

(a)  Substantives  in  -iff),  — ig,  -tttg,  -lit,  almost  always , 
as  : bcr  ^ramdj,  the  crane  ; bcr  ^ponig,  the  honey; 
bcr  trembling,  the  stranger ; bcr  Sltetlt,  the  breath. 

( p ) Those  in  -cl,  -Clt  (not  infinitives),  -ct,  generally 
(names  of  agents  in  -cr  always ),  as:  bcr  Soffcl, 
8 


106  LESSON  XVIII.  [§§89- 

the  spoon ; bcr  ©arteit,  the  garden ; bcr  ©artncr, 
the  gardener. 

(e)  Monosyllables  — generally  (but  with  many  excep- 
tions), as : bcr  ^rieg,  the  war ; bet  Sag,  the  day, 
etc. 

2.  Feminine  are : 

(a)  Substantives  in  -ei,  -Jjetf,  -fcit,  -ftfjttft,  -ling,  -ttt, 

always,  as : bic  <Sd)meid)elei,  flattery ; bic  ©cfyon* 
$Ctt,  beauty;  bic  SDatdbarfcit,  gratitude;  bie 
greunbfdjaff,  friendship;  bic  £offnung,  hope;  bie 
©rafitt,  the  countess;  bie  grcunbiit,  the  (female) 
friend. 

Note.  — The  termination -iti  is  used  to  form  feminine  names  from 
masculines,  usually  with  Umlaut,  always  so  in  monosyllables. 

(£)  Those  in  -t  (especially  after  a consonant),  -tub, 
generally , as:  bie  $raft,  strength;  bie  .gulunft, 
the  future  ; bie  !£ugcnb,  virtue. 

(e)  Those  in  -c,  generally  (but  with  many  exceptions), 
as : bie  §6fye,  height ; bie  ©rojje,  size. 

( d ) Some  in  -ni§  (see  also  under  neuters),  as : bie 

SSilbttiS,  the  wilderness. 

( e ) Foreign  Substantives  in  -age,  -ie  (French) ; -if 

(Greek);  -C113,  -tat,  -(t)iott,  -Ur  (Lat.),  always 
as : bie  Courage,  courage ; bie  SRelobic',  the  melody; 
bie  -Bhtfif,  music;  bie  Slubicnj',  the  audience; 
bie  Unioerfifitt',  the  university ; bie  Jiatiott',  the 
nation ; bie  -Katin',  nature. 

3.  Neuter  are : 

(a)  Substantives  in  -(f) ett  and  -Icttt  (diminutives),  al- 
ways (without  regard  to  sex),  as  : ba§  2Jldnnleitt, 
ba3  grdulcin,  ba§  2Kdb(fjctt. 


go] 


GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  GENDER. 


107 


( b ) Those  in  -turn,  almost  always , as  : ba§  ©fyriftentum, 

Christendom,  Christianity. 

(c)  Those  in  -nig,  -fal,  — fel,  generally , as : ba§  ©reigni3, 

the  event ; ba£  ©cfyicffal,  fate,  destiny ; ba£  3iats 
fcl,  the  riddle. 

(d)  Those  beginning  with  the  prefix  ©c-,  unless  other- 

wise determined  by  meaning,  termination,  or 
• derivation,  as  : ba§  ©emalbe,  the  painting ; bll3 
©emacf),  the  apartment ; but:  ber  ©ebatter,  the 
godfather;  bie  ©efcmtterin,  the  godmother ; bie 
©efeHfdjaft,  the  company ; ber  ©e&raud),  the 
usage  (from  ber  SSraudf),  masc.  monosyll.). 

Give  the  gender  of  the  following  substantives,  assigning  the  rule  in 
each  case:  $eiltf)en,  §ut,  $ird)e,  $iinft(er,  2anbfd)aft,  ©)jtg  (vinegar), 

23Iume,  ©ejdjenf,  ^ndblein,  33egrdbiti3,  gurtfjt,  §afen,  ©emitter,  ginger, 
Slpfel,  $orb,  Uniberfitat',  Stftrolog,  ^eppic^,  s43fjiIofop^ie. 

90.  General  Remarks  on  Gender. 

1.  Gender  agrees,  as  in  English,  with  sex,  except  in  ba§ 
•JBeib,  in  Diminutives  in  -rijCU  and  -lent,  and  in  certain 
compounds  (see  below). 

2.  Inanimate  objects,  which  in  English  are  all  alike  neu- 
ter, may  be  of  any  gender  in  German,  as  determined  by 
Meaning  or  Form,  as : ber  §ut,  bie  331ume,  btt§  33uc §. 

3.  Each  substantive  of  which  the  gender  is  not  determined 
by  the  rules  should  be  learnt  with  the  Definite  Article  as 
the  sign  of  its  gender. 

4.  Compounds  are  of  the  gender  of  the  last  component 
(hence  ba3  grauenjimmer,  the  woman,  is  neuter),  except 

bet  Sfbfdjen,  disgust,  from  bie  Sd^eu. 
bie  SCnittund,  the  answer,  from  ba$  SBort. 
ber  3WittUJ0d},  Wednesday,  from  bie  2Bo$e* 


io8 


LESSON  XVIII. 


Also  certain  compounds  of  2Jtut,  which  are  given  in  Ap- 
pendix I. 

5.  The  exceptions  to  the  foregoing  lists  will  be  found  in 
Appendix  I. 


91.  Double  Gender. 

The  gender  of  the  following  substantives  (with  others 
given  in  App.  J.),  varies  with  their  meaning : 

Singular. 

bcr  Sanb,  volume 

ba§  Sanb, 


ribbon 
bond,  tie 
bcr  Sauer,  peasant 
ba3  Sauer,  bird-cage 
fecr  $eibe,  heathen  ) 
bit  £>etbe,  heath  ) 
btr  ©rf'ilb,  shield 
bu§  ©cl'itb,  sign  (of  an  inn,  etc.) 
bcr  ©ee,  lake  ) 
bie  ©ee,  sea  ) 
ber  Jfyor,  fool,  g.  be§  SCfjoreit 
bu§  Tf)or,  gate,  g.  be§  Scores 


Plural. 

Siinbc  ) 

Siinber  > See  § 64,  above. 
Sanbe  ) 

Sauern 

Sauer 


£>eibeit 

©cfjilbe 

©c^ilber 

©eeen 

S©f>orm 

£f>ore 


Vocabulary. 

(The  pupil  will  supply  the  article  in  German  where  not  given.) 


to  visit,  study  (at  a univer- 
sity), befucfjert  (-f-  Acc.) 
collect,  gather,  fammeln 
peasant,  country-man,  b — 
33auer 

bee,  b — Siene 


relate,  tell,  erjafylen 
paint,  malert 

(female)  neighbour,  b — tylaS)* 

bavin 

orator,  b — Sftebner 
bedroom,  b — ©cfylafjtmmer 


DOUBLE  GENDER. 


109 


9i] 

boat,  ba§  SSoot 
friendship,  b — $reunbfdf)aft 
inn,  b — @afif;au3 
district,  locality,  b — ©e'gcrtb 
history,  story,  b — ©efcfyid;te 
waiter,  b — Kellner 
piano,  ba3  Plainer' 
vice,  ba3  Safter 
lesson,  b—  Seftion' 
people,  bte  Seute  (pi.) 
love,  b — Siebe 

mathematics,  b — 9)?atl)ematif 
(sing.) 

so,  fo 

Idioms : 1.  I like  to  learn  Gen 

2.  A week  ago  to-day, 

3.  A week  from  to-da 


little  son,  b — ©iMjrtcfyen 
sun,  b — ©ortrte 
city-gate,  town-gate,  b — 
©tabtifjor 

ingratitude,  b — Unbanfbarfeit 
way,  road,  b — 28eg 
wind,  b — SBinb 
rage,  fury,  bte  28ut 
sign,  ba§ 

terrible,  terribly,  furcf)terItdE) 
strong  (heavily,  of  rain,  etc.), 
ftcirf 

willingly,  with  pleasure,  gem 

nan,  £>d)  lerne  .qern  $eutfd). 

«£cute  oor  fld)t  Siagcn  (Dat.). 
y,  $eute  ii  b e r ad>t  Sage  (Acc.)* 


EXERCISE  XVIII. 

A.  1.  ©fme  (bte)  greunbfdiaft,  (bte)  £>offnuttg  unb  (bte)  Siebe 
tniirbe  bag  Seben  fet>r  traurig  feitt.  2.  llnfere  SSettern  toaren  fyeute 
bor  ad)t  Shagen  bei  ung.  3.  (Die)  ©cfymeicftelei  ift  fein  geicfien  ber 
grt'xtnbf c£>af t.  4.  2Bi!I)elm,  lerne  beine  Seftion.  5.  2Bag  fiir 
SSattbe  ftnb  auf  bent  Difcbe  in  $l)rer  SBibtiotbef  ? 6.  @g  fittb  fiinf 
93anbe  bon  ©cf>illerg  SBerfen.  7.  Die  2But  beg  ©turmeg  ift 
fiircbterlicf),  aber  bag  ©cf;iff  ift  fd)on  tm  §afett.  8.  Sernt  3bc 
D ruber  gem  Sftatfyematif  ? Slein,  aber  er  lernt  gem  Deutfd). 
9.  2BeIcf>em  SKabdien  ge^oren  biefe  Slinge,  ber  fbfarie  ober  ber 
©ara  ? 10.  Die  Danfbarfeit  ift  eitte  Dugenb,  aber  bie  Uttbanfbar* 
feit  ift  ein  Safter.  11.  $arl  ©d)mibt  befud)t  tm  SBinter  bie  Unis 
berfitat,  aber  int  ©ommer  tbofjnt  er  bet  feinett  ©Item  auf  bent 
Sanbe.  12.  $cneg  Jfrauiein  J?at  iftrer  greuttbin  ein  S3anb  jurn 
©eburtgtag  gefcfienfi,  unb  ibre  greunbitt  ift  bamit  febr  jufrtcben. 
13.  Diefe  £>anbfcf)ul)e  geboren  nicfd  mir,  fie  get)oren  nteiitem 


IIO 


LESSON  XVIII. 


[§§9i- 


©cfytoager.  14.  $)er  SDcaler  I;at  ein  ©cfyilb  fiir  ba§  ©aftfyau£  bor 
bem  Sdjor  gemalt.  15.  SRarie,  fyaft  bu  bie  23anber  fur  beine 
gutter  gefauft?  SRein,  aber  id)  fterbe  fie  morgen  ober  am  SKitt* 
food)  faufen.  16.  Heffner,  I;oIen  ©te  mtr  gefattigft  ein  9Jleffer 
unb  einen  Soffel.  17.  Ijat  mir  !eine  Stnttoort  auf  meinen 
93rief  gefd^idt.  18.  2Ba3  fiir  eine  9Mobte  fpielt  ba3  £od)terd;en 
unferer  2Birtin  auf  bem  flamer?  19.  SBenn  id)  ©elb  fydtte,  fo 
toiirbe  id)  einen  SEeppicfy  unb  3Sorf)ange  fiir  mein  ©ddafjtmmer 
Jaufen.  20.  SBenn  9JJarie  it>re  Seftion  nid^t  lernt,  fo  ioirb  fie  in 
ber  ©djule  nid;t  gut  anttoorten. 

B.  1.  This  country-man  lives  on  a heath  near  the  lake. 
2.  The  tempest  is  terrible,  but  the  ship  is  already  in  the 
harbour.  3.  The  stranger  praises  this  locality  on  account  of 
the  beauty  of  the  landscape.  4.  What  kind  of  a flower  is  it  ? 
It  is  a violet.  5.  We  met  a stranger  on  the  way  to  the  uni- 
versity. 6.  Your  aunt  is  my  neighbour.  7.  Who  are  these 
people  ? They  are  the  parents  of  my  cousin.  8.  The  mother 
relates  to  her  little  son  the  story  of  the  little  man  in  the 
wood.  9.  Have  you  heard  the  words  of  the  orator?  10. 
During  the  tempest  the  wind  shook  the  house.  11.  The  girl 
hangs  the  bird-cage  before  the  window  in  the  sun  (acc.).  12. 
The  bees  gather  honey  from  the  flowers  upon  the  heath,  and 
the  peasant  sells  it  in  the  town.  13.  When  we  hastened 
home  yesterday,  it  was  raining  heavily.  14.  I shall  not  wait 
for  George,  because  I have  no  time.  15.  When  I resided  at 
(bet)  my  uncle’s,  I was  always  at  home  at  ten  o’clock  in  the 
evening. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XVIII. 

1.  Wer  war  heute  vor  acht  Tagen  bei  Ihnen  ? 2.  Was  fiir 
Bucher  haben  Sie  auf  Ihrem  Tische  ? 3.  Lernen  Sie  gern 

Mathematik?  4.  Was  macht  Karl  Schmidt  im  Winter? 
5.  Wer  spielt  jetzt  auf  dem  Klavier?  6.  Was  werden  Sie 
heute  fiber  acht  Tage  machen? 


94l 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS, 


III 


LESSON  XIX. 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.-—  IRREGULAR  WEAK  VERBS® 

92.  Relative  Pronouns. 

The  Relative  Pronouns  are : 


1.  bet,  bic,  bus,  ) who  (of  persons),  which  (of 

2.  tueldjet,  tueld )t,  mlfyti,  ) things)  — Definite. 


3.  mer,  who  (=  he  who,  whoever) 

4.  Uta$,  what  (—  that  which,  whatever) 


Indefinite. 


5.  bc§glcid)en, ) ^ |j^e  0£  wjlom  or  which  — Indeclinable. 

6.  bergletdjett,  > 


93.  2)er,  bi t,  bag,  as  Relative  Pronoun,  is  declined  as 
follows : 


Singular . Plural 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  ber 

bte 

bag 

bte,  who,  which,  that 

Gen. 

beffcit 

berett 

beffen 

berett  whose,  of  which 

Dat. 

bem 

ber 

bem 

bertcit,  (to,  for)  whom,  which 

Acc. 

ben 

bte 

baS 

bte,  whom,  which,  that 

Observe.  — These  forms  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  Defi- 
nite Article,  except  the  added  -ett  of  the  Gen.  Sing.,  Gen. 
Plur.,  and  Dat.  Plur. 

94.  $&elcf)cr,  as  Relative  Pronoun,  is  declined  after  the 
biefer  Model,  but,  like  the  Interrogative  toelc^er,  lacks  the 
Genitive. 


1 1 2 


LESSON  XIX. 


[§§  95- 


95.  Remarks  on  ber  and  tocldjcr 

1.  Ser  and  toeTcfjct  refer  alike  to  both  persons  and  things, 
and  are  interchangeable,  except  that : 

(a)  In  the  gen.,  beffen,  berert,  beffen,//.  beren  (not  toeltf;e§, 
etc.),  are  always  used  (see  § 82,  above). 

(b)  ®er  is  used  when  the  antecedent  is  of  the  First  or 
Second  Person,  the  relative  being,  in  that  case,  always  fol- 
lowed by  the  Personal  Pronoun,  as : 

I,  who  am  your  friend, 

3$,  bet  io)  $reunb  bin, 

(or : 3$,  bic  id)  3f)re  $reunbin  bin). 

O God,  (thou)  who  art  in  Heaven, 

D ©ott,  bet  bu  im  §immel  bift. 

2.  $cr  and  totldjer,  referring  to  inanimate  objects,  are  usu- 
ally replaced  by  too  (toot- before  a vowel)  before  a preposition 
(compare  § 83,  3,  above,  for  similar  use  of  too  for  toa3),  as  2 

The  table,  on  which  {whereon)  the  book  is, 

2)er  $if$,  auf  toelcfyem,  or : toorauf  ba3  33ucfy  i(t 

3.  The  Gen.  beffen,  etc.,  always  precedes  its  case,  as: 

A tree,  the  leaves  of  which  are  green, 

Gin  23aum,  beffen  flatter  grim  finb. 

96.  Remarks  on  toer  and  toa§. 

1.  2Bcr  and  totf§  are  declined  like  the  Interrogative  Pro- 
nouns toer?  and  toa3? 

2.  is  used  of  persons  only,  for  all  genders  and  both 
numbers;  tottS  never  of  persons . 


REMARKS  ON  foet  AND  ftHlS. 


96] 


113 


3.  2Bcr  and  tua0,  as  relatives,  are  indefinite  and  compound 
in  meaning,  and  include  the  antecedent,  as : 

SJBcr  nid)t  fjorert  toitl,  ntuj$  fuf)Ien, 

(He)  who  will  not  hear,  must  feel. 

tdE)  $i)nen  S^icft  l)abe,  ift  nid)t  btel. 

What  (=  that  which)  I have  sent  you,  is  not  much. 

4.  Sfficr  never  has  an  antecedent,  since  it  includes  the  ante- 
cedent itself ; therefore 

never  say : 9Jtcinrt,  User  fyier  toar, 

but:  ®er  9)iann,  Uscld^cr  I)ier  toar, 

(The  man  who  was  here). 

5.  never  has  an  antecedent,  unless  the  antecedent  be 
a neuter  adjective  or  pronoun,  such  as  ntd)i$,  nothing ; eitoaS, 
something;  atteS,  everything  ; or  a phrase,  in  which  cases  UwS 
always  replaces  as: 

Nothing  (that)  I say,  etc.,  9iid)t§,  ttm§  id)  [age,  etc. 

All  (that)  I have,  etc.,  2ltte§,  toa§  id)  I)abe,  etc. 

The  best  (that)  I have,  etc.,  3)a§  33efte,  toa3  id)  I)abe,  etc. 

He  does  not  learn  his  lessons,  which  (i.  e.  4 the  not 
learning’)  is  a great  pity,  ©r  lernt  feme  Seftionen  rticfyt, 
ttm§  fe^r  fd)abe  ift. 

6.  Ever  = Mid)  or  tmmcr  after  toe r or  toa§,  as  : 

3Ser  e3  Midj  (immcr)  gefagt  I)at,  Whoever  has  said  it. 

7.  The  Relative  Um8,  like  the  Interrogative,  is  not  used 
after  prepositions  in  the  Dative  or  Accusative,  but  is  re- 
placed in  the  same  way  by  too(r);  with  prepositions  governing 
the  Genitive,  toc£  is  used  (see  § 83,  3,  above). 

Observe.  — The  relative  must  never  be  omitted  in  German, 
as  it  so  frequently  is  in  English,  hence  : 

( Engl'. ) The  man  I met, 

{Germ,)  Ser  9Kann,  tocldjem  (bem)  id)  begegnete. 


LESSON  XIX. 


[§§  £7** 


114 

97.  ©C^gleidjCtt  and  betglddjcn  are  indeclinable  words, 
the  former  referring  to  a masc.  or  neuter  noun  in  the  sing., 
the  latter  to  fern,  or  plural  nouns,  as  : 

©in  9Jtann,  be§gleid)en  (dat.)  id)  nie  begegnete, 

A man,  the  like  of  whom  I never  met. 

§abett  ©ie  jemalS  be§gleidf>en  gefyort? 

Have  you  ever  heard  the  like  of  that  ? 

©irtegrau,  bergleid^en,  etc.,  A woman,  the  like  of  whom,  etc. 
$inber,  bergteidjen,  etc.,  Children,  the  like  of  whom,  etc. 

98.  Construction  of  Relative  Sentences. 

1.  Every  relative  sentence  is  of  course  a dependent  sen- 
tence, and  as  such  must  have  the  verb  at  the  end,  as  : 

The  wine,  which  I have  sent  you,  is  very  good. 

©er  2Bein,  ben  id)  %l)ncn  gefdjiift  Ijabc,  ift  fefyr  gut. 

2.  When  the  antecedent  is  subject,  the  relative  immediately 
follows  it  (as  in  the  sentence  given  above) ; but  if  the  ante- 
cedent be  object,  the  sentence  in  which  the  object  occurs 
should  be  completed  before  the  relative  is  introduced,  as : 

I have  not  used  the  book  which  you  sent  me,  !gd)  fyabe  ba3 
23ud)  ttid )t  gcbraudjt,  toelcfyeS  ©ie  tnir  fd)icften. 

I would  have  bought  the  book  you  showed  me  yesterday, 
if  I had  had  money,  $d)  toiirbe  ba3  33ud)  gefauft  l)a Beit, 
toeld)e3  ©ie  mir  geftern  jeigten,  ftenn  id)  ©elb  gel)abt  I)atte. 

3.  In  sentences  with  toer  or  the  relative  clause  will  be 
counted  as  the  first  member  of  the  principal  sentence,  which 
will  therefore  begin  with  the  verb,  e.  g. : 

28er  mcbt  I)oren  toitf,  nutfj  fallen, 

He  who  will  not  hear,  must  feel. 

Note.  — In  German,  every  dependent  sentence  or  clause  is  separated 
trom  the  sentence  on  which  it  depends  by  a comma.  The  relatives 
tt)eld)er  and  ber  must  therefore  always  be  preceded  by  a comma. 


99] 


IRREGULAR  WEAK  VERBS. 


US 


99.  Irregular  Weak  Verbs, 

i.  A Few  Weak  Verbs,  besides  adding  the  termination  -tc 
to  form  the  Impf.,  and  -t  to  form  the  P.  Part.,  also  change 
the  Stem  Vowel  in  the  Impf.  Indicative  and  P.  Part.,  but 
not  in  the  Impf.  Subjunctive.  They  are : 


Infinitive. 

Impf.  Ind. 

Impf.  Subj. 

P.  Part. 

brcnnen  (intr.),  to  burn,  be 

brannte 

brennte 

gebrannt 

consumed  with  fire 
lennen,  to  know,  be  ac- 

fatmte 

fcitnte 

gefannt 

quainted  with 
ttennen,  to  name 

nannte 

ncnnte 

genannt 

rennen,  to  run  (at  full  speed) 

rnmtte 

rcmtte 

gerannt 

fcnben,  to  send 

( fanbte 
( jcnbete 

fcnbcte 

\ gefanbt 
l gefenbei 

tocnben,  to  turn 

( tonnbte 
{ tocnbtte 

'roenbctc  < 

\ getoanbt 
[ getoenbet 

Observe:  i.  The  double  forms  of  the  last  two  verbs,  of 
which  the  shorter  are  in  more  general  use. 

2.  The  three  following  verbs  have  also  a consonant  change, 
with  Umlaut  in  the  Impf.  Subj.  : 


Infinitive. 
brittgen,  to  bring 
bcitfen,  to  think 

bihtfen,  to  seem  (impers.) 
(beu $ten,  bciud;ten) 


Impf.  Ind. 

bradjte 
badjte 
( beurijte 

l (baucfyte) 
( biinfte 


Impf.  Subj. 
bradjte 
badjte 
bcudjte 
(baudjte) 
biinfte 


P.  Part. 
gebradjt 
gebadjt 
gebcurfjt 
(gebaucfyt) 
gebiinft 


Remarks.  — i.  Compare  the  English:  bring,  brought; 
think,  thought. 


2.  The  forms  baucfyte,  gebaudjt,  are  as  yet  more  common 
than  beudjte,  gebeudjt,  but  the  latter  are  according  to  the  new 
official  orthography. 


LESSON  XIX. 


[§  99 


1 16 

3.  Besides  the  Inf.  beudE)ten,  there  is  also  a Pres.  Ind. 
3.  sing.  beucf)t. 

Note.  — The  German  Perfect  often  replaces  the  English  Past  or 
Imperfect  (see  also  Less.  XLIII.),  as : 

I sent  you  the  book  yesterday, 

3d)  Ijak  Sfynett  geftent  ba§  23ud)  gefdjitft. 

I was  working  yesterday  the  whole  day, 

3d)  (jak  geftent  ben  gaiqett  £ag  gearkitet. 


Vocabulary. 


consider,  bebenfen  (trans.) 
order,  bespeak,  befteften 
think  of,  benfen  art  (-j-  acc.) 

or  benfen  (-)-  gen.) 
recognize,  erfennen 
like  to  hear,  gem  f)5ren 
divide,  share,  ieilen 
burn,  consume  with  fire 


acquaintance,  bte  93ef  anntfd^aft 
postman,  ber  ^ofibote 
title,  ber  2ntel 
all,  everything,  2lDfe§ 
unhappy,  unfortunate,  un* 
gludlicfy 

improbable,  untt>af>rf d^einlid^ 
just  now,  ebert,  foebett 
diligently,  industriously,  fleij$tg 
easily,  readily,  Iei$t 


(trans.),  berbrennen 
wish,  ftmnfcfyen 


apply  to,  fid^  toenben  an  really,  Vnirflid^ 
(+  acc.) 

Idiom:  It  is  a pity,  (£3  if!  fdjabe  (adj.). 


EXERCISE  XIX. 

A.  1.  ©er  ®aifer  fanbte  einen  Soten  mit  ber  9ia$ridj»t  nad) 
SBerlin.  2.  2Ber  nicfjt  fiir  mic^  ift,  ift  toiber  midff.  3.  ©ie  Sente, 
bet  benen  icfy  auf  Sefucf)  getoefen  bin,  finb  ©cBotten.  4.  §at  ber 
Kellner  2ltte§  geBracfyt,  toir  Braudjen?  5.  ©er  iJSoftBote  fyat 
mir  bte  %jcl)ricf>t  ge&racfit,  ftorauf  idj>  toartete.  6.  gdj  erfannte 
toirltid^  ben  §errn  .nidjt,  ber  geftern  mit  meinem  Setter  in  ber 
^irdEte  tear.  7.  ©a§  ipferb  be3  ©eneral§  rannte  um  ben  $rei§. 
8.  ©er  trembling,  beffen  Sefanntfcfyaft  icb  ju  madden  iounfdje, 
iuirb  morgen  fyier  fein.  9.  ©a§  geuer  Brannte  im  Dfen  unb  ber* 


§99] 


IRREGULAR  WEAK  VERBS. 


II 7 


brannte  ba§  §ot$.  10.  2Benn  er  itnglucfltd)  mar,  martbte  er  fid) 

tmmer  an  mid),  ber  id)  fern  greunb  mar.  11.  3$  bacfyte  tyeute  an 
bie  ©efd)i$te,  bxe  ©ie  mir  geftern  erjaljlten,  unb  icf)  I)abe  fel)r 
bariiber  gelacf)t.  12.  §at  ber  ®iener  bie  S31’td)er  nad;  §aufe 
gebr add,  bie  id)  beim23ud)l)anb(er  gefauft  I)abe?  13.  SJienfcf),  ^aft 
bu  je  bebad)t,  ma3  bu  bift?  14.  2Bir  I)aben  ba3  £>of$  fd)on  fc>er* 
brannt,  ba§  mir  fcor  ad)t  Sagert  gefauft  fjaben.  15.  35iefe§  $inb 
erjafylt  immer  ju  £>aufe,  ma£  e3  in  ber  ©d)ule  I)5rt.  16.  2lde3, 
ma3  er  I)at,  teilt  er  mit  mir,  ber  id)  fein^reunb  bin.  17.  ©lattbeu 
©ie  bie  ©efc)id)te,  bie  §err  23raurt  un§  erga^It  )at?  18.  ®ie 
grau,  beren  $£ocf)terd)en  bei  urt3  attf  33efud)  ift,  mirb  morgen  nad) 
§aufe  reifen.  19.  2 Ba§  ©ie  in  ber  ©tabt  ge)ort  I)aben,  ift  fefyr 
unmal)rfd)einficf).  20.  @3  regnete  geftern,  ma3  fel)r  fc)abe  mar, 
ba  mir  auf  bem  Sanbe  maren. 

B . 1.  Do  you  hear  what  I say  to  you?  2.  My  father  al- 
ways burnt  the  letters  which  were  no  longer  useful.  3.  He 
has  not  told  me  what  he  wishes.  4.  The  man,  in  whose 
house  we  lived,  is  the  brother  of  our  neighbour.  5.  Here  is 
the  meat  which  you  have  ordered.  6.  The  honey  which  the 
countryman  brought  us  yesterday  is  not  good.  7.  Do  you 
know  the  artist  who  has  painted  this  picture?  8.  People 
who  are  not  industrious  do  not  become  rich.  9.  We  readily 
believe  what  we  hope  and  wish  for.  10.  What  were  you 
thinking  of  when  you  met  me  yesterday?  11.  Have  you  all 
you  need?  12.  I believe  that  I know  the  man  who  is  in 
front  of  the  house.  13.  I always  burn  the  newspapers  I do 
not  need.  14.  The  students  to  whom  these  books  belong  do 
not  study  them  diligently,  which  is  a pity.  15.  I do  not 
know  the  song,  the  title  of  which  you  have  just  named.  16. 
What  was  burning  ? The  gardener  was  burning  leaves. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XIX. 

1.  Was  machen  Sie  gewohnlich  mit  den  Zeitungen,  die  Sie 
nicht  mehr  brauchen?  2.  Wer  hat  Ihnen  diese  Nachrickt 


1 1 s 


LESSON  XX. 


[§§  ioo- 


gebracht?  3.  Woran  denken  Sie  ? 4.  Was  machen  Sie, 
wenn  Sie  einen  Feiertag  haben  ? 5.  Glauben  Sie  jede  Ge- 

schichte,  die  Sie  horen?  6.  Was  erzahlt  das  Kind? 


LESSON  XX. 

DECLENSION  OF  ATTRIBUTIVE  ADJECTIVES:- STRONG  FORM. 

-CONJUGATION  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

100.  Declension  of  Attributive  Adjectives. 

The  boy  is  good  — Predicative  Adjective. 

The  good  boy  — Attributive  “ 

Remember:  That  Adjectives  used  as  Predicates  are  not 
varied  (see  § 14). 

101.  Every  Attributive  Adjective  either  is  or  is  not 
preceded  by  a determinative  word  (i.  e.,  article  or  pronominal 
adjective),  which  shows  gender,  number  and  case  by  distinc- 
tive endings. 

102.  First  Form.  — If  not  preceded  by  any  such  deter- 
minative word,  the  Attributive  Adjective  follows  the  Strong 
Declension,  which  is  the  same  as  the  btefer  Model  through- 
out, thus : 

Strong  Declension  of  gut,  good. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  gutcr 

gute 

gutc§ 

gute 

Gen.  gutcS 

gutcr 

gutcS 

gutcr 

Dat.  gutcm 

gutcr 

gutem 

gutcit 

Acc.  gutctt 

gute 

gutc0 

gute 

102] 


STRONG  ADJECTIVE  DECLENSION. 


119 


Substantives  with  Adjectives. 


Singular. 


MASC. 

good  wine 
Nom.  gutcr  SBein 
Gen.  gutcg  (en)  2Bein(e)g 
Dat.  gutem  2Bein(e) 

Acc.  gutcn  SBein 


FEM. 

good  soup 
gutc  ©uftye 
gutcr  ©uppe 
gutcr  ©up!pe 
gute  ©uppe 


NEUTER. 

good  glass 
gutcg  ©lag 
guteg(en)©lafel 
gutem  ©laf(e) 
gutcg  ©lag 


Plural. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  gutc  SBeine,  ©u^en,  ©Icifer 
Gen.  gutcr  Seine,  ©uppen,  ©lafer 
Dat.  gutcn  SBeinett,  ©uftyen,  ©lafem 
Acc.  gutc  Seine,  ©ttypen,  ©lafer 

Observe  : In  this  form,  where  there  is  no  other  word  to 
show  the  gender,  etc.,  of  the  noun,  this  work  must  be  done 
by  the  adjective,  which  therefore  has  as  full  a set  of  end- 
ings as  possible. 

Remarks.  — 1.  The  Gen.  Sing.  Masc.  and  Neuter  generally 
has  -cn  instead  of  -eg  before  strong  substantives,  as : gutcn 
SBeineg,  gutcn  33rotcg. 

2.  Adjectives  in  -c  drop  the  -e  of  the  stem  in  declension, 
as : tntibe,  tired : tnub-er,  tntib-e,  utub-cg,  etc. 

3.  If  several  Adjectives  precede  the  aame  substantive, 
all  follow  the  same  form,  as : 

gutcr,  alter,  rotcr  23ein,  etc., 
good,  old,  red  wine. 

Decline  throughout  in  German:  sick  child,  high  tree,  long  lesson, 
beautiful  broad  stream,  young  woman,  lazy  horse,  tired  boy. 


120 


LESSON  XX. 


[§§  103- 


103.  Conjugation  of  Strong  Verbs. 


Verbs  in  German  are  either  Strong  or  Weak.  The  Weak 
Verbs,  which  indicate  change  of  tense  by  the  addition  of  a 
termination  (usually  without  change  of  vowel),  as:  lob-cn, 
lobtc,  gelob-i,  have  been  treated  in  Lessons  IX,  X. 

104.  The  Strong  Verbs,  on  the  other  hand,  indicate  the 
change  of  tense  by  a change  of  the  Root  Vowel  with- 
out adding  a termination,  as  : fing-en,  to  sing,  Impf.  fang; 
blctben,  to  remain,  Impf.  blicb. 

105.  The  Past  Participle  in  Strong  Verbs  ends  in  -nt 
(not  -et),  usually  also  with  change  of  Vowel,  as:  fing-en,  P. 
Part,  ge-fung-m ; blciben,  P.  Part,  ge— blicb— cn ; but  geben,  P. 
Part,  ge-gcbcn. 

Remark.  — This  change  of  Root-Vowel  is  called  ‘Ablaut/ 
and  is  common  to  English  and  German.  Compare  Eng.  sing, 
sang,  sung;  give,  gave,  giv-en. 

106.  Paradigm  of  Simple  Tenses  of  ftngen,  to  sing. 


Principal  Parts. 


Infin.  f:ng-en 
Indicative. 


Impf.  fang  P.  Part,  ge-fung-cn 


Subjunctive. 


Present. 


tcf>  fingc,  I sing 
bu  fing(e)ft,  thou  sing-cst 


■cst  bu  fingcft 


id;  fingc,  I (may)  sing,  etc. 


er  fing(e)t,  he  sing-s 
fthr  fingcit,  we  sing 
if)r  fing(e)t,  ye  sing 
fie  fingejt,  they  sing 


fie  fingcit 
Imperfect. 

(Ind.  Stem  withU mlaut,  where  possible.) 


er  fingc 
toir  fingcit 
ii)f  fin  get 


iefi  ffing,  I sang 
bu  fong(e)ft,  thou  sangst 


icf)  fiingc 
bu  fangeft 


simple  tenses  of  ftngen. 


121 


107] 


Indicative, 
er  fang,  he  sang 
toir  fangett,  we  sang 
if>r  fang(e)t,  ye  sang 
fie  fangett,  they  sang 


Subjunctive, 
er  fitnge 
toir  fongen 
ifyr  fiinget 
fie  fiingeit 


Imperative. 

fxng(e)  [bu],  sing  [thou] 
finge  er,  let  him  sing 
firtgcn  ttur,  let  us  sing 
fing(e)t  [t$r],  sing  [ye] 
fingeit  fie,  let  them  sing 


Observe  : The  Person  endings  are  the  same  throughout  as 
in  the  paradigm  of  lobert,  in  which  -te  of  the  Impf.  is  a 
Tense  ending  (see  Lessons  IX,  X);  this  is  shown  by  the 
following : 


107.  Table  of  Endings  of  Strong  Verbs  in 
Simple  Tenses. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Imperative. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Sing.  1.  — t 

— c 

— 

— e 

2.  — (C)ft 

-eft 

-(c)ft 

-eft 

-(e) 

3.  — (e)t 

— e 

— _ 

— e 

— c 

Plur . 1 . — Ctt 

— Clt 

— en 

— en 

— en 

2.  — (e)t 

— et 

—(e)* 

— et 

— (e)t 

3.  —cn 

— en 

— en 

— en 

— cn 

Observe:  i.  The  changed  Vowel  of  the  Imperfect,  and  ab- 
sence of  person  endings  in  1.  and  3.  sing. 

2.  The  Umlaut  of  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

3.  The  persistent -c  of  the  Subjunctive  (Imperf. 
as  well  as  Pres.) 


9 


1 22 


LESSON  XX. 


[§§ 107- 


Remarks. — i.  The -c  of  the  termination  in  the  2.  Sing, 
of  the  Pres,  and  Impf.  Ind.  is  only  retained  in  Strong  Verbs 
after  b,  f,  or  a sibilant,  as  : id)  reit-e,  bu  reit-eft ; id)  £reif-e, 
bu  preif-cft ; and  in  the  3.  Sing.  Pres.  Ind.,  and  2.  Plur.  Pres, 
and  Impf.  Ind.  after  b,  as : er  reit-et,  il)r  reit-et,  ifyr  ritt-ct ; 
but  er  ^reif -t,  ifyr  !preif— t,  il)r  prief-i. 

2.  The  compound  tenses  of  a Strong  Verb  are  formed  pre- 
cisely like  those  of  a Weak  Verb,  some  being  conjugated 
with  fyaben,  others  with  fein ; hence  it  is  only  necessary  to 
know  the  Inf.,  Impf.  and  P.  Part.,  and  in  some  cases  the 
2.  Sing.  Imper.,in  order  to  conjugate  a Strong  Verb  throughout. 


108.  Paradigm  of  Compound  Tenses  of  ftngen,  to 
sing  (with  I)aben)  ; fallen,  to  fall  (with  fein). 

Indicative.  Subjunctive* 

Perfect. 

ip"*-  °f ! S'n ! + p- p”'-  o* ! £!'  1 ) 

i<f>  Ijabe  gefungen,  I have  sung  i$  Ijabe  gefungen 

bu  I)aft  gefungen,  thou  hast  sung,  etc.  bu  babeft  gefungen,  etc. 
id;  bin  gefatten,  I have  (am)  fallen,  etc.  id)  fei  gefatten,  etc. 


Pluperfect. 

td)  batte  gefungen,  I had  sung,  etc.  id;  I;atte  gefungen,  etc. 
id;  War  gefatten,  I had  (was)  fallen,  etc.  id;  tnarc  gefatten,  etc. 


Future. 

(Pres,  of  inetben  + Infin.  of  | 1 ) 

icf)  foerbe  ftngen  (fallen),  I shall  sing  id;  toerbe  fingen  (fallen) 
(fall) 

bu  toirft  ftngen  (fatten),  thou  wilt  sing  bn  luerbeft  ftngen  (fatten), 
(fall),  etc.  etc. 


no] 


compound  tenses  of  fingett,  fatten. 


123 


Indicative. 


Future  Perfect. 
. ( fjciben 


Subjunctive. 


(Future  of  1 . 

( lew  > 

id)  toerbe  gefungen  fyaben,  I shall  have  i$  toerbe  gefungen  fyaben 
sung 

bu  toirft  gefungen  fyaben,  thou  wilt  bu  toerbeft  gefungm 
have  sung,  etc.  Ba&en/  etc* 

icf;  toerbe  gefatten  feitt,  I shall  have  id)  toerbe  gefallen  fein. 
(be)  fallen,  etc.  etc. 

Conditional.  Compound. 

Simple.  ( babett ) § 

(Impf.  Subj.  of  werben  + Infin.  (Simple  Cond.  of  j (dn  f f 

of  ftngctt,  faUen)  p.  Part,  of  ftngett,  fallen) 

iefy  totirbe  ftngen  (fatten),  I id)  toiirbe  gefungen  fiaben, 
should  sing  (fall),  etc.  etc. 

id)  toiirbe  gefatten  fctlt,  etc. 


Infin.  Perf. 

(P.  Part,  of  { jjj"  [ + Pres.  Infin.  of  { g"  } ) 

gefungen  ($u)  fyaUn,  to  have  sung 
gefatten  ju  fetn,  to  have  (be)  fallen 

109.  Compound  Verbs.  — Compound  Verbs  are  con- 
jugated like  the  simple  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived; 
those  having  one  of  the  inseparable  particles  Be-,  et-,  cm})-, 
cut-  ge-  Bet-,  get-,  do  not  take  the  prefix  ge-  in  the  P.  Part., 
as : Be-fingen,  P.  Part,  fi  e-fun  gen  (compare  Be-jafy  Ien,  P.  Part. 
Be-jafylt,  § 35,  Rem.  6),  and  in  the  Inf.  take  ju  before  the 
prefix ; other  compounds  take  the  prefix  ge-  and  the  particle 
gu  between  the  prefix  and  the  verb  (Part,  or  Inf.  respectively). 

110.  The  Strong  Verbs  are  divided  into  classes,  according 
to  the  ‘Ablaut,  ’ or  Vowel-changes,  of  the  root  (see  § 105,  Rem., 
above).  These  classes,  with  the  verbs  belonging  to  each,  are 
given  in  the  following  Lessons  (XXII-XXXI). 


124 


LESSON  XX. 


Bui 


111.  Shorter  Forms  of  the  Conditional. 

The  Impf.  and  Plupf.  Subj.  are  frequently  used  in  all 
Verbs  instead  of  the  Simple  and  Compound  Conditional 
respectively,  thus: 

id;  fjat4e  = id)  toiirbe  I;aben ; id)  faitgc  = id)  toiirbe  fingen ; 
id)  fyaitc  gcfjabt  = id;  toiirbe  gefyabt  fjaben;  id;  gcfungctt  = 
id)  tofirbe  gefungen  f)aben. 

Note.  — These  shorter  forms  are  always  to  be  preferred  in  the  Passive 
Voice  (Less.  XXI),  and  in  the  Modal  Auxiliaries  (Less.  XXXIV). 

Vocabulary. 


help  (serve)  one’s  self,  fief) 

bebienen 

acknowledge,  confess,  befen* 
nett 

catch  cold,  fief)  erfcilten 
nominate,  appoint,  ernennen 
fill,  fallen 

spread  out,  fid)  fcerbreiten 
bough,  branch,  ber  2lft  * 
ink,  bie  SDi nte  or  SCinte 
company,  bie  ©efetlf cf;aft 
governor,  ber  ©ouberneur' 
concert,  ba£  $on§eri' 
queen,  bie  ^onigin 
paper,  ba§  ^a^ier' 
advice,  counsel,  ber  Slat 


singer,  ber  ©anger,  bie  ©an* 
gerin 

liberal,  generous,  freigebig 
friendly,  kind,  freunbfid) 
fresh,  frifd; 
glad,  frofy 
hard,  fyart 
hoarse,  I)eifer 
bad,  fcf)led;t 
black,  fd;toarj 
brave,  valiant,  tapfer 
true,  faithful,  treu 
weighty,  important,  toi$tig 
at  last,  finally,  enbficf) 
yes  (emphatic),  yes  indeed, 
ja  toofyl 


Idioms:  To  appoint  (as)  governor,  gum  ©ouoerneur  eritemten ; cheer- 
fully, froh^tt  SQ^uteS  (genitive  with  adverbial  force);  good  morning,  guten  SJior* 
gen  (i.  e.,  3d>  roitnf Sfotien  einen  guten  Gurgen). 


EXERCISE  XX. 

A.  1.  SRctn  30?effer  ift  bon  gutem,  partem  ©tafyle.  2.  $o fie 
§3aume  fya&en  getooljnli^  grofje  ilfte.  3.  2i3a3  fur  $ferbe  Ijaben 


§111] 


SHORTER  FORMS  OF  CONDITIONAL. 


125 


©ie  geJauft  ? 3$  tyabe  fd^trarje  uitb  to.ei^e  ?Pfcrbe  gefauft.  4. 
gullen  ©ie  gefalligft  mein  ©la§  mit  frifd;em  SSaffer*  5.  ©ctyfere 
©olbatert  eilen  frozen  9Jcute3  in  bie  ©d;lacf)t.  6.  gliicflicbe 
9Jtenfd;en  toofynen  in  jeitem  ^jaufe.  7.  £>aben  ©ie  ettoa3  9Reue3 
in  ber  ©tabt  ge^ort  ? 2>a  tool;!,  Diet  9leue§,  aber  nic 3nte* 
reffanteS.  8.  §ier  ift  guter  $dfe  unb  frifcfye§  93rob ; bitte, 
bebienen  ©ie  fief).  9.  2Ber  bu  bift  geigt  beine  ©efeHfd;aft.  10. 
©uten  SRorgen,  §>err  23taun,  id;  fyoffe,  baft  toir  fteute  fd;bne3 
^Better  fyaben  toerben.  11.  3n  tnelcbcm  3a^re  ernannte  bie 
tonight  ben  ©rafen  bon  ©ufferin  gum  ©oubevneitr  bon  Ganaba? 
12  3$  ftabe  gute§  papier,  aber  tneine  ftebcr  ift  fc^Ied;t.  13.  ©ie 
^inber  liebten  meinen  Dnfel,  boeil  er  nie  mube  tourbe,  ifynen  fcftone 
©e(d;icftten  gu  ergaftlett.  14.  ©ie  ftabcn  enblid;  befannt,  baft  ©ie 
Unved;t  ftaben.  15.  3$  fyabe  mid)  evfaltet;  toenn  id;  jeftt  fdnge, 
totirbe  id)  fyeifer  Herbert.  16.  ^d;  ftabe  fd;on  oft  ba3  Sieb 
gebort,  toeld)e3  bie  ©fingerin  im  $ongert  gefungert  f)at.  17. 
©ute  33ud;er  finb  treue  greunbe,  bie  immer  9tat  fur  un§  ftaben. 
18.  2i3enn  toir  fleiftig  finb,  fo  toerben  unfere  Scorer  un3 
loben. 

B.  1.  Have  you  black  ink  or  red?  I have  black.  2.  Rich 
people  are  not  always  generous,  and  generous  people  are  not 
always  rich.  3.  What  kindwof  neighbours  have  you?  We 
have  friendly  neighbours.  4.  Please  fill  my  glass  with  pure 
fresh  water.  5.  High  mountains  and  beautiful  valleys  spread 
out  before  our  eyes.  6.  I have  something  important  to  say 
to  you.  7.  New  friends  are  not  always  good  friends.  8. 
This  mother  buys  her  children  something  useful.  9.  Have 
you  white  paper  or  blue  ? I have  white,  but  my  brother  has 
blue.  10.  I like  to  hear  the  singer,  who  sang  at  (in)  the 
concert  yesterday.  11.  My  sister  did  not  sing  at  the  concert, 
because  she  was  hoarse.  12.  If  she  had  not  been  hoarse, 
she  would  have  sung. 


126 


LESSON  XXI. 


[§ua 


ORAL  EXERCISE  XX. 

1.  Weshalb  liebten  die  Kinder  meinen  Onkel  ? 2.  Wer 

wohnt  in  jenem  Hause  ? 3.  Was  hat  die  Mutter  ihren  Kin- 

dern  gekauft?  4.  Was  fur  Papier  haben  Sie  fiir  mich 
gekauft?  5.  Warum  sangen  Sie  nicht?  6.  Womit  haben  Sie 
mein  Glas  gefiillt  ? 


LESSON  XXI. 

THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

11 2.  The  Passive  Voice  is  formed  by  means  of  the  various 
tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verb  toerben,  to  become  (see  §19)  — |— 
the  Past  Participle  of  the  Verb  to  be  conjugated,  as  in 
the  Paradigm  below. 


Principal  Parts  of  toerben : 

Infin.  tnerbcn  Impf.  tourbc  (toarb)  Past  Part,  getoarbett 

Note.  — The  perfect  tenses  of  toerben  are  formed  with  fcivt  (see 
§ 53.  a),  Perf.  3d)  bin  getuorben;  Plupf.  id)  toot  geroorben,  etc.  For  the 
formation  of  the  future  and  conditional,  see  fein  (§  52). 


Paradigm  of  the  Passive  Voice  of  {often,  to  praise. 

indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Present. 

(Pres,  of  toerben  + P.  Part,  of  loben.) 

I am  (being)  praised,  etc.  I (may)  be  praised,  etc. 

id)  toerbe  ) id)  toerbe 

bu  toirft  bu  toerbeft 

er  toirb  [ abTiiM  er  toerbe 

toir  toerben 
if)r  toerbet 
fie  toerben 


toir  toerben 
ifyr  toerbet 
fte  toerben 


gcfattt 


gcfattt 


passive  voice  of  loBen. 


127 


§112] 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Subjunctive. 


(Imperf.  of  toerben  + Part,  of  Iobeit.) 


I was  (being)  praised,  etc. 
id)  tourbe  (toarb) 
bu  tourbeft  (toarbft) 
cr  tourbe  (toarb) 
ioir  tourben 
t^r  tourbet 
fie  tourben 


I might  be  (being)  praised, 


gduBt 


id)  tourbe 
bu  tourbeft 
er  tourbe 
totr  tourben 
il)r  tourbet 
fie  tourben 


[etc. 


g elobt 


Perfect. 

(Perfect  of  toerben  + P.  Part,  of  toben.) 
(Part,  of  toerben  omits  gc-) 


I have  been  praised,  etc, 
id)  bin 
bu  bifi 
er  ift 
loir  finb 
il)r  fetb 
fie  finb 


I (may)  have  been  praised, 


gelobt  toorben 


id)  fei 
bu  fetefi 
er  fei 
fair  feien 
il;r  feiet 
fie  feien 


[etc. 


gelobt  toorben 


Pluperfect. 

(Plupf.  of  toerben  + P.  Part,  of  lobeti.) 

I had  been  praised,  etc.  I might  have  been  praised, 

id)  toar  gelobt  toorben  i$  toare  gelobt  toorben  [etc. 

bu  toarft  gelobt  toorben,  etc.  bu  toareft  gelobt  toorben,  etc. 


Future. 

(Future  of  toerben  4.  P.  Part,  of  (oben.) 

I shall  be  praised,  etc.  I shall  be  praised,  etc. 

id)  toerbe  gelobt  toerben  id)  toerbe  gelobt  toerben 

bu  toirft  gelobt  toerben,  etc.  bu  ioerbeft  gelobt  toerben,  etc. 


128 


LESSON  XXI. 


[§na 


Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Future  Perfect. 

(Fut.  Perf.  of  toerben  + P.  Part,  of  loBen.) 

I shall  have  been  praised,  etc.  I shall  have  been  praised,  etc. 
id)  toerbe  gelobt  toorben  fein  id)  ioerbe  gelobt  toorben  feirt 
bu  toirft  gelobt  toorben  fein,  etc.  bu  ioerbeft  gelobt  toorben  fein 

etc. 


Conditional. 

(Cond.  of  toerben  -f  P.  Part,  of  foBen.) 
Simple.  Compound. 


I should  be  praised,  etc. 
id)  ftmrbe  gelobt  toerben 
bu  iourbeft  gelobt  toerben,  etc. 

Infinitive. 

(Xnfin.  of  toerben  + P.  Part 
of  loBen.) 

Pres . to  be  praised 

gelobt  Qu)  loerben 
Perf,  to  have  been  praised 
gelobt  toorben  (ju)  fein 


I should  have  been  praised 
id)  lourbe  gelobt  toorben  fein 
bu  toiirbeft  gelobt  toorben  fein 
etc. 

Participles. 

(Part,  of  toerben  + P.  Part 
of  loBen.) 

Pres . being  praised 

gelobt  toerbenb 
Past,  been  praised 
gelobt  toorben 


Imperative. 

(Imper.  of  toerben  + P.  Part,  of  loBen.) 
be  praised,  etc. 
toerbe  gelobt 
toerbe  er  gelobt 
toerben  toir  gelobt 
toerbet  gelobt 
toerben  fie  gelobt 

Remarks.  — i.  The  shorter  forms,  i.  e.  Impf.  and  Plupf, 
Subj.  (see  § in,  and  Note),  are  commonly  used  for  the 
longer  forms  with  totirbe  in  the  conditional. 


§ 1 1*] 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 


129 


2.  Observe  the  omission  of  the  gc-  in  the  P.  Part,  of  merben 
(luorbcn  for  ge-morben)  when  used  as  auxiliary  of  the  passive 

voice. 


3.  The  personal  agent  with  the  passive  voice  (which  is 
the  subject  of  the  active  verb)  is  denoted  by  the  preposition 
turn  (Engl,  by),  as : 

©er  unartige  $nabe  mirb  bon  feinem  Sefjrer  beftraft. 

The  naughty  boy  is  being  punished  by  his  teacher. 

4.  The  auxiliary  participle  morben  is  omitted  whenever  the 
state  of  the  subject  may  be  regarded  as  still  continuing,  thus : 

©a§  §au3  ifi  gebaut. 

The  house  has  been  (is)  built  (and  is  still  standing). 

5.  The  Engl.  ‘ I am/  ‘ 1 was/  etc.,  as  part  of  the  passive 
auxiliary  ‘to  be/  must  be  rendered  into  German  as  follows : 

(a)  By  the  proper  tense  of  merben  when  they  are  equivalent 
to  ‘I  am  being/  ‘ I was  being/  etc.,  as : 

The  child  is  (i.  e.,  is  being)  punished  by  its  parents, 
©a§  &inb  tuirb  bon  feinen  ©Item  Beftraft ; 

The  dinner  was  being  served,  when  we  arrived, 

©a§  SJtittagSejfen  tourbe  ferbiert,  al3  fair  anfamen; 


or  when  the  verb,  being  turned  into  the  active  voice,  is  in  the 
present  or  imperf.  tense  respectively,  as  : 

The  boy  is  (was)  always  punished  by  the  teacher, 
when  he  is  (was)  naughty, 

©er  £nabe  mirb  (murbe)  immer  bom  Setter  be* 
ftraft,  menu  er  unartig  ift  (mar)  ; 


Passive:  < 


Active : 


The  teacher  always  punishes  (pres.)  or  punished 
(impf.)  the  boy,  when  he  is  (was)  naughty, 

©er  Se^rer  Beftraft  (Bcfirafte)  immer  ben  $naben, 
toenn  er  unartig  ift  (mar). 


1 3'o 


LESSON  XXI. 


( b ) By  the  proper  tense  of  feitt  (with  or  without  toorben,  see 
last  Remark),  when  they  are  equivalent  to  ‘I  have  been/ 
i I had  been/  etc.,  or  when  the  verb,  being  turned  into  the 
active,  would  be  perf.  or  pluperf.  respectively,  as : 

| I am  (=  have  been)  invited  to  the  party, 

1 %d)  Bin  jur  ©efellfd&aft  eittgriabeu  (toorben) ; 

| They  have  invited  (perf.)  me  to  the  party, 

( -JJtan  Jjat  mid)  jur  ©efefffd)aft  ctngclabcn. 

The  dinner  was  (==  had  been)  served,  when  we 
arrived, 

( 9Jiittag§effen  mat  fcrbiert,  aU  toir  anfamen; 

( They  had  served  (plupf.)  the  dinner,  etc., 

( SRan  Ijatte  ba§  3Jtittag€effert  fcrtiicrt,  u.  f.  to. 


Passive: 


Active: 


Passive: 


Active : 


The  following  examples  will  serve  to  show  more  clearly  the 
proper  use  of  the  various  forms  of  the  passive : 

' (a)  The  Sab en  tocrfecit  j et$t  gcfd^Ioffert,  The  shops  are 
being  shut  now  (present). 

(b)  Tie  Sdben  filth  biefe  2Bccf)e  fritter  gefc^loffen  toarbeit, 

The  shops  have  been  shut  earlier  this  week 
(perfect). 

(c)  She  Sdben  filth  jetjt  gefd)Ioffen,  The  shops  are  (and 

remain)  shut  (past  state,  continuing  in  the 
w present). 

(a)  Ter  ©olbat  tourbc  bon  einer  Shtgel  bertounbct,  The 

soldier  was  wounded  by  a ball  (a  ball  wounded 
him,  hnpf.). 

(b)  Ter  ©olbat  toar  bon  einer  $ugel  bertounbet  toorben, 

2.  < The  soldier  had  been  wounded  by  a ball 

(pluperf). 

(c)  Ter  ©olbat  toar  fdfjtoer  bertounbet.  The  soldier  was 

severely  wounded  (and  still  suffered  from  his 
wound  : past  state,  continuing  in  the  past). 


LIMITATIONS  OF  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 


1 13] 


131 


(*) 

(ft 


®iefe  33riicfe  hmrbe  Dor  jefyn  ^afjren  gebaitt,  This 
bridge  was  built  ten  years  ago  (they  built  it 
then,  that  is  the  date  of  its  being  built,  impfi) 
SDtefe  33riicfe  tear  Dor  gel;rt  $al)ren  gebaut,  This 
bridge  was  built  ten  years  ago  (and  is  still 
standing : past  state,  continuing  in  the  present ). 


Exercise  on  the  Preceding  Rules. 

A.  Turn  the  following  sentences  into  German:  1.  This  house  was 
built  by  my  father.  2.  My  window  is  broken  (gebrodjen).  3.  The  child 
is  washed  (getoafdjen).  4-  This  man  is  esteemed  by  everybody  (jebennamt). 
5.  The  garden  must  be  sold.  6.  The  enemy  was  beaten  (gc(d)Iageu). 

B.  Turn  the  following  sentences  into  the  passive:  1.  2Bor<lu8  tnadjen 
loir  Sfleffer?  2.  Robert  0teoeitfon  bat  tie  $ictoria*33rucfe  bei  Montreal 
gebaut.  3.  9Mit  23rubcr  l)at  mir  biefe  Ufjr  gefdjenft.  4.  S)ie  $eiube  bom* 
barbterten  bie  0tabt.  6.  2)er  ^e^rer  Ijatte  ben  $nabcn  beftraft,  toeil  bet 
$nabe  fein  23ud)  Dcrloren  (lost)  Ijatte.  6.  2)ein  23ater  mirb  bid)  loben. 


113.  Limitations  of  the  Passive  Voice. 

1.  Only  the  direct  object  of  a transitive  verb  can  be- 
come the  subject  of  the  passive  verb ; thus  we  say  in  the 

Active:  SJletrt  SSater  lieBt  tnidj ; and  in  the 
Passive:  $$  toerbe  Don  meinem  SSater  geliebt. 

But  the  sentence : 

* I have  been  promised  help  by  him  ’ = 

iff  mir  Don  ifym  Dertyrod)en  (promised)  toorben^ 

since  in  the 

Active:  ®r  bat  mir  §ixlfe  Derfyrod^en  (promised), 

|>iUfc  is  the  direct,  but  mir  the  indirect  object.  Hence  it  fol- 
lows, that 

2.  Intransitive  verbs  can  only  be  used  impersorially  in  the 
passive,  thus : 


132 


LESSON  XXI. 


[§§  113- 


I am  allowed  ==  toltb  trtir  cvlaufit  (Lat.  mi  hi  per- 
mit titur)  ; 

He  has  been  helped  ==  ift  tljm  gebolfen  toorben. 

This  impersonal  passive  is  also  used  in  expressing  an  action 
without  specifying  any  agent,  as : 

G8  tour  be  geftern  2fl6enb  biel  gctanjt. 

There  was  a great  deal  of  dancing  yesterday  evening. 
Note.  — The  pron.  in  these  constructions  is  omitted  if  any  other 
member  of  the  sentence  precedes  the  verb,  as : 

2Jiir  nsirb  erlaubt ; ©cflent  TOcnb  tourbe,  etc. 


114.  Substitutes  for  the  Passive  Voice. 

The  passive  voice  is  much  less  frequently  used  in  German 
than  in  English,  particularly  in  the  longer  forms.  It  is  often 
replaced,  especially  with  intransitive  verbs : 

( a ) By  the  indefinite  pronoun  man  (Fr.  on , see  Less.  XXVII), 
with  the  verb  in  the  active  voice,  as : 

SOJatt  glauM  ifjnt  nicfyt,  He  is  not  believed ; 

SHau  faun  iljrn  md;t  tvaucn.  He  cannot  be  trusted. 

(J?)  By  a reflexive  verb,  as  : 

©er  ©cfylujjel  toirb  fidj  finben,  The  key  will  be  found; 
and  particularly  with  laffen,  as  : 

liijjf  fid)  leicfyt  madden.  That  can  easily  be  done. 


Vocabulary. 


to  conquer,  overcome,  ero'Bern 
believe,  glauben  (intr.,  -f-  dat. 
of  person) 

wait  (for),  toartert(auf  -f-  acc.) 
workman,  ber  Slr'beiter 
visit,  visitors,  ber  Sefud^ 


mill,  bie  SDWiljfe 
beef,  ba3  Stinbfleifdfj 
courage,  bie  ©ctyferfeit 
untruth,  falsehood,  bie  Un'* 
toafyrljeit 
as,  ali 


114] 


THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 


133 


once,  ein'mal  carefully,  forg'faltig 

this  evening,  f)cutc  2lbenb  severely,  ftreng 

as  soon  as,  fobalb'  little,  ioenig 

Idioms:  As  a child,  when  (I  etc.  was)  a child,  nl$  Sliitb;  This  honse 
is  for  sale  (lit.,  to  sell,  to  be  sold),  fciefeS  £au$  ift  ju  oerEaufen;  to  have 
visitors,  33cfud)  Ijabcn. 

EXERCISE  XXI. 

A.  1.  ©iefe323db  tourbe  bon  meiner©cbtoeftergemaIt,  unb  e3  ift 
toiel  gelobt  toorben.  2.  ©t e ©tabt  ift  hom  ©eneral  bombarbiert  unb  er= 
obert  toorben.  3.  2Bir  toerben  beftraft  toerben,  toenn  toir  unfere  2cf= 
tion  nid)t  forgfattig  lernen.  4.  ®ie2aben  fitib  gefcftloffen,  benn  beute 
ift  (ein)  geiertag.  5.  $jft  bad  §au3  neben  ber  Sltiifyle  berfauft? 
6.  ^atoobl,  c3  tourbe  gcftern  bon  $d;rem  Steffen  gefauft.  7.  Son 
toem  tourbe  ba3  $inb  gerettet,  al3  ba3  §au3  brannte?  8.  ©3 
tourbe  bon  einem  2Irbeiter  gerettet,  toeld;er  toegen  f enter  STa^ferEcit 
Son  ben  Seuten  gelobt  tourbe.  9.  28are  ber  $nabe  nad;  £aufe 
gefdfidt  toorben,  toenn  er  nidtt  unartig  getoefen  toare?  10.  SJIebcn 
bem  Igaufe  unfcreS  5Rad;barg  toirb  eine  fvircbe  gebaut.  11.  Go 
tourbe  geftern  21benb  Diet  bei  un3  gefungen  unb  gefpielt,  benn  toir 
batten  23efud;.  12.  3ft  ba3  Siinbfleifcf)  gefdiidt  toorben,  toeld;e3 
id;  beftetft  babe?  13.  ©er  Sefjrer  fagte,  baft  er  mit  meiner  2lrbeit 
jufrieben  fei.  14.  ©a3  23db  toare  bon  ben  ®unftlern  niebt  gelobt 
toorben,  toenn  e3  niebt  febr  fdton  getoefen  toare.  15.  2113  Sfinb 
tourbe  idb  imnter  bon  meinem  SSater  ftreng  beftraft,  toenn  id;  eine 
Untoafyrfyeit  fagte.  16.  2Birb  e3  un3  erlaubt  fein,  unfere  2lufgabeit 
ju  berbrennen,  toenn  toir  bamit  fertig  finb?  17.  @3  toirb  beute 
biet  gefpielt,  aber  toenig  ftubiert,  toeil  toir  morgen  feme  <Sd;uIe 
baben.  18.  @3  ift  mir  nicfyt3  babon  gefagt  toorben.  19.  28  ir 
tourben  niebt  gelobt,  toeil  toir  nid;t  fleifjig  toaren.  20.  ©obalb  bie 
Seftionen  gelernt  finb,  loerben  toir  einen  ©pajiergang  maeben. 

B.  1.  Our  parents  love  us.  2.  We  are  loved  by  our  parents. 
3.  By  whom  was  this  letter  brought  ? 4.  It  was  brought  by 
a messenger.  5.  Our  house  is  built,  and  we  are  already 
living  in  it.  6.  Is  the  dinner  served  ? No,  it  is  being  served 


*34 


LESSON  XXII. 


15**5 


now.  7.  Was  the  soldier  in  the  hospital  wounded,  or  was  he 
ill?  8.  He  had  been  wounded  by  a bullet.  9.  The  carriages 
of  the  count  will  be  sold  to-day.  10.  His  horses  are  already 
sold.  11.  Why  is  this  boy  not  believed?  12.  He  is  not 
believed  because  he  once  told  an  untruth.  13.  It  is  agreeable 
to  be  praised.  14.  My  sister  is  learning  the  song,  which  was 
sung  at  (in)  the  concert  yesterday. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXI. 

1.  Wer  hat  dieses  Rindfleisch  gebracht?  2.  Wann  wird 
uns  erlaubt  werden,  im  Garten  zu  spielen  ? 3.  1st  das  Haus 
neben  der  Kirche  verkauft  ? 4.  Wird  heute  Abend  viel  stu- 
diert  werden?  5.  Von  wem  wurde  der  Knabe  nach  Hause 
geschickt?  6.  1st  dieses  Bild  zu  verkaufen? 


LESSON  XXII. 

DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES:  WEAK  AND  MIXED. - STRONG 
VERBS:  6ct§CU  MODEL. 

115.  Declension  of  Adjectives:  Second  Form. 

If  preceded  by  the  Definite  Article  or  by  any  deter- 
minative word  of  the  biefci  Model,  the  Attributive  Adjective 
follows  the  Weak  Declension,  and  takes -e  in  the  Nomi- 
native Sing,  of  all  Genders,  and  in  the  Accusative 
Sing.  Feminine  and  Neuter;  otherwise  -en  throughout, 
thus: 

Weak  Declension  of  gut,  good. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  gute 

gute 

gute 

gutett 

Gen.  gutcit 

guteit 

guteit 

guteit 

Dat.  guteit 

gutett 

guteit 

gutcit 

Acc.  gutcn 

gute 

gute 

guteit 

§115]  WEAK  DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  135 

Substantives  with  Adjectives. 


Singular. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

the  good  man 

the  good  woman 

the  good  child 

Nom. 

ber  gutc  SRann 

bie  gutc  grau 

ba3  gute  £inb 

Gen. 

be§  gutett  9Jtanne§ 

bev  gutcn  5tau 

be§  gutcn  $inbe£ 

Dat. 

bent  gutcn  ^Dianne 

ber  gutcn  grau 

bem  guten  fitnbe 

Acc. 

ben  gutcn  -Dtamt 

bie  gute  $rau 

ba3  gute  Sinb 

Plural . 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  bie  gutcn  banner,  grauen,  $inber 
Gen.  ber  guten  $Rdnner,  grauen,  £inber 
Dat.  ben  guten  SUlannern,  grauert,  Kinbern 
Acc.  bie  gutcn  banner,  $rauen,  $inber 

Observe  : Words  of  the  bicjer  Model  having  (as  far  as  pos- 
sible) a full  set  of  endings  showing  gender,  etc.,  the  adjective 
has  as  few  of  such  distinctive  endings  as  possible. 

. Further  examples  : 

btcj'er  gute  SJtann,  this  good  man 

biefe3  guteu  SftanneS,  of  this  good  man,  etc. 

jene  gutc  §rau,  that  good  woman 

jener  gutcn  grau,  of  that  good  woman,  etc. 

toeldjeS  gute  $inb,  which  good  child 

toelc gutcn  $tnbe3,  of  which  good  child,  etc. 

Remark.  — Two  or  more  adjectives  qualifying  the  same 
substantive  follow  the  same  form  (compare  § 102,  Remark  3, 
above),  as : 

bet  gutc,  altc,  rote  SBetn, 
gutcr,  alter,  roter  SSetn. 

Decline  throughout  in  German:  the  sick  child;  that  high  tree;  which 
long  lesson;  this  beautiful,  broad  stream;  that  young  woman ; this  lazy 
horse ; which  tired  boy. 


136 


LESSON  XXII. 


[§§H6- 


1 16.  Third  Form.  — If  preceded  by  the  Indefinite  Ar- 
ticle or  by  any  determinative  word  of  the  mctlt  Model,  the 
Attributive  Adjective  follows  the  bicfct  Model  in  the  Nom- 
inative and  Accusative  Sing,  of  all  Genders  ; otherwise, 
it  takes -cn  (i.  e.,  follows  the  Weak  Declension)  through- 
out, thus : 


Mixed  Declension  of  gut,  good. 


Singular . 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  gutcr 

gute 

0UtC$ 

guten 

Gen.  guten 

guten 

guten 

guten 

Dat.  guten 

guten 

guten 

guten 

Acc.  guten 

gute 

gutcS 

guten 

Substantives  with  Adjectives. 

Singular . 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUTER. 

a good  man  a good  woman  a good  child 

Nom.  ein  gutcv  5Diann  eine  gute  $rau  ein  guteS  Hinb 
Gen.  eine3  guten  -KanneS  einer  guten  $rau  eineS  guten  $inbe3 
Dat.  einem  guten  SJtanne  einer  guten  gran  einem  guten  $inbe 
Acc.  einen  guten  9)iann  eine  gute  $rau  ein  gute§  $inb 

Observe  : This  form  differs  from  the  weak  form  only  in  the 
Nom.  Sing.  Masc.,  and  Nom.  and  Acc.  Sing.  Neut., 
where  words  of  the  mein  Model  have  no  distinctive  endings. 
The  adjective  must  consequently  have  the  missing  sign  of 
gender  and  case. 

The  Plural  of  this  form  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  Weak 
Declension,  but,  as  ein  has  no  Plur.,  the  full  declension  of 
Substantives  with  mein  is  given  here : 


n;]  COMPOUND  VERBS  WITH  SEPARABLE  PREFIX.  1 37 


Singular . 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

my  good  brother 

my  good  sister 

my  good  child 

N.  mein  guter  33ruber 

meine  gute  ©cf;ine(ter 

mein  gutc§  Sliub 

G.  meine3  gufen 

meiner  guten 

meiner  guten 

93ruber3 

©dhnefter 

$inbe3 

D.  meinem  guten 

meiner  guten 

meinem  guten 

Sruber 

©cffioefter 

$inbe 

A.  meinen  guten  SSruber  meine  gute  ©cfytoefter 

mein  gute£  $inb 

Plural . 


ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  meine  guten  Sritber,  ©cfjtoeftern,  ^inber 
Gen.  meiner  guten  SSriiber,  ©dhoeftern,  ^inber 
Dat.  meinen  guten  23rubern,  ©duueftern,  ^linbern 
Acc.  meine  guten  SSviiber,  ©cf)fr>eftern,  iRinber 


117.  Compound  Verbs  with  Separable  Prefix. 

1.  The  prefixes  Be-,  tx-,  etc.  (see  § 35,  Rem.  6),  hence 
called  Inseparable  Prefixes,  are  never  separated  from  the 
verb ; other  prefixes  (chiefly  the  Prepositions)  are  Separable, 

but  only  in  Principal  Sentences  with  Simple  Tense, 
as : 

SDer  $onig  fdjitfie  glt>ei  Soten  gu£. 

The  king  sent  out  two  messengers. 

SJtein  33ruber  reift  morgen  afi. 

My  brother  sets  out  (=  departs)  to-morrow. 

Note.  — These  Prefixes  contain  an  idea  distinct  from  that  of  the  verb, 
and  hence,  if  retained  before  the  Verb  in  the  cases  above,  would  throw 
the  verb  out  of  its  place  as  Second  Idea  of  the  Principal  Sentence. 

2.  The  ge-  of  the  P.  Part,  and  ju  in  the  Infin.  follow  the 
prefix,  making  together  but  one  word,  as : 

$Die  33oten  be3  $onig§  firtb  abgcreift. 

The  messengers  of  the  king  have  departed. 

10 


133 


LESSON  XXII. 


[§§ II7- 


SJJetn  35ater  toiinfcbt  morgen  abjuretfen. 

My  father  wishes  to  depart  to-morrow. 

3.  The  principal  accent  is  on  the  Verb  when  the  Prefix  is 
Inseparable ; on  the  Prefix  when  Separable , as  : befu'cfyen,  bers 
fau'fen;  but  aus'fcfncfert,  ab'reifen. 

4.  The  principal  parts  of  Separable  Compound  Verbs 
should  therefore  be  given  as  in  the  following  examples : 

Infin.  Impf.  P.  Part. 

an'gretfen,  to  attack  griff ...  an  angegrtffen 
ab'fcfyneiben,  to  cut  off  fcfmiti ...ah  abgefcfynitten 

118.  Strong  Verbs:  ficijjen  Model. 


Infin. 

Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ . Model : 

beijjen 

btfl 

gebtffett 

Engl.  Analogy : 

bite 

bit 

bitten 

Ablaut : 

ti 

u 

I 

t 

LIST. 

Notes.  — I.  Compounds  are  only  given  in  the  Lists  when  the  simple 
Verb  is  not  found  in  the  strong  form. 

2.  R.  = Reflexive;  N.  = Neuter,  i.  e.,  conjugated  with  fetn  only; 
N.  A.  = Neuter  and  Active,  i.  e.,  with  fein  or  l)abeit;  W.  indicates  that 
the  Weak  form  is  also  used  without  difference  of  meaning. 


Beigett,  bite 

big 

gebtffen 

(er)bletdjen  (W.  N.),  turn  pale 

erbltdj 

erbltdjen 

(be)fteij$en  (R.),  apply  one’s  self 

Befli& 

befliffen 

gletd^ett,  resemble,  be  equal  to 

filicf) 

geglicfyen 

gleiten  (N.),  glide 

glift 

geglitten 

greifen,  grasp,  seize 

0«ff 

gegriffcn 

fnetfert,  pinch 

fniff 

gelrtiffen 

leibett,  suffer 

lift 

geltiten 

1 18]  STRONG  VERBS  : 

Betjjen  model. 

139 

pfeifen,  whistle 

m 

0e^ftffen 

retfjen,  tear 

geriffert 

retten  (N.  A.),  ride 

tilt 

gerittcrt 

fdjdeidjien  (N.),  sneak 

gefd;lidjett 

fcfyleifen,  grind 

WKff 

gefd;Iiffen 

fd^metfjert,  fling 

fcfymijj 

gefcfymiffen 

fc^ttetben,  cut 

fd;nitt 

gefcfynitlen 

fd^reitert  (N.),  stride 

fcfjritt 

gef  Written 

ftteicfyen,  stroke 

ftridj 

gefirid;cn 

ftreiten,  contend 

ftritt 

geftvitten 

toeidjen,  yield 

Itudj 

getoi$en 

Remarks. — 1.  The  root  vowel  being  shortened 

in  the  Impf., 

the  following  consonant,  if  single,  is  doubled ; and  stems 
in  -b  (fcf)neiben,  leiben)  change  b into  if. 

2.  Those  whose  stem  ends  in  -jj  change  § into  ff  in  the 
Impf.  (unless  final)  and  P.  Part.,  as  : beijjen,  icfy  bi§,  toir  biffen, 
gebiffen. 

3.  The  following  Verbs  are  weak  when  they  have  a different 
meaning,  as  below: 

bleicfyen  (trans.),  bleach  bfeicfyte  gebteicfjt 

fd^Ietfert,  drag;  raze  (to  the  ground)  fcfyleifte  gefc^Ieift 

toeicfyen,  soften,  soak  toeicfyte  getoetcf;t 

4.  33egleiten,  to  accompany,  is  no  compound  of  gleiten,  to 
glide,  but  of  lexten,  to  lead  (weak,  = be— ge— leiten) ; berletben, 
to  make  disagreeable,  spoil  (not  from  leiben,  but  2etb)  is 
weak. 

Vocabulary. 

to  set  out,  depart,  ab'reifen  slip,  slide,  au^gleiten 

cut  off,  ab'fcfmeiben  comprehend,  understand,  be* 

paint  (not  pictures),  cm7*  greifen 

ftreic^en  seize,  evgrcifen 


140 


LESSON  XXII. 


[§U8 


fear,  fi$  ftirdjten  (fcor  + dat.) 
tear  (to  pieces),  jerrei^ert 
pass  (time,  etc.),  ju'brirtgen 
Cinderella,  2ff$en:putiel 
barber,  ber  S3arbter/ 
idea,  notion,  ber  SBcgriff 
steamer,  steam-boat,  bd§ 
©ampffcfyiff 
thief,  ber  SDteb 
grass,  ba3  ©ra3 
hair,  ba£  §aar 
hay,  bd§  §eu 

huntsman,  hunter,  ber  $ciger 
illness,  bte  $rcmffyeit 
fever,  ba3  ftieber 
slipper,  ber  ^antoffel 
rain,  ber  3iegert 
rheumatism,  ber  9tl)eumati§mu3 


piece,  ba§  ©ti 14 
little  piece,  ba§  ©titcfcBen 
traveller,  ber  SBanberer 
tooth,  ber  gatyn* 
toothache,  ba3  gabntoel) 
evil,  angry,  cross,  bofe 
joyous,  merry,  fro!)  ltd) 
smooth,  slippery,  glatt 
golden,  of  gold,  golben 
violent,  heavy  (of  rain),  fyeftig 
naughty,  ill-behaved  (of 
children),  un'artig 
true,  ft>al)r 
furious,  ftm'tertb 
on  that  account,  be^toegen 
of  it,  bctOort 

the  day  before  yesterday,  fcor'* 
geftern 


Idioms  : To  be  on  the  point  of  (be  about  to),  tm  Segrfffe  f tin.  You  are 
tired,  are  you  not?  ®ie  fmfc  mufce,  ntd)t  tuafjr?  So  are  we,  28  ir  fuifc  ed 
flud).  George  has  torn  my  coat,  ©corg  I)at  mir  ben  gerriffen* 


EXERCISE  XXII. 

A.  1.  ©er  ©eneral  2R.  ritt  auf  einem  fefitoarjen  ipferbe  burdj 
bte  ©trafsen  ©orontog  (bon  ©oronto) . 2.  2Bie  fiaben  ©ie  bte  $eit 
auf  bent  Sanbe  jugebraefyt  ? 3.  2ln  toag  fitr  einer  $ranff>eit  fiat 
Sfir  SSater  fo  lange  gelitten?  4.  ©ie  finb  ntitbe,  nid;t  hiafir? 
SBir  ftnb  eg  aud>.  5.  2llg  mein  33ruber  jung  Soar,  fiatte  er  fddedite 
3afme  unb  litt  fefjr  an  3<*f>ntoefy.  6.  ©er  fcfihiarje  §unb  un» 
fer(e)§  -Jiacfibarg  ift  bofe ; er  bat  borgeftern  etn  Heines  ^inb  ge= 
biffeit.  7.  Unf(e)re  alten  Sftacfibarn  begleiteten  ung  nacfi  bem 
§afen,  alg  tnir  abreiften.  8.  2Bo  Soofint  ber  Sarbter,  ber  3fmen 
bag  §aar  gefdmitten  fiat?  9.  -Stein  alteg  -Dieffer  fd;neibet  jetjt 
gut,  benn  ber  ©iener  fiat  eg  geftern  gefefiliffen.  10.  2llg  icf>  bor 


§xi8]  STRONG  VERES:  Bet^en  MODEL.  I4I 

ber  ©cfyule  iiber  bie  glatte  ©tra£e  fd^ritt,  glitt  id)  au§  unb  gerrt§ 
mtr  ben  tteuen  dlod.  11.  2113  ber  ®t eb  tm  Segriffe  tear,  in3 
§au§  ju  fd;Ieid^en,  ergrtff  i^n  ber  ©iener.  12.  Uttfer  alter  9iacf)s 
bar  Itti  lange  an  (am)  -JlfyeumattemuS,  unb  tear  be^inegen  immer  511 
§aufe.  13.  ©er  ©eneral  ritt  mit  feirten  Offigieren  iiber  bie  33rudc. 
14.  ©er  bofe  Snabe  auf  bem  2©felbaum  rifc  bie  reifen  St^fel 
bom  23aume  unb  fdjmift  fie  auf  bie  Crbe.  15.  SRetrt  junger  -Jleffe, 
ber  auf  ber  Umber  fit  at  ioar,  fyat  am  gieber  gelitten,  aber  er  ift 
je£t  toieber  toobl.  16.  21  f d; en^puttel^  ©cf)ft>efter  fd;nitt  fief)  (dat.) 
ein  ©tlicf  bom  gotj^e  ah , toeit  er  ju  gro$  fur  ben  golbenen  ^antoffel 
toar.  17.  %d)  bin  fd^nett  nad)  §au fe  geritten,  toeil  id;  mid;  bor 
bem  ftmtenben  ©turme  flirc^tete.  18.  ©er  SBanberer  fcfjritt  frozen 
3Dtute§  burd;  ben  grlinen  SBalb  unb  !pfiff  ein  frof)Ii d;e3  £ieb. 

19.  ©iefeS  9JJeffer  ift  nid;t  fd;arf;  Warn  tottrbe  e3  gefdjdiffert? 

20.  $avl§  fd;cner,  neuer  9iocf  tourbe  bom  §unbe  gerriffen. 

B.  1.  Where  is  the  old  knife  that  you  ground?  2.  When 
Mary  was  young  she  resembled  her  mother.  3.  The  bears 
sneaked  (perf.)  into  the  wood,  but  the  hunters  followed  (perf.) 
them.  4.  Where  does  the  painter  live  who  painted  (perf.) 
our  house  ? 5.  The  industrious  countryman  cut  (perf.)  the 

grass  yesterday,  and  is  making  hay  to-day.  6.  Why  are  you 
crying,  Charles  ? I am  crying  because  George  pinched  (perf.) 
me.  7.  The  rain  spoiled  my  (dat.  -j-  def.  art.)  journey  to  the 
country.  8.  The  steamer  has  whistled  already.  Now  I shall  say 
farewell.  9.  Little  Charles  is  a naughty  child  ; he  has  torn 
his  (dat.  of  refl.  pron.  -f-  art.)  new  dress.  10.  Old  people 
often  suffer  from  rheumatism.  11.  Have  you  understood 
what  he  said  ? 12.  The  gardener  was  burning  the  boughs, 

which  he  had  cut  from  the  trees.  13.  I have  quarrelled  with 
my  old  friend,  because  he  was  wrong.  14.  This  blue  ribbon 
is  too  long,  please  cut  a little  of  it  off  for  me.  15.  Why  is 
Charles  crying  ? He  has  been  bitten  by  a dog. 


142 


LESSON  XXIII. 


[§H9 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXII. 

1.  Was  fiir  einen  Hund  hat  Ihr  Nachbar?  2.  Wie  wurden 
Sie  die  Zeit  zubringen,  wenn  Sie  reich  waren  ? 3.  Was 

machte  der  Wanderer,  als  er  durch  den  Wald  schritt?  4.  Wo 
wohnen  Sie  jetzt  ? 5.  Wann  werden  Sie  Heu  machen? 

6.  Weshalb  sind  Sie  so  schnell  nach  Hause  geritten  ? 


LESSON  XXIII. 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.- STRONG  VERBS:  WlUti  MODEL. 

119.  Possessive  Pronouns. 

1.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  are  used  when  no  substantive 
is  expressed,  as : 

The  hat  is  mine  ( Pronoun ) ; but : 

It  is  my  hat  {Adjective). 

2.  They  are  formed  from  the  stems  of  the  corresponding 
Possessive  Adjectives  by  adding  certain  endings,  as  follows : 

(a)  Endings  of  btefer  Model  (without  article),  as: 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  ntetner 

meine 

metn(c)8 

met ne,  mine 

Gen.  meincS 

meincr 

mcincS 

mctnct,  of  mine 

Dat.  meincm 

meincr 

meincm 

meinen,  (to,  for)  mine 

Acc.  meineit 

meine 

mein(e)g 

meine,  mine 

Observe  : In  the  Nom.  and  Acc.  Neuter,  -e  of  the  ending 
may  be  omitted. 

So  for  the  other  persons  : 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

Sing,  beincr 

beinc 

beineg,  thine 

feiner 

feinc 

feincS,  his,  its 

if/rcr 

ifyre 

ifyrcS,  hers  (its) 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


143 


§H9] 


MASC. 


NEUTER. 


Plur . unf(e)rer  unf(e)re  unf(e)re§,  ours 

eu(e)rcr  eu(e)re  eu(e)rc§,  yours 

tfyrer  i^re  il)re 8,  theirs 

(Sfyrer  Sfyre  $fyre8,  y°urs) 

(b)  Preceded  by  the  Definite  Article,  and  hence  with  end- 
ings of  Weak  Adjective,  thus: 


Singular . 


Plural. 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

N.  bermeine 

bie  meinc 

ba§  meinc 

G.  be3  meineit 

ber  meineit 

be§  meinen 

D.  bent  meineit 

ber  meinen 

bem  meinen 

A.  ben  meinen 

biemeine 

ba3  meine 

ALL  GENDERS. 

bie  meinen,  mine 
ber  meineit,  of  mine 
ben  meinen,(to,  for)mine 
bie  meineit,  mine 


So : ber,  bie,  ba§  beine,  thine  ber,  bie,  ba3  eu(e)rc,  yours 

ber,  bie,  ba$  feme,  his,  its  ber,  bie,  ba§  ifyre,  theirs 

ber,  bie,  ba£  ifyrc,  hers,  (its)  (ber,  bie,  ba3  Sfyre,  yours) 
ber,  bie,  ba3  unf(e)re,  ours 

(c)  Preceded  by  Definite  Article,  with  ending  ~ig  -j-  Weak 
terminations,  thus : 

Singular. 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUTER. 

Nom.  ber  meinige  bie  meintge  ba3  meintge 

Gen.  be3  meinigen,  etc.  ber  meinigen,  etc.  be3  meinigen,  etc. 

Plural . 


ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  bie  meinigen,  mine 
Gen.  ber  meinigen,  of  mine,  etc. 

So : ber,  bie,  ba3  beinige,  thine 
ber,  bie,  ba3  feinige,  his,  its 
and  so  on  for  the  other  persons. 

Note.  — 1.  In  unfrige  and  eurige  the  -c  of  the  stem  is  always  omitted 


144 


LESSON  XXIII. 


[§§  119- 


Remark. — i.  These  forms  are  interchangeable,  without 
difference  in  meaning,  as : 

I have  my  book,  but  I have  not  yours, 

( 3$*(e)» 

Ijafte  trtein  Sucft,  after  tcf)  Ijafte  nicfit  < bits  $ljre 

( ba§  Sifjrigc. 

His  letter  is  here,  but  ours  is  not  here, 

( ttnf(e)rcr  ) 

©etn  SBrief  tft  fyter,  after  ■<  bcr  mtf(e)rc  >-  ift  nic£)t  Ijiev. 

( ber  unfrigc  ) 

2.  When  a Possessive  Pronoun  is  used  as  predicate , it  may 
be  replaced  by  the  Possessive  Adjective  without  ending,  as : 

This  book  is  mine,  ®tefe§  33ucfy  tft  tucitt. 

3.  Observe  the  following  idiomatic  uses  of  the  Poss.  Prons. : 

(a)  Igdj  tnerbe  ba§  SSrtttige  (neuter  sing.)  tfyutt. 

Is  shall  do  my  part,  my  utmost. 

( b ) 3>ie  Sdeintgen,  bic  ©etntgen  (Plur.), 

My,  his  friends,  family. 

(c)  A friend  of  mine  = dtitcr  turn  nteinett  ^reuttben. 
This  friend  of  mine  = $tefer  mein  ^reuitb. 


120.  Strong  Verbs:  fclei&CU  Model. 


Infin. 

Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ . Model : Met  ben 

ftlicft 

geftlieften 

Eng . Analogy:  wanting 

Ablaut:  et 

it 

te 

LIST. 

ftletften  (N.),  stay,  remain 

ftlieft 

geftlieften 

(ge)betljen  (N.),  thrive 

gebiel) 

gebiel;ett 

leifyen,  lend,  borrow 

liefy 

geliefyen 

strong  verbs  : MeiSen  MODEL. 


145 


120] 


tneiben,  avoid 

tnieb 

gemieben 

pretfen,  praise 

prieS 

ge!prtefen 

retben,  rub 

rteb 

gerteben 

fcfjetben  (N.  A.),  part  (intr.  and  trans.) 

fefneb 

gefd;teben 

fcfyeinen,  shine  ; seem,  appear 

fefyien 

gefefnenen 

fd)retben,  write 

fefirieb 

gefd;rteben 

fdfjreten,  scream,  shout 

fd^rie 

gefc^rteen 

fdf)toetgen,  be  silent 

fcfytoieg 

gefcfjtotegen 

fyeten,  spit 

frie 

gefyieen 

fteigen  (N.),  mount,  ascend 

ftteg 

geftiegen 

tret  ben,  drive 

trie& 

getrieben 

toetfen,  show,  point  out 

toie§ 

getuiefen 

jetljen,  accuse 

gejiet;en 

Vocabulary. 


to  copy,  ab'fd)retben 
hang  up,  auf'fydngen 
ascend,  befteigert  (trans.) 
prove,  demonstrate,  be* 
iueifert 

appear,  erfd^eirten 
shine,  glitter,  glcinjen 
descend,  Ijerab'fteigen 
guard,  keep,  fyiiten 
rule,  reign,  govern,  regteren 
write  (to),  fcfyretben  (dat.  or 
an -{-  acc.) 

climb,  fteigen  (auf  -f-  acc.) 
pardon,  excuse,  berjeifjen 
remain  behind,  juritd'bletben 
cold,  bte  (Srfaltung 
family,  bie  gamtlie 
herd,  flock,  bte  §erbe 


heat,  bte  Qxfyt 
last,  ber  Seiften 
pepper,  ber  $Pfeffer 
shepherd,  ber  ©d;afer 
shoemaker,  cobbler,  ber 
©djufter 

silence  (act  of  keeping  s.), 
ba§  ©d)toeigen 

speaking  (act  of),  ba§  ©:pred£)en 

throne,  ber  Stfyr on 

pasture,  pasturage,  bte  2Beibe 

fifty,  funfjig,  fltnfjig 

bright,  brightly,  ^eH 

loud,  loudly,  laut 

correct,  ricfytig 

round,  runb 

bad,  fdfdtmm 

strong,  severe,  ftarl 


Idiom:  Up  to  the  present  time,  still,  nod)  tmmcr. 


146 


LESSON  XXIII. 


EXERCISE  XXIII. 

A.  1.  ift  nid>t  2tffeS  ©olb,  toa§  glanjt.  2.  ©predion  ift 
©ilber,  ©d;toeigen  ift  ©olb.  3.  ©djufter,  bleib’  bet  beinem  Seiften. 
4.  ©eit  acfyt  Shagen  bin  ic£>  tbegen  einer  ftarlen  ©rfaltung  ju  §aufe 
geblieben.  5.  @ine  bon  meinen  (Soufinen  ift  je£t  bei  un§  auf  33efud;, 
abet  fie  bleibt  nid;t  lange.  6.  2Ba§  fur  $£iere  finb  in  jenent 
SBalbe?  finb  23aren.  7.  ®ie  Stutter  unb  ifjre  Softer 
toeinten  Ijeftig,  al§  fie  bon  einattber  fdfiieben.  8.  Stein  Dfyeim 
blieb  tbegen  bet  grofjett  §i|e  mit  feiner  ^antilie  auf  bent  Sanbe. 
9.  $arl  Ijat  an  feinen  SSater  gefcfjrieben,  unb  i$  bin  im  Segriffe 
an  ben  meinigen  ju  fcfyreiben.  10.  ©er  $bnig  fcfytbieg  unb  fdjien 
traurig  ju  fein,  al£  er  bie  fdfilimme  Sacbridjit  fybrte.  11.  SBitte, 
berjeifyen  ©ie  mit,  baft  icfy  3>l;nen  nodf)  nicfyt  gefcfirieben  Ijabe. 
12.  SBo  fyaben  ©ie  Igfyren  §ut  aufgeljangt?  $jtij  fyabe  ifm  neben 
ben  3>firigen  geljangt.  13.  2ll§  tbit  auf  ben  23erg  ftiegen,  fd;ien 
bie  ©onne  fcfwt  fyell.  14.  SSeldfie  bon  biefen  33ud;crn  toimfd;en 
©ie?  ^5d)  tt)unfdf>e  bie  metrteu.  15.  2Bir  toiirben  auf  bem Sanbe 
geblieben  fein,  toenn  unfere  greunbe  audf»  geblieben  toaren.  16.  2>ie 
igerben  tourben  auf  bie  SBeibe  getrieben,  al§  loir  bom  23erg 
tyerabftiegen.  17.  ©§  ift  un§  beioiefcn  toorben,  baft  bie  @rbe 
runb  ift.  18.  SBor  funfeig  Jgaftren  beftieg  bie  ^onigiit  Victoria 
ben  Sftron,  unb  fie  vegiert  ttocft  immer.  19.  2Bilrben  ©ie  nadj 
©uropa  teifen,  toenn  id;  jumcf&ltebe,  um  $jftr  §au§  &u  ftttten  ? 
20.  2)ie  $naben  pfiffen  unb  fcftrieen,  al§  fie  auf  ben  Serg  ftiegen. 

B.  1.  George  has  black  ink,  but  mine  is  red.  2.  Mary’s 

sister  and  mine  are  learning  German.  3.  We  have  looked 
for  William’s  books  and  ours  everywhere.  4.  Your  exercise 
is  not  correct,  copy  it.  5.  Whose  gloves  have  you  ? I have 
mine  and  yours.  6.  Why  did  the  boy  shout  so  loud?  7.  To 
whom  were  you  writing  the  long  letter  yesterday  ? 8.  I have 

black  eyes,  but  yours  are  blue.  9.  In  what  year  did  Goethe’s 
‘Faust’  appear?  10.  Waiter,  please  bring  me  the  vinegar 
and  the  pepper.  11.  This  lead-pencil  is  mine,  where  is 


I2i]  TABLE  OF  ADJECTIVE  ENDINGS.  147 

yours?  12.  Your  aunt  and  mine  are  neighbours.  13.  The 
professor  seemed  not  to  be  at  home,  for  his  windows  and 
shutters  were  not  open.  14.  I should  write  to  him,  if  he 
wrote  to  me.  15.  I was  writing  to  my  mother  and  Charles 
was  writing  to  his  when  the  postman  brought  us  the  letters. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXIII. 

1.  Seit  wann  sind  Sie  schon  zu  Hause  geblieben  ? 2.  Was 
machten  die  Schafer,  als  wir  vom  Berge  herabstiegen  ? 3. 
Wann  bestieg  die  Konigin  Victoria  den  Thron  ? 4.  Was 

fur  Tinte  haben  Sie?  5.  Fiir  wen  ist  dieser  lange  Brief? 
6.  Welches  sind  die  Namen  der  Monate? 


LESSON  XXIV. 

DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES  (concluded):  TABLE,  CENERAL 
REMARKS.- STRONG  VERBS:  fdjtcfjcn  AND  ferfjtett  MODELS. 


121. 


Table  of  Adjective  Endings. 


I.  Strong. 


Sin 

gular . 

Plural . 

Singular . 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

M.  F.  N. 

MASC. 

fem. 

NEUT. 

N. — cr 

— e 

— C§ 

— C 

— C 

— C 

— c 

G.  — e§  (ett) 

— cr 

-c3  (ett) 

— cr 

— Cit 

— cn 

— cn 

D.  — cm 

— cr 

—cm 

—ett 

—ett 

— cn 

—ett 

A.  —ett 

— c 

— e§ 

— c 

— cn 

— c 

— e 

Observe: 

-ett  for 

-e0  in  Gen.  Sing. 

Observe: 

Persist 

Masc.  and  Neuter  before  strong  substs. 


II.  Weak. 

Plur . 

M.  F.  N. 

— m 

— ett 
—ett 
— ett 

ent-rt, 

except  Nom.  Sing,  of  all 
genders,  and  Acc.  Sing. 
Fem.  and  Neuter. 


145 


LESSON  XXIV, 


[§§  I2t- 


III.  Mixed. 


Singular . 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUTER. 


Plural. 


M.  F.  N, 


Nom.  — Ct  — C — 

Gen.  — cn  — Clt  — eit 

Dat.  — cn  — cn  — cn 

Acc.  — cn  — c — c£ 


— cn 
— cn 
—cn 
— cn 


Observe:  Same  as  Weak  (II),  except  Nom.  Sing.  Masc.  and  Nom. 
Acc.  Sing.  Neuter. 

122.  General  Remarks  on  Adjectives. 

1.  Participles  used  attributively  are  employed  and  declined 
as  Adjectives,  as  : geliebict  SSater,  beloved  father ; ba§  toetnenbc 
$inb,  the  weeping  child ; meirte  geefyrtc  SJiutter,  my  honoured 
mother. 

2.  Adjectives  and  Participles  used  as  Substantives  vary 
their  declension  according  to  the  rules  for  Adjective  Declen- 
sion, but  are  spelt  with  capital  letters,  as:  bet  $ranfc,  the 
sick  man,  patient;  Fern,  bic  Strartfc,  the  sick  woman;  Plur.  bi Z 
&rcmfen;  cut  $ranfcr,  a sick  man,  patient;  pi.  Rxanit,  sick 
people,  patients. 

Remarks. — i.  Many  words,  the  English  equivalents  of  which 
are  Substantives  only,  are  Adjectives  in  German,  as : bet 
$rembe,  the  stranger,  foreigner,  PL  bic  gremben,  but  cin  $r em* 
bet,  PL  grembe;  bet  Steifenbc,  the  traveller,  cin  SReifenbct,  etc. 
These  Adjective-Substantives,  when  Masc.  and  preceded  by 
the  Definite  Article,  have  the  same  inflection  as  the  Weak 
Declension. 

2.  Names  of  languages  from  Adjectives  are  not  declined 
when  used  without  the  article,  as : 

2Ba§  iff  bte3  auf  $CUtjd)  ? What  is  this  in  German } 


122] 


GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  ADJECTIVES. 


149 


3.  Adjectives  of  colour  used  substantively  are  indeclinable, 
or  add  -g  in  the  Gen.  Sing.,  as:  bag  ©run,  beg  ©riin(g). 

4.  If  the  Substantive  is  not  expressed,  the  Adjective 
shows  by  its  ending  the  gender,  number  and  case,  as : 

©in  fletner  9JJann  unb  etn  groficr, 

A little  man  and  a tall  one. 

Note.  — The  English  ‘ one  * is  in  these  cases  not  to  be  translated 
into  German. 

5.  If  a Substantive  is  preceded  by  a succession  of  Adjec- 
tives, they  all  follow  the  same  form,  as : guter,  alter,  roter 
SBetn ; ber  gutc,  altc,  rote  SBetn ; etneg  guten,  roten  SBetneg. 

6.  Adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  -cl,  -Ctt,  -Ct,  as : cbel, 
noble;  golben,  golden;  Ijeifer,  hoarse,  drop -c  of  the  stem 
when  inflected ; those  in  -cl,  -Ct  may  drop  -e  of  the  termina- 
tion instead,  unless  the  termination  is  -C,  -Ct,  or  -eg,  as : 
bag  golbne  33auer;  ber  eblcn  or  ebcln  $rau;  bem  ^eifren  or 
^etfern  ©anger. 

7.  The  Adjective  fyoefj,  high,  drops  c when  inflected,  as: 
ber  Ijofye  23aum,  the  high  tree. 

8.  Adjectives  can  generally  be  used  without  change  as  ad- 
verbs, as : luftig,  merry,  merrily ; angenefym,  agreeable,  agree- 
ably ; gut,  good,  well. 

9.  Adjectives  (so-called)  in  -ct  from  names  of  places  are 
indeclinable,  as  : bte  Sonbonct  fettling,  the  London  newspaper; 
hamburger  ©cfytffe,  Hamburg  ships;  etn  5J3arifcr  §anbfcyitl), 
a Paris  glove. 

Note. — These  adjectives  correspond  to  the  English  use  of  the 
proper  names  without  inflection.  They  are  really  substantives  in  the 
Gen.  Plur.,  thus:  bic  £ouboner  gettmtg  is  strictly bie |$cititng  ber  Soitfcanrr, 
the  newspaper  of  the  Londoners . Hence  they  are  spelt  with  a capital 
letter. 


LESSON  XXIV. 


150 

10.  After  personal  pronouns,  the  Adjective  follows  the  strong 
declension  except  in  the  Dat.  Sing,  and  Nom.  (and  some- 
times Acc.)  Plur.,  as : 

(for)  me,  poor  man  ; you  good  people ; us  little  children, 
tmr  armen  9)tanne ; il)r  guten  Seute;  un§  fleine(n)  Sinber. 

11.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  (see  Less.  XXVII)  ettoa§, 
ntd)t§,  fcriel,  are  Substantives,  and  therefore  not  determinative 
words,  and  the  following  adjective  has  the  strong  declension, 
as:  ettoa§ ©utc§,  something  good;  mcf}t§ SfngeneljmeS,  nothing 
pleasant. 

Observe  : The  Adjective  is  here  used  as  substantive,  and 
therefore  spelt  with  a capital. 

12.  After  the  Indefinite  Numerals  in  the  Plural  (see 
Less.  XXIX)  atle,  all;  einige  (etlicfye),  some;  mcmcfye,  many; 
tnefyrere,  several ; folcfje,  such ; fciele,  many ; toentge,  few,  the 
Adjective  may  have  either  the  weak  or  the  strong  ending. 

13.  After  the  interrogative  ft>e Idfye  in  the  plural,  the  strong 
declension  is  also  found  in  the  adjective ; and  the  exclama- 
tory toeld;  is  generally  uninflected  before  an  adjective,  which 
then  always  has  the  strong  form,  as : 

233eWj  groj^eS  33ergnugen  ! What  (a)  great  pleasure ! 


123,  Strong  Verbs  : 

ftf)tc§m  Model. 

Infin. 

Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ.  Model: 

fcfyiefcen 

m 

gefd^Sffen 

Engl.  Analogy: 

(shoot) 

shot 

shot 

Ablaut: 

ie 

u 

O 

u 

0 

LIST. 

(ber)brtef3en,  vex 

berbrojj 

berbroffeit 

fflefjen  (N.),  flow 

M 

geflDffen 

giefjen,  pour 

Segoffen 

I24] 


strong  verbs:  fd^ieften  model. 


IS  i 


gltmmen,  glow 

glornm 

geglommett 

flimmen  (W.  N.A.),  climb 

flotttm 

geflommen 

fviedE)en  (N.),  creep 

frod; 

gefrodjeit 

genteften,  enjoy 

genojj 

genoffen 

riccfyen,  smell  (tr.  and  intr.) 

rod; 

gero  dien 

(er)fd^aHen  (W.  N.),  sound,  resound 

erf^ott 

erfd^otten 

faufen,  drink  (of  beasts) 

foff 

gefoffen 

fefyieften,  shoot 

m 

gefc^offen 

fefylieften,  lock,  shut 

gefddoffen 

fteben  (W.),  boil  (intr.) 

fott 

gefotten 

fprtefsen  (N.),  sprout 

gefproffett 

triefen  (N.),  drip 

troff 

getroffen 

Remarks.  — 1.  Observe,  as  under 

the  bciften  Model  (§  118, 

Rem.  i,  2)  the  doubling  of  consonants  and  the  interchange 
of  fj  and  ff ; also  the  change  of  b into  ft  (as  in  leiben,  jennets 
ken,  ib . Rem.  1). 

2.  9?acf)en,  ‘to  avenge/  is  weak  but  has  also  P.  Part,  geraefyen. 

3.  ©aitfcn  has  also  fiiufft,  fauft  in  the  Pres.  Indie.  2.  3.  Sing. 

4.  The  simple  verb  fdjaffen  is  usually  weak  (fc^aUte,  ge* 

5.  In  fteben  the  weak  P.  Part,  (gejiebet)  is  rare. 

124.  Strong  Verbs:  fedjtctt  Model. 

T 2.  3.  S.  Pr.  Ind.  t _ 

Infin.  0 t Impf.  P.  Part. 

2.  S.  Imper. 

Germ.  Model:  fedfjten  fid^t  fud^t  gefod^ten 

Engl.  Analogy : wanting 

Ablaut:  C t DO 

LIST. 

fed^ten,  fight  ficfytft,  fic^t,  fidErt  foefyt  gefodEden 

flecfyten,  weave,  twine  fUcfyift,  fliefyt,  flid^t  gefloc^ten 


152 


LESSON  XXIV. 


[§  124 


(er)Iofd^en  (N.),  be-  (erlifd)eft)  erlifd^t  ertofd^  erlofc^eix 

come  extinguished  (erltfc^) 
melfett  (W.),  milk  (milfft,  milft,  mill)  molf  gemolfert 

queffen,  gush  forth  (quiffft,  quitft,  quelle)  quoK  gequoKen 

fdjmeljen  (N.),  melt  (fc^mtlgeft)  f$miljt  fd&ntolj  gefcbmoljen 
(intr.)  (fd&tmlj) 

fcfytoetten  (N.),  swell  (fd&toittft)  fd&toillt  fd;tooll  gefcfytooKen 

(fc^totO) 

Remarks.  — 1.  Rare  forms  are  enclosed  in  ( ). 

2.  The  simple  verb  Iofcfyen,  ‘to  extinguish’  (tr.),  is  weak 
(tofd^te,  gelofcfyt),  as  are  also  its  separable  compounds,  e.  g., 
au^lofd^en. 

3.  ©cfynteljen  (intr.)  has  also  the  forms  (fd&meljeft),  fd^meljt 
(fd^melge) . 


4.  ©d^meljert,  ‘to  smelt’  and  fd£)toeHert,  ‘to  cause  to  swell' 
(trans.),  are  weak. 

Vocabulary. 


extinguish,  put  out,  au^'Iofcfyen 
water  (flowers,  etc.),  begiefsen 
prescribe,  berfdf)reiben 
flow  past,  boru'berffie^en 
close,  shut,  $u'fd;liej$en 
exhibition,  bie  2(u§'ftelfung 
health,  bie  ©efunbfyeit 
drink,  beverage,  b a£  ©etranf 
cow,  bie 

maid,  maid-servant, bie  3Jf  agb  * 
mid-day,  noon,  ber  SD^ittag 
pain,  ber  ©cfymerj 


snow,  ber  ©dEmee 
eight,  acf)t 

celebrated,  famous,  beriibmt 
blind,  blirtb 

healthy,  healthful,  gejurtb 
dear,  tieb 

Limburg  (adj.),  Simburger 
dead,  tot 

Toronto  (adj.),  £orontoer 
thereon,  bar  an 
past,  by,  borliber 


Idioms  . 1.  To  go  past  tlie  house,  am  $aufe  t>oriibergef)em 
2.  In  German,  awf  $eutfd)  or  im  5T>eutfd)em 


§124]  strong:  verbs  fedEden  model.  153 

EXERCISE  XXIV. 

A.  1.  2Bte  ftmrbert  ©ie  biefe  SBorter  ctuf  Seutfd)  fcfyreiben? 
2.  Ijabe  meinett  23rief  gefcfyloffen  unb  toerbe  x£?n  jefct  na$  ber 
$oft  bringen.  3.  Se§  9Jiorgen3  fteigen  bie  !Ieinen  SSogel  gum  £>im* 
mel  auf  unb  fingen  luftig.  4.  2Beld;  grof$e3  23ergnitgen,  gute  ©e= 
funbfyeit  gu  genieften!  5.  ©n  fleiner  ©from  floft  luftig  an  unferem 
£aufe  boriiber.  6.  Ser  fjuft  be§  $ranfen  ift  gefcfjtootten  unb  er 
leibet  fefyr  baran.  7.  Unfer  geeE>rter  ^rofeffor  ift  feit  afyt  3a^ren 
tot.  8.  Ser  Softer  fyat  bent  $ranfen  guten,  alten,  roten  223  ein 
berfd^rieben.  9.  ®ie  geitungen  ergafylen  biel  Don  ber  Sorontoer 
2Iu3ftedung.  10.  Ser  9tcgen  quod  bom  §immel  unb  lofcbte  ba§ 
glitnmenbe  gfeuer  auS.  11.  Unfcre  ©olbaten  fc^Ioffen  bie  ©tabts 
tfyore  unb  foefyten  ta^fer  gegen  ben  geinb.  12.  Sie  OJJdgbe  fyaben 
bie  $iifye  gemolfen  unb  jeijt  begieften  fie  bte  23lumcn.  13.  25itte, 
fcfytoeigt,  ifyr  guten  Seute,  benn  bie  $ranfen  leiben  je£t  grofte 
©dfjmergen.  14.  2Biirbe  ber  Sifyrer  bofe  toerben,  toerut  ber©d;uler 
feine  Stufgabe  gerrijfe?  15.  Ser  ©deafer  fyat  bem  Steifenben  ben 
23eg  naefy  ber  ©tabt  genriefen.  16.  SBurbe  eS  3$nen  bie  9teife 
berleiben,  ioenn  id)  guriidbliebe?  17.  §aben  ©ie  bie  pradfdigen 
23Iumen  gefeljen,  bie  \v\x  bem  $ranfen  fdjiden?  18.  Ser  ©d;nee 
fdjmolg  unb  ba§  SBaffer  troff  Don  ben  §aufern,  ate  bie  ©onne 
gegen  SRittag  toarm  fd^ien.  19.  Ser  23Unbe,  ber  neben  un3 
toofmt,  flocfyt  gftei  $orbe  fur  meine  SRutter.  20.  Ser  junge  unb 
ber  alte  $rembe,  bie  im  SBalbe  jagten,  fyaben  biele  SBogel  ge* 
fd^offen.  21.  33on  toem  finb  bie  33Iumen  begoffen  toorben? 
©ie  finb  bom  ©artner  begoffen  toorben. 

B . 1.  The  golden  slipper  was  too  small  for  Cinderella’s 
sisters.  2.  Paris  gloves  and  Limburg  cheese  are  famous  every- 
where. 3.  The  huntsman  shot  a hare  and  brought  it  home. 
4.  Our  neighbours  are  not  at  home,  for  their  doors  and 
windows  are  closed.  5.  I do  not  believe  every  story  I hear. 
6.  Please,  dear  mother,  tell  us  little  children  something  new 
and  pretty.  7.  If  Charles  tears  his  new  book,  his  mother 

11 


LESSON  XXV. 


[§§  124- 


iS4 

will  be  very  angry.  8.  He  seemed  not  to  hear  what  I said 
to  him.  9.  These  flowers  are  for  the  patients  in  the  hospitals. 

10.  (The)  green  is  agreeable  for  those  who  have  weak  eyes. 

11.  The  horse  is  drinking  the  water  which  we  have  brought 
him.  12.  Pure  fresh  water  is  a healthful  beverage.  13.  A 
week  ago  I was  at  (in)  a concert,  where  this  singer  (/.)  sang. 
14.  When  the  weather  becomes  cold,  the  dogs  like  to  creep 
behind  the  stove.  15.  The  travellers  enjoyed  the  beauty  of 
the  landscape,  when  they  were  ascending  the  high  mountain* 
16.  Please  tell  me  how  this  word  is  written  in  German. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXIV. 

1.  Haben  Sie  Ihren  Brief  schon  geschlossen?  2.  Wie 
lange  ist  Ihr  geehrter  Professor  schon  tot?  3.  Was  hat  der 
Doktor  der  Kranken  verschrieben  ? 4.  Weshalb  wurde  der 

Lehrerbose?  5.  Wer  hat  diese  Vogel  geschossen?  6.  Was 
hat  der  Jager  mit  dem  Hasen  gemacht,  welchen  er  im  Walde 
geschossen  hat  ? 


LESSON  XXV. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  - STRONG  VERBSj 

fncren  model. 

125.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

In  German,  as  in  English,  the  degrees  of  comparison  are 
formed  by  adding  to  the  Positive : 

~cr  to  form  the  Comparative,  and 
—(c) ft  “ “ “ Superlative,  as : 

tteu,  new  neucr,  newer  neu(e)fi,  newest 

rexc 1),  rich  reiser,  richer  reidjf richest 

angertefym,  agreeable  angertebmct,  more  agreeable 
cmgenefymft,  most  agreeable 


126] 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


155 


Remarks.  — 1.  Monosyllabic  adjectives  with  a,  0,  U (not 
an)  generally  take  Umlaut  (but  with  many  exceptions,  given 
in  App.  K.),  as  : 

lang  (anger  langft 

furj  larger  fiirjeft 

2.  The  syllables  -er,  (e)fi  are  added  to  every  adjective, 

without  regard  to  its  length,  as  in  the  case  of  angertefym  (given 
above,  but  see  §161,  note). 

3.  Adjectives  used  attributively  in  the  Comparative  or 
Superlative  degree  are  declined,  and  add  the  usual  endings 
after  the  syllables  -et/  -eft  respectively,  as : 

ber  retcfyere  9Jtann  ein  reid^ercr  3Kann 

mein  d(te[tc£  $leib  liebfter  greunb 

* 4.  Participles  are  compared  like  adjectives,  as : 
geliebt,  beloved  geliebter  geliebteft 

5.  -c  of  the  Superlative  ending  is  retained  only  after  b,  t 
or  a sibilant  (f,  fdj,  3,  fj,  y),  as:  alt,  Superl.  dlteft;  but  groj$ 
always  has  Superl.  gro[3t. 

5.  Adjectives  in  -e,  -cl,  — en,  -Ct  drop  e of  the  stem  in  the 
Comparative,  as  : trage,  trdger,  trag[t ; ebel,  ebler,  ebelft. 

126.  The  Comparative. 

1.  ‘Than*  = af§  after  the  Comparative. 

2.  The  compound  form  with  mefyr  (Engl,  ‘more’)  is  never 
(except  with  the  adjectives  given  in  § 161)  used  in  German 
(as  it  is  in  Engl,  with  polysyllabic  adjectives),  unless  when  two 
adjectives  (i.  e.,  two  qualities  of  the  same  object)  are  being 
compared,  as : 

@r  iff  meljr  fdntmdj  al§  fvanf. 

He  is  more  (i.  e.,  rather)  weak  than  ill. 


156 


LESSON  XXV. 


[§§  126- 


3.  Comparison  of  equality : 

I am  (just)  as  rich  as  he, 

%<S)  bin  (eben)  {0  reicf;  mie  er. 

4.  ‘ The  . . . the  ’ before  comparatives  = je,  bcjiu  or  um 
fo  — je  (bcjio  or  um  fo),  as  : 

The  longer  the  nights,  the  shorter  the  days, 

(bejto)  longer  bie  -Kadjte,  je  (bcfto)  Jiirjer  bie  fEage. 

5.  When  the  comparative  is  declined,  the  omission  of  e of 
the  stem  takes  place  just  as  in  Adjectives  in  — er,  as : 

ben  reid;er(e)n  -Dlann,  etc. 

Note. — The  syllable  -er  may  occur  three  times  successively  at  the 
end  of  the  same  adjective,  viz. : I ° as  part  of  the  stem,  e.  g.,  fycifer,  hoarse; 
2°  as  inflection  of  comparison,  e.  g.,  ljeif(e)rer,  hoarser;  30  as  ending  of 
strong  adjective  declension,  e.  g.,  eitt  I)eif(e)rercr  ©anger,  a hoarser 
singer. 

127.  The  Superlative. 

1.  The  Superlative  is  not  used,  even  as  Predicate , in  the 
undeclined  form,  but : 

(a)  If  the  substantive  is  expressed,  or  if  the  substantive  of 
the  preceding  clause  can  be  supplied,  the  (weak)  adjective 
form  with  definite  article  is  used,  as : 

This  river  is  the  broadest  in  America  (i.  e.,  the  broad- 
est river),  ©iefer  glufc  ift  ber  brc.tefte  in  Slmerifa  (ber 
breitefte  $lufj). 

The  days  in  June  are  the  longest  (days)  in  the  whole 
year,  Ste  Sage  im  %un\  finb  bie  lattgffcu  (Sage,  under- 
stood) tm  ganjen 

This  earthquake  was  the  most  severe  that  we  have 
had,  £)iefe§  ©rbbeben  ift  bag  Ijeftigfte,  toeld;e£  ttnr 
gefyabi  fyaben. 


127] 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


157 


(b)  If  no  substantive  can  be  supplied,  the  adverbial  form 
preceded  by  am  is  used,  as : 

The  lake  is  broader  than  the  river,  but  the  sea  is  the 
broadest  (observe  not  ‘the  broadest  lake , river  or 
sea’),  2)er  ©ee  ift  breiter  ate  ber  aber  bie  ©ee  ift  am 

Brcifcficn. 

The  days  are  longest  (i.  e.,  ‘ at  the  longest/  not  ‘the 
longest  days’)  in  June,  Jjunt  finb  bie  $£age  ant 

langften. 

The  earthquake  was  most  severe  on  Monday,  3lm 
SWorttag  Wax  ba§  ©rbbeben  am  fycftigftcu  (not  ‘the 
severest  earthquake  ’). 

Note.  — The  superlative  may  be  strengthened  by  prefixing 

as:  ba§  aflcrbeftigfte,  am  aUcrbcftigften. 

2.  In  the  preceding  examples,  the  superlative  ascribes  a 
quality  to  the  object  in  the  highest  degree  in  comparison 
(expressed  or  implied)  with,  or  relatively  to,  a number  of 
other  objects,  and  is  hence  called  the  Relative  Superlative. 
But  the  English  superlative  with  most  often  merely  ascribes 
the  quality  in  an  eminently  high  degree,  without  instituting 
any  comparison.  When  so  used,  it  is  called  the  Absolute 
Superlative,  as: 

Your  father  was  most  kind  (i.  e.  = ‘exceedingly  kind/ 
not  = ‘kind^/’) 

The  Absolute  Superlative  is  rendered  in  German  by  an  ad- 
verb of  eminence,  such  as  fefyr,  very;  fyodjft,  ciufcerft,  exceed- 
ingly,  prefixed  to  the  adjective  in  the  positive,  as : 

3$r  Safer  toar  feljr  (IjSdjft,  iiufjcrft)  giitig. 

Your  father  was  most  (very,  exceedingly,  extremely) 
kind. 


LESSON  XXV. 


t§§  I27~ 


IBS 

3.  The  superlative  is  commonly  used  in  German  of  two  ob- 
jects (which  is  not  admissible  in  Engl.),  as  : 

S)er  (grofsere  or)  grSfjtc  bon  biefcrt  jioet  ^naben. 

The  taller  of  these  two  boys. 

128.  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

Adverbs  are  compared  like  adjectives,  the  superlative  form 
being  that  with  am,  as  : 

angeneljm,  agreeably  an genefymer,  more  agreeably 

am  angenefymffcn,  most  agreeably 


129.  Irregular  Comparison. 


gut,  good 

fieffer 

beft  (different  root) 

high 

fyoljer 

fyocf)ft  (drops  c in  Compart) 

naf?(e),  near 

nat?er 

ttadjft  (nearest,  next;  in- 

serts c in  Super /.) 

toiel,  much 

meljr 

tltCtft  (different  root) 

toentg,  little  (of  quantity) 

utiuber  ininfceft  (different  root) 

Notes. — 1.  9ftel)r  is  used  as  adverb  of  quantity  only.  For  the  Subst. 
tttefyrereg,  PI.  mel)rere  ‘some,  several,'  see  §§  152,  175. 

2.  SBenig.also  has  the  regular  forms  tnemger,  ttenigjt. 


130.  Defective  Comparison. 

The  following  Comparatives  and  Superlatives  are  formed 
from  adverbs,  etc.  (some  of  which  are  obsolete)  : 

(auj^en,  without,  adv.)  finder,  outer  aufterft,  outermost 

utmost,  extreme 

(ef>e,  before,  conj.)  (ef)er,  sooner,  adv.)  | ^\S°°neSt 

(f)inten,  behind,  adv.)  fainter,  hinder  fyinterjt,  hindmost 
(innen,  within,  adv.)  inner,  inner  innerft,  innermost 


COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS. 


l59 


131] 


(Iaf$,  late,  obsolete) 
(mittel,  middle) 

(nib,  below,  obsolete) 
(oben,  above,  adv.) 
(unten,  below,  adv.) 

(born,  before,  adv.) 


mittler,  middle 
nieber,  lower 
ober,  upper 
unter,  lower 

borber,  fore 


le^t,  latest,  last 
mittelft,  middle 
nteberft,  lowest 
oberft,  uppermost 
unterft,  lowest, 
undermost 
borberft,  foremost 


131.  Strong  Verbs:  friercn  Model. 


Infin. 

Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ.  Model : 

fricren 

fror 

gefroren 

Engl . Analogy: 

freeze 

froze 

frozen 

Ablaut: 

ic,  etc. 

0 

0 

Note.  — The  long  0 is  what  distinguishes  this  Model  from  the  fdjiejiett 


Model  (§  123). 

LIST. 

A.  (Infin.  ie 

- it  ) 

biegen,  bend 

bog 

gebogen 

bieten,  bid,  offer 

bot 

geboten 

fliegen  (N.),  fly  (on  wings) 

flog 

geffogeit 

fliegen  (N.),  flee  (escape) 

m 

gefloljen 

frieren  (N.  A.),  freeze,  be  cold 

fror 

gefroren 

fyeben,  lift,  raise 

f)ob,  Ijttb 

gefioben 

(er)fiefen,  (er)furen,  choose 

erfor 

erf'oren 

Iligen,  lie  (tell  a falsehood) 

log 

gelogen 

(ber)lieren,  lose 

feerlor 

fcerloren 

fcf)i eben,  shove,  push 

fcfiob 

gefdjoben 

fcf)tooren,  swear 

fdjioor,  fcfitour 

gefdjtooren 

(be)trligen,  deceive,  cheat 

betrog 

betrogen 

toiegen,  weigh,  have  weight  (intr.) 

toog 

getoogen 

jieljen  (N.  A.),  pull  (tr.) ; move  (intr.) 

m 

gelogen 

Remarks.  — 1.  3Si egen,  bieten,  fliegen,  fliefyen,  jiefyen,  have 
also  the  forms  (now  used  only  in  poetry)  with  eu  for  ic  in  the 


l6o 


LESSON  XXV. 


[5  131 

2.  and  3.  Sing.  Pres.  Ind.  and  2.  Sing.  Imper.,  as : bcugft, 
bcugt,  6 tug ; flcucf)ft,  ficud) ; jeudjft,  jeud}. 

2.  SHegen,  to  rock,  is  weak  (toiegte,  getoiegt). 

3.  Observe  the  change  of  lj  into  g in  jie^en,  309,  ge3ogen. 


B.  (Infin.  e, 

•*.) 

fcfjeren,  shear 

fd^or 

gefdjoren 

toeben  (W.),  weave 

toob 

geiooben 

foagen,  weigh  (trans.) 

toog 

getoogen 

(be)toegen,  induce,  persuade 

betoog 

beloogen 

Remark.  — 23etoegen,  ‘to  move  (set  in  motion)’  is  weak 
(behxgte,  betoegt). 


Vocabulary. 


to  offer,  an'bieten 
abolish,  annul,  cancel,  auf'* 
peben 

put  off,  delay,  postpone,  auf'* 
fd;ieben 

remove  (neut.),  aus>'jief)en 

prefer,  toor'^tef^en  (dat.  of  pers.) 

fly  away,  toeg'fliegett 

roof,  ba§  ®ad} 

colour,  bie  §arbe 

hunger,  ber  hunger 

cook,  ber  $od}  * 


metal,  bag  detail' 
red  (subst.),  ba§  9iot 
sparrow,  ber  ©peeling 
part,  portion,  ber  Steil 
shore,  bank,  ba§  lifer 
on  that  account,  therefore, 
beSpcdb 

yet,  still  (in  spite  of  all),  bocf; 
straight,  gerabe  (adj.) 
exactly,  just,  gerabe  (adv.) 
as  soon  as,  fobalb 


Idioms  : 1.  I prefer  gold  to  silver,  3<*)  ©olb  bent  <Silber  oor. 

I like  the  winter  in  Canada,  3d)  fcabe  ben  SBinter  in 
<£anaba  germ 

EXERCISE  XXV. 

A.  1.  ©in  ©perling  in  ber  §anb  iff  beffer  al3  jtoei  auf  bem 
SDadje.  2.  fOlarie  ift  jiinger  al§  Souife,  aber  fie  ift  bod}  groper. 


STRONG  VERBS  : fricven  MODEL. 


161 


§131] 


3.  hunger  ift  ber  befte  $ocf).  4.  ©er  juttge  ©eneral  93.  ift  ein 
tapfrerer  £>elb  alg  fern  33ater.  5.  ©ie  Sleifenben  fdjobert  bag 
33oot  bom  lifer  unb  ruberten  liber  ben  6.  ?lufgefd;oben  ift 

nid;t  aufgef/oben.  7.  SBelcfieg  bon  biefen  SRabcjien  ift  bag  grofjte  ? 
8.  3e  f;ol;er  ein  93ogel  fliegt,  je  fleiner  fcfieint  er  ju  ioerben.  9.  ©er 
grembe  £;at  tnir  tnel;r  fur  mein  §aug  angeboten  alg  ©ie,  aber  id) 
glaube  nic£)t,  bafj  er  fo  gut  bega^Ien  tbiirbe.  10.  $e  fteijjiger  loir 
finb,  befto  mefir  lernen  ibir.  11.  3m  ©ommer  Ijabe  id;  bag  Sanb 
ganj  gern,  aber  im  SBinter  jief>e  id;  bie  ©tabt  bor.  12.  2Rir  Un= 
gliidtidjen  ift  ber  fyufe  erfroren,  alS  id;  nacb  §aufe  ritt.  13.  ©0= 
balb  toir  unfer  §aug  berfauft  fatten,  jogen  ibir  au§.  14.  2llg  id; 
auf  bem  Sanbe  tear,  toog  idf)  mefir  alg  icf)  jei;t  tbiege.  15.  ©g  ift 
toaljr,  bafj  bie  reicfiftett  ?eute  nic^t  tmmer  bie  gliicflicfiften  finb. 
16.  ©er  9iegen,  toetdfier  ung  bie  9teife  berleibet  fiat,  ioar  me^r 
nitfdicf)  alg  angeneljm.  17.  ©ie  SRutter  fiob  bie  ©tiide  bon  bem 
©lag  auf,  toelcfieg  ifir  unartigeg  $ittb  auf  bie  ©vbc  gefcfnniffen 
Jjatte.  18.  ©iefer  $nabe  fiat  feine  ©Item  betrogen,  unb  begfialb 
ift  er  ungliidlicf).  19.  grieren  ©ie,  §err  ^rofeffor? 
nidfit,  aber  icf)  fror,  alg  id;  auf  ber  ©trajje  Soar.  20.  ©er  3«ger 
fiat  ben  SSoget  gefcfioffen,  gerabe  alg  er  auf  ben  93aum  flog. 
21.  93on  tbern  iourbe  3f>r  gefauft?  22.  33on  einem 

f^retuben,  ber  feit  bierjefin  ©agen  bei  meinem  Setter  auf  33e* 
fud;  ift. 

B.  1.  Lead  is  a heavy  metal,  but  gold  is  the  heaviest. 
2.  This  painter  is  not  so  famous  as  his  father,  but  his  pictures 
are  just  as  fine.  3.  George  lost  his  parents  when  he  was 
still  very  young.  4.  Those  students  have  lost  a great  deal  of 
time,  but  now  they  are  studying  more  industriously.  5.  The 
bird  flew  away,  just  as  the  huntsman  was  on  the  point  of 
shooting  it.  6.  When  is  the  weather  coldest  in  Canada  ? In 
the  month  of  January  it  is  coldest.  7.  Which  bird  flies 
fastest  ? 8.  The  useful  is  better  than  the  beautiful.  9.  What 
kind  of  a dog  has  the  huntsman  lost?  10.  Iron  is  heavy,  lead 


LESSON  XXVI, 


[§§  133- 


162 

is  heavier,  but  gold  is  heaviest  of  all.  11.  Green  is  a more 
agreeable  colour  for  the  eyes  than  red.  12.  If  the  stick  is 
too  long,  cut  a piece  of  it  off.  13.  The  upper  part  of  the 
city  of  Quebec  is  much  finer  than  the  lower.  14.  The 
weather  seems  to  be  warmer  to-day,  but  it  froze  (perf.)  yester- 
day. 15.  When  I was  younger,  I weighed  more  than  my 
brother,  but  now  he  weighs  more  than  I.  16.  The  upper 
part  of  the  city  of  Quebec  was  built  earlier  than  the  lower 
part. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXV. 

1.  1st  der  junge  General  ein  tapferer  Mann?  2.  Ziehen 
Sie  das  Land  der  Stadt  vor  ? 3.  Weshalb  ist  der  Knabe  so 

traurig?  4.  Wann  hat  der  Jager  den  Vogel  geschossen? 
5.  Welche  Studenten  lernen  am  meisten  ? 6.  Welches  ist 

besser,  reich  und  ungliicklich  oder  arm  und  gliicklich  (zu) 
sein? 


LESSON  XXVI. 

DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  - STRONG  VERBS* 

fingen  model. 

13&.  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are: 

1.  her.  Me,  bag,  that 

2.  biejer,  btefc,  biefeg,  this,  that 

3.  jener,  |cne,  jeneg,  that,  yonder 

4.  berjeuige,  biejeutge,  bagjemgc,  that 

5<  ber  uamlttfje,  bie  tmmlidjc,  bag  namltdje,  the  same 
6.  bcrfel6(ig)e,  bie?db(ig)e,  bagfefb(ige),  the  same 


134]  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  1 63 

7.  folder),  foIcjjCe),  falrij(eg),  such,  such  a 

8.  beggfeidjen,  bcrgfetdjeit,  of  that  kind  (of  those  kinds) 
Remark.  — These  may  all  be  used  either  as  Substantive 

or  Adjective  Pronouns,  except  beggleicfyen  (see  § 139,  1, 
below). 

133.  1.  $er,  fete,  bag,  used  adjectively  (i.  e.,  before  a 
substantive),  is  declined  like  the  Definite  Article  (which  is 
merely  the  demonstrative  adjective  weakened  and  un- 
emphasized), as : 

$er'  9Jlann,  that  man.  £)er  SOlamt',  the  man'. 


2.  When  used  substantively  it  is  declined  thus : 


Singular . 

Plural. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUTER. 

ALL  GENDERS. 

Nom.  ber 

bie 

ba§ 

bie 

Gen.  beffeit 

bereit 

beffeit 

berer  (berett) 

Dat.  bem 

ber 

bem 

benen 

Acc.  ben 

bie 

ba§ 

bie 

Note.  — The  form  bcreit  (Gen.  PL)  is  only  used  as  = ‘of  them/  as: 
How  many  children  have  you  ? I have  seven  of  them. 

2£te  Diele  Winter  Ijabeit  @ie  ? 3d)  Ijafte  beven  fiebeit. 

134.  SDtcjcr  and  jener  both  follow  the  btefer  Model  (see 
§ 6),  but  bieg  is  used  for  biefeg  in  the  Neuter  Nom.  and  Acc. 
Sing,  when  used  substantively,  as : 

Sdeg  tft  mein  33udb,  Gr  frntte  bieg  niefyt  gefyort. 

This  is  my  book.  He  had  not  heard  this, 

btefet  = this  (the  nearer  of  two  objects,  hence  also  =) 

the  latter,  as: 

jener  = that,  yonder  (the  more  re7?iote  of  two  objects, 
hence  also  =)  the  former; 

Sdcfer  Scium  tft  grof$,  after  jener  if t grower. 

This  tree  is  large,  but  that  (one)  is  larger. 


164 


LESSON  XXVI. 


[§§  I34" 


ScttCt  33aum,  yonder  tree  (pointed  out  as  remote] ). 
$arl  unb  -JBiUjelm  ftrtb  33ruber ; biefer  tft  fleifttg,  jcncr  tft 
trage,  Charles  and  William  are  brothers  ; the  latter 
is  diligent,  the  former  is  idle. 


135.  1.  2>erjcnige  is  declined  in  both  parts,  like  the  Defi- 
nite Article  followed  by  the  adjective  form  jenig  with  weak 
endings,  thus : 

Singular . Plural . 


MASC.  VEM.  NEUTER. 


Nom.  berjenige  biejentge 
Gen.  bcSjentgcn  berjemgen 
etc.  etc. 


ba§jentge 

bcijentgeu 

etc. 


ALL  GENDERS. 


btcjenigctt 

berjenigctt 

etc. 


2.  SDer  or  bcrfenigc  is  used : 


(a)  before  a genitive  case,  as : 


E>abe  3f>ren  £>ut  unb  bcn(jcntgen)  33ruber§, 
I have  your  hat  and  that  of  your  brother  (your 
brother’s) ; 


Note.  — The  demonstrative  may  also  be  omitted  in  this  construction, 
35  in  English ; or  the  simple  ber  may  be  used. 

(£)  before  a relative  clause,  as : 

2>er(jentge) , weldjft  jufrieben  tft,  tft  gliictlid). 

He  who  is  contented,  is  happy. 

$ie(jcntge)  ffrau  ift  am  fdjonften,  ttsefdje  gut  tft. 
That  woman  is  most  beautiful,  who  is  good. 


§au§  unb  ba§(jcnige),  toorin  toir  toofmen, 
Your  house  and  that  in  which  we  live. 


Note. — In  sentences  like  the  first,  where  ber(jenige)  is  used  substantively, 
the  demonstrative  and  relative  together  may  be  replaced  by  the  compound 
relative  tt>er,  thus : 

Set*  ^ufrieben  iff,  ift  gliicfttdj. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


165 


I39l 


130.  $crfcI6c  (berfelbige)  = 'the  same/  as:  the  sams 
hat,  bcrfclfcc  §ut ; and  is  declined  like  berjenige,  in  two  parts, 
written  as  one  word,  thus  : 


Singular . 

MASC.  FEM.  NEUTER. 

Nom.  berfelbe  btefelbe  ba^felbc 

Gen.  bedfelbett  berfelbett  bcSfelbm 
etc.  etc.  etc. 


Plural . 


ALL  GENDERS. 


bicfelben 

berfelbett 

etc. 


(For  examples  of  its  use  see  § 143,  2-4,  below). 

Note.  — @efbig  is  sometimes  used  without  article,  with  strong  end- 
ings: felbiger,  -e,  -e8. 


137*  $er  namlidjc  sometimes  replaces  berfelbe. 

138.  1.  ©old),  when  used  alone,  follows  the  biefer  Model, 
as  : fcdd;er  2Beirt,  such  wine;  fol d;c£  ©rob  such  bread. 

2.  After  eitt,  it  follows  the  mixed  declension  of  adjectives, 
as : 

Nom.  citt  folder  28ein,  such  a wine 

Gen.  eiite$  fold;ett  2Betrte3,  of  such  a wine,  etc. 

3.  Before  etn,  fold)  is  always,  and  before  an  adjective,  gen- 
erally, uninflected,  as : 

©old)  etn  2Beut ; foldj  guter  SBetn,  or  folder  gute  SBein. 

Note.  — The  adjective  has  the  strong  endings  when  fold)  is  uninflected, 
otherwise  it  has  the  weak  endings,  except  in  the  plur.,  where  it  some- 
times has  the  strong. 

3.  @ofd)  with  etn  is  often  replaced  by  fo,  as: 

So  eitt  SBeiu ; eitt  fo  guter  SBetn. 

139.  1.  $>c£gleid;en  is  used  as  an  indeclinable  neuter  sub- 
stantive (never  as  adjective),  thus: 

3d;  batte  bc§gletd>en  nie  gefyort, 

I had  never  heard  that  sort  of  thing  (anything  of 
that  kind). 


1 66 


LESSON  XXVI. 


[§§  139- 


Note.  — 2)e3gteid)en  is-  also  used  adverbially,  = ‘in  the  same  way, 
also.* 

2.  Scrgleid^en  is  used  both  substantively  (referring  to  a 
fem.  or  plur.  noun)  and  adjectively.  In  the  latter  case  it  is 
invariable,  standing  before  substantives  of  any  gender  and 
number,  as  : 

Sergletdjert  2Betn,  $ergletc£)en  SBeirte, 

Wine  of  that  sort.  Wines  of  that  sort. 

Note.  — The  phrase:  unb  bergteidjen  rneljr  (abbrev.  it.  bgt.  nt.)  is  used 
for  unb  fo  lueiter  (it.  f.  in.)  = etcetera 

General  Remarks  on  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

140.  The  English  ‘ that  ’ is  rendered  in  German  : 

1.  As  Demonstrative  Pronoun  : 

(a)  Most  generally  by  btV  or  feiefer,  when  there  is  no 

contrast  with  any  other  object,  thus : 

That  man,  feet'  SDiann  or  bicfcr  SWann. 

( b ) By  bet  or  berjcmge  before  a genitive  case  or  a 

relative  clause  (see  § 135,  2,  above). 

G)  By  jntcr,  when  the  object  is  distinctly  pointed  out 
as  remote  (=  yon,  yonder),  or  as  more  remote 
than  another,  thus : 

Sencr  Saum,  That  tree  (over  yonder). 

35tefe§  unb  jcneS,  This  house  and  that  one. 

2.  As  Relative  by  ber  or  luctdjer  (see  § 95),  thus : 

The  book  that  I have,  £)a3  33u$,  ba§  (tticWje§)  idj  fyabe. 

3.  As  Conjunction  by  bajj,  thus  : 

I shall  tell  your  father  that  you  are  diligent, 

3 cf)  toerbe  beinem  SSater  fagen,  bafj  bu  fleifng  bift. 

141.  The  neuter  pronouns  bag,  btcf(c8),  JCUC3  are  used 
(like  c3,  see  § 39,  1,  and  tuelff)e3,  § 82,  Rem.  2)  before  the  verb 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


M3] 


167 


‘to  be/  representing  the  real  subject,  which  follows  the  verb, 
and  with  which  the  verb  agrees,  as : 

tft  mein  SSrttber,  That  is  my  brother. 

2>icf(c§)  iff  3fyre  ©d^tuef ter,  This  is  your  sister. 

,3enc§  finb  feme  Sucker,  Those  are  his  books. 

142.  ®cr  and  \tXitX,  when  referring  to  inanimate  objects, 
are  often  replaced  by  the  adverb  ba(r),  ‘there/  before  pre- 
positions (compare  § 38,  Rem.  5)  and  biefer  by  {per,  as ; 

3d;  £)abe  ni d;t8  bamit  gu  tljun, 

I have  nothing  to  do  with  that  (there with). 

fnermit  muft  id;  fd;lief$en. 

With  this  (heremXh)  I must  close. 

Note.  — This  substitution  is  not  made  before  a relative,  as 
3d)  bad) te  ait  ba3  (not  baran),  ©ie  fagten, 

I was  thinking  of  that  v/hich  (what)  you  were  saying. 

143.  Use  of  Demonstratives  to  replace 

Personal  Pronouns. 

1.  The  neuter  gen.  bcffcit  replaces  that  of  the  neuter  pers. 
pron.  (feiner)  referring  to  things,  as: 

3d;  ertnnre  mid)  beffen  niefyt, 

I do  not  recollect  it  (feiner  = him,  of  him). 

2.  The  genitive  of  bet  and  that  of  bcrfdfce  are  frequently 
used  to  replace  the  possessive  adjective  of  the  3.  person,  in 
order  to  avoid  ambiguity,  as  : 

SDer  ©raf  Wax  mit  feinem  (be§  ©rctfen)  3dger  unb  bcffeit 
(be3  3ager3)  §unben  (or  mit  ben  §unben  begfelbcn)  auf 
ber  Sagb,  The  Count  was  at  the  hunt  with  his  (the 
Count’s)  huntsman  and  his  (the  huntsman’s)  dogs. 

Note.  — 9Jfit  feUtCU  §unben  would  mean  ‘with  the  Count’s  dogs.’ 

3.  Serfclbe  is  used  in  other  cases  also  to  prevent  ambiguity 
(also  biefer  in  the  same  way),  as : 


i68 


LESSON  XXVI. 


[§§  143- 


Sftetn  ©ruber  tft  bei  metnem  $rcurtbe,  uttb  berfelfic  (or  biefer) 
acfytet  ilju  fefyr ; or:  er(mein  ©ruber)  ad^iet  bcttfdlieti  fef;r. 
My  brother  is  at  my  friend’s,  and  he  (the  latter,  the 
friend)  esteems  him  (my  brother)  very  much ; or : he 
(my  brother)  esteems  him  (my  friend)  very  much. 

4.  ®crfcl6e  also  replaces  the  personal  pronouns,  to  prevent 
repetitions  like  if?tt  — 2$nen/  ©ie — fte,  etc.,  as  : 

SDtefer  2Betn  tft  gut,  id)  farm  $$rten  benfcl&cit  (for  iljn 
Sfjlten)  em^fel;len,  This  wine  is  good,  I can  recommend 
it  to  you. 


144.  Strong  Verbs:  fiitgen  Model. 


Infin. 

Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ . Model : ftitgett 

fang 

gefungen 

Engl.  Analogy  : sing 

sang 

sung 

Ablaut:  1 

a 

u 

LIST. 

Btnben,  bind 

Banb 

geBunben 

brtngen  (N.),  press 

brang 

gebrungen 

finben,  find 

fcmb 

gefuitbeit 

flingen,  ring,  sound 

llang 

gellungen 

(ge)lingen  (N.),  succeed  (impers., 

gelang 

gelungen 

with  dat.  of  pers.) 

rtngen,  wring  (the  hands,  etc.) 

rang 

gerungen 

fcpngen,  twine ; swallow 

fcfdang 

gefcffiungen 

fdj)ft>inben  (N.),  vanish 

fdftnanb 

gefcfiiounbon 

fcfyitnngen,  swing 

fcfnuang 

gefcfyhnmgen 

ftngctr,  sing 

fang 

gefungen 

finfen,  sink 

fanf 

gefunfen 

fpringen  (N.  A.),  spring,  leap 

f^rang 

gefprungett 

trinfen,  drink  (of  human  beings) 

tranf 

getrunfen 

hnnben,  wind 

toanb 

gewunbeti 

jhnngen,  force 

?h>ang 

gejtoungert 

STRONG  VERBS  : fingCU  MODEL. 
Vocabulary. 


M4l 


169 


to  press  in,  penetrate,  ein's 
escape,  eptfliefyen  [bringen 
invent,  erfinben 
remember,  fid£)  erinnern  (-{-gen. 
of  thing) 

drown,  be  drowned,  ertrinfen 
spring  upon,  log'flpringen  (auf 
-)-  acc,) 

mean,  suppose,  meinen 
oblige,  berbinben 
vanish,  berfcbminben 


on  board,  am  Sorb 
grammar,  bie  ©ramma'ii! 
dealer,  ber  £anbler 
lion,  ber  Some 
diver,  ber  ©audEjer 
telephone,  bag  SeIe^onf 
clever,  gefcf)icft 
prudent,  cautious,  t>orffid^  tig 
unfortunately,  leiber 
below,  unterfyalb  (-{-  gen.) 
never  yet,  nod)  rue 


EXERCISE  XXVI. 

A . 1.  ©ieg  ift  mein  Setter  aug  SDtontreal ; fennen  ©ie  tyn? 
2.  gatoofyt,  biefen  fenne  tcf>  ganj  gut,  aber  nicbt  ben,  ber  mir  geftern 
ben  Srief  gebracfyt  bat.  3.  ©in  bofer  $nabe  fcbmang  ficb  auf  ben 
9tyfelbaum  im  ©arten  feineg  Sacfybarg  unb  fcbmifc  bit  $©fel  auf 
bie  ©rbe.  4.  %n  biefem  gclbe  f)aben  bie  Sauern  fcE>on  bag  ©rag 
gefcfynitten,  aber  in  jenern  merben  fie  eg  erft  morgen  fdfmeiben. 
5.  „2iebet  bie,  bie  eu$  fyaffen."  6.  ^eneg  fxnb  meine  §unbe,  aber 
bieg  finb  biejenigen,  toel^e  ber  Sager  hor  acf)t  ©agen  berloren  bat, 
unb  bie  id)  gefunben  babe.  7.  ©rinnern  ©ie  fid)  beffen,  mag  icb 
g[)nen  bom  alien  ©d)loj3  am  Ufer  beg  ©eeg  er^dblt  babe  ? 8.  2)  e m 
miirbe  id)  feinen  STfjaler  Ieif>en  ; b er  miirbe  nie  bejat)Ien.  9.  ©ie 
©deafer  trieben  i£?re  §erben  fiber  benfelben  Serg  auf  melcben  mir 
ftiegen.  10.  ©er  Seifenbe  ftieg  bom  ^Bferbe  unb  banb  bagfelbe  an 
einen  fleinen  23aum.  11.  ©ag  ©dbiff  fiieft  an  einen  f^elfen,  bag 
SBaffer  brang  ein,  unb  bag  ©cfyiff  fan!.  12.  S$  babe  micb  fo5 
fliffen,  Satein  ju  lernen,  aber  eg  ift  mir  nxd)t  gelungen.  13.  ©er 
Some  mar  gerabe  im  Segrtffe  auf  ben  Seifenben  log§uft)ringen,  alg 
ber  Sager  i^n  fd)oj3.  14.  fennen  ©ie  §>errn  Sell  ? 23elcben  §errn 
Sell  meinen  ©ie?  15.  ©enjenigen,  ber  bag  ©elepbon  erfunben 
12 


170 


LE3S0N  XXVI. 


[§§  *44- 


f;at.  16.  2Ba§  tft  au§  meiner  beutfcfyen  ©rammattf  getoorben? 
©ie  fc£)etnt  gang  berfcfytounbert  gu  fern.  17.  £)a§  finb  fcfyone 
Crbbeeren  ; too  fyabert  ©ie  biefelbert  gefauft  ? 18.  ©ie  finb  fcftort, 
liicfyttoaljr?  ©oldf)  pracbtige  Seeren  finbcn  ©ie  ni$t  bet  jebem 
^dnbler.  19.  ©o  fyeifce3  SBetier  Ijaben  toir  ttocfy  nid^t  gefyabt. 
20.  2Ba§  tourbe  bir  geanttoortet,  ate  bu  nacf;  bent  $ranfen  frags 
teft?  21.  9Uan  fagte  ntir,  er  fet  eirt  toenig  beffer. 

B . 1.  The  patient  is  just  as  weak  to-day  as  he  was  yester- 
day. 2.  Such  happy  days  I have  never  yet  passed  ! 3.  Where 
do  you  generally  pass  the  winter  ? 4.  Where  is  my  pen  ? 

Have  you  found  it  ? 5.  This  is  my  neighbour  of  whom  you 

have  already  heard  so  much.  6.  The  ship  has  sunk,  and 
the  people  who  were  on  board  have  been  drowned.  7.  I 
was  looking  for  my  coat,  but  found  my  father’s.  8.  I should 
be  very  much  obliged  to  you,  if  you  sang  me  a beautiful  song. 
9.  Which  is  poorer,  he  who  has  no  money,  or  he  who  has  no 
friends?  10.  How  should  we  escape  if  the  boat  sank? 
11.  Charles  has  already  finished  (the)  learning  (of)  his  lesson  ; 
he  is  cleverer  than  I thought.  12.  The  diver  that  jumped 
from  the  bridge  has  unfortunately  been  drowned.  13.  It 
will  have  been  a good  lesson  for  us,  if  it  makes  us  more 
prudent  in  future.  14.  Is  that  a new  song?  No,  it  is  the 
same  that  I sang  a week  ago  at  your  house.  15.  The  St. 
Lawrence  River  is  the  broader.t  in  Canada ; below  the  city  of 
Quebec  it  is  broadest.  16.  The  patient  is  better  to-day;  he 
will  be  allowed  to  go  out  to-morrow. 

ORAL*  EXERCISE  XXVI. 

1.  Was  ist  aus  dem  Taucher  geworden  ? 2.  1st  Karl  ge- 

schickter  als  Johann  ? 3.  Was  hat  der  bose  Knabe  gemacht  ? 
4.  Ist  der  Reisende  dem  Lowen  entflohen  ? 5 Ist  es  Ihnen 

gelungen,  Latein  zu  lernen  ? 6.  Wessen  Hunde  sind  das  ? 


*451  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS*  I/I 


LESSON  XXVII. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  - STRONG  VERBS:  tytmteU  AND 

Ijelfen  models. 

145.  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

The  Indefinite  Pronouns  are: 

(a)  Substantive : 

1.  tnan  (indecl.),  one,  they,  people  (Fr.  on) 

2.  jcbcrtltamt,  everybody,  everyone 

3.  jcmanb,  i somebody,  anybody 

* I cnmp*  nnp  nm;  nnp 


( some  one,  any  one 

4.  ntemanb,  { nobody’ no,  one’  no  person 

( not  anybody,  etc. 

5.  eitottS,  something,  anything 

6.  nidjtg,  nothing,  not  anything 

7.  titter,  one,  some  one 

8.  fciltcr,  no  one,  none 


of  persons 
only 


^ of  things 
j only 

{(biefer  Mod- 
el) persons 
and  things 


{b)  Adjective  (also  used  substantively) : 

1.  einige,  cfiidjc  (plur.),  some,  a few, 

several 

2.  feb(&eb)cr  (jegltdjcr),  each  (one),  every 

one 

3.  UUtncfjer,  many  (a  one) 

4.  tneljrere  (pi.),  several 

5.  fckt,  much,  pi.  Hi efe,  many 

6.  toeing,  little,  pi.  toenige,  few 

7.  toeJdjer,  some 

Remark.  — The  Indefinite  Pronominal  Adjectives  are  also 
used  as  Indefinite  Numeral  Adjectives  (see  Less.  XXIX). 


(btefer  Mod- 
el) persons 
and  things 


172 


LESSON  XXVII. 


[§§  14* 


146.  SJifltt  (spelt  with  small  letter  and  one  tt,  to  distinguish 
it  from  ber  SJicmn,  the  man,  from  which  it  is  derived)  is  the 
Indefinite  Personal  Pronoun,  and  is  used  to  make  a state- 
ment without  specifying  any  particular  person.  It  is  equivalent 
to  Engl. 4 one,  they,  we,  you  (indef.),  people/  etc.,  (French  on), 
or  to  the  impersonal  use  of  the  passive  voice,  as : 

SOiau  fagt,  One  says;  they,  people  say;  or  it  is  said. 

9Jicm  fanrt  Dl  unb  SBaffer  nicfyt  gufammen  mtfcfyen. 

One  (we,  you)  cannot  mix  oil  and  water. 

Remarks.  — 1.  One’s  self  (red.)  = fid) ; one’s  = fcin 
(poss.  adj.),  as : 

9Jlan  f$amt  fidj  feiner  Seller, 

One  is  ashamed  of  one’s  faults. 

2.  9J?an  cannot  be  replaced  by  any  other  pronoun,  as : 

93? an  toirb  miibe,  frenn  matt  (not  er)  gu  lange  arbeitet, 

A man  (one)  gets  tired,  when  he  works  too  long. 

147.  ^ebermann  is  used  in  the  Sing,  only;  it  takes -8  in 
Gen.,  but  is  otherwise  uninflected,  as : 

Scbermann3  ©a$e  ift  niemanbeS  ©a$e. 

Everybody’s  business  is  nobody’s  business. 

©te  Sibel  ift  etn  Su cfy  fur  jebermamt  (acc.), 

The  Bible  is  a book  for  everybody. 

148.  Semattb  and  its  negative  tttemanb  are  used  in  the 
Sing,  only,  and  are  declined  thus : 

Norn,  jemanb  ntemanb 

Gen.  jemanbeS  ntemanbc§ 

Dat  I iemcmbem  \ ™emanknit 

* X jemanb(cn)  ( niemanb(cn) 

Acc.  jemanb(en)  niemanb(cu) 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


173 


Note.  — The  uninflected  forms  are  preferable  for  the  Dat.  and  Acc.,  as : 
2£ir  fjabeit  niemanb  (acc.)  getabeft,  We  have  blamed  nobody. 
Herbert  ©ie  e§  jcmaith  (dat.)  fagert  ? Shall  you  tell  it  to  anybody? 

149.  1.  is  sometimes  abbreviated  to  as  : 

ft>iH  bir  ttm§  fagen,  I will  tell  you  something. 

2.  After  eflM3  and  mdjfS,  an  adjective  has  the  strong 
neuter  ending  -e£  (see  § 122,  Rem.  11,  above). 

3.  df!M§  and  ttid)f3  are  also  used  as  Indefinite  Numerals 
(see  Less.  XXIX,  § 168). 

1 50.  diner  (bxefer  Model),  ‘ one,  some  one,  any  one/  is  used : 

1.  In  the  Nom.  Sing.  Masc.  = man. 

2.  To  supply  the  missing  cases  of  man,  as  : 

@3  tf)ut  einem  (dat.)  leib,  bon  fetnen  greunben  ju  fcfjeiben. 
One  is  sorry  to  part  from  one’s  friends. 

3.  Before  a substantive,  as  : 

diner  meiner  greunbe  (butt  meinen  greunben), 

One  of  my  friends. 

din(e)3  bon  biefen  Silvern,  One  of  these  books. 

4.  To  represent  a preceding  substantive,  as : 

§aben  ©te  etn  33ud;  ? ga,  id)  fyabe  cin(e)§. 

Have  you  a book  ? Yes,  I have  one. 

Note. — The  e maybe  dropped  in  the  ending  of  the  Nom.  and  Acc.  Neut. 

151.  Seiner  (biefer  Model)  is  the  negative  of  einer,  and 
is  used : 

1.  As  equivalent  to  ntemanb. 

2.  Before  a substantive,  as: 

Seiner  bon  meinen  greunben. 

None  (not  one)  of  my  friends. 

3.  To  represent  a preceding  substantive,  as : 

§aben  ©te  etn  33ud)  ? DIetn,  id)  t>abe  fein(e)§. 

Note. — Like  eiltcv,  it  may  drop  e in  the  Nom.  and  Acc.  Neuter. 


174 


LESSON  XXVII. 


[§§  is*- 


152.  dtnige  (effidje),  indjme,  = 4 some,  a few,  several/  as : 
(Stnige  bon  meinen^reunben,  Some  (a  few)  of  my  friends, 
©ic^rcre  biefer  SBucfyer,  Several  of  these  books. 

153.  Sober,  jebtoeber,  jeglicfyer  (biefer  Model)  or  cut  jebcr, 
etc.  (def.  art.  -f-  adj.  with  mixed  declension)  are  used, 
especially  in  the  Masc.,  for  jebermann,  as : 

SDie  S3iE>eI  iff  eirt  33ud;  fur  Jcbctt. 

((Sin)  jcber  iff  femes  ©ludeS  ©djmieb, 

Every  man  (one)  is  the  architect  (lit.  smith)  of  his  own 
fortune. 

154.  ©ianrfjcr,  4 many  a one,  many  a person  ’ (biefer  Model), 
is  used  to  express  indefinite  plurality,  as : 

®lanif)Cr  benft.  Many  a one  (person)  thinks. 

155.  SBellfjcr  (biefer  Model)  is  used  for  ‘some/  referring 
to  a preceding  substantive,  as : 

£>aben  ©ie  33rot?  i$  I;abe  toeliJjeS. 

156.  For  t>tcl  and  tontig  see  Less.  XXIX,  § 17 6. 

157.  When  the  Engl.  4 anybody,  anyone,  anything/  = 
‘anybody,  etc.,  at  all'  (indefinite  and  general),  they  are 
rendered  by  trgenb  jemanb,  irgcub  einer,  irgcttb  ettoaS,  as  : 

Anybody  (at  all)  will  tell  you,  where  I live, 

Sfgcttb  jemanb  (or  einer)  toirb  3$n en  fagen,  too  id;  toofyne. 
Sd^  bin  mit  irgeitb  ettoaS  jufrieben, 

I am  contented  with  anything  (at  all). 


158.  Strong  Verbs:  fpiitnen  Model. 


Infin. 

Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ.  Model : 

fptnnen 

fpann 

gefponrten 

Engl.  Analogy: 

spin 

span 

(spun) 

(incomplete) 

Ablaut:  too 


strong  verbs  : fyimten  MODEL. 


175 


*59] 


LIST. 

(Note.  — The  Impf.  Subj.  is  also  given,  on  account  of  variations 
occurring.) 


(be)ginnen,  begin 

Begann 

Begonne 

Begonnen 

rinnen  (N.),  flow 

r am 

rdnne 

geronnen 

f$ft>immen  (N.  A.),  swim 

fct;ft>amm 

f fcfytoamme 
1 fd£;tt)iimme 

gefd)toommen 

finnen,  think 

faun 

fanne 

gefonnen 

fpinnen,  spin 

fpann 

( fya nne 
( fyiinne 

gefiponnen 

(ge)toinnen,  win,  gain 

getoann 

^ getnanne 
| getobnne 

getoonnen 

Note.  — Observe  the  subjunctive  forms  with  vowel  of  P.  Part.  -f*  Um- 
laut, instead  of  vowel  of  Impf.  Ind. 


159.  Strong  Verbs:  Ijelfm  Model. 


Infin. 


Pr.  Ind.  2. 3.  Sing. 
Pr.  Imper.2.Sing. 


Impf.  Subj. 


P.  Part. 


Germ.  Model:  fyelfen  fytlft,  fyilf  fyalf  fyiitfe  gefyiilfen 

Engl.  Analogy  : wanting. 

Ablaut:  t i n 5,  Sorit  0 


LIST. 

(Note.  — The  2.  3.  sing.  Pres.  Ind.,  2.  sing.  Imper.,  and  Impf.  Subj.  are 
also  given.) 

Bergen,  hide  Birgft,  birgt,  Birg  Barg  Barge  geBorgen 

^ burst  N’)’  (fctrfteft,  fcirft,  6irft)  barft  geborften 

(ber)berben(N.),  berbirbft,  etc.  berbarb  berbiirbe  berborben 
spoil  (intr.) 

brefcfcen,  thrash  brtfdjeft,  etc.  brSf^e } 9ebro^en 

gelten,  be  worth  giltft,  gilt,  gilt  gait  gcilte  gegolten 


176 

LESSON  XXVII. 

[§  159 

Ijelfeit,  help 

tytlfft,  etc. 

Mf 

bitlfe 

geI;oIfen 

fd;elten,  scold 

fdjnltft,  fdnlt/fdjilt 

fc^alt 

fdEjalte 

gefdftlten 

jterben,  (N.),  die 

ftirbft,  etc. 

ftarb 

ftitrbe 

geftorben 

toerben,  woo 

ftnrbft,  etc. 

toarb 

tourbe 

geftorbett 

toerbett  (N.),  be- 
come 

toirft,  toirb,  toerbe 

f toarb 
l iuurbe 

totirbe 

geftorben 

toerfen,  throw 

toirfft,  etc. 

toarf 

toiirfe 

geftorfen 

Remarks.  — i.  Most  of  these  verbs  have  5 or  ii  in  the 
Impf.  Subj.  instead  of  ii,  which  cannot  be  distinguished  in 
sound  from  the  e of  the  Pres.  Ind. ; thus  fterbe  and  ftarbe 
would  sound  alike. 

2.  SSerberben,  when  trans.,  is  both  strong  and  weak  (tier* 
berbte,  fcerberbt). 

3.  S&erbert  has  toarb  or  tourbe  in  the  sing.;  tourbert  only  in 
the  plur.  (see  § 19). 

4.  The  Imperative  never  has  the  final  -e  in  these  verbs, 
except  fterbe. 

5.  Observe  the  omission  of  (c)t  of  3.  sing.  Pres.  Ind.  in 
the  verbs  with  stem  in  -t,  -b. 


Vocabulary. 


to  be  or  do  (of  health),  fid) 
befinbert 

reflect,  deliberate,  fid;  be* 
finrten 

accomplish,  leifien 
remain  over,  be  left,  ii'brig 
blctbert 

hide,  conceal,  fcerbergett 
requite,  reward,  bergelten 
complete,  finish,  botten'ben 
throw  away,  fteg'fterf en 


run  away,  vanish,  jerrinrtett 
the  conduct,  ba£  33etragen 
poet,  ber  35id)ter 
barley,  bie  ©erfte 
oats,  ber  £>afer 
sailor,  ber  9Jktrofe 
musician,  ber  SJlufifer 
need,  necessity,  bie 
dove,  pigeon,  bie  Saube 
plate,  ber  better 
loss,  ber  SSerlufi'  * 


§159] 


strong  verbs:  fyetfen  model. 


* 77 


embarrassment,  perplexity,  thereto,  baju' 

bie  23erle'genljeit  no  longer,  nicfd  melji? 

wheat,  bet  SB3eisen  as,  toie 

evil,  bbfe 

Idiom:  I like  the  country,  6tn  eitt  $reun&  t)om  Sanfee# 
EXERCISE  XXVII. 

A.  1.  9Ber  gu  biel  rebet,  leiftet  tbenig.  2.  ©erjenige,  toeldier 
ju  ijiel  rebet,  leiftet  menig.  3.  ©ied  firtb  meine  ©djulje,  aOer  jened 
finb  (bie)  $$re(n).  4.  23  er  jebermannd  fyreunb  ift,  ift  niemanbed 
gveunb.  5.  ©n  guter  GIjrift  bergilt  23ofed  mit  ©utem.  6.  @d 
ift  fo  eben  jernanb  fyier  geioefen.  7.  SJBeldied  bon  biefen  Saits 
bern  jte^ert  ©ie  hot,  bad  rote  ober  bad  blaue?  8.  2Ben  fudjft 
bu?  fudje  bie  arme  gamilie,  bereit  Sater  geftorben  ift. 
9.  §aben  ©ie  fd;on  5$ten  SSeijen  gebrofdjen?  SRan  brifd^t  fjeute 
ben  £>afer  unb  bie  ©erfte,  aber  man  toirb  erft  morgen  ben  SBeijen 
brefdjen.  10.  @d  ift  ein  SSertuft  fiir  bad  gauge  Sanb,  toenn  ein 
grower  unb  guter  -JJiann  ftirbt.  11.  ©er  grojje  ^nabe  fd;dmt  fid; 
feineS  Setragend  unb  bedijalb  berbirgt  er  fein  ©efidjt.  12.  „2Bie 
geioonnen,  fo  gerronnen,"  bad  ift,  man  berltert  leicfd,  load  man 
leidjt  getoinnt.  13.  ©ie  ©rbbeeren,  ioelcfye  id)  geftern  faufte,  finb 
berborben.  14.  iBian  l;ilft  gent  einem,  ber  fief)  felbft  £;ilft.  15. 
§iermit  fd^idEe  icf)  3^nen  bad  ©elb,  toeldjed  ©te  fo  freunblid) 
getoefen  finb,  mir  ju  IeiE;en.  16.  ©inb  ©ie  ein  greunb  bom 
©dftibimmen?  !yei$t  nicf)t  meftr,  aber  iefy  fdjtoamm  gern,  aid  id; 
jitnger  tbar.  17.  ©er  UngUidlidje  befann  fid)  lange,  fdjritt 
aber  enblid)  an  ben  9ianb  bed  Sooted  unb  fprang  ind  SKaffer. 
18.  $jft  er  ertrunfen?  9iein,  er  tourbe  bon  ben  2Iiatrofen  gerettet. 

B.  1.  Good  morning,  Mr.  Bell,  how  are  you  to-day?  2. 
Have  you  any  money?  Yes,  to  be  sure,  I have  some,  but  not 
enough  for  my  journey.  3.  Where  is  the  tree  to  which  the 
traveller  tied  his  horse  ? 4.  People  take  cold  easily  when  they 
are  tired.  5.  Schiller  and  Beethoven  were  Germans,  the 


i ;8 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  D. 


[§§  160- 


latter  was  a great  musician,  the  former  a great  poet.  6.  Mr. 
A.  is  a lazy  man;  he  would  not  work  at  all,  if  necessity 
did  not  force  him  to  it.  7.  We  found  the  money  we  lost  a 
week  ago.  8.  Many  a one  begins  what  he  will  never  finish. 
9.  Mary,  my  child,  throw  that  apple  away ; it  is  spoilt.  10. 
Have  you  shot  many  pigeons  ? We  have  shot  only  a few. 
11.  Except  my  brother  and  me  nobody  is  at  home.  12.  The 
mother  is  scolding,  because  her  naughty  child  has  thrown  a 
plate  upon  the  ground.  13.  Where  is  the  River  St.  Lawrence 
broadest?  14.  When  the  children  had  drunk,  the  cat  drank 
the  milk  which  remained  over  (was  left).  15.  The  women 
on  (art)  the  shore  screamed  and  wrung  their  hands,  when  the 
boat  sank  in  which  their  husbands  were.  16.  Has  the  money 
which  was  lost  been  found  ? 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXVII. 

1.  Wann  wird  man  den  Hafer  dreschen  ? 2.  Warum  ver- 

birgt  der  bose  Knabe  sein  Gesicht  ? 3.  Wem  hilft  man  gern  ? 
4.  Sind  Sie  ein  Freund  vom  Jagen  ? 5.  Was  fur  ein  Mann 

ist  Herr  Bell?  6.  Weshalb  schilt  die  Frau? 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  D. 

ON  CERTAIN  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS. 

160.  Adjectives  used  as  Attributes  only. 

The  following  classes  of  adjectives  are  not  used  as  predicates : 

1.  Derivatives  in  -en,  -Cm  (denoting  material),  as;  golben,  of  gold, 
golden;  filbern,  of  silver.  These  are  replaced  in  the  predicate  by  the 
substantive  with  Don,  as : 

SHcfe  Ufyr  ift  toon  ©ilber,  This  watch  is  of  silver. 

2.  Many  in  -ifd)  and  -ltd),  as : biebifd),  thievish;  tierifd),  bestial;  Ijeudp 
ler if d), hypocritical;  tdgtid),  daily ; jdtjrUd),  annual ; tturfhdj,  actual,  real. 

3.  Those  in  -tgfrom  adverbs  of  time  and  place,  as:  Ijeutig,  of  to-day; 
fyieftg,  of  this  place. 


162]  adjectives  used  as  predicates  only.  179 


161.  Adjectives  used  as  Predicates  only. 

The  following  classes  of  adjectives  are  not  used  as  attributes : 

1.  Those  that  are  really  nouns  (though  spelt  with  a small  letter),  such 
as:  angft,  afraid;  feittb,  hostile;  fremtb,  friendly;  leib,  sorry;  not,  needful; 
ttii(3e,  useful ; fdjulb,  guilty. 

2.  The  following  among  others : 

bereit,  ready  gctroft,  confident 

etngebenf,  mindful  gemaljr,  aware 

gar,  cooked,  done  (of  food)  gram,  averse 

gang  nttb  gcibe,  current  (of  money, etc.)  irre,  astray,  wrong 
teilljaft,  partaking 

Note.  — Both  these  classes  of  adjectives  are  incapable  of  comparison  in  the  ordinary 
way,  and  form  the  comparative  and  superlative  by  prefixing  ntcfjr  and  am  Utciften  respec- 
tively, as : 

Qv  ttmrbe  meirtem  23ruber  tmmer  mcljr  grant,  He  grew  more  and  more  averse  to  my 
brother. 

2)a§  ifyat  mir  am  mcifteit  lei&,  I was  most  sorry  for  that  {relative  superl.). 

162.  Remarks  on  certain  Pronouns. 

1.  The  pronouns  Voer,  are  frequently  followed  by  the  demonstrative 
ber  in  the  after  clause,  and  always  so  when  the  latter  (the  seeming  ante- 
cedent) is  in  a different  case  from  that  of  the  relative,  as : 

SBer  l)at,  hem  mirb  gegeben,  To  him  that  hath  shall  be  (is)  given. 

2.  The  neuter  pronouns  c8,  ba§,  It) a 8,  jebe8,  atfe3  are  often  used  in  the 
Nom.  and  Acc.  Sing,  in  reference  to  a number  of  persons  or  things,  espe- 
cially if  of  different  gender,  as: 

banner,  SBeiber,  Uinber,  alle£  fdjrte  itm  §ilfe,  fo  taut  fomtte. 
Men,  women,  children,  all  cried  for  help  as  loud  as  they  could; 
gnil)  iibt  fid),  ein  Sfteifter  mcrbeit  mill, 

Those  practice  early,  who  would  become  masters. 

Note.  — Observe  that  the  verb  is  singular. 

3.  2Ba8  is  sometimes  used  for  marimt?  (‘why?’),  as: 

2Ba8  meinft  bit?  Why  dost  thou  weep? 

4.  The  relative  adverb  mie  (‘as  *)  after  fold)  etn  or  fo  etn  (‘such  a’)  is 
usually  followed  by  a personal  pronoun,  agreeing  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  antecedent,  as : 

©old)  (fo)  eiit  Sftaitn,  (or  ein  SDhnn)  mie  mir  tljit  nie  gefannt  fatten, 
Such  a man  as  we  had  never  known. 

Note.— The  demonstrative  fotcfyorfo  is  often  omitted,  as  indicated  in  the  above  example. 


i8o 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


[§§ 163- 


LESSON  XXVIII. 

NUMERALS:  CARDINALS  AND  ORDINALS.  - STRONG  VERBSi 

tyred) ett  model. 

Numerals. 


163.  Cardinals. 

1.  ein§ ; etn(er),  -c,  — (cS) 

2.  gtoei 

3.  bret 

4.  bier 

5.  fiinf 

6.  fecf)§ 

7.  fieben 

8.  ac^t 

9.  ncuit 

10.  jel;n 

11.  elf 

12.  gtoolf 

13.  bretje^tl 

14.  biergefyn 

15.  fitnfjefm  or  funfjefyn 

16.  fedjjelty 

17.  fleBgc^n 

18.  acfytjelty 

19.  neunjefin 

20.  gnmttjtg 

21.  eitt  unb  glnartgtg 

22.  jltsct  unb  atoanjtg 
30.  breifjig 

40.  bterjtg 

50.  funfjtg  or  fiinfjig 


164. 

Ordinals. 

1st. 

ber  erfte 

2nd. 

tt 

gireite 

3rd. 

tt 

britte 

4th. 

tt 

bierte 

5th. 

rt 

fiinfte 

6th. 

tt 

fcdi^te 

7th. 

tt 

ftebente 

8th. 

tt 

acfite 

9th. 

tt 

neunte 

10th. 

tt 

jefmte 

11th. 

rt 

elfte 

12th. 

rt 

jtbolfte 

13th. 

rt 

breijefmte 

14th. 

tt 

bierge^nte 

15th. 

rt 

funf*  or  fimfjefmte 

16  th. 

tt 

fed^efmte 

17th. 

tt 

fiebjefmte 

18th. 

tt 

acfdjefmte 

19  th. 

tt 

neunjcbnte 

20th. 

tt 

jtoangigfte 

21st. 

tt 

ein  wub  jtoanjtgfte 

22nd. 

tt 

jtoei  unb  ginangigfte 

30th. 

tt 

bretyigfte 

40th. 

tt 

bierjigfte 

50th. 

rt 

funfjigfte  or  fiinf* 

i*OP« 


165]  REMARKS  ON  THE  CARDINAL  NUMERALS. 


1 8 1 


60.  fedfoig 
70.  fieb(en)jtg 
80.  ac^tgig 
90.  neunjtg 

100.  Ifunbert 

101.  fnmbert  (urtb)  ein§ 
123.  Ifunbert  (unb)  brei  unb 

gtoangig 


60th. 

ber  [ed^tgfte 

70th. 

„ fieb(en)gigfte 

80th. 

„ acfdjigfte 

90th. 

„ neunjigfte 

100th. 

„ E>unbertfte 

101st. 

„ fyunbert  unb  erfle 

123rd. 

„ fyunbert  (unb)  brei 

unb  jtoanjigfte 

Cardinals. 

200.  jtoei  Bunbert 
300.  brei  Ijunbert 

1000.  taufenb 

1001.  taufenb  unb  ein§ 

1036.  taufenb  (unb)  fecfy§  unb  breiffig 
1887  { taufen^  (un^)  ac^t  Bunbert  (unb)  fieBen  unb  ad/tjtg 
1 or  acffijefntfyunbert  fieBen  unb  acfytjig 

10,000.  jefm  taufenb 

100,000.  Bunbert  taufenb 

1,000,000.  eine  9Mion' 

2,567,849.  jlnei  SRillionen,  fiinf  Ijunbert  (unb)  fieBen  unb 
fecfigig  taufenb,  ad)t  Bunbert  (unb)  neun  unb 
Uierjig. 

Interrogative  Ordinal:  ber  teietnclfie  ? which  (in  order)  ? 
what  day  of  the  month?  (See  § 166,  3,  Note  2). 


165.  Remarks  on  the  Cardinal  Numerals. 

1.  din  only  is  declined  throughout,  thus  : 

(a)  Before  a substantive  after  the  mein  Model  (§  8),  like 
the  Indefinite  Article,  which  is  the  same  word  un- 
emphasized, as : 

din7  9Jiann,  one  man ; ein  23iann',  a man. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


IS2 


[§  165 


Note.  — The  numeral  etlt  is  sometimes  printed  with  a capital,  or  spaced 
out  (=  Engl,  italics)  to  distinguish  it  from  the  Article,  as  : 

SBir  fyaben  din'  (c  t n)  33ucf),  We  have  one  book. 

SStr  tjabeu  ein  SBud)',  We  have  a book. 

( b ) Used  substantively  (see  also  § 150,  above)  without 
article,  after  biefer  Model  (§  6),  as: 

Gtrtcr  bon  trteirten  greunbert,  One  of  my  friends. 

Unfer  etrtcr.  One  of  us  (of  our  sort). 

(0)  After  an  article  or  other  determinative  word,  like  an 
adjective,  as : 

©er  eine  33ruber,  The  one  brother. 

Sfteirt  etncr  ©cfmb,  (The)  one  of  my  shoes. 

Note.  — With  the  definite  article  it  may  be  used  substantively 
also,  as : 

$er  eine  unb  ber  anbcre,  (The)  one  and  the  other; 
and  even  in  the  plural  (=  some,  one  party),  as : 

^ic  eineit  fasten  bte§,  bie  anbern  jeneS, 

Some  (the  one  party)  said  this,  others  (the  other  party)  that. 
(d)  @irt3  is  the  form  used  in  counting. 

2.  and  ferei  may  have  -er  in  the  Gen.  and  -eit  in  the 
Dat.  when  not  accompanied  by  any  article,  etc.,  as  : 

2fu§  gtoexer  ober  breier  .geug en  3Jtunb  fommt  bie  95?aE>rf>ext, 
Out  of  the  mouth  of  two  or  three  witnesses  cometh 
the  truth. 

SJlart  farm  nidjt  gVueten  §errert  Irienen, 

One  cannot  serve  two  masters. 

Note.  — The  Gen.  -et  is  necessary  to  show  the  case,  but  may  be  re- 
placed by  but  the  Dat.  -cn  before  a substantive  is  rare,  the  -it  of 
the  substantive  sufficiently  showing  the  case. 

3.  Setbc  = ‘both/  refers  to  two  objects  taken  together, 
and  is  declined  like  an  adjective  in  the  Plur. : N.  beibe, 
G.  beiber,  etc.;  bie  beibcn;  nteine  beiben  SBrtiber.  It  often 


REMARKS  ON  THE  NUMERALS. 


§165] 


133 


replaces  gtr>ei  after  determinative  words,  as  in  the  last  example. 
The  neuter  sing,  form  betbc£  is  also  found,  as : 

33etbc§  iff  toafyr,  Both  (things)  are  true. 

Notes.  — 1.  Both  of  us  = tint*  beibe(n)  (we  two). 

2.  * Both  9 as  conjunction  = foh)ol)f,  etc.  (See  Less.  XL.) 

4.  Other  cardinals  are  not  declined  unless  used  substan- 
tively (see  next  section). 

5.  The  numbers  from  13  to  19  are  formed  by  adding  -JcJjtt 
(Engl,  -teen)  to  the  units  (but  fecftjefyn  drops  -f>). 

6.  The  multiples  of  ten  (20 — 90)  add  -jtg  to  the  units, 
gtoanjig,  bretfjig  being  irregular,  and  fedtjig  dropping  -5. 

7.  The  tmits  always  precede  the  tens  in  compound  numbers 
from  21  upwards,  both  being  joined  by  the  conjunction  unb 
‘and  ’ ; hence  25  = fitnf  UU&  gtuangig  (Engl.  ‘ five  and  twenty  ’); 
156  = fyunbert  fed)3  nuts  funfgtg,  etc. 

8.  Humbert  and  2aitfeub  are  generally  used  without  ein  be- 
fore them,  and  the  conjunction  unb  may  be  omitted  after 
them. 

9.  ‘One  by  one,  two  by  two/  etc.  ==  je  einer,  je  Jftei  (or 
je  jtoet  unb  jtoet),  etc. 

10.  The  Cardinals  may  be  used  as  substantives : 

(a)  With  a substantive  understood  (as  simple  numbers 
only),  with  -c  in  Nom.  Acc.,  -ett  in  Dat.,  as : 

Sffle  hiere,  All  fours. 

■JJht  fecfyjcn.  With  [a  coach  and]  six  [horses]. 

(J?)  As  feminine  substantives,  of  the  spots  on  dice,  etc., 
or  of  the  figures  1,  2,  3,  etc.,  see  § 80,  2,  (e),  with 
plur.  in  -etc  as : 

2)ie  (StnS,  the  one-spot,  figure  one,  plur.  ©infctt. 


184 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


[§§  165- 


(<:)  §unbert  and  £cmfenb  are  used  as  collective  sub- 
stantives, declined  after  the  §unb  Model,  § 21,  (b)f 
as : 

$m  erften  $>unbert,  In  the  first  hundred. 

Saufenbe  bon  SJJenfcfyen,  Thousands  of  men. 

( d ) 9JtiHion  is  a fem.  subst.  of  the  weak  declension. 

166.  Remarks  on  Ordinal  Numerals. 

1.  The  Ordinals  are  formed  from  the  Cardinals  by  adding: 
(a)  Up  to  19,  -tc,  except  ber  crfte,  britte,  adf)te. 

( [b ) From  20  upwards,  — fte,  which  in  compound  numbers 
is  added  to  the  last  co7?iponent  only . 

Note — £)er  anbere  is  the  older  ordinal  for  ‘second.* 

2.  The  ordinals  after  proper  names  (of  sovereigns,  etc.)  are 
spelt  with  a capital  letter,  and  must  (with  the  article)  be  de- 
clined throughout,  the  proper  name  being  undeclined,  as : 

$arl  bet  ©rfte,  Charles  the  First. 

©eorg  bc§  3Sierten,  Of  George  the  Fourth,  etc. 

Note.  — The  Roman  Numerals  I.,  II.,  etc.,  after  names  of  sovereigns 
must  always  be  read  as  def.  art.  + ord.  num.  in  the  proper  case.  Thus: 
£etnrid)  IV.  = ®einrid)  ber  $ierte  (Nom.) ; or  §etnrid)  ben  ©ierten 
(Acc.);  but:  ber  £l)roit  §einrid)  IV.  = ber  £f)rcm  §einrid)  bc$  SSievlen 
(Gen.);  untcr  $einrid)  IV.  = unter  §etnrid)  bent  $tcrfcn. 

3.  The  ordinals  are  used  adjectively  before  the  names  of 
the  months,  as : 

£)er  adjtjefynte  Sluguft',  The  18th  [of]  August. 

Sim  gtoei  unb  gmangigften  gum.  On  the  22d  [of]  June. 

Notes. — 1.  The  figures  1,  2,  etc.,  before  the  months  are  to  be  read 
as  ordinals,  thus : 

21m  1.  3anuar  = am  erften  Sannar. 

Toronto,  (b.)  25.(ften)  = Toronto,  ben  (acc.  of  time,  see 

§ 184, 1)  fiiuf  unb  amauaigftcn^rh- 


I&7] 


strong  verbs:  fyrec^en  model. 


I85 


2.  * What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? * 

2)er  tmetrielfie  if!  tjeute  ? or:  hen  nueinetften  babeit  fair  ^eute  ? 

* It  is  the  fifth,* 

@8  if \ Ijeute  her  fiinfte,  or:  Sir  Ijabett  ^eute  hen  fiiufteii. 

107.  Strong  Verbs:  fysterfjen  Model. 

_ Pr.  Ind.  2.3.  Sing.  1 _ _ _ 

Infin.  u T 0 \ Impf.  P.  Part. 

" Imper.  2.  “ j 

f foremen  fpr?d>t,  f'prid;  ftnad;  gefyrocf>cn 

’ 1 ftefden  ftic£;t  fta^l  geftofden 

Engl.  Analogy : speak  wanting  spake  spoken 


Germ.  Models  : ■ 


Ablaut: 


i i,  tc 

LIST  A.  (i,  a,  0.) 


brec^ert  (N.  A.),  break 

6vicf)ft,  etc. 

bradj 

ge&rodictt 

neljmen,  take 

mmjttft,  etc. 

nafttn 

genommett 

(er)fd^retfen  (N.),  be 

erfd;ricfft,  etc. 

erfdiraf 

erfcfyrotfett 

frightened 

fprecfyen,  speak 

fpridjft,  etc. 

fpradj 

gefpvocfyen 

(tecfyen,  sting  (trans.) 

jtidtfi,  etc. 

ftadj 

geftod>en 

treffen,  hit 

triffft,  trifft,  triff 

traf 

getroffen 

Remarks.  — 1.  ©rfcfyrecfen,  to  frighten  (trans.),  is  weak  (er* 
fc^recfte,  erfc^redt). 

2.  Observe  the  dropping  of  § and  doubling  of  m in  nefjmen, 
and  the  single  consonant  in  the  Imperfect  of  erfcfyretfen 
and  treffen. 

list  E He,  a,  o.) 

(The  Imperf.  Subj.  is  also  given.) 

(ge)baren,  bear,  gebierft,  etc.  gebar  gebcire  geboren 

bring  forth 

(be)fefylen,  com-  befiefylfi,  etc.  befall  before  befofylen 

mand 


13 


1 86 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


[§167 


(em^fe^Iett,  re-  empftefylft,  etc.  empfafyl  em^fijfyle  empfoijlen 

IS  «'wi'n 

fame  gefommen 

Remarks.  — 1.  The  simple  verb  fefylen,  to  be  wanting,  to 
make  a mistake,  is  weak  (fefylte,  gefeljft). 

2.  $ommen  drops  one  m in  Impf. 

3.  All  verbs  of  this  Model  (A.  and  B.)  drop  the  final  -e  of 
the  2.  sing.  Imper. 

Vocabulary. 


commend 

ftcfylen,  steal  ftieljlft,  etc.  ftaljl 
Also  : 

fommen  (N.),  f fontmft,  fommt  £ f 
come 


to  add,  abbieren 
arrive  (at),  an'fommen  (in  -f- 
dat.) 

obtain,  get,  befomnten 
divide,  btoibieren 
celebrate,  feiern 
multiply,  multiplicieren 
subtract,  fubtrafyieren 
happen  upon,  meet  with, 
treffen 

care,  attention,  bie  2td^t 
railway-station,  ber  SBafynljof  * 
holidays,  bte  fjerien  (pi.) 
fishing,  ba§  gifdjen 
prison,  ba3  ©efangni3 


hunting,  ba§  ijagen 
James,  ^afob 

mile  (German),  league,  bte 
Rleile 

minute,  bte  -JJftnute 
government,  reign,  bte  Re* 
gierung 

Reformation,  bte  Reformation' 

second  (of  time),  bie  ©efunbe 

voyage,  bie  ©eereife 

far,  ioeit 

about,  ungefcifjr 

twice,  jtoeimal 

as  far  as,  bi3  ju  (dat.) 


Idioms:  1.  He  was  born  twenty-five  years  ago,  (£r  ifl  ©or  futtf  unb 
groanjig  Sabren  geboren. 

J5.  Please  take  another  apple  (i.  e.,  yet  one  more),  Sitte,  ne&* 
men  <©ie  nod)  einest  2lpfd. 

3.  Take  care,  ??el)men  ®ie  fid)  in  Sld)t. 


§16;]  STRONG  VERBS:  fprCC^en  MODEL.  1 8/ 

EXERCISE  XXVIII. 

A.  1.  SBie  alt  finb  ©ie  ? $d)  bin  in  mein  cm  neun  unb  jmans 
gigf ten  gatyre.  2.  ©iefe§  3al)r  befamen  mir  am  acfyt  unb  ^man* 
gigften  ^unt  gerien.  3.  2jeber  SJlonat  aufter  bem  gebruar  fyat 
entmeber  breif$ig  cber  ein  unb  breifcig  Sage.  4.  Sen  bier  unb 
jmanjigften  Rtai  mar  id)  bet  meinern  Rater  auf  33efud>,  benn  an 
biefem  Sage  feiern  mir  ben  ©eburtstag  ber  ^onigin.  5.  $arl  ber 
Grfte  bon  Gnglanb  mar  ber  Rater  $arl  II.  unb  ^a!ob  II.  6.  Sa§ 
mar  eine  fd()lecfyte  Ra$rid)t,  nid)t  mafyr  ? Unfere  SRutter  erfc^raf, 
al§  ©ie  biefelbe  I)orte.  7.  Sen  fiinf  unb  jmanjigften  trafen  mir 
§errn  Rett  auf  bem  RaI)nI)ofe,  gerabe  al3  er  im  Regriffe  mar  ab* 
gureifen.  8.  ber  ©tabt  Sonbon  finb  mel)r  al3  brei  Rlittionett 
Ginmoljner.  9.  Sie  einen  empfal)len  il)m  gu  bleiben,  bie  anbern 
abgureifen.  10.  23ie  meit  ift  e3  bon  fyier  bis  gum  ndd)ften  Sorfe? 
Ungefa^r  fiinf  unb  gmangig  englifd)e  Rtcilen.  11.  Gr  nal)m  bie 
gifd)e  je  gmei  au§  bem  $orbe  unb  legte  biefelben  auf  ben  Sifd;. 
12.  Sa§  Gi3  brid^t,  nef )men  ©ie  fid)  in  2 ld)t.  13.  ^unberte  bon 
5Jlenf<$en  I)aben  mal)renb  be§  GrbbebenS  ba£  Seben  berloren.  14. 
Unter  ber  Regierung  £>einrid)  VIII.  begann  bie  Reformation  in 
Gnglanb.  15.  Rteine  beiben  SSruber  reiften  am  fiinf  unb  gman* 
gigften  $unt  bon  Siber!pool  ab  unb  famen  erft  am  a$tgel)nten  Suit 
in  Duebec  an.  16.  SBann  !ommt  $l)r  ©eburt^tag?  21m  ein 
unb  gmangigften  Robember.  17.  Sie  Regierung  §einrid)  VIII. 
mar  eine  ber  berid)mteften  in  ber  ©efd^id;te  Gnglanb^.  18.  2113 
mir  einen  ©pagiergang  marten,  I)abert  mir  mefyrere  unferer  greunbe 
angetroffen.  19.  Ron  mem  ift  $I)nen  geraten  morben,  eine  ©ee* 
reife  gu  madden?  G3  ift  mir  bon  mefyreren  Strgten  geraten  morben. 

B . 1.  One  general  commands  thousands  (dat.)  of  soldiers. 
2.  Mary  has  broken  her  pen,  but  she  has  taken  Louisa’s.  3. 
The  ice  is  breaking ; take  care,  Fred.  4.  This  is  my  lead- 
pencil,  not  William’s.  5.  You  have  taken  only  one  apple,  please 
take  another.  6.  When  do  we  celebrate  the  Queen’s  Birthday  ? 
On  the  24th  of  May.  7.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day? 


1 38 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


[§§ 157- 


To-day  is  the  31st  of  March.  8.  The  thief  was  thrown  into 
(the)  prison,  because  he  had  stolen  five  hundred  dollars. 
9.  Which  do  you  prefer,  (the)  hunting  or  (the)  fishing? 
I like  both.  10.  A bee  stings,  but  a dog  or  a cat  bites. 
11.  The  days  are  longest  in  the  month  of  June,  and  shortest 
towards  Christmas.  12.  When  our  neighbours  were  at  church, 
a thief  went  (fommen)  into  the  house  and  stole  several  hundred 
dollars.  13.  In  the  year  eighteen  hundred  and  eighty-seven 
Queen  Victoria  celebrated  the  fiftieth  year  of  her  reign.  14. 
The  eldest  son  of  the  Queen  of  England  was  born  the  ninth  of 
November  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  forty-one.  15.  Tell 
me  how  much  thirty-two  and  eighty-eight  make.  16.  There 
are  sixty  seconds  in  a minute,  sixty  minutes  in  an  hour, 
twenty-four  hours  in  a day,  seven  days  in  a week,  four  weeks 
in  a month,  and  twelve  months  in  a year.  17.  Would  you  make 
a voyage  to  Europe  if  you  were  advised  to  do  so  ? 18.  Yes, 

I should  like  very  much  to  make  a voyage  to  Europe. 

Read  in  German:  2 mat  11  iff  22,  3 inert  12  ift  36,  4 mat  8 iff  32,  5 mat 
9 iff  45,  6 mat  7 iff  42,  7X10  ift  70,  8X11  ift  88,  9X12  ift  108,  10X10  ift 
100,  11X11  ift  121,  12X12  ift  144.  Stbbiert  2,342,  25,891  unb  989,346. 
©ubtrafjiert  27,763  bon  31,551.  SD^uttipticiert  591  mit  478.  S)ibibiert 
2,581,640  mit  61. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXVIII. 

1.  Wie  weit  ist  es  von  Hamilton  nach  Toronto  ? 2.  Wann 

sind  die  Tage  am  kurzesten?  3.  Wie  viel  macht  das,  wenn 
man  337  mit  2 multipliciert  ? 4.  Wie  viele  Tage  sind  in  einem 
Jahre?  5.  Wann  bekommt  ihr  Ferien  ? 6.  Wessen  Bleistift 
haben  Sie? 


INDEFINITE  NUMERALS. 


I89 


169] 


LESSON  XXIX. 


INDEFINITE  NUMERALS.  - STRONG  VERBS:  effett  MODEL 


168.  Indefinite  Numerals. 

The  Indefinite  Numerals  are: 


1.  all,  all 

2.  gfltlj,  whole,  all 

3.  jcber,  ) 

4.  jcbhscbcr,  > each  (btefer  Model) 

5.  jcglidjcr,  3 

6.  f'cilt,  none,  not  one 


7.  eiuige, ) 

8.  etlidje,} 

9.  maitdje,  many 

10.  mcfjrcrc,  several 

11.  hie!,  much  (pi.  many) 

12.  toenig,  little  (pi.  few) 

13.  etttiaS,  some  \ 

14.  getutg,  enough  j-  (indeclinable) 

15.  me!jr,  more  ) 

Remark.  — All  these,  except  aK  and  ganj,  are  used  as  In- 
definite Pronouns  (see  Less.  XXVII). 


some,  a few 


169.  1.  si  expresses  number  as  well  as  quantity,  and 
denotes  that  every  individual  part  of  a whole  is  present. 

2.  When  declined,  it  follows  the  biefer  Model,  whether 
used  with  or  without  a substantive,  as  : 

after  Safe ; afte  Slrheit  tear  hergeblicfi ; aff?§  23rot ; 

all  [the]  cheese  ; all  labour  was  useless ; all  [the]  bread. 

3.  Unless  used  substantively,  it  always  precedes  the  deter- 
minative word,  and  then  generally  remains  uninflected  in  the 
sing.,  and  often  in  the  plur.,  as : 


LESSON  XXIX. 


[§§  i59- 


190 

$l£f  mein  ©elb,  All  my  money. 

2111(e)  meine  greunbe,  All  my  friends. 

4.  When  used  substantively  and  preceded  by  a determin- 
ative word,  it  still  follows  the  strong  declension,  as  : 

®iefeg  (bag)  allcg,  All  this  (that). 

Set  bem  aftem.  With  all  that. 

5.  It  is  not  (as  in  English)  followed  by  the  definite  article, 
but  may  be  followed  by  the  demonstrative  ber,  bie,  bag,  as : 

2tlle8  ©elb,  All  [the]  money. 

2fH(eg)  bag  ©elb,  All  that  money. 

2111c  9Jtenj’cf>en,  All  [the]  men. 

2111e  bie  SJlenfc fyen,  All  those  men. 

170.  1.  ©anj  expresses  quantity , not  number,  and  repre- 
sents an  object  as  complete  and  undivided, ’ without  reference 
to  its  parts.  When  therefore  the  Engl.  * all 9 = ‘ whole  ’ it 
must  be  rendered  by  gauj,  not  by  all,  as  : 

I have  been  working  all  (the  whole)  day  long, 

3$  fyabe  ben  ganjeit  ®ag  gearbeitet. 

2.  ©attj  is  declined  like  an  adjective,  and  always  follows 
the  determinative  word,  as  : 

®er  ganjc  ®a g.  The  whole  day. 

9)tetn  ganjeg  ©gentian,  [The]  whole  [of]  my  property. 

3.  Before  names  of  countries  and  places  it  may  remain  un- 
inflected, if  unaccompanied  by  an  article,  etc.,  as : 

All  (the  whole  of)  America  does  not  belong  to  the 
United  States,  ©anj  (or  bag  ganjc)  2tmerifa  gefyori 
nic £)t  ju  ben  SSereinigten  ©taaten.  — But : 

®ie  ganje  ©cfjtoetj,  All  Switzerland. 

171.  1.  ^ebcr  (biefer  Model)  is  used  to  denote  each  indi- 
vidual belonging  to  a whole,  as  : 

3>ebe x 23aum  Ijai  Stfte,  Every  tree  has  branches. 


INDEFINITE  NUMERALS. 


175] 


191 


2.  It  is  sometimes  preceded  by  exit,  and  then  follows  the 
mixed  adjective  declension.  an<^  jeglid^er  are  less 

common  forms,  used  in  the  same  way. 

172.  $ein  is  the  negative  of  ein. 

173.  1.  (Sinige  (plur.,  btefer  Model)  = ‘some,  a few/ 
denotes  a small  number  taken  collectively,  and  is  used  with- 
out article,  as : 

Sinige  33ogel  fonnert  nicfjt  fingert,  Some  birds  cannot 
sing. 

SSor  cintgen  Safyren,  A few  years  ag°- 

2.  It  is  used  in  the  sing,  only  before  names  of  materials  to 
denote  a limited  quantity , as : 

2$  Ijabe  eintgcS  ©elb,  I have  some  money  (but  not 
much). 

3.  mid)t  is  a less  usual  word  with  the  same  meaning  and 
use. 

Note. — (gin  Jmar  4 a pair,  couple  * (with  small  p)  is  also  used  in  the 
sense  of  4 a few,*  the  eiit  being  then  indeclinable,  as : 
eitt  J)aar  Stfyatern,  With  a few  dollars. 

174.  9Kancfjcr  (biefer  Model),  4many(a)/  denotes  indefinite 
plurality,  as : 

Sftandjer  SSoget  f amt  nicbt  fxngen. 

Many  a bird  cannot  sing. 

%$)  fyabe  ntand)c$  Ungtiicf  gebabt, 

I have  had  many  a misfortune. 

SRattifje  Seute  glauben,  Many  people  believe. 

It  may  remain  uninflected,  especially  before  an  adj.,  as : 

•Stancher  gute,  or  nxatxd)  gutcr  9Jtanrt. 

175.  SRcfjtCtC  = c several,  a few/  taken  individually , as: 

SHetjrere  Seute  tourben  frcxnf,  Several  people  became  ilk 


192 


LESSON  XXIX. 


[§§  *76- 


176.  SSicX  and  toemg,  in  the  sing.,  are  inflected  (biefer 
Model)  when  they  denote  number , and  uninflected  when  they 
denote  quantity,  as : 

Sente  nicfyt  fctele#,  fonbern  iiiel,  Do  not  learn  many 
(a  great  number  of)  things,  but  much  (a  large 
quantity ) . 

They  are  usually,  though  not  always,  declined  in  the  plural. 

Note.  — The  Engl.  * little  * ==  ‘ small  * is  rendered  by  fleiit. 

177.  (StttJUS  is  used  before  names  of  material,  etc.,  in 
the  sing.,  like  eintge3  (see  § 173,  2,  above),  of  a s?nall  quan- 
tity, as: 

(Stltw3  23rot,  Some  bread  (but  not  much). 

178.  ©cttttg  may  precede  or  follow  its  substantive,  as: 
©elb  gcttug,  or  geitug  ©elb,  money  enough. 

Note.  — As  adverb,  it  always  follows  its  adjective,  as  : 

£)a§  SBanb  ift  nid)t  tang  gcttltg,  The  ribbon  is  not  long  enough. 

179.  SJlcljr  is  the  comparative  of  btel,  and  is  inde- 
clinable, as : 

$d£)  fxxbe  mcljr  greunbe  ate  er, 

I have  more  friends  than  he. 

180.  The  Engl,  ‘some,  any  * are  generally  omitted  be- 
fore substantives,  unless  a small  quantity  (some,  but  not  much) 
is  denoted  (see  § 157,  above).  In  answer  to  a question,  without 
a substantive,  they  are  rendered  by  eirttge§  (sing.),  etrttge 
(plur.)  or  (sing,  or  plur.),  not  by  ettoa3  (which  = ‘ some- 
thing ’),  as: 

§aben  ©te  ©elb?  3$  etnigeg  (toelcfjeS). 

£abcn  ©te  greunbe?  gd)  l;a£>e  eittige  (toelcfye). 


181]  strong  verbs:  effen  model. 

193 

181.  Strong  Verbs:  effen  Model. 

T Pres.  Ind.  2.  Sing 

Infin.  t ...  & 

' [ Impf. 

P.  Part. 

lmper.  2.  bing. 

) 

Germ.  Model : 

effen  iff  eft,  ifjt,  iff 

ge(g)cffen 

Engl.  Analogy: 

eat  wanting 

ate 

eaten 

(incomplete) 

Ablaut : 

*-  *' 

5 

I 

LIST. 

bitten,  beg,  ask 

bitteft,  bittet,  bitte 

bat 

gebeten 

effen,  eat  (of  man) 

iff  eft,  ifet,  if? 

gegeffen 

freffen,eat(of  beasts)  f riff  eft,  frifjt,  frijj 

gefreffen 

geben,  give 

0i(e)bft,  gi(e)bt,  gi(e)b  gab 

gegeben 

(her)  geffen,  forget 

bergiffeft,  fcergifft,  bets  Dergajj 

Dergeffen 

Sife 

lefen,  gather;  read 

liefeft,  lieft,  lies 

I a§ 

gefefen 

licgen,  lie  down 

liegft,  Uegt,  liegn 

lag 

gelegen 

meffen,  measure 

miff  eft,  mijjt,  miff 

maf 

gemeffett 

(ge)nefen  (N.),  re- 

genefeft,  geneft,  genefe  gena§ 

genefen 

cover  (from  illness) 

(ge)f<$e$en  (N.), 

— - gefdfyiefyt 

0efcf)af> 

gefd?eben 

happen  (impers.) 

fefjerr,  see 

fief) ft,  fieljt,  fief) 

faf? 

gefef>en 

fitjen,  sit 

fifjeft,  fitft,  fitt(e) 

H 

gef  effen 

treten  (N.  A.),  tread  trittft,  tritt,  tritt 

trat 

geireten 

(fr>efen,N.,  obsolete),  — — — 

tear 

getoefen 

to  be 

Observe.  — i.  The  changes  from  jf  to  $$ ; also  that  of 
the  Impf.  is  retained  through  that  whole  tense,  the  vowel  be- 
ing long,  as : fair  afjen,  tdj  afje. 

2.  That  genefert  does  not  change  c into  ic* 


194 


LESSON  XXIX. 


[§  i8i 


3.  The  change  in  fx^ert  of  into  § and  ff. 

4.  That  the  long  e of  the  root  is  changed  into  tC,  the  short 
e into  short  i. 

5.  The  inserted  g in  the  P.  Part,  of  effen  (gegeffen). 

6.  The  doubling  of  t in  2.  sing.,  etc.,  of  treten,  and  omission 
of  final  -f  in  3.  sing,  (tritt) . 

Vocabulary. 


to  experience,  feel,  emlpfxnben 
intend,  contemplate,  fcor'* 

Ijaben 

absence,  bxe  2l6toefenf)eit 
Francis,  granj 
century,  ba§  3al)rl;mn'bert 
cherry,  bxe  $irfd;e 
province,  bte  ^rofcunj' 
romance,  novel,  ber  Ionian' 
swallow,  bxe  ©cfytoalbe 


telegraph,  ber  £elegr a$f 
misfortune,  ba§  Urtglud 
world,  bie  28elt 
pardon,  bie  SSerjet^ung 
thin,  bunn 

almost,  nearly,  bexttafye,  faft 
immediately,  (fo)gleicfy 
lately,  not  long  ago,  neultcfy 
late,  fpat 
while,  toafyrenb 


Idioms:  1.  There  is,  there  was,  etc.  (general  statement),  gicbt,  e8  gab, 
etc.  (obj.  in  acc.  see  Less.  XXXVII). 

2.  To  cut  one’s  hand,  fid)  in  bie  £anb  fd)ndbett  (lit.,  to  cut 
one’s  self  into  the  hand), 

3.  To  beg-  pardon,  uni  23er$eil)uttg  bitten. 

4.  To  speak  to  (with),  fprecbcn  + acc*  person. 


EXERCISE  XXIX. 

A.  1.  ganje  Sanb  em^finbet  ben  SSertuft  eine§  guten  ttnb 
gro§en  9ftanne§.  2.  giebt  fd;bne  33ogel,  ioeld^e  gar  nicf>t  fittgen. 
3.  SBittc,  geben  ©ie  mir  nod;  einen  Staler ; id;  fyabe  nic^t  ©e!b 
genug.  4.  (STeorg  ben  Slpfel,  ben  er  getauft  Ijat,  ober  ben« 
jenigen,  welcfyen  id;  iljm  gegeben  I;abe?  5.  3)er  $rembe  trat  mir 
auf  ben  gufj,  abet  gleic§  bat  er  mid;  um  33erjeiljung.  6.  SBatyrenb 
$5^rer  2ibloefenf;eit  finb  mefyrere  Seute  gefommen,  um  ©ie  ju 


§ iSl J STRONG  VERBS  : effcn  MODEL.  I95 

fprecfien.  7.  ©eorg  fagte  mir  neulicfi,  baft  er  fyritj.  bor  einigeit 
Socmen  gefe^eu  fiabe.  8.  91imm  bicfi  in  2lcf>t,  bag  ©ig,  toorauf 
bu  trittft,  ift  feljr  biinn.  9.  $jcf>  bitte  um  SBerjeifmng,  baft  id)  fo 
f^jat  gefommen  bin.  10.  28enn  bu  meinen  Dnfel  fief)ft,  fo  fage 
ifim,  bitte,  bafi  id^  borfiabe,  ifin  ju  befudfen.  11.  ©g  liegt  ein 
Sioman  bon  ©ir  ©alter  ©cott  auf  bem  3Tif<f)e ; Iefen  ©ie  bens 
felben?  12.  ©ag  ift  gefcfjefien?  ©eirte  Heine  ©cfitoefter  ift  auf 
©lag  getreten  unb  fyat  fief)  in  ben  gmfj  gefcfmitten.  13.  ®iefe§ 
Ungliid  gefcbafi  in  ben  $erien,  unb  fie  genag  fefir  lattgfam,  toeil 
bag©etter  fo  fieif?  toar.  14.  ©ine  ©dftoalbe  mad^tleinen  ©oms 
rner.  15.  ©in  Slier  frifjt  unb  fauft,  aber  ein  9Jten[cf)  ifjt  unb 
trinft.  16.  ®urd)  ben  £elegraf>fien  fybrt  faft  bie  ganje  ©elt  in 
bier  unb  jtoanjig  ©tunben  bon  bem,  toag  in  irgenb  einem  Sanbe 
gefdfiiefit.  17.  2llg  ein  3icicber  au§  feinem  §aufe  iam,  bat  ibn 
ein  2lrmer  um  ein  toenig  ©elb,  aber  er  gab  bem  2frmen  being. 
18.  3)a§  ^Sferb  beg  SReifenben  frafs  ein  toenig  §eu  unb  §afer, 
toafirenb  fein  §err  bag  ©ittaggeffen  im  ©aftfjaufe  afj.  19.  SDag 
$inb  fiat  fdjon  atteg  33rob  unb  gleifcfi  gegeffen,  eg  fiat  audE>  affe 
SRild)  getrunfen,  bie  im  ©lafe  tear.  20.  ©inem  Siigner  ioirb 
nidft  geglaubt,  felbft  toenn  er  bie  ©aljrfieit  fpricfit. 

B.  1.  The  whole  of  England  is  not  so  large  as  the  Pro- 
vince  of  Manitoba.  2.  Henry  VIII.  of  England,  Francis  I., 
of  France,  and  Charles  V.  of  Germany  were  the  greatest 
monarchs  of  the  16th  century.  3.  Where  did  you  find  the 
money  ? It  lay  in  the  grass.  4.  Every  summer  the  birds 
eat  the  cherries  in  our  garden.  5.  The  sick  man  lay  seven 
weeks  in  the  hospital,  but  he  has  now  recovered.  6.  The 
rich  (man)  gave  the  poor  (man), who  sat  before  the  house,  some 
money.  7.  This  youth  has  read  all  the  books  in  the  library 
of  his  father,  but  unfortunately  he  forgets  just  as  fast  (as) 
he  reads.  8.  Napoleon  I.  died  on  the  5th  May  1821 ; he  was 
52  years  old.  9.  Have  you  forgotten  what  I told  you  two 
months  ago  ? 10.  During  the  rain  we  sat  under  a tree  and 


1 96 


LESSON  XXX. 


[§§  18a- 


told  stories.  11.  One  forgets  easily  what  one  reads  too  quickly. 
12.  If  you  have  more  paper  than  you  need,  please  give  me 
some.  13.  Nineteen  hundred  years  ago  the  Romans  pos- 
sessed almost  the  whole  world.  14.  Many  young  people 
read  hundreds  of  novels,  and  forget  after  some  time  almost 
all  they  have  read.  15.  Twenty-five  years  ago  our  neighbour 
possessed  only  a few  hundred  dollars,  but  now  he  is  one  of 
the  richest  men  in  the  city.  16.  Speak  the  truth,  whether  you 
are  believed  or  not. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXIX. 

1.  Giebt  es  in  Amerika  Vogel,  die  nicht  singen?  2.  1st 
jemand  wahrend  meiner  Abwesenheit  gekommen?  3.  Was 
haben  Sie  meinem  Onkel  gesagt,  als  er  hier  war?  4.  Was 
sagen  Sie  vom  Lesen  der  Romane  ? 5.  Welchen  Apfel  iszt 

Georg?  6.  1st  das  Telephon  eine  neue  Erfindung? 


LESSON  XXX. 

DERIVATIVE  NUMERALS.  — TIME,  MEASURE,  DATE.  - STRONG 
VERBS:  jtfjlltgen  MODEL. 

182.  Derivative  Numerals. 

From  the  Cardinal  and  Indefinite  Numerals  are  formed  the 
following  Derivative  Numerals: 

(a)  By  adding  -ntaf,  adverbs  denoting  4 so  many  times/ 
as : etnrnal,  once ; fctcrmal,  four  times ; etnunb* 
jtoanjigmal,  twenty-one  times;  tnancfjmal,  many  a 
time. 

Notes.  — 1.  is  neuter,  hence  }ebe§trta(,  each  time;  and  with 
Xndef.  Numerals  sometimes  adds  as:  t)ielmal(0),  mdjnnalS. 


183] 


DERIVATIVE  NUMERALS. 


I97 


2.  (Sin'ntat  = ‘on  one  (single)  occasion,*  as: 

3d)  Ijabe  il)n  nur  eirnnal  gefeljen,  I have  seen  him  only  once. 

(5inmar  (ein3mal3,  einft)  = ‘once  upon  a time,*  as: 

(53  mar  einmai'  ein  $i3ntg,  etc.  (Grimm.) 

3.  Sftidjt  etn'mal,  ‘not  once,’  as: 

(5r  ift  xticf)t  cin'mat  l)ier  gemefen,  He  has  not  been  here  once. 

Sftidjt  einntar  (or  nidjt  ntal'),  ‘not  even,’  as: 

(5r  ift  nid)t  (ein)mar  l)ier  gemefen,  He  has  not  even  been  here. 

(J?)  By  adding  -jadj  or  fiiltig,  adjectives  denoting  ‘so 
manyfold/  as:  etnfadj,  simple;  gtoeifad)  (^Vuiefad^), 
twofold,  double ; bterfadj  (^fdtttg),  quadruple ; bieU 
fad),  mannidijad),  manifold. 

Note.  — (5infd(tig=  ‘foolish,  silly.’ 

(c)  By  adding  -lei  to  the  gen.  fern.  sing,  or  plur.,  indecli- 
nable adjectives  denoting  ‘of  so  many  kinds/  as: 
einetlei,  of  one  kind ; breietld,  of  three  kinds ; 
bielerlei,  martdjcrlci,  of  many  kinds,  etc. 

Note. — (53  ift  mir  etnerlei  = ‘It  is  (all)  the  same  to  me.’ 

183.  From  the  Ordinals  are  formed  : 

(a)  By  adding  -f,  the  fractional  Numerals,  as : etrt  35rits 
tel  = i;  ba§  SSkvtel,  the  quarter;  bret  ^anjigftel 
= ^ [ 20)  etc. 

Notes.  — 1.  These  are  substantives  formed  from  the  ordinal  + £eit 
(=  part),  and  are  therefore  neuter,  thus : 

2)a3  3)rittcl  = ba3  britte  Seif,  ‘the  third  part,’  etc, 

2.  ‘ Half’  as  substantive  = bte  §iUfte  ; as  adjective  or  adverb  = !jalS, 
which  is  declined  like  gang  (see  § 170,  2),  as : 

3d)  fyctk  bte  meine3  (5igentum3  oerloren, 

I have  lost  half  (of)  my  property. 

$)er  $n abe  mar  fialb  tot,  al3  man  iljn  fanb, 

The  boy  was  half  dead  when  he  was  found. 


1 98 


LESSON  XXX. 


tss  **3' 


galB  SBafljtngton,  or  IjaUie  SBafttngton, 

(The)  half  (of)  Washington. 

or  ba§  l)albe  ^ranfretcfj,  half  France;  but 
Sie  t)ClXbc  @cf)tt)ei$,  half  Switzerland. 

( b ) By  adding  -fjalf),  Mixed  Numbers  with  the  Fraction 
‘half,’ as:  britfe^alfi  =2J  ; bierte^alfi  9Jteilen,  three 
miles  and  a half ; fiinfte^alB  ©Hen,  four  and  a half 
yards. 

Remarks.  — 1.  Observe  that  the  ordinal  is  one  higher  than 
the  cardinal  of  the  Engl,  idiom ; thus  ‘ two  and-a-half  ’ is  a 
number  consisting  of  three  parts,  of  which  the  first  and  second 
parts  are  wholes,  but  the  third  is  only  a half,  hence  brittc* 
lb. 

2.  li  = (not  jtoeitefyalb ; see  § 166,  1,  Note),  as: 

8tnbertl)alb  glafcfyen  (pi.),  A bottle  and  a half. 

3.  These  are  invariable  adjectives. 

(c)  By  adding  -ett£,  ordinal  adverbs  denoting  in  what 
place  or  order,  as : 

er(ten§,  firstly;  gtoeitcns,  secondly;  britteng,  thirdly, 
etc. 


184.  Expressions  of  Time. 

1.  Both  point  and  duration  of  time  are  expressed  by  the 
Accusative  without  a preposition,  as : 

2>en  erften  ^anuar,  (On)  the  first  of  January. 

@r  fam  lenten  Sftontag  an.  He  arrived  last  Monday. 

$3$  toar  lefjte  2Sod)e  Irani,  I was  ill  last  week, 
gdj  tear  einc  ganjc  2Boc£)e  Irani,  I was  ill  (for)  a whole 
week. 

2.  Point  of  time  is  also  expressed  2 


184] 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  TIME. 


199 


(a)  By  the  preposition  ait  with  the  Dat.  (always  contracted 
with  the  article),  of  date , as : 

SKm  erften  ^artuar,  On  the  first  of  January. 

Sint  Sonntag,  On  Sunday. 

Sim  9Jforgen  biefe3  Staged,  On  the  morning  of  this 
day. 

( р ) By  the  Genitive  case,  with  Xd§,  days  of  the  week,  or 
divisions  of  the  day,  when  denoting  indefinite  time 
or  habitual  action,  as  : 

£agc$.  In  the  day  time,  by  day. 

©ortntagS,  On  Sundays. 

(3Dc$)  2l6enb§,  In  the  evening. 

2.  The  Time  of  Day  is  thus  expressed: 

(a)  The  quarters  of  the  hour,  with  reference  to  the 
following  hour  (not  the  past  hour,  as  partly  in 
English),  thus : 

It  is  a quarter  past  twelve  = iff  (ein)  SBiertel  auf 
etn$  (i.  e.,  one  quarter  towards , or  on  the  way  to> 
one). 

It  is  half  past  twelve  = ift  Ijalll  ein§  (i.  e.,  half 
one). 

It  is  a quarter  to  one  = @3  ift  brct  SSiertel  auf  eirt§  (i.  e., 
three  quarters  towards  one). 

( b ) The  minutes  past  by  ttaclj,  as  : @3  ift  jtoanjig  -JJlinuten 
narf)  Jfaei,  ft  is  twenty  minutes  past  two. 

The  minutes  to  by  tun*,  as : ftzfyn  5Diinuten  liar  brei,  ten 
minutes  to  three. 

(с)  at  = urn;  o’clock  = Uljr,  as: 

Um  ein  ttljr,  At  one  o’clock. 


200 


LESSON  XXX.  [§§184^ 

Urn  tin  33iertel  auf  filltf  Ufyr,  At  a quarter  past  four 
o’clock. 

ift  brei  SSiertel  auf  fiirtf  (Ul)r),  It  is  a quarter  to  five 
(o’clock). 

(jat  f eef)£  (Uf;r)  gef^Tagen,  It  has  struck  six  (o’clock). 

Note.  — The  impersonal  Verb  ‘to  be,*  in  expressing  the  time  of  the 
day,  is  always  singular , as  in  English. 


185.  Expressions  of  Quantity. 

1.  A substantive  expressing  Quantity  (Measure,  Weight 
or  Number),  if  Masculine  or  Neuter , retains  the  form  of 
the  singular,  as : 

23ier  unb  jtoanjig  $0$  macfjen  gtoei  gufj,  24  inches  make 
two  feet. 

Stoet  Two  pounds. 

Saufenb  9J?ann,  A thousand  men.  — But: 

gtoet  $lafcf)en  (fern.),  Two  bottles. 

©hen  (fern.),  Twelve  yards. 

2.  The  substantive,  the  quantity  of  which  is  expressed,  is 
generally  put  in  apposition  with  that  expressing  the  quan- 
tity, as : 

gtoei  23uc£)  papier.  Two  quires  of  paper. 

SDreitaufenb  3)lann  ^nfantevie.  Three  thousand  infantry 
soldiers. 

gfftnf  ©Ia§  §3tev,  Five  glasses  of  beer. 

§ft>et  tyaax  (dat.),  With  two  pairs  of  shoes. 

3.  But  if  a determinative  word  precedes  the  substantive 
measured,  etc.,  use  the  Gen.  case,  or  bon  with  Dat.,  as: 

!)abe  fe$S  $funb  btefeS  guten  3ucfer§  (or : ban  biefcm 
guten  gucfer)  gefauft. 


strong  verbs  : fcf^agen  model. 


201 


1 86] 


4.  The  measure  (of  weight,  distance,  etc.)  is  put  in  the 
accusative,  as : 

S)iefer  Slciftift  tft  ttur  eirtcn  3oft  lang. 

This  lead-pencil  is  only  an  inch  long. 

3<f>  babe  erne  ganje  9Jletle  (acc.)  marj'cfner t, 

I have  been  marching  a whole  mile. 

©iefe§  $afet'  ftnegt  ein  ^aI6e§  $furtb  (acc.), 

This  parcel  weighs  half-a-pound. 


186.  Strong  Verbs:  fdjlageit  Model. 


Infin. 

Pr.  Ind.  2. 3.  sing.  Impf. 

P.  Part. 

Germ . Model:  fcblagen 

i fcfclogft,  f^logi 

; fcfylug 

gefifdagen 

Engl.  Analogy : slay 

wanting 

slew 

slain 

(incomplete) 
Ablaut : a 

a 

u 

a 

LIST. 

bcufen  (W.N.  A.),  bake 

badft,  bacft 

buf 

gebaden 

fasten  (N.  A.),  ride  (in 

fafirft,  fafyrt 

fu^r 

gefafyren 

a conveyance),  drive 
graben,  dig 

grcibft,  grcibt 

grub 

gegraben 

Iaben  (W.),  invite ; load  Idbft,  Idbt 

lub 

gelaben 

fd^affen,  create 

fcriaffft,  fcfiafft 

fcfmf 

gefc^affen 

fcfdagen,  strike 

fc^lagft,  fd;Iagt 

fdblug 

gefc^Iagen 

tragen,  carry 

trcigft,  tragt 

trug 

getragen 

toadftfen  (N.),  grow 

toiicfyfeft,  ftmdjft 

t»ucf)§ 

gctoa^fert 

toafcfien,  wash 

hJdfc^eft,  toafcfyt 

hwfcfy 

getnafcfjen 

Also  the  irregular : 
fteljen,  stand 

Mft  (tefjt  | 

■ (ftunb)  > 
. ftattb  ) 

geftattben 

and  the  usually  weak 

: 

fragen,  ask  j 

fragft,  fragt 
fragft,  fragt 

fragte  J 

gefragt 

14 


202 


LESSON  XXX. 


[§  1 86 


Remarks. — i.  53acfen  is  usually  weak  in  the  Impf.  (bacfte), 
but  strong  in  the  P.  Part,  (gebaden).  Observe  also  the  single 
f in  Impf. 

2.  ^afyren  is  conjugated  with  feirt  when  intr.,  with  fyaben 
when  trans. 

3.  ©cfyaffert  ‘to  work’  and  ( v>er) fd^aff en  ‘to  procure,  are 
weak.  Observe  the  single  j in  the  Impf. 

Vocabulary. 


to  set  out,  depart,  leave,  ah'* 
fasten 

rise,  auf  ft  efyen 
invite,  ein'laben 
understand,  fcerfiefyen 
dine,  gu  SRittag  effert 
go  for  a drive,  fyajierenfafyren 
absence,  bie  -H&'toefenljeit 
littlejree,  ba3  Saumd^en 
dozen,  ba3  SDu^'enb 
yard,  bte  (Site 

multiplication-table,  ba§  ©in* 
tnaleinS 

thread,  ber  $aben  * 
driving,  ba3  ftafyven 
driver,  coachman,  ber^uifcfyer 
hole,  ba§  Socfy 
night,  bie 

Idioms:  1.  The  Boston  train,  3) 
2.  What  time  (o’clock) 


minute-hand,  bet  2Rinuten» 
geiger 

pound,  ba§  ipfunb 
post-office,  bie  $oft 
riding,  bag  9ieiten 
sentence,  ber  Sat;  * 
hour-hand,  ber  Stunbenjeiger 
cup,  bie  3Tafje 
tea,  ber  £Ijee 
clock,  watch,  bie  Ufyr 
train,  ber  $ug  * 
two  weeks,  a fortnight,  toier* 
jefm  Stage 
then,  bann 
early,  frith 

slow,  slowly,  langfam 
at  least,  inenigfteng 
first,  first  of  all,  guerft 

8"9  { uad) 

it?  2Bte  met  Unified? 


EXERCISE  XXX. 

A.  1.  ©in  breifacfjer  gaben  bricffi  nicfyt  leidjit.  2.  ®er  $utfcfier 
fafyrt  fo  langfam,  bafj  fair  nicfyt  fcor  brei  93iertel  auf  jtoolf  an* 
Jommen  toerben,  3.  ^n  ber  einen  §alfte  ber  5SeIt  ift  eg  3iug,. 


§ 1 86]  STRONG  VERBS  : f^Iagen  MODEL.  203 

mdbrenb  e§  in  ber  anbern  §alfte  yiatyt  ift.  4.  28a§  giebt  e§  fyeute 
9icue3?  5.  2Be3fyalb  Ijaben  ©ie  mid;  geftern  nid;t  befud;t? 
GrftenS  meil  e§  regnete,  unb  jmeitenS  meil  id;  felbft  93 efudE)  fyatte. 
6.  ©u  fyaft  gut  gelefen,  lies  nod;  einen  ©a£.  7.  2Bie  biel  miegen 
©ie?  %d)  miege  ungefafyr  fyunbert  unb  fimfjig  $funb.  8.  ©cr 
3ug  fommt  um  brei  3SierteI  auf  neun  an  unb  fdfyrt  um  fieben 
SSJtinuten  nad;  gef>n  ab.  9.  §aben  ©ie  Sfyte  UI;r  bei  fid;?  $a, 
aber  bie  fteber  ift  gebrodEjen.  10.  %d)  fyabe  jmei  ©ut$enb  ©lafer 
befteflt,  aber  fie  finb  nod;  nid)t  angefommen.  11.  2Bir  ^aben 
unfere  33ettern  eingelaben,  mafyrenb  ber  $erien  bierjefyn  ©age  bei 
unS  jujubringen.  12.  SBir  effen  im  ©ommer  um  Ijalb  jmei  ju 
SJitttag.  13.  %d)  miirbe  gern  mit  Igfynen  f!pa§ieren  fafyren,  menn 
©ie  mid;  einliiben.  14.  ©er  §unb  berbarg  ben  $no$en  in  ein 
So d),  meld;eS  er  Winter  bem  Sfyfelbautn  grub.  15.  ©ie  SUJagb 
field  friify  (beS)  SSJiorgenS  auf,  mdfcfd  bie  Kleiber  unb  badt  35rot. 
16.  ^ot^ann  ift  ein  fe£>r  einfaltiger  $nabe  ; er  ijat  nod)  nid)t  baS 
(SinmaleinS  gelernt.  17.  2Sie  me!  Ul;r  mar  eS,  alS  ber  9Jtinuten* 
geiger  auf  fed^^  unb  ber  ©tunbenjeiger  jmifcfjen  brei  unb  bier 
ftanb?  18.  ©er  33auer  frug  ben  Sleifenben,  mie  t>iel  ttfyr  eS  fei 
(mare),  unb  biefer  jog  feme  Ufyr  auS  ber  ©afd;e  unb  fagte  ifym,  eS 
fei  fyalb  einS.  19.  Slbbiere  brei  SSiertel,  bier  ©iebentel,  neun 
©reijefyntel  unb  elf  gmanjigftel;  mie  biel  ift  (macfyt)  baS?  20.  ©er 
§unb  mtirbe  ben  Snaben  gleid;  beiften,  menn  berfelbe  i£;n  fcfdiige. 
21.  ©efyen  ©ie  jur  ©efellfdfyaft  ber  $rau  33.?  22.  %d)  bin  nid;t 
eingelaben ; mein  33ruber  murbe  eingelaben,  aber  id;  nid;t. 

B.  1.  In  six  days  God  created  Heaven  and  earth.  2.  The 
patient  drank  two  glasses  of  wine  and  three  cups  of  tea  yester- 
day. 3.  This  silly  boy  has  not  even  understood  what  I said 
to  him.  4.  Here  is  good,  strong  cloth ; it  costs  two  and  a 
half  dollars  a (the)  yard.  5.  This  tree  grows  quickly;  it  is 
at  least  four  times  as  high  as  it  was  three  years  ago.  6.  This 
exercise  is  very  easy;  we  shall  have  finished  (with)  it  in  half 
an  hour.  7.  The  dealer  showed  us  many  kinds  of  ribbon, 


204 


LESSON  XXXI. 


[§1*7 


red,  blue,  yellow,  etc.  8.  Which  do  you  prefer,  (the)  riding 
or  (the)  driving  ? It  is  all  the  same  to  me.  9.  Please  tell 
me  what  time  it  is  ? It  is  exactly  thirteen  minutes  after  eleven. 
10.  It  is  nine  o’clock,  for  the  hour-hand  is  (stands)  at  (auf)  nine 
and  the  minute-hand  at  twelve.  11.  These  three  school-boys 
bought  themselves  a melon,  which  weighed  almost  five 
pounds.  12.  The  coachman  drove  first  to  the  post-office 
and  then  to  the  bank.  13.  Between  April  and  September 
the  little  tree  grew  a foot  and  a half.  14.  Precisely  at  five 
o’clock  the  Boston  train  left,  and  at  9.45  we  arrived.  15. 
Was  this  house  built  before  you  came  here  ? 16.  Add  31/4o, 


1.  Wie  viel  macht  drittehalb,  fiinftehalb  und  neuntehalb? 
2.  Um  wie  viel  Uhr  kommt  der  Zug  von  Boston  an  ? 3.  Was 
sagte  der  Reisende,  als  der  Bauer  ihn  fragte,  wie  viel  Uhr  es 
sei?  4.  Wie  viel  Uhr  ist  es  nach  IhrerUhr?  5.  Wie  viele 
Satze  hast  du  schon  gelesen  ? 6.  Ist  jemand  wahrend  meiner 
Abwesenheit  gekommen  ? 


Adverbs  may  be  arranged  according  to  their  meaning  as 
follows,  with  examples  of  the  simpler  and  more  commonly  oc- 
curing  ones  under  each  class  : 


ORAL  EXERCISE  XXX. 


187. 


LESSON  XXXI. 

ADVERBS. -STRONG  VERBS:  fatten  MODEL. 

Adverbs. 


I.  Time. 


(a)  Past: 

bamal§,  at  that  time 
eben,  just,  just  now 
fle'ftern,  yesterday 


neultcfy,  the  other  day,  lately 
fcor'gefterrt,  the  day  before 


yesterday 
border',  before 


§187] 


ADVERBS. 


205 


(p)  Present: 
f)  eute,  to-day 


mi 

nun,  f 


now 


(c)  Future: 

6alb,  soon 
tyernad^',  afterwards 
morgen,  to-morrow 
nacfyfyer',  afterwards 
nimmer,  nevermore 
ii'bertnorgen,  the  day  after  to- 
morrow 


(d)  Interrogative: 
hmrtn?  when? 


(e)  General 
bann,  then  (past  or  fut.) 
einft,  once  upon  a time  (past) ; 

some  day  (fut.) 
enbltcfy,  at  last 
erft,  only  (not  sooner  than) 
(fo)g[ei$,  at  once,  directly 

inbeffen,  j jn  meanwhile 
unterbeftert, ) 

tmmer,  always,  at  all  times 
je(mal§),  ever,  at  any  time 
nie(mals),  never,  at  no  time 
no$,  still,  yet 
oft(maI§),  often 
f$on,  already 
feltert,  seldom,  rarely 


II.  Place  and  Direction. 


(a)  Demonstrative : 


there,  in  that  place 


ba,  ) 
bafelbft,  i 
(ba)fyin,  thither,  to  that  place 
bort,  there,  in  that  place 
(ba)fyer,  thence,  from  that 
place 

fyier,  here,  in  this  place 
f/ie(r)fyer,  hither,  to  this  place 


(p)  Negative: 
nirgenbS,  nowhere 

(e)  Interrogative  and 
Relative  : 

too,  where,  in  what  place 
toof)in,  whither,  to  what  place 
toober,  whence,  from  what 
place 


(d)  General: 


tr'genbtoo,  anywhere 
xiberaH',  everywhere 


III.  Measure 

au$,  also,  ever 
ettoa,  about,  nearly 


and  Degree. 

beinafye,  ) . , 

fdft  ) nearly,  almost 


206 


LESSON  XXXI. 


[§§  187- 


| wholly, 


altogether 


ganjlidj, 
gar,  at  all,  very 
genug,  enough 
gerabe,  just,  exactly 
fount,  hardly,  scarcely,  no 
sooner 

ttodj,  still,  more 


tiur,  only 
feljr,  very 
fo,  so 

ungefaljr,  about 
itberfyaupt',  generally 
foie?  how? 
gu,  too 

giemlidfy,  tolerably 


IV.  Affirmation. 


ja,  yes ; to  be  sure 
jatuoljl,  certainly 
freiltd),  to  be  sure,  indeed 
fiirtoaljr,  truly,  really 


getmfj,  certainly 
natur'Iid),  of  course 
tnirf tidb,  to  be  sure,  indeed 
gtoar,  it  is  true,  certainly 


netn,  no 


V.  Negation. 

nicfjt,  not 


VI.  Possibility. 

ettoa,  > , to  a £7 r [ cf;  etn  li c£; , probably 

bietteic^t,  } per  aps  tooljl,  perhaps 

VII.  Necessity. 

aUerbingS,  certainly  bureaus,  absolutely,  entirely 

VIII.  Cause. 

bafjer,  1 trarunt,  ) wherefore,  why 

barum,  >-  therefore  hxsfyalb,  j (interrog.  or  rel.) 

beSfjalb,  ) 

Note.  — These  last,  as  well  as  many  of  the  others,  are  also  used  as 
Conjunctions,  See  Less.  XL. 


1 88]  STRONG  VERBS  : fallen  MODEL.  20/ 


188.  Strong  Verbs:  fatten  Model. 

Infin.  Pr.  Ind.  2. 3.  Sing.  Impf.  P.  Part.  , 

(same  as  Inf.) 


Germ . Model : fallen 

fallft,  fallt 

fid 

gefatteit 

Engl.  Analogy : fall 

wanting 

fell 

fallen 

(incomplete) 

Ablaut:  a 

a 

te 

tt 

(Note.  — This  is  only  a seeming  Ablaut ; 

LIST. 

see  § 192,  Rem.  4.) 

blafert,  blow 

blcifeft,  blaft 

Bites 

geblafen 

braten,  roast  (tr.  and  intr.) 

bratft,  brat 

brief 

gebraten 

fallen  (N.),  fall 

fattft,  fallt 

ftel 

gefallen 

fangen,  catch 

fangft,  fangt 

ft(e)ng. 

gefangen 

fyalten,  hold 

ttaltft,  lialt 

§ielt 

gefyalten 

fangen,  hang 

tiangft,  fyangt 

f>i(e)ng 

gefangen 

fatten,  hew 

fyaueft,  Ijaut 

fyieb 

geljauen 

fycif$en,  bid ; be  called 

fyeifjeft,  fjeipt 

f)ie§ 

gefydfcen 

laffen,  let 

laffeft,  Idjjt 

liefc 

gelaffen 

laufen  (N.  A.),  run 

Idufft,  lauft 

lief 

gelaufen 

raten,  advise  (gov.  dat.)  ratft,  rat 

riet 

geraten 

rufen,  call 

rufft,  ruft 

rief 

gerufett 

fcftlafcrt,  sleep 

fc^lafft,  fcfjlaft 

fcf;lief 

gefdjlafen 

ftofsen,  push 

ftojjeft,  ftojjt 

ftie| 

gefto{3en 

Also  the  irregular : 

ge^en  (N.),  go 

gefieft,  gefjt 

0t(O«9 

gegattgen 

Remarks.  — 1.  Observe  in  braten,  fatten,  raten  the  con- 
tracted forms  of  the  3.  sing.  Pres.  Ind. 

2.  §angen  is  the  strong  verb  (fyieng,  gefyangen)  and  is  proper- 
ly intr.  (=  ‘to  be  suspended’);  Ijangen  is  weak  (fyangtc, 
gefydngt)  and  trans.,  but  the  distinction  is  not  strictly  ob- 
served. 


208 


LESSON  XXXI. 


[§  188 


3.  Observe  that  beifjen  and  ftofjen,  having  the  root  vowel 
long,  retain  jj  throughout ; whereas  laffen  varies  according  to 
rule,  thus : icfy  laffe,  gelafjen,  but  er  lajjt,  Iiep,  fair  Kejjen. 


Vocabulary. 


to  begin,  commence,  an'fangen 
receive,  get,  erfjalten 
please,  gefatfen 
leave,  leave  behind,  laffen 
skate,  ©cblitt'fcfmf)  lau'fen 
kick,  strike,  bump,  ftofjen 
cut  down,  um'haucn 
butter,  bie  Gutter 
play-mate,  ber  ©efpiele 
mouse,  bie  3Jlau§  * 


man-of-all-work,  (farm-)  ser- 
vant, ber  $necbt 
beef,  ba§  fJlinbfleifcb 
skate,  ber  ©cfditt'fdmf) 
skating,  ba§  ©cfylitt'fcfmfylaufen 
bacon,  ber  ©pecf 
language,  bie  ©pracfye 
study,  ba€  ©tubium 
last,  preceding,  borig 

2Bfe  T 
SBie  foeiflen  <2ieT 
3d)  beipc  «6emrid). 


Idioms  : 1.  What  is  the  name  of? 

2.  What  is  your  name? 

3.  My  name  is  Henry, 


4.  I think  highly  of  him  (i.  e.,  esteem,  value  him  highly), 
3d)  fialte  otel  t>cn  tbm. 


5.  How  do  you  do?  (How  are  you?)  3Bic  gef)t  3f)iten ? 

6.  He  has  not  been  here  for  a long  time,  <?r  tfl  laitge  nid)t 
i)ier  gctoefcit  (@r  ift  nid)t  lauge  bier  aetoefen  = He  has  not 
been  here  long). 


EXERCISE  XXXI. 

A.  1.  SHU  ©f>ed  fangt  man  SJiaufe.  2.  £)er  $nabe  ftel,  al§ 
er  ©cfdittfcfiul)  lief,  unb  ftiefj  ficf>  ben  $opf  auf§  Si3.  3.  Sin 
fcfdafenber  $ucf)3  fangt  fein  £ufm.  4.  !ym  §erbft  bldft  ber  SBinb 
fait,  unb  pfeift  burdi  ben  SBalb.  5.  Sffen,  trinfen  unb  fcblafen, 
fieifjt  (ift)  ba§  Ieben ! 6.  £;m  SBinter  fcfdaft  man  getbbfmlid)  (anger 
al§  im  ©ommer.  7.  3Jlan  lafjt  jeijt  bie  $enfter  offen,  benn  ba3 
2Better  ift  ttarm  getoorben.  8.  3$  Iaufe  ni<$t  9ern  ©dfdittfcfml), 
aber  meine  ©efpielen  finb  grojje  $reunbe  babon.  9.  ®ie  “Dlagb 
ging  jum  Saben  unb  faufte  brei  ip f unb  £l)ee,  jibei  ipfunb  Gutter, 


§ 1 88]  STRONG  VERBS  I fallen  MODEL.  20g 

jefm  $fttnb  gucfer  unb  jtoet  $lafcfyen  $3ter.  10.  SDort  ftanb  ber 
33aum,  ben  ber  $necfyt  neuli $ umgefyauen  Ijat.  11.  ©agett  ©ie 
mir,  toofyi n ©ie  Dorgeftern  gingen,  al£  idE)  ©ie  in  ber  $onig3ftrafte 
traf.  12.  SDer  ©cfyiiier  liefc  feine  33ucfyer  ju  §>aufe,  aber  er  ift 
gleicfy  nacfy  §>aufe  gelaufen  unb  fyat  biefelbert  gefyolt.  13.  3Sorige 
SBocfye  erfyielt  meine  ©c£;Vuefter  einen  33rief  Don  ifyrer  greunbin ; 
faft  jebe  2Bodje  credit  fie  einen.  14.  $iefelbe  fdjjrieb,  bajj  fie  ben 
ganjen  SBinter  in  SBofton  jubringett  ftmrbe,  toenrt  e§  \i)x  bafelbft 
gefiele.  15.  ®er  2Binb  blie3  ben  £ag  fo  ^eftig,  ba£  ©eorg§  33ater 
ifym  riet,  nidE)t  auf§  SSaffer  ju  gef;cn.  16.  3$  bitte  um  3Ser^ 
^eifyung,  baft  id;  ©ie  fo  lange  attein  gelaffen  fyabe.  17. 
franfe  $inb  toiirbe  beffer  gefd;fafen  fyaben,  toennbie  anbern  ^inber 
toeniger  2arm  gemad;t  fatten.  18.  33or  jtoanjig  ^a^ren  tying  ba§ 
93ilb  meine$  33ater§  an  ber  2Banb  iiber  bem  $amin,  unb  e3  tyangi 
nocty  immer  ba.  19.  23enn  er  nictyt  fo  friity  gegangen  todre,  fo 
^dtte  icty  ityn  jutn  3Jtittag^effen  eingeiaben.  20.  ©uten  9J?orgen, 
grau  Sett ; toie  getyt  e§  Stynen?  21.  @3  getyt  mir  ganj  gut ; foie 
getyt  e£  ^tjrer  gamilie?  22.  $riebricty  II.  Don  ^reuften  tourbe 
griebricty  ber  ©rofte  genannt. 

B . 1.  My  father  speaks  German  almost  as  well  as  English. 
2.  Good  evening,  my  little  friend  ; how  do  you  do  ? 3.  I have 
not  seen  you  for  a long  time.  4.  A cold,  cutting  wind  blew 
through  the  open  window.  5.  When  I was  young,  I liked 
to  skate.  6.  Do  you  like  (to  eat)  beef?  7.  It  was  a quarter 
past  eight  when  the  concert  began.  8.  That  horse  kicks; 
take  care.  9.  At  what  o’clock  will  you  be  at  home  ? I shall 
not  be  at  home  before  half  past  ten.  10.  When  we  were 
going  home,  we  met  our  friends,  who  were  coming  out  of 
church.  11.  What  is  the  name  of  the  long  street,  which  runs 
from  King  Street  towards  (nacty)  the  north  ? 12.  My  friend,  of 
whom  I thought  so  highly,  died  in  his  nineteenth  year.  13.  In 
September  we  began  to  learn  German,  and  the  study  of  that 
language  pleases  us  ver^much.  14.  A lost  child  was  crying 


210 


LESSON  XXXII. 


[§i3  o 


upon  the  street,  and  calling  after  its  mother.  15.  Some  one 
asked  it  what  its  name  was.  16.  The  poor  child  answered 
that  its  name  was  William,  and  that  it  lived  in  Frederick- 
Street.  17.  I wrote  to  my  cousin  a month  ago,  but  I think 
he  is  angry,  for  the  letter  has  not  yet  been  answered. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXI. 

1.  Was  ist  geschehen,  wahrend  die  Knaben  Schlittschuh 
liefen  ? 2.  Weshalb  sind  diese  Fenster  often  gelassen  worden? 
3.  Was  kaufte  die  Magd  auf  dem  Markte  ? 4.  Weshalb  ist 
der  Schuler  so  schnell  nach  Hause  gelaufen  ? 5.  Wann  haben 
Sie  Nachricht  von  Ihrem  Bruder  erhalten  ? 6.  Sprechen 

Sie  Deutsch  ? 


LESSON  XXXII. 

ADVERBS  (continued) FORMATION  AND  COMPARISON.  — 
TABLE  OF  STRONG  VERBS  AND  GENERAL  REMARKS 
ON  THE  SAME. 

189.  Formation  of  Adverbs, 

i.  From  Adjectives  (including  most  adverbs  of  manner): 
(a)  Most  adjectives  may  be  used  without  change  as 
adverbs,  as  : 

Iduft  fcfyneff.  He  runs  quickly. 

(3)  By  adding  Aid)  (Engl,  -ly),  sometimes  with  Um- 
laut, as  : 

of  course,  to  be  sure  neulirf),  lately,  the  other  day 
gi injM),  entirely  hardly,  scarcely 

fiirjlitfj,  recently 

Also  to  participles,  as : 
fyoffentlidj,  it  is  to  be  hoped 


Voiff entlidj,  knowingly 


§189] 


FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS. 


211 


(c)  By  adding  -littgS,  as  : 

blinblingS,  blindly 

(i d ) By  adding  -S,  -CttS,  as  : 

cmber§,  otherwise  linfS,  to  (on)  the  left 

bereitS,  already  recfytS,  to  (on)  the  right 

befonb^rS,  especially  tibrigcttS,  moreover 

Also  to  participles,  as  : 

eilenbS,  hastily 


2.  From  Substantives , by  the  use  of  the  genitive  case 
(sometimes  with  article),  to  express : 


(a)  Time , as  : 

abenbS  (or  beS  SCbenbS),  in  the 
evening 

morgens  (or  beS  -JJlorgenS),  in 
the  morning 

(b)  Manner,  as: 
flugS,  in  haste 


ciuftcn,  ) outside,  out  of 
brau£en, ) doors 

innett,  ) within,  in-doors 
brtnncn, ) 
fyinten,  behind 


nadEfiS  (or  beS  9tad&tS),  by 
night  (anomalous,  SJiacfyi 
being  fern.) 

atifangS,  in  the  beginning 

teilS,  in  part 

sometimes  with  b(a)r- 

born(e),  before 
obett,  above 
imten,  below 
brubeit,  over  there 


3.  From  Prepositions , by  adding  -eit, 
prefixed,  as : 


Note.  — Prepositions  in  composition  with  verbs  are  really  adverbs 
(also  the  particles  ab,  eiit,  entpor,  meg,  guriicf). 

4.  By  combination . For  these  see  Part  III. 


212 


LESSON  XXXII. 


t§5 190- 


190.  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 


1.  Some  adverbs  are  compared,  as: 


balb,  ) 

„ Y soon 
ef>e,  j 

oft,  often 

gem,  willingly 

well 


efyer 

after 

Heber 

beffer 


am  efyeften 
am  Hfteften 

am  liebften  (< different  root) 
am  befien  ( “ “ ) 


2.  Adjectives  are  used  as  adverbs  in  the  comparative , as 
in  the  positive,  without  change,  as : 

@r  Ifiuft  fdjncffcr  al§  fetn  ©ruber, 

He  runs  more  quickly  than  his  brother. 

3.  In  the  superlative  degree,  the  form  with  ant  is  used  for 
the  relative  superlative  (see  §§  127,  2,  and  128),  as: 

6r  Ifiuft  ant  fdjncllften  bon  alien, 

He  runs  most  quickly  of  all. 

4.  The  absolute  superlative  (see  § 127,  2)  is  usually  formed 
by  prefixing  an  adverb  of  eminence  (such  as  fefyr,  fyocfyft. 
Suffer  ft,  etc.),  as: 

6r  febreibt  Suffer  ft  fcfjon. 

He  writes  most  (i.  e.,  very)  beautifully. 

5.  Adverbs  from  adjectives  in  -ig,  -Hfij,  -fain  use  the  un- 
inflected form  for  the  superlative  absolute , as : 

@r  Ififjt  freunblirfjft  grfifjen. 

He  desires  to  be  most  kindly  remembered. 

Also  a few  monosyllables,  as:  langft,  long  ago;  tjbd) ft, 
most  highly. 

6.  The  superlative  absolute  may  also  be  expressed  by  auf 
fea§  (auf$)  prefixed  to  the  superlative  adjective,  to  express 
the  highest  possible  degree , as  : 


TABLE  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 


213 


X92J 


@r  Beforgt  feme  ©cfcfmfte  auf  tm§  (auf§)  ©etotffenfyafteflc. 
He  attends  to  his  business  in  the  most  conscientious 
manner  (possible). 

7.  A few  superlative  adverbs  end  in  -ett£,  with  special 
meanings,  as : 

at  most 

meiftcnS,  for  the  most  part 
toenigftcuS,  at  least 
ndd)ftcn§,  shortly 

Also  the  ordinal  adverbs,  erfien§,  etc.,  see  § 183,  (r). 

191.  Position  of  Adverbs. 

Adverbs  generally  precede  the  word  they  modify  (except 
genug,  see  § 178,  Note). 

For  further  particulars  as  to  their  position  in  the  sentence, 
see  § 45,  Rule  5. 

192.  Table  of  Classification  of  Strong  Verbs. 


German 

Model. 

English 

Analogy. 

Ablaut. 

Class. 

Div. 

Infin. 

Impf. 

P.Part. 

2. 3.  sing. 
Pr.Itjd. 
2.s.Imp. 

Lesson. 

M 

a 

beifteit 

bite 

ei 

t 

t 



XXII. 

b 

bleibett 

(wanting) 

ei 

te 

te 

— 

XXIII. 

II  \ 

a 

fcf)iej3cn 

shoot 

ic,etc. 

u 

0 

d 

— 

XXIV. 

b 

fricrcu 

freeze 

ie,etc. 

0 

0 

— 

XXV. 

/ 

a 

fingen 

sing 

f 

0 

a 

it 

— 

XXVI. 

m.) 

b 

c 

fpinncn 

belfett 

spin 

(wanting) 

t 

c 

a 

a 

0 

0 

t 

jxxvn. 

IV. 

— 

fpredbeit 

speak 

e,  etc. 

a 

0 

t,  te 

XXVIII. 

V. 

— 

effen 

eat 

e,  etc. 

a 

e 

htc 

XXIX. 

VI. 

— 

fcfjlageu 

slay 

a 

u 

a 

Umlaut 

XXX. 

VII. 

— 

fallen 

fall 

various 

te 

same  as 

Umlaut 

XXXI. 

Infin. 

214 


LESSON  XXXII. 


[§§  192- 


Remarks.  — i.  The  Umlaut  of  classes  VI.,  VII.  does  not 
occur  in  the  Imperative. 

2.  The  varying  vowels  of  the  Imperf.  Subj.  are  given  in 
the  lists,  where  necessary. 

3.  The  English  Analogies  printed  in  Italics  are  incomplete. 

4.  The  vowel-change  of  class  VII.  is  not  an  Ablaut, 
but  the  result  of  reduplication. 

5.  The  lists  of  the  various  classes  contain  only  the  verbs  of 
common  occurrence  ; all  others  will  be  found  in  App.  L. 

193.  Distinguish  between  the  verbs  of  the  following 


groups : 

{bitten,  beg,  ask  bat  gebetcn 

beten,  pray  (intr.)  betefc  gebeiet 

bicien,  bid,  offer  bot  Q^bottn 

!liegen,  lie  (be  recumbent,  intr.)  lag  gelegcu 

legen,  lay  (trans.)  legtc  gelegt 

liigen,  lie,  tell  a falsehood  lag  gelagen 

!jicfyen,  pull  (trans.),  move  (intr.)  jag  gejagen 

jetfyen,  accuse  jiel)  gejic^en 

jeigen,  show  jeigte  gejetgt 

194.  Remember  the  irregularities  of : 


effen  (P.  Part,  gegeffen)  fietjen,  ftaitb  (or  ftunb),  ge* 

fjauen  (Impf.  fyiei)  ftauben 

geijen,  ging,  gegangen  jieljett,  jog,  gejogcn 

Also  the  double  forms  in  the  Impf.  of : 
fyeben  (fyttb,  fyob)  fcfytoorm  (fcfyhmr,  fcfttoor) 

Note.  — There  are  a few  strong  P.  Parts,  from  verbs  now  otherwise 
weak,  as:  gentafylen,  from  matjlen,  to  grind  (Impf.  mal)ftc) ; gefal$en, 
from  fallen,  to  salt  (Impf.  fatgte) ; gefpalten,  from  fpaftcit,  to  split  (Impf. 
(paltetc) ; also  some  strong  participles  used  only  as  adjectives,  viz.: 


194]  GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  STRONG  VERBS. 


215 


erfyabett  (from  erbeben),  exalted,  sublime 
befcfjeiben  ( “ befc^eiben),  modest 
tteurorren  ( “ oertoirren),  confused 


Vocabulary. 


to  wind  up  (a  clock,  etc.), 
aufjiefyen 

pass  (an  examination),  be* 

ftefyen 

greet,  salute,  griij$en 
go  (or  be)  too  slow  (of  a 
clock,  etc.),  nad/gel;en 
run  after,  nacfj'laufen  (-J-  dat.) 
cry,  rufen 

go  (or  be)  too  fast  (of  a 
clock,  etc.),  bo rgefyen 
command,  ber  33efcf>I 
visit,  visitors,  ber  23efudf) 


examination,  ba§  @£Ctmen 
kitchen,  bie  $it<f)e 
place,  spot,  bie  ©telle 
employed,  busy,  befcfydftigt 
then  (conj.),  benrt 
hungry,  fyungrig 
left,  linl 
right,  recf)t 
salt  (adj.),  gefaljen 
in  spite  of,  troi$  (+gen.) 
improbable,  untoaljrfcfyeinlicfy 
like,  nrie 


Idioms:  1.  I saw  your  friend  to-day ; lie  wishes  to  be  remembered 
to  you,  3d)  I)abc  l)cute  Sbrett  ftreunb  gefefyen;  cr  lafit 
gruften. 

S.  How  do  you  like  Boston?  2Bie  gefaftt  e$  3l)«cn  in  Soflon? 


EXERCISE  XXXII. 

A . 1.  ©el)t  $$re  Ufyr  Oor,  ober  gebi  fie  wad)?  2 . ©ie  gefyt 
gcutj  rtddig.  3.  §aben  ©ie  ttfyr  aufgejogen?  4.  ©n 
fleine$  2Jidbd)en  fragte,  toie  Oiel  HI) r e§  fei.  5.  ©n  §err  jog 
feine  Ul)r  au§  ber  Shtfcfye  unb  jeigte  fie  bem  fitnbe  mit  ben 
SBorten:  „©age  bu  mir  felbft,  ioie  Oiel  Uf)r  e§  iff."  6.  2Bo  finb 
beine  ©cfytoeftern?  SUtarie  ift  oben  in  ber  93ibIiot£>eJ  unb  ©opI)ie 
ift  un ten  in  ber  JUicfye.  7.  2(nfang§  tool)nten  loir  nid)t  gern  in 
biefer  ©trafte,  aber  jeijt  gefdllt  un3  biefelbe  ganj  gut.  8.  !gd) 
glaube,  loir  loerben  einen  f)ei$en  ©ornmer  f >aben;  ioa§  meinen 
©ie?  9.  S5ie  meiften  Seute  efjen  lieber  frifd;e£  gleifcfy  ai$  ge* 


2l6 


LESSON  XXXII. 


[§§  194- 


fafjeneg.  10.  £rot$  beg  33efel;lg  beg  Kottigg  Betctc  Mantel  jeben 
£ag  breimal.  11.  9Jleine  SEante,  bie  in  Berlin  tooljnt  unb  beren 
33 ruber  ©ie  fennen,  ift  fel;r  franf.  12.  ©riifjen  ©ie  freunblidjft 
Sfyre  ©Item  fiir  mi$,  toenn  ©ie  nad;  §aufe  fommett.  13.  §offent» 
Iicf>  toirb  $tif3  fein  Gjamen  gut  befteben,  benn  er  bat  aufg  getoiffen* 
tyaftefte  ftubiert.  14.  ©r  toirb  eg  fcbtoerlicfy  befteben,  ba  er  crft 
feit  jtoei  ^aijreit  in  ber  ©djule  ift.  15.  S)er  liigt,  toefcber 
toiffentlicb  eine  Untoafjr^eit  fagt.  16.  %d)  effe  gem  gebrateneg 
Stinbffeifcb,  befonberg  toenn  id;  recbt  ljungrig  bin.  17.  9iecbtg 
bon  ber  ©dntle  fte£;t  eine  5tircf>er  finfg  ftei)t  ber  9Jiarft.  18.  2Bir 
ftaben  lieber  abenbg  S3efucb  alg  morgeng,  benn  morgeng  finb  toir 
getoofntlic^  befcbaftigt.  19.  ®iefeg  $inb  toirb  nacbfteng  franf 
toerben,  benn  eg  £?at  feit  brei  SEagen  faft  gar  nicbtg  gegeffen.  20. 
©g  ftanb  friiber  eine  $ird;e  auf  ber  ©teffe  too  toir  Jefd  finb,  aber 
fie  ift  fd;on  langft  fcerfcbtounben.  21.  33on  toem  tourbe  bie 
$ird?e  gebaut,  toobon  ©ie  fpred;en  ? 22.  $cb  toeiff  eg  nicfit,  eg  ift 
mir  nie  gefagt  toorben. 

B.  1.  Please  show  me  the  way  to  the  post-office.  2.  If 
George  is  up-stairs,  tell  him  that  I am  down-stairs.  3. 1 do  not 
like  London ; I prefer  to  live  in  a smaller  city.  4.  The  pen 
still  lies  on  the  book  upon  which  I laid  it.  5.  Please  tell  me 
who  lives  over  the  way.  6.  This  boy  has  been  stung  by  a 
bee.  7.  Of  all  animals  the  horse  runs  quickest.  8.  Give 
me  what  you  have  in  your  (the)  left  hand.  9.  Lessing  died 
on  the  fifteenth  of  February  1781.  10.  The  soldiers  ran 

blindly  into  the  battle  and  fought  like  lions.  11.  The  train 
for  (nad;)  Montreal  leaves  (ab'fafyren)  at  twelve  o’clock  at 
night,  and  arrives  in  Montreal  at  ten  o’clock  in  the  morning. 
12.  A little  beggar  ran  after  a gentleman,  and  asked  him  for 
some  money.  13.  ‘My  father  is  dead,’  cried  he,  ‘my  mother 
is  dead,  and  all  her  children  are  dead ! ’ 14.  ‘ Who  are  you 
then?’  asked  the  gentleman.  15.  What  answer  was  given  to 
the  beggar  by  the  gentleman,  when  he  was  asked  for  money? 


I9jl  idiomatic  uses  of  adverbs.  217 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXII. 

1.  Was  wiirden  Sie  sagen,  wenn  ich  Sie  fragte,  wie  viel 
Uhr  es  sei?  2.  Gefallt  Ihnen  die  Strasze,  worin  Sie  jetzt 
wohnen  ? 3.  Hat  Fritz  sein  Examen  gut  bestanden  ? 4.  Wo 

ist  meine  Feder?  5.  Was  fur  Sprachen  haben  Sie  studiert? 
6.  Glauben  Sie,  dasz  der  Herr  dem  Bettler  etwas  ge- 
geben  hat  ? 


LESSON  XXXIII. 

ADVERBS  (continued):  IDIOMS.  - IRRECULAR  STRONC  VERBS. 

195.  Idiomatic  Uses  of  Certain  Adverbs. 

1.  tut  it,  well, 
fllutt,  e§  iff  mtr  etrterlei. 

Well  (why),  it  is  all  the  same  to  me. 

Note.  — 91un  is  here  really  an  interjection,  and  hence  does  not  throw 
the  subject  after  the  verb. 

2.  ebcn,  just,  exactly, 
iff  elicit  berfelbe  9Jlann, 

That  is  the  very  (exactly  the)  same  man. 

SBir  ftrtb  (fo)cfictt  angefommen,  We  have  just  arrived. 
£>a3  f arm  man  elicit  nicfyt  fagen,  One  cannot  exactly  say 
that. 

3.  gem,  Ucber,  ant  liebften. 
effe  Sifd),  1 am  fond  of  (eating)  fish, 
effe  liebcr  aU  fylexfd^,  I prefer  (eating)  fish  to 
meat. 

6r  toiirbe  e§  gem  tfmn,  He  would  be  glad  to  do  it, 
would  do  it  with  pleasure. 

SEBelcfye  ©pra$e  fjircdjcn  ©ie  am  Itebfien? 

Which  language  do  you  prefer  (speaking)? 


218 


LESSON  XXXIII. 


f§*95 

4.  etff,  first,  only,  not  before,  etc. 

SJlart  mufe  crft  benfen,  bann  fyrecfyen, 

One  must  think  first  and  then  speak. 

9Jfetn  SSruber  toirb  crfi  morgen  fommen. 

My  brother  will  not  come  before  to-morrow. 

2Bir  fatten  erfi  jtoet  9Jletlen  marfcfyiert, 

We  had  only  marched  two  miles. 

SJietn  Sruber  iff  erft  jtoet  ^afyre  alt. 

My  brother  is  only  (not  more  than)  two  years  old. 

5.  Sticrft,  first  of  all;  for  the  first  time. 

SiefeS  ©djiff  iff  jucrfl  (pox  alien  anbern)  im  £afen  ange* 
fommen.  This  ship  arrived  in  the  harbour  first 
(i.  e.,  before  any  other). 

%(f)  toerbe  jucrft  (or  erft)  jum  ©$neiber,  bann  jum  S8u<^)= 
fjanbler  gefyen,  I shall  go  first  (of  all)  to  the  tailor’s, 
then  to  the  bookseller’s. 

Qtf)  fya&e  iljn  geftern  jucrft  (sum  erften  2JtaI)  gefeben,  I 
saw  him  for  the  first  time  yesterday. 

Note. — guerfl  refers  to  //ff^only,  as  above;  erjleit#  = ‘firstly,  in  the 
first  place,’  refers  to  order  only,  as  in  enumerations,  thus : 

3cf)  founte  nid)t  fommen,  erfletiS,  meil  e§  regnete,  jtoeitettS,  met! 
id)  fvanf  mar,  I could  not  come,  first  (in  the  first  place)  be- 
cause it  rained,  secondly,  because  I was  ill. 

6.  fcftoit,  already,  as  early  as,  etc. 

©inb  ©te  fdjmt  ba?  Are  you  there  already? 

3f t %\jX  Sruber  fdjmt  in  $ranfrei d)  gemefen? 

Has  your  brother  ever  been  in  France  ? 

$cf)  bin  fcljon  brei  Sage  in  ber  ©tabt, 

I have  been  in  the  city  for  the  last  three  days. 

®a$  ©d&iff  iff  frfjon  geftern  angefommen. 

The  ship  arrived  (as  early  as)  yesterday. 


§195]  IDIOMATIC  USES  OF  ADVERBS*  219 

@r  tmrb  fdjon  fommen,  He  will  be  sure  to  come  (he 
will  come,  no  doubt). 

Note.  — ©d)on  is  often,  as  in  the  fourth  of  the  above  sentences,  to  be 
left  untranslated  in  English. 

7.  nocf),  yet,  still,  more. 

(a)  Of  Time: 

©tub  ©ie  nod)  I)ier?  Are  you  still  here? 

bin  nod)  nie  in  ®eutfdjlcmb  g etoefen, 

I have  never  yet  been  in  Germany. 

@r  mar  nod)  bor  einer  ©tunbe  fyier. 

He  was  here  only  an  hour  ago. 

Jlodj  fyeute,  Even  to-day  (while  it  is  yet  to-day,  not 
later  than  to-day). 

Note.  — Observe  that  nod)  precedes  the  negatives  nie,  nid)t,  etc. 

(b)  Of  Number : 

9lod)  erne  Staffe  £l)ee,  Another  cup  of  tea. 

91odj  Jtoei,  Two  more. 

9!od)  (ein)mal  fo  biel.  As  much  again. 

8.  bod),  yet,  after  all. 

(a)  Adversative  : 

Gr  toirb  bod)'  fommen,  He  will  come  after  all  (em- 
phasis on  bod)). 

Gr  toirb  bod)  fommen',  He  will  come,  I hope  (emphasis 
on  fommen). 

igabe  i e§  3$nen  bod)  gefagt ! I told  you  so  (did  I not 
tell  you  so  ?). 

Note.  — Observe  that  in  the  last  example  the  verb  is  at  the  beginning 
of  the  principal  sentence. 

(b)  With  Imperatives  : 

fommen  ©ie  bo$  fyeretn.  Pray  come  in  (j urgent ). 


220 


LESSON  XXXIII. 


[§§  135- 


(c)  In  answer  to  a negative  question  or  statement: 

£aben  ©ie  il )n  ttt djt  gefel)en?  (^a),  bodj. 

Have  you  not  seen  him?  Yes,  I have. 

$d)  I)abe  e§  nic^i  getfyan.  ©ie  I)aben  e£  bod)  getl)an. 

I did  not  do  it.  Yes,  you  did. 

(For  bo$  and  nod)  as  Conjunctions,  see  Less.  XL.) 

Note.  — 2)od)  gives  an  affirmative  answer,  where  a negative  one  is 
expected. 

9.  aud),  also,  even,  etc. 

Sludj  fein  SSciter  tear  gegen  il)n,  Even  his  father  was 
against  him. 

SJtein  33ruber  tear  nid )t  miibe,  unb  \<fy  ft>ar  audj  miibe. 

My  brother  was  not  tired,  and  I was  not  tired  either. 

§aben  ©ie  aud)  bebacbt',  fr>a3  ©ie  fagen,  Are  you  sure 
you  have  considered,  what  you  say  ? (emphasis  on 
bebacfyt). 

10.  mo  1)1,  indeed,  etc. 

Gr  leugnet  e§  tootyl,  aber  e§  ift  bo$  toabr,  He  denies  it 
indeed  (to  be  sure)  but  yet  it  is  true. 

©ie  finb  tooljl  ein  grentber?  I suppose  (presume)  you 
are  a stranger  (no  doubt  you  are,  etc.). 

Note.  — @ut,  not  n>oi)b  is  the  adv.  of  the  adj.  gut,  good,  when  modi- 
fying a transitive  verb. 

11.  id,  yes,  to  be  sure,  etc. 

£I)un  ©ie  e§  ja',  Be  sure  to  do  it,  do  it  by  all  means 
(emphasis  on  ja). 

Gr  ift  ja  mein  33ater',  He  is  my  father,  you  know  (em- 
phasis on  SSater). 

12.  nur. 

(With  the  Imperative.) 

JKommen  ©ie  nur  herein.  Just  come  in  (reassuringly). 


IRREGULAR  STRONG  VERBS. 


221 


196] 

196.  Irregular  Strong  Verbs. 

I.  2rf)un,  to  do,  Impf.  tljat,  P.  Part,  getbatt. 

like  Engl,  ‘did,’  is  a relic  of  the  old  Impf.  by  re- 
duplication, the  old  form  being  tc-ta,  i.  e.,  the  stem  fa-  with 
reduplicating  syll.  te-  prefixed,  then  tc-te,  fct,  tfjat.  3:1 >un 
rejects  c of  the  termination  throughout,  except  in  1.  Sing. 
Pres.  Ind.,  and  in  the  Pres.  Subj. 


II.  Imperfect-Present  Verbs. 


In  fin. 

totffen,  know 
biirfen,  dare 
fiinnen,  can 
magen,  may 
miiffen,  must 
fallen,  shall 


Pres.  Ind.  Pres.  Imperfect 
1.  Sing.  i.Plur.  Subj.  Ind.  Subj.  * ART* 

toeig  tuiffen  toiffe  tougte  toiigte  geftmgt 

barf  biirfen  biirfe  burfte  biirfte  geburft 

fann  fiinnen  liinne  fannte  fannte  gefonnt 

mag  miigen  miige  marf)fc  madE )te  gemadE)t 

mug  miiffen  miiffe  mugte  mitgte  gemugt 

fall  fatten  fatte  fattie  fattte  gefollt 


III.  SBotten,  will,  Pres.  Ind.  1.  Sing,  tottt,  1.  Plur.  fatten. 
Pres.  Subj.  toatte,  Impf.  Ind.  toattte,  Subj.  tuattte,  P.  Part, 
getoatlt. 

E.emarks.  — 1.  Observe  the  following  peculiarities  in  the 
verbs  under  II.  and  III. : 


(a)  All  have  the  same  vowel  (mostly  with  Umlaut)  in 
the  Inf.  and  the  Plur . of  the  Pres.  Ind. ; but  (except 
fotten)  a differeiit  vowel  in  the  Sing,  of  the  same 
tense. 


( b ) The  Impf,  Ind,  and  P,  Part,  have  the  weak  endings 
-te,  -t,  but  the  vowel  is  without  Umlaut;  toiffen 
changes  t to  u;  mogcn  changes  g into  dj. 

(c)  The  Impf,  Subj,  has  Umlaut,  except  in  fotten  and 
tootten. 


222 


LESSON  XXXIII* 


[§  196 


( d ) The  Sing,  of  the  Pres.  Ind.  of  these  Verbs  is  as 
follows,  the  Plural  being  regular : 


toiffen  ■ 

r id)  tocifc 
< bu  tocijjt 
(.  er  toctfj 

biirfen  - 

r id;  barf 
bu  barfft 
(.  er  barf 

Ibnnen  j 

• id)  farnt 
bu  fannfi 
..  er  fanu 

tnijgen 

( tcf>  mug 
1 bu  magft 
( er  mag 

miiffen  - 

' ic^  tnujj 
bu  mufst 
( er  ntujj 

foden  -< 

' ic^  fotr 
| bu  forrft 

L er  fad 

tooderJ 

' tdE)  totd 
| bu  toidft 
[ er  toid 

Observe  here  the  different  vowel  of  the  Inf.  and  Indie,  (except 
foH) ; also  the  want  of  the  person-ending  in  the  1.  and  3.  Sing, 
(tefy,  er  toeift,  barf,  fantt,  etc.,  not  toeift-t,  barf— t,  fann-t ; com- 
pare Engl,  can,  may,  etc.,  not  can-s,  may-s,  etc.). 

2.  The  forms  of  the  Present  in  the  verbs  under  II.  were 
originally  Strong  Imperfects  (hence  their  want  of  person-end- 
ings), which  came  to  be  used  with  a Present  meaning ; the 
new  (weak)  Imperfects  were  formed  from  these,  with  vowel- 
change. 

3.  The  Present  of  troffen  was  originally  a Pres.  Subj.,  used 
as  Indie.,  and  therefore  also  without  full  person-endings. 

4.  The  Imperative  is  wanting  in  all  under  II.,  except 
ftriffen,  Imper.  toiffe. 

Notes. — 1.  SBiffert  (=  Fr.  savoir)  is  used  of  knowledge,  and  of  things 
only;  fenrtett  (=  F x . connaitre')  of  acquaintance  ,of  persons  and  things,  thus: 

Stiffen  @ie  ben  2Beg?  Do  you  know  the  road?  (i.  e.,  do  you 
know  which  is  the  right  road  ?) 

Hcnnen  ©ie  ben  2Beg?  Are  you  acquainted  (familiar)  with  the 
road  ? 

Iteitnen  @te  tneinen  SBruber?  Do  you  know  my  brother? 

Stiffen  0ie,  er  gefagt  l)at?  Do  you  know  what  he  said? 


§196] 


IRREGULAR  STRONG  VERBS. 


223 


2.  All  these  verbs,  except  ttnffen,  govern  another  Verb  in  the  Infiiu 
without  (see  Less.  XLV),  as: 

3d)  barf  geljen,  I am  permitted  to  go. 


Vocabulary. 


to  put  on  (a  hat),  auf'fetjen 
expression,  ber  SluS'brucf  * 
French  (language),  granjo'ftfd) 
building,  ba3  ©ebaube 
commandment,  ba§  ©ebot' 


watch-key,  ber  U^rfd^Iuffet 
dwelling-house,  bd3  SJBofyn* 

clear(ly),  distinctly ),  beutlid) 
although,  obgleicf)* 


Idioms  : 1.  Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  lend  me  your  pen  ? SBofleit  ®ie 
fo  gut  fem  uitfc  mir  30re  ftcfcer  leil^en  ? (lit.,  will  you  be  so 
kind  and,  etc.1) 

2.  I am  sorry  (I  regret),  (5$  tfcut  mir  leib  (leib  to  be  treated 

as  a separable  particle). 

3.  What  is  that  in  German  ? SBie  fca$  auf  &eutfd)  ? 

4.  I do  not  need  to  go  to  school  to-day,  3d)  braud)e  fyeute  ttid)t 
gur  ®d)uk  gu  gcbcn. 

5.  He  knows  French,  (Sr  faun  3frangofifd)« 


EXERCISE  XXXIIL 

A.  1.  $;dE)  !ann  bid)  nicfjt  t?erfteE>ert ; ftmd)  bods  beutlicber. 
2.  $omtnen  ©ie  nur  fjerein,  toenit  ©ie  Gotten.  3.  ^ft  e§  3>I)nen 
fdjon  gelungen,  fjvansofifcf)  ju  Iernen?  4.  gd)  toerb«  nod)  beute 
biefe  Seftion  Iernen  miiffen,  unb  e§  ift  fcfion  brei  SSiertel  auf  jebn. 
5.  9?ocb  Dor  biergefm  Sagen  liefen  toir  ©<fdittfcbub,  unb  beute  ift 
ba§  ©§  gefcfmtoljen.  6.  2)a3  erfie  ©ebot  I^eifd  (is) : „©u  foHft 
leine  anbern  ©otter  neben  mir  baben."  7.  @3  tfyut  mir  leib,  bajj 
toir  erft  morgen  abreifen ; id)  toare  lieber  I)eute  abgereift.  8. 
2f)ut  e§  Sftnen  nidjt  aud)  leib,  bap  ©ie  bis  morgen  bleiben  miiffen? 
9.  2Bie  fjcifjt  ber  englifd)e  2Iusbrud  ‘ Do  you  know  my  friend? ’ 
auf  ©eutfd)  ? „®ennen  ©ie  meineit  greunb  ?"  10.  Skein  Dnfel  unb 
meine  Stante  ftnb  fcfion  geftern  angefommen,  aber  meine  SBeitern  unb 
Goufinen  toerben  erft  iibermorgen  fommen  fonnen.  11.  SBeifjt 
bu,  baft  beine  Skutter  angefommen  ift?  12.  ^d)  toil!  biefen  §ut 
nicfit  auffe|en,  toed  er  mir  ju  Hein  ift.  13.  ipeute  barf  id)  Idnger 


224 


LESSON  XXXIII. 


[§§ 


fyier  bleiben;  icfy  braucfye  mtyt  box  jefyn  Ubr  ju  §aufe  ju  fein. 
14.  2BoUen  ©te  ftcfy  nicfyt  fe^en  ? 15.  toerbe  mel)r  ©elb 

f)aben  muffen ; icfy  I)abe  nicfyt  genug  jur  9feife.  16.  mel)r  man 
I;at,  befto  mefyr  toil!  man.  17.  ©iefeS  unartige  $inb  toetfc  nid)t, 
\va$  e$  toill.  18.  fyabe  eben  gefyort,  bafe  meine  Gutter  Iran! 
ift,  aber  id?  toerbe  fie  ttidfyt  box  morgen  befucfyen  lonnen.  19.  SBotten 
©ie  gefadigft  metnen  S3rief  gur  ‘JSoft  bringett?  20.  SBUfyelm 
h>irb  ben  ganjen^ag  ju  §aufe  bleiben  mitffen,  Vr>etl  er  ficfy  erfaltet 
fyat.  21.  SSJlein  33ruber  fyricfyt  gut  5Deutfd;,  obgleid^  er  erft  in 
in  feinern  ftebjef^nten  ^aljre  ba3  ©tubium  btefer  ©prad?e  ange* 
fangen  I?at.  22.  28oUen  ©te  fo  gut  fein  unb  mix  fagen  (rnir  ju 
fagen),  foie  bid  Ul)r  e3  ift  ? 

B . 1.  A stranger  wants  to  speak  to  (fpred^en  + acc.)  you. 
2.  That  building  was  first  a bank,  then  a shop,  but  it  is  now 
a dwelling-house.  3.  How  do  you  know  that  ? I know  it  be- 
cause I have  heard  it  from  my  father.  4.  What  shall  I do  ? 
I have  lost  all  my  money.  5.  Do  you  know  who  has  torn 
this  book?  6.  No,  I do  not  know  who  has  torn  it.  7.  Can 
you  write  the  name  of  that  stranger?  8.  Do  you  know 
German?  No,  but  I know  French.  9.  Do  you  know  the 
difference  between  the  words  4 fennen ’ and  ‘toiffen’?  10.  I 
had  already  put  on  my  hat,  and  was  just  on  the  point  of  going 
out,  when  the  rain  began.  11.  These  two  ships  set  sail  (abs 
faljrert)  at  the  same  time,  but  the  smaller  arrived  first.  12.  I 
could  not  wind  up  my  watch  yesterday  evening;  I had  no 
watch-key  about  me.  13.  I cannot  remain  now  any  longer; 
I must  be  at  home  at  ten  o’clock.  14.  I know  this  street,  but 
I do  not  know  the  name  of  it  (say : how  it  is  called).  15.  A 
brave  man  is  esteemed  by  everybody.  16.  Of  what  is  bread 
made  ? 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXIII. 

1.  Wie  heiszt  ‘I  am  sorry ’ auf  Deutsch?  2.  Weshalb 
bleiben  Sie  heute  nicht  langer?  3.  Konnen  Sie  Deutsch? 


igS] 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


225 


4.  Sollte  man  gegen  jedermann  freundlich  sein  ? 5.  Wie  ge* 

fallt  Ihnen  Paris  ? 6.  Wie  viel  Uhr  ist  es,  wenn  der  Stunden- 
zeiger  zwischen  vier  und  fiinf  und  der  Minutenzeiger  auf  zehn 
steht  ? 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 

197.  The  Verbs  biirfnt,  fihttien,  tniigcn,  miiffcn,  foffett, 

ttJoffeu  (see  last  Lesson),  with  the  Verb  Iftffcit  (Class  VII, 
Less.  XXXI)  are  called  Modal  Auxiliaries,  or  Auxiliary 
Verbs  of  Mood,  since  they  are  used  to  form  combinations 
equivalent  to  various  Moods.  Thus:  lafjct  urt§  gefyert,  Met 
us  go/  is  really  equivalent  to  an  Imperative  Mood  i.  PI.  of 
geljen  ; tcf)  fmtn  gefyen,  ‘ I can  go/  to  a Potential  Mood \ etc. 

198.  These  Modal  Auxiliaries  differ  from  the  English 
Auxiliaries  can , may,  must,  shall,  will,  in  having  an  Infinitive 
and  a Past  Participle,  and  in  the  consequent  ability  to  form 
a complete  set  of  compound  tenses,  which  are  wanting  in 
the  English  Verbs,  and  must  therefore  be  supplied  in  that 
language  by  equivalent  phrases,  as  shown  in  the  following 
partial  paradigms  (see  also  Less.  XXXV). 


biirfctt,  to  be  per- 
mitted 


fihtncit,  to  be  able 
(can) 


tttiigett,  to  like,  be 
allowed  (may) 


Present  Indicative. 


id)  barf,  I am  per- 
mitted, may 


id)  fantt,  I can,  am 
able 


tcf)  mag,  I like, 
may 


Present  Subjunctive. 


id)  burfe,  I (may) 
be  permitted, 


tcf)  fottrte,  I 

be  able 


(may) 


moge,  I 

like 


(may) 


226 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


[8  198 


id;  burfte,  I was  per- 
mitted 


Imperfect  Indicative. 

id)  fonnte,  I could,  1 icf)  tnodde,  I liked, 
was  able  j might 


Imperfect  Subjunctive. 


id;  burfte,  I might 
be  permitted 


id)  fonnte,  I could, 
might  be  able 


\<fy  mocfyie,  I might 
like 


id;  fjabe  geburft, 

I have  been  per- 
mitted 


Perfect  Indicative. 

id)  f;abe  gefonnt, 

I have  been  able 


icf)  fyabe  gemoc^t, 
I have  liked 


icf)  fyabe  geburft, 

I (may)  have  been 
permitted 


Perfect  Subjunctive. 

id;  fyabe  gefonnt, 

I (may)  have  been 
able 


icf)  fwbe  gemocfrt, 

I (may)  have  liked 


Pluperfect  Indicative. 


id)  f)atte  geburft, 

I had  been  per- 
mitted 


icf)  f)atte  gefonnt, 

I had  been  able 


id)  fyatte  gemod)t, 
I had  liked 


Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 


id)  fjatte  geburft, 

I might  have  been 
permitted 


id;  f>dtte  gefonnt, 

I might  have  been 
able 


id)  f)atte  gemod;t, 

I might  have  liked 


Future  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 

id)  toerbe  burfert,  icf)  toerbe  fonnen,  id;  toerbe  mogett, 

I shall  be  permitted  I shall  be  able  I shall  like 


§198] 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


227 


Future  Perfect. 


id)  merbe  geburft  I )a* 
ben,  I shall  have 
been  permitted 


id)  fterbe  gefonnt 
I)af>en,  I shall 
have  been  able 


id)  toerbe  gemod)t 
!)a6en,  I shall 
have  liked 


Simple  Conditional. 


inurbe  biirfen,  I id)  miirbe  fonnen,  I id)  tniirbe  tnogen,  I 
should  be  per-  should  be  able  should  like 
mitted 


Compound  Conditional. 


i$  toil  rbe  geburft  l)a= 
ben,I  should  have 
been  permitted 


id)  mitrbe  gefonnt 
l)aben,  I should 
have  been  able 


id)  ftmrbe  gemocfyt 
l)aben,  I should 
have  liked 


tmiffett,  to  be  com- 
pelled (must) 


{often,  to  be  obliged 
(shall) 


UJOftcn,  to  be  willing 
(will) 


Present  Indicative. 


icfy  tnuf$,  I am  com- 
pelled, must 


id)  foff,  bu  foftft, 

I am  (obliged)  to, 
thou  shalt 


idf)  ioiff,  I will,  in- 
tend to,  am  about 
to 


Present  Subjunctive. 


td)  rrtitffe,  I (may)  be 
compelled 


id)  foffe,  I (may)  be 
obliged 


idf)  faoffe,  I (may) 
be  willing 


Imperfect  Indicative. 


idf)  mu^te,  I was 
compelled 


id)  foffte,  I was 
(obliged)  to, 

ought 


id)  moffte,  I was 
willing 


228 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


l§§  ^98- 


Imperfect  Subjunctive. 


id)  miiftte,  I might 
be  compelled 


id)  babe  gemufct, 

I have  been  com- 
pelled 

id)  Ijabe  gemuf^t, 

I (may)  have  been 
compelled 


id;  fottte,  I might 
be  obliged 

Perfect  Indicative. 
id;  fyabe  gefottt, 

I have  been 
obliged 

Perfect  Subjunctive. 
id)  fya be  gefofft^ 

I (may)  have  been 
obliged 


id;  toottte,  I might 
be  willing, would 


id)  tyabe  getontft, 

I have  been  wil- 
ling 


id;  I;abe  getoottt, 

I (may)  have  been 
willing 


Pluperfect  Indicative. 


t$  Ijatte  gemufct, 

I had  been  com- 
pelled 


id)  fyatte  gefottt, 

I had  been  obliged 


id)  fyaite  getoottt, 

I had  been  willing 


Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 


id;  tyfitte  germtf$t, 

I might  have  been 
compelled 


id)  fyatte  gefottt, 

I might  have  been 
obliged,  ought 
to  have 


id)  fyatte  getoofft, 

I might  have  been 
willing 


Future  Indicative  and  Subjunctive. 


id)  toerbe  mitffen, 

I shall  be  com- 
pelled 

id)  toerbe  gemujst 
ijaben,  I shall 
have  been  com- 
pelled 


id)  fterbe  fatten, 

I shall  be  obliged 

Future  Perfect. 

id)  toerbe  gefollt  fya* 
ben,  I shall  have 
been  obliged 


id)  toerbe  tootten, 

I shall  be  willing 


id;  it>erbe  getoottt 
f)dben,  I shall 
have  been  wil- 
ling 


199] 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


229 


tdj  ftiirbe  muffett, 

I should  be  com- 
pelled 


Simple  Conditional. 

id;  tolirbe  follen, 

I should  be 
obliged 


id)  toiirbe  toollen, 

I should  be  wil- 
ling 


Compound  Conditional. 


t$  toiirbe  gemuftt 
Ijaben,  I should 
have  been  com- 
pelled 


id}  tolirbe  gefofft 
ben,  I should  have 
been  obliged 


icf}  toiirbe  getooflt 
fyabert,  I should 
have  been  wil- 
ling 


199.  Further  Peculiarities  of  Modal  Auxiliaries. 

1.  They  govern  an  Infinitive  without  $u,  as: 

@r  mufc  geljcit,  He  must  go. 

2.  In  the  compound  tenses,  when  a governed  Infin.  occurs, 
the  weak  P.  Part,  is  replaced  by  the  Infinitive  (really  the  old 
strong  P.  Part,  without  prefix  gc-,  which  coincides  in  form 
with  the  Infin.),  as  : 

$d)  fyabe  gemu^t,  I have  been  obliged ; — but 

$c£}  ijabe  e§  tljun  miiffeit,  I have  been  obliged  to  do  it. 

3.  In  subordinate  sentences,  their  auxiliary  of  tense  does 
not  come  last,  but  precedes  both  the  governed  infinitive  and 
the  participle  of  the  Modal  Auxiliary,  as : 

6r  fagte,  ba£  er  e§  fjabe  tfyun  mtiffen,  He  said,  that  he 
had  been  obliged  to  do  it. 

Note.  — The  foregoing  peculiarities  are  all  shared  by  the  verbs  beiften, 
!)effen,  l)oreit,  laffert,  ntadjen,  fefjert  ; for  other  verbs  governing  an  Infin. 
without  gu,  see  Less.  XLV. 

4.  The  shorter  (and  older)  forms  of  the  Conditional  (viz. : 
Impf.  and  Plupf.  Subj.,  see  § 111)  are  preferred  to  the  longer 
ones  (with  toiirbe),  thus : 


230 


LESSON  XXXIV, 


Simple  Conditional. 


t$  biirfte  = 
tcfy  fimntc  = 
id?  tuutfjtc  = 
id?  mufjte  = 
icfy  foffte  = 
i$  feoflte  = 


I should  be  permitted 

I “ “ able 

I “ like 
I “ be  compelled 

I “ “ obliged 

I “ “ willing 


l§  i99 


Compound  Conditional. 


icfy  I?atte 


' geburft,  biirfen 
gefonnt,  fonnen 
gemod?t,  mogen 
gemufjt,  miijfen 
gefoflt,  foffen 
_ getoolft,  feoflen 


' been  permitted 
“ able 


I should  have 


liked 

been  compelled 
“ obliged 
_ “ willing 


Remarks.  — 1.  The  Engl,  auxiliaries  also  use  by  prefer- 
ence shorter  forms  of  the  Comp.  Condit.,  but  differently 
constructed,  thus : 


tcfypttc  eStljutt 


' fonnen  ' 

could 

mo  gen 

might 

- miiffen 

Y 

II 

must  l 

foffen 

should 

feoff  en 

N.  ^ 

would 

have  done  it 


Observe  that  the  Engl.  Verbs  have  the  Modal  Auxiliary 
(‘could/  ‘might/  etc.)  in  the  Simple  Tense  (Impf.),  and  the 
governed  verb  (‘have  done’)  in  the  Compound  Tense  (Perf. 
Inf.);  whereas  the  Germ.  Verbs  have  -the  Modal  Auxiliary 
(fyatte . . . fonnen,  etc.)  in  the  Compound  Tense  (Plupf.  Subj.), 
and  the  governed  verb  (tfyun)  in  the  Simple  Tense  (Pres.  Inf.). 

2.  Distinguish  carefully  between  ‘could/  Indie.  (=  was 
able,  fonnte)  and  ‘ could/  Conditional  (==  would  be  able, 
fiinnte) ; and  so  with  the  other  verbs,  thus : 


§199? 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


231 


©r  fcnnte  e§  nid^t  tfjun  = He  could  not  (was  not  able 
to)  do  it  ( Indie. ). 

©r  fbrmte  e3  tfyurt,  faenn  er  toaftic  = He  could  (would 
be  able  to)  do  it,  if  he  were  willing  ( Condit .). 


Vocabulary. 

fellow-creature,  neighbour, 


to  remain  up  ,sit  up,  auf  bletben 
go  out,  au^'gefyert 
thank,  banfen  (+  dat.) 
bow  to,  greet,  graven  (trans.) 
depend,  rely  (upon),  fid)  her* 
laffert  (auf  + acc.) 
moment,  ber  SCu'genblicf 
railway,  bie  ©i'fenbafyn 


ber  3}a$fte 
disaster,  ba§  ttn'gliicf 
untruth,  falsehood,  bie  Un'* 
toafyrfyeit 

over  again,  rtoefy  (ein)maf 
whether,  if,  ob 
else,  otherwise,  fortft 


Idioms:  X.  Will  you  have  a cup  of  tea?  No,  thank  you,  SEBoKeii 
cine  ^affc  $0ee  ? 3d)  fcanfe  (3I)iien). 

2,  In  fine  weather,  33c t fd)C>nem  28ctter. 

3.  I have  heard  (it)  said,  etc.,  3d)  ijabe  fngen  fyoren,  u.  f.  ro. 


EXERCISE  XXXIV. 

A.  1.  ®u  fiaft  beine  21ufgabe  fel)r  fcf)lecf>t  gemadfit;  bu  mirft 
fie  gemifj  nod;  (ein)mal'  mad;en  miiffen.  2.  Sarf  id)  einen  2lugen= 
blief  3>l;ren  SKeiftift  braudicn?  2>cf)  ben  tuetnen  berloren.  3. 
SBir  miiffen  g(eid)  jur  ©djule  ge(;en,  fonft  !ontmen  mir  ju  fpat. 
4.  SRait  foffte  fetrten  9?acbften  lieben,  mie  fid;  felbft.  5.  SSovige 
SBodfie  Ijatte  mein  SSater  fein  §au§  berfaufen  iiinnen,  aber  er  fiat 
eg  niefit  gemofft.  6.  2>et;t  moebte  er  eg  gern  berfaufen,  aber  nie* 
manb  miff  eg.  7.  Seine  SSettcrn  taffen  bid;  freunbliefift  grufjen. 

8.  -JBiffen  ©ie,  mie  ber  §err  beif;t,  ber  mid;  foeben  gegriigt  fiat? 

9.  Su  foffft  ju  beinem  SBater  gefien  ; er  miff  biefj  f^red^en.  10. 
Ser  ®nabe  mag  fagen,  mag  er  miff ; id;  meijf,  bafj  er  eine  Un= 
mafirljeit  gefagt  fiat.  11.  SJlocfiten  ©ie  niefit  bei  biefem  fcfionen 
SBetier  fpajieren  fafiren?  12.  §aft  bu  ben  ^ug  bon  Buffalo  an* 
fommen  fefien?  13.  Iga  mol;!,  iefi  Ijabe  ifm  anfommen  fefien,  aber 
eg  mar  niemanb  barauf,  ben  id;  !annte.  14.  @r  fiat  geburft,  aber 


232 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


[§§  199- 


er  I)at  n\d)t  getooflt.  15.  Igcb  l)abe  in  ber  ©iabt  fagen  I)6ren,  baft 
etn  grofteS  Unglue!  auf  ber  ©fertbafyn  gefrf;ef;en  ift.  16.  © foil 
bon  biefem  23aum  geftprungen  fein,  aber  id)  faun  e§  !aum  glauben. 
17.  %d)  barf  nid)t  fo  fpat  aufbletben  ate  mein  alterer  SBruber  ; id) 
muft  jeben  2lbenb  um  jetyn  Ul)r  ju  33ette  gel)en.  18.  %d)  toill 
tfmn,  ioaS  id)  fann;  barauf  fonnen  ©ie  fid^  berlaffen.  19.  SSon 
U>em  tourbe  ba§  23udE)  gefcfmeben,  ba£  ©te  foeben  lafen?  20.  © 
tl)ut  mir  letb,  baft  ©ie  fo  lange  auf  mid)  fyaben  ioarten  muffen; 
id)  lonnte  meine  §anbfd)uf)e  nid)t  finben. 

B.  1.  By  whom  was  this  picture  painted?  2.  I should 
like  to  know  what  time  it  is.  3.  May  you  go  out,  if  you 
want  to?  No,  we  are  obliged  to  stay  at  home  the  whole  day. 
4.  I do  not  like  (I  like  no)  tea ; I prefer  (the)  coffee.  5.  Could 
you  help  me  with  my  lesson  ? 6.  I should  certainly  help  you 

with  it,  if  I could.  7.  He  may  say,  what  he  will ; it  is 
all  the  same  to  me.  8.  My  father  could  have  sold  his  house 
last  year,  but  now  it  is  impossible,  for  nobody  wants  to  buy  it. 
9.  Charles  has  beaten  his  dog  with  a stick ; he  should  not 
have  done  that.  10.  May  I offer  you  a piece  of  meat?  No, 
thank  you.  11.  Have  (let)  the  messenger  wait,  till  I write 
an  answer.  12.  I should  like  to  read  this  French  book,  but 
I do  not  know  any  French.  13.  I am  sorry  that  I have  not 
been  able  to  come  sooner.  14.  He  will  be  obliged  to  study 
another  year,  if  he  does  not  pass  his  examination.  15.  Sophia 
should  not  have  gone  for  a walk,  since  the  weather  is  so 
cold.  16.  The  horse  I wanted  to  buy  was  already  sold. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXIV. 

1.  Wie  heiszt  das  erste  Gebot?  2.  Wissen  Sie,  ob  wir 
morgen  zur  Schule  gehen  miissen  ? 3.  Darf  ich  Ihnen  eine 

Tasse  Thee  anbieten?  4.  Weshalb  haben  Sie  mir  mit  meiner 
Aufgabe  nicht  helfen  wollen  ? 5.  Wie  lange  werden  wir  auf 

Fritz  warten  miissen  ? 6.  Sollte  man  seinen  Nachsten  lieben? 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


233 


loo] 


LESSON  XXXV. 

MODAL  AUXILIARIES  (continued):  — IDIOMS. 

200.  The  following  are  the  most  important  of  the  various 
meanings  of  the  Modal  Auxiliaries : 

i.  Surfeit  denotes  permission,  as: 

®arf  id)  fragert ? May  I ask? 

©ie  biirfeu  je|t  nacb  £>aufe  gefyen,  You  may  go  home 
now. 

@r  bat  nid&tg  fagen  biirfeit,  He  has  not  been  permitted 
(allowed)  to  say  anything. 

Siinnen  denotes : 

( a ) ability  (of  persons ),  as  : 

@r  fanittc  fd)5rt  fcfyreiben,  He  could  (was  able  to, 
knew  how  to)  write  beautifully. 

$d)  fjiitte  nid)t  fommen  fiimten,  I could  not  have  (would 
not  have  been  able  to)  come. 

(p)  possibility  (of  events ),  as  : 

@3  fttmt  fetrt,  It  may  be  (so),  it  is  possible. 

3.  SWiSgctt  denotes : 

(a)  preference,  liking  (of  persons ),  as  : 

$cf)  tttag  btefe§  ©ebid;t  nid;t,  I do  not  like  (care  for) 
this  poem. 

©r  modjtc  nicfyt  arbeiten,  He  did  not  like  to  work. 

$>d)  tyatte  Sfyrert  Sruber  fefyert  magett,  I should  have 
liked  to  see  your  brother. 

Note. — This  is  the  usual  meaning  in  the  first  person;  also  in  the 
Impf.  (Indie,  and  Condit.)  throughout. 

( b ) concession,  possibility  (in  2.  and  3.  person  only), 
as : 

16 


234 


LESSON  XXXV. 


[§  200 


@r  mag  gefyen,  He  may  go  (as  far  as  I am  concerned), 
or  : Let  him  go. 

mag  fetn.  That  may  be  (for  all  I know). 

Note.— -The  Engl,  ‘may*  denoting  permission  must  be  rendered  by 
bUtfCtt  in  the  first  person,  as : 

May  I accompany  you?  ®arf  id)  begteiten? 

(e)  Observe  this  idiom  : 

8$  toerbe  morgen  auSgefyen,  mag  e§  regnen  ober  ntcfjt,  I 
shall  go  out  to-morrow,  whether  it  rains  or  not. 

4.  ©Jitffen  denotes  necessity,  as: 

2lDfe  StRenfd^en  muffett  fterben.  All  men  must  die. 

mufj  geftern  gefcfyefyen  fein,  It  must  have  happened 
yesterday. 

SBir  toerben  auSgefyen  miiffen,  We  shall  be  compelled 
(or  ‘ obliged/  or  ‘ shall  have  ’)  to  go. 

Note. — To  be  obliged,  compelled  > after  a negative  is  rendered  by 
brand)  en,  as : 

I am  not  obliged  to  go,  3d)  braudje  nidjt  gu  gebett. 

5.  ©often  denotes  duty  or  obligation,  imposed  on  the 
subject  by  the  will  of  another . 

(a)  Imposed  by  the  speaker,  as : 

®u  fattft  nicf)t  fteljlen,  Thou  shalt  not  steal. 

( b ) Imposed  by  some  person  other  than,  but  recognised 
by,  the  speaker,  as: 

8$  faff  gefyen,  I am  to  go. 

(Sr  fycitte  geljen  fatten^  He  ought  to  have  gone, 

2Ba3  fall  gefefyefyen?  What  is  to  be  done  ? 

S S$a3  faffte  iefy  tbun?  What  was  I to  do  ? 

( c ) It  also  denotes  a statement  on  the  part  of  another 
as  to  the  subject,  as : 

@r  fall  feljr  reiefy  fein,  He  is  said  to  be  very  rich. 


§200]  THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES.  235 

6.  SBottctt  denotes 

(a)  the  exertion  of  the  will  on  the  part  of  the  subject,  as : 
@r  Uiitt  nicfjt  gefyorcfyen,  He  will  not  (refuses  to)  obey. 

( b ) intention  or  impending  action,  as : 

@r  mitt  morgen  abretfen,  He  intends  (means)  to  depart. 
£>a§  ©3  miff  brec^en,  The  ice  is  about  to  break 
(threatens  to  break). 

mutttc  eben  gefyen  (=  tear  eben  xm  33egriff  ju  ge^en), 
He  was  just  on  the  point  of  going. 

( c ) a statement  or  claim  on  the  part  of  the  subject,  as : 
@r  ttsitt  in  Snbien  getoefen  fetn,  He  asserts  that  he  has 

been  (pretends  to  have  been)  in  India. 

7.  Caffeit  is  used 

(a)  as  auxiliary  of  the  Imperative  Mood,  as  : 
fiaffcn  ©te  un§  fyier  bleiben.  Let  us  remain  here. 

(£)  to  express  permission,  etc.,  as : 

9Kan  I)at  ben  ©ieb  entfprtngen  laffeit.  The  thief  has  been 
allowed  to  escape. 

(c)  to  express  the  agency  of  another,  as  : 

2)er  Officer  Ite^  ben  ©olbaten  Beftrafctt,  The  officer 
ordered  the  soldier  to  be  punished. 

2lfcf>en:ptittel3  33ater  fic§  ben  93aum  umfjauett,  Cinderella’s 
father  had  the  tree  cut  down. 

Note.  — The  infin.  in  the  former  of  these  examples  is  rendered  by 
the  passive  infinitive  in  English,  the  object  of  the  verb  laffen  being  under- 
stood. Supply  the  ellipsis  as  follows : ' 

2)er  Officer  fjat  jemctnfc  (obj.  of  laffeit),  ben  ©olbaten  (obj.  of 
beftrafen),  beftrafen  laffen,  The  officer  has  ordered  somebody  to 
punish  the  soldier.  * 

( d ) reflexively,  as: 


236 


LESSON  XXXV. 


@r  lief)  ftdj  leicfyt  betrugen.  He  suffered  himself  to  be 
deceived  easily. 

3d)  tieft  e§  mir  gefaHen,  I submitted  to  it. 

G£  liifjt  fid)  nicfyt  leugnen,  It  cannot  be  denied. 


201.  How  to  render  shall  and  will. 


1.  The  Engl.  4 shall  ’ and  4 will 9 must  both  be  rendered  by 
t&Cfbcit  when  they  express  mere  futurity,  as  : 

I shall  be  drowned  and  nobody  will  save  me, 

3$  tocrbe  ertrinfen  unb  niemcmb  mirb  mid)  retten. 

2.  But  if  they  express  more  than  mere  futurity  (e.  g., 
obligation  or  detenjiination ),  they  must  be  rendered  by  fotteii 
and  fooHett  respectively,  as : 

I will  be  drowned  and  nobody  shall  save  me, 
mill  ertrinfen  unb  nietnanb  foil  mid;  retten. 


202.  Observe  the  following  parallel  idioms : 


id) 


©r  Ijat  e§  nicfyt  tljun  fimnctt,  He  has  not  been  able 
to  do  it. 

©r  fttltlt  e§  nicftt  gcifjntt  IjaBett,  He  cannot  (possibly) 
have  done  it. 


(*) 


©r  Ijat  nic^t  tljun  mogctt,  He  did  not  like  to 
do  it. 

©r  mag  e§  getljan  IjaBcn,  He  may  (possibly)  have 
done  it. 


r @r  Ijat  tljuit  mitffen,  He  has  been  obliged  to 
(<r)  < do  it. 

I ©r  mufj  e§  getljan  Ijoliett,  He  must  have  done  it. 


©r  Ijat  e§  t^un  fofleit,  He  should  (ought  to)  have 
done  it. 

@r  foil  e§  getljan  Ijalien,  He  is  said  to  have 
done  it. 


202 j 


THE  MODAL  AUXILIARIES. 


237 


f ©r  Tjai  eS  tfjun  tootten,  He  intended  to  have 
/v  J done  it. 

W I ©r  ru  tl  e§  gctljatt  ^afiett.  He  pretends  (claims) 
[ to  have  done  it. 

Vocabulary. 


to  put  on,  draw  on  (coat,  etc.) 
anjiefyen 

expect,  ertoarten 
chat,  talk,  ^laubern 
reap,  fdfyneiben 
disturb,  interrupt,  ftoren 
try,  fcerfucfyen 
last,  continue,  todfyrert 
American,  ber  2fmerifaner 
physician,  doctor,  ber  2lrjt* 
beggar-woman,  bie  33ettlerin 
steam-engine,  bte 
mafcfyine 


Englishman,  ber  ©nglanber 
naught,  cipher ; zero,  bte  -JhtH 
shoemaker,  ber  ©cfyufymacfjer 
proverb,  ba§  ©bricfytoort 
studying,  ba§  ©tubieren 
lesson,  bte  ©tunbe 
bunch  of  grapes,  bie  Sraube 
thermometer,  ber  or  ba§ 
mome'ter 

overcoat,  ber  Uberjieljer 
as  far  as,  bi§  nad) 
dangerous(ly),  gefdfyrltcfy 
sour,  f auer 


Idioms:  1.  A doctor  has  been  sent  for,  SDtan  Ijat  ctnctt  5Irjt  ftolen 
laffeit. 

2.  Every  other  day  (every  alternate  day),  (£tnen  Xag  utn 
ben  anberii. 

3.  Every  week,  5lUc  rtd)t  $age. 

4.  I should  think  so!  (elite  Id)  meineti! 

5.  In  the  right  way,  $luf  bie  rtd)tige  23etfe  (acc.). 


EXERCISE  XXXV. 

A.  1 . ® er  Selegrapl)  foil  too n einem  Stmerifaner  erfunben  toorben 
fein.  2.  „2Ber  im  ©ommer  nicbt  mag  fdjnciben,  muj$  im  SJBinter 
hunger  leiben,"  fyeijjt  ein  beuifd)e3  ©pric^toort.  3.  ffioHe  nur, 
WaZ  bu  fannft,  fo  Voirft  bu  fonnen,  toa§  bu  toiUft.  4.  9Zdd)fte  2Bod)e 
fallen  fair  einen  fyeiertag  fyaben,  toenn  bi§  ©onnabenb  fleijjig  ftubiert 
toirb.  5.  SRarte  iuollte  ifyre  Seftion  in  einer  fyalben  ©tunbe  lernen, 
aber  fie  £;at  e3  nicbt  gefonnt.  6.  2Bir  toiirben  aBfe  gllicflidber  leben, 
toenn  fair  immer  t^aten,  \va$  fair  tljun  fotlten.  7.  toerbe  bie 


238 


LESSON  XXXV. 


Seftion  nie  lernen  fonnen.  8.  5>u  toirft  fie  lenten  fonnen,  toenn 
btt  e§  nur  auf  bie  ric£;tige  SBeife  berfucfift.  9.  9Jfan  barf  nicftt  tn  ber 
©djule  plaubern;  ba3  ftort  ben  Secret  unb  bie  ©cfmter.  10.  2Be§« 
fyalb  fiat  2lfcf)enputtel3  SBater  ben  SBaurn  umljauen  laffen?  11. 
©ollte  §err  S3,  toafyrenb  rnetner  Slbtoefenljeit  fotnmen,  fo  laffen 
©ie  iljn  auf  mid)  tnarten.  12.  $d)  mbdjte  nur  toiffen,  toarum 
©eorg  auf  fid)  ioarten  lafst ! 13.  $;d)  mod)te  ©ie  rtidfjt  ftoren, 
aber  fagen  ©ie  inir  gefaKigft,  mie  biefer  ©a£  auf  ©nglifcf)  Ijeifjt. 
14.  ©eorg§  SSater  foil  gefafyrlid)  Irani  fein  ; man  Ijat  jtoei  Str^te 
l;olen  laffen.  15.  ®er  33ogel  motlte  eben  bom  S3aume  fliegen,  al4 
ber  o>ager  iljn  fdjojj.  16.  ©uten  -morgen,  $err  23raun,  mein 
SOater  lafjt  2>Ijnen  f«8«n,  bafj  er  ©ie  beute  2lbenb  ertoartet.  17. 
§abe  id)  ©ie  fagen  fyoren,  bafj  ©ie  jeben£ag  eine  beutfcfye  ©tunbe 
neljmen  ? 18.  mein,  id)  neljme  eineit  £ag  urn  ben  anbern  eine 
©tunbe.  19.  2Ba§  micf)  betrifft,  fo  mocfde  id)  lieber  aHe  brei  Stage 
meine  ©tunben  neljmen.  20.  SDa§  foCCte  id)  meinen,  benn  ©ie 
miirben  tneljr  geit  Sum  ©tubieren  Ijaben.  21.  ©fjrlidf)  toa^rt  am 
langften,  unb  Unredjt  fdjlagt  feinen  eigeneit  §errn. 

B.  1.  Let  us  take  a walk ; I cannot  work  any  longer.  2. 
The  beggar-woman,  who  has  just  asked  us  for  money,  says 
that  she  is  (claims  to  be)  a hundred  years  old.  3.  She  is  not 
quite  so  old,  but  she  is  said  to  be  at  least  above  (liber  -j-  acc.) 
ninety  years  old.  4.  The  fox  said : ‘ The  grapes  are  sour ; I 
do  not  like  them.’  5.  The  fox  said  the  grapes  were  sour, 
and  that  he  did  not  like  them.  6.  Might  I ask  you  how  far 
you  are  going  ? As  far  as  Montreal.  7.  Should  I put  on  my 
overcoat?  8.  I should  think  so  ! The  thermometer  is  (stands) 
below  zero.  9.  Is  it  true  that  this  traveller  knows  three 
languages?  It  may  be  [so],  but  I do  not  believe  it.  10.  If 
you  should  see  little  Freddy  up-stairs,  let  him  come  to  me. 
11.  By  which  shoemaker  do  you  have  your  shoes  made  ? 12. 
The  steam-engine  is  said  to  have  been  invented  by  an  Eng- 
lishman. 13.  Lazy  boys  learn  only  because  they  are  obliged 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 


239 


205] 

to  learn.  14.  He  must  have  been  very  ill,  as  (ba)  he  is  still 
so  weak.  15.  This  house  is  said  to  have  cost  four  thousand 
dollars,  but  I should  not  like  to  give  two  thousand  for  it.  16. 
He  has  not  been  able  to  come  on  account  of  the  storm, 
otherwise  he  would  be  here  already. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXV, 

1.  Mochten  Sie  nicht  eine  Reise  nach  Europa  machen  ? 
2.  Gehen  Sie  alle  Tage  nach  der  Stadt,  oder  nur  alle  zwei 
Tage?  3.  Was  machen  Sie,  wenn  Sie  nicht  mehr  studieren 
konnen?  4.  Wer  soli  das  Telephon  erfunden  haben  ? 5.  Hat 
man  einen  Arzt  holen  lassen  ? 6.  Haben  Sie  das  Geld  be- 

zahlen  miissen  ? 


LESSON  XXXVL 

COMPOUND  VERBS. 

203.  The  Prefixes  of  Compound  Verbs  may  be  either 
Inseparable  or  Separable. 

204.  A . Inseparable  Prefixes. 

Remember  : The  omission  of  ge~  in  the  P.  Part. 

The  prefixes  6e~,  er-,  mp~,  cut-,  ge-  her-,  $er~,  mt§-, 
ttntlcr-  are  always  inseparable  and  unaccented,  the  principal 
accent  falling  on  the  verb. 

Remarks. — 1.  The  particle  mijj-  varies  in  usage,  as  shown 
in  the  Supplementary  Lesson  E.,  § 209,  1,  below. 

2.  Remarks  on  the  force  and  meaning  of  these  particles 
are  given  in  Part  III. 

205.  B.  Separable  Prefixes. 

Remember:  i.  The  Prefix  is  separated  from  the  Verb 

only  in  Simple  Tenses  and  Principal  (including  Direct 
Interrogative  and  Imperative)  Sentences. 


240 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


[§§  205- 


2.  The  gc-  of  the  P.  Part,  and  ju  of  the  Infin.  come  between 
prefix  and  verb. 

3.  The  principal  accent  is  on  the  prefix. 

206.  The  Separable  Prefixes  are  : 

1.  The  simple  prepositional  and  other  adverbs,  rtfi— , 
ait-,  auf-,  au8-,  etc. ; ba(r)-  fart-  crnpar-  Jjer-  etc. 

2.  The  compound  adverbs,  such  as:  babatt-, ba$U-, etc.; 
baratt-  barauS-,  etc. ; entgcgen-,  cntjiaei-  juriicf-,  etc. 

Notes. — 1.  Observe  that  these  compound  adverbs  are  all  accented 
on  the  second  syllable. 

2.  The  use  of  the  compound  prefixes  with  Jjer-  and  Jjin-  is  defined 
in  the  Supplementary  Lesson  E.,  § 210,  below. 

Examples  of  Verbs  with  Prefixes. 


(a)  Simple 
Verbs. 

grfjcn,  go 

rci^ett,  tear 
fommctt, 

come 

fhtbett/  find 


(b)  Inseparable 
Compounds. 

bergeljen,  pass  away 

jerret^en,  tear  to  pieces 
Befommen,  obtain 

Ctfinben,  invent 


(c)  Separable 
Compounds. 

auggefyen,  go  out 
jurutfgeljen,  go  back 

entgcgcnfommen,  come 
to  meet 

nuSfinben,  find  out 


Other  Separable  Prefixes  are : 


3.  Substantives,  forming  one  idea  with  the  verb, 

( a ) as  objects  of  the  verb,  as  : 

arfjtgeben,  pay  attention  (attend);  banffagett,  return 
thanks  (thank);  ftattfinben,  take  place  (occur); 
teilnefymen,  take  part  (interest  one’s  self). 

Note.  — The  substantives  in  these  combinations  are  usually  spelt 
with  a small  letter,  and  written  in  one  word  with  the  verb  when  they  pre- 
cede it. 


( b ) with  prepositions  (==  adverbial  phrases),  as  : 


807] 


DOUBLE  PREFIXES. 


24I 


ft<$  ilt  ®djt  neljmen  (red.),  take  care  (be  careful); 
gu  Seibc  tljun,  injure,  hurt;  gu  Stanbe  brirtgen, 
complete;  311  <Stanbe  fommett,  be  completed ; int 
•Sloitbe  fein,  be  able ; gum  SSorfdjein  fommen,  make 
one’s  appearance  (appear) ; gu  $?utc  ]cin,  feel. 
Remark.  — These  substantives  occupy  the  same  position 
in  the  sentence  as  separable  prefixes,  thus: 

Ijabe  auf  fein  Setragen  adjtgegeben, 

I have  observed  his  conduct. 

fagte  if>m  fiir  feine  greunblicfyfeit  banf, 

I thanked  him  for  his  kindness. 

Note.  — Observe  that  in  the  above  sentences  the  simple  objects  with- 
out preposition  (acf)t,  banf)  follow  the  prepositional  phases  (auf  fein  53c* 
tragen,  fiir  feine  greunblid)feit),  contrary  to  rule,  on  account  of  their 
character  as  separable  prefixes. 

4.  Adj  ectives  as  prefixes  are  usually  separable , as : 

frcilafjert,  set  free  (liberate);  fcftfyatten,  hold  fast  (de- 
tain) ; fic^>  loSfagen  (refl.),  renounce. 

But  many  are  inseparable,  of  which  fuller  particulars  are 
given  in  the  Supplementary  Lesson  E.,  § 212. 

For  boff-  as  prefix  see  § 208,  below. 

207.  C.  Double  Prefixes. 

1.  Separable  -f*  Separable  prefix;  these  are  compound 
adverbs,  and  both  separable  (see  § 206,  2,  above). 

2.  Separable  -f-  Inseparable ; the  former  alone  is  se- 
parated, as : 

an'crfennen,  acknowledge,  id)  crfenrte  an  (but  see  Suppl. 
Less.  E.,  § 213). 

3.  Inseparable-]-  Separable;  both  inseparable,  as: 

6caufftragen,  authorize,  id)  fieauf tragte  ifm,  I authorized 
him ; Uer  an  [fatten,  arrange,  icfy  beran[tattete  bieS,  I ar- 
ranged this. 


242 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


[§§  207- 


Note.  — These  are  really  not  compound  but  derivative  verbs,  from 
compound  nouns  ($tuf'trag,  Sfn'ftalt) ; hence  also  the  verb  (as  in  the 
former  example)  is  always  weak,  not  strong  — beauftragte,  beauftvagt. 


208.  D.  Prefixes  Separable  and  Inseparable. 


The  prefixes  fenrd)-,  Jjtntcr-  fiber-,  unter-,  um~,  feoff-  are 
sometimes  separable,  sometimes  inseparable.  They  are  : 

(a)  Separable  as  long  as  both  prefix  and  verb  retain 
more  or  less  of  their  literal  or  concrete  meaning; 

( b ) Inseparable  when  both  have  lost  this  meaning,  and 
form  together  one  new  idea.  A compound  of  the 
same  verb  and  prefix  may  therefore  be  both  sepa- 
rable and  inseparable  according  to  its  meaning, 
as  in  the  following  examples  : 


(a)  Separable  and  Literal. 

(Accent  on  Prefix,  Trans,  and  Intr.) 

fcurdj'reifen,  pass  (travel) 
through,  as : 

©r  iff  gefterrt  f;ier  imrdj'geretft. 
He  passed  through  here 
yesterday. 

Ijin'tergefyen,  go  behind 


fi'berfel5en(tr.  or  intr.),  cross ; 

jump  over,  ferry  across,  as: 
©r  feijtc  mit  einem  ©grunge 
fiber.  He  jumped  over  at 
a bound. 

gdfyrmann,  bitte,  fefjcn  ©te  mid; 
fiber.  Ferryman, please  ferry 
me  across. 


(b)  Inseparable  and  Figurative. 
(Accent  on  Verb,  always  Trans.) 

burcbrei'feu,  traverse,  travel 
over,  as : 

©r  f >at  ba3  gartje  Sanb  bitrd)* 
reift',  He  has  traversed 
(travelled  over)  the  whole 
country. 

fyintergc'ljcit,  deceive,  as: 

©r  Ijinterging'  feinert  greunb, 
He  deceived  his  friend, 
iiberfeij'cn,  translate,  as : 

3d;  uberfe^e  cin  beutfcfye323ud;, 

I am  translating  a Ger- 
man book. 


208]  prefixes  separable  and  inseparable. 


243 


wn'tcrfd/retkn,  write  under, 
subscribe,  as : 

©djretbcu  ©te  3^ren  9?ame« 
fyier  unttr.  Subscribe  your 
name  here. 

Uttt'gefien,  go  round,  as : 

©ie  miiffen  um'ge^en.  You  must 
go  round. 

boll'gtejjen,  pour  full,  as: 

(Sr  gojj  ba§  ©la§  bod,  He 
poured  the  glass  full. 


unterf^rci'fictt,  sign,  as : 

l)abe  ben  53rief  nod;  nt$t 
unteririjric'ben,  I have  not 
yet  signed  the  letter. 

umge'jjctt,  evade,  as : 

SJian  umging'  ba§  ©efe|.  They 
evaded  the  law. 

bodeit'bcn,  complete,  as : 
fyabe  metne  2(rbeit  bod* 
cn'bel,  I have  completed 
my  work. 


Notes.  — 1.  These  separable  prepositional  prefixes  are  only  rarely 
used  with  the  verbs  given  above,  except  as  prepositions  proper,  governing 
% case,  as : 

(Sr  fling  tyinter  ben  Ofen  (urn  bas  §cut$), 

He  went  behind  the  stove  (around  the  house). 

2.  The  adverb  tuietier  is  separable,  except  in  tBicfcCl’tyo'fcn,  repeat  (but 
tnic/&ert)Olen,  fetch  again). 

3.  Many  compounds  with  these  prefixes  are  used  as  inseparable  com- 
pounds only;  others  as  separable  only. 


Vocabulary. 


to  meet  with,  an  treffen 
give  up,  auf'gefren 
cease,  stop,  auf'fyoren 
open,  auf'mac^en 
leave  out,  omit,  aus'Iaffen 
pronounce,  auS'fprecfyen 
assist,  aid,  bet'ftefyen 
go  away,  fort'gefyen 
come  out,  I)erau3'fommen 
come  in,  fyevein'fommen 


set  (of  the  sun,  etc.),  urt'ter* 
gefyert 

read  to,  bor'te[en  (+  dat.  of 
leave,  berlafjen  [pers.) 

promise,  berfprecfjen 
present',  introduce,  bor'ftetten 
(+  acc.  and  dat.) 
go  past,  pass  by,  bor&ei'gefyeit 
close,  shut,  ju'madjen 
come  back,  juritcffotmnen 


244 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


[§208 


collide,  jufam  menftofjert  marriage  (-ceremony),  bie 

send  to,  ju'fcfnden  (+  dat.)  ©rauung 


coffee,  ber  Haffee 
Northern  Railway,  bie  -Kerb's 
eifenbafm 
slave,  ber  ©flabe 

even  if,  ii 


pale,  bletd; 
by  heart,  attS'toenbig 
since,  feitbem'  (adv.  and  conj.) 
closed,  shut  (predicate),  ju 
n . . . aud; 


Idioms:  1.  What  is  the  matter  ivith  him?  20a8  Ijut  er? 

2.  He  feels  ill,  tft  311  SHute ; or:  <B  if!  ifjtn  fdjledji  3U 

mutt. 

8.  To  translate  into  German,  Scutfdje  wfccrfcijett. 

4.  In  fine  weather,  23ei  [tfjdncm  SBctlcr. 

6.  If  you  please,  2Bcitu  iff)  fitlten  fcarf  (lit.,  If  I may  ask). 


EXERCISE  XXXVI. 

A.  1.  23ergtf$  nid;t,  ba§  genfter  jugumacfien,  toenn  bu  ba3 
dimmer  berlajit.  2.  2Ba§  man  auffcfiiebt,  fommt  felten  ju  ©tanbe. 
3.  $omten  ©ie  mir  fagen,  tote  biefe^  SBort  auf  ©eutfef)  au§ge= 
fprod;en  toirb?  4.  SReine  ©cfytoeftern  famen  mir  entgegen,  aber 
leiber  baben  fie  mid;  nid;t  angetroffen.  5.  S5iete  baben  toerfprocfien, 
un§  beiguftef;en,  aber  nur  toenige  l;aben  un§  toirflid;  beigeftanben. 
6.  2Bir  finb  jeftf  mit  bent  erften  ©eile  be§  33ucf>e§  beinalje  fertig  ; 
nacfyfte  2Bod;e  fangen  toir  an,  ben  jtoeitett  ©eil  jit  iiberfefjen.  7. 
gtoei  3uge  ftnb  auf  ber  SRorbeifenbafjn  jufammengeftofjen.  8. 
fyorte  auf  ju  fingen,  tueil  id;  ^eifer  tourbe.  9.  SReitt  ICater  madde 
ben  93rief  auf  unb  Ia§  benfelben  ber  gamilie  Dor.  10.  2Ber  ein= 
mal  liigt,  bent  glaubt  man  nid;t,  unb  toenn  er  aud;  bie  3Bal;rf>eit 
fpridjt.  11.  £mben  ©ie  bie  geitung  befommen,  bie  id;  lyljnen 
ber  ©tabt  jugefd;idt  babe?  12.  @ffen  ©ie  getoofytdid;  in  ber  ©tabt 
ju  SRittag?  13.  $ja  toofd,  id;  gelje  jeben  ©ag  urn  neun  llf;r  fort 
unb  fomme  erft  urn  fecbS  lU;r  juriid.  14.  SRandjer  (;at  angefattgett, 
toa§  er  nid^t  bodenbet  l;at.  15.  Httfere  -Kad;bam  mitfjen  toobl 
fort  fein,  benn  a lie  Sabett  finb  bei  il;nen  ju.  16.  $ommen  ©ie 
bod;  fierein;  id;  toil!  ©ie  §errn  33raun  borftellen.  17.  ^d) 
banle  bielntal3,  aber  icf>  bin  if>m  fd'on  borgefteHt  toorben.  18.  33ei 


§ 208] 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 


245 


fdjonem  SBetter  gefyen  fair  urtferm  3Sater  erttgegen,  toettn  er  ttacfy 
ipaufe  fommt.  19.  ginbet  bie  framing  33etter£  morgen 

ober  iibermorgen  ftatt  ? 20.  2BoUen  ©ie  eine  S'affe  £fyee?  ©eben 
©ie  mir  lie&cr  eine  Staff e $affee. 

B.  1.  The  Reformation  took  place  in  the  sixteenth  century. 
2.  Have  you  closed  all  the  doors  and  windows  ? 3.  What  is 

the  matter  with  you  ? You  look  so  pale.  4.  I do  not  know; 
since  I have  come  back,  1 do  not  feel  at  all  well.  5.  In  the 
year  1865  all  slaves  in  the  United  States  were  set  free.  6. 
Have  you  opened  the  letters  which  have  just  arrived  ? 7.  The 
sun  sets  earlier  now,  and  the  weather  begins  to  grow  colder. 
8.  Mary  is  learning  a poem  by  heart ; she  has  already  repeated 
it  ten  times.  9.  Have  you  found  out  at  what  o’clock  the 
meeting  takes  place  ? 10.  Do  you  know  the  gentleman  who 

has  just  gone  past  ? 11.  When  we  were  going  past  the  church, 
the  people  were  just  coming  out.  12.  Pay  attention  to  youi 
work ; you  always  leave  out  words,  when  you  are  copying. 
13.  Why  have  you  closed  the  window  ? I was  beginning  to 
catch  cold.  14.  I have  tried  to  learn  this  poem,  but  it  is 
too  hard  for  me,  and  I have  given  it  up  at  last.  15.  Goethe’s 
‘Faust’  has  been  translated  into  English  by  Bayard  Taylor 
16.  The  marriage  of  my  brother  takes  place  to-morrow  at 
eleven  o’clock. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXVI. 

1.  In  welchem  Jahre  wurden  die  Sklaven  in  den  Ver- 
einigten  Staaten  freigelassen  ? 2.  Lernst  du  gern  Gedichte 

auswendig  ? 3.  Glauben  Sie,  dass  unsere  Nachbarn  fort  sind  ? 
4.  Kennen  Sie  den  Mann,  deram  Hause  vorbeigeht  ? 5.  Wer 
hat  diesen  Brief  aufgemacht  ? 6.  Wie  sprechen  Sie  das  Wort 
G-o-e-t-h-e  aus  ? 


246 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  E. 


[§§20£- 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  E. 

ON  CERTAIN  PREFIXES. 

209.  The  Inseparable  Prefix  wig-. 

The  particle  tni§-  is  inseparable,  but : 

(a)  With  certain  verbs  it  takes  the  gc-  of  the  P.  Part,  and  $tt  of  the 
Infin.  after  it,  as  : 

mi&'ljanbetn,  act  amiss  miB'gefjartbelt  nUg'jufjaitbeln 
With  other  verbs  tttifj-  either  : 

(b)  Has  ge-  before  it,  as : 

ttiiBljau'betn,  ill-treat  P.  Part.  gemife'fjcutbeft — or: 

(c)  Drops  ge-  altogether,  as : 

tmftfanett,  displease  P.  Part.  miftfal'len 
Note.  — Observe  that  the  principal  accent: 
under  (a)  is  on  the  prefix  throughout ; 

“ ( b ) is  on  the  prefix  in  the  P.  Part,  only,  otherwise  on  the  verb; 

*'  (c)  is  on  the  verb  throughout. 

210.  Use  of  tpie  Prefixes  Ijer-  and  gin-. 

1.  The  particles  Ijer  (*  hither  ’)  and  fjt!t  ( ‘ hence  ’)  are  prefixed  to  verbs, 
both  simple  and  compound,  to  indicate  the  direction  towards  or  from 
the  speaker  respectively,  as : 

Hcmmcn  ©te  fjcr,  Come  here  (hither,  to  me). 

(Deceit  ©ie  l)ilt,  Go  (there)  thither  (hence,  from  me). 

Hence,  a person  standing  up-stairs  would  say  to  one  below: 

$ommen  ©ie  fjevcmf,  Come  up  here  (up-stairs); 
but  to  one  up-stairs  : 

©eljen  ©ie  [jinunter,  Go  down  there  (down-stairs). 

2.  The  simple  prepositional  adverbs  aft-,  an-,  auf-,  QU0-,  citt-  meber-, 
fiber-,  ttntcr-,  unt-,  Dot-  are  only  used  with  verbs  of  motion,  when  the 
compound  verb  denotes  motion  in  a general  way,  without  specified 
direction,  or  when  it  has  lost  the  idea  of  motion  altogether. 


211] 


USE  OF  THE  PREFIXES. 


247 


3.  (a)  When,  with  au#-and  hot*-,  also  with  oB-in  the  sense  of  ‘down/ 

the  place  from  which  the  motion  proceeds  is  implied,  but  not 
specified,  the  direction  to  or  from  the  speaker  is  further  indic- 
ated by  prefixing  (jet-  and  (jin-  respectively. 

(6)  When,  with  the  remaining  prefixes  (ait-,  llllf-,  etc.),  the  place  to 
which  the  motion  is  directed  is  implied,  but  not  specified,  (jet- 
or  Bttt-  is  similarly  prefixed. 

4.  The  following  examples  will  serve  to  show  more  clearly  the  differ- 
ence between  verbs  with  the  simple  prefixes  and  those  with  f)Ct-  or  ^itt— I 


(a)  With  Simple  Prefix  : 

auSgeljen,  go  out  (for  a walk,  on 
business,  etc.) 
fcOtsieljen,  prefer 
a&fteigen,  dismount 
anfommen,  arrive 

ii&ergeljett,  desert  [perish 

ttlttcrgeljen,  set  (of  the  sun);  sink; 

5.  When  the  place  from  or  to  which  respectively  is  specified,  these  words 
are  used  as  prepositions  proper , governing  a substantive,  but  may  be  re- 
peated as  adverbial  prefixes  with  (jet  or  (jin,  as : 

(Sr  ging  nu$  bent  dimmer  (BtnattS). 

(Sr  $og  ben  23rief  au3  ber  Safdje  (IjcrauS). 

Notes.  — 1.  25b-,  meaning  ‘off,  away/  does  not  require  these  prefixes,  as: 

abrefien,  abgeljen,  to  depart,  go  off;  — but:  binabgefyeit,  to  go  down. 

2.  (?in-  is  replaced, when  the  place  to  which  is  specified,  by  the  preposition  in  with  the 
accusative,  as : 

©r  ritt  in  bie  Stabt  binein. 


(£)  With  Bet-  or  (jin-: 

(jinaitSgeljen,  go  out  (from  the 
house) 

(jerborsicljen,  draw  forth 
(jerabfieigen,  descend 
Beranfommen,  come  up  to,  ap- 
proach 

Bintibergeljen,  go  over,  across 
Btnnntergeljen,godown  (stairs, etc.) 


3.  Sometimes  other  prepositions  are  used  to  indicate  the  place  from  or  to  which,  in  which 
case  the  compound  prefix  is  used,  as : 

tnerbe  nad)  Chtropa  btniibergefyeit,  I shall  go  over  to  Europe. 

(Sr  ift  00m  2)ad>e  berabgefaUen,  He  has  fallen  down  from  the  roof. 

Other  Prefixes. 


211.  Verbs  derived  from  compound  substantives  are  treated  as 
simple  Verbs,  as : 

£)a3  the  breakfast,  frul/ftucfen,  to  breakfast ; id)  friiB'* 

ftiicfte,  gefruB'ftucft 


248 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  E. 


[§§2IX 


2)ie  ^anb'fjabe,  the  handle,  Ijanb'fyabeit,  to  handle;  fjanfc^abte, 
geljattb'lja&t. 

2)er  SRat'jcfjIag,  the  counsel,  rat'fdjtagen,  to  take  counsel ; rat7* 
fcf)Iagte,  gerat'fdjfagt. 

Note. — Observe  that  all  such  verbs  are  weak,  as  in  the  case  of  the  last  two  of  the 
above  verbs,  which  are  not  compounds  of  Ijaben  or  fd)lagen  respectively. 

212.  Adjective  Prefixes  are  frequently  inseparable,  but  retain  the 
principal  accent  and  require  ge-  before  them  in  the  P.  Part.,  as : 

toeift'fagen,  to  prophesy,  toetfHagte,  gctoeifjfagt;  recfjt'fertigen, 
to  justify,  redji'ferttgte,  geredjt'fertigt;  Ueb'fofen,  to  caress,  licb'* 
fofte,  gelieb'foft ; 
also  the  substantive  compound : 

lufi'roanbeln,  to  walk  for  pleasure,  gefuft'ttxmbelt. 

213.  Some  verbs  with  Separable  -f-  Inseparable  Prefix  are  used 
only  in  constructions  which  do  not  require  the  separation  of  the  former 
particle  from  the  verb ; thus  we  may  say : 

(£f)riftU0  ift  auievftanben,  Christ  is  risen  from  the  dead, — or: 

5H0  (Ef)riftu0  auferftctnb,  — but  instead  of : 

(Sr  erftcmb  auf,  — we  say:  (Sr  ftanb  bon  hen  $oten  auf. 

Similarly  with  auSerfefert,  borentfjalten,  and  a few  others. 

EXERCISE  E. 

1.  Have  you  answered  all  the  letters  ? I have  answered  all  except  this 
one.  2.  I have  asked  my  sister,  if  (whether)  she  is  ready,  but  she  has 
not  answered.  3.  She  has  gone  up-stairs ; perhaps  she  has  not  heard. 
4.  Let  her  come  down,  for  I cannot  wait  for  her  any  longer.  5.  I should 
like  to  speak  to  your  father ; is  he  at  home  ? 6.  Yes,  he  is  up-stairs  in  his 
study ; please  go  up.  7.  Some  one  is  shouting  in  the  street ; go  out  and 
see  what  is  the  matter.  8.  Are  you  going  out  to-day  ? I am  going  out,  as 
soon  as  I have  breakfasted.  9.  George,  go  out  of  the  room ; you  have 
been  behaving  badly.  10.  Many  people  say  that  Mr.  B.  has  acted  amiss 
in  this  affair,  but  he  has  justified  himself.  11.  We  started  so  early  yes- 
terday morning  that  we  had  no  time  to  breakfast.  12.  Several  people  were 
standing  on  (auf)  the  street  before  a burning  house,  and  were  looking  up. 
13.  A poor  woman  with  her  child  was  on  the  point  of  jumping  down.  14.  At 
last  a fireman  went  up  and  saved  both  [of  them].  15.  The  boy  has  abused 
his  dog,  and  therefore  he  was  punished  by  his  father.  16.  The  dog  was 
howling  in  the  street,  but  some  one  went  out  and  brought  him  in. 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 


249 


ai5l 


LESSON  XXXVII. 


REFLEXIVE  AND  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

Reflexive  Verbs. 


214.  1.  All  Reflexive  Verbs  are  conjugated  with  Jjafictt. 
For  an  example  of  their  conjugation  see  § 41,  and  observe 
the  use  of  fitfj  as  special  reflexive  of  the  third  person  for  all 
genders  and  both  numbers. 

2.  The  reflexive  pronoun  is  introduced  as  near  to  the 
beginning  of  the  sentence  as  possible,  sometimes  even  before 
the  subject,  when  the  latter  follows  the  verb  and  is  not  a 
pronoun,  and  especially  if  the  subject  has  adjuncts,  as : 

©eftern  fjat  fid)  mein  lieber,  alter  SSater  befdjabigt, 

My  dear  old  father  injured  himself  yesterday. 


215.  1.  Any  transitive  verb  may  be  used  reflexively,  when 
the  action  of  the  verb  is  on  the  subject ; but  Reflexive  Verbs 
proper  are  : 

(a)  Those  which  are  used  only  reflexively,  especially  such 
as  indicate  a state  of  mind  or  feeling , as  : 


ficfy  beffei^en  (gen.),)  apply 
n befleijjigen,  j one’s  self 
„ begniigm  (mil),  be  con- 
tented 

„ befimten  (gen.),  recollect 
„ erbarmen  (gen.),  take  pity, 
have  mercy 
„ erfdlien,  catch  cold 


fid;  gramen  (gen.,  or  liber  + 
acc.),  grieve 

u fcfydmen  (gen.,  or  liber  4- 
acc.),  be  ashamed 
„ fefynen  (nacf)),  long  (for), 
yearn 

„ tounbern  (iiber  + acc.),  be 
astonished 


(J?)  Those  which,  though  used  also  as  transitive  verbs, 
have  a special  meanmg  as  reflexives,  as  : 
frcuen  (impers.),  rejoice  (tr.),  freuen  (gen.,  or  liber + acc.), 
make  glad  rejoice  (intr.),  be  glad 

IT 


250 


LESSON  XXXVII. 


[§§  215~~ 


fiirdjtcn,  fear 


fir^  fiirdjtcn  (bor  + dat.),  be 


Ijiitcn,  protect 
{Men,  place 
betlaffen,  leave 


afraid 

„ Ijitten  (bor  + dat.),  beware 
„ ftellen,  pretend 
„ berlaffen  (auf  + acc.), 


jutragen,  carry  (to) 


rely  (upon) 

„ jutragen  (impers.)  hap- 


pen, occur 


2.  Transitive  verbs  are  often  used  in  English  with  the  direct 
(personal)  object  unexpressed,  e.  g.,  ‘change,  turn,  open, 
spread/  etc. ; such  verbs  have  the  object  expressed  in  German 
as  the  reflexive  pronoun,  e.  g. : 

The  weather  has  changed,  2)a§ -Setter  fyat  fidj  geanbert. 

The  wind  is  turning  to  the  east,  £)er  SSirtb  brefyt  ftdj 

rxai)  Often. 

The  door  opened,  ®ie  S^iir  offnete  fid). 

The  disease  was  spreading  over  the  whole  town,  ®ie 
$ranff>eit  berbreitete  fid)  iiber  bie  ganje  ©tabt. 

3.  For  the  use  of  Reflexive  Verbs  for  the  Passive  Voice, 
see  § 1 14,  (< b ). 

4.  From  what  has  been  said  above,  it  will  be  evident  that 
Reflexive  Verbs  are  used  to  a much  greater  extent  in  German 
than  in  English,  which  indeed  has  no  Reflexive  Verbs  in  the 
strict  sense  defined  above. 

216.  Government  of  Reflexive  Verbs. 

1.  All  true  reflexives  take  the  reflexive  {personal)  object 
in  the  accusative ; the  remote  object  (the  thing)  is  in  the 
genitive,  or  is  governed  by  a preposition,  as  shown  in  the 
examples  given  in  § 215,  1,  above,  thus  : 


217]  MPERSONAL  VERBS.  25  T 

3$  fd^dme  tntd)  meine3  33etragen§,  I am  ashamed  of 
my  behaviour. 

Grirmerft  bu  bid)  bcffcnni^t?  Do  you  not  remember  it? 

SBtr  fefyrtten  un3  nadj  unferer  Gutter,  We  longed  for 
our  mother. 

3$  erbarmte  midj  feiner,  I had  pity  upon  him. 

2.  Some  spurious  reflexives  have  the  reflexive  (persona/) 
object  in  the  dative,  and  the  thing  in  the  accusative,  as : 
3$  fann  nttr  ba3  benfen,  I can  imagine  that. 

3d)  bilbete  tlttr  bte3  nur  etn,  I only  imagined  this. 

Note.  — ©id)  fdjmeidjeht  takes  the  dative  of  the  person  with  a clause 
as  direct  object,  thus: 

3d)  fd)metd)efle  nttr,  baft  idj  eg  tfjun  fonnte,  I flattered  myself, 
that  I could  do  it. 

217.  Impersonal  Verbs. 

Impersonal  Verbs  Proper  are  those  used  only  in  the 
third  person  sing.,  with  the  neuter  pronoun  e3  as  subject. 

1.  Those  expressing  Natural  phenomena,  as : 

e3  fcfyneit,  it  snows  e3  blitff,  it  lightens 

e3  regnet,  it  rains  e3  bonnert,  it  thunders,  etc. 

also  with  the  verbs  feirt  or  toerben,  as  : 

@3  ift  (totrb)  fait,  Inarm,  bunfel,  etc.,  It  is  (grows)  cold, 
warm,  dark,  etc. 

(S3  ift  (fcfylcigt)  fiirtf.  It  is  (strikes)  five. 

2.  Those  expressing  bodily  or  mental  affections 
(a)  with  accicsative  of  person. 

63  friert  mid),  I am  (feel)  cold. 

63  bevlangt  micf)  (nad;),  I am  (feel)  desirous. 

63  freut  mtcfy,  I am  glad  (it  rejoices  me). 

63  ftmrtbert  mi$,  I wonder  (it  makes  me  wonder). 


2 52 


LESSON  XXXVII. 


[§§  2i 7- 


©§  jammert  mtd£)  (gen.),  I pity  (it  moves  me  to  pity). 

©3  reut  mid)  (gen.),  I repent  (it  rues  me),  etc. 

( b ) with  Dative  of  person. 

©3  biinft  (beucfyt)  tnir,  Methinks. 

©§  gelirtgt  trttr,  I succeed,  etc. 

(e)  with  fetn  or  toerben  ( Dative  of  person),  as : 

©§  ift  (totrb)  nut  iibel,  tool)  l (ju  SJiute),  I feel  ill,  well 
(it  is  ill,  well  to  or  with  me  in  spirit). 

©3  ift  lltir  lieb,  leib,  I am  glad,  sorry  (it  is  dear,  sad 
to  me). 

Note.  — In  this  class  of  verbs  the  subject  is  omitted  when  the  per- 
sonal object  precedes  the  verb,  as:  mid)  ttmttbcrt,  etc. 

3.  Verbs  used  impersonally  with  a special  sense,  as : 

2Bie  mit  ^fynen?  How  fares  it  with  you? 

©3  geljf  mir  gut,  I am  well. 

3Bd§  giebt^ ? What  is  the  matter? 

23a§  fcljft  Sfynen?  What  ails  you? 

Also  feirt  and  toerbert,  as  under  1 and  2,  (c),  above. 

4.  For  the  impersonal  use  of  the  passive  voice,  see  §113. 

Note.  — Of  the  above  classes,  those  alone  are  strictly  impersonal 
which  admit  only  of  e3  as  subject;  others,  which  are  used  with  other  sub- 
jects, but  only  in  the  third  person  (sometimes  plur.  as  well  as  sing.)  are 
properly  called  unipersonal. 

218.  Conjugation  of  Impersonal  Verbs. 

1.  Impersonal  Verbs  form  their  various  tenses,  moods,  etc., 
in  precisely  the  same  way  as  other  verbs,  but  are  used  only 
in  the  third  person  singular. 

2.  Some  are  weak,  others  strong,  as : 

frieren,  to  freeze,  Impf.  e3  fror,  gefrorctt;  fcfyrteien,  to 
snow,  Impf.  e3  f cfyrteite,  P.  Part,  gefd^neit. 


2ig]  GOVERNMENT  OF  IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  253 

3.  Most  of  them  are  conjugated  with  fyabett,  as : 

@3  {jut  gefdjneit,  gefroren,  etc.; 

but  some  take  fern,  e.  g.,  gelirtgen,  glucfen,  to  succeed ; gefcfyefyen, 
to  happen  (compare  § 53),  as : 

@3  ift  gefcfyefyen,  It  has  happened. 

219.  Government  of  Impersonal  Verbs. 

1.  Impersonal  Verbs  expressing  bodily  or  mental  affections, 
etc.,  take  the  immediate  (personal)  object  (==  Engl,  subj.)  in 
the  Dative  or  Accusative  (see  § 217,  2,  3,  above). 

2.  Those  under  § 217,  2,  ( a ),  denoting  a mental  affection 
may  be  used 

( a ) impersonally,  with  the  thing  ( cause  of  emotion) 
in  the  genitive,  as : 

@3  jammert  mid)  fritter,  I pity  him  (it  moves  me  to 
pity  of  him). 

@3  reuet  mid)  meincr  ©iinbert,  I repent  (it  makes  me 
repent)  of  my  sins. 

( b ) personally,  with  the  thing  (cause  of  emotion)  as 
subject,  as: 

(Sr  jammert  mid},  I pity  him  (he  moves  me  to  pity) . 

Sftetne  ©itnben  reuctt  (pi.)  mid),  I repent  of  my  sins 
(my  sins  move  me  to  repentance). 

Remark. — Observe  that  the  English  subject  is  object 
in  German,  the  verb  remaining  always  in  the  third  person, 
as: 

(S3  freut  mid),  I am  glad. 

<S$  freut  btdj.  Thou  art  glad. 

(S3  freut  iljn,  He  is  glad. 

(ItS  freut  uttS,  We  are  glad,  etc. 


254 


LESSON  XXXVII. 


[§  220 


220.  There  is,  there  are,  etc. 

1.  The  English  there  is,  there  are  (was,  were,  has  been, 
will  be,  etc.)  must  be  rendered  in  German  by  giebt  (gab, 
fyat . . . gegeben,  toirb  ...  geben,  etc.),  when  an  indefinite  ex- 
istence is  expressed,  or  in  general  assertions,  as  : 

@8  gab  fritter  fciele  Seute,  foeld^e  glaubten,  etc.,  There 
were  formerly  many  people  who  believed,  etc. 

(iS  toirb  biefeS  ^ahx  biele  ^flaumert  geben,  There  will 
be  a great  many  plums  this  year. 

Remarks. — i.  The  English  subject  is  object  of  giebt  in 
German,  and  is  in  the  accusative , as : 

@3  giebt  eincn  foment  (acc.)  turn  £>ic£en§,  tuelcber  //5TJifoIa§ 
SJIidlebty"  fyeifst,  There  is  a novel  (nom.)  by  Dickens, 
called  6 Nicholas  Nickleby.’ 

2.  The  verb  (gebert)  is  always  in  the  singular  in  German, 
being  a true  impersonal ; and  e§  is  never  omitted,  as : 

SDiefeS  %ai)x  giebt  e§,  etc. 

2.  There  is,  etc.,  must  be  rendered  into  German  by  eS  ifl, 
t$  filth  (e§  toctr,  etc.),  when  definite  existence  is  expressed,  or 
in  particular  assertions,  as  : 

<SS  if!  ein  SSogel  in  biefem  S3auer,  There  is  a bird  in 
this  cage. 

<g£  fiitb  gtt>ei  ffiogel  auf  biefem  33aume,  There  are  two 
birds  on  this  tree. 

Remarks. — i.  The  English  subject  is  also  subject  (nomi- 
native) in  German,  as : 

ift  ein  Stotmtn  (nom.)  t>on  ©icfenS  auf  bem  3;if<f>, 

There  is  a novel  (nom.)  by  Dickens  on  the  table. 

2.  The  verb  (feirt)  agrees  in  number  with  the  real  subject, 
and  e£  is  omitted,  unless  it  begins  the  sentence,  as : 


THERE  IS,  THERE  ARE. 


255 


§220] 


©in  SSogel  ifi  in  biefem  Sauer,  There  is  a bird,  etc. 

Note.  — This  shows  that  c$  is  the  indefinite  e§,  replacing  the  real  sub- 
ject (see  § 39,  1),  and  not  the  impersonal  e$. 

Vocabulary. 


to  dress  (trans.),  an'fleiben 
dress  (intr.),  fid)  an!Ieiben 
resolve,  decide,  ftcfy  entfd)  lichen 
explain,  erflaren 
be  mistaken,  fid)  irren 
turn  around  (intr.),  fid^  urn's 
breljen 

get  married,  marry  (intr.),  fid^ 
herljei'raten 

marry  (trans.),  fyei'raten 
hurt  (wound),  fcerlet$en 


lightning,  ber  33Ii% 
thirst,  ber  ®urft 
lemonade,  bie  Cimonabe 
caterpillar,  bie  3taupe 
sleighing,  bie  ©dfdittenbafyn 
way,  mode,  bie  SBeife 
successful(ly),  gliicflid; 
now-a-days,  fyeut^utage 
long  (adv.),  Idngft 
past,  fcorbei 

in  all  ages,  ju  alien  geiien 


Idioms:  1.  I feel  well,  SDfcfr  ifi  tttofd  511  SfRute. 

2.  He  has  married  the  daughter  of  the  doctor,  (Sr  fcat  ftcfc 
tuft  ber  Zod)tev  feed  ^oftord  t>  erf)  et  rate  t. 

3.  In  this  way,  5luf  t*fcfe  2Beffe  (acc.). 

4.  I was  hungry  (thirsty),  3d)  fcatte  hunger  ($urfl). 


EXERCISE  XXXVII. 

A.  1.  @§  bonnert,  urtb  icb  furefite,  c§  toirb  bafb  regnen.  2.  tlm 
tote  toiet  11  (jr  toirb  bci  ifjfmen  ju  fDiittag  gegeffen?  3.  bat 
todfirenb  ber  3RadE;t  gefroren  unb  fieute  toerben  toir  ©cfilittfdbub 
laufett  fbnnen.  4.  2Be§f>afb  bonnert  e§,  toenn  e§  bli|t?  S)a4 
lafjt  fid?  niefit  leiefit  erflaren.  5.  Jjd?  fiabe  meinen  beften  §unb 
berloren ; fo  ein  §unb  finbet  fid;  nid;t  leiebt  ioieber.  6.  freut 
un§  fefr,  bafj  §einritf;  fein  (Sjamen  glitdlicf;  beftanben  l;at.  7.  ^d; 
fiird^te,  e§  toirb  biefe§  Safir  nur  toenige  $jpfel  geben ; bie  Staupen 
fyaben  faft  alte  flatter  bon  ben  33aunten  gefreffen.  8.  ©uten 
fDiorgen,  §err  Skaun;  giebt’S  finite  ettoa§  fj?eue§?  9.  SEUein 
altefter  SSritber  fiat  fid;  berbeivatet.  10.  5DJit  toem  fiat  er  ficfi  ber= 
beiratet  ? 11.  9Jlit  ber  Siodjter  bes  fDoftor  S3. ; erinnem  ©ie  [id? 


256 


LESSON  XXXVII. 


nicfytifyrer?  12.  ©cbmeicbeln  ©te  ftcb,  baft  e§  3bnen  auf  bxefe 
SBetfe  gelirtgen  toirb?  ©te  ^aben  nic^t  ©elb  genug.  13.  ^d; 
babe  biel  me^r  ©elb  ate  id;  braucbe ; icb  tDiirbe  micb  mit  ber  ipalfte 
begnugt  babert.  14.  Gte  toiirbe  mid;  gar  nid^t  ftmnbern,  menu  fair 
nod;  bcute  9tegen  befamen.  15.  2Ite  icb  an  bem  §aufe  boruber* 
ging,  dffnete  ficb  bie  ©b^  unb  ein  alter  §err  Jam  ^erau§. 
16.  ©id)  friert;  bu  foUteft  beinen  tlberjieljer  anjieben.  17.  Gte 
faaren  nocb  biele  Seute  auf  ber  ©trafte,  ate  icb  nad;  §aufe  lam. 
18.  @3  fairb  bid;  balb  beine§  93etragen3  reuen,  faenn  id;  micb  nid&t 
irre  ; bu  foUteft  bid;  fcbamen.  19.  @3  giebt  b^atjutage  ©I;oren, 
unb  leiber  bat  e§  ju  alien  3eiten©boren  gegeben.  20.  ©ie  fonnen 
fidb  benfen,  baft  e3  midb  faunberte,  ate  icb  midb  umbrebte  unb 
meinen  Icingft  berlornen  $reunb  bor  mir  fab. 

B . 1.  Are  you  afraid  when  it  lightens?  2.  Yes,  I am  always 
afraid  of  the  lightning.  3.  What  is  the  matter  with  you? 
You  do  not  look  at  all  well.  4.  I do  not  know  what  ails  me  ; 
I do  not  feel  well,  perhaps  I have  caught  cold.  5.  It  has  been 
snowing  the  whole  night,  and  to-day  we  have  tine  sleighing. 

6.  Have  you  hurt  yourself  ? Yes,  I have  cut  my  finger. 

7.  There  are  two  gentlemen  at  the  door ; do  you  know  them  ? 

8.  I know  one  of  them,  but  I cannot  remember  his  name. 

9.  I must  dress  immediately,  or  else  I shall  not  be  ready  at 
seven  o’clock.  10.  If  you  do  not  dress  more  warmly,  you  will 
catch  cold.  11.  I am  thirsty;  please  give  me  a glass  of 
lemonade.  12.  I am  glad  that  the  thunder-storm  is  past;  the 
lightning  is  dangerous.  13.  Do  you  remember  whether  he 
was  here  on  the  15th  or  on  the  16th  of  January  ? 14.  Have  you 
decided  to  leave  (the)  town,  and  to  pass  the  summer  in  the 
country?  15.  I hear  somebody  shouting  in  the  street ; what 
is  the  matter  ? 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXVII. 

1.  Sollte  man  sich  vor  dem  Donner  fiirchten  ? 2.  Wie 

lange  wohnen  Sie  schon  in  dieser  Strasze?  3.  Stehen  Sie 


223] 


PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 


257 


gewohnlich  friih  des  Morgens  auf  ? 4.  Weshalb  hast  du  die 

Fenster  zugemacht  ? 5.  Wie  gefallt  es  Ihnen  in  diesein 

Hause  ? 6.  Wird  es  dieses  Jahr  viele  Pflaumen  geben? 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

221.  The  Prepositions  with  the  Dative  only  have  been 
given  in  §§46,  51  ; those  with  the  Accusative  only  in 
§§  34?  5°;  those  with  Dative  or  Accusative  in  § 65. 

Prepositions  with  the  Genitive. 

222.  The  Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive  are  chiefly 
nouns  used  adverbially.  The  following  lines  contain  the 
principal  ones,  and  will  aid  the  memory : 

Itntocit,  mittclft,  fraff  imb  toiiljrenb, 
fiaut,  tonnage,  ungeacfjiet, 

DkrljaUi  unb 
3mtcr^ttI6  unb  aufjcrfjalti, 

$ie§feit,  fcnfcit,  TjaHicn,  tuegen, 

©tatt,  aucf)  Iiing§,  jufolge,  tra£ 

©tefyen  mit  bent  ©cnitit) ; 

&od)  ift  f^ter  nicfyt  $u  bergeffert, 
bet  btefen  lenten  brei 
2lucfy  ber  ricfyit g jet. 

223.  The  meanings  of  these  prepositions  are  as  follows : 

1.  WKett),  )forthe  sake  of> 

on  account  of 

2.  tuegen,  ) 

Remarks. — 1.  §alb(en),  fyalber,  always  follows  the  case; 
toegen  may  follow  or  precede  a noun,  but  always  follows 
a personal  pronoun. 


258 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 


[§  223 


2.  fwlt)  is  used  only  in  behalf)  and  mfyalh ; !jalf>cn  after 
the  personal  pronouns  or  substantives  with  a determinative 
or  attributive  word ; Ijalbcr  after  a substantive  used  alone,  as : 

$rieben§  fyalben.  For  the  sake  of  peace. 

33eifyiel3  falter,  For  the  sake  of  example. 

3.  The  personal  pronouns  have  a special  form  ending  in  -i 
before  fyctl&en  and  toegen,  thus  : 

meinetljal&en,  for  my  sake 
unf ertoegen,  on  our  account,  etc. 

3.  an^cr^affi,  (on  the)  outside  5.  flBerfjalB,  above 

of  6.  unterljttfl),  below 

4.  tnuerljaHi,  (on  the)  inside  of 

Examples  : 

Urtfer  ©arten  iff  auficrljafli  (tttttcr^alB)  ber  ©tabt. 

Our  garden  is  outside  (inside)  of  the  town. 

SfJJontreal  liegt  untcr^alfi  be£  DniariosSeeS, 

Montreal  lies  below  Lake  Ontario. 

Remark.  — in  expressions  of  time  may  be  fol- 

lowed by  the  dative  of  a substantive  without  article,  as  : 
^nnerfyalb  Jtoei  Sagett,  Within  two  days. 

7.  fraff,  by  virtue  of 


1 1.  Jttf olgc,  in  consequence  of 

Remark.  — ^ufolge  governs  the  genitive  when  it  precedes 
its  case,  but  the  dative  when  it  follows,  as  : 

@r  tl )at  bte§  jufotge  tneirte£  23efef)I§,  or  metnem  Sefefyle 
jufolge,  He  did  this  in  consequence  of  my  order. 

12.  bieSfcit,  on  this  side  13.  jcttfeii,  on  that  (the  other) 


8.  laut,  in  accordance  with 


side 


§223] 


PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  GENITIVE. 


259 


Remark.  — and  jenfeit  are  prepositions  (governing  a 

noun);  bte§feit§  and  jenfeit#  adverbs  (without  a case),  as : 

tooljne  bte^ett,  er  jenfeit  be§  gluffeS,  I live  on  this, 
he  on  that  (the  other)  side  of  the  river,  — but : 

SBtr  toofyrten  beibe  nafye  amgluffe;  id£)  bie3feit§,  er  jen* 
feit§.  We  both  live  near  the  river ; I on  this,  he  on 
the  other  side. 

14.  ftatt,  anflatf,  instead  of 

Remark.  — SInftatt  is  sometimes  divided,  thus : 

Stnftttft  meine§  33ruber§,  Instead  of  my  brother,  — or: 
9ln  meine§  33ruber§  Statt,  (In  my  brother’s  stead). 

15.  ungea<f)tet,  notwithstand-  16.  in  spite  of 
ing 

Remarks.  — i.  Hngead^tet  may  precede  or  follow  its  case. 

2.  governs  the  dative  in  the  phrase  troi$bent,  ‘ in  spite 
of  that/  and  with  the  meaning  of  4 as  well  as/  as  : 

®iefer  $rtaf>e  reitet  tvo|  einent  Marine,  This  boy  rides 


Remarks. — i.  2artg§  also  governs  the  dative , and  always 
precedes  its  case,  as  : 

SangS  be§  Ufer§,  or  bent  lifer,  Along  the  shore. 

2.  ©ntlang  governs  the  genitive  when  it  precedes  its  case; 
but  it  more  commonly  follows  its  case,  and  governs  the  accu- 
sative, as : 

@r  girtg  bm  entlang,  He  went  along  the  river. 

To  these  may  be  added : 

20.  angefid)t§,  in  presence  of  22.  utn . . . ttutfcn,  for  the  sake 

21.  itvnitten,  in  the  midst  of  of 


as  well  as  a man. 


17.  toiiljrcnb,  during  18.  ISng§, 

19.  entlang, 


26o 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 


l§§  223  * 


Remarks. — 1.  Um  . . . ftu Hen  takes  the  case  between  um  and 
toiflert,  as : 

Um  mcme0  9Sater§  Gillen,  For  my  father's  sake. 

2.  The  personal  pronouns  have  the  same  forms  with  um  . . • 
fthlfen  as  with  fyalben  and  toegen,  thus : 
um  feittef mitten,  for  his  sake 
um  f°r  y°ur  sake,  etc. 

23.  uttfern,  \ notfarfrom 

24.  untoctt,  ) 

224.  General  Remarks  on  Prepositions. 

1.  An  Adverb  of  direction  is  frequently  placed  after  an 
accusative,  like  a preposition  after  its  case,  as : 

2)ett  33erg  Ijiltauf,  Up  the  mountain. 

2.  (< a ) Some  prepositions  may  govern  a substantive  clause 

with  btt§,  as : 

@f)re  93ater  unb  Gutter,  auf  baf*  e§  btr  mofyl  gef>e. 
Honour  father  and  mother,  that  it  may  go  well  with  thee. 
Notes.  — 1.  Such  are  auf,  auger  (also  used  with  tocntt),  bi§,  oljne, 
(an)ftatt,  ungeadjtet,  tuafjvenb. 

2.  SBiS,  ungeadjtet,  ttmfyrenb  are  also  used  as  conjunctions  without  bag. 

( b ) Um,  oljne,  and  (an)ftatt  may  govern  an  infinitive 
with  ju,  as : 

@r  Jam  geftern,  um  bid)  ju  Befudjcn, 

He  came  yesterday  (in  order)  to  visit  you. 

3$  faun  nte  baran  benfen,  oljne  ju  ladjen, 

I can  never  think  of  that  without  laughing. 

©tefer  9Jlamt  follte  arbetfert,  anftatt  ju  bctfcln. 

This  man  ought  to  work,  instead  of  begging. 
Remark.  — But  if  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  clause  is 
different  from  that  of  the  sentence  on  which  it  depends,  baft 
must  be  used,  as  : 


GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  PREPOSITIONS. 


26l 


Q24] 


3d;  fonnte  ntd;t  borbeigefyen,  ofjne  ba§  er  tntd>  falj  (not 
oljne  micf)  ju  fe^en),  I could  not  pass  by  without  his 
seeing  me. 

3.  Prepositions  may  govern  adverbs,  as:  nacfy  0 ben,  up- 
ward ; nacfy  fyinten,  to  the  rear  ; cut f tmmer,  forever ; Don  fern, 
from  afar ; and  the  compounds  with  ba(r)-  and  ft)o(r)-  (see 
§ 38,  Rem.  s ; 83,  3 ; 96,  7). 

4.  A substantive  governed  by  a preposition  may  be  followed 
by  an  adverb,  for  nearer  definition,  as : 

SJltuf)  etner  9?tcf)tung  Ijiit,  In  one  direction. 

8S(JU  alien  ©etten  Ijcr,  From  all  sides. 

(Sr  ritt  Winter  bem  geinbe  Ijer,  He  rode  in  pursuit  of 
the  foe. 

Utn  bag  £>aug  fjentm,  Round  (about)  the  house. 

83on  nun  an,  From  henceforth. 

83an  Sugenb  auf,  From  youth  up. 


Vocabulary. 


to  observe,  remark,  bemerlen 
elect,  erfr)dt;len  (+  ju) 
permit,  allow,  erlauben 
inquire  (about),  fid^  erlunbtgen 
(+  nad;) 

go  about,  around,  fjerum'gefyen 
ring  (a  small  bell),  flingeln 
go  for  a walk,  fpajteren  gefyen 
divide,  teilen 

let  (of  houses,  etc.),  Dermteten 
go  away,  toeggefyen 
the  opposite,  bag  ©e'gentetl 
custom,  habit,  bte  ©etoobnfyeit 
microscope,  bag  SKifroffop' 


(the)  little  Red  (Riding) 
Hood,  bag  Stotfabb^en 
umbrella,  ber  9tegenfcf)irm 
drop,  ber  S^robfen 
drunkard,  ber  Srunfenbolb 
will,  testament,  bag  Seftamentf 
stairs,  staircase,  bte  ^reppe 
deceased,  ber  (bte)  93erftorbene 
warning,  bte  SSarnung 
living,  leben'oig 
loose,  slack,  log 
inwtime,  punctually,  re$f* 
geitig 

except  that,  aufter  baft 


26  2 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 


[§  224 


Idioms : 1.  For  all  I care, 

2.  This  house  is  for  sale,  2>iefe3  gauS  iff  3«  hcrlflufett  (lit.,  to  bo 
sold). 

8.  Ho  was  elected  mayor,  ©r  tourbe  311m  ©iircermeiftev  erUiafjU  (lit., 
to  or  for  a,  etc.,  — 3um  = 3U  cittern). 

4.  I have  been  here  for  a week,  6itt  felt  ttdjt  2fl0Ctt  I)ier. 

6.  To  laugh  (at),  make  sport  (of),  lujtifj  ntodjcn  (ti&cr  + acc.). 

6.  What  is  the  matter?  ift  Io3? 

7.  There  is  a ring  (at  the  door,  etc.),  (£3  tttngeU. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII. 

A.  1.  ©ag  §aug,  toelcfieg  ju  berfaufen  ift,  ftefyt  aufferfyalb  ber 
©tabt,  nicbt  toeit  bom  See.  2.  SEBenn  eg  nur  iraterfialb  ber  ©tabt 
ftiinbe,  fo  toiirbe  id)  gem  taufenb  Staler  mefir  bafiir  geben.  3. 
©efallt  eg  8$nen  beffer  bie§feit  beg  fluffed  ju  ioofmen,  ober  jenfeitg? 

4.  Jrotj  beg  ©turmeg  fam  bag  ©cfiiff  reefitjeitig  in  -Jietb  3)orf  an. 

5.  ©iefer  Strunfenbolb  fiat  um  feiner  gamilie  mitten  bag  Sminfen 
aufgegeben.  6.  @r  fiircfitete,  baft  feine  ©ofme  bie  fcfilecfite  ©emofm* 
f?eit  lernen  molten.  7.  ©er  fiungrige  2Bolf  ging  mefirmalg  um  bag 
$aug  unb  fuefite  fRotfappdjen.  8.  SSermittelft  feineg  groften  ©influff  eg 
bei  ben  Steicfien  fiat  fid;  §err  31.  jum  SMirgermeifter  ermdfden  laffen. 

9.  ©eit  tcann  mofmeit  ©ie  in  biefer  ©trafte?  ©eit  brei  ^afren. 

10.  Um  meinetmiden  mitt  er  nidit  mit  mir  gefyen ; bietteiefit  miirbe 
er  um  tjfiretmitten  ge£?en.  11.  §ft  ©eorg  oben?  !ya,  er  iftfoeben 
bie  ©reftfte  ftinaufgegangen.  12.  Saffen  ©ie  un§  Ueber  nad)  oben 
gefien ; eg  mirb  un§  beffer  gefatten  oben  ju  fiften  alg  unten.  13.  @g 
fiat  bor  einigen  SRinuten  geltingctt;  mer  tear  ba?  14.  @g  toar 
jemanb,  ber  fiefi  erlunbigen  mottte,  ob  biefeg  §aug  gu  bermieten 
fei.  15.  Sent  ©eftamente  gufolge  murbe  bag  (Sigentum  unter  bie 
beiben  ©ofme  beg  SSerftorbenen  geteilt.  16.  SJteinetmegen  mag 
er  gefien,  fobatb  eg  ifim  gefaHt.  17.  ?tufter  baft  ©eorg  ein  menig 
grower  ift,  bemerft  man  gar  feinen  Unterfcfiieb  jmifcfien  ben  beiben 
Sritbern.  18.  §err  ©.  ift  einer  meiner  beften  g-reuube ; er  gefit 
faft  nie  am  §aufe  boruber  ofme  fiereinjufommen.  19.  Untoeit  bet 
©tabt  33.  ftefit  bag  §a«g,  morin  id)  geboren  bin. 


§*24] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


263 


B . 1.  I shall  take  my  stick  instead  of  my  umbrella;  I am 
not  afraid  of  the  rain.  2.  Have  you  been  taking  a walk 
along  the  shore?  Yes,  in  spite  of  the  bad  road.  3.  Not  far 
from  the  school  I let  my  new  knife  fall  into  the  snow,  and 
could  not  find  it  again.  4.  Do  you  know  what  was  the 
matter  ? I heard  a great  noise  down-stairs.  5.  I do  not  know 
(it),  bat  I shall  inquire.  6.  Were  you  allowed  (perf.)  to  stay? 
No,  we  had  (perf.)  on  the  contrary  to  go  away  again  immedi- 
ately. 7.  We  have  been  here  since  yesterday,  and  we  must  wait 
three  days  more  for  the  ship.  8.  One  part  of  the  city  lies  on 
this  side,  the  other  on  that  side  of  a broad  river.  9.  I do 
not  think  much  of  this  gentleman ; he  would  do  anything  for 
money.  10.  By  means  of  a microscope  living  animals  can  be 
seen  in  a drop  of  water.  11.  In^con sequence  of  this  bad 
news  we  must  be  back  inside  of  a week.  12.  Should  we  make 
sport  of  other  people?  13.  No,  that  is  a bad  habit. 
14.  Yonder  is  the  river;  on  this  side  stands  my  house,  on 
that  side  his.  15.  Notwithstanding  the  warning  of  his  father 
the  youth  often  went  on  the  water  in  bad  weather.  16.  In- 
stead of  taking  the  large  boat  he  always  took  the  small  one. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXVIII. 

1.  Weshalb  hat  der  Trunkenbold  das  Trinken  aufgegeben? 
2.  Auf  welche  Weise  hat  sich  Herr  B.  zum  Biirgermeister 
erwahlen  lassen  ? 3.  Haben  Sie  klingeln  horen  ? Wer  war 

da?  4.  Wo  sind  Sie  geboren,  und  in  welchem  Jahre? 
5.  Fiirchten  Sie,  es  konnte  regnen  ? 6.  Kannst  du  mir  sagen* 
was  auf  der  Strasze  los  war  i 


264 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


[§§  225- 


LESSON  XXXIX, 

PREPOSITIONS  (continued) s-IDIOMS. 

225.  Prepositions  vary  more,  perhaps,  as  to  idiomatic  usage 
in  different  languages  than  any  other  part  of  speech.  Their 
proper  use  must  be  acquired  chiefly  by  practice  and  memory, 
but  below  are  given  the  German  equivalents,  in  various 
idioms,  of  the  most  commonly  occurring  English  Prepositions, 
more  particularly  in  cases  where  the  usage  of  the  two  lan- 
guages differs. 

220.  About. 

( a ) In  the  sense  of  ‘around’  = um,  as : 

©ie  fcerfammelten  fief)  um  ifyn.  They  assembled  about 
him. 

(b)  Of  time  = UUgcfiiljr  Utn  (um  alone  = ‘at’;  see  § 227, 
(J?)  1,  below),  as : 

Uttgefafjr  um  getyn  Ufyr,  About  ten  o’clock. 

Itngcfiiljr  um  2Beif)nacf)ten,  About  Christmas. 

( c ) In  the  sense  of  ‘nearly’  (of  number)  ==  etUHt,  UUgCs 
fitljr  (adverbs),  as  : 

@r  Bat  etma  (uttgcfiiljr)  taufertb  Staler  Iibrig,  He  has 
about  a thousand  dollars  left. 

( d ) In  the  sense  of  ‘with,’  ‘about’  (the  person)  = Bet,  as: 

3d)  Babe  tein  ©elb  Bet  mir,  I have  no  money  with 

me,  about  me. 

227.  At. 

(a)  Of  locality  : 

1.  = in,  when  the  action,  etc.,  is  within  a building,  etc., 

as  : 

$n  ber  ©d)ule,  in  ber  $trd)e,  im  tin  £ongert. 

At  school,  at  church,  at  the  theatre,  at  the  concert. 


228] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


26i> 


2.  = att,  when  the  action,  etc.,  is  adjacent  to  the  object 
of  the  preposition,  as  : 

8lm  $enfter,  Art  ber  S^iir,  am  £ifd?e,  At  the  window,  at 
the  door,  at  the  table  (but  bet  2tfd)e,  at  table). 

3.  = auf,  when  the  action  is  on  the  surface , or  on  an 
elevation,  as : 

Sluf  bem  SKarfte,  auf  bent  Salle,  auf  ber  sjjoft,  auf  ber 
Uniberfitdt,  auf  bem  ©cfylojfe,  At  market,  at  the  ball, 
at  the  post-office,  at  the  university,  at  the  castle. 

4.  = gu  or  in  with  proper  names  of  towns  (also  with 
§au3,  ‘home  ’),  etc.,  as  : 

$U  (tit)  $ari3,  At  Paris. 

$U  §aufe,  At  home. 

(b)  Of  time: 

1.  = tun  (most  usually),  as: 

lint  fyalb  bier  Ufyr,  At  half  past  3 o’clock. 

Um  Dftern,  At  Easter. 

2.  = ju,  with  and  ©tunbe,  as : 

Sur  redf)ten  $t\t,  At  the  right  time. 

$u  btefer  ©tunbe,  At  this  hour. 

Note.  — Unt  with  the  acc.  is  also  admissible  with  these  words. 

3.  = fid,  as  : 

Set  £age§anbru$,  At  day-break. 

( c ) Of  price  — ju,  as  : 

Stefer  gucfer  totrb  jn  gtt>ei  SEfmlern  b a§  $funb  berfauft, 
This  sugar  is  sold  at  two  dollars  a pound. 

228.  By. 

( a ) Expressing  the  personal  agent  after  the  passive  voice  = 
tum,  as: 

£)a§  $inb  totrb  ban  fetnen  @Itern  geliebt,  The  child  is 
loved  by  its  parents. 

18 


266 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


[§§  228- 


( b ) Of  a part  of  the  body,  etc.  = Bet,  as : 

6r  nafjm  ba§  $tnb  Bet  ber  §anb,  He  took  the  child  by 
the  hand. 

( c ) Unclassified  : 

©Ct  2id)t,  By  candlelight. 

©ei  9tad)t,  By  night. 

SBit  ©etoalt,  By  force. 

SJlif  ber  Eufenbafm,  By  the  railway, 
gtt  Sanb,  SOB  after.  By  land,  by  water. 

229.  For. 

Rendered  usually  by  fur,  but : 

(a)  Of  purpose  = ju  ( never  fur),  as  : 

$)ie3  iff  fcf)one§  SBetter  jam  (S^pagierenge^en,  This  is  fine 
weather  for  taking  a walk. 

@r  reift  jtuu  ©ergniigen,  He  travels  for  pleasure. 

( b ) Of  time  : 

1.  Past  = feit,  as : 

@cit  einem  donate.  For  a month  (past). 

2.  Future  — auf  -f"  acc,,  as : 

£5$  toerbe  auf  einige  %aa>t  berretfen,  I shall  go  away  for 
a few  days. 

3.  Duration  = acc.  without  preposition,  as : 

6r  Wax  emeu  garden  -Jftonat  f>ter.  He  was  here  for  a 
whole  month. 

( c ) Of  cause  au3,  as  : 

@r  tfyat  au$  gurcfji,  He  did  it  for  fear. 
w Unclassified : 

@rfte.  For  the  present. 

gum  erften  (jtoeiien,  etc.)  3WaI,  For  the  first  (second, 
etc.)  time. 


23i]  PREPOSITIONS.  267 

gum  ©eburtStage,  JU  ©eifynacfjten,  For  (as)  a birth- 
day-present, for  a Christmas-present. 

230.  In. 

Rendered  usually  by  in,  but : 

(a)  = auf,  as  : 

In  the  street,  9lu(  ber  ©tra£e. 

In  the  country,  §tuf  bem  Sanbe. 

In  this  manner,  biefe  SBeife  (acc.). 

In  German,  9luf  ®eutfcfy. 
ip)  = Ulltcr,  as  : 

Untcr  (Slif abetfyS  9legierung,  In  Elizabeth's  reign. 

(0  = 3«,  as  : 

2Bagen,  In  a carriage. 

231.  Of. 

(a)  By  the  genitive  without  preposition,  to  express  the 
relation  of  the  possessive  case,  as  : 

2)er  SBiffe  unferS  SSaterg,  The  will  of  our  father  (i.  e., 
our  father’s  will). 

( p ) = b on: 

1.  After  verbs,  etc.,  as: 

fyrecfje  boil  ifym,  I speak  of  him. 

2.  Between  titles  and  names  of  places , as  : 

®ie  ^ortigin  toon  ©nglanb,  The  Queen  of  England. 

3.  After  numerals  and  other  partitives,  as  : 

©irter  turn  metnen  $reunben,  One  of  my  friends. 

£>er  altefte  bon  meinen  33rubern,  The  eldest  of  my 
brothers. 

4.  Replacing  a genitive  plural  without  article,  as  : 

©r  iff  ber  SSaier  bon  bier  $naben,  He  is  the  father  of 
four  boys. 


268 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


[§§  231- 


5.  To  avoid  a succession  of  several  genitives,  as  : 

SDte  §rau  fcom  Setter  metne3  Dn!el3,  The  wife  of  my 
uncle’s  cousin. 

( c ) Of  cause,  when  the  cause  is  a disease  = ail,  as : 

©r  ftarb  an  ber  ©fyolera,  He  died  of  the  cholera. 

( d ) Of  place,  with  names  of  battles  : 

1.  = Bet,  if  named  after  a town , village , etc.,  as : 

3)ie  0cf)la$t  Bet  Sei^gig,  The  battle  of  Leipzig. 

2.  = an,  if  named  after  a river,  as : 

®te  0cf)lac an  ber  SUma,  The  battle  of  the  Alma. 

(e)  Unclassified : 

5ERartgeI  an  ©elb,  Want  of  money. 

Siebe  jum  ©elbe,  Love  of  money. 

2Sa§  foil  an£  mtr  toerben  ? What  is  to  become  of  me  ? 


232.  On. 

Rendered  usually  by  auf,  but : 

(a)  Of  time  or  date  = Acc.  without  preposition,  or  = an 
Dat.,  as : 

$en  (or  ant)  jtoolften  ^anttar,  On  the  twelfth  of  January. 

(b)  Of  modes  of  progression  = jn,  as  : 

$n  ^ferbe,  On  horseback. 

3u  ftufte,  On  foot. 

(e)  Of  situation,  on  a river,  sea,  etc. : 

1.  When  it  means  on  the  water  = anf,  as : 

Stele  ©cfjtffe  fafyren  anf  bem  §ubfon,  Many  ships  ply  on 
the  Hudson  ; — but : 

?.  When  it  means  on  the  shore  = an,  as  : 

Hamilton  liegt  ant  Ontarto^See,  Hamilton  lies  on  Lake 
Ontario. 


233] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


269 


( d ) Unclassified: 

SJiit  gleife,  On  purpose. 

83ci  biefer  ©elegenfyett,  On  this  occasion. 

Itnier  (or  nti t)  biefer  33ebingung,  On  this  condition. 

3tn  Segrtffe,  On  the  point  of. 

233.  To. 

(a)  When  replacing  the  indirect  object  = Dative  without 
preposition,  as  : 

$$  l)abe  meiner  ©cf)toefter  etn  33u$  gegeben,  I have  given 
a book  to  my  sister  (i.  e.,  my  sister  a book). 

(3)  Of  motion  or  direction  to  persons  = ju,  as : 

toil!  ju  metnem  23ater  gefyen,  I will  go  to  my  father. 
( c ) Of  motion  to  places  : 

1.  With  proper  names  of  countries,  towns,  etc.  = natfj,  as : 

3$  gefye  nadj  $art$,  nad)  ®eutfcf)lanb,  I am  going  to 
Paris,  to  Germany. 

2.  With  common  nouns  (i)  = itt,  an,  or  auf  respectively, 
with  the  Accusative , in  various  idioms,  where  these 
prepositions  with  the  Dative  — ‘at’  (see  § 227, 
(a),  above),  as : 

3n  bie  ©cfyule,  $ir$e,  in§  Sweater,  $onjert  u.  f.  to.  gefyen. 
To  go  to  school,  church,  the  theatre,  concert,  etc. 

9ltt$  genfter,  an  bie  Sfyitr  gefyen, 

To  go  to  the  window,  door. 

5luf  ben  Sail,  auf  bie  llniberfitat  gefyen. 

To  go  to  market,  to  the  ball,  post-office,  university. 

(ii)  Frequently  = ju,  which  may  usually  replace  the 
prepositions  in  the  above  idioms  also,  as : 

Gr  tft  jur  Stabt,  jur  $trcf)e  u.  f.  to.  gegangen. 

He  has  gone  to  town,  church,  etc. 


270 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


[§234 


234.  With. 

Observe  the  following  Idioms : 

©on  ganjem  §erjen,  With  all  my  heart. 

Gr  jtttert  Imr  SUiltc,  He  trembles  with  cold  (cause). 
5Da§  ift  Bet  un§  nicBt  ©itte.  That  is  not  the  custom  with 
(=  among)  us. 

$lt  biefer  Stbfic^t,  With  this  intention. 

Remark.  — For  the  proper  use  of  prepositions  after  partic- 
ular adjectives  and  verbs,  see  Less.  XLIX. 


Vocabulary. 


to  intend,  gebenfeti 
be„enough,  suffice,  E)inreicE?en 
bring  with  (one),  mit'bringen 
sign,  untergeicty'nen 
bring  back,  guriidbringen 
excursion,  pleasure-trip,  ber 
2fu§flug  * 

harvesting,  bfl-3  Grnten 
favour,  ber  ©efaUen 
Louis,  Lewis,  Subtoig 
measles,  bie  2Jlafern  (f.  pi.) 


account,  bill,  bie  Stedjnung 

dressing-gown,  berScfdafrtxf  * 

evil,  ba§  libel 

relative,  ber  33ertoanbte 

treaty,  ber  SSertrag* 

root,  bie  SBurjel 

this  evening,  Ijeute  2(6 enb 

thorough(-ly),  griinblicfj 

fortunately,  gliicfli^ertoeife 

possible,  titoglicB 

absent  (on  a journey),  berreift 


Idioms : 1.  To  be  accustomed,  $te  ©etoofjn&eit  Ijabett  (+  infin.  with  ju). 

2.  In  the  middle  of  summer,  3Ritttn  im  Sommer. 

3.  To  take  a pleasure-trip  (excursion),  (Etnett  QluSfiug  madjctt. 

4.  It  looks  like  rain,  fietjt  ttad)  $egcn  atif*. 

5.  Two  or  three,  #toei  &t3  brei. 

6.  He  sprang  out  of  the  window,  <£r  fjjrattQ  jum  Jenifer  tyiitauS 

(point  of  ingress  or  exit  denoted  by  3 It  -f-  dat.). 

Note  : It  is  customary,  in  referring  to  the  relatives  of  the  person  addressed,  to  prefix 
£err,  §rau  or  ^rauleitt,  as  the  case  may  be,  but  this  is  not  done  in  speaking  of  one’s  own 
relatives,  thus: 

SSUe  ge$t  e§  $f)rem  #emt  SSater?  — But : SRein  Safer  ift  ganj  tt>o$L 


§*34l 


^REPOSITIONS. 


271 


EXERCISE  XXXIX. 

A.  1.  Stuf  toelefye  SBeife  Ijaben  ©ie  bie  fran^oftfcfje  ©f)racf>e  fo 
gut  gelernt  ? 2.  3<f)  Ijabe  juerft  bie  ©rammatif  gritnblicf)  ftubiert, 
unb  banit’  Ijabe  icb  anbertfyalb  ^afjre  in  granfreid)  jugebracfjt. 
3.  2Bie  lange  bleibt  3br  §err  23ater  nodf)  fort?  @r  fommt  erft 
iibermorgen  nad)  £>aufe.  4.  2Ba§  gebenlft  bu  fyeute  2(benb  ju 
tfjun?  3$  toetfi  e§  nid^t ; fiir’§  ©rfte  muff  td^  meine  2lufgaben 
ntacfien.  5.  2Bo  Ijaft  bu  ben  fyubfc^en  ©$lafrocf  befommen?  3$ 
babe  if)n  sum  ©eburtstage  befommen,  unbjiefye  ifm  ^eute  jum  erften 
•Kale  an.  6.  @3  flingelt ; toer  ift  an  ber  ^Ef>ur?  @3  ift  jemanb, 
ber  ben  $errn  fprecfien  hull,  aber  er  ift  bei  £ifcf)e  unb  lajjt  fidj 
nicf)t  ftoren.  7.  $>u  fitjeft  am  genfter;  fielj  bodf)  einmal  jum 
genfter  ljinau§,  unb  bu  toirft  ifm  bieffeicbt  fefyen  foitnen.  8.  $u 
toelcfyer  $eit  lebte  2)toliere?  @r  lebte  unter  ber  Kegieruttg  Subtoig 
XIV.  bon  granfreidi).  9.  3ft  e§  moglidf),  ju  berfelben  $eit  bon 
einer  ©adjie  ju  fforedtjen  unb  an  eine  anbere  ju  benfen?  10.  SDie 
Siebe  junt  ©elbe  ift  bie  3Burjel  aHe§  libels.  11.  Unfer  §au§ 
ftebt  am  ©t.  Sorenjsglufj,  unb  bon  ben  genftern  fie^t  man  bie 
SDampffdjiffe  borbeigeffen.  12.  SBiffft  bu  mir  beine  ©rammatif 
Ieifyen?  3a  toof)I,  mit  ber  Sebingung,  bajj  bu  biefclbe  bor 
morgen  jurucfbringft.  13.  3ft  §«rr  S3-  §aufe?  Kein,  er  ift 
auf  brei  2Bodjen  berreift.  14.  33ei  i£age3anbrudj)  fingen  bie 
23ogel  am  fcffonften.  15.  2Iffe  genfter  unb  Sljuren  tocrben  be§ 
KacfitS  au§  gurdjt  bor  ©ieben  bei  un§  jugefdfdoffen.  16.  SBeSbalb 
finb  bie  $inber  nicfit  jur  ©cfmle  gegangen?  17.  finb  mefjrere 
^inber  in  ber  ©cfmle,  bie  an  ben  SJtafern  gelitten  fmben,  unb  bie 
SKutter  furdjtet  fief)  bor  biefer  ^ranffyeit.  18.  Sfeifen  ©ie  lieber 
ju  Sanb  ober  ju  SBaffer  ? 3m  ©ornmer  jiefie  id)  e§  bor,  ju  2Baffer 
ju  reifen.  19.  -Kem  25  a ter  f)atte  bie  ©etoofin^eit,  un§  Slinbcr  um 
fief)  ju  berfammeln  unb  un§  ©efcf)icf)ten  ju  erjdfylen.  20.  ^Kitten 
im  ©ommer,  unb  bann  hneber  um  2Beif)nacf)ten,  gelje  id)  auf§ 
Sanb,  um  meine  25ertoanbten  ju  befuefjen.  21.  23origen  ©ommer 
blieb  icf)  mel)r  al§  bierjeljn  3iage  bei  benfelben. 


272 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


[§§  234- 


B.  1.  Good  morning ; you  have  come  just  at  the  right  time ; 
I was  on  the  point  of  going  to  your  house  (say  : going  to 
you).  2.  There  is  a ring  at  the  door ; go  to  the  door  and  see 
who  is  there.  3.  When  you  go  to  the  market,  do  not  forget 
to  go  to  the  post  also.  4.  Do  you  intend  to  take  a pleasure- 
trip  this  summer?  Yes,  I intend  to  leave  the  town  for  three 
or  four  weeks.  5.  Last  summer  we  stayed  away  only  a week. 
6.  Does  it  not  look  like  rain?  7.  Yes,  I am  afraid  it  might 
rain,  but  fortunately  I have  brought  my  umbrella  with  [me]. 
8.  Have  you  any  money  about  you  ? I should  like  to  pay 
this  bill,  and  have  left  my  purse  at  home.  9.  I have  about 
seven  dollars  and  a half  with  me ; would  that  be  enough  (suf- 
fice) ? 10.  Would  you  do  me  the  favour  to  lend  me  the  half 
of  it  (batten)  for  two  or  three  days?  11.  What  magnificent 
weather  for  harvesting;  it  has  not  rained  for  two  weeks 
[past].  12.  Is  the  servant  going  to  (the)  market?  No,  she 
was  at  (the)  market  (already)  two  hours  ago.  13.  The  battle 
of  Waterloo  took  place  on  the  18th  of  June  in  the  year  1815. 

14.  Some  months  afterwards  the  treaty  of  Paris  was  signed. 

15.  When  (at  what  time)  and  in  what  war  did  the  battle  of 

the  Alma  take  place  ? 16.  It  took  place  in  the  year  1855, 

during  the  war  between  England  and  Russia. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XXXIX. 

1.  Wann  gedenken  Sie  die  Stadt  zu  verlassen  ? 2.  Wo 

steht  das  Haus  Ihres  Herrn  Yaters  ? 3.  Auf  welche  Weise 

gedenken  Sie  diesen  Sommer  zuzubringen  ? 4.  Wollen  Sie 

emmal7  zu  mir  kommen  und  den  Nachmittag  bei  mir 
zubringen?  5.  Es  hat  geklingelt;  wer  ist  da?  6.  Was  fur 
Wetter  bekommen  wir  heute  Abend? 


236] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


273 


LESSON  XL, 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


235.  Conjunctions  are  either  : 

A.  Coordinating,  or  those  which  connect  sentences  of 
the  same  rank  or  order  (principal  with  principal,  or  dependent 
with  dependent),  or : 

B.  Subordinating,  or  those  which  connect  one  sentence 
with  another,  on  which  it  depends,  or  to  which  it  is  sub- 
ordinate. 


236.  I.  Conjunctions  Proper.  — The  Coordinating 
Conjunctions  proper  merely  connect  sentences  without  affect- 
ing their  structure.  They  are  : > 


flbcv,  or  {general  disjunctive')  a\i6)f  (*  ^ut  ^a^versative')  . 


Remarks.  — 1 . Sottbcrtt  is  used  after  negative  sentences  only, 
and  introduces  a sentence  correcting  or  contradicting  the  state- 
ment contained  in  the  preceding  sentence,  in  whole  or  in 
part,  as : 

bin  itidjt  Irani,  fottbertt  g anj  gefunb, 

I am  not  ill  but  (on  the  contrary)  quite  well. 

But  if  there  is  no  inconsistency  or  contradiction  between 
the  two  statements,  abet  is  used,  as : 

@r  Ijat  e§  niefyt  getfyan,  aber  er  foirb  e3  tfmn. 

He  has  not  yet  done  it,  but  he  will  do  it. 

2.  Slbcr  does  not  necessarily  begin  the  sentence  and  often 
comes  after  the  verb.  When  abet  does  not  begin  the  sen- 
tence, it  has  rather  the  sense  of  ‘ however/  as : 


A.  Coordinating  Conjunctions. 


bcitlt,  for  ( causative ) 


fonbertt,  J 


274 


LESSON  XL. 


[§§  236- 


$a§  Bofe  SGeib  abcr  ging  t>or  ben  Spiegel, 

The  wicked  woman,  however,  went  to  the  mirror. 

Note.  — When  there  is  any  other  conjunction  present,  aber  seldom 
begins  the  sentence. 

237.  II.  Adverbial  Conjunctions* — Many  adverbs  and 
adverbial  phrases  have  the  function  of  conjunctions,  when 
they  are  used  to  express  the  relation  between  sentences, 
rather  than  to  modify  any  particular  member  of  the  sentence 
in  which  they  occur. 

The  principal  coordinating  adverbial  conjunctions  are : 
and),  also,  too  ] 

nuffrrbnn,  besides  I ^ (relaKd  ,0  „„„> 

Dull  11,  then  | 

fogar,  even 

bcitnod), 
bod),  £ still 
jeboi$,  ) 
bcitlt,  unless 
bcffcmutgcadjtet, 
nidjtlbcftoiocmgcr, 
inbcffcit,  however 
fonft,  else,  otherwise 
tool)!,  indeed 
jltJttr,  it  is  true,  to  be 


nevertheless 


adversative 
> (related  to 

akr) 


ire 


therefore 


baljcr, 
barunt, 
beSljalfi, 
beStncgctt,  . 
olfo,  \ 

folglidj,  >-  accordingly 

mitrin',  ) 


causative  (related  to  kntt) 


#37] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


275 


fo,  so 

olfo,  so,  thus 

rtcnfo,  just  as  V comparative 


?e^0'  l the 
V'  ) 


as,  as  far  as  — restrictive 


barauf , afterwards  f 

feifbcitt,  since  then  J 

Remarks. — i.  Unlike  the  conjunctions  proper,  these  adver- 
bial conjunctions,  if  they  introduce  a sentence,  throw  the 
subject  after  the  verb ; but  they  may  also  follow  the  verb, 

thus : 

@r  ift  franf ; beffcuungcadjtet  tottb  er  fommen  (or : er 
toirb  bcffeuungcfid)tct  fommen),  He  is  ill;  neverthe- 
less he  will  come. 

@3  regnete,  barum  (bafyer,  beC'megen)  fonnte  tdj  (or : idj 
fonnte  barum,  etc.)  nicfyt  au^gefyen. 

2.  Sind)  and  fogat,  when  they  refer  specially  to  the  subject 
or  any  other  member  of  the  clause  preceding  the  verb,  do 
not  throw  the  subject  after  the  verb,  as  : 

Sind)  fein  23ater  toar  jugegen,  His  father,  too,  was 
present. 

©ogar  feinen  getnben  Ijat  er  berge&en,  He  has  pardoned 
even  his  enemies. 

3.  The  verb  often  comes  first  in  a sentence  with  bod;,  to 
express  a strong  affirmation,  as  : 

£abc  id;  e£  bod)  gcfagt,  Did  I not  say  so? 


2jQ 


LESSON  XL. 


[§§  *38- 


238.  III.  Correlative  Conjunctions.  These  are: 


citttoeber  . . . obcr,  either ...  or 
tteber  . . . ttdtfj,  neither  . . . nor 

nidjt  ttwr . . . fotiberit  audj, 
joniofjl ...  all  and), 
tlidjt  . . . all,  not  so  much  ...  as 

balb  . . . balb,  now  . . . now  (again),  at  one  time 
at  another 


| disjunctive 


not  only 
but  also 


connective 


teU$  . . . tcilg,  partly  . . . partly 
eittcrfeit§  . . . anbctjcifg,  on  the  one  hand  ...  on  the 
other. 


Remark.  — The  last  three  are  adverbial  conjunctions,  and 
either  follow  the  verb,  or  throw  the  subject  after  it,  unless 
they  modify  a particular  member  of  the  sentence  (compare 
§ 237,  Remarks  1,  2,  above). 


239.  B . Subordinating  Conjunctions. 

1.  Sentences  introduced  by  subordinating  conjunctions 
are  always  dependent , and  therefore  have  the  verb  last  (see 

§ 32)- 

2.  Some  of  these  also  are  adverbial,  but,  as  this  distinction 
does  not  affect  the  construction,  they  are  not  separately 
arranged. 

3.  The  principal  subordinating  conjunctions  are  as  follows: 
(a)  Introducing  substantive  clause : 

fcafb  that 
fib,  if,  whether 

(< b ) Introducing  adverbial  clause  : 

al§,  1 ^ 6t§  (baft),  until 

ba,  [when  Vtime  C^e  (btt§),  J before 

toettit, ) ) bettor,  I 


239] 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


277 


>•  while,  whilst 


ittbcffeit, 
iitbetn', 
unlcrbcffeit, 
toiitjrcnb  (bafj), 
fdt(bcm),  since 
fobalb'  , as  soon  as 
jd  Idltge,  as  long  as 
(fo)ttJte,  as  soon  as 
tdtc,  how  — manner 
bcitlt,  than 
dig,  1 A 
»<«.  } ,han-  as 
intoicfcrn',  inasmuch  as 
j|c  nddjbetn',  according  as 
bd,  since 
bdfe,  that 
tdcil,  because 
bdft,  that 


oufbujj,  1 

l 1 


in  order  that 


tutt  bn§, 
bamit',  in  order  that 
menu,  if 
dig  ob, 


as  if 


in  case 


l 


dig  to  cun 

fuff*/  } i 
ton  fern,  J 

dbgletd),  tocmt  gletcf}, 
obi^dit,  menu  fdjan, 
cb  dutfj,  ttiemt  fludj, 
nbidofjl, 
tstctoul)!, 
wngcdf^tct  (bdfe), 
tocnit  . . . nitfjt,  if  not,  unless 


> although 


time 


degree 


cause 


purpose 


- condition 


> concessive 


278 


LESSON  XL. 


[§§  239- 


Remarks. — 1.  fflBetttt  and  oB  take  the  subjunctive  when 
the  verb  of  the  principal  clause  is  in  the  impf.,  plupf.,  or 
conditional,  as : 

3c f)  toiirbe  Jommen,  toertn  genug  toiire,  I should 

come,  if  I were  well  enough. 

3<f>  toufjte  mcfyt,  oh  er  gefommen  mdre  (fei),  I did  not 
know,  whether  he  had  come. 

2.  SBentt  may  be  omitted  in  conditional  sentences  ; the 
verb  then  begins  the  clause,  as  in  the  question  order  (compare 
§ 59).  This  construction  is  much  more  common  than  in 
English,  and  is  generally  used  when  the  dependent  clause, 
containing  the  condition , precedes  the  principal  clause,  con- 
taining the  consequence,  as : 

gwtte  id)  ©elb,  fo  toiirbe  id)  $reuttbe  I)aben,  If  I had 
(had  I)  money,  I should  have  friends. 

Note.  — The  particle  fo  should  not  be  omitted  in  the  latter  clause 
when  the  former  is  without  roenn. 

3.  In  the  compound  conjunctions  obgletdj,  obfrtjdtt,  obtddljl, 
etc.,  the  two  parts  may  be  separated,  and  the  latter  part 
placed  after  the  subject,  as  : 

©bgletd)  (obfffjdtt,  etc.)  er  Irani  tear,  etc. ; or : 

Ob  er  gldcl)  Irani  tear.  Although  he  was  ill. 

Note.  — With  tt>enu  the  particles  gleicf),  etc.,  always  follow  the  subject. 

4.  The  ob  or  toenn  may  also  be  omitted  in  these  conjunc- 
tions and  in  al£  dB,  aU  fcscmt  0 as  if  ’)  ; the  verb  then  begins 
the  sentence,  or  immediately  follows  al3,  as : 

er  glcidj  Irani,  Although  he  is  ill. 
fdjetnt  nttr,  nlS  ob  (toenn)  id)  <3ie  trgenbtoo  gefeljen 
Ijiitte ; or : al3  Jjtttte  ill),  etc.,  It  seems  to  me,  as  if 
I had  seen  you  somewhere. 


24o] 


INTERJECTIONS. 


279 


240. 


Interjections. 


1.  Interjections  proper  are  not,  strictly  speaking,  mem- 
bers of  the  sentence,  and  consist  of  sounds  expressing 
either : 

(a)  Independent  outbursts  of  natural  feeling,  as : 0,  dlj, 
of  various  emotions  ; alj,  Ijci,  Ijeifa,  \VL&fyt  (hurrah), 
joy;  et,  Ijtt,  $0$,  surprise;  ad),  0U,  pain;  jjfui  (fie), 
disgust ; bal),  contempt ; or 

( b ) Intimations  of  will,  as:  Jiff,  fc(j  (hush),  enjoining 
silence ; Ije,  Ijc&a',,  §0,  ffatiof),  Ijoflalj,  to  call  attention. 

2.  Various  parts  of  speech,  and  even  whole  phrases,  are 
employed  interjectionally,  as:  fyeil,  hail;  \ woe  (subst.) 

hurrah ; brat),  bravo ; leiber,  alas ; fort,  toeg,  away 
(adverbs);  gottlob,  thank  God;  also  in  oaths  and  adjurations. 

3.  Akin  to  Interjections  are  imitations  of  natural  sounds, 

as : f)ui/  whizz ; Jiiff,  Jmff,  jmff,  shot ; bauj,  fall ; 

JllutltflS,  splash. 

4.  (a)  The  Interjections  0,  acf),  Jifut,  are  sometimes  fol- 

lowed by  a genitive,  as : 

0!  (adj!  J)fui !)  ber  S^aubc ! Oh!  (ah!  fie!)  what 
disgrace ; 

or  by  fiber  -f-  accusative,  as : 

<]5fui ! fiber  bid)  getgen  ! Fie  on  thee  for  a coward  ! 

( b ) The  substantives  used  interjectionally,  as  under  2, 
above,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a dative,  as : 

SBel)  mix ! Woe’s  me  ! 

£>eil  bem  tftiiuige ! Hail  to  the  king ! 


Vocabulary. 


to  call  for,  abfyolen 
go  in,  tyineingefyen 


wear  (intr.),  fidj  tragen 
prepare,  fcor'beretten 


280 


LESSON  XL. 


1§M° 


lay  up,  lay  by,  juriidlegen 
old  age,  ba§  2tlter 
joy,  delight,  bie  fjfreube 
Lord,  ber  £err 
price,  ber  ^Brei§ 
tortoise,  bie  ©d)ilbfrote 
guilt,  debt,  bie  ©dmlb 


to  be  to  blame  (for),  fcf'uio 
(adj.)  fetrt  (an  + dat.) 
cheap,  bittig 

certainly,  in  any  case,  jeben* 
faH§ 

in  vain,  bergebenS 

even  if,  although,  toenn  audf> 


Idioms  : 1.  I am  studying  (preparing)  for  an  examination,  Bereite  mt<& 
ouf  ein  tinmen  (acc.)  Dor. 

2.  Do  you  consider  that  good?  §alien  Sic  DcS  fiir  gut? 

8.  To  make  calls,  ©ejudje  tmtdjcn. 

4.  In  the  world,  Wuf  Der  SBclt. 

EXERCISE  XL. 

A.  1.  2Bir  foUten  atte  Sllenfdjen  liebett,  toenn  fie  un§  aucfy 
fyaffen.  2.  ©ie  berfpracfyen,  mid;  abjuf) olen ; attein  id;  toartete 
bergebenS,  benn  ©ie  famen  nidjt.  3.  2Bemt  icfy  an  S$rem  §aufe 
tooriiberge^e,  fo  gefye  id;  getoof;nIi<f>  Ijinein.  4.  2ll§  id;  aber  geftern 
Stbenb  boruberging,  fat;  id;  fein  £id;t  unb  bai;er  bin  id;  nid;t 
l;ineingegangen.  5.  £;e  me^r  toir  lernen,  befio  rneljr  finb  toir  im 
©tanbe  ju  lernen.  6.  ®ie  ©critter  befomnten  morgen  $erien, 
barum  fpriitgen  unb  fingen  fie  bor  greube.  7.  2Bie  febr  id;  mid;  aud; 
bemiifje,  e§  gelingt  mir  leiber  bod;  nidjt,  atte  ©aije  bief-er  2tufgabe 
ridjtig  ju  fdjreiben.  8.  ©u  tabelft  micf),  afe  ob  i$  fdfmlb  baran 
toare.  9.  @in  borfidjtiger  Sllann  tegt  in  feiner  ^ugenb 
juritd,  auf  bafj  er  in  feinern  Sitter  nid;t  SRangel  leibe.  10.  2tufjer 
toenn  id;  franf  ober  fefyr  befdjaftigt  bin,  gefye  idf)  jeben  £ag  fpagies 
ren.  11.  @r  ift  nidjt  nur  reicf;,  fonbern  antcfy  freigebig,  unb  beg* 
tjatb  fiat  er  fo  biele  greunbe  getoonnen.  12.  fatten  toir  getoujjt, 
bajj  ©ie  Ijeute  Sfefud;  l;aben,  fo  toaren  toir  erft  morgen  gefommen. 
13.  2Botten  ©ie  fid;  erfunbigen,  ob  $rau  ©.  nod;  in  bctnfetben 
§aufe  tooljnt  ? 14.  giebt  nod;  biele  Seute  auf  ber  2Belt,  bie 
toeber  lefen  nod;  fdjreiben  fonnen.  15.  ©ie  fatten  mir  Ijelfen 
tonnen,  toenn  ©ie  e§  getoottt  fatten,  atlein  ©ie  toottten  e§  nicfyt. 


§240] 


INTERJECTIONS. 


28l 


16.  gate  ©ie  be§  $fta$mtttag§  nid^t  fommert  fonnen,  fo  fommen 
©ie  bocfy  be§  2lbenb§.  17.  Dbgleid)  Karl  fd;on  jefyn  gal) re  aft  iff, 
farm  er  toeber  gut  lefert  nod)  gut  fd)reiben.  18.  ©ie  ©cfnlbfrote 
Itef,  tnbem  ber  £afe  fdjtief,  be^fjalb  ift  fie  aud)  juerft  angelom* 
men.  19.  §atte  ber  &afe  nid;t  gefddafen,  fo  tocire  er  jebenfate 
juerft  angefommen.  20.  ®u  follft  beinen  SSater  unb  beine  Shutter 
efyren,  auf  baft  bu  lange  lebeft  im  Sanbe,  ba3  bir  ber  §err  bein 
©ott  giebt. 

j B.  1.  We  shall  come,  even  if  it  rains.  2.  Before  I leave 
the  town,  I must  make  some  calls.  3.  Shall  we  go  without 
him,  or  shall  we  wait  till  he  comes  back  ? 4.  Whilst  we  were 

away,  a thief  came  and  stole  the  money.  5.  Do  you  sit  up 
late  when  you  are  studying?  6.  Not  generally;  however, 
when  I was  preparing  for  my  last  examination  I used  to  sit 
up  late.  7.  Do  you  consider  this  cloth  dear  ? The  price  is 
not  high  to  be  sure,  but  it  will  not  wear  well.  8.  Here  is 
cloth,  which  is  dear,  but  I believe  that  it  is  good.  9.  I do 
not,  on  the  contrary,  consider  it  dear,  but  cheap,  since  it  is 
good  cloth.  10.  Since  I have  been  ill,  I am  allowed  neither 
to  read  much  nor  to  write  much.  11.  It  seems  to  me  that  it  is 
colder  to-day  than  yesterday.  12.  It  iswallwthe  same  towme, 
whether  I travel  by  the  steamer  or  by  the  railway.  13.  [If] 
I had  thought  ofwthat,  I should  have  gone  to  meet  you. 
14.  The  hare  slept,  and  in^the^meanwhile  the  tortoise  ar- 
rived. 15.  If  the  hare  had  not  slept,  he  would  have  arrived 
first. 

ORAL  EXERCISE  XL. 

1.  Die  Fenster  sind  alle  auf,  wer  ist  daran  schuld  ? 2.  Legen 
Sie  viel  Geld  zuriick?  3.  Weshalb  haben  Sie  mich  nicht 
abgeholt?  4.  Konnen  Sie  mir  sagen,  in  welcher  Richtung 
von  hier  der  Fluss  liegt  ? 5.  Hast  du  dein  letztes  Examen 

bestanden?  6.  Halten  Sie  diesen  Hut  fur  teuer? 


19 


282 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  F. 


[§*4l 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  F. 

ADDITIONAL  REMARKS  ON  CERTAIN  CONJUNCTIONS. 

241.  1.  Sltlein  follows  and  limits,  or  corrects,  affirmative  statements, 
as  fonbertl  does  negative,  thus : 

(Sr  ift  reid),  ottetlt  er  ift  nid)t  gfiicfUd),  He  is  rich,  but  he  is  not 
happy. 

2.  $eftO  or  unt  fo  (but  not  je)  may  be  used  with  a single  compara- 
tive, as : 

(SUen  0ie,  bamit  0ie  fceflo  (urn  fo)  fritter  anfommen,  Make  haste, 
so  that  you  may  arrive  all  the  sooner. 

3-  £og  is  the  most  general  in  meaning  of  all  the  conjunctions.  It  may 
be  omitted  when  it  introduces  a substantive  clause,  as  in  indirect  state- 
ments. The  sentence  then  has  the  construction  of  a principal  clause 
(verb  second ; see  §87,  3).  But  bag  cannot  be  omitted  when  it  expresses 
purpose  or  consequence . 

4.  The  Engl,  if  must  be  rendered  by  ofi  (not  toemt)  when  it  = 
whether,  as  : 

I asked  him  if  he  could  come,  3(f)  fragte  il)n,  06  er  fomrnen  fomte. 

5.  For  the  distinction  between  af§,  toemt  (as  conjunctions  of  time)  and 
toamt,  see  § 58. 

6.  ‘Than’  should  be  rendered  by  al3  after  an  adjective  in  the  com- 
parative degree,  not  by  toie. 

7.  £enit  = ‘ than  ’ is  obsolete,  except  when  used  to  prevent  the  re- 
petition of  al8,  as : 

(Sr  ift  grower  af$  £)id)ter,  bcitlt  af§  Sftenfd),  He  is  greater  as  a poet, 
than  as  a man. 

8.  In  comparisons  of  equality , as ...  as  = (e&ett)  fo  . . . totC,  or  al$,  tote 
being  more  common,  as: 

He  is  as  tall  as  I,  (Sr  ift  (eben)fo  grog  tote  id). 

After  a negative,  eben  is  omitted,  as : 
dx  ift  nid) t fo  grog  true  id). 

9.  So  . . . fo  are  used  with  correlative  clauses,  containing  adjectives 
compared  together  in  the  positive  degree  (compare  the  use  of  je  or  bcfto 
with  the  compar.  degree,  § 126,  4),  as: 


§241]  ADDITIONAL  REMARKS  ON  CONJUNCTIONS.  283 


So  groft  cr  ift,  fo  feige  ift  er  ctud),  He  is  as  cowardly  as  he  is 
big;  or:  ‘ equally  big  and  cowardly’;  lit.:  Big  as  he  is,  he 
is  just  as  cowardly. 

Note.  — In  the  first  clause  of  the  above  example  fo  is  subordinating;  in  the  second 
coordinating , but  does  not  throw  the  subject  after  the  verb. 

Observe  also  the  following  construction,  where  the  clauses  cannot  be 
rendered  as  correlative  in  English : 

00  gent  id)  Sfynett  (cutd))  l)etfert  modjte,  fo  unmoglid)  ift  e8  mir, 

However  glad  I should  be  to  help  you,  it  is  quite  impossible 

for  me  (or  : Glad  as  I should  be,  etc.). 

10.  As,  when  denoting  cause  [=  ‘since’)  must  be  rendered  by 

ha,  as : 

1 could  not  come,  as  I was  not  well,  3d)  fonnte  md)t  fommett,  fco 
id)  itidjt  mof)l  wax. 

11.  As,  in  the  sense  of  ‘ while ’=  inbeffert,  as: 

He  fell  asleep,  as  I was  reading  to  him,  dx  fdjfief  eitt,  inbeffett  id) 
iljin  doda§. 

12.  Distinguish  carefully  between  the  following  uses  of  Engl. since: 

(a)  Since  as  preposition  = feit  (not  feitbem),  as  : 

Since  last  Tuesday,  0eit  (extern  2)ienftag. 

(b)  Since  as  adverb  or  coordinating  adverbial  conjunction  = 
feitbem  (not  feit),  as: 

He  was  here  the  day  before  yesterday,  but  I have  not  seen  him 
since,  ^orgeftent  wax  er  t)ier,  feitbem  Ijabe  id)  il)n  aber  nicf)t 
gefefyen. 

fc)  Since  as  subordinating  conjunction  of  time  = feitbem  or 
feit,  as: 

I have  not  seen  him  since  he  recovered  from  his  illness,  3d)  l)abe 
it)n  nid)t  gejeljen,  fcit(bnn)  er  genefen  ift. 

(d)  Since  as  conjunction  of  cause  = foa,  as : 

Since  I have  no  money,  I cannot  pay  you,  id)  fein  ©eft)  ^abe, 
fann  id)  ©ie  nidjt  bcgaljten. 

13.  After  elje,  bedor  and  ttialjrcnb,  daft  may  be  omitted. 

14*  S3et)0r  expresses  time  only,  efte  may  also  express  preference  (== 
‘rather  ’),  as: 

id)  ba8  tljue,  mitt  id)  fterben,  Rather  than  do  that,  I will  die. 


284 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  F. 


[§241 

15.  Observe  that  the  adverbial  conjunctions  infccffcit,  Utttcricffcil  are 
coordinating  when  they  = ‘meanwhile’  (the  pronoun  beffen  being 
demonstrative ),  but  subordinating  when  they  — ‘v/hilst,  while’  (the  pron. 
being  relative ),  as : 

©ie  fpradjen  mit  einaitber ; tubeffen  (unterbeffen)  gt’itg  id)  auf  unb 
ab,  They  were  speaking  to  each  other;  (in  the)  meanwhile  I 
was  walking  up  and  down  ; but : 

©ie  fyrarfjen  mit  einaitber,  iitbeffen  (unterbeffen)  id)  anf  unb  ab 
giltg,  They  were  speaking  to  each  other,  while  I was  walking 
up  and  down. 

In  the  sense  of  ‘however,’  inbeffen  is  coordinating  only. 

16.  ^nbcitt  is  subordinating  only,  and  denotes  cause  as  well  as  time,  as: 

3d)  brand^e  mefyr  ©elb,  indent  id)  niele  ©dptlbeit  git  bega^(eu  babe, 

I need  more  money,  since  I have  many  debts  to  pay  (having 
many  debts  to  pay). 

•Snfcern  er  tnir  bic  §anb  gab,  Icidjelte  er,  As  he  gave  me  his  hand 
(giving  me  his  hand),  he  smiled. 

17.  SBetl  must  be  used  (not  ba)  in  answer  to  the  question  why  ? or 
wherefore  ? as : 

Sarunt  famen  ©ie  nicbt?  3Beil  id)  franf  mar. 

Why  did  you  not  come  ? Because  I was  ill. 

18.  ‘Unless’  is  rendered  by  tuemt  • . . llid)t  (if  • . . not),  or  by  fcCItlt 
(coordinating  adv.  conj.),  as: 

Sir  merben  nid)t  au$geben  fonneit,  tocitn  fid)  ba§  Setter  nid)t 
dnbert,  We  shall  not  be  able  to  go  out,  unless  the  weather 
changes. 

3d)  laffe  bid)  nid)t,  bit  fegueft  mid)  Senn,  I will  not  let  thee  go, 
except  (unless)  thou  bless  me. 

Note.  — £)enn  in  this  sense  always  follows  the  verb. 

19.  ‘ But  ’ after  a negative  = al0,  as : 

3d)  batte  nid)t8  a($  UngUicf  anf  nteiiter  $eife,  I had  nothing  but 
misfortune  on  my  journey. 

Note.  — 9Udjt§  tnertiger  al§  = * anything  but y (not  ‘ nothing  less  than  ’),  as: 

(Sr  ift  Uieniger  «13  rei$,  He  is  anything  but  rich. 

20.  Distinguish  between : 

(a)  = ‘there’:  adverb  of  place,  as: 

3d)  mar  tm,  I was  there. 


§241]  ADDITIONAL  REMARKS  ON  CONJUNCTIONS.  285 


(b)  = * then  * : adverb  of  time , as  : 

©cr  2)ieb  fdjtid)  iu«  §a u§  ; im  ergrtff  id)  Ujrt,  The  thief  sneaked 
into  the  house  ; then  I seized  him. 

(*)  $)d  a=s  ‘since/  ‘as  ’ : subordinating  conjunction,  as  : 

3d)  fonnte  nid)t  fommett,  Ha  id)  fvanf  toar,  I could  not  come, 
since  (as)  I was  ill. 

21.  Distinguish  between  t)effeitlingcad)tet,  * nevertheless * (coord,  adv. 
conj.)  and  ungead)tet,  ‘although?  ‘ notwithstanding  that  ’ (subord.  conj.). 

EXERCISE  F. 

1.  Our  neighbour  has  failed,  but  he  is  only  the  richer  on  that  account, 
since  he  has  not  paid  his  creditors.  2.  The  hare  was  sleeping,  whilst  the 
tortoise  crept  slowly  towards  the  goal.  3.  Rather  than  accept  your  con- 
ditions, I will  give  up  my  position.  4.  He  has  not  been  here  since  last 
week,  and  I have  not  seen  him  since.  5.  Since  you  have  not  seen  him, 
I must  either  go  and  see  him  (say : go  to  him),  or  write  to  him.  6.  I con- 
sider him  an  ignorant  man ; he  is  anything  but  learned.  7.  Have  you 
been  at  the  railway-station?  Yes,  I was  there  as  the  train  arrived. 
8.  We  shall  not  go  out  this  afternoon,  because  it  looks  like  rain.  9.  We 
shall  not  go  out  to-morrow  either  (ctud)),  if  the  weather  does  not  change. 
10.  The  whole  family  was  absent  yesterday  from  eight  o’clock  till  twelve 
o’clock  at  night ; meanwhile  the  house  took  (fangeu  )fire. 


PART  SECOND, 


SYNTAX. 


LESSON  XL I. 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  CASES NOMINATIVE  AND  GENITIVE. 

242.  Nominative. 

1.  The  Nominative  is  the  case  of  the  subject , or  of  a 
Word  in  apposition  to  the  subject,  or  of  a predicate  noun  quali- 
fying it.  The  nominative  is  also  used  in  address,  there  being 
no  special  form  for  the  vocative. 

2.  Neuter  verbs  indicating  a state  or  transition,  such  as 
fein,tobe;  toerben,  to  become;  bleiben,  to  remain;  fcfyetnen, 
to  seem,  appear ; fyetfjen,  to  be  called,  take  a predicate  nomi- 
native, as : 

@r  tft  Solbat  getoorben  (geblieben),  He  has  become  (re- 
mained) a soldier. 

3.  Verbs  of  calling  take  a predicate  nominative,  verbs  of 
considering  a nominative  with  al3,  in  the  passive , as  : 

$atfer  §eirtrid)  I.  tourbe  ber  SSogler  genannt.  Emperor 
Henry  was  called  the  Fowler. 

Sftein  23ater  tourbe  immer  bon  mir  nU  mein  befter  greunb 
betracfytet.  My  father  was  always  regarded  by  me  (as) 
my  best  friend. 

Note.  — Verbs  of  choosing  generally  take  the  preposition  311  instead 
of  the  English  nominative. 


§244] 


GENITIVE, 


28; 


243,  Genitive, 

The  Genitive  is  used  chiefly  as  the  complement  of  sub- 
stantives, its  use  in  this  respect  being  much  the  same  as  the 
English  objective  with  ‘of/  and  also  covering  that  of  the 
possessive.  Thus  we  have  : 

j.  The  Genitive  of  Origin,  as: 

2)ie  $ru<f)te  33aume§,  The  fruits  of  the  tree, 

2.  The  Subjective  Genitive,  indicating  the  agent  or 
cause , as  : 

2)er  ©laube  ei ne§  ©fyriften,  The  faith  of  a Christian. 

3.  The  Objective  Genitive,  indicating  the  thing  affected,  as : 

2)ie  ©nibedung  2Imerifa£,  The  discovery  of  America. 

4.  The  Possessive  Genitive,  as : 

©er  ©arten  $5mg8,  The  garden  of  the  king  (the 
king’s  garden). 

5.  The  Genitive  of  Quality,  as: 

3toet  Stnber  etne3  Sllterg,  Two  children  of  one  age. 

Note.  — This  genitive  is  frequently  replaced  by  Don,  as : 

(Sin  9ftaitn  tiOtt  fyofjera  filter,  A man  of  great  age, 

6.  The  Partitive  Genitive,  as : 

©trier  metner  greunbe,  One  of  my  friends. 

®er  jungfte  metner  33ruber,  The  youngest  of  my  brothers. 

Note,  — This  genitive  is  commonly  replaced  by  Don  after  numerals 
and  other  partitives. 

244.  Genitive  after  Adjectives. 

Adjectives  denoting  posssession  and  interest,  plenty,  know- 
ledge, desire,  guilt,  or  their  opposites,  govern  the  genitive,  as: 
Bebiirftig,  needing,  in  need  freftmjst,  conscious 
begterig  (also  -j-  nacfy),  de-  etngebenf,  mindful 

sirous  fdfyig  (also  -f  ju),  capable 


288 


LESSON  XLI. 


frob,  glad 
getoij3,  certain 

getoofynt  (also  + an  with  acc.), 
accustomed 
leer,  empty 
Io3  (also  + acc.),  rid 
mube  (also  + acc.),  tired 
fatt  (also  + acc.),  satisfied 


[§  § 244" 

fd&ulbtg,  guilty 
fitter,  certain 
u'berbriiffig,  weary 
i>erbad;tig,  suspected 
ho H (also  + acc.,  or  + non), 
full 

Inert  (also  + acc.),  worth 
tolirbig,  worthy 

Remarks.  — i.  The  neuter  pronoun  ‘ it  ’ after  most  of  these 
adjectives  may  have  the  form  c8,  which  is  the  old  genitive, 
and  is  the  origin  of  the  later  use  of  the  accusative,  first  with 
the  pronouns  ba£,  tna3,  and  then,  by  analogy,  with  substan- 
tives, as : 

3$  bin  e§  (ba8)  tniibe,  I am  tired  of  it  (that). 

2.  With  tnitbe,  Inert  the  Accusative  is  more  usual  than 
the  genitive. 

245.  Genitive  after  Verbs. 

i.  Verbs  of  meanings  similar  to  those  of  the  adjectives  under 
the  previous  section  take  a genitive  of  the  nearer  object,  as: 
acfden  (also  + auf  with  acc.),  benfen  (generally  + an  with 


(also  + 
acc.) 


pay  attention 
bebiirfen,  need 
E>egel)ren,  desire 
braud&en,  want 
entbefyren,  miss, 
do  without 
ertnaI)nen,mention  y 
Also  the  following : 
barren  (also  + auf  with  acc.) 
wait 

fcmrten  (also  + acc.),  tend, 
nurse 


acc.),  think 
gebenfen,  mention 
gentefsen  (generally  + acc.), 
enjoy 

hergeffen  (generally  + acc.), 
forget 


lac^en,  laugh  at 
gotten,  mock 

fcfyonen  (also  + acc.),  spare 


ADVERBIAL  GENITIVE. 


289 


247] 


2.  Transitive  Verbs  of  accusing,  condemning,  acquittal ’ 
deprivation,  emotion , take  a genitive  of  the  remoter  ob- 
ject, as: 


artflagert,  accuse 
berauben,  rob 
befdjmlbigert,  accuse 
entbinben  (also  + fcon),  re- 
lieve 

entfleiben  (also  + fcort),  dis- 
robe 


Io§fyred;en,  acquit 
iiberfiify'ren,  convict 
iiberjeu'gert  (also  + fcon),  con- 
vince 

bevjicfyern,  assure 
iDlirbtgen,  deem  worthy 
get fyen,  accuse 


3.  Also  many  reflexive  and  impersonal  verbs  (see  §§  215, 
216,  219). 

246.  Adverbial  Genitive. 


For  the  use  of  the  genitive  in  forming  adverbs  from  sub- 
stantives, see  § 189,  2.  The  adverbial  genitive  may  express 
place,  time  or  manner,  as  : 

Stnfet  §anb,  On  the  left  hand. 

©enter  9Bege  gefyen,  To  go  one's  way. 

Stefcr  Sage,  During  these  (last)  days. 

2lbenb§,  In  the  evening. 

SERorgen§,  In  the  morning,  etc. 

2lEfe0  @rnfie§.  In  all  seriousness. 

Srocfnett  gufecS,  Dry-shod. 

And  particularly  with  2Betfe,  ‘manner,*  after  an  adjec- 
tive, as : 

©liicflicfycr  SBetfe,  — or : ) Fortunately  (lit.,  in  afortunate 
©ludlidjertoeife,  ) manner) 

247.  For  Interjections  followed  by  a genitive,  see 
§ 240, 4,  («)• 

For  the  genitive  after  prepositions,  see  §§  222,  223. 


LESSON  XLI. 


£§§  247- 


2QO 


EXERCISE  XLL 

A . 1.  Guten  Morgen,  Karl;  was  hast  du  fiir  Eile,  mein 

Junge?  2 . Guten  Morgen,  Herr  B. ; es  ist  bald  neun  Uhr 
und  ich  gehe  jetzt  in  die  Schule.  3.  So,  hast  du  noch  weit 
zu  gehen  ? 4.  Bis  nach  der  Friedrich strasze  ; Herr  G., 

unser  Lehrer,  besteht  sehr  auf  Piinktlichkeit.  5.  Steige  nur 
ein,  du  kannst  mit  mir  fahren,  da  mein  Weg  durch  die 
Friedrichstrasze  fiihrt.  6.  Ich  bin  Ihnen  sehr  dankbar ; das  ist 
sehr  freundlich  von  Ihnen.  7.  Sitzt  du  dabequem?  8.  Ja, 
aber  sind  meine  Bucher  Ihnen  nicht  im  Wege  ? 9.  Nicht  im 

geringsten,  aber  was  fiir  eine  Menge  Bucher  hast  du  da ! Du 
hast  gewiss  viel  zu  studieren.  10.  Ich  arbeite  jetzt  sehr 
fleissig,  da  das  Examen  nachstens  stattfindet.  11.  Auf 
welches  Examen  bereitest  du  dich  vor  ? 12.  Auf  das  Ein- 
trittsexamen  der  Universitat.  13.  Was  fiir  Sprachen  stu- 
dierst  du  ? 14.  Ich  studiere  Englisch,  Latein,  Deutsch  und 

Franzosisch.  15.  Natiirlich  studierst  du  auch  die  Mathe- 
matik?  16.  Wir  miissen  Rechnen,  Algebra  und  Geometrie 
lernen.  17.  Bist  du  ein  Freund  von  der  Mathematik,  oder 
ziehst  du  die  Sprachen  vor  ? 18,  Ich  lerne  sehr  gern  Ma- 

thematik, besonders  Algebra ; mein  Lehrer  glaubt,  ich 
habe  nicht  viel  Sprachtalent.  19.  Deshalb  solltest  du  desto 
fleissiger  die  Sprachen  studieren,  (auf)  dass  deine  Bildung 
nicht  einseitig  werde.  20.  Mein  Vater  ist  auch  derselben 
Meinung.  21.  Hoffentlich  wirst  du  dein  Examen  gliicklich 
bestehen  ; da  sind  wir  aber  schon  bei  der  Schule.  22.  Ich 
danke  Ihnen  vielmals  fiir  den  freundlichen  Wunsch,  wie  auch 
fiir  die  Fahrt. 

B.  1.  “ An  honest  man  is  the  noblest  work  of  God.”  2.  A 

pound  of  iron  is  about  as  large  as  two  pounds  of  silver. 
3.  Mr.  Cleveland  was  elected  president  of  the  United  States 
in  the  year  1884.  4.  I was  to  have  taken  (made)  a journey 

to  Europe  this  summer,  but  my  father  needs  me  in  his  busi- 


248] 


DATIVE. 


29I 


ness  and  I shall  be  obliged  to  remain  at  home.  5.  I have 
been  offered  five  thousand  dollars  for  my  house,  and  I shall  sell 
it,  for  I am  glad  of  the  opportunity  of  getting  (to  get)  rid  of  it. 

6.  The  Duke  of  Wellington,  a great  English  general  (^elbs 
fyerr),  was  called  the  “ Iron  Duke,”  as  Prince  Bismarck,  the 
great  German  statesman,  is  called  the  “ Iron  Chancellor.” 

7.  He  (the  former)  has  deserved  that  title  not  only  as  a soldier 

but  as  a man.  8.  My  neighbour,  the  merchant,  has  been 
accused  of  forgery,  but  I do  not  believe  that  he  is  capable 
of  such  a crime.  9.  He  was  inwneed  of  money,  and  is 
said  to  have  done  it  on  that  account.  10.  I hope  that  he 
will  be  acquitted  of  this  accusation,  for  I am  convinced  of 
his  innocence.  11.  The  discovery  of  America  by  (burd;) 
Columbus  was  perhaps  the  greatest  undertaking  of  any  man 
or  of  any  age  (^cxtalter).  12.  Columbus  was  a man  of  great 
bodily  as  well  as  mental  power.  13.  His  whole  fleet  con- 
sisted of  three  small  ships,  of  which  two  were  very  old.  14. 
Have  you  seen  your  brother  the  lawyer  ? 15.  Excuse  [me]  ; 

my  brother  is  not  a lawyer,  but  a doctor.  I have  not  seen 
him  since  Christmas.  16.  As  a student  he  always  used  (pflegen) 
to  say  he  meantwto  be  (toerben)  a lawyer.  17.  We  are  tired 
of  studying;  let  us  go  out.  18.  Shall  I send  for  (nad))  a 
carriage?  19.  No,  it  is  not  worth  while  (ber  3Jili£?e  toert),  I 
would  rather  walk.  20.  Unfortunately  it  has  rained  and  the 
roads  are  bad.  21.  We  can  try  (the)  walking,  and  if  we  get 
tired  of  it,  we  can  take  the  street-cars  (^[erbeba^n,  sing.). 


LESSON  XLII. 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  CASES  (continued).- DATIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE. 
248.  Dative. 

The  Dative  is  the  case  of  the  Indirect  Object. 

The  Dative  is  used  to  denote  the  person  for  whose  advan- 
tage or  disadvantage  a thing  is  or  is  done,  as : 


292 


LESSON  XLII. 


[§§248- 


(Sr  I)at  mir  ein  23ud)  gefauft,  He  has  bought  me  a 
book. 

249.  The  Dative  is  very  freely  used  in  German  to  denote 
the  person  who  has  some  interest  in  an  action  or  thing.  This 
is  called  the  ethical  dative  or  dative  of  interest,  and  must 
usually  be  left  untranslated  in  English,  in  which  language  its 
use  is  obsolete,  thus : 

fyabe  mir  bie  ©acf)e  artgefefyert,  I have  considered  the 
thing  (for  my  own  satisfaction). 

£l)u  mir  ba3  rticfyt  toteber,  Don’t  do  that  again  (I  tell 
you). 

For  the  possessive  dative  replacing,  with  the  definite  ar- 
ticle, a genitive  case  or  (with  pronouns)  a possessive  adjective, 
see  § 44,  6. 

250.  Dative  after  Verbs. 

1.  The  Dative  stands  as  the  Indirect  Object  of  transitive 
verbs,  as : 

(Sr  giebt  mir  ba§  25u$,  He  gives  me  the  book  (the  book 
to  me). 

2.  It  stands  as  the  sole  object  after  verbs  which  express  a 
personal  relation  only,  such  as  verbs  of : 

( a ) Approach  or  removal , etc.,  as : 

begegrten,  meet  gletcfyett,  resemble 

entgefyen,  escape  nctcfygefyen,  follow 

erttfyrecfyen,  correspond  to  nacfyftefyen,  be  inferior 

fefylett,  be  wanting  nafyert,  approach 

folgett,  follow  gufefyen,  watch 

(b)  Pleasure  or  displeasure , as  : 

beljagen,  please  broken,  threaten 

banfen,  thank  flucben,  curse 


*5°1 


DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS. 


293 


gefaften,  please 
geniigen,  suffice 
grotlen,  be  angry 


tniftfal'len,  displease 
fcfymeicfyeln,  flatter 
ftefyen,  suit,  become 


(c)  Advantage  or  disadvantage , as  : 


beiftefyen,  assist 
btenen,  serve 
fyelfen,  help 


tnangeln,  be  wanting 
mit$en,  be  useful 
fcfyaben,  harm 


(d)  Command,  resistance  and  their  opposites , as : 


gebieten,  order 
gefyorcben,  obey 
berbieten,  forbid 


befefylen,  command 


frozen,  defy 
toeidjen,  yield 
toiberfte'fyen,  oppose 
toiberftre'ben,  resist 


(e)  After  verbs  expressing  possession , trust , and  various 
other  personal  relations,  as  : 


Also  with  fein  and  toerben,  expressing  a state  of  feeling 
(with  gu  SDIute  expressed  or  understood),  as : 

SEie  iff  gotten  ? How  do  you  feel  ? 

Observe  also  the  idiom : 2Benn  bent  fo  iff,  i If  that  is  the 
case/  in  which  bent  is  dat.  neut. 

(/)  After  many  verbs  expressing  similar  relations,  com- 
pounded with  the  inseparable  prefixes  CX-,  tilt-, 
bev-,  tmber ; with  the  separable  prefixes  an-,  atif-, 
bet-,  cntgegcn-,  nadj-,  bar-,  jn-,  etc.,  and  with 
adjectives,  nouns  or  adverbial  phrases,  such  as : 

letb  tljun,  be  sorry  gu  Seil  toerben,  fall  to  one’s 

toofyltoollen,  be  well-disposed  share 

gu  ©fatten  fommen,  be  of  use  ba3  SSort  reben,  defend 


anttoorten,  answer 
beiftimmen,  agree  with 
ertotbern,  reply 
gefyoren,  belong 


glauben,  believe 
fcfyetnen,  seem 
trauen,  trust 
gureben,  encourage 


294 


LESSON  XLII. 


[§§  250- 


REMARKS. — i.  The  great  majority  of  these  verbs  have 
become  transitive  in  English,  on  account  of  the  loss  of  dis- 
tinction between  the  dative  and  accusative ; their  construc- 
tion in  German  should  be  carefully  observed. 

2.  Many  of  the  verbs  under  (//),  (<?)  above  take  a direct 
object, particularly  in  the  shape  of  a clause  or  of  a neuter 
pronoun,  as  : 

(Sr  Ijat  mtr  berboten  ju  geljen,  He  has  forbidden  me 
to  go. 

gd;  ertoiberte,  feaft  id)  famtnen  tuoflc,  I replied  that  I 
would  come. 

SJtein  SSater  f ;at  mir  befofylen,  My  father  has  ordered 

me  (to  do)  it. 

For  the  Dative  with  Reflexive  Verbs,  see  §§  215,  216;  witn 
Impersonates rbs,  see  §§  217,  219. 

251.  Dative  after  Adjectives. 


The  Dative  stands  after  adjectives  similar  in  meaning  to 
the  Verbs  given  in  the  foregoing  section,  such  as : 

(a)  Approach , etc. : 


afynltc^,  similar 
fremb,  strange 
gletd;,  equal,  like 

(b)  Pleasure , etc.: 
angeneljm,  pleasant 
gncibig,  gracious 

(c)  Advantage , etc. : 
Ijeilfam,  wholesome 
fcfyulbig,  indebted 

( d ) Command,  etc.: 
folgfam,  j 
gel/orfam, ) 


obedient 


urtgleicf),  unequal,  unlike 
nafye  (also  + bet),  near 
fcertoanbt,  related 

lieb,  dear 

totflfommen,  welcome 
treu,  faithful 


ungefyorfam,  disobedient 
totbrig,  repulsive 


253] 


ACCUSATIVE. 


29s 


(e)  Possession,  etc. : 

eigen,  belonging  gemein(fam),  common 

Note.  — Almost  any  adjective  modified  by  git  or  gettug  may  take  a 
dative,  as : 

SDtefe  §anbfd)ii^e  ftnb  mix  gu  grog  (grog  gemtg),  These  gloves  are  . 
too  large  (large  enough)  for  me. 

For  the  Dative  after  Prepositions,  see  §§  46,  51. 

252.  Accusative. 

The  Accusative  is  the  case  of  the  Direct  Object,  Time 
and  Measure. 

All  transitive  verbs  take  the  direct  object  in  the  accusative. 

Remark.  — Many  verbs  that  are  transitive  in  English  are  in- 
transitive in  German  (see  § 250,  Rem.  1,  above),  and  vice  versa . 

253.  Double  Accusative. 

The  verb  lefyren,  4 to  teach/  governs  two  accusatives,  one  of 
the  person  and  the  other  of  the  thing ; the  verb  frageit,  4 to 
ask/  takes  the  latter  accusative  only  when  it  is  a neuter  pro- 
noun, as : 

3<f)  toerbe  bid)  bie  bcutfcfje  ©pr wfje  lefyren,  I shall  teach 
you  the  German  language. 

£5$  faoKie  bitfj  gerne  efUm£  fragen,  I should  like  to  ask 
you  something. 

Verbs  of  calling , etc.,  have  a second  accusative  as  facti- 
tive predicate,  as : 

$df)  nannte  t!jn  cittett  barren,  I called  him  a fool. 

Of  Verbs  of  considering , etc.,  some,  such  as  : betrad)ten,  4 to 
regard  ’ ; anfefyen,  4 to  look  upon ’ ; barftellen,  4 to  represent/ 
take  a factitive  accusative  with  al3,  as : 

3$  fel)e  ben  SRegert  aU  eine  SBoIjltfyat  an,  I regard  the 
rain  as  a benefit. 


296 


LESSON  XLII. 


I§§  253- 


Other  verbs  of  considering,  with  those  of  choosing,  etc., 
which  take  a second  accusative  of  this  sort  in  English,  are 
followed  by  a preposition  (fur,  ju)  in  German  (see  Less.  XLIX). 

254.  Accusative  after  Intransitive  Verbs. 

1.  Intransitive  Verbs  may  sometimes  be  followed  by  an 
accusative  of  a meaning  akin  to  their  own,  called  the  cognate 
accusative,  as : 

8$  fyabe  etnett  fcfyonen  Zraum  gefraumf,  I have  dreamt 
a beautiful  dream. 

2.  Intransitive  Verbs  may  take  an  accusative  of  that  which 
is  effected  or  produced  by  the  action  they  express,  as  : 

$J3etru§  ItJcinle  bittere  SHjrittten,  Peter  wept  bitter  tears 

3.  Intransitive  Verbs  may  take  an  accusative  followed  by 
an  adjective,  etc.,  as  factitive  predicate,  as : 

8$  fyabe  mid)  faff  gegeffen,  I have  eaten  enough  (lit., 
have  eaten  myself  satisfied). 

$Da3  $tnb  toeinte  fid)  in  ben  ©d)laf,  The  child  has  cried 
itself  to  sleep. 

Remark.  — The  Accusative  in  all  these  constructions,  ex- 
cept the  last,  which  is  not  used  in  the  passive,  becomes  a nom- 
inative in  the  passive  construction ; that  of  the  thing  after 
lefjren  remains  accusative;  with  fragen  and  bitten,  the  acc.  of 
the  thing  is  not  used  in  the  passive. 

For  the  accusative  after  Reflexive  Verbs,  see  § 216;  after 
Impersonal  Verbs,  see  § 219  ; after  Prepositions , see  §§  34,  50  ; 
after  some  Adjectives,  it  replaces  the  Genitive  (see  § 245, 
and  Remarks). 

255.  Adverbial  Accusative. 

1.  The  Accusative  is  used  adverbially  to  express  time  (see 
§ 184, 1)  and  measure  (see  § 185, 4) ; also  distance  and  way  after 
verbs  of  motion,  as : 


2551 


ACCUSATIVE. 


297 


bin  fedjS  gute  SMeilcit  gefafjren,  I have  driven  six 
full  miles. 

3BeId;cn  28cg  toerben  ©ie  gefyen  ? Which  way  will  you 

go? 

The  Accusative  is  used  also  in  absolute  constructions, 
especially  with  participles,  as  : 

@r  lam  ju  mir,  ben  £ut  in  ber  §anb,  He  came  to  me 
hat  in  hand. 

@r  ftcmb  ba,  bie  Stugen  in  bie  Jpofje  gmrfjtet,  He  stood 
there  [with]  eyes  uplifted. 

EXERCISE  XL  1 1. 

A . 1.  Also,  Sie  haben  sich  entschlossen,  uns  morgen  friih  zu 
verlassen?  2.  Ich  muss  wohl,  da  meine  Geschaftsangelegen- 
heiten  mir  keinen  langeren  Aufenthalt  erlauben.  3.  Sie  reisen 
natiirlich  mit  dem  zweiten  Zug  ab  ? 4.  Wissen  Sie,  um  wie  viel 
Uhr  derselbe  in  B.  ankommt  ? 5.  Ich  kann  es  Ihnen  nicht  ganz 
genau  sagen,  aber  er  kommt  gegen  vier  Uhr  (des)  Nachmittags 
an.  6.  Das  ist  mir  viel  zu  spat.  Man  erwartet  mich  schon  um 
halb  zwolf  auf  meinem  Bureau.  7.  In  dem  Falle  miissen  Sie 
wohl  den  Schnellzug  nehmen,  der  schon  um  drei  Viertel  auf 
sieben  abfahrt.  8.  Es  lasst  sich  nicht  andern.  9.  Gut,  ich 
werde  Sie  Punkt  sechs  Uhr  wecken  lassen.  10.  Ich  danke 
Ihnen ; das  wird  durchaus  nicht  notig  sein,  da  ich  meine  Weck- 
uhr  bei  mir  habe.  11.  Wie  viel  Zeit  brauchen  Sie,  sich  anzu- 
kleiden?  12.  Zwanzig  bis  fiinfunazwanzig  Minuten  ; aber  ich 
werde  noch  mehreres  einzupacken  haben.  13.  Dann  ware  es 
jedenfalls  besser,  die  Weckuhr  auf  halb  sechs  zu  stellen.  14. 
Bitte,  sagen  Sie  mir  genau,  wie  viel  Uhr  es  jetzt  ist ; ich  fiirchte, 
meine  Uhr  geht  nach.  15.  Es  ist  gerade  neun  Minuten  vor  elf. 
16.  Ist  es  moglich  ! Dann  geht  meine  Uhr  ja  vor,  anstatt  nach. 
Sind  Sie  gewiss,  dass  Ihre  Uhr  richtig  geht?  17.  Jawohl ; ich 
habe  sie  heute  nach  der  Stadtuhr  gestellt.  18.  Es  wird  spat ; 
20 


298 


LESSON  XLII. 


[§§  255- 


ich  muss  mich  schlafen  legen,  um  morgen  friih  aufstehen  zu 
konnen.  19.  Also  machen  wir  es  auf  diese  Weise  : Sie  stehen 
um  halb  sechs  auf,  um  fiinf  Minuten  nach  sechs  friihstiicken  Sie, 
um  funfcndzwanzig  Minuten  nach  sechs  wird  der  Wagen  vor- 
fahren  und  in  zehn  Minuten  sind  Sie  auf  dem  Bahnhofe.  Dann 
haben  Sie  noch  zehn  Minuten  tibrig,  um  Ihr  Billet'  zu  losen 
und  Ihr  Gepack  einschreiben  zu  lassen.  Jetzt,  gute  Nacht ! 
20.  Gute  Nacht,  schlafen  Sie  wohl ! 

B.  1.  Do  not  trust  those  who  flatter  you.  2.  Do  not  be- 
lieve them,  for  flatterers  are  liars.  3.  I always  considered  my 
father  as  my  truest  friend.  4.  The  general  commands  the  sol- 
diers : the  soldiers  obey  the  general.  5.  What  is^the^name 
of  the  gentleman  whom  we  have  just  met  ? His  name  has 
escaped  me.  6.  You  should  never  forget  to  thank  those  who 
help  you.  7.  How  does  this  hat,  which  I bought  myself  yester- 
day, please  you  ? 8.  It  does  not  become  you  very  well ; it  is 

too  large  for  you.  9.  When  I was  going  to  the  railway-station, 
a boy  met  me  and  gave  me  a telegram.  10.  May  I ask  you  if 
Mr.  H.  is  related  to  you?  11.  He  resembles  me  very  much, 
but  he  is  not  related  to  me.  12.  Mr.  B.  has  been  ordered,  on 
account  of  ill-health,  to  go  to  a warmer  climate.  He  has  been 
forbidden  to  pass  the  winter  in  the  North.  13.  How  long  does 
he  remain  absent  ? 14.  He  is  to  remain  absent  at  least  four 

months.  15.  Last  week  I ordered  (myself)  an  overcoat  at  the 
tailor’s,  which  he  was  to  bring  me  to-day.  16.  The  Niagara  Falls 
aie  considered  (one  considers,  etc.)  as  one  of  the  greatest 
wonderswofj;hewworld.  17.  People  say  of  one  who  sleeps 
very  soundly  that  he  sleeps  the  sleep  of  the  righteous.  18. 
May  I ask  you  to  assist  me,  or  at  least  to  advise  me?  19.  I 
should  be  very  glad  to  be  able  to  help  you.  20.  I am  in  need 
of  money,  and  should  not  like  to  ask  any  one  else  for  it. 


257] 


THE  PRESENT. 


299 


LESSON  XLIXI. 

THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD:-SYNTAX  OF  ITS  TENSES. 

256.  The  Indicative  is  the  mood  of  reality  and  direct 
statement.  As  the  tenses  are  used  with  reference  to  time 
in  the  Indicative  only,  their  proper  use  is  given  here. 

257.  The  Present. 

The  Present  Tense  answers  to  all  the  English  forms  of 
that  tense  (e.  g.,  \d)  lobe  = I praise,  am  praising,  do  praise), 
and  is  used  : 

1.  To  denote  action  now  going  on,  as : 

$inb  The  child  is  sleeping  (now). 

2.  To  state  a general  fact  or  custom,  as : 

©er  ©cfynee  iff  toeifs,  The  snow  is  white. 

©er  Dct)fe  frifjt  ©ra£,  The  ox  eats  grass. 

3.  For  the  imperfect  in  historical  narrative , to  give  greater 
vividness,  as  : 

©efcfytoinb  Ijcbt  er  einert  ©tein  auf  unb  ttrirff  benfelben  bem 
irmnbe,  ber  ifyn  beifcen  toil!,  an  ben  Quickly  he 
picks  up  a stone,  and  throws  it  at  the  dog,  who  is 
about  to  attack  him. 

4.  For  the  English  perfect  (as  in  French),  when  the  action 
or  state  continues  in  the  present , the  past  being  inferred  and 
the  present  alone  expressed,  as  : 

SBie  lange  iff  er  fcfyon  franf  ? How  long  has  he  been 
ill?  (N.B.— He  is  still  ill.) 

3<f)  gefje  feit  cidEjt  ©agen  toieber  jur  ©cfyule,  I have  been 
going  to  school  again  for  the  last  week  (and  am  still 
going). 

Note.  — This  construction  is  very  common  with  feit. 


300 


LESSON  XLI1I. 


[§§257- 


5.  For  the  future  very  commonly,  where  no  ambiguity 
would  arise,  particularly  to  replace  the  English  form  4 am 
going  to,’  as : 

2>cfj  fdjreifie  morgen  einen  93rief  an  nteinen  SSater,  I am 
going  to  write  a letter  to  my  father  to-morrow. 

258.  The  Imperfect. 

The  Imperfect  is  used  : 

1.  As  the  historical  ( narrative ) preterite,  when  an  event 
is  told  in  connection  with  others,  as : 

Slnfang  fdjuf  ©ott  £immet  unb  Srbe,  unb  2 lHe§  mar 
toiifte  unb  leer  u.  f.  to..  And  in  the  beginning  God  cre- 
ated heaven  and  earth,  and  all  was  waste  and 
void,  etc. 

2.  To  denote  customary,  continued  or  contempo- 
raneous action,  replacing  the  English  forms  ‘was  doing/ 
‘used  to  do/  as : 

Sr  giitg  jeben  £ag  um  bier  Uf;r  au§,  He  used  to  go  out 
every  day  at  four  o’clock. 

2Sir  fuljreit  art  ber  ^ird^e  borbet,  aU  bte  Ufyr  elf  fdjfag. 
We  were  driving  past  the  church,  as  the  clock 
struck  eleven. 

259.  The  Perfect. 

1.  The  Perfect  indicates  a past  event  as  complete  and 
no  longer  continuing,  thus  : 

$cf)  Ijabc  geleSi  unb  gcliebet,  I have  lived  and  loved 
(and  both  my  life  and  my  love  are  ended). 

2.  The  Perfect  is  used  of  an  event  as  a separate  and 
independent  fact,  simply  asserted  as  true  without  reference 
to  any  other,  as : 

©ott  Ijat  bte  2BeIt  etfcfjaffett,  God  created  the  world ; 


20l] 


THE  PERFECT. 


301 


but  in  the  sentence  : 

©ott  fcf)uf  bie  2BeIt  in  fecf)3  Shagen  unb  ruljtc  am 
fiebenten,  God  created  the  world  in  six  days,  and 
rested  on  the  seventh, 

the  imperfect  is  used,  because  the  two  events  are  connected. 

3.  The  Perfect  is  used  (apart  from  historical  narrative),  in 
preference  to  the  Imperfect,  of  an  event  which  has  not  been 
witnessed  or  participated  in  by  the  speaker,  as  : 

©eftern  ift  ein  $inb  crirunfen  ( Perf. ),  A child  was 
drowned  yesterday  ; — but : 

©eftern  crtratt!  (Imp/.)  ein  Sinb,  aU  id)  am  Ufer  fianb, 
A child  was  drowned  yesterday,  when  I was  stand- 
ing on  the  shore. 

Remark.  — This  distinction  between  the  use  of  the  Perfect 
and  Imperfect  is  not  accurately  observed,  but  it  is  always 
better  to  render  the  English  forms  4 was  doing/  4 used  to  do/ 
by  the  Imperfect. 

4.  The  Perfect  replaces  the  Future-Perfect,  as  the  Present 
does  the  Future,  as  : 

%d)  toerbe  fommen,  fobalb  idb  meinc  ©efcbafte  afigemadjf 
Ijafie,  I shall  come,  as  soon  as  I have  (i.  e.,  shall 
have)  finished  my  business. 

260.  The  Pluperfect. 

The  Pluperfect  is  used,  as  in  English,  of  a past  action 
completed  before  another  was  begun,  thus : 

@r  Ijattc  feine  2lufgabe  twffenbct,  djc  ©ie  famen,  He  had 
finished  his  exercise,  before  you  came. 

261.  The  Future. 

The  F uture  is  used  : 

x.  Of  an  action  about  to  take  place,  as : 

Unfer  3Sater  luirb  un£  lobcn.  Our  father  will  praise  us. 


302 


LESSON  XLIII. 


[§§261- 


2.  To  denote  probability  or  supposition,  as : 

toirb  mein  23ruber  fein,  ber  cmgefommen  ift.  It  is 
probably  my  brother  who  has  arrived. 

262.  The  Future-Perfect. 

The  Future-Perfect  is  the  Perfect  in  the  Future,  and 
expresses  probability  even  more  frequently  than  the  simple 
Future,  as  : 

SDer  33rief  to irb  f$on  geftern  gcfommett  feitt.  The  letter 
probably  arrived  yesterday. 

EXERCISE  XLIII. 

A . 1.  Diese  Hitze  ist  unertraglich ; ich  glaube,  nie  einen  so 
heissen  Sommer  erlebt  zu  haben.  2.  Und  wie  schwiil  es  ist ! 
Sieht  es  nicht  sehr  nach  Regen  aus  ? 3.  Richtig,  da  sind 

schon  die  ersten  Regentropfen,  und  ich  meine,  vor  einigen 
Minuten  Donner  in  der  Feme  gehort  zu  haben.  4.  Das  macht 
mir  einen  Strich  durch  die  Rechnung.  Bei  diesem  Wetter 
kann  ich  unmoglich  zur  Stadt  gehen.  5.  Fur’s  Erste  allerdings 
nicht,  aber  das  Gewitter  wird  nicht  lange  anhalten.  6.  Das  ist 
ein  wahrer  Platzregen  ; so  ein  Regen  ist  dem  Lande  sehr  notig. 
7.  Ja,  wir  haben  diesen  Sommer  iiberhaupt  sehr  wenig  Regen 
gehabt,  aber  vorigen  Winter  desto  mehr  Schnee.  8.  Horen 
Sie,  das  war  ein  Knall ! 9.  Ja,  und  wie  schnell  der  Donner 

auf  den  Blitz  folgte  ! Fiirchten  Sie  sich  vor  dem  Blitze?  10. 
Seitdem  es  voriges  Jahr  in  unserer  Nahe  eingeschlagen  hat,  bin 
ich  ein  wenig  angstlich.  11.  Das  glaube  ich  schon,  aber  sehen 
Sie  doch,  jetzt  hagelt  es  noch  sogar!  12.  Das  braucht  das 
Land  gewiss  nicht,  aber  die  Hagelkorner  sind  nicht  grosz 
genug,  um  viel  Schaden  anzurichten.  13.  Es  fangt  schon  an, 
sich  aufzuhellen  ; das  schlimmste  ist  vorbei.  14.  Wie  sich  die 
Luft  abgekuhlt  hat ! 15.  Und  wie  schnell  ! Das  ist  oft  der 

Fall  hier  zu  Lande.  16.  Jawohl;  erinnern  Sie  sich  nicht  des 


s62] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  TENSES. 


303 


wechselhaften  Wetters,  das  wir  vorigen  Friihling  gehabt  haben  ? 
17.  Besonders  im  Marz  und  Anfang  April.  18.  Einen  Tag 
thaute  es,  den  nachsten  fror  es,  und  am  dritten  Tage  regnete 
Oder  schneite  es  gar.  19.  Dann  gab  es  wieder  eine  Hitze 
wie  mitten  im  Sommer;  schon  im  April  hatten  wir  fast 
achtzig  Grad  Fahrenheit.  20.  Da  scheint  die  Sonne  wieder ; 
ich  sagte  Ihnen  ja,  dass  das  Gewitter  nicht  lange  anhalten 
wtirde.  21.  Da  haben  Sie  Recht ; jetzt  muss  ich  mich  auf  den 
Weg  machen. 

B.  1.  A misfortune  seldom  comes  alone.  2.  Schlegel  trans- 
lated Shakespeare’s  works  into  German.  3.  Is  your  father  at 
home  ? No,  he  has  been  away  for  three  weeks,  but  he  is  (prob- 
ably) coming  back  to-morrow  morning.  4.  As  soon  as  I have 
news  of  his  arrival,  I shall  come  again.  5.  During  my  illness 
I used  to  go  for  a drive  two  hours  every  day.  6.  Are  you 
going  (to  go)  to  the  concert  this  evening  ? I do  not  think  I 
shall  go.  7.  Have  you  an  engagement  elsewhere  ? No,  but  I 
am  going  to  bed  immediately,  as  I start  for  Boston  to-morrow 
morning  at  seven  o’clock.  8.  People  (man)  are  often  con- 
scious of  bad  habits,  which  they  cannot  get  rid  of.  9.  Have 
you  been  long  in  America?  I have  been  here  since  my  fifteenth 
year.  10.  This  is  probably  a letter  from  my  mother,  for  that  is 
her  hand-writing.  11.  We  had  hardly  been  at  home  half  an 
hour,  when  it  began  to  rain.  12.  Shakespeare  is  considered 
the  greatest  poet  of  the  English  nation.  13.  He  was  born  at 
Stratford-on-Avon,  and  passed  his  youth  in  that  place.  14.  As 
a young  man  he  went  to  London,  became  celebrated  there,  and 
died  in  the  year  1616  in  his  native^town.  15.  The  sun  was 
setting,  and  the  long  [and]  desperate  combat  was  not  yet 
decided.  16.  For  the  third  time  our  brave  soldiers  throw 
themselves  upon  the  batteries  of  the  enemy.  17.  Nothing 
could  resist  this  attack  ; the  enemy  wavers,  and  the  victory  is 
ours.  18.  But  what  a dearly-bought  victory ! 19.  He,  who 


304 


LESSON  XLIV. 


l§§  263- 


led  the  soldiers  into  the  combat,  comes  not  back  with  them. 
20.  Yonder  he  lies  cold  and  silent,  and  our  triumph  becomes 
bitter  mourning. 


LESSON  XLIV. 

THE  CONDITIONAL  AND  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

263.  The  Conditional. 

1.  The  Conditional  tenses  are,  in  form,  subjunctive  past 
tenses,  answering  to  the  Future  as  a present. 

2.  They  indicate  possible  futurity , and  coincide  with  the 
Impf.  and  Plupf.  Subj.  in  their  use  in  conditional  clauses,  and 
will  therefore  be  treated  conjointly  with  them  (see  § 267, 
below). 

Note.  — The  Tenses  of  the  Condicional  are  a new  formation;  the 
Impf.  and  Plupf.  Subj.  having,  in  the  older  stages  of  the  language,  per- 
formed the  function  of  the  Conditional. 

264.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  is  used  much  more  fre- 
quently in  German  than  in  English,  the  distinction  between 
Indicative  and  Subjunctive  being  almost  entirely  obliterated 
in  the  latter  language. 

265.  The  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Statements. 

The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  Indirect  Statements  or 
Quotations  (see  also  § 87),  i.  e.,  when  the  words  used  are 
quoted  in  substance  only , and  not  as  they  were  spoken,  espe- 
cially after  a verb  in  the  principal  clause  signifying : 

(a)  Imparting  of  information  (statement,  report,  con- 
fession, reminding,  etc.),  as: 
cmttoorten,  answer  erjci^Ien,  relate 

bebaupten,  assert  gefteljen,  confess 

berid^ten,  report  fagen,  say 


266] 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  STATEMENTS.  305 


(b)  Apprehension , as  : 
benfen,  think 
erinnern  (refl.),  remember 


meinen,  be  of  opinion 
merfen,  observe 
fcftfieften,  conclude 
tuiffert,  know 


fufylen,  feel 
fyoren,  hear 


( c ) Contemplation  with  various  emotions,  as  : 


furc^ten,  fear 
freuert  (refl.),  rejoice 
glauben,  believe 
Ijoffert,  hope 


tounbern  (refl.),  wonder 
toiinfcften,  wish 
gtoeifeln,  doubt 


(el)  Request , command , advice , etc.,  as  : 


befeblen,  command 
bitten,  ask 


raten,  advise 
berlangen,  demand 


ermahnen,  admonish 

266.  The  Tense  in  Indirect  Statements. 

The  verb  of  the  Indirect  Statement  is,  as  a rule,  in  the 
same  tense  as  it  would  have,  if  the  statement  were  made 
directly  (see  § 87,  2),  i.  e.,  the  tense  of  the  Indirect  Statement 
is  the  same  as  that  of  the  Direct. 

Remarks.  — i.  An  Indirect  Statement  is  always  a subordi- 
nate clause. 

2.  The  conjunction  baft  may  be  omitted  in  such  clauses, 
which  will  then  have  the  construction  of  a principal  sentence 
(i.  e.,  verb  second ; see  § 87,  3). 

3.  The  Indicative  may  replace  the  Subjunctive  in  Indirect 
Statements,  when  the  speaker  wishes  to  represent  his  own 
belief  in  the  correctness  of  the  statement,  as  : 

%§  fyabe  gefyort,  baft  mein  Sruber  franf  t{t,  I have 
heard  that  my  brother  is  ill  (and  he  is  ill). 

©ie  ttmftte,  baft  ber  ©piegel  feme  Untoafyrfyeit  fftratfj,  unb 
merfte,  baft  ber  £$ciger  fie  betrogen  Ijatte,  etc.  (Grimm, 


306 


LESSON  XLIV. 


[§§  266- 


Sneewittchen,  p.  52,  1.  1),  She  knew  that  the 
mirror  did  not  tell  a lie,  and  saw  that  the  huntsman 
had  deceived  her  ( and  he  had  deceived  her). 

But  the  Subjunctive  is  used,  when  the  truth  of  the  state- 
ment is  not  vouched  for,  or  when  any  doubt  is  cast  upon 
it,  as : 

$Da§  fcoSfyafte  SBeib  aft  fte  auf  urtb  mettttc,  fie  Ijatte 
©neetoittcf)en3  Sttnge  urtb  Seber  gegeffen  (ibid.,  p.  49, 
1.  8),  The  malicious  woman  devoured  them,  and 
thought  she  had  eaten  Sneewittchen’s  lung  and 
liver  (whereas  she  had  not  eaten  them). 

4.  The  tense  of  the  Indirect  Statement  does  not  depend  on 
that  of  the  principal  clause,  and  the  sequence  of  tenses  which  is 
observed  in  English  is  not  found  in  German,  as: 

( Engl'. ) He  said  he  was  not  ill. 

(Germ.)  @r  jagtc,  er  fei  nid;t  !ranf. 

Notes.  — 1.  The  Subjunctive  is  unusual  after  the  verbs  under  (b)  and 
(r)  in  the  previous  section  (except  Ijoren),  if  the  principal  clause  has  a 
present  tense . 

2.  The  rule  as  to  tense  is  not  always  strictly  observed,  the  tense  used 
being  sometimes  determined  by  the  want  of  distinctive  subjunctive  forms. 
Thus  in  the  following  sentence  two  different  tenses  are  used : 

2Utd)  fdjloft  er,  es  mi’tffc  tie  @age  horn  ©taSmaunteiu  rtidjt  feljr 
befannt  fein,  uub  ben@prud)  miiftten  nuv  toentge  luiffcrt  (Hauff, 
Das  kalte  Herz,  p.  8,  1.  7),  Further,  he  concluded  that  the 
legend  of  the  Glass-manikin  could  not  be  very  well  known,  and 
only  a few  people  could  know  the  verse. 

3.  After  an  Impf.  in  the  principal  clause,  the  Subjunctive  is  usual  in 
the  Indirect  Statement,  except  as  in  the  second  example  under  Remark  3, 
above. 

4.  The  verb  of  the  principal  sentence  sometimes  remains  unexpressed, 
or  is  replaced  by  a noun  of  kindred  meaning,  as : 

(Sr  tieg  miff)  abmeifeit,  metf  er  franf  fei,  He  refused  to  see  me, 
because  (as  he  asserted ) he  was  ill. 


267] 


HYPOTHETICAL  PERIODS. 


307 


3d)  lief  fo  fdjiiett  toie  rnog(td),  ait-3  3urd)t,  id)  tnodjtc  ju  fpat  !om» 
men,  I ran  as  quickly  as  possible,  from  fear  that  I might  come 
too  late. 

5)a§  Jjiitte  ^ (D°  you  mean  to  say  that)  I said  that? 

This  last  construction  is  very  frequent  in  German,  to  express  emph^* 
tically  a doubt  as  to  the  truth  of  a statement. 

267.  The  Subjunctive  and  Conditional  in 
Hypothetical  Periods. 

Example  of  a Hypothetical  Period: 

If  I had  followed  your  advice,  I should  have  been 
happy. 

1.  The  above  sentence  consists  of  two  parts.  Of  these  the 
one  expresses  a condition , conceived,  in  this  instance,  as  unreal 
or  impossible,  viz. : 

If  I had  followed  your  advice  ( which  I did  not)  ; 
the  other  expresses  a result , also  unreal  or  unrealized,  which 
would  have  followed,  had  the  condition  been  realized,  viz. : 

I should  have  been  happy  ( which  I am  not). 

2.  In  both  parts  of  the  above  period  (in  the  condition  and 
in  the  result),  the  verb  is  in  a past  tense  (Impf.  or  Plupf.) 
of  the  Subjunctive  Mood,  as  : 

SBenrt  td)  Sfyrert  9^at  fccfolgt  ptte  (Plupf.  Subj.),  fo  tuare 
tcf)  gliicflicfy  gcUicfcn  (Plupf.  Subj.). 

Remarks.  — 1.  Either  of  the  two  clauses  may  stand  first; 
thus,  the  sentence  given  above  may  have  the  form : 

3$  toare  gliicflid)  getoefert,  toenn  u.  f.  to. 

2.  The  conjunction  ioenrt  may  be  omitted,  especially  when 
the  condition  precedes  the  result,  in  which  case  the  verb  will 
begin  the  sentence,  as : 

£wttc  uf)  Ski  Befolgt,  fo  ioare  iti)  glucflt$. 


3°8 


LESSON  XLIV. 


t§§  267- 


3.  If  the  result  clause  follows  the  conditional  clause,  it  is 
usually  introduced  by  the  particle  fo,  and  always  when  toCUU 
is  omitted  in  the  preceding  conditional  clause  (see  § 59,  and 
Note). 

4.  The  conditional  tenses  may  replace  the  Impf.  and  Plupf. 
Subj.  in  the  apodosis,  result  or  conclusion  only,  as : 

2Benrt  id)  $I)ren  9tat  befolgt  I)atte,  fo  tour  be  id)  gliidlid) 

getocfen  fetn. 

5.  If  the  condition-  is  stated  without  its  unreality  being 
implied,  the  verb  is  in  the  Pres.,  Perf.,  or  Fut.  Indicative , as : 

2Benrt  er  fontmi,  fo  toerbe  id;  fortgefyen,  If  he  comes,  I 
shall  go  away. 

6.  A condition  may  be  introduced  by  al£  toCUU  or  at8  ol), 
i as  if/  thus  : 

(Sr  fiel)t  au§,  al§  toemt  (06)  er  franf  toare.  He  looks  as 
if  he  were  ill. 

Note.  — In  clauses  of  this  kind,  toemt  or  ob  may  be  omitted,  and  the 
construction  is  then  inverted  accordingly  (see  § 239,  4),  as : 

(Sr  fief)t  au§,  at§  toare  er  franf. 

268*  Other  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive. 

1.  The  Pres.  Subjunctive  replaces  the  missing  persons 
(1.  and  3.)  of  the  Imperative  Mood,  the  subject  being  then 
put  after  the  verb,  except  in  the  3.  person,  where  it  may  also 
precede,  unless  the  pron.  ©ie  is  used  for  the  2.  person,  as : 

@elje  cr  (or  er  gef;e)  nad)  §au fe.  Let  him  go  home. 

2.  The  Impf.  and  Plupf.  Subjunctive  are  used  to  express 
a wish,  as : 

2Sare  id;  f>ei  $l)nen ! Would  that  I were  with  you  ! 

Note.  — This  is  really  an  elliptical  conditional  clause,  with  the  result 
unexpressed;  the  full  form  may  be  supplied  thus: 

^CSdre  id)  bei  3fynen,  ({0  todre  id)  gliidUdj). 


268] 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


309 


3.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  clauses  expressing  purpose , 
with  the  conjunctions  baf$,  auf  baj$,  barnit,  as : 

@r  cilte,  baft  (auf  bafc,  bamit)  er  gur  reef )ten  3eit  anftttne. 
He  hastened,  (in  order)  that  he  might  arrive  in 
good  time. 

4.  It  is  also  used  after  a negative  or  an  indefinite  relative , as  : 

<gier  iff  niemanb,  ber  miefy  n\d)t  feunte,  There  is  nobody 
here,  who  does  not  know  me. 

3$  toerbe  e§  ttyun,  ttm§  and)  bahon  fommen  ntSge,  I shall 
do  it,  no  matter  what  may  come  of  it. 

Note.  — The  Indicative  is  also  admissible  in  these  constructions. 

5.  The  Impf.  Subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  to  express 
possibility , as : 

ginge  toofyl,  That  might  (possibly)  do. 

%d)  btttfjte,  ba3  tudre  gut,  I should  think  that  might 
be  good ; 

and  especially  with  the  Modal  Auxiliaries,  as  : 

rnodjte  (f Smite,  biirfte)  toafyr  fem.  That  may  (pos- 
sibly) be  true. 

6.  Observe  the  following  idiom  : 

2Bte  bent  and)  fei.  However  that  may  be. 

EXERCISE  XLIV. 

A.  1.  Ich  habe  gehort,  dass  Sie  Ihr  Haus  verkauft  haben  ; 
istdaswahr?  2.  Ja,  meine  alte  Wohnung  gefiel  mir  nicht 
mehr.  3.  Wie  kommt  das  ? Ihr  Haus  schien  mir  immer  eine 
sehr  elegante  und  bequeme  Wohnung  zu  sein.  4.  Ein  besse- 
res  lasst  sich  nicht  leicht  finden;  allein,  seit(dem)  die  vielen 
Fabriken  in  der  Nahe  gebaut  worden  sind,  gefallt  mir  die 
Umge'bung  nicht  mehr.  5.  Das  kann  ich  mir  schon  denken. 
Der  Rauch  von  den  Fabriken  muss  sehr  unangenehm  sein. 
6.  Das  ist  nicht  das  Schlimmste ; das  fortwahrende  Gerausch 


3io 


LESSON  XLIV. 


[S3  268- 


bringt  einen  oft  zum  Verzweifeln.  7.  Haben  Sie  ein  anderes 
Haiis  gekauft  ? 8.  Nein,  vorlaufig  habe  ich  mir  ein  Haus  in 

der  Schillerstrasze  gemietet,  sobald  ich  aber  einen  passenden 
Bauplatz  finden  kann,  werde  ich  bauen.  9.  Haben  Sie  sich 
schon  nach  einem  Bauplatz  umgesehen  ? 10.  Ich  habe  die 

ganze  Stadt  durchsucht,  aber  ohne  Erfolg.  11.  Sie  miissen 
sehr  schwer  zu  befriedigen  sein.  12.  Das  gerade  nicht,  nur 
bestehe  ich  auf  drei  Bedingungen  : Frische  Luft,  eine  ruhige 
Strasze  und  eine  schone  Aussicht.  13.  Warum  bauen 
Sie  nicht  auf  der  Anhohe  in  der  Vorstadt,  jenseit  des 
Flusses  ? 14.  Daran  habe  ich  schon  gedacht,  nur  sind  mir 

die  Preise  ein  wenig  zu  hoch.  15.  Das  wiirde  mich  nicht 
abhalten,  so  lange  ich  nur  bekame,  was  ich  wlinschte.  16.  Es 
wird  mir  wohl  nichts  iibrig  bleiben,  als  mich  dort  anzukaufen. 
17.  Beabsichtigen  Sie,  mit  Backstein  oder  mit  Quaderstein  zu 
bauen  ? 18.  Ich  muss  das  erst  mit  meinem  Architekten 

besprechen.  19.  Welchen  Architekten  haben  Sie  gewahlt  ? 
20.  Herrn  Kalk,  der  den  Plan  meines  alten  Hauses  ent- 
worfen  hat.  21.  Dann  bekommen  Sie  jedenfalls  ein  gutes 
Haus.  Ich  wiinsche  Ihnen  Gluck  zu  Ihrem  Unternehmen. 
22.  Danke  vielmals. 

B.  1.  An  old  beggar-man  said:  “When  I was  young,  I 
could  have  worked  if  I had  wished  (tooHett),  and  now  I should 
be  glad  to  work,  if  I could,  but  I cannot.  Alas ! had  I only 
been  more  industrious.”  2.  A certain  French  king  is  said  to 
have  died  of  hunger,  for  fear  that  he  might  be  poisoned.  3,  I 
wish  my  house  were  not  so  far  from  yours.  4.  I too ; if  the 
way  were  not  so  long,  we  could  visit  each  other  oftener. 
5.  We  were  astonished  to  see  Mr.  B.  on  the  street  this 
morning,  as  we  thought  he  was  still  in  England.  6.  They 
say  he  intended  to  remain  three  months  longer  in  England, 
but  that  he  was  obliged  to  come  home  on  account  of  business 
matters.  7.  What  did  the  gentleman  whom  we  just  met  ask 


THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


269] 


311 


you  ? He  asked  me  how  far  it  was  to  the  town-hall.  8.  The 
messenger  asserted  that  he  could  not  wait  longer  because 
he  had  no  time,  but  I believe  it  was  for  (au§  + dat.) 
another  reason.  9.  A certain  gentleman  wanted  to  set  his 
watch,  and  asked  his  servant  what  o’clock  it  was.  10.  The 
servant  answered  that  he  had  no  watch,  but  that  he  had 
seen  a sun-dial  in  the  neighbour’s  garden.  11.  Towthis 
the  gentleman  replied  absent-mindedly  : “ Go  immediately 
and  ask  him  for  permission  to  bring  it  up  here.”  12. 
Do  you  believe  that  the  German  language  is  as  difficult 
as  the  French  ? 13.  When  I began  to  study  German,  I 

thought  it  was  not  so  difficult  as  French,  but  now  I believe 
otherwise.  14.  I should  be  very  sorry,  if  the  news  were  true 
which  I heard  this  morning.  15.  The  boys  must  not  skate 
to-day ; the  ice  is  too  thin,  and  they  might  break  through 
and  be  drowned.  16.  Please  tell  me  who  translated  Shake- 
speare’s works  into  German.  17.  Would  it  be  worth  while  to 
take  a carriage  to  drive  to  the  bank  ? No,  I do  not  think  so. 

18.  He  said  that  of  us  ! I should  never  have  believed  it. 

19.  I asked  the  bookseller:  “ Have  you  Schiller’s  works?” 
He  answered : “ I have  notwa  single  copy  of  them  left. 

20.  I asked  the  bookseller  if  he  had  Schiller’s  works,  and  he 
answered  that  he  had  not^a  single  copy  of  them  left. 


LESSON  X LV. 

THE  IMPERATIVE  AND  INFINITIVE  MOODS. 

269.  THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

The  Imperative  expresses  a command  and  corresponds 
precisely  to  the  English  Imperative.  The  Imperative  proper 
occurs  only  in  the  2.  person,  the  other  persons  being  supplied 
by  the  Pres.  Subjunctive  (see  § 268,  i,  above). 


312 


LESSON  XLV. 


[§§269- 


Pemarks. — 1.  The  pronoun  of  the  2.  Pers.  is  only  ex- 
pressed for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  contrast,  as : 

©inge  bu,  Do  you  sing. 

©ef)t  iljr,  fair  toerben  bleiben,  You  go,  we  shall  remain. 

Note.  — The  pronoun,  if  expressed,  always  follows  the  verb,  as  above. 

2.  Where  no  definite  person  is  addressed  (e.  g.,  when  an 
author  is  addressing  his  readers),  mail  should  be  used  with 
the  Pres.  Subj.,  as  : 

SRatt  benfe  fid)  tneinen  ©$recfen,  Imagine  my  fright. 

3.  The  Modal  Auxiliaries  follen,  muffen,  laffen  are  used  with 
imperative  force,  as : 

£)u  fottft  nid)t  toten,  Thou  shalt  not  kill. 

@r  muff  fc^reiben,  He  must  write. 

Cafe  (lafet,  laffen  ©ie)  un§  geljen,  Let  us  go. 

4.  The  Present  and  Future  Indicative  are  sometimes  used 
with  emphatic  imperative  force,  as : 

2)u  bleibft  bier  ! You  are  to  stay  here! 

©ie  toerben  bie  ©iite  feabctt,  morgen  fritter  gu  fommen. 

You  will  have  the  goodness  to  come  earlier  to-morrow. 

5.  The  Past  Participle  and  Infinitive  are  also  used  in  ex- 
clamatory clauses  with  the  force  of  an  Imperative,  as : 

SugcfttJjrcn,  $utfd)er!  Drive  on,  coachman! 

©till  ficfeett  ! Stand  still ! 

(Sinftetgen  ! All  aboard  ! 

6.  In  elliptical  and  exclamatory  clauses  a command  is  fre- 
quently expressed  by  an  adverbial  prefix  or  prepositional 
phrase,  without  a verb,  as : 

auf ! ^ameraben,  aufS  $ferb ! aufS  SJJferb ! 

Up!  comrades,  to  horse  ! to  horse  ! (Schiller.) 
2)rauf  unb  bran ! Up  and  at  them  ! 

§er  gu  mir  ! (Come)  hither  to  me  ! (Goethe,  Faust.) 


271] 


THE  INFINITIVE  WITHOUT  J U. 


313 


THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

270.  The  Infinitive  as  Substantive. 

The  Infinitive  is  a verbal  substantive,  and  any  infinitive 
may  be  used  as  a substantive  of  the  neuter  gender,  declined 
after  the  SJfaler  Model  (§  16). 

Remarks.  — 1.  The  Infin.  as  Subst.  indicates  action,  as: 
2)a3  Sefen,  ‘ (the  act  of)  reading/ — but:  gute  Sectlire,  ‘good 
reading,  good  literature.’ 

2.  Some  Infinitives  have  become  substantives  entirely,  as  : 
ba£  2e6en,  life  ; ba3  @nt)e£en,  horror. 

3.  The  Infinitive,  either  with  or  without  ju,  is  often  used  as 
subject  of  a verb,  and  as  such  may  have  an  object  by  virtue 
of  its  verbal  character,  as  : 

©ute  $reunbe  (ju)  Ijabett  ift  beffer  als  reicf)  (ju)  fetn. 


2 71.  The  Infinitive  without  ju. 

The  Infinitive  without  ju  follows  : 

(a)  The  Modal  Auxiliaries  (see  Lesson  XXXIV) ; also 
toerben  in  the  formation  of  the  future  tense. 


( b ) The  following  verbs : 
bleiben,  remain 
finben,  find 
fyeij3en,  order,  bid 
fyelfen,  help 
fjoren,  hear 


laffen,  let,  allow,  permit 
lefyren,  teach 
lernen,  learn 
madden,  make 
fefyen,  see 


and,  in  certain  phrases,  fyaben,  as : 

3$  fya&e  nicfyt  biel  ©elb  auf  ber  35anf  Itegett,  I have  not 
much  money  lying  in  the  bank. 

(f)  After  gefyen  and  other  verbs  of  motion  in  such  phrases 
as  fyajtcren  gefyen,  reiten,  fafyren,  ‘to  go  for  a walk,  ride,  drive’; 
21 


3H 


LESSON  XLV. 


[§§  271- 


fcf)Iafett  gefyert,  ‘to  go  to  bed’  (not  = ‘go  to  sleep,’  which  is 
einfcfylafen),  etc. 

(d)  As  predicative  subject , with  fyeiften,  and  as  object  with 
ttennen,  fyeijjen,  as : 

2)a§  fyeifjt  fcfmett  fasten.  That  is  quick  driving. 

S)a§  nenne  (fyeifte)  id;  fcfylecfd  attfangett,  I call  that  be- 
ginning badly. 

Note.  — The  Past  Participle  is  also  admissible  in  this  construction; 
see  § 281,  6,  below. 

Remarks.  — 1.  After  fyaben,  bletben,  ftnben,  Ijoren,  fefyen, 
gefyen,  in  the  constructions  given  above,  the  German  Infin. 
corresponds  to  a Present  Participle  in  English,  as  : 

@r  blteb  fWjClt,  He  remained  standing,  etc. 

2.  The  verbs  under  (£),  except  bleiben  and  fyei£;en,  also 
admit  of  a imfj  clause  after  them,  as : 

fyabe  gef>ovt  (gefefyen),  er  angefommen  fei,  I have 
heard  that  he  is  come. 

3.  The  verbs  Ijelfen,  lefyren,  lernert  also  take  an  Infin.  with 
JU  after  them,  as  : 

3$  fyabe  gelernt,  ju  geljorcfyen,  I have  learnt  to  obey. 

4.  For  the  use  of  the  Infin.  for  the  P.  Part,  with  these 
verbs,  see  § 199. 

Note.  — The  verbs  fjelfett,  lefyrert,  lenten  do  not  substitute  the  Infin.  for 
the  P.  Part,  when  followed  by  an  Infin.  with  §u  (see  Rem.  3,  above,  and 
example). 

5.  For  the  Infin.  with  passive  sense  after  lafferi,  see  § 200, 
7 (e),  Note. 

272.  The  Infinitive  with  ju. 

The  Infinitive  with  ju  is  used  after  other  verbs,  such  as  : 

(a)  Those  implying  something  to  be  attained, \ done  or  left 
u?idone , as : 


THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  Jtt. 


315 


272] 


anfangen, 

beginnen 


n'  1 begin 

V ' 


fucfien, 
Derfucfyen, 


..w 


unierrtefy'men,  undertake 
bevbteten,  forbid 
toagen,  venture 
teamen,  warn 
teimfcfyen,  wish 


befefylen,  command 
t'.iten,  beg 
erlauben,  allow 
furd)ten,  fear 
boffen,  hope 
ratcn,  advise 

( b ) Those  implying  a suspension  of  judgment,  as: 

befcfyulbtgeit,  accuse  foremen,  seem 

etubilbert,  (refl.),  imagine  fcfymeicfyeln  (refl.),  flatter  one’s 

glauben,  believe  self, 

leugnen,  deny 

( c ) Those  indicating  various  states  of  mind,  as  : 

bcreuen,  repent  lieb  fein,  be  acceptable  (be 

freuen  (impers.),  j rejoice  glad) 

freuett  (refl.),  J Ieib  fein  (tfyun),  be  unaccept- 

able (be  sorry) 


Remarks. — 1.  With  most  of  these  verbs  the  Infinitive  may 
be  replaced  by  a clause,  and  must  be  so  replaced  unless 
the  subject  of  the  action  in  the  dependent  clause  is  either 
subject  or  direct  object  of  the  principal  clause,  as  : 

©r  glaubt,  fefyr  gefdndt  ju  fcin,  He  believes  himself  to 
be  very  clever  ; — or : 

©r  glaubt,  tmfj  er  fefyr  gefdndt  ift. 

©r  fyoffte,  jn  fotnmcn,  He  hoped  to  come  ; — but: 

©r  fyoffte,  fca§  fein  3Sater  fommett  teerbe,  (see  § 265,  c\ 
He  hoped  that  his  father  would  come. 

©3  tf)at  mtr  letb,  ©te  nid;t  gefefyen  ju  Ijabctt,  I was  sorry 
not  to  have  seen  you  ; — or : 

©3  tfyai  mtr  Ieib,  bo§  id}  ©te  ntdfd  gefefyen  fyatte ; — but: 


3i  6 


LESSON  XLV. 


[§  275 

ift  mir  IteB,  ba§  ©te  gefommen  finb,  I am  glad  thal 
you  have  come. 

2.  The  Infinitive  clause  as  direct  object  is  often  represented 
in  the  principal  clause  by  the  neut.  pron.  e£  (with  prepositions 
by  ba,  see  § 277,  below),  as  : 

toage  nicfyt,  affetn  ju  fornmen,  I do  not  venture  tc 
come  alone. 

Observe  the  idiomatic  use  of  the  Infinitive  with  ju  aftei 
tyaben,  fern,  fteljert,  in  the  following  examples : 

Scf)  Ijafic  tfern  eirten  93ricf  JU  ii&ergeben,  I have  a lettei 
to  deliver  to  him. 

@3  ift  (ftefyt)  ju  ertoarten,  It  is  to  be  expected. 

Note.  — In  the  latter  example,  the  infin.  has  a passive  signification. 

EXERCISE  XLV.  ■ 

A,  1.  Guten  Morgen,  alter  Freund ; nichts  konnte  mir  gele- 
gener  sein,  als  dich  anzutreffen.  2.  Ich  freue  mich  herzlich, 
dich  zu  sehen;  ich  habe  schon  lange  einen  Besuch  von  dir 
erwartet.  3.  Du  solltest  doch  wissen,  dass  man  wenig  Zeit 
hat,  Besuche  zu  machen,  wenn  man  sich  auf  ein  Examen  vor- 
bereitet.  4.  Das  ist  wahr,  aber  lass  dir  gratulieren  ; du  hast  ja| 
ein  glanzendes  Examen  bestanden.  5.  Es  ist  mir  freilich  viel 
besser  gelungen,  als  ich  erwartete.  6.  Was  gedenkst  du  jetzi 
zu  thun,  da  du  promoviert  hast  ? 7.  Gerade  das  wollte  ich  mif 

dir  besprechen ; du  kannst  mir  vielleioht  mit  gutem  Rate  bei- 
stehen.  8.  Ich  habe  mich  entschlossen,  auf  ein  Jahr  nach 
Europa  zu  gehen ; ware  es  nicht  auch  fur  dich  sehr  vorteilhaft, 
ein  Jahr  dort  zuzubringen  ? 9.  Sehr  vorteilhaft,  besonders 

wegen  meines  Sprachstudiums,  aber  ich  furchte  meine  Verhalt- 
nisse  erlauben  es  mir  nicht.  10.  Das  sehe  ich  nicht  ein,  es 
wird  nur  wenig  mehr  kosten  dort  zu  leben  als  hier.  11.  Bist 
du  deiner  Sache  gewiss  ? 12.  Ja  wohl,  weisst  du,  ein  Vetter  von 
mir  ist  kurzlich  von  Europa  zuriickgekommen,  und  ich  habe 


§272]  THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  JU.  3 1 J 

mich  bei  ihm  genau  nach  Allem  erkundigt.  13.  Wo  hat  er  die 
Zeit  zugebracht?  14.  Teils  in  England,  teils  in  Frankreich 
(und)  teils  in  Deutschland,  und  er  behauptet,  dass  man  in  Eu- 
ropa  wenigstens  ebenso  billig  leben  kann  wie  in  Amerika.  15. 
Aber  du  hast  die  Reisekosten  nichtmit  eingerechnet.  16.  Na- 
turlich  nicht,  aber  man  reist  jetzt  viel  billiger  als  man  friiher 
reiste.  17.  Hast  du  dein  Billet  schon  gelost?  18.  Noch  nicht, 
aber  ich  habe  mich  darnach  erkundigt  und  finde,  dass  man  fur 
hundert  Thaler  oder  weniger  iiber  New  York  nach  Liverpool 
reisen  kann.  19.  Zweite  Klasse  natiirlich.  20.  O nein,  erste 
Klasse,  und  mit  einer  sehr  guten  Dampferlinie.  21.  1st  es  mog- 
lich  ? Du  hast  mich  fast  iiberredet,  die  Reise  zu  unternehmen. 
22.  Komm  nur  heute  Abend  zu  mir  und  wir  werden  die  Sache 
weiter  besprechen.  23.  Gut ; also  bis  Abend. 

3.  1.  Have  the  goodness  to  read  this  letter  for  me ; I have 
left  my  spectacles  up-stairs,  and  cannot  see  very  well.  2.  Please 
read  pretty  loud,  for  my  hearing  is  bad.  3.  Help  me  to  do  my 
work,  and  I will  help  you  to  learn  your  lessons.  4.  When  you 
(man)  do  not  know  what  to  say  (what  you  shall  say),  say  nothing. 
5.  You  will  now  close  your  books ; we  have  read  enough  for 
the  present.  6.  “ To  err  is  human  ; to  forgive,  divine,”  is  a 
verse  from  a poem  by  the  English  poet  Pope.  7.  I have  so 
much  work  to  do  that  I do  not  know  where  to  begin.  8.  Show 
the  child  how  it  is  to  learn  its  lesson.  9.  I am  tired  of  read- 
ing, and  must  now  retire  to  rest.  10.  “ Eat,  little^bird,  eat,” 
said  a child  to  her  bird.  11.  “Thou  shalt  not  steal”  is  (called) 
the  eighth  commandment.  12.  The  habit  of  rising  early  is  of 
great  importance  when  one  has  a^great^deal^of  work  to  do. 

13.  If  one  wants  to  rise  early,  one  should  go  to  bed  early. 

14.  An  old,  well-known  proverb  says : “ Man  does  not  live  to 
eat,  but  eats  to  live.”  15.  Another  proverb  says  : “ Speaking 
is  silver;  silence  is  gold.’  16.  When  I arrived  at  the  railway- 
station  I found  that  I had  no  money  with  me ; imagine  my 


LESSON  XLVI. 


[§§  273- 


318 

embarrassment.  17.  The  art  of  making  glass  was  already 
known  to  the  ancients.  18.  Are  there  any  houses  to  sell  or  to 
rent  in  your  neighbourhood?  19.  I wish  to  speak  to  Mr. 
Bell.  20.  Have  (laffen)  John  black  my  shoes,  for  I am  in  a 
hurry.  21.  I have  heard  say  that  the  celebrated  bishop  of  G. 
is  coming ; would  you  not  like  to  hear  him  preach  ? 22.  Yes, 

I should  like  very  much  to  hear  him  preach ; when  is  (f often) 
he  to  come  here?  23.  We  have  had  the  good^fortune  to 
shoot  three  hares.  24.  Some  people  would  rather  die  than  beg. 


LESSON  XLVI. 

THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD  (continued). 

273.  Infinitive  of  Purpose. 

The  Infinitive  with  gu  is  used  to  express  purpose,  as : 

•JJtein  $reunb  font,  trtid^  gu  ftmvnen.  My  friend  came  to 
warn  me. 

Remarks.  — 1.  The  Infin.  expressing  purpose  is  generally 
governed  by  the  preposition  uttt  (see  § 276,  1,  below),  which 
begins  the  clause,  as  : 

fomme,  urn  Sie  na$  §aufe  gu  bringen,  I come  to  fetch 
you  home. 

2.  An  Infin.  clause  with  gu  is  always  preceded  by  a comma 
in  German. 

3.  This  Infin.  is  also  used,  with  or  without  gu,  after  adjec- 
tives preceded  by  gu,  ‘ too/  or  gemtg,  6 enough/  as : 

gd)  wax  gu  ntiibe,  (uut)  au§gefyen  gu  fBmteu,  I was  too 
tired  to  be  able  to  go  out. 

@r  ift  retcfy  gemtg,  (um)  mele  ®iener  fyalten  gu  fauucn, 

He  is  rich  enough  to  keep  many  servants. 


INFINITIVE  OF  PURPOSE. 


319 


*75l 

Note. — After  an  adjective  with  ju,  a clause  introduced  by  aB  baft 
may  be  used,  as : 

3d)  war  git  miibe,  aB  imfe  idj  aiiSgeljctt  Jonnte,  I was  too  tired  to 
be  able  to  go  out. 

274,  The  Infinitive  after  Substantives. 

The  Infinitive  with  ju  is  used  after  substantives,  nouns  and 
adjectives,  akin  to  the  verbs  in  § 272,  to  express  purpose, 
etc.,  as : 

pabe  Sufi,  ctnert  ©pajtergang  jtt  ntadjen,  I have  a 
mind  to  take  a walk. 

3d)  f >atte  feme  $cit,  micf)  nacf;  iljm  ui^ufepcn,  I had  no 
time  to  look  after  him. 

6r  iff  ftetS  Bcreit,  ben  Strmen  ju  pelfen,  He  is  always 
ready  to  help  the  poor. 

275.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. 

The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  inadmissible  in 
modern  German;  hence  verbs  denoting  statement,  know- 
ledge, perception,  etc.,  must  be  followed  by  a bap  clause,  as : 

(Engl.)  I know  him  to  be  a good  man, 

{Germ.)  £5$  bap  er  etn  guter  9Jtann  ip. 

(. Engl. ) I perceived  her  to  be  inattentive, 

(Germ.)  Igd;  merfte,  bap  fie  unaufmerffam  toar. 

Remarks.  — 1.  In  such  sentences  as  those  in  the  examples 
given  in  the  above  section,  the  passive  construction  with  the 
Infin.  is  also  inadmissible  in  German  except  impersonally,  as  : 

{Engl?)  He  is  known  to  be  a good  man, 

{Germ.)  $lan  tocip,  bap  ct  etn  guter  SJtenfdj  ip ; — or : 
@3  ift  befannt,  bap  er  u.  f.  in. 

2.  Observe  the  different  relations  of  the  accusatives  in  tha 
following  sentences : 


320 


LESSON  XL VI. 


[§§275- 


{Engl.)  I begged  him  {obj.  of  ‘ begged  ’)  to  come, 
(Germ.)  3d?  bat  iljn  ju  Jommen. 

{Engl.)  I wish  to  see  him  {obj.  of  ‘ see’), 

{Germ.)  3$  toimfcfye,  iljn  gu  fel?en. 

{Engl.)  I wish  him  (subj.  of  ‘come’)  to  come, 
{Germ.)  3d?  toimfcfye,  baft  er  fomme. 

3.  After  glauben,  the  Infin.  is  admissible  in  German,  but 
not  in  English,  when  the  subject  of  the  action  is  the  same  in 
both  clauses,  as  : 

{Germ.)  $$  glaubte,  r ed?t  gefyort  ju  I?aben, 

{Engl.)  I believed  that  I had  heard  aright. 

When,  on  the  contrary,  the  subjects  are  different,  the  Infin. 
(with  accus.)  is  admissible  in  English,  but  not  in  German,  as: 
{Engl.)  I believe  him  to  be  an  honest  man, 

{Germ.)  3d?  glaube,  bafj  er  ein  efy rlid?er  SJtenfcfy  tfi. 

4.  The  English  Infin.  in  objective  indirect  questions  is 
unusual  in  German,  and  should  be  replaced  by  a finite 
clause,  as : 

{Engl.)  He  did  not  know  where  to  go, 

{Germ.)  gr  toujste  ni d)t,  toofyin  er  geljen  foftte. 

{Engl.)  He  told  me  what  to  do, 

{Germ.)  gr  fagte  mir,  icfy  tl?un  fottte. 

276.  The  Infinitive  governed  by  Prepositions. 

1.  Only  three  prepositions  can  govern  an  infinitive  (with  $u) 
directly,  viz.:  um,  ‘in  order/  flljne,  ‘without/  and  (an)ftatt, 
‘instead  of/  as  : 

gr  fam,  urn  mid?  Don  biefem  Unfatt  ju  Bcnatfjridjtigcn, 

He  came,  in  order  to  inform  me  of  this  accident. 

3d?  formte  if?n  nid?t  anjefyen,  aljtte  ^erglic^  ju  Iad?en, 

I could  not  look  at  him,  without  laugh ing  heartily. 


277]  THE  INFINITIVE  GOVERNED  BY  PREPOSITIONS.  32 1 

mid)  gebulbxg  anjufyoren,  unterbrad)  er  mid) 
beftdnbig,  Ifistead  of  listen^  to  me  patiently,  he 
kept  constantly  interrupting  me. 

Remarks.  — 1.  Observe  that  in  each  of  these  examples  the 
preposition  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause,  the  Infini- 
tive at  the  end)  with  the  words  dependent  on  the  Infinitive 
between. 

2.  The  Infinitive  after  obne  and  (an)ftaft  may  be  replaced 
by  a baft  clause.  This  is  always  the  case  when  the  subject  of 
the  action  is  different  in  the  two  clauses  (compare  § 224, 
2,  by  Rem.).  Thus  we  may  say  : 

3$  fudffe  ttorbetjufommen,  o!)ne  gefefjen  ju  tocrben  (or : 
ol)ne  baft  icfy  gefefyen  tourbe),  I tried  to  go  past  without 
being  seen  ; 
but  we  must  say  : 

fucfffe  fcorbeijufommen,  oftne  baft  man  mi$  fal),  I tried 
to  go  past  without  any  one's  seeing  me, 
because  the  subjects  of  the  two  clauses  are  different. 

277.  With  other  prepositions,  the  Infinitive  or  baft  clause 
is  represented  in  the  principal  clause  by  the  adverb  ba  pre- 
fixed to  the  preposition,  as  : 

3$  begniigte  mtcb  bamit,  tfmmetne  Unjufriebenfteit  merfen 
JU  laffcn,  I was  contented  with  showing  him  my 
dissatisfaction. 

2Bir  Derlaffert  un3  barauf,  baft  Sie  fommen,  We  rely  on 
your  coming. 

3$  fonnte  ifm  nicfyt  baran  berfytnbern,  auSjngefjen,  I could 
not  prevent  him  from  going  out  (or  : his  going 
out). 

tear  eiferfiicfytig  barauf,  baft  fair  etngelaben  toorben 
toaren,  He  was  jealous  of  our  having  been  invited. 


322 


LESSON  XLVI. 


t§§  277- 


2Bir  fe^nett  un§  baitadj,  ©ie  imebcrjufeljcn,  We  long  to 
see  you  again. 

©r  finbet  SBergnugen  boran,  $inber  ju  ttcdcn,  He  finds 
pleasure  in  teasing  children. 

©ie  argerte  ftd^  bariibcv,  ba|j  ttnr  fo  f pat  famen,  She  was 
angry  at  our  coming  so  late. 

Remarks.  — 1.  The  preposition  ‘of*  is  often  omitted,  as: 

©ie  9?acf)rid?t,  bafj  ber  griebe  unterjeicfynet  toorben  tear, 

The  news  of  the  peace  being  (having  been)  signed. 

2.  The  Infin.  clause  is  only  admissible  when  the  subject  of 
the  action  is  the  same  as  in  the  principal  clause  (compare 
§ 276,  Rem.  2,  above). 

3.  The  English  Infinitive  in  -ing,  or  Gerund,  must  be 
carefully  distinguished  from  the  Present  Participle,  with 
which  it  has  no  connection. 

4.  The  genitive  or  possessive  adjective  in  English  before 
this  Gerund  will  become  the  subject  of  the  m clause  in 
German,  as : 

She  was  angry  at  our  coming  late,  ©ie  tear  1)0 [e 
bariiber,  baj$  mlr  ju  tyat  famert. 

He  insisted  on  his  sister’s  learning  Latin,  ©r  beftartb 
barauf,  ba§  feme  ©rijtocfter  Sateirt  lernte  (lenten  foflte). 

5.  In  an  indirect  question , 0b  takes  the  place  of  baj$,  as : 

©3  gefyt  rnief)  nid)t3  an,  0b  er  fomtnt  ober  nic^t,  It  does 
not  concern  me,  whether  he  comes  or  not. 

6.  When  the  Gerund  expresses  an  adverbial  relation  (time, 
cause,  etc.),  it  must  be  expanded  into  an  adverbial  clause,  as : 

Before  concluding,  I shall  make  one  more  obser- 
vation, ($Jje  fdjUejje,  toerbe  id;  no$  eine  Setnerfung 
tnac^en. 


278]  THE  INFINITIVE  GOVERNED  BY  PREPOSITIONS.  323 

On  seeing  me,  he  held  out  his  hand  to  me,  5113  er 
tnid)  faf),  fyiett  er  mir  bie  §anb  fyin. 

In  persuading  others  we  persuade  ourselves,  ^ubem 

tour  anbere  iibemben,  itberreben  fair  un§  fel&jt 

278.  The  Infinitive  in  Elliptical  Constructions. 

1.  The  Infinitive  is  used,  as  in  English,  in  various  elliptical 
constructions,  without  being  dependent  on  any  other  word,  as  : 

SBarum  mtcfy  toecfen?  Why  waken  me  ? 

Sftacf)  feinem  SCu^feljen  ju  urtetlert,  To  judge  from  his 
appearance. 

2.  For  the  Infinitive  with  the  force  of  an  Imperative,  see 
§ 269,  Rem.  5,  above. 

EXERCISE  XLVI. 

A . 1.  Nicht  wa,.r,  Fraulein  B.,  Sie  waren  gestern  Abend  im 
Konzert?  2.  Ja,  waren  Sie  auch  dort  ? Ich  habe  Sie  nicht 
gesehen.  3.  Das  ist  gern  moglich  ; unter  so  vielen  Menschen 
findet  man  sich  nicht  leicht.  4.  Der  Saal  war  gedrangt  voil, 
wahrscheinlich  weil  das  Konzert  zum  Besten  des  neuen  Waisen- 
hauses  gegeben  wurde.  5.  Nicht  allein  das,  sondern  auch  weil 
die  neue  Sangerin,  Fraulein  M.,  zum  ersten  Male  auftrat. 
6.  Das  Publikum  schien  von  ihr  ganz  entziickt  zu  sein,  und  die 
Zeitungen  sind  heute  Morgen  voll  ihres  Ruhmes.  7.  Ich  habe 
nie  eine  so  klare  und  starke  Stimme  gehort.  8.  In  der  Arie 
aus  Lohengrin  hat  sie  sich  besonders  ausgezeichnet.  9.  Das 
Lied  von  Schubert  mit  Harfen-Begleitung  gehel  mir  am  besten. 
10.  Frau  S.  sang  auch  sehr  gut,  aber  Sie  schien  ein  wemg 
heiser  zu  sein.  11.  Trotz  dem,  was  die  Kritiker  sagen,  gefiel 
mir  ihr  Gesang  besser  als  der  von  Frl.  M.  12.  Ich  finde  auch, 
dass  sie  mit  mehr  Gefiihl  singt  und  dass  ihre  Stimme  geschulter 
ist.  13.  Was  halten  Sie  vom  Geigenspiel  des  Herrn  K.  ? 14.  Es 
muss  sehr  gut  sein,  dem  Beifall  nach  zu  urteilen,  aber  ich  ver- 


324 


LESSON  XLVI. 


t§§273- 


stehe  mich  nicht  auf  die  Geige.  15.  Ich  ziehe  die  Geige  jedem 
andern  Instrumente  vor.  16.  Spielt  Ihr  altester  Bruder  nicht 
die  Geige  ? 17.  Nein,  aber  er  spielt  die  Flote  und  begleitet 

mich  oft,  wenn  ich  auf  dem  Klavier  spiele.  18.  Ihre  Familie 
ist  iiberhaupt  sehr  musikalisch.  19.  Ja  wohl,  wir  spielen  fast 
alle  mehr  oder  weniger.  20.  Selbst  Ihre  kleinen  Geschwister  ? 

21.  Ja,  Marie  spielt  die  Guitarre,  Anna  die  Geige  und  Frie- 
drich nimmt  seit  einigen  Monaten  Stunden  auf  dem  Violoncell. 

22.  Wissen  Sie,  ob  viel  fiir  das  Waisenhaus  iibrig  bleibt,  nach- 
dem  alle  Kosten  bestritten  sind?  23.  Etwa  ftinf  hundert 
Thaler,  doch  beabsichtigt  man,  ein  zweites  Konzert  im  Laufe 
des  Winters  fur  denselben  Zweck  zu  geben. 

B . 1.  Let  us  (indef.)  not  return  evil  for  evil.  2.  Do  what 
is  right,  let  it  cost  what  it  may.  3.  The  eighth  command- 
ment says  that  we  are  not  to  steal.  4.  He  was  punished  for 
having  neglected  his  duty.  5.  The  teacher  told  us  we  should 
close  our  books,  we  had  read  enough  for  the  present. 
6.  Freddy,  do  you  stand,  and  give  your  little  brother  your 
chair.  7.  In  German  they  say  of  one  who  buys  anything 
without  seeing  it  that  he  buys  a cat  in  a bag.  8.  Do  you 
care  to  go  for  a drive  with  us  ? 9.  No,  thank  you.  Do  you  ride 
(fafyren);  I prefer  to  walk.  10.  Who  has  left  these  books  lying 
on  the  table  ? 11.  John ; and  he  says  he  forgot  to  take  them  up. 
12.  Bid  him  carry  them  up  immediately  into  the  study,  and 
then  let  him  come  down  here.  13.  Every  one  thought  Mr. 
N.  to  be  a rich  man,  but  he  failed  (perf.)  lately.  14.  I have  not 
a single  pen  fit  to  write  with,  and  I have  a dozen  letters  to 
write.  15.  Do  not  allow  yourself  to  be  disturbed  by  my  com- 
ing ; do  not  stop  writing.  1 6.  The  beggar,  of  whom  we  were 
speaking  in  another  exercise,  passed  his  youth  in  idling 
instead  of  working.  17.  Little  Frederick  had  the  misfortune 
to  break  an  arm  while  skating,  and  he  was  obliged  to  remain 
lying  in  bed  a week.  18.  Alfred  the  Great  divided  the  day 


28o] 


THE  PARTICIPLES. 


325 


into  three  parts  : one  part  was  devoted  to  business,  the 
second  to  reading,  praying  and  studying,  and  the  third  to 
eating,  sleeping  and  pleasure.  19.  We  wished  our  friends  to 
come  in,  but  they  had  no  time.  20.  I am  glad  to  have  made 
your  acquaintance.  21.  If  you  go  hunting  without  your  father 
knowing  it,  he  will  be  very  much  displeased.  22.  Our  teacher 
used  to  insist  on  our  writing  a German  exercise  every  day, 
and  it  was  impossible  for  us  to  neglect  this  duty  without  his 
knowing  it.  23.  Before  going  home  we  must  go  to  visit  your 
old  friend  L.  If  you  went  away  without  his  seeing  you,  he 
would  be  very  sorry.  24.  We  heard  some  one  coming  behind 
us  on  the  street,  and  we  remained  standing  at  the  corner  to 
see  who  it  was.  25.  Our  old  neighbour  has  three  sons,  but 
instead  of  their  supporting  him,  he  is  obliged  to  support  them. 
Is  he  not  very  much  to  be  pitied  ? 


LESSON  XLVII. 

THE  PARTICIPLES. 

279.  The  Participles  are  properly  Verbal  Adjectives,  and 
their  uses  and  constructions  are  those  of  Adjectives.  There 
are  three  Participles,  the  Present,  the  Past  and  the  Future- 
Passive  or  Gerundive.  The  English  compound  Perfect  Par- 
ticiple (e.  g.,  ‘having  praised ’)  has  no  corresponding  form 
in  German,  and  must  be  rendered  by  a clause  (see  § 284, 
below). 

280.  The  Present  Participle. 

The  Present  Participle  has  active  force,  and,  like  the 
Present  Indie.,  marks  a p?'esent  or  continui?ig  state  or  action, 
the  substaitive  which  it  qualifies  being  the  subject  of  the 
action,  as: 


326 


LESSON  XLVII. 


£§§  280- 


5Dct§  ftJjlafenbe  $inb,  The  sleeping  child  (=  ‘the  child 
that  sleeps  ’). 

@irte  fyaarfiraufienbe  ©efcfyicfyte,  A story  that  makes 
one’s  hair  stand  on  end. 

The  Present  Participle  is  for  the  most  part  used  only 
attributively,  as  in  the  above  examples.  It  is  used  predica- 
tively  only : 

(a)  When  it  is  a true  adjective  in  function,  without  any  idea 
of  time,  as : 

©erne  $ranff)eit  ift  rticfyt  bebeutcnb,  His  illness  is  not 
serious. 

SDie  ©djonfyeit  btefer  Sartbfd^aft  ift  eitfjiiifenb,  The  beauty 
of  this  landscape  is  enchanting  (i.  e.,  delightful). 

(b)  In  apposition  with  the  subject  (sometimes  also  with 
the  direct  object)  of  the  sentence  in  which  it  occurs,  when 
the  action  of  the  Participle  is  simultaneous  with  that  of  the 
principal  verb,  as  : 

©id)  fcfmell  nad)  mir  umtoenbettb,  fal)  er  ntir  in§  ©efidjt. 
Turning  quickly  around,  he  looked  into  my  face. 

(irrihenb  fcfdug  fie  bie  Slugen  nieber.  Blushing  she 

dropped  her  eyes. 

SPreifcnb  mit  fciel  fcfyonett  9teben 

£$rer  Sanber  23ert  unb  gafyl, 

©af$en  biele  beutfdje  gatrften 

©nft  ju  2Borm§  im  ^aiferfaal.  (Kerner.) 

Praising  with  many  fine  speeches  the  worth  and  num- 
ber of  their  territories,  many  German  princes  were 
sitting  one  day  in  the  Imperial  Hall  at  Worms. 

Remarks. — 1.  This  construction  is  more  usual  in  poetic 
or  exalted  diction  than  in  ordinary  language,  where  it  is  gen- 
erally replaced  by  an  adverbial  clause  (see  § 284,  below). 


281]  the  present  participle.  327 

2.  The  Present  Participle  is  not  used  in  German,  as  it  is 
in  English,  with  the  auxiliary  ‘ to  be  ’ (see  § 31,  Rem.  3). 

281.  The  Past  Participle. 

The  Past  Participle  of  a transitive  verb  has  passive 
force,  not  necessarily  with  any  distinct  reference  to  past 
time,  as  : 

£)a§  gefiefite  $inb,  The  beloved  child  (i.  e.,  the  child 
that  is  or  was  beloved). 

But  when  the  participle  indicates  a single  action,  it  has 
perfect  force,  as : 

gefiofjlcne  ^3ferb,  The  horse  which  has  been 
stolen. 

The  Past  Participle  of  an  intransitive  verb  has  active 
force,  as : 

£)te  9Dhtftf  fyat  aufgeljiirt,  The  music  has  ceased. 

Remarks.  — 1.  The  Past  Participle  of  transitive  verbs  may 
be  used  attributively  as  well  as  predicatively,  as  in  the  first 
two  examples  above. 

2.  The  Past  Participle  of  intransitive  verbs  conjugated 
with  fein  is  sometimes  used  attributively  and  denotes  a state 
produced  by  the  action  of  the  verb,  as : 

T)a§  toeggefaufenc  $ferb,  The  horse  which  had  run 
away;  but  not:  2)a3  gelaufene  5pferb. 

3.  The  Past  Participle,  like  the  Present  (compare  § 280  £, 
above),  may  be  used  predicatively  in  apposition  to  the  sub- 
ject (or  sometimes  to  the  direct  object)  of  the  sentence  in 
which  it  occurs,  as  : 

2)a§  3SoIf,  bom  ftiirften  unferbriitft,  emborte  fid;  gegen 
ifyn,  The  people,  oppressed  by  the  prince,  revolted 
against  him. 


328 


LESSON  XLVII. 


[§§  281- 


4.  For  the  Past  Participle  with  Imperative  force,  see  §269, 5, 

5.  The  Past  Participle  replaces  the  English  Present  Parti* 
ciple  after  fommett  to  specify  the  manner  of  the  motion,  as  : 

feint  gegangen,  gelaufcn  u.  f.  to.,  He  came  walking, 
running,  etc. 

6.  After  verbs  of  calling , it  is  used  for  the  Infinitive,  as : 

25a§  Ijetf ]t  (nertne  id£))  fur  bie  gufunft  geforgt,  That  is  (I 
call  that)  caring  for  the  future. 

7.  It  also  replaces  an  Infinitive  in  such  phrases  as  the 
following : 

$c£)  muj$  fort ! Steber  l)ter  2We§  tm  ©tiefye  gelaffen ! I 
must  go  ! Rather  (would  I)  leave  everything  in  the 
lurch  here.  (Lessing.) 

8.  It  is  used  in  a few  absolute  constructions,  with  or  with- 
out a substantive,  which  is  usually  in  the  accusative  when 
present,  as : 

Sugegeben,  baj$  bie3  toafyr  ift,  Granted  that  this  is  true. 

9Jteincn  ©ruber  auSgemmtmcn,  toaren  atte  jugegen,  Ex- 
cept my  brother,  all  were  present. 

282.  The  Future  Passive  Participle. 

This  Participle,  also  called  the  Gerundive,  has  the  form 
of  the  Present  Part,  preceded  by  ju.  It  is  formed  from  transi- 
tive verbs  only,  and  is  only  used  attributively,  being  replaced 
in  the  predicate  by  an  infinitive  with  ju,  as  : 

Sine  ju  fafiettbe  §anbluttg,  An  act  to  be  praised ; but  : 
©ine  §anblung,  toeld;e  ju  U ben  ift. 

283.  General  Remarks  on  the  Participles. 

1.  Many  words  with  the  form  of  Participles  have  the  value  of 
adjectives.  Some  occur  as  adjectives  only  (see  also  § 194, 
Note),  others  with  a special  meaning,  as:  gelefyrt,  learned; 
befannt,  acquainted;  berfe^ieben,  different;  bejafyrt,  aged,  etc. 


284]  GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  TIIE  PARTICIPLES.  329 

2.  All  Participles  (except  the  Past  Part,  of  some  intransitive 
verbs,  see  § 281,  Rem.  2,  above)  may  be  used  as  pure  adjec- 
tives, and  as  such  may  be  compared  or  used  as  adjectival 
substantives  (see  § 122),  frequently  with  concrete  meaning, 
as:  ber  SReifenbe,  the  traveller;  ber  Sefenbe,  the  man  who 
reads;  ber  SSorfi^enbe,  the  chairman;  ba3  ©elefene,  what  one 
has  read. 

3.  Participles,  unless  they  have  become  pure  adjectives,  are 
used  sparingly  as  adverbs ; but  the  Participle  in  apposition 
(see  §§  280,  b ; 281,  3,  above)  may  sometimes  be  construed  as 
an  adverb,  e.  g. : 

Sdjtodgcttb  brudte  er  tnir  bie  §anb,  Silently  (in 
silence)  he  pressed  my  hand. 

Remark.  — This  participial  adverb  of  manner  may  be 
replaced  by  an  adverbial  clause  with  irtbem. 

4.  The  Participle,  when  used  attributively,  always  follows  all 
words  qualifying  or  modifying  it,  and  immediately  precedes 
its  substantive ; as  predicate,  it  sometimes,  especially  in 
poetry,  precedes  them  (see  § 280  b,  above),  but  generally 
and  more  correctly  follows,  as  : 

bon  feinen  ©Item  tunic;  geltefilc  Stub,  The  child, 
dearly  beloved  by  its  parents. 

•Kit  ber  einen  §anb  fdjmhntnenb,  mit  ber  anbern  ba3 
£tnb  iiber  bem  SBaffer  cmporljaltenb  u.  f.  in..  Swim- 
ming with  one  hand,  with  the  other  holding  the 
child  above  water,  etc. 

©a3  33olf,  bom  fttirften  unterbriiift  u.  f.  to.,  The  people, 
oppressed  by  the  prince,  etc. 

284.  English  Participial  Constructions. 

1.  The  Present  Participle  is  never  used  in  German,  as  it  so 
frequently  is  in  English,  to  express  adverbial  relations  of  time 
22 


330 


LESSON  XLVII. 


t§  284 


or  cause,  and  must  be  replaced,  where  so  used,  by  a regular 
adverbial  clause,  introduced  by  the  proper  adverb  or  con- 
junction, as  follows  : 

(a)  To  express  time,  the  conjunctions  bd,  al3,  ‘when/ 
inbcm,  toaljrenb,  ‘while/  must  be  used,  as : 

Seeing  him  turn  pale,  I hastened  to  his  assistance, 
(al8)  id)  i t?n  erblcid^ert  falj,  eilte  id;  ifym  jur  §ilfe  ^erbei. 

Recovering  himself,  the  orator  continued,  ^nbctlt 
er  ficfy  fammelte,  fufyr  ber  Stebner  fort. 

Remarks. — 1.  The  English  Perfect  Participle  is  replaced 
by  a clause  with  nadjbeut  (or  a(3),  with  the  Pluperfect,  as : 

Having  examined  his  papers,  they  let  him  go,  9larf j* 
bem  man  feine  ^a^iere  unterfudffi  fyatte,  Iiej$  man  iljn 
gefyen. 

2.  The  clause  with  inbeitt,  indicating  simultaneous  action, 
may  be  replaced  by  a participial  clause  in  the  case  specified  in 
§ 280,  b , above. 

( b ) To  express  cause,  the  conjunctions  bd,  iltbem,  ‘ as/ 
‘since/  or  luetf,  ‘because/  must  be  used,  as : 

Being  an  honest  man,  he  may  be  trusted,  SBeil  er  ein 
efyrlicfyer  9Jtann  ift,  fo  tann  man  ifym  trauen. 

Hoping  to  see  you  soon,  I remain  ever  yours,  ^ttbent 
id;  fyoffe,  ©ie  balb  ju  fef>en,  Oerbleibe  id)  ftet3  ber  g^rige. 

Not  having  found  him  at  home,  I went  away,  $d 
id)  ifm  nicfyt  ju  §aufe  gcfuttben  Jjdtte,  ging  id)  fort. 

2.  The  Present  Participle  qualifying  a preceding  sub- 
stantive or  pronoun  is  changed : 

(a)  Into  a regular  relative  elause  with  finite  verb,  as : 

A loaf  was  found  at  Herculaneum,  still  retaining 
its  form,  ©in  23rot  ftmrbe  ju  £>erculamun  gefunben, 
toelcfjeS  nod?  bie  §orm  betkljielt. 


§284]  ENGLISH  PARTICIPIAL  CONSTRUCTIONS.  33 1 

The  ship,  having  come  straight  towards  us,  showed 
the  black  flag,  2)a§  ©cfnff,  tt)cltf)C§  gerabe  auf  un§ 
jttgcfotnmcn  loar,  jeigte  bie  fditoarje  glagge. 

Note. The  tense  of  the  verb  in  the  adverbial  clause  will  correspond 

with  that  of  the  principal  verb,  as  shown  above,  the  Pluperfect,  however, 
generally  replacing  the  English  Perfect  Participles. 

(£)  Into  an  attributive  participial  clause,  in  which  the 
Participle  will  immediately  precede  the  substantive 
(see  § 283,  4,  above),  as : 

A man  passing  on  the  street,  ©in  auf  ber  Strafte  bor* 
fceigcfjcnbcv  -Karan. 

3.  A Participle  preceded  by  an  adverbial  conjunction  is 
replaced  by  a finite  clause  with  the  corresponding  conjunc- 
tion, as : 

While  travelling  in  Europe,  we  met  a great  many 
Americans,  fair  in  ©uropa  reiften,  trafen  fair  mit 
bielen  2lmertfanern  jufatnmen. 

For  the  Infinitive  in  -ing,  or  Gerund,  and  its  German  equi- 
valents, see  § 276,  above. 

EXERCISE  XLVII. 

A . 1.  Haben  Sie  Ihr  Billet  schon  gelost?  2.  Nein,  noch 
nicht.  3.  Dann  miissen  wir  uns  beeilen  ; wir  sollten  erst  etwas 
geniessen,  ehe  wir  abreisen.  4.  Hier  ist  der  Schalter ; soil  ich 
auch  ein  Billet  fur  Sie  nehmen  ? 5.  Danke,  ich  habe  meins 

schon  gelost.  6.  Jetzt  bin  ich  fertig,  aber  wir  haben  kaum  drei 
Viertelstunden  Zeit,  bis  der  Zug  abfahrt.  7.  Dann  miissen  wir 
nachder  ersten  besten  Restauration  gehen.  8.  Dort  driiben  ist 
eine.  9.  Das  trifft  sich  gut ; gehen  wir  gleich  hinein.  10. 
Kellner,  wir  haben  es  sehr  eilig.  11.  Nehmen  Sie  Platz,  meine 
Herren ; ich  werde  Sie  sofort  bedienen ; hier  ist  die  Speise- 
karte.  12.  Geben  Sie  mir  gefalligst  einen  Teller  Suppe. 
13.  Und  Sie,  mein  Herr?  14.  Bringen  Sie  mir  zuerst  eine 
Serviette.  15.  Entschuidigen  Sie,  hier  ist  sie.  16.  Ich  nehme 


332 


LESSON  XLVII. 


[§284 

eine  Forelle.  17.  Bedaure,  es  ist  keine  mehr  da.  18.  Nun, 
dann  bringen  Sie  mir  ein  Stuck  Lachs.  19.  Hier  ist  die  Wein- 
karte ; trinken  die  Herren  Wein  ? 20.  Bringen  Sie  eine 

Flasche  Rotwein  und  Glaser.  21.  Wie  schmeckt  Ilmen  der 
Fisch?  22.  Ausgezeichnet.  23.  Diese  Suppe  schmeckt  mir 
gar  nicht.  24.  Lassen  Sie  sich  doch  Fisch  kommen.  25.  Ich 
mache  mir  nichts  aus  Fisch ; — Kellner  ! 26.  Zu  Befehl.  27. 

Eine  Portion  Entenbraten  mit  griinen  Erbsen.  28.  Wiinschen 
Sie  keine  Kartoffeln?  29.  Jawohl,  gebratene  Kartoffeln.  Brin- 
gen Sie  auch  Brot.  30.  Noch  etwas  ? 31.  Nein.  Was  wiinschen 
Sie,  Herr  B.  ? 32.  Bitte,  reichen  Sie  mir  die  Speisekarte.  Ich 

bestelle  mir  Kalbskoteletten  mit  Kartoffeln  und  gelben  Ruben. 
33.  Sonst  noch  Gemiise  ? 34.  Etwas  Blumenkohl.  35.  Erinnern 
Sie  sich  schon  frtiher  hier  gespeist  zu  haben,  Herr  B.  ? 36.  Nicht 
dass  ich  wiisste  ; die  Restauration  scheint  neu  zu  sein.  37.  Des- 
halb  wird  man  vielleicht  so  gut  bedient.  38.  Ist  den  Herren  etwas 
gefallig  ? 39.  Bringen  Sie  mir  eine  Portion  Eis  und  eine  Tasse 

Kaffee.  40.  Und  mir  eine  Tasse  Chocolade  und  eine  Portion 
Erdbeeren  mit  Sahne,  und  schreiben  Sie  alles  auf  meine  Rech- 
nung.  41.  Hier  ist  die  Rechnung,  mein  Herr.  42.  Wie  viel 
betragt  sie  ? 43.  Sieben  Mark  funfzig  Pfennig.  44.  Hier 

sind  acht  Mark ; das  Ubrige  ist  Ihr  Trinkgeld.  45.  Jetzt 
miissen  wir  fort ; es  hat  soeben  auf  dem  Bahnhofe  zum  ersten 
Male  gelautet. 

B . 1.  A sleeping  fox  catches  no  chicken.  2.  Sleeping 
dogs  do  not  bite.  3.  The  past  cannot  be  helped  (changed)  ; 
let  us  rather  think  of  what  is  to  come.  4.  It  is  much  better 
to  think  without  speaking  than  to  speak  without  thinking. 
5.  Man  is  a speaking  animal,  a fire-using  animal,  a laughing 
animal : these  are  some  of  the  definitions  which  have  been 
proposed  by  philosophers.  6.  We  learn  to  speak  German  in 
speaking  German.  7.  Well  hit  (treffert)  ! I call  that  well 
played  ! 8.  I wanted  to  show  you  an  article  in  yesterday’s 


§ 284]  ENGLISH  PARTICIPIAL  CONSTRUCTIONS. 


333 


paper,  but  it  is  nowhere  to  be  found.  9.  Let  me  know  when 
you  think  of  coming  to  town.  10.  The  skill  of  ants  in  the 
building  of  their  nests  is  astonishing.  11.  Smiling,  he  began 
to  read  the  letter,  but  before  having  read  the  half  of  it,  he 
threw  it  furiously  on  the  floor.  12.  A hussar  came  galloping 
down  the  street  and  said  the  battle  was  beginning.  13.  The 
Paradise  Lost  of  Milton  is  one  of  the  most  important  works 
of  English  literature  ; it  was  written  in  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury, but  this  does  not  prevent  its  being  still  much  read. 
14.  After  having  been  so  well  received  by  us,  I wonder  that 
he  is  not  ashamed  to  speak  evil  of  us.  15.  The  morning  was 
cool  and  charming,  but  towards  noon  the  heat  became 
oppressive,  and  we  saw  great  clouds  rising  in  the  west. 
16.  He  says  the  matter  is  perfectly  clear,  but  his  saying  so 
does  not  make  any  difference.  17.  He  went  away  complain- 
ing that  there  was  no  use  talking  to  people  who  did  not  want 
to  understand.  18.  That  was  because  he  was  angry,  and 
because  he  had  not  succeeded  in  making  himself  understood 
(fcerftanblici)).  19.  Make  no  mistakes  in  copying  your  exercise, 
or  else  a second  copying  will  be  your  punishment.  20.  Besides 
making  mistakes  the  last  time,  you  wrote  very  badly.  21.  “ The 
danger  to  be  avoided,”  said  he,  “is  not  yet  past.”  22.  Going 
(bingefyen)  to  visit  our  friends  in  Schiller-street  this  afternoon, 
we  met  them  coming  to  visit  us.  23.  His  being  rich  is  no  excuse 
for  his  being  lazy  ; we  do  not  need  to  be  idle  merely  because 
we  are  not  forced  to  earn  our  bread.  24.  A certain  man,  just 
before  dying,  called  his  sons  to  him,  and  told  them  there  was 
a treasure  lying  hidden  somewhere  in  his  field.  25.  Believing 
they  would  find  it,  they  began  digging  everywhere,  but 
without  finding  the  wished-for  (ertoimftfrt)  treasure.  26.  One 
of  them,  wiser  than  the  others,  finally  guessed  what  his  father 
had  meant  by  having  told  them  this.  27.  This  son  said  that 
since  digging  the  ground  the  crop  had  been  much  better,  and 
that  this  was  the  treasure  the  father  meant. 


334 


LESSON  XLVIII. 


[§285 

LESSON  XLVIII. 

CONCORD  AND  APPOSITION. 

285.  Concord  of  Subject  and  Verb. 

1.  The  predicate  verb  (the  finite  part,  or  that  containing 
the  copula)  agrees  with  its  subject  in  number  and  person. 

2.  Two  or  more  subjects  require  the  verb  in  the  plural,  as  : 

9Jtetn  33ater  unb  meine  Gutter  fittb  f)ier  getoefen,  My 
father  and  mother  have  been  here. 

Remarks.  — 1.  If  the  subject  nearest  to  the  verb  be  singu- 
lar, the  verb  is  sometimes  in  the  singular,  especially  if  the 
subjects  follow  the  verb,  as  : 

©etne  §a£>fucfyt,  fetne  SebenSart,  fetn  f)od;fafyrenbe§ 

SBefen  firadjte  bte  Crbitterung  gegen  tfm  aufS  fyod)[te. 
His  avarice,  his  luxurious  mode  of  living,  his  arro- 
gant behaviour,  excited  the  animosity  against  him 
to  the  highest  point.  (Schiller,  Egmonfs  Leben 
und  Tod.) 

Dben  bet  bem  SC£>rorte  lag  ber  $onig  unb  bte  Hontgtn, 
Above  near  the  throne  lay  the  King  and  Queen. 

(Grimm,  Dornroschenl) 

Note.  — This  is  especially  the  case  when  the  subjects,  indicating 
things  or  abstract  ideas,  are  regarded  as  forming  together  one  idea,  or 
are  more  less  synonymous,  e.  g. : 

§ttU$  lint)  §0f  iff  Derfauft,  House  and  home  are  sold. 

©eU)  uttb  ©tit  macfjt  rtid)t  gliid (id),  Money  and  property  (=wealth) 
do  not  make  [one]  happy ; 

or  when  particular  attention  is  called  to  the  last  (as  forming  a 
climax),  e.  g. : 

SUtein  SBermogen,  mein  9tuf,  mein  i*eben  fiel)t  nicfjt  attf  bem  ©piele, 
My  property,  my  reputation,  my  life  (the  most  important  of  all), 
are  not  at  stake. 


S285] 


CONCORD  OF  SUBJECT  AND  VERB. 


335 


2.  If  the  subjects  be  of  different  persons , the  verb  agrees 
in  person  with  the  first  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and 
with  the  second  rather  than  the  third,  the  plural  pronoun  of 
the  proper  person  being  usually  (always  with  the  second  per- 
son) expressed  before  the  verb,  as  : 

SDu  unb  id)  (mein  93ruber  unb  id)),  totr  gingen  cm3.  You 
and  I (my  brother  and  I)  went  out. 

SDu  unb  beine  ©cfytoefter,  iljr  frib  au*gegangert,  You  and 
your  sister  went  out. 

3.  With  titles  of  rank  and  compliment  the  verb  is  usually 
in  the  plural  (see  also  § 49),  as : 

Seine  SJJajeftat  Ijabcn  gerufyt  u.  f.  to.,  His  Majesty  has 
been  pleased,  etc. 

4.  Collectives,  if  singular,  take  a verb  in  the  singular,  unless 
followed  by  a plural  substantive  in  apposition  or  in  the  geni- 
tive, as  : 

Sine  grofce  5Ken^enmenge  ttmr  jugegen ; — but : 

Sine  grof$e  9Jtenge  -Stenfcfjen  tomren  jugegen,  A great 
number  of  people  were  present. 

Notes.  — 1.  The  singular  may  also  be  used  in  such  cases  as  that 
given  in  the  second  example  above,  unless  the  collective  is  considered 
with  reference  to  its  component  parts  individually . 

2.  With  nouns  of  Number  in  the  sing,  (see  § 185,  1)  the  verb  is  used 
in  the  plur.  only  when  an  indefiitite  quantity  is  meant,  as : 

Gntt  jmar  (=  cittige)  Sage  ttmrett  Dergangett,  A few  days  had 
passed  ; — but : 

@iit  $aar  @tiefef  foflct  fteben  Sfyafer,  A pair  of  shoes  costs  seven 
dollars. 

5.  When  the  real  (logical)  subject  is  represented  by  e§,  or 
some  other  neut.  sing,  pron.,  before  the  verb  (see  §§  39 ; 82, 
Rem.  2 ; 141),  the  verb  agrees  with  the  logical,  not  with  the 
grammatical  subject,  as  : 

@3  fiitb  metne  SBriiber,  It  is  my  brothers. 


336 


LESSON  XLVIII. 


l§§285- 


Note. — With  a personal  pronoun  as  subject,  this  follows  the  verb 
(see  § 39,  2). 

6.  If  the  subjects  be  separated  by  a disjunctive  conjunc- 
tion or  conjunctions,  the  verb  regularly  agrees  with  the  last 
only,  but  this  rule  is  by  no  means  so  strictly  observed  as  in 
English,  even  by  the  best  writers,  e.  g.  : 

£8cbev  bie  Union  nod)  bie  Stgue  tnifcfjtcn  fid)  in  biefen 
©treit.  Neither  the  Union  nor  the  league  took  part 
in  this  dispute. 

©ottmljl  bie  Sage  aU  bie  23efeftigung  biefer  ©tabt  fd)icnen 
jebem  SCngriffe  Strotj  ju  bieten,  The  situation,  as  well 
as  the  fortification,  of  this  city  seemed  to  defy 
every  attack.  (Schiller,  30 jdhriger  Krieg.) 

Notes.  — 1.  Constructions  like  the  following: 

(Snttoeber  bu  ober  id)  bin  taub,  Either  you  or  I am  deaf, 
are  in  German,  as  in  English,  felt  to  be  awkward,  and  are  therefore 
avoided  by  substituting  some  other  construction,  e.  g. : 

(Snttoeber  id)  bin  taub,  ober  bu  bift  e$,  Either  I am  deaf,  or  you  are. 

2.  The  sing,  is  used  after  expressions  of  the  time  of  day,  and  in  the 
multiplication-table,  as : 

(S3  ifl  ;$ef)n  111)1%  It  is  ten  o’clock. 

3ef)n  mat  elf  iff  (mactjt)  buubert  unb  gcf)tt,  Ten  times  eleven  is  one 
hundred  and  ten. 

286.  Repetition  of  Subject. 

When  several  connected  sentences  have  a common  subject, 
the  subject  must  be  repeated  (as  pronoun)  when  the  order  of 
the  words  is  changed,  as : 

£er  3^9  fommt  um  neun  Uf)r  an,  unb  fabrt  urn  fyalb  jeljn 
toieber  ab,  The  train  arrives  at  nine  o’clock,  and 
leaves  again  at  half-past  nine  ; — but : 

SDer  $ug  fommt  um  neun  Ufyr  an,  unb  um  fyalb  jefyn  fafjrt 
er  hneber  ab.  The  train  arrives  at  nine  o’clock,  and 
at  half-past  nine  it  leaves  again. 


a8g]  THE  APP0S1TIVE  SUBSTANTIVE.  33 7 

287.  Omission  of  Predicative  Verb; 

§aben  and  fein,  as  auxiliaries  of  tense,  may  be  omitted  in  a 
subordinate  sentence,  as  : 

$Ra$bem  fie  ben  33rief  gelcfctt,  Vueinte  fie.  After  she  had 
read  the  letter,  she  wept. 

288.  Other  Concords. 

1.  The  Attributive  (or  Determinative)  Adjective  agrees 
with  the  substantives  it  qualifies  in  gender,  number  and  case 
(for  inflections  see  Less.  XX,  XXII,  XXIV) ; the  Predica- 
tive Adjective  has  no  inflection  (see  § 14). 

2.  For  the  concord  of  Pronouns  and  Pronominal  Adjectives 
with  their  antecedent  (in  gender,  number  and  person)  see 
§§  38,  Rem.  4;  39  ; 43,  Rem.  3,  4;  82,  Rem.  1,  2;  83,  Rem. 
1 ; 86;  95,  1 (£);  162,  2. 

Note.  — A Relative  Pronoun  referring  to  an  antecedent  of  the  first 
or  second  person  takes  the  verb  in  the  third  person,  unless  the  relative  is 
followed  by  the  personal  pronoun,  as  stated  in  § 95,  1 (b),  e.  g. : 

23ift  bu  eg,  ber  fo  gtttcrt V — or:  iBift  bu  e§,  ber  bn  fo  gitterft ? 

Is  it  you  that  tremble  ? 

289.  The  Appositive  Substantive. 

1.  A substantive  or  pronoun  may  have  another  substantive 
attached  to  it  attributively,  giving  a further  description  or 
definition  of  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of.  This  latter  sub- 
stantive is  said  to  be  in  apposition  to  the  former,  as : 

2Uein  $reunb,  her  Cefjrer,  trug  fetne  eingige  SSaffe,  ctticu 
bitfen  ©foef,  in*  ber  §anb,  My  friend,  the  teacher, 
carried  his  only  weapon,  a thick  stick,  in  his  hand. 

2.  A substantive  or  pronoun  may  also  be  placed  in  appo- 
sition to  a sentence  or  clause,  as : 

@r  fagte,  ba{$  er  toteber  ganj  gefunb  fet,  etnc  Seljaaptung, 
toelcfyeid)  bejtoeifclte,  or:  idb  bejtoeifelte,  He  said  he 

was  quite  well  again,  a statement  which  I doubted. 


338 


LESSON  XLVIII. 


[§§289 


3.  The  appositive  substantive  is  in  the  same  case  as  the 
substantive  which  it  defines,  thus : 

$arl  (Nom.),  mein  jungfter  ©ruber,  ift  Iran!,  Charles, 
my  youngest  brother,  is  ill. 

©ie  $ranfl)eit  $arl§  (Gen.),  meineS  jiingften  ©ruberg,  The 
illness  of  Charles,  my  youngest  brother. 

Cine  gefd^rlid^e  £rcmfl)eit  brofjte  (intr.)  $arl  (Dat.),  met* 
ncm  jungften  ©ruber ; or : bebrofyte  (trans.)  <Rarl  (Acc.), 
meinen  jiingften  ©ruber,  A dangerous  illness  threat- 
ened Charles,  my  youngest  brother. 

Notes.  — 1.  A substantive  in  apposition  to  a sentence  is  put  in  the 
Nominative,  as  in  the  example  under  2,  above. 

2.  An  appositive  genitive  without  a determinative  word  before  it, 
especially  when  governing  another  genitive,  is  uninflected,  as : 

2)i e $vanf()cit  bcS  $ ronpringeit,  Sof)n  be8  beutfdjcn  $aifer§,  The 
illness  of  the  Crown-Prince,  son  of  the  German  Emperor  ; but: 

2)ie  $vciufi)eit  bc$  ilronprii^en,  beg  dltefteii  0ol)ncl  u.  f.  tt>.,  The 
illness  of  the  Crown-Prince,  the  eldest  son,  etc. 

4.  The  appositive  substantive  generally  agrees  also  in 
number  with  the  word  it  defines,  except  in  the  case  of  abstract 
substantives  and  collectives,  as  : 

CornelienS  $inber,  if)r  Stofj  unb  ifyre  $reube,  Cornelia's 
children,  her  pride  and  joy. 

SDa  lebten  bie  §irten,  ein  I)armlo3  ®efd)(ccf)t,  There  lived 
the  shepherds,  a harmless  race.  (Schiller.) 

5.  The  appositive  substantive  agrees  in  gender  when  there 
is  a special  form  for  the  feminine,  as : 

SDie  ©rabitation  ift  bie  Senferiit  ber  ©afyneit  alter  §im* 
melSforber,  Gravitation  is  the  director  of  the  courses 
of  all  heavenly  bodies. 

6.  These  rules  are  also  applicable  to  an  apposition  intro* 
duced  by  al3,  ‘ as,'  e.  g. : 


§289] 


THE  APPOSITIVE  SUBSTANTIVE. 


339 


2$  fannte  tfyn  aU  $rtabe  (Norn.),  I knew  him  as  (when) 
a boy  (i.  e.,  when  I was  a boy)  ; — but : 

2d;  Jannte  iljrt  aU  $nabeit,  I knew  him  when  {he  was)  a 
boy. 

EXERCISE  X LV III. 

A . 1.  Konnen  Sie  mir  eine  gute  Buchhandlung  empfehlen? 
2.  Was  fur  Bucher  wollen  Sie  kaufen  ? 3.  Ich  mochte  mir  die 

Werke  einiger  von  den  besten  deutschen  Schriftstellern  an- 
schaffen.  4.  Sie  sollten  zu  Herrn  Braun  gehen ; er  hat  einen 
sehr  groszen  Vorrat,  besonders  von  den  deutschen  Klassikern. 
5.  Wo  ist  das  Geschaft?  6.  Nur  einige  Schritt(e)  von  hie r, 
Nummer  fiinf,  um  die  Ecke ; ich  werde  Sie  begleiten.  7.  Das 
ware  mir  sehr  angenehm.  8.  Sie  scheinen  ein  groszer  Biicher- 
freund  zu  sein.  9.  Ja,  das  ist  eine  Schwache,  die  mich  viel  Geld 
kostet,  aber  mir  auch  viel  Vergniigen  macht.  10.  Hier  ist  der 
Laden;  ich  erwarte  Sie  auf  meinem  Bureau,  wenn  Sie  fertig 
sind.  11.  Ich  danke  vielmals  fur  Ihre  Aufmerksamkeit.  Also, 
auf  Wiedersehen.  12.  Zeigen  Sie  mir  gefalligst  einige  Exem- 
plare  von  Schillers  Werken.  13.  Gebunden  oder  ungebunden  ? 
14.  Zeigen  Sie  mir  beides.  15.  Aus  wie  vielen  Banden  besteht 
dieses  Exemplar?  16.  Aus  zwolf,  und  ich  mochte  Sie  auf  den 
ausgezeichneten  Druck  aufmerksam  machen.  17.  Der  Druck 
ist  sehr  klar ; haben  Sie  noch  sonstige  (andere)  Ausgaben  ? 18. 
Wir  haben  Ausgaben  in  groszerem  Format',  aber  nur  gebunden. 
Hier  sind  sie.  19.  Das  Format  gefallt  mir  besser,  aber  ich 
mag  den  Einband  nicht.  20.  Dem  ist  leicht  abzuhelfen.  Ich 
bestelle  Ihnen  ein  Exemplar  und  lasse  es  nach  Ihrem  Ge- 
schmack  einbinden.  21.  Gut,  ich  mochte  es  in  braunem  Leder 
mit  Titel  gebunden  haben  ; aber  wie  viol  soli  ich  Ihnen  dafiir 
bezahlen?  22.  Die  Ausgabe  kostet  zehn  Thaler,  der  Ein- 
band fiinf.  23.  Bekomme  ich  Rabatt'?  24.  Ja,  zehn  Prozent 
gegen  bare  Bezahlung.  25.  Ich  bezahle  bar;  das  macht  zwei 
und  vierzig  Mark.  26.  Wiinschen  Sie  noch  etwas  ? 27.  Ich 


340 


LESSON  XLVIII. 


[§§  289- 


mochte  auch  Goethes  sammtliche  Werke  in  demselben  Format 
und  Einband  haben.  28.  Es  thut  mir  leid,  dass  wir  keine  mehr 
haben,  aber  ich  kann  sie  bestellen  und  gleich  mit  der  anderen 
Ausgabe  einbinden  lassen.  29.  Zum  selben  Preise?  30. 
Nein,  es  wird  mit  Einband  achtzehn  Thaler  netto  betragen. 

31.  Dann  besorgen  Sie  es  gefalligst,  und  schicken  Sie  mir  die 
Werke  nebst  Rechnung  an  diese  Adresse  ; hier  ist  meine  Karte. 

32.  Ich  besorge  alles  aufs  Sorgfaltigste ; binnen  acht  Tagen 
sollen  Sie  die  Bucher  haben. 

B.  1.  “Books,”  said  Alfonso  the  Wise  of  Spain,  “are 
my  most  honest  councillors  : neither  fear  nor  hope  prevents 
them  telling  me  what  my  duty  is.”  2.  “It  is  not  my  courtiers,” 
said  this  king,  “ who  tell  me  most  honestly  what  my  duty  is , 
it  is  my  books.”  3.  “No  courtier  dares  to  say  to  a king: 
‘ Your  Majesty  is  wrong,’  but  my  books  tell  me  so  every  day.” 
4.  I asked  a gentleman  standing  near  me,  if  he  knew  what 
time  it  was,  and  he  answered  me  that  it  was  exactly  twelve 
o’clock.  5.  More  than  two  hours  have  passed  since  then,  so 
it  must  now  be  between  two  and  three  o’clock.  6.  Was  it 
you  that  came  to  see  me  yesterday,  when  I was  away  from 
home  ? 7.  Yes,  my  brother  and  I wanted  to  visit  you,  and 

we  were  sorry  not  to  find  you  at  home.  8.  Margaret,  the 
eldest  daughter  of  Henry  VII.  of  England,  married  James 
IV.  of  Scotland.  9.  These  were  the  grand-parents  of  Mary 
Stuart,  Queen  of  Scotland.  10.  To  do  what_iswright,  and 
to  be  happy,  is  one  and  the  same,  for  virtue  is  its  own  reward. 
11.  Dear  father  and  mother,  do  you  remain  sitting  here  until 
I go  for  a carriage  to  drive  you  home,  for  I know  you  are  too 
tired  to  walk.  12.  Twelve  and  twelve  make  twenty-four,  and 
twelve  times  twelve  is  one  hundred  and  forty-four.  13. 
After  having  seen  London  and  Paris,  we  had  not  much  desire 
to  see  other  cities.  14.  I wrote  to  K.,  inviting  him  to  pass 
his  holidays  with  us,  and  by  return  of  post  received  a letter, 


290]  THE  APPOSITIVE  ADJECTIVE.  341 

saying  we  might  expect  him  in  a fortnight.  15.  I asked  you 
first  as  my  oldest  friend  to  assist  me  in  this  embarrassment. 
16.  I know  we  should  avoid  asking  our  friends  for  help  until 
we  have  done  our  utmost  to  help  ourselves.  17.  The  hunts- 
man whistled,  and  his  dogs  came  running  from  the  wood. 
18.  Our  teacher  was^in^thewhabitwof  telling  us  we  should 
do  what  was  right,  let  it  cost  what  it  would.  19.  Is  your 
teacher  still  living?  Yes,  he  is  still  living,  but  he  is  getting 
very  old  now.  20.  Goethe  and  Schiller  are  the  two  greatest 
poets  of  Germany : it  is  difficult  to  say  which  of  the  two  is 
most  beloved  by  the  German  people.  21.  If  you  think  we 
are  right,  give  us  some  sign  of  approval : a word,  a smile,  a 
glance  will  suffice.  22.  All  the  rest  of  our  party  arrived  at 
the  top  of  the  mountain  before  sunset,  but  my  friend  and  I 
arrived  only  at  nine  in  the  evening.  23.  Expect  us  on  Thurs- 
day next,  health  and  weather  permitting.  24.  The  gentleman 
coming  out  of  that  shop  is  Dr.  B.,  and  the  lady  accompanying 
him  is  his  niece,  Miss  L.  25.  Did  you  ever  see  the  Emperor 
William  ? I have  never  seen  him  as  Emperor  of  Germany, 
but  I saw  him  many  years  ago  as  King  of  Prussia. 


LESSON  X L I X. 

APPOSITION  (continued):- APPOSITIVE  ADJECTIVES.  - ? 
SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITION. 

290.  The  Appositive  Adjective. 

i.  Attributive  Adjectives  and  participles  are  said  to  be 
used  appositively  when  they  are  separated  from  their  substan- 
tive, as  : 

®er  $age,  jmtrj,  IjuSfdj  unb  geiftreidj,  Wax  bev  Stebling 
be3  §aufe3,  The  page,  young,  handsome  and 
clever,  was  the  favourite  of  the  house. 


342 


LESSON  XLIX. 


[§290 


Ign  ber  ©$lad;t  fcurig  unb  furdjffog,  Wax  -Konmoutfy 
fonft  uberatt  VDeid;Iic£>  unb  unfcfduffig,  Ardent  and 
intrepid  in  battle,  Monmouth  was  everywhere  else 
effeminate  and  irresolute. 

2.  This  appositive  adjective  or  participle  is,  like  the  pre- 
dicate adjective,  uninflected,  and  is  placed  at  the  end  of  its 
clause.  It  is  used  much  more  sparingly  in  German  than  in 
English,  and  is  almost  wholly  confined  to  apposition  with  the 
subject  of  the  sentence  (sometimes  also  with  the  direct  object ). 
In  English  the  attributive  adjective  or  participle  is  generally 
used  appositively  when  it  has  more  than  one  modifier,  and 
always  when  it  has  a complement  (as  in  the  second  example 
above).  In  German  on  the  contrary  the  attributive  adjective 
is  freely  used  in  all  such  cases  before  a substantive.  Ail  such 
appositive  adjectives  or  participles,  unless  referring  to  the 
subject  (or  direct  object)  of  the  sentence,  must  be  rendered 
in  German  either  by  an  attributive  or  by  a relative  clause.  The 
following  examples  will  serve  to  illustrate  to  what  extent  the 
appositive  adjective  can  be  used  in  German,  and  to  show  how 
it  is  to  be  replaced  in  German  in  various  connections. 

(a)  English  Appositive  = German  Appositive  (see  also  the 
examples  under  1,  above) : 

(Engl.)  Beleaguered  with  present  distresses  and 
the  most  horrible  forebodings  on  every  side, 
roused  to  the  highest  pitch  of  indignation,  yet 
forced  to  keep  silence  and  wear  the  face  of 
patience,  Schiller  could  endure  this  constraint  no 
< longer.  (Carlyle,  Life  of  Schiller.) 

(Germ.)  SSon  gegentoartigen  Stfbten  unb  ben  fcfyrecflicf)ften 
Slfjnungen  bon  affen  ©eiten  bis  auf  ben 

l;od)ften  ©rab  entriiftet,  gejitmttgctt  jebocb,  ftittjus 
fd^oeigen  unb  bie  9Jia3fe  ber  ©ebulb  ju  iragen,  fonnte 
©emitter  biefen  nid&t  Ifinger  erbulben. 


§290] 


THE  APPOSITIVE  ADJECTIVE. 


343 


Note. — In  this  example,  as  in  those  under  I.  above,  the  adjectives 
(participles)  beleaguered , etc.,  are  in  apposition  to  the  subject  * Schiller/ 


(b)  English  Appositive  Adjective  = German  Attributive 
Adjective  or  Relative  Clause  : 


OH 


(Engl.)  To  judge  from  the  quantity  of  light  emitted 
from  the  brightest  stars,  there  is  (one  has)  reason 
to  suppose  that  some  of  them  are  much  greater 
than  the  sun. 

(Germ.)  $Ka<f;  ber  bon  ben  fyetlfien  ©ternen  au§gcfiral)ls 
itn  Std^tmaffe  urtetlen,  Ijat  man  ©runb  anjunefymen, 
baj$  etnige  baoon  biel  grower  ftnb  al§  bte  ©onne ; or : 
na$  ber  Sicfytmaffe  ju  urtetlen,  tocldje  u.  f.  to.  au^gc* 
ftrafjft  totrb  u.  f.  to. 


(ii) 


' {Engl.)  In  the  Isle  of  Man  vast  trees  are  found 
standing  firm  on  their  roots. 

- {Germ.)  2Iuf  ber  ^nfel 9ftnn  firtbet  matt  macfytige  23aume, 
ttseWjc  auf  ben  SBurjefn  feftfieljra ; or : madftttge,  auf 
„ ben  SBurjeln  fcffffeljcnbe  23  aunt e. 


Notes.  — i.  The  participles  in  these  examples  are  in  apposition  to  the 
cbjects  ‘quantity  (of  light)’  and  ‘tree’  respectively. 

2.  Observe  the  position  of  the  Germ,  attributive  adj.  immediately  before 
the  stibstantive . 


(c)  English  Appositive  Adjective  — German  Attributive 
Adjective  : 


0) 


(Engll)  Bruce  caused  his  men  to  lie  down  to  take 
some  sleep  at  a place  about  half  a mile  distant 
from  the  river. 

(Germ.)  Sruce  Iteft  feine  Seute  fid)  an  einer  itngefafyr 
eine  fyal&e  9ftetle  bom  $tuffe  enffernfctt  ©ieffe  nieber* 
legen,  urn  etn  toenig  ju  fc^Iafen. 


Note.  — An  attributive  clause  is  preferable  here,  since  a relative 
clause  would  separate  the  clause  of  purpose  (um,  etc.)  from  the  infin. 
(utcberlegert)  on  which  it  depends. 


344 


LESSON  XLIX. 


[§§  2QO- 


(ii) 


r {Engl.)  During  the  eruption  of  the  volcano,  the  dark- 
ness occasioned  by  the  ashes  was  so  profound, 
that  nothing  like  it  was  ever  experienced. 

{Germ.)  2Baf?renb  be3  2lu3br ud)e§  be£  3SuIfart3  toar  bie 
burd?  bie  2l[cf>e  fcerurfarfjte  gmfterniS  fo  ttef,  ftie  man 
, nie  etfta§  2tf)nlicf)e^  toafyrgenommen  tyatte. 


Note.  — Although  the  participle  ‘occasioned’  is  here  in  apposition  to 
the  subject  ‘darkness,’  yet  the  position  of  the  subject  after  the  verb  for- 
bids the  use  of  the  appositive  construction  in  German,  as  also  in  the 
following  sentence : 


.....  ( {Engl.)  It  was  a place  advantageous  for  defence. 

^ 1 ' ( {Germ.)  mar  eine  jur  SSerteibigurtg  giittfiige  ©telle. 
{d)  English  Appositive  Adjective  = German  Relative 

Clause  : 

{Engll)  This  plant  has  changed  into  two  distinct 
vegetables,  as  unlike  each  other  as  is  each  of 
. them  to  the  parent-plant. 

{Germ.)  ©iefe  ^flanje  fyat  fid?  in  §tx>ei  fcerfcfytebene  ©e* 
miifearten  bertoanbelt,  mcfrije  einanber  fo  uttiiljnUcfj 
finb,  hue  jebe  berjelben  ber  SWutter^flanje  ift. 

Note.  — Here  the  attributive  construction  is  inadmissible  on  account 
of  the  subsequent  clause  tnte  jebe  U.  \.  It). 


291.  Syntax  of  the  Prepositions. 

The  cases  governed  by  the  various  Prepositions  are  fully 
treated  of  in  Lessons  IX,  XIII,  A,  and  XXXVIII,  and  their 
idiomatic  use  is  further  defined  in  Less.  XXXIX. 

The  object  of  many  verbs,  as  well  as  that  of  substantives  and 
adjectives  corresponding  with  them  in  signification,  is  ex- 
pressed by  prepositions.  The  proper  use  of  prepositions 
after  verbs,  etc.,  must  be  learnt  from  practice  and  from  the 
dictionary ; but  below  is  given,  for  convenient  reference,  the 
regimen  of  particular  classes  of  verbs,  etc.,  which  differ  most 
widely  from  their  English  equivalents. 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS. 


345 


*9i] 


i.  at,  of  = lifter  -f”  Acc.,  of  sorrow , joy,  wonder , etc., 


as: 

Verbs . 

fid)  argent,  be  vexed 
erroten,  blush 
erftaunen,  be  astonished 
fid)  freuen,  rejoice 
fi$  grdmett,  grieve 
flagen,  complain 
lacfyen,  laugh 
ftd^  fd;amen,  be  ashamed 
fyotten,  mock 
fid;  (t)er)ft)imbern,  wonder 


Substantives . 

2trger,  vexation 
©rrotung,  blush 
©rftaunen,  astonishment 
$reube,  joy  (also  an  4"  Dat.) 
©ram,  grief 
$lage,  complaint 
©elad;ter,  laughter 
©d)am,  93efcf)dmung,  shame 
©!pott,  mockery 
23erft>unberung,  surprise 


Also  the  Adjectives  cirgerlid;,  vexed  ; bofe,  angry  (at  things ); 
* etrtpfinblicfy,  sensitive ; frof),  tuftig,  merry. 

Note. — 23ofe  takes  auf  + Acc.  when  referring  to  persons. 


2.  for  = auf  + Acc.,  of  expectation,  etc.,  as  : gefaftt,  pre- 
pared ; fyoffen,  §offnung,  hope  ; toarten,  wait. 

3.  for  = nadj,  of  longing,  inquiring,  etc.,  as  : 


Verbs . 


Substantives . 


biirften,  thirst 
forfcfyen,  inquire 
fyungern,  hunger 
jagen,  hunt 
fucfyen,  search 
fid;  fefynen,  long 
berlangen,  desire 


©urft,  thirst 
gorfcfyung,  inquiry 
hunger,  hunger 
gagb,  chase 

SlnjoJ  desire 


Also  the  Adjectives  burftig,  thirsty ; efyrgeijig,  ambitious ; gie* 
rig,  greedy ; fyungrtg,  hungry. 


4.  for  = um,  of  entreaty,  etc.,  as  : bitten,  ask  ; bublen,  court ; 
flefyen,  beg ; ficfy  fiimmern,  concern  one’s  self. 

23 


346 


LESSON  XLIX. 


[§  291 


5.  from  = bur  -f-  Dat.,  of  protection,  etc.,  as : betoal)ren, 
preserve ; fyiitert,  protect ; retten,  save. 

6.  in  = ait  + Dat.,  of  plenty , want , etc.,  as:  arm,  poor; 
frud)tbar,  fruitful;  reid),  rich;  fdfhuadE),  weak;  ftarf,  strong. 

7.  in  or  on  = auf  + Acc.,  of  confidence , etc.,  as  : 

Verbs . Substantives . 


fid)  briiften,  boast 
fid)  berlaffert,  rely 
bertrauert,  trust 


©tolj,  pride 
33erlaf$,  reliance 
SBertrauen,  confidence 


8.  of  = ait  + Dat.,  of  plenty , want , doubt , etc.,  as : 


Verbs.  Substantives. 

fetylen  (impers.), ) , want-  Mangel,  want 

mangeln  “ \ ® Steicfytum,  wealth 

jtoeifeltt,  doubt  Uberflufs,  superfluity 

berjtoeifeln,  despair  gtoeifel,  doubt 

Also  the  Adjectives  Iran!,  sick ; leer,  empty. 

9.  of  = att  + Acc.,  of  remembrance , etc.,  as : 


Verbs.  Substantives . 

benfen,  think  ©ebanfe,  thought 

erinrterrt,  remind  ©rinnerung,  recollection 

fidf)  erinnern,  recollect 

Note.  — These  verbs  also  govern  the  Genitive.  See  § 245. 

10.  of  = attf  + Acc.  of  suspicion,  envy, pride,  etc.,  as* 
S ubstantives.  Adjectives. 

StdEit  ( gebeit),  (pay)  attention  acf)tfam,  ) attentive 
2trgft>ofyn,  suspicion  aufmerffam,  J 

©ferfudjt,  jealousy  argfttoljnifcl),  suspicious 

iJteib,  envy  eif erfucf)tig,  jealous 

eitel,  vain 
tteibtfcfy,  envious 
ftolj,  proud 


291] 


SYNTAX  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS. 


347 


ii.  of  = Dor  + Dat.,  of  fear , etc.,  as  : 


ficfy  fiird^tert,  be  afraid 
„ erfcfjrecfen,  be  terrified 
n grauen,  dread 


Verbs. 


Substantives . 
gurcfff,  fear 


©cfyrecf,  terror 
©rauert,  dread 


Also  the  adjectives  Bcmge,  afraid ; fielder,  certain,  sure. 

12.  to  = att  + Acc.,  of  address , etc.,  as:  abreffieren,  ad- 
dress; fdjreiben,  write;  ft$  ricf)ten,  turn;  ft d)  toenben,  apply. 

13.  to  = gcgen,  after  Adjectives  signifying  an  affection  of 
the  mind , as : barmfyerjtg,  merciful ; femblid),  hostile ; freunbs 
lid),  friendly;  gerecfyt,  just;  gleicfygiltig,  indifferent;  gndbig, 
gracious;  graufam,  cruel;  rtadf)fid^ttg,  indulgent. 


1.  My  sister  is  vexed  at  not  receiving  an  invitation  to 
the  party.  2.  I am  tired  of  waiting  for  Charles;  let  us  go 
without  him.  3.  Oh  no,  do  not  let  us  go  yet ; he  will  be  angry 
at  us,  if  we  do  not  wait  for  him.  4.  Charles  has  many  good 
qualities,  but  you  cannot  rely  upon  him.  5.  The  boy  is  proud 
of  the  watch  given  to  him  by  his  father.  6.  If  you  lose  your 
way  in  a city,  it  is  always  safest  to  apply  to  a policeman.  7. 
I have  no  doubt  that  this  is  good  advice.  8.  Mary  is  angry 
at  Sarah,  because  Sarah  has  made  sport  of  her.  9.  Our 
neighbour  has  been  ill  for  some  days ; he  complains  of  rheuma- 
tism, and  says  he  has  caught  cold.  10.  I am  less  vexed  at 
his  not  coming  than  at  his  not  sending  us  word.  11.  The  war 
had  already  lasted  more  than  four  years,  and  people  were  long- 
ing for  peace.  12.  Diogenes  is  said  to  have  gone  once  in  day- 
light through  the  streets  of  the  city,  carrying  at  the  same  time 
a lantern.  13.  People  began  to  laugh  at  him  and  mock  him, 
asking  him  what  he  was  looking  for.  14.  He  replied  that  he 
was  looking  for  an  honest  man.  15.  The  general  postponed 
attacking  the  enemy,  because  his  army  was  weak  in  artillery. 


EXERCISE  XL IX. 


348 


LESSON  L. 


[§§  292' 


16.  Mr.  Kalk,  the  architect,  promised  that  my  house  should  be 
finished  before  the  1st  July,  but  I doubt  it.  17.  The  Province 
of  Ontario  is  rich  in  iron,  but  is  wanting  in  coal  to  smelt  it. 
18.  We  have  been  thinking  for  some  time  of  selling  our  house, 
but  we  cannot  find  anyone  who  is  willing  to  buy  it.  19.  Be 
good  enough  to  remind  me  to  buy  some  postage-stamps,  when 
we  go  past  the  post-office.  20.  We  may  learn  as  much  by  pay- 
ing attention  to  what  we  see  and  hear  as  we  can  learn  from 
books.  21.  The  horses,  frightened  by  a passing  train,  shied, 
and  were  on  the  point  of  running  away.  22.  The  first  settlers 
in  this  country  had  much  to  endure : they  lived  for  the  most 
part  in  houses  built  of  [the]  trunkswofwtrees  and  covered  in 
many  cases  with  bark.  23.  (Just)  as  many  people  lost  their 
lives  (the  life)  by  the  famine  occasioned  by  the  earth- 
quake, as  by  the  earthquake  itself.  24.  The  bad  news  re- 
ceived yesterday  has  prevented  our  going  to  town  to-day. 
25.  There  are  men  who  grow  richer  by  giving  than  others 
[do]  by  receiving. 


LESSON  L. 

WORD-ORDER. 

292.  The  Essential  Parts  of  a Sentence. 

i.  Every  sentence  contains  three  essential  parts,  viz : the 
Subject,  or  that  of  which  something  is  asserted,  the  Predi- 
cate, or  that  which  is  said  of  the  Subject,  and,  thirdly,  the 
Verb  or  Copula,  the  word  which  makes  the  assertion,  and 
which  may  include  the  Predicate  (as  in  the  simple  tenses  of 
a verb),  but  does  not  necessarily  do  so.  Thus,  in  the  sen- 
tence : 4 He  sings/  4 he  ’ is  the  Subject , while  4 sings 9 contains 
both  the  Verb  or  Copula  and  the  Predicate , i.  e.,  it  not  only 
asserts  something  of  the  Subject,  but  also  says  what  that 
something  is,  being  equivalent  to  4 is  singing.1  In  the  sen- 


293J 


POSITION  OF  THE  VERB. 


349 


tence  : ‘ He  has  sun g,’  on  the  other  hand,  4 has  * is  the  Verb 
(or  Copula) , ‘ sung  ’ is  what  is  asserted,  or  the  Predicate . 

2.  The  Verb  (or  Copula)  is  in  German  the  member  of  the 
sentence,  the  position  of  which  is  most  absolutely  fixed ; it  is 
the  cardvial  point  or  hinge  on  which  the  sentence  turns. 

293.  Normal  Position  of  the  Verb. 

In  German,  there  are  three  normal  positions  for  the  Verb, 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  sentence. 

(a)  The  Verb  stands  first : 

1.  In  Interrogative  Sentences  expecting  the  answer  ‘yes 9 
or  ‘ no  9 (i.  e.,  when  the  verb  is  the  question-word,  see 
§ 23,  2),  as: 

3ft  Sfyr  23ruber  toofyl?  Is  your  brother  well? 

8®:rb  er  fommen?  Will  he  come? 

©te  $arl?  Is  your  name  Charles? 

2.  In  sentences  expressing  a command  or  wish,  as  : 
©efudjett  ©ie  micfy  morgen,  Come^andwsee  me  to- 
morrow. 

2£are  icfy  ju  §aufe!  Were  I (would  that  I were)  at 
home ! 

Note.  — The  verb  may  either  follow  or  precede  the  subject  in  the 
3.  Sing.  Subj.  used  as  Imperative  (see  § 268,  1),  as: 

©ott  bel)iite  bid) ! or:  SBefyiite  bid)  ©ott!  God  preserve  thee! 

3.  In  Conditional  clauses,  when  the  conjunction  toenn  is 
omitted  (compare  § 59),  as : 

SCiirc  ba§  2Setter  fd)5n,  fo  toiirbe  id)  au3geben,  If  the 
weather  were  fine,  I should  go  out. 

( b ) The  Verb  comes  second  (is  the  second  idea)  in  all 
principal  assertive  sentences  (compare  § 20),  as: 

®er  2Jlenf$  ift  fterblid),  Man  is  mortal. 


350 


LESSON  L. 


[§  293 


$)er  jungere  33ruber  metneS  33ater§,  toelcfyer  fo  franf  toav, 
ifi  tot.  My  father's  younger  brother,  who  was  so  ill, 
is  dead. 

©eftern  Slbenb  ffarfi  ber  23ruber  meine§  23ater3,  Yesterday 
evening  my  father’s  brother  died. 

(Softool  (rttc^t  nur)  mein  23ater,  toie  (fonbern  aucf))  mein 
23ruber  taar  jugegert,  Both  (not  only)  my  father,  and 
(but  also)  my  brother  were  (was)  present. 

Remarks. — 1.  As  in  the  last  three  examples  above,  the 
first  member  of  the  sentence  may  be  complex,  with  several 
attributes,  complements,  etc. ; the  verb  is  still  the  second 
idea. 

2.  The  coordinating  conjunctions  proper  (§  236)  do  not 
count  as  members  of  the  sentence  (see  the  last  example  above), 
but  adverbial  conjunctions  throw  the  subject  after  the  verb. 

Note.  — Certain  adverbial  phrases,  of  a more  or  less  inter jectional 
nature,  such  as:  freilid),  true;  ja,  yes;  ja  tt)ol)I,  to  be  sure;  neilt,  no; 
furjh  in  short ; mit  einent  28ort,  in  a word;  gilt,  well,  are  not  regarded  as 
part  of  the  sentence,  and  do  not  throw  the  subject  after  the  verb,  thus : 

SfreUtdj,  id)  Ijabe  e8  nid)t  fetbft  gefeljen,  True,  I did  not  see  it 
myself. 

fiutj  (mit  cittern  Sort),  id)  glau&e  e§  nidjt,  In  short  (in  a word), 

I do  not  believe  it. 

®ut,  id)  toerfce  fomnten,  Well,  I shall  come. 

3.  In  assertive  sentences  of  an  emphatic  or  exclamatory 
character,  the  verb  sometimes  comes  first,  especially  when 
the  particle  bod)  is  present,  as  : 

3ft  ba§  eirt  ^Better!  (—  2Ba§  fiir  ein  2Better  ift  ba§!) 
What  weather ! 

g>abc  id/3  bir  bad)  gefagt ! I told  you  so ! 

4.  If  a dependent  clause  or  a quotation  precede  the  prin- 
cipal sentence  (compare  § 294,  b , Rem.  2,  below),  such  clause 
or  quotation  is  regarded  as  a single  member  of  the  sentence, 
and  requires  the  verb  immediately  after  it,  as: 


§ a93l 


POSITION  OF  THE  VERB. 


35* 

®a  id)  fclbft  nicfjt  fommen  fonnte,  fc^icfie  id)  metnen  ©ofyn, 
As  I could  not  come  myself,  I sent  my  son. 

2113  id)  anfarn,  tear  e3  fd;on  nad)  10  Uljr,  When  I arrived, 
it  was  after  io  o’clock. 

SBenn  er  fommen  follte,  teerbc  id)  ju  §aufe  fetn,  If  he 
should  come,  I shall  be  at  home. 

,,%d)  toill  tnetne  2fufgabe  nicfyt  lernen/'  ferric  ber  unarfige 
$nabe,  “ I will  not  learn  my  lesson,”  cried  the  naughty 
boy. 

Notes.  — i.  After  dependent  conditional  and  adverbial  clauses  (except 
those  of  time)  the  particle  fo  usually  introduces  the  principal  sentence,  as : 
id)  nid)t  felbft  fommen  fonnte,  fo  fdjidte  id)  meinett  ©obit. 

SSenit  er  fommen  follte,  fo  merbe  id)  §aitfc  fein. 

2.  This  particle  (0  should  always  be  inserted  after  a conditional  clause 
with  toenn  omitted ; in  colloquial  usage,  however,  the  principal  sentence 
sometimes  has  the  subject  before  the  verb,  fo  being  omitted,  as: 

2Bare  er  fniljer  gcfommeit,  fo  fy*tte  er  mid)  gefeben ; 
or  (colloquially) : 

SBdre  er  friiber  gefommen,  er  pife  mid)  gefeben. 

This  latter  construction,  however,  should  not  be  imitated. 

3.  In  proportional  clauses  introduced  by  je,  tlcjlo,  or  uutfo,  the  depen- 
dent clause  comes  first,  and  the  verb  is  preceded  by  the  word  expres- 
sing the  comparison,  as  well  as  by  the  particle  je,  etc.,  as : 

3e  longer  bie  9?adjte  ftnb,  fceflo  f firmer  ftnb  bie  £age,  The  longer 
the  nights  are,  the  shorter  are  the  days. 

( c ) The  Verb  is  last  in  dependent  sentences  and  ques- 
tions (compare  §§  32  ; 88),  as : 

%d)  toeijs,  ber  SDlenfd)  fterblief)  iff,  I know  that  man 
is  mortal. 

Gin  SOlcmn,  tecldjcr  geftern  fyier  tear,  A man,  who  was 
here  yesterday. 

%dtj  g efye,  uiciC  e3  fd)on  fpdt  iff,  I go  because  it  is  late. 

3$  toeij$  nicf)t,  teer  fyter  getoefen  iff,  I do  not  know  who 
has  been  here  (dep.  question ). 


352 


LESSON  L. 


[§§293' 


Remarks.  — i.  Indirect  statements  with  baft  omitted 
have  the  construction  of  principal  sentences  (verb  second ; 
see  §§  20;  87,  3),  as: 

@r  fagte,  er  ftabc  e§  bergeffert,  He  said  he  had  forgotten  it. 

2.  Conditional  clauses  with  ftenn  omitted  follow  the 
question-order  (verb  first ; compare  § 59),  as  : 

2®5re  ba§  -Setter  fcfydn,  fo  ftriirbe  tcfy  au^geben,  If  the 
weather  were  tine,  I should  go  out. 

3.  The  Verb  precedes  two  infinitives  (or  infinitive  and 
part.;  see  § 199,  3),  as  in  the  compound  tenses  of  Modal 
Auxiliaries,  thus : 

@r  fagte,  baft  er  nicf jt  Ijalic  footmen  tootten,  He  said  that 
he  had  not  intended  to  come. 

4.  Clauses  with  bcmt  (—‘unless/  § 241,  18),  having  negative 
force,  follow  the  construction  of  a principal  sentence  (verb 
second ),  as  : 

3d)  laffe  nid)t,  ®u  fcgttcfi  mid)  bcmt,  I will  not  let 
Thee  go,  unless  Thou  bless  me. 

3$  toerbe  nid)t  fommen,  c£  fci  bctttt,  baft  ba3  2Better  fd)on 
toerbe,  I shall  not  come,  unless  (it  be  that)  the 
weather  should  become  fine. 

5.  §aben  and  fein,  as  auxiliaries  of  tense,  are  frequently 
omitted  at  the  end  of  a dependent  clause,  as : 

@r  leugnete,  baft  er  ba3  $ertfter  gerhrod^ert  (Ijabe  under- 
stood), He  denied  that  he  had  broken  the  window. 

3d)  fragte  tf>rt,  ob  er  jur  red)ten  3eit  angefommen  (jet 
understood),  I asked  him  if  he  had  arrived  in  good 
time. 

29 4.  Position  of  the  Subject. 

The  Subject  is  placed  : 

(a)  In  Direct  Questions,  if  it  be  the  question-word,  at 
the  beginning ; otherwise  immediately  after  the  Verb,  as: 


294] 


POSITION  OF  THE  SUBJECT. 


353 


8$cr  ift  fyier  getoefen?  Who  has  been  here? 

3ft  cr  Ijter  getoefen?  Has  he  been  here  ? 

SBann  fommt  %f)Xt  ©cfjtticftcr?  When  does  your  sister 
come  ? 

( b ) In  Principal  Assertive  Sentences,  the  normal  po- 
sition of  the  Subject  is  first ; but  if  any  other  word  precede 
the  Verb,  the  Subject  immediately  follows  the  Verb , as  : 

3cf)  toerbe  morgen  ni$t  auSgetyen.;  or : 

2Jlorgen  toerbe  id)  nicfyt  au^gefyen,  I shall  not  go  out  to- 
morrow. 

Remarks. — i.  In  point  of  fact  it  may  be  said  that,  in  a 
principal  sentence,  the  Subject  follows  the  Verb  quite  as  often 
as  it  precedes  it. 

2.  A preceding  dependent  clause,  or  a quotation,  always 
throws  the  subject  after  the  verb,  except  when,  after  a con- 
ditional clause  with  ttiCttn  omitted,  the  principal  sentence  is 
not  introduced  by  the  particle  fo  (compare  § 293,  4,  Note  2, 
above). 

3.  When  the  real  ( logical ) subject  is  represented  by 
before  the  verb  as  grammatical  subject,  the  logical  subject 
immediately  follows  the  verb,  as  : 

@3  ift  tncittc  ©cfjtncficr  getoefen,  It  was  my  sister. 

( V ) In  Dependent  Sentences,  the  Subject,  if  a relative 
pronoun,  begins  the  sentence,  otherwise  the  Subject  imme- 
diately follows  the  connecting  word,  as  : 

2) er  -Kami,  tt)dd)er  gefterrt  fyier  toar,  The  man  who  was 
here  yesterday. 

3) er  9Jtarm,  ben  id)  geftern  falj,  The  man,  whom  I saw 
yesterday. 

3$  fagte  iljr,  bafj  idj  fornmen  toerbe,  I told  her  that  I 
should  come. 


354 


LESSON  L. 


[§§  294- 


Note. — Personal  Pronouns,  and  especially  the  reflective  ft d),  some- 
times precede  the  Subject,  both  in  principal  sentences  with  the  Subject 
after  the  Verb,  and  in  dependent  clauses,  as : 

2)fc>rgen  trill  ftd)  mein  SBruber  rerfyciraten,  My  brother  is  going  to 
get  married  to-morrow. 

($r  fagte,  bag  ifjn  biefer  Sftenfd}  beleibigt  fyabe,  He  said  that  this 
fellow  had  insulted  him. 

295.  Position  of  the  Predicate. 

1.  The  Predicate,  if  not  included  in  the  Verb  (see  § 292, 

1,  above),  may  consist  of  a participle  or  infinitive  (as  in  the 
compound  tenses  of  the  verb) ; or  it  may  be  a substantive,  an  . 
adjective,  or  the  separable  prefix  of  a compound  verb. 

2.  The  Predicate  is  placed  last  in  Principal  Sentences 
and  in  Direct  Questions ; in  Dependent  Sentences  it 

immediately  precedes  the  Verb. 

3.  If  the  Predicate  is  compound,  consisting  of  two  or  more 
of  the  elements  under  1,  above,  they  will  occur  in  the  follow- 
ing order:  1.  Predicative  adjective  (or  substantive)  ; 2.  Sep- 
arable prefix;  3.  Participle;  4.  Infinitive;  thus: 

Pred.  Adj. 

6r  foil  ftets  gegen  fctnert  armen  Sruber  feljr  frctgciiig 

Part.  Inf. 

gctoejClt  feht,  He  is  said  to  have  always  been  very 
liberal  to  his  poor  brother. 

Pref.  Part.  Inf. 

©te  ftiirbe  fcfjort  geftern  ah  5 gereift  fciit,  She  would  have 
departed  yesterday. 

Remark.  — Any  one  of  these  elements  of  the  Predicate 
may,  for  emphasis,  occupy  the  normal  position  of  the  subject 
in  the  first  place  ( before  the  Verb),  as  : 

©djiht  iff  ba3  ^Setter  fyeute  m d)t,  The  weather  is  not  (at 
all)  fine  to-day  (i.  e.,  it  is  far  from  fine). 


29&] 


POSITION  OF  THE  PREDICATE. 


355 


(golim t ift  mein  ©ruber,  nicfyt  9Jtatrofe,  My  brother  is  a 
soldier,  not  a sailor. 

(Singcn  toiH  id)  tootyl,  aber  nid)t  fyielen,  I will  sing,  but 
not  play. 

Note.  — The  Separable  Prefix  and  the  Participle  are,  however,  rarely 
placed  in  this  position,  except  in  elevated  or  poetic  diction,  or  for  con- 
trast, as: 

Uhefccr  fieig’  id)  sum  ©efedjte,  I descend  (down  I go)  to  the  fight. 
(Schiller.) 

gmitifc  btcibt  ber  $tta|)pett  £rof$,  The  retinue  of  squires  remains 
behind  {ibid.). 

(£ntid)!cffcn  ift  cr  alfobalb,  He  is  resolved  at  once  {ibid.). 

©egebcn  ()abe  id)  il)m  ba§  $8ud)  rtid)t,  fonbern  nur  gelieljen,  I did 
not  give  him  the  book,  I only  lent  it  to  him. 

296.  Position  of  Objects  and  Cases. 

1.  Objects  (not  governed  by  a preposition)  precede  adjects 
(objects  governed  by  a preposition),  as : 

babe  einen  ©rief  an  iljn  (an  meinen  ©ater)  gefcfyrieben, 
I have  written  a letter  to  him  (to  my  father). 

2.  Pronouns  (unless  governed  by  prepositions)  precede 
substantives,  as : 

2>d)  Ijabe  tfjm  etnen  ©rief  gefcfyrieben,  I have  written  him 
a letter. 

3.  Of  Pronouns,  Personal  before  other  Pronouns,  as : 

3<f)  fyabe  il)HT  ba§  (ettoa§)  gegeben,  I have  given  him 
that  (something). 

4.  Of  the  cases  of  Personal  Pronouns,  the  Accusative  precedes 
the  Dative,  and  both  precede  the  Genitive ; but  the  reflexive 
tfd)  usually  precedes  all  others,  as  : 

©r  I)at  fid)  (Dat.)  e§  gemerft,  He  has  takenwa^notewof 
it  (for  himself). 


356 


LESSON  L. 


l§§  296- 


5.  Of  Substantives,  the  Person  (unless  governed  by  a pre- 
position) precedes  the  thing;  the  Indirect  precedes  the  Direct 
Object,  and  the  Remoter  Object  (in  the  Genitive)  follows 
both,  as : 

3$  f>a£>e  3ljm  (Sdjtocjkr  ba£  33ud)  gelieljen,  I have  lent 
your  sister  the  book. 

Gr  £;at  bicfcit  SRattn  be3  ©iebftatyfe  befd^ulbigt.  He  has 
accused  this  man  of  theft. 

6.  The  personal  (or  subjective)  Genitive  (compare  § 243,  2) 
may  either  precede  or  follow  the  substantive  which  governs  it, 
as : 

®Jehte§  ©ater£  My  father's  house ; or : 

3)a3  nteineS  83ater£. 

7.  The  limiting  Genitive  (see  § 243,  3)  follows,  except  in 
elevated  or  poetic  diction,  as : 

35a3  Gnbe  $ricgc§,  The  end  of  the  war. 

8.  Cases  governed  by  adjectives  precede  the  adjective,  but 
a substantive  with  a preposition  may  follow  the  predicative  ad- 
jective, as  : 

3d)  bin  iljm  banfbar  fur  feme  SBetmiljunijen,  I am  grate- 
ful to  him  for  his  exertion. 

297.  Position  of  Adverbs  and  Adverbial  Expressions. 

1.  In  general,  adverbs  precede  the  word  they  modify,  as  : 

3d)  bin  feljr  miibe  getoorben,  I have  become  very  tired. 

Gr  I)at  ba£  33ud)  nidjt  gelefen,  He  has  not  read  the  book. 

2.  Adverbs  of  Time  precede  objects  (except  pronouns)  and 
all  other  Adverbs  or  Adverbial  expressions,  as : 

Time.  Object.  Place.  Manner. 

Gr  I)at  geftern  ba3  33u$  311  §aufe  fef>r  fleifcig  ftubiert, 

He  studied  the  book  very  diligently  at  home  yesterday. 


2g8]  POSITION  OF  ADVERBS,  ETC.  357 

3.  Adverbs  of  place  precede  those  of  manner,  and  both 
follow  objects,  as  in  the  above  example. 

4.  Of  several  Adverbs  of  like  kind,  the  more  general  precede 
the  special,  as  : 

SJJorgcn  um  jel?n  W?r,  At  ten  o’clock  to-morrow. 

Remarks.  — 1.  Any  object,  adject,  adverb  or  adverbial 
phrase  may  occupy  the  normal  position  of  the  subject  at  the 
head  of  a principal  sentence  (before  the  verb,  compare  § 295, 
Rem.,  above),  as : 

SBeinen  SSater  I?abe  id?  nicfyt  gefefyen,  I did  not  see  my 

father. 

©eftcw  fam  id?  ju  fpat,  I came  too  late  yesterday. 

2.  The  relative  position  of  objects,  abverbs,  etc.,  is  the  same 
in  principal  and  subordinate  sentences. 

298.  Position  of  other  Members  of  the  Sentence. 

1.  Attributive  Adjectives  and  Participles  immediately 
precede  the  substantive  they  modify,  as  : 

©in  jur  23erteibigung  fef?r  gimftiger  Drt,  A place  very 
favourable  for  defence. 

auf  bcm  §ligel  fteljenbe§au3,  The  house  standing 
on  the  hill. 

2.  Prepositions  precede  their  case,  with  the  exceptions 
given  in  the  lists  (see  §§  46 ; 51 ; 223). 

3.  Conjunctions  come  between  the  words  or  clauses  they 
connect,  as : 

9Jtein  33ruber  urb  feine  $amitie  finb  I?ier,  My  brother 
and  his  family  are  here. 

%&)  toeifc,  baft  Sie  nicfyt  fommen  toerben,  I know  that 
you  will  not  come. 


358 


LESSON  L. 


[§§298- 


Note.  — In  dependent  clauses  that  precede  the  sentence  on  which 
they  depend  the  conjunction  is  first,  as: 

SBcil  id)  franf  Wav,  fonnte  id)  nid)t  fommett,  Because  I was  ill,  I 
could  not  come. 

299.  Construction  of  Incomplete  Clauses. 

The  Word-order  of  Incomplete  or  Elliptical  Clauses  is  the 
same  as  that  of  Complete  Clauses,  there  being  no  Verb  in  the 
former.  In  Infinitive  Clauses  the  Infinitive  comes  last ; and  in 
Appositive  Clauses,  the  Adjective  or  Participle  comes  last,  thus  : 

©ute  greunbe  (jtt)  {jafien  ift  etn  grofceS  ©liicf,  To  have 
good  friends  is  a great  blessing. 

£)ie  $unft  in  D1  jit  tnalett,  The  art  of  painting  in  oil. 

Scf)  toerbe  micfy  freuen,  ©ie  morgen  ju  fcljeit,  I shall  be 
glad  to  see  you  to-morrow. 

®te§  bet  mtr  benfcnb,  fcfjlief  i$  etn.  Thinking  all 
this  to  myself,  I fell  asleep. 

SSon  bem  £arm  ttufgefdjrecft,  fprartg  er  au§  bem  Sette, 
Aroused  by  the  noise,  he  jumped  out  of  bed. 

300.  Interrogative  Sentences. 

1.  Direct  Questions  always  begin  with  the  question-word,  the 
other  members  of  the  sentence  occupying  the  same  relative 
position  as  in  principal  sentences.  For  the  position  of  the 
Verb  and  Subject,  see  §§  293,  294,  above. 

2.  Questions  in  German  very  frequently  have  the  form  of  a 
principal  assertive  sentence,  the  question  being  marked  only 
by  the  rising  inflexion  of  the  voice,  as : 

3 )u  m betne  Seftion  nicfyt  gelernt?  You  have  not 
learnt  your  lesson  ? 

Notes.  — 1.  This  construction  often  occurs  with  a food)  in  the  sen* 
tence,  as : 


INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 


359 


3011 

2)u  ttrirfl  food)  fornmen?  You  will  be  sure  to  come  (will  you 
not?). 

(Sr  ift  fcod)  nicf)t  Iran?  ? He  is  not  ill  (is  he  ? I hope  not). 

2.  Exclamatory  sentences  frequently  have  the  construction  of  depen- 
dent questions,  but  may  also  have  that  of  direct  questions,  as : 

2Ber  tnitgeljen  fciirfte ! (Happy  he)  who  might  go  with  you! 

SBie  if!  ba8  ^Better  fcfjoil.!  How  beautiful  is  the  weather! 

RECAPITULATION. 

301.  General  Remarks  on  German  Construction. 

The  following  are  the  principal  points  in  which  German 
differs  from  English  Construction  : 

1.  The  Verb  (containing  the  Copula)  is  the  hinge  on 
which  the  sentence  turns,  and  has  its  position  most  absolutely 
fixed. 

2.  The  Subject  does  not,  as  in  English,  necessarily  precede 
the  Verb  in  Principal  Sentences ; but  if  any  other  member  of 
the  sentence  precede  the  Verb,  an  inversion  of  the  subject 
takes  place,  and  it  is  thrown  after  the  verb. 

Notes.  — i.  The  terms  inversion , inverted  sentence , often  used  by 
grammarians,  refer  to  the  Subject  only,  not  to  the  Verb. 

2.  This  inversion  of  the  Subject  is  also  found  in  Interrogative  and 
Imperative  Sentences  (see  §§  293;  294;  300,  above). 

3.  The  relative  rank  of  sentences  is  marked  by  the  varying  position  of 
the  Verb,  which  is  last  in  Dependent  Sentences. 

4.  All  the  other  parts  of  the  sentence,  except  what  precedes  the  Verb, 
are  included  or  bracketed  between  the  Verb  and  the  Predicate. 

5.  Dependent  Sentences  (including  Infinitive  and  Appositive  Clauses; 
see  § 299,  above)  are  marked  off  from  the  sentences  on  which  they  depend 
by  commas. 


360 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  G. 


[§§  302- 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  G. 

COMPLEX  SENTENCES.— CLAUSE-ORDER. 

302.  Compound  and  Complex  Sentences. 

1.  A sentence  is  compound  when  it  contains  more  than  one  coordinate 
clause;  complex  when  it  contains  a subordinate  clause,  thus  : 

Compound : 3d)  giitg  ait  if)tn  ttorbei,  fanute  iljn  aber  nid)t, 

I went  past  him,  but  did  not  know  him. 

Complex : (Er  f agte  mir,  bag  er  fommen  merbe, 

He  told  me  that  he  would  come. 

2.  Any  subordinate  clause  may  itself  be  complex,  having  another  clause 
dependent  upon  it,  as : 

3d)  erroartete  ifjit  geftern,  toctl  er  mir  gefdjriebeit  Ijatte,  hag  feme 
©efdjafte  balb  bcenbigt  feitt  miirben,  I expected  him  yesterday, 
because  he  had  written  me,  that  his  business  would  soon  be 
finished. 

Note.  — In  the  above  example,  the  clause  roeil  er,  etc.,  depends  on  the  principal 
clause  preceding  it;  whereas  the  clause  baft  feine  ©efdjafte,  etc.,  depends  on  the  clause 
tueit  er,  etc.,  which  is  itself  subordinate. 

Remark.  — In  the  following  observations  as  to  the  relative  position 
or  order  of  clauses,  the  term  “ principal  sentence  ” includes  all  sentences, 
though  themselves  subordinate,  which  occupy  the  relation  of  a principal 
or  governing  sentence  to  the  clauses  dependent  upon  them. 

303.  1.  In  Complex  Sentences,  the  position  of  the  various  depen- 
dent clauses  is  regulated  by  the  following  general  principle ; 

Finish  the  principal  sentence  before  introducing  the  sub- 
ordinate clause. 

2.  Thus,  in  the  example  in  § 302,  2,  above,  it  would  be  wrong  to  insert 
the  last  clause  (bag  . . . lufirbeit)  within  the  preceding  clause  on  which 
it  depends,  thus : 

SBeil  er  mir,  bag  feine  ©efdjdfte  beenbigt  fein  mfirben,  ge(d)rieben 
Ijatte. 

3.  Similarly  the  following  construction  would  make  the  complex  sen- 
tence quite  unintelligible ; 

2)ie  ©cmofynfyeit  mug  bie  gertigfeit  eine  ©ad)e  oljne  fiber  bie  9?egel 
gu  benfett  ju  ttjun  DerleUjett. 

The  observance  of  the  above  rule  will  require  the  clauses  of  this  sen- 
tence to  be  arranged  as  follows : 


3°sl 


COMPOUND  AND  COMPLEX  SENTENCES.  36 1 


®ie  ®erocf)nl)eit  ntufj  bic  gertigfeit  bcrltiljcn,  ehie  @acf)e  ju  tljun, 
oBne  iibcr  bie  fReget  nadpubenfen,  Habit  (practice)  must  bestow 
the  readiness  of  doing  a thing  without  reflecting  upon  the  rule. 

4.  In  the  following  sentence,  again,  the  isolation  of  the  separable  prefix 
is  very  objectionable : 

Reiter  ging  bie  ©onne  an  jenem  Sftorgen,  an  bent  tnir  abreiften,  auf, 

The  sun  rose  cheerfully  on  that  morning  on  which  we  set  out. 

The  prefix  auf  should  be  inserted  after  Sftorgen. 

304:.  Appositive  Clauses,  must,  however,  stand  immediately  after 
the  particular  part  of  the  sentence  to  which  they  refer,  as: 

2>ie  ^riefterin,  tton  iljvcr  (Bfittin  felbfl  gcto&Blet  uni)  gefjeiligt, 

fprtd)t  ^n  bir,  The  priestess,  chosen  and  consecrated  by  the 
goddess  herself,  speaks  to  thee. 

2Ba3  fonnen  huv,  etn  fd)U3adr~3  $olr  bev  §irten,  gegen  9ttbred)t3 
§ecre  ? What  can  we,  a weak  people  of  herdsmen,  [do]  against 
Albert’s  hosts  ? 

3d)  f)abc  itjm  biefen  ^eBter,  imfe  cr  j etsc  §anblung  nufj-mtfe,  fdjon 
oft  bovgeittorfen,  I have  often  reproached  him  with  this  mis- 
take of  misinterpreting  every  action. 

3d)  fomtte  bie  grage,  oh  Ixstr  famen,  nic^t  beantiuorten,  I could 
not  answer  the  question,  whether  we  were  coming. 

305.  Relative  Clauses  must  immediately  follow  the  antecedent : 

(a)  When  the  latter  (whether  subject  or  not)  precedes  the  verb  of  a 
principal  sentence,  as : 

3)er  Sftann,  toeldjer  geflcrn  tsar,  ift  B^ute  ttnebergefontmen, 

The  man  who  was  here  yesterday  came  again  to-day. 

2)en  9ftann,  lucld-er  geflern  Bier  tear,  Babe  id)  nid)t  gefannt,  I did 

not  know  the  man,  who  was  here  yesterday. 

Note.  — If  the  antecedent  does  not  precede  the  verb,  the  relative  is  introduced  after 
the  conclusion  of  the  principal  sentence,  except  as  under  (3),  below,  thus : 

£eute  ift  ber  9Jtann  tmebergefommen,  tncldjer  u.  f.  m. 

3d)  f> abe  ben  'JJiann  nid)t  gefannt,  roeld^er  u.  f.  tn. 

(&)  When  their  separation  from  the  antecedent  would  cause  ambi- 
guity, as: 

©eftern  Babe  id)  trteinen  gh’eunb,  ben  id)  tange  nirf)t  gefeBen,  bei 
meinetn  Gruber  getroffen,  Yesterday  I met  at  my  brother’s  my 
friend,  whom  I had  not  seen  for^a^long^time. 

Note.  If  the  relative  clause  were  placed  after  the  conclusion  of  the  principal  sentence, 
the  relative  ben  might  refer  to  93ruber. 

24 


3<32 


SUPPLEMENTARY  LESSON  G. 


[§305 

306.  A Subordinate  or  Dependent  Clause  (with  the  exceptions 
specified  in  Remarks  3,  4,  below)  may  also,  whether  subjective,  objective 
or  adverbial,  precede  the  principal  clause,  in  which  case  it  throws  the 
Subject  after  the  Verb,  as: 

Oft  iff)  fommen  faun  [subjective  clause ),  iff  gmeifelfyaft,  It  is 
doubtful  whether  I can  come. 

SRkv  gar  3 it  lief  fcethnft  [subjective  clause ),  nnrb  toentg  fetften,  He 
who  considers  too  much,  will  accomplish  little. 

$af)  cr  mir  md)i  gefdjrickit  [subjective  clause),  mad) t ntir@orgen, 
[The  fact]  that  he  has  not  written  to  me,  causes  me  anxiety. 

06  id)  toer&c  fommen  fimnen  [objective  clause),  meij*  icf)  itidjt, 
I do  not  know,  whether  I shall  be  able  to  come. 

ei*  franf  if!  [objective  clause ),  Ijabe  id)  geftevn  gefjort,  I heard 
yesterday,  that  he  was  ill. 

Sa  id)  franf  toar  [adverbial  clause ),  foitnte  id)  nidjt  fommen,  As 
I was  sick,  I could  not  come. 

Remarks. — 1.  Such  a clause  takes  the  place  of  a subject,  object  or 
predicate,  as  the  case  may  be,  before  the  verb  (compare  §§  293,  b , 
Rem.  4;  294,  Rem.  2;  295,  Rem.). 

2.  Adverbial  clauses  in  this  way  bring  expressions  of  time,  place,  etc., 
but  more  especially  those  of  cause , nearer  to  the  verb,  which  is  the  part 
of  the  sentence  they  modify. 

3.  Qw\y  subjective  relative  clauses  with  the  compound  relative  toer, 
can  stand  at  the  head  of  a sentence,  as  in  the  second  example  above. 

Note. — The  relative  ber  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  toer  as  compound  relative 
(including  both  relative  and  antecedent),  especially  in  the  plural,  as : 

$>:c  fid)  &u  fjart  oergattgen  fatten,  flofyen  cm3  betn  Sanbe.  (Schiller)  ; i.  e., 
&tcientgen,  toelcbe  tt.  f.  to. ; or:  333cv  fid)  ju  t)art  oergangert  batte  (sing.), 
flof)  u.  f.  to.,  Those  who  had  committed  too  great  offences,  fled  from  the 
country. 

4.  Clauses  which  modify  not  the  whole  sentence  but  a particular 
member,  cannot  stand  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  but  stand  either 
immediately  after  the  word  to  which  they  refer,  or  after  the  conclusion 
of  the  sentence  (compare  § 297,  above).  This  remark  applies  especially 
to  relative  clauses  (but  see  Rem.  3,  above,  and  Note),  and  to  comparative 
clauses  with  af§,  as : 

0eiu  Ungliicf  mar  grower,  aU  er  ertragen  fomtte  (or : 311  grof?, 
ttl3  Daft  er  eS  U.  to.),  His  misfortune  was  greater  than  he 
could  bear. 


§306]  COMPOUND  AND  COMPLEX  SENTENCES.  363 


Note.  — Comparative  clauses  with  rote  may  precede,  as: 

2Bie  im  Saub  ber  SSogel  fingt, 

Eftag  fic^>  jeber  giitlicf)  tfyun, 

As  the  bird  sings  amid  the  boughs,  let  every  one  enjoy  himself.  (Schiller), 

EXERCISE  G. 

1.  It  seems  impossible,  says  a great  botanist,  to  give,  in  the  present 
state  of  our  knowledge,  a complete  definition  of  what  (=  that  which)  is  to 
be  considered  as  an  animal,  in  contradistinction  to  what  one  must  regard 
as  a plant.  2.  The  good  king  Robert  Bruce,  who  was  always  watchful 
and  prudent,  had  received  information  ($unbe)  of  (boil)  the  intention  of 
these  men  to  attack  him  suddenly.  3.  Bruce  caused  his  men  to  lie  down 
to  take  some  sleep  at  a place  about  half  a mile  distant  from  the  river 
(see  § 290,  c,  i),  while  he  himself,  with  two  attendants,  went  down  to  watch 
the  ford  through  which  the  enemy  must  pass,  before  they  came  to  the 
place  where  king  Robert’s  men  were  lying.  4.  “If  I go  back,”  thought 
the  king,  “to  call  my  men  to  (the)  arms,  these  men  will  get  (fommen) 
through  the  ford  unhindered ; and  that  would  be  [a]  pity,  since  it  is  a 
place  so  advantageous  for  defence.”  5.  In  the  confusion,  five  or  six  of 
the  enemy  were  slain,  or,  having  been  borne  down  by  the  stream,  [were] 
drowned.  6.  With  the  natural  feeling  of  a young  author  (@d)riftftefier), 
he  had  ventured  (it)  to  go  (fid)  cntfiltadjen)  secretly  and  witness  (beitt>ol)nert 
+ dat.)  the  first  representation  of  his  tragedy  at  Mannheim.  7.  He 
resolved  to  be  free,  at  whatever  risk  (auf  jebe  ©efafyr  l)in) ; to  abandon 
(=  give  up)  advantages  which  he  could  not  buy  (ei'faufeil)  at  such  a price ; 
to  quit  his stepdame  (ftiefmiitterUd),  adj.)  home,  andgoforth  (fortlbanbcrn), 
though  friendless  and  alone,  to  seek  his  fortune  in  the  great  market 
(3al)umcirft)  of  life.  8.  Having  well  examined  the  place  (Ort),  the  soldier 
reported  his  discovery  to  Marius,  and  urgently  (bringeub)  advised 
(cmvatert  + dat.)  him,  to  make  an  attack  upon  the  fort  from  that  side 
where  he  had  climbed  up,  offering  (fid)  erbicten)  to  lead  (=show)  the  way. 
9.  He  ordered  his  men  to  advance  against  the  wall  with  their  shields  held 
together  in  the  manner  which  the  Romans  named  ‘ testudo  * or  tortoise 
(Sdjilbfrote).  10.  His  mother  was  present  on  (bei)  this  joyous  occasion, 
and  she  produced  (=  showed)  a paper  of  (=  with)  poison,  which,  as  she 
said,  she  meant  to  have  given  her  son  in  his  liquor  (©etrdnf,  acc.)  rather 
than  that  he  should  submit  (himself)  to  personal  disgrace. 


PART  THIRD. 


WORD-FORMATION.  - HISTORICAL  SKETCH. 


LESSON  LI. 

DERIVATION  AND  COMPOSITION. 

307.  i.  New  words  are  formed  in  a language  by  two  more  or  les9 
distinct  processes  : Derivation  and  Composition. 

2.  Derivation  is  of  four  kinds,  viz.:  i.  without  change;  2.  by  inter- 
nal change  ; 3.  by  Suffixes;  4.  by  Prefixes. 

Note.  — All  grammatical  terminations  (inflexions)  are  really  suffixes,  but  these  are 
not  considered  under  the  present  head. 

308.  A.  WITHOUT  CHANGE. 

Verbs  are  derived  from  substantives,  adjectives,  adverbs,  etc.,  by  the 
simple  addition  of  the  endings  of  conjugation,  as:  s2lrbeit,  labour;  ar=* 
beit*en,  to  labour  — @ra§,  grass  ; graven,  to  graze — troefen,  dry;  trocfn=en, 
to  dry  — ndf)er,  near  (compar.) ; ttdljent,  to  approach  — gegen,  against; 
begegn^en,  to  meet. 

Note.  — In  many  of  these  derivatives,  and  in  most  of  those  from  adjectives,  the  vowel 
has  Umlaut,  as:  Spflug ; p flagmen,  plough  — jammer;  Ijammer?n,  hammer — ftctrf,  strong ; 
ftiirfser.,  strengthen  — tot,  dead;  ttitsen,  kill  — offett,  open;  nffn=en,  open  — empor,  up; 
cmpor?en,  excite. 

300.  B.  BY  INTERNAL  CHANGE. 

Derivative  Verbs.  — Verbs  are  derived  from  other  Verbs  : 

(a)  By  change  (generally  Umlaut)  of  the  root  or  Stem  Vowel , forming 
causative  verbs , which  are  always  transitive  and  weak,  as  : fallen,  fall ; 
fallen,  fell  ( cause  to  fall)  — trinfen,  drink;  trdnfen,  make  to  drink 
(drench)  — fifcen,  sit;  fe($en,  set  — liegen,  lie ; legen,  lay  — faljren,  fare, 
proceed ; f iifyren,  lead,  cause  to  proceed. 


§312] 


DERIVATION  BY  SUFFIXES. 


365 

(b)  By  change  of  consonant , with  or  without  vowel-change,  as : ffefjett, 
stand  ; fteften,  cause  to  stand,  set  or  place  upright  — biegen,  bend ; biitfen, 
bow  — Iteigen,  incline;  tltcfett,  nod  (incline  the  head ) — luiufjen,  awake ; 
tnetfctt,  arouse  ( cause  to  awake). 

Note.  — Many  weak  verbs  and  nearly  all  strong  verbs  are  primitive  ; but  derivative 
verbs  are  generally  weak. 

310.  Derivative  Substantives.  — These  are  derived  from  Verbs 
by  internal  vowel-change  without  suffix,  and  are  mostly  masculine,  as  : 
fcinbeit,  bind;  33(inb,  bond,  volume;  33unb,  union  — fiijen,  sit;  0a£, 
stake  (thing  set  or  laid  down),  etc.  — gieljen,  draw;  3ug,  trait,  etc. — 
tretert,  tread;  Sritt,  step. 

Note.  — Observe  that  in  both  the  Verbs  and  Substantives  above  occasional  conso- 
nant changes  also  occur. 

C,  BY  SUFFIXES. 

311.  Verb  Suffixes. 

1.  tell!  forms  derivatives  from  other  verbs,  as  well  as  from  substan- 
tives and  adjectives,  usually  with  Umlaut,  implying  diminution  or  con- 
tempt, as:  ladpen,  laugh;  lad)  eln,  smile  — $unft,  art;  ffitlfbelit,  affect 
(artfully)  — fromm,  pious;  frommcln,  affect  piety. 

2.  sent  from  verbs,  substantives  and  adjectives  (sometimes  with  Um- 
laut), as:  folgeit,  follow;  folg-CVU,  infer — 0d)lcif,  sleep;  feel 

sleepy  — arg,  Bad ; arg=evn,  vex. 

3.  4eren,  mostly  from  foreign  stems,  without  Umlaut,  as:  mctrfdj* 
iercit,  march  — vcgderett,  reign  — fritb=  even,  Study.  Also  from  German 
roots,  by  analogy,  as:  Imdjftaffiierett,  spell. 

312.  Substantive  Suffixes. 

1.  4 (-ft,  -ft),  4),  4)C  (usually  feminine)  from  verbs,  usually  with  vowel- 
change,  as:  beag=eit,  bend;  334(f) 4,  bay  (bight)  — fallen,  drive;  gal)r4, 
drive — trag=en,  wear;  £rad)  t,  costume  — fomnuen,  come;  $muf4, 
coming  (illiifunft,  arrival;  3ufuuft,  future) — fonuett,  can;  $un=ff,  art 
— brcmien,  burn;  33ran=b,  conflagration  — feniteit,  know;  $Ult4)e,  in- 
formation. 

2.,  3.  Mfjen  and  dcilt  form  diminutives,  usually  with  Umlaut, as:  §ait§, 
house;  §au8=(f)en,  little  house,  cot  — man;  SDiduu-Ictll,  manikin. 

Notes.  — 1.  (Engl. -kin),  originally  Low  (North)  German  only,  is  now  more 

common  than  skill,  which  however  is  preferred  after  gutturals,  as:  SRingskilt,  93iicf)ski  it. 

2.  Sometimes  a double  diminutive  suffix,  el  4*  djett,  is  used  after  gutturals,  as : 9Ung* 
ebi^en,  SbiAfystUtyn. 


366 


LESSON  LI. 


[§§312- 


4.  *e  forms  a very  large  number  of  feminine  derivatives  from  verbs, 
often  with  vowel-change ; also,  'usually  with  Umlaut , from  adjectives,  as: 
fttegett,  fly;  gUeg*c,  fly  (insect)  — gcben,  give;  @abe,  gift  — fpved)en, 
speak ; ©prad)=e,  speech,  language  — gut,  good ; ©iibc,  goodness  — trcu, 
faithful ; Xxeiue,  fidelity. 

5.  *ei  (from  Fr.  -ie)  forms  feminine  derivatives,  with  accent  on  the 
suffix: 

(a)  From  verbs  in  as : fd)meid)eln,  flatter ; ©d)meid)el=ci, 

flattery  — gaubern,  enchant ; 3mtber*et. 

(&)  From  substantives,  indicating  state,  occupation,  etc.,  most  fre- 
quently from  those  in  =er,  as:  3tiger,  hunter;  3ager*Ct,  hunting 
— 2)rucfev,  printer;  2)rucfer*et,  printing  (-trade  or  -office). 

Notes.  — 1.  It  sometimes  implies  contempt,  as:  JUttbersCi,  childish  nonsense. 

2.  By  analogy  with  the  formations  from  stems  in  scr,  there  has  arisen  the  double  suffix 
*cret,  added  to  other  stems,  as : ©flatJserci,  slavery  (from  ©flaue). 

6.  *1,  from  verbs  [sometimes  with  vowel-change ),  generally  indicating 
the  instrument , as:  beden,  cover;  2)ec!=el,  lid  — flicgen,  fly;  g(ug*cl, 
wing  — fdjficgen,  lock;  ©d)Iuff*el,  key  — jic^en,  pull;  Biigel,  rein, 
bridle. 

7.  sCfl,  from  verbs,  including  all  infinitives,  as  well  as  others,  e.  g.: 
graben,  dig;  @rab-cit  (masc.),  ditch  — fdjaben,  hurt;  Scbab-en  (masc.), 
injury. 

8.  *er,  often  with  Umlaut,  indicating  the  actor , chiefly  from  verbs,  but 
also  from  substantives,  as : batfcn,  bake  ; iBacf'er,  bak-er  — malen,  paint; 
9ftaber,  paint-er — tauten,  dance;  £fin$=cr,  danc-er — ©arteit,  garden; 
©&rtn*cr,  garden-er  — ©d)af,  sheep;  ©d)iif=cr,  shepherd. 

Note.  — Some  derivatives  from  substantives  insert  It,  as:  33ilb?n*er,  sculptor  (from 
S3ilb)  — ©locfsttser,  bell-ringer  (from  ©lode)  — SRebsttser,  orator  (from  9tebe). 

9.  l§t\i  (Fngl.  -head,  -hood)  forms  feminine  abstracts  from  substan- 
tives and  adjectives,  as  : if,  God-head  — $inb=(jeit,  child-hood  — 

SBlillb^eit,  blindness  — grei^Cit,  freedom. 

10.  A eit  replaces  djeit  after  adjectives  in  =el,  dg,  did),  dittf, 

as : (Sitebfett,  vanity  — SBUterdcit,  bitterness  — 35iUigdeit,  cheapness  — 
— §eimUdpfeit,  secrecy  — 23raud)bar>feit,  usefulness  — ©parfamdeit, 
economy. 

Note.  — Some  derivatives  from  adjectives  insert  stg*  before  sfeit,  especially  from  those 
in  shaft  and  sIoS,  as:  ©iifesiflsfeit,  sweetness  — ©tanbhaftsifpfeit,  steadfastness  — %Xt\X* 
Iofsiflsfeit,  unfaithfulness. 


313] 


DERIVATION  BY  SUFFIXES. 


367 


11.  4lt  (compare  § 89,  2,  Note)  forms  feminine  appellatives  from  mas- 
culine substantives,  usually  with  Umlaut  (always  so  from  monosylla- 
bles), as:  ©vaf,  count;  @rafin,  countess  — greitnb,  friend;  greunMit, 
(female)  friend  — ©cirtner,  gardener ; ®dl*tner4lt,  gardener’s  wife. 

12.  4tltg  forms  masculine  diminutives  (sometimes  with  Umlaut)  from 
verbs,  substantives  and  adjectives,  as:  Iel)l*en,  teach;  £el)r4ing,  appren- 
tice — gfud)t,  flight;  g(ucf)t4ing,  fugitive  — fremb,  strange;  gremMing, 
stranger  — juttg,  young;  3ung4tlig,  youth. 

13.  ^Iti3  (Engl,  -ness)  forms  abstracts  from  verbs ; also  from  a few 
adjectives,  usually  with  Umlaut,  as:  bcgrabeit,  bury;  $Begrab=niS,  funeral 
— Ijinbern,  hinder;  §inber=itt0,  obstacle  — gefangeit,  captive;  ©efdng* 
nt0,  prison  — ftnfter,  dark ; ginfter*iu0,  darkness. 

14.  form  abstracts,  (generally  neuter)  from  verbs,  and  also  frotr 

a few  substantives  and  adjective,  as:  fd)icfen,  send;  ©djicf^fal,  ^ate  — 
raten,  guess ; riddle  — trouble ; fatigue  — triibc, 

sad;  £riib4al,  tribulation. 

15.  (Engl. -ship, -scape)  forms  feminine  abstracts  from  verbs 
and  adjectives,  as:  SBcutber^fdjaft,  wandering  — greunb^djaff,  friend- 
ship — 2anb4(f)aft,  land-scape  — ©etneuufdiaff,  community  — ©tgen* 

peculiarity ; also  some  collectives,  as:  ^Priefter^djuft,  priesthood; 
©ejetC^fc^aft/  society. 

16.  4um  (Engl,  -dom)  forms  (generally  neuter)  abstracts  from  verbs, 
substantives  and  adjectives,  as:  2Bad)§4lU1t,  growth  — ©igendum,  pro- 
perty — 9ieid)4utn  (masc.),  wealth  — $puig4ttm,  royalty  (king-dom). 

17.  *utig  (=  Engl,  -ing  in  verbal  nouns)  forms  a large  number  of 
feminine  abstracts,  chiefly  from  verbs,  as  : 23efel)r=ung,  instruction  — 
QebsUltg,  forgiveness. 

18.  The  suffixes  =CItt),  4g,  4 (f)t,  4ttg  are  only  found  after  stems  which 
no  longer  have  an  independent  existence,  as:  $lb=CJltl,  S)lt(Hnlb  (£ff4g, 
$df4g,  $ab4d)t  (hawk). 

313.  Adjective  Suffixes. 

1.  4iar  (connected  with  bdrcrt,  ‘bear1)  from  verbs  (=  Engl. -able)  and 
substantives,  also  (rarely)  from  adjectives,  as  : cfpbat*,  eat-able  — frud)t* 
Bar,  fruitful  — furd)t4?ar,  frightful  — offeiubar,  evident. 

2.  *=C!t,  =ftit  form  adjectives  denoting  material  or  kind  from  substantives, 
as : golb^Ctt,  golden  — bleberit,  leaden  — ftlbeiMI,  silver — wooden. 

Note.  — ©tfern,  ‘iron,’  from  ©ifett,  is  anomalous. 


368 


LESSON  LL 


[§§  313- 


3-  (connected  with  ’EjaBert,  ‘have’)  forms  adjectives,  denoting  the 
quality  of  the  primitive,  chiefly  from  substantives  (also  from  a few  verbs 
and  adjectives),  as:  fiinb=f)a4,  sinful  — tugenb4}ttft,  virtuous  — UJofyn* 
resident  — bo$4jaft,  malicious  — tt)al)r4)aft,  true. 

Note.  — The  suffix  *fg  is  often  added  to  adjectives  in  as : roaljrljaftsifl  (compare 

also  § 312,  10,  Note,  above). 

4.  id)t  sometimes  replaces  4$  (see  below)  after  names  of  materials,  as 
bonuidjt,  thorny  — ftcin4d)t,  stony;  also  m tor4d)f,  foolish. 

5.  (=  Engl,  -y,  as  in  might-y,  etc.)  forms  a very  numerous  class  of 
adjectives,  usually  with  Umlaut,  from  verbs,  substantives  and  particles, 
and  from  other  adjectives  (including  the  possessive  pronouns,  see 
§119,  c),  as:  nad)gieb4g,  yielding  — giittfMg,  favourable  — ntiid)t4g, 
might-y  — fd)u(b4g,  guilt-y  — giitdfl,  kind  — biStUig,  complete  — I)eut4gr 
of  to-day  — t>or4g,  former. 

Note. — For  ?ig  before  sfeit,  see  § 312,  10,  Note  ; for  sig  after  stjflf t,  see  3,  above. 

6.  4fd)  (=  Engl,  -ish)  forms  adjectives : 

(a)  From  proper  names,  denoting  origin,  as:  lutfyerMfd),  Lutheran 
— t>reu8*ifd),  Prussian. 

(£)  From  substantives,  as:  bieb4fd),  thiev-ish — l)imnt(4fd),  heav- 
enly ; sometimes  also  with  depreciatory  sense,  as  in  English, 
e.  g. : tinb4*d),  child-ish  — tuetb4id),  woman-ish  (compare  filib* 
lid),  child-like  — rocib4id),  woman  ly). 

From  foreign  words  (=  Lat.  -icus  ; Engl,  -ic,  -ical),  as  : fyifitQV* 
histor-ical  — Iog4fdj,  log-ical. 

7*  4et  forms  variative  numerals;  see  § 182,  {c), 

8.  did)  (Engl,  -like,  -ly)  forms  numerous  adjectives  from  verbs  (with 
active  or  passive  sense),  substantives  (usually  with  Umlaut)  and  other 
adjectives  (generally  with  diminutive  meaning,  like  Eng.  -ish),  as:  erfveu* 
m,  delightful  — fd)cib4td),  injurious  — begrcif4td),  intelligible  — gfaub* 
lid),  credible  — fcevad)t4idj,  contemptible  — jftt)l'4itf),  year-ly  — ntiimtdidj, 
man-ly  — ttcitur4id),  natural  — ri)t4id),  redd-ish  — ltilig4td),  long-ish. 

9-  (Engl,  -some)  from  verbs  and  substantives  (also  from  a few 

adjectives),  as : aitfllierLfam,  attentive  — fyeil-fiun,  whole-some  — fltrdjt* 
fant,  timid  — ein*(amf  lone-some. 

D.  BY  PREFIXES. 

314.  Verb  Prefixes. 

The  Verb  Prefixes  coming  under  the  head  of  derivation  are  those 
which  are  always  inseparable,  viz : fee*,  ettL  or  eu tt?f  gC*,  JUifK  M'i 
Their  various  meanings  are  given  below. 


DERIVATION  BY  PREFIXES. 


3 


314] 


1.  fie*  (connected  with  the  prep,  bei)  is  intensive^  and 

(a)  forms  transitive  verbs  from  intransitive  (its  most  frequent  use), 
as:  fallen,  fall;  befallen,  be-fall  — gefyett,  go;  fi:=gef)en,  commit 
(a  crime,  etc.)  — Hagen,  mourn;  fcedlageu,  mourn  for; 

(b)  it  forms  verbs  from  substantives  and  adjectives,  with  the  mean- 
ing  ‘ provide  with,’  ‘make,*  as  : fic=freunbcil,  be-friend  — 

fen,  make  strong,  strengthen. 

2.  Cttts  (cmfi5  before  an  f,  akin  to  Gttt=,  as  in  nitthJOrten)  corresponds 
frequently  to  the  (Latin)  prefixes  dis-,  de-  in  English  words  and  denotes 

(a)  ‘ in  return,’  as  : cm^fangcn,  receive ; cm}hfcl)Icn,  recommend ; 

(b)  ‘contrary,’  ‘against,’  ‘ away  from,’  having  privative  force,  from 
verbs,  substantives  and  adjectives,  as:  cntdmiben,  relieve  — 
cnt=bedcn,  dis-cover  — cnt=gel)cn,  cnMaufen,  get  away,  escape; 

(c)  transition , origin , as : cnt=fd)(afett,  fall  asleep  — eitt=ftefyeit,  arise, 
originate. 

3.  et=*  (Engl,  a-,  as  in  a-rouse,  a-rise,  etc.)  denotes : 

(a)  ‘out  from,’  ‘upwards,’  as:  crdjeben,  raise — erdueden,  a-waken; 

(b)  transition  (compare  Clt above),  as:  ei‘=beben,  begin  to  tremble 
— Cr=bUiI)en,  come  out  in  blossom — cr- fatten,  grow  cold; 

(c)  acquisition  or  attainment  by  the  action  of  the  verb  (a  very  common 
use),  as  : CV'bettelll,  get  by  begging  — erdiften,  get  by  cunning; 

(d)  accomplishment^  as:  cr=fd)icf3CIt,  shoot  (kill  by  shooting)  — 
ei*4rinfcn,  be  drowned. 

4.  gc-  often  has  no  perceptible  force,  as  in : gc-nefeit,  recover  (from  ill- 
ness) — ge^ttiejjcn,  enjoy;  but  commonly  it  is  frequentative  and  intensive, 
as : ge=bieten,  command  — gc=bertfcn,  remember,  mention  — gedoben,  vow. 

5.  mifi*  (Engl,  mis-)  has  negative  force,  sometimes  with  the  notion  of 
falsehood  or  failure,  as:  mi§=ad)ten,  despise  — mijHattcn,  displease  — 
mifpgUicfcn,  fail  — mi^Dcrftcl)cn,  mis-understand. 

6.  tJCr3'  (Engl,  for-  in  for-get,  for-give)  has  the  general  meaning  of 
‘away’  and  often,  like  ent;,  answers  to  a dis-  or  de-  in  English. 

(a)  It  is  intensive , and  expresses  excess , etc.,  as : iJCt=bliil)Clt,  fade 
away  — fccrdomnten,  go  to  ruin  — fcer^agen,  despair. 

(b)  It  denotes  a mistake , etc.,  as : berdufyven,  lead  astray  — Her* 
laufen  (refl.),  lose  one’s  way  — tJCrdcgctt,  mis-lay. 

( c ) It  is  privative  (its  most  frequent  use),  and  denotes  loss,  parting, 
waste,  dissolution,  as:  &ei>gel)en,  pass  away  — fietdrinfeu, 
waste  in  drink  — UCt=ff>ieIen,  gamble  away. 


370 


LESSON  LX. 


[§§314- 


(d)  It  forms  verbs  from  substantives  and  adjectives  denoting  a 
change  or  transition  into  the  state  of  the  primitive,  as : tut* 
ctrmett,  grow  poor  — her=goIbcn,  gild. 

7.  jer*  denotes  separation,  destruction,  ‘to  pieces,*  as:  jet*br edjen, 
break  to  pieces  — jer*gtiebenif  dis-member. 

315.  Substantive  Prefixes. 

1.  @t$*  (=  Engl,  arch-),  as:  @t’$*bifd)Of,  arch-bishop  — @rj=feiltb, 
arch-enemy. 

• @e*  forms  usually  neuter  derivatives : 

(a)  Collectives,  from  substantives,  as:  ©e*btvge,  mountain-range 
— ©cfieber,  feathers  — @c=ftrdnd),  bushes. 

(d)  Associatives  (of  persons),  from  verbs  and  substantives,  as: 
®e*fpiele,  playmate  — ©e*(d)ft>ifter,  brothers  and  sisters  (of  a 
family)  — fellow. 

( c ) Frequentative  or  intensive  abstracts,  also  from  verbs,  as 
©eipvdd),  conversation  — ©C*flufter,  (continued)  whispering  — 
©Cstofe,  uproar. 

Note.  — The  substantives  GMitc!,  ©slctube  contain  this  prefix. 

3.  SJHfK  with  the  same  force  as  in  verbs,  e.g.:  misdeed  — 

SRifcgunft,  envy. 

4.  tin*  is  negative  prefix,  as  in  English,  e.  g. : Uiugtticf,  bad  luck  — 
Utt=rccf)t,  wrong  — Un-finn,  nonsense.  It  also  expresses  something 
monstrous  or  unnatural,  as  : Ulhtpat,  unnatural  or  monstrous  deed  — 
Un  *Uienfd),  inhuman  monster. 

5*  Ur*  (akin  to  c t*,  see  above)  denotes 

(a)  origin , as  in  Ut=teU  (et*teiten),  sentence,  judgment  — Utdcillb 
(crdauben),  furlough,  leave  of  absence ; 

( b ) primitiveness,  as:  Ut=fcid)e  (original  thing),  cause  — Ur-'menid), 
primitive  man  — Ut=tt)alb,  primeval  forest. 

Remark.  — Substantives  with  Verb  Prefixes  (see  §314,  above)  are 
derived  from  verb-stems  having  these  prefixes  (e.  g. : 51b=3lig,  SBe^itg, 
from  ab$iel)en,  bejtefjen),  except  those  with  ge=  (see  2,  above). 

316.  Adjective  Prefixes. 

The  Prefixes  of  Adjectives  are  the  same  as  those  of  substantives,  and 
with  the  same  force,  except  ge*,  which  forms : 


3*8] 


COMPOSITION. 


371 


(а)  Past  Participles,  some  without  corresponding  verbs,  as : gC=ftttet, 
well-behaved  — g^ftiefelt,  booted  ; 

(б)  adjectives  from  verb-stems,  as; : ge=nef)m,  agreeable,  acceptable 
— gC-ttJiB  (from  iviffett,  4 know  *),  certain ; 

(c)  from  other  Adjectives,  as:  gc=red)t,  just  — gMreit,  faithful. 

Note.  — flsleitf)  also  contains  this  prefix. 

317.  Other  Parts  of  Speech. 

Pronouns,  Numerals,  Prepositions,  Conjunctions  and  Interjections  are 
for  the  most  part  either  primitive  or  compound;  for  Derivative  Num- 
erals and  Numeral  Adverbs,  see  §§  182,  183;  for  the  derivation  of  other 
Adverbs,  § 189. 

II.  COMPOSITION. 

318.  1.  A compound  word  is  one  made  up  of  two  or  more  words, 
each  of  which  maintains  its  separate  form  and  meaning. 

2.  In  genuine  compounds,  the  last  component  only  is  inflected ; but 
there  are  also  spurious  compounds,  in  which  one  or  more  of  the  pre- 
ceding components  takes  an  inflectional  ending  (see  § 319,  1,  Notes  2, 
3,  below),  without  liability  to  further  variation. 

Note. — In  a few  words  arbitrarily  written  as  compounds,  both  elements  are  inflected ; 
tee  § 319,  2,  Note,  below. 

3.  Compounds  are  made  with  much  greater  freedom  in  German  than 
in  English.  Words  that  in  English  are  written  separately,  are  often 
written  as  one  word  in  German,  forming  compounds  of  a length  and  com- 
plexity unknown  in  the  English  language,  as : geucrt)erftd)erung$gefettld)aft, 
fire  insurance  company  — £uftrof)renjd)ttunbfild)t,  bronchial  consump- 
tion. 

Note.  — These  long  compounds  are  generally  broken  up  by  one  or  more  hyphens 
as:  j^eueroerficf)eruttg§?©efeUfd)aft,  a capital  letter  usually  following  the  hyphen. 

4.  When  the  last  component  is  common  to  several  successive  com- 
pounds, it  is  expressed  with  the  last  component  word  only,  the  omission 
being  indicated  in  the  other  cases  by  a hyphen,  as:  2fpfeL,  $irjd)=  Itnb 
$3irnbaume,  apple,  cherry  and  pear-trees  — eine  freubeit*  unb  lut^Iofe 
5fufgcibe,  a joyless  and  profitless  task. 

5.  The  Composition  of  Verbs  is  fully  treated  of  in  Less.  XXXVI, 
and  Supp.  Less.  E. ; that  of  Numerals  in  Less.  XXVIII,  and  also 
in  §§  1S2,  183.  The  compound  Prepositions  will  be  found  in  Less. 
XXXVIII,  and  Conjunctions  in  Less.  XL,  and  require  no  special  ex- 
planation. 


372 


LESSON  LI. 


[§§319- 


319.  Composition  of  Substantives. 

The  last  element  is  (with  exceptions  noted  under  5,  below)  a Substan- 
tive,  which  determines  the  gender,  and  is  alone  inflected;  the  first  ele- 
ment generally  having  the  principal  accent.  The  varieties  of  Compound 
Substantives  are: 

1.  Substantive  -f-  Substantive,  the  first  element  being  in  apposition  or 
in  some  case  or  other  relation  (usually  genitive)  to  the  other,  as  below,  as: 
§tmmebreid),  kingdom  of  heaven  ( apposition ) — s#ng=apfel,  eye-ball  — 
£anbe$4)err,  sovereign  — g;renben=feft,  joyous  festival  — $iuber=ftube, 

nursery  ( genitive  elation)  — £intert=faj3,  inkstand  (stand  for  ink)  — Xaxifr 
ftunbc,  dancinglesson  (dative  relation)  — Sftattetufdttger,  rat-catcher  — 
2Beg=tt)eUer,  guide,  finger-post  (accusative  relation)  — Dfbttnrtb,  East  wind 

— ^reuben^tljraue,  tear  of  joy  (origin)  — $Uft4ritt,  kick  (instrument) 

— 2>ad)=fenfter,  window  in  the  roof  (place)  — 2age*tt)erf,  day's  work. 

Notes.  — 1.  Primary  Compounds  are  those  composed  of  stem  -j-  substantives,  either 
with  the  stem-suffix  as : Xagewerf  ; or  without  suffix,  as:  ^anbstnerf,  trade  — $agb* 
IjOftt,  hunting-horn. 

2.  Secondary  Compounds  are  made  up  with  a Genitive  case , Singular  or  Plural ; if  sin- 
gular, the  first  component  takes  ?§  after  strong  masculines  and  neuters,  and  sClt  after  weak 
substantives,  whether  sing,  or  plur. ; thus:  ©ortntagsSsfleib,  sunday-dress  — §reubsett« 
gefdjrei,  cry  of  joy  — SBortersbucf),  dictionary. 

3.  The  suffix  is  also  added  to  feminines  in  st,  sljeit,  shit,  sfdjaf t,  ?ung,  and  the 
foreign  endings  sioit,  tat,  as : ©eburtsgstag,  birthday  — ^reiijeitsMie&e,  love  of  liberty 

— SKafjigfeitsSsoerein,  temperance  society  — ^eltgiottsSsfrieg,  religious  war  — Unioer* 
fxtdt^gebciube,  University  building. 

2.  Qualifying  Adjective  -f-  Substantive,  as  : (Sbebfteitt,  precious  stone, 
jewel  — 3itngfrau,  virgin  — $odHeit,  wedding  (high  time)  — ^otbmoub, 
full-moon. 

Note. — In  a few  spurious  compounds  of  this  kind,  the  adjective  is  declined,  as: 
etn  $of)crspricfter,  high-priest;  ber  ^obepriefter  — bie  £artge*n)eile,  tedium,  ennui;  Gen. 
ber  Sangeutneile. 

3.  Adverb  or  Preposition  -j-  Substantive,  usually  from  compound 
verbs,  but  not  always,  as  : §cr4mtft,  origin  — 2Bol)btf)at,  benefit  — 
gal)I,  number  — 33ei=fpiel,  example  — §iuter4ift,  cunning  — iibetymacfit, 
superiority. 

4.  Verb-stem  + Substantive,  sometimes  with  connecting  suffix 
as:  £ef=e4md),  ©d)reiiH'eber,  ©iitg  bogel. 

5.  Other  Compound  Substantives.  There  is  a special  class  of 
substantive  compounds  of  a character  different  from  those  enumerated 
above,  and  of  various  composition,  consisting  of : 


321] 


COMPOSITION  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 


373 


(a)  A limiting  word  (not  asubst.)  + Substantive,  as  : 33ftnbe=fuf), 
blind-man’s-buff  — $cd)b*opf,  bald-head  — ©rojplttaul,  boaster 

— £ang*bein,  long-legged  person  — 0d)rei=l)al$,  bawler  — $Bicr=* 
ecf,  square. 

( b ) Limiting  word  + Adjective,  as  : ber  ^immer^Cltt,  the  glutton 

— ba§  3ntmer=griin,  the  evergreen. 

Note. — These  compounds  are  masculine  when  referring  to  persons,  otherwise  neuter. 
The  same  rule  holds  good  for  the  compounds  under  ( c ),  below. 

(c)  Verb  + Object,  limiting  word  or  phrase,  as:  her  Scutge* 

the  good-for-nothing  — her  ©pritig4tt§'fetb,  the  romp  — 
fcer  ©toreiufrieb,  the  kill-joy  — ©telkbidpein,  the  rendez- 
vous. 

320.  Composition  of  Adjectives. 

Compound  Adjectives  consist  of  an  Adjective  preceded  by  a limiting 
word,  viz. : 

1.  Adjective  -f-  Adjective,  as  : tauf)=ftlUttm,  deaf-mute  — bunfebblcui, 
dark-blue  — VOt=badig,  red-cheeked. 

2.  Substantive  -j-  Adjective : 

(a)  with  connecting  inflexional  suffix  (compare  § 319,  1,  Note  2, 
above),  as:  ttebe$>fvanf,  love-sick  — gebcmfettst>oU,  pensive  — 
I)offtutng(Mo§,  hopeless; 

(b)  without  suffix,  as : IiebeA)oU,  affectionate  — Ijulb-reidj,  gracious 

— freube4eer,  joyless. 

Notes.  — 1.  The  Adjectives  reilfj,  boW  are  of  such  constant  occurrence  as  to  have 
almost  acquired  the  character  of  suffixes. 

2.  In  some  of  these  compounds,  the  substantive  expresses  comparison , or  has  intensive 
force,  as : freibetneift,  white  as  chalk  — febevleidjt,  light  as  a feather  — felfenfeft,  firm  as 
a rock. 

3.  Verb  -f  Adjective,  as : ttnfpbegierig,  eager  for  knowledge  — merf* 
toitrbig,  remarkable  (noteworthy). 

Note.  — In  Compound  Adjectives  like  bcmfenSsttjert,  * welcome  * (*  thankworthy  ’),  the 
first  element  is  the  infinitive  used  as  a Substantive. 

4.  Adverb  or  Preposition  -f-  Adjective,  as:  f)od)=geboren,  high-born 

— cheap  — uttter=tban,  subject  — iiber^flug,  overwise. 

321.  Composition  of  Adverbs. 

Adverbs  are  compounded  of  various  parts  of  speech : 

1.  With  Nouns  ( mostly  in  the  Genitive ) affixed  to  other  parts  of 
speech,  as:  gall:  gleidpfaUS,  likewise;  jebetufaES,  in  any  case—* 


374 


LESSON  LII. 


t§§  321- 


9ftag(e) : etttiger=mafien,  in  some  degree  — 0eite : ettter4eif$  . . . anbrer* 
feitS,  on  the  one  hand  ...  on  the  other  hand  — £eil : meiften4dl3,  chiefly; 
meine84eil8,  on  my  part  — 2Beg:  gerabe§=ttieg$,  straightway;  feiueS* 
to*0$>bynomeans  — £BeiIe:  einfTtucUeit,  mittter^lucile,  meanwhile,  mean- 
time — 2Bcije:  glucftid)ev*tticife,  fortunately;  freu3=tucifc,  crosswise; 
tl)orid)ter=!t)eife,  foolishly. 

Note.  — The  masc.  and  neuter  genitive-inflection  s§,  from  its  frequent  use  in  adverbial 
genitives,  has  become  an  adverbial  suffix,  and  is  sometimes  attached  to  fem.  substs. , as : 
bie  iftadjt,  adv.  nadjtS,  by  night.  So  also  has  the  suffix  ?toiart§,  as:  ffl.nmelsUiartS, 
heavenward  — norbsfcmrtS,  northward. 

2.  With  Prepositions  (or  original  Adverbs)  prefixed  or  suffixed  to 
other  parts  of  speech,  as:  gu-gteid),  at  the  same  time — gerabe^U,  straight 
on  — auf=tt)firt§,  upward;  berg^auf,  uphill  — iutter4i>eg3,  on  the  way; 
bergmnter,  downhill  — §eut$U=tage,  nowadays  — jafjredaitg,  for  years. 

3.  With  Pronouns  (or  Stems  originally  Pronominal)  compounded 
with  each  other,  as:  h)of)in?  whither?  bciljin,  bortt)in,  thither  — luofjer? 
whence?  baljer,  bortfyilt,  thence,  etc. 

For  Numeral  Adverbs,  see  § 182. 


LESSON  LII. 

HISTORICAL  SKETCH.  - GRIMM’S  LAV/.  - UMLAUT,  etc. 

322.  Relation  between  German  and  English. 

1.  A comparison  of  German  words  and  forms  with  their  English  equi- 
valents will  serve  to  show  that  a very  large  number  )£  both  words  and 
grammatical  forms  are  common  to  both  languages.  Though  rarely  ab- 
solutely identical  in  form,  the  resemblances  are  both  so  close  and  so 
numerous  that  they  cannot  be  the  result  of  mere  borrowing  on  the  part  of 
either  language  from  the  other,  but  must  imply  relationship , or,  in  other 
words,  a descent  from  a common  source , a common  origin . 

English  and  German  are  therefore  Modern  Dialects  of  one 
and  the  same  original  language. 

2.  This  original  language  is  no  longer  extant,  either  as  a spoken  or  as 
a written  language.  There  are,  however,  other  languages  — some  still 
6poken,  some  known  to  us  only  as  written  — which  were  once  also 


323]  RELATION  BETWEEN  ENGLISH  AND  GERMAN.  375 


dialects  of  this  common  ancestor,  or  ©runbfpracfje,  as  German  philolo 
gists  call  it.  This  group  or  sub-family  of  languages  is  called  the  Ger- 
manic or  Teutonic,  the  common  source  or  ©ruubfprcicfje  of  which  was 
itself  a dialect  of  a larger  family , all  of  whose  members  were  dialects  of, 
and  derived  from,  one  common  primitive  source  (Ul*fpV(ltf)e).  This  family 
is  called  the  Indo-Germanic,  Indo-European  or  Aryan  family,  and 
includes  most  European  and  several  Asiatic  languages. 

3.  The  divisions  of  this  great  family,  with  the  chief  representatives, 
ancient  (written)  and  modern  (spoken),  of  each,  are  as  follows,  beginning 
from  the  East : 

(a)  Indic  — ancient : Sanskrit,  etc. ; modern:  Hindustani,  etc. 

(b)  Persic — “ Zend,  etc.;  “ Persian,  etc. 

( c ) Greek  — ancient  and  modern . 

(d)  Italic  — ancient:  Latin,  etc.;  modern:  the  Romance  lan- 
guages (Italian,  French,  Spanish,  etc.). 

(e)  Lithuanic. 

if)  Slavonic  — Russian,  Polish,  Bohemian,  etc. 

(£•)  Germanic  — see  below. 

(k)  Celtic — Irish,  Gaelic,  Welsh,  etc. 

323.  The  Germanic  Languages. 

The  Germanic  or  Teutonic  group  of  languages  may  be  classified  as 
follows : 

1.  Gothic  or  East  Germanic,  once  spoken  by  the  Goths  of  Mcesia, 
on  the  Danube,  represented  only  by  a translation  of  portions  of  the 
Bible,  made  by  Ulfilas,  Bishop  of  the  Goths,  in  the  4th  century,  a.  d. 

2.  Scandinavian  or  North  Germanic  — ancient:  Old  Norse; 
modern:  Icelandic,  Danish  (Norwegian),  Swedish. 

3.  Low  German  or  West  Germanic — ancient:  Frisian,  Low  Saxon, 
Low  Frankish,  Old  English  (Anglo-Saxon),  Middle  English;  modern: 
Dutch,  English. 

Note.  — The  modern  representatives  of  the  other  Low  German  languages  are  mere 
dialects  — known  as  Plattdeutsch  (i.  e.,  Flat  German),  the  present  (High)  German  literary 
language  having  displaced  them. 

4.  High  German  or  South  Germanic,  including  the  (no  longer 
spoken)  Old  and  Middle  High  German,  and  the  GERMAN,  as  spoken 
and  written  at  the  present  day. 

The  following  diagram  will  serve  further  to  illustrate  the  relationships 
of  the  German  language ; 


376 


LESSON  LIL 


*3*3 


. « 1 

b 2 g s 

0030  c 

bfl  ^ ^ fn  B 

2 *3  .2?  ^ 

ffi  S C M 

CtJ  HH 


C*  < 

-g  S 

r * 

£ W 

s O 


2 

o 

H 

& 

w 

h 

u 

> 

►H 


© 


"O' 

£ 


44 

a 

c« 

- u - 

£ 

O 

Ml 


o 

Q 


5 ? 


-'5b 

G 

TJ 

rH 

N 

h-3 

O 

T3 

1 Q 

O 

O 

W 

a 

a 

Z 

w 

& 


rt  o 

-I*' 

5 -a 


. S 

hi 

CO 

0> 

N 

w 

•H 

£ 

m 

>>  5 

CO  >-, 

C 

d 

E 

C/3 

t3 

£ 

0 ft 

C 

< 

•G  <u 

c -5 

rt 

(0 

0 

«; 

C 

£ 

C4 

O 

fc 

« 

C/3 

" s 
< 
Q 


W Q 

•a  * 
^ < 


s < 


S*  « * 


w>  a 


U Ph  u 

►r*  ~ fcfl 


S *3 

£ j? 

O S 


e 2 

o rt 
* 2 


324] 


HISTORY  OF  HIGH  GERMAN. 


377 


324.  History  of  High  German. 

The  High  German  (including  the  Middle  German)  branch  of  the 
Germanic  sub-family  has  passed  through  three  stages,  as  follows : 

1.  Old  High  German,  to  the  12th  century.  Its  literature  is  chiefly 
ecclesiastical  — its  principal  authors  being  monks,  such  as  Otfrid,  the 
Frank,  author  of  a rhyming  harmony  of  the  Gospels,  and  Notker,  of  St. 
Gallen  in  Switzerland.  Each  author  wrote  in  his  own  dialect. 

Note.  — The  chief  characteristic  of  this  Old  High  German,  which  distinguishes  it  from 
the  subsequent  stages,  is  the  comparative  fulness  and  distinctiveness  of  its  grammatical 
forms.  Thus  £ageit,  ©ofjrtctt,  ©aben  (dat.  pi.)  = O.  H.  G.  tag-um,  sun-um,  geb-om  re- 
spectively; and  the  pres,  indie,  of  neman  (nefjmen)  is  as  follows:  nim-u,  nim-is,  nim-it, 
nemam-(es),  nem-at,  nem-ant.  It  also  has  a fifth  case  (the  Instrumental). 

2.  Middle  High  German  (a.  d.  iioo — 1500).  Literature  during  this 
period  passed  from  the  hands  of  the  clergy  into  those  of  the  nobles;  hence  its 
courtly  character.  The  branches  of  poetic  composition  therein  represented 
were  Epic  and  Lyric  Poetry,  the  former  comprising  not  only  the  great 
National  Epics  of  the  * Nibelungenlied’  and  ‘Gudrun,’  but  also  the 
Courtly  or  Art  Epics  of  Chivalry,  such  as  Wolfram  von  Eschenbach’s 
‘Parcival’  and  Gottfried  von  Straszburg’s  ‘Tristan  und  Isolde’;  the 
latter  comprising  the  productions  of  the  ‘ Minnesanger,’  of  whom  the 
greatest  was  Walther  von  der  Vogelweide.  The  Dialect  of  Suabia 
(which  included  Baden,  Wiirtemberg  and  parts  of  Bavaria)  became  the 
leading  literary  language. 

Note.  — Middle  is  distinguished  from  Old  High  German  chiefly  by  the  loss  of  the 
full  vowels  of  inflectional  syllables,  which  were  for  the  most  part  changed  into  C.  Thus 
the  O.  H.  G.  datives  pi.  tag-um,  geb-om  are  in  Mid.  H.  G.  tag-en,  geb-en;  and  the 
pres,  indie,  of  nemen  is:  nim-e,  nim-est,  nim-et,  nem-en,  nem-et,  nem-ent.  It  is 
further  distinguished  from  O.  H.  G.  by  the  spread  of  the  Umlaut  (see  § 326,  below),  which 
in  the  former  is  confined  to  the  vowel  a,  to  the  vowels  o and  u also ; and  from  both 

0.  H.  G.  and  Modem  German  by  the  large  number  of  its  diphthongal  sounds  (ai,  ei,  oi, 

01,  au,  ou,  ou,  eu,  ia,  ie,  io,  iu ; ua,  ue,  lie,  uo),  the  greater  number  of  which  are  unknown 
in  both  the  preceding  and  the  later  stage  of  the  language. 

3.  New  or  Modern  High  German,  from  1500  to  the  present  day, 
forming,  since  before  the  beginning  of  the  16th  century,  the  standard 
literary  language  of  all  German-speaking  people.  Its  basis  is  Doctor 
Martin  Luther’s  translation  of  the  Bible  (1522 — 34),  in  which  he 
adopted  the  ,,$an^eiiprad)e"  or  official  court  language  particularly  of 
the  Duchy  of  Saxony,  as  being,  in  his  own  words,  „llie  grmetne  fcCUffdje 
8£rad)e,  toeldjer  nadjfolgen  alle  gurfan  unb  $onige  in  gang  2)eutfdp 
lanb." 


LESSON  LII. 


[§§  324' 


378 


Noth.  — The  chief  characteristic  which  distinguishes  Modern  (New)  High  German 
from  Middle  High  German  is  the  lengthening  of  all  stem-vowels  before  a single  consonant. 
Thus  fagen,  fprad),  loben,  all  have  the  stem-vowel  long  in  Modern  German,  but  short  in 
Middle  High  German.  To  this  may  be  added  the  use  of  the  letter  \)  to  mark  a preced- 
ing long  vowel,  as  in  neljmett,  M.  H.  G.  nemen  (with  short  e);  the  change  of  f into  frfj  be- 
fore 1,  it,  as : ©djlaf,  Srijttee,  M.  H.  G-  slaf,  sne;  and  that  of  the  long  vowels  i,  u,  into  the 
diphthongs  ei,  nil  respectively,  as:  mein,  bein,  brei,  Sffieib,  2Jtau3,  ^aut,  Iaut, 

M.  H.  G.  min,  din,  dri,  wib,  mus,  hus,  hut,  lut. 

325.  Grimm’s  Law  of  fiauiberjdjtcliuttg. 

1.  The  law  of  the  progression  or  shifting  of  mutes,  Germ, 
UCrfcfjT'buug,  also  called  Grimm’s  Law  after  its  chief  discoverer,  Jakob 
Grimm,  the  illustrious  grammarian,  is  one  of  the  most  striking  features 
of  the  Germanic  languages. 

2.  The  Mutes  are  divided  into  three  classes,  according  to  the  organ 
with  which  they  are  uttered,  viz.:  Linguals  (or  Dentals):  t,  th,  d; 
Labials:  p,  ph  (f),  b;  and  Palatals  (or  Gutturals):  k (c),  ch  (h), 
g.  Each  of  these  classes  contains  a tenuis  (or  surd),  an  aspirate  or 


spirant , and  a media  (or  sonant ),  thus : 

Tenues. 

Aspirates 
or  Spirants. 

Mediae. 

Linguals  : 

t 

th 

d 

Labials: 

P 

ph,  f 

b 

Palatals  : 

k,  c 

kh,  ch  (h) 

g 

3.  In  the  majority  of  the  Germanic  languages — Gothic,  Scandinavian, 
Low  German  (including  therefore  English)  — as  compared  with  the  other 
members  of  the  Indo- Germanic  family  (Greek,  Latin,  etc. ; see  § 322,  3, 
above),  each  of  these  mutes  has  undergone  one  “shifting,”  or  been 
pushed  forward  one  stage  in  its  own  class,  the  tenues  having  been  changed 
into  aspirates  (or  more  strictly  spirants),  the  aspirates  into  mediae,  and 
the  mediae  into  tenues.  In  High  German  alone  they  have  undergone  a 
second  “shifting”  in  the  same  direction. 

Note. — The  accompanying  diagram  will  serve  further  to 
this  process,  showing  how  the  mutes  observe  the  followin; 
from  primitive  Indo-Germanic  through  general  Germanic  ( 

English)  to  High  German,  viz. : Tenuis,  Asp.irate,  Media ; 

Media,  Tenuis;  Media,  Tenuis,  Aspirate. 

3.  Taking  Latin  or  Greek  as  representing  the 
primitive  Indo-Germanic  stage,  and  English  as 
senting  the  second,  or  general  Germanic  stage  (the  first  shifting),  the 
following  scheme  will  show  the  theoretical  working  of  this  law: 


Aspirate 


grimm’s  law  of  SautberfcfiieBung. 


379 


325] 


Linguals.  Labials.  Palatals. 

Latin,  Greek,  etc.:  t,  th,  d p,  ph,  b k,  kh,  g 

= English,  etc. : th,  d,  t ph,  b,  p kh,  g,  k 

= (High)  German:  d,  t,  th  b,  p,  ph  g,  k,  kh 

5.  The  operation  of  the  law  is,  however,  subject  to  the  following 
general  exceptions : 

(a)  p and  k were  changed  in  the  second  shifting,  not  into  aspirates 
proper,  but  into  the  spirants  f and  h (=  d))  respectively,  and 
these  spirants  were  not  subjected  to  any  further  change. 

(b)  The  lingual  aspirate  is  represented  in  High  German  by  3,  §,  ff,  or  jj, 

(c)  The  second  shifting  of  media  to  tenuis  took  place  in  High  Ger- 
man in  the  lingual  series  only,  except  in  one  dialect  (the  Ale- 
mannian). 

(d)  The  aspirate  (or  spirant)  d)  is  never  found  in  Modern  German  at 
the  beginning  of  a word. 

6.  Hence  the  modified  scheme  below  will  represent  approximately  the 
actual  working  of  the  law : 

Linguals.  Labials.  Palatals. 

Latin,  Greek,  etc. : t,  th,  d p,  ph  (f),  b k,  kh  (h),  g 

= English,  etc. : th,  d,  t f,  b,  p h,  g,  k 

= (High)  German:  d,  t,  z,  s,  ss,  sz  f,  b,  f h(d))  g,  k (d)) 

Note.  — Latin  has  c,  f,  and  h for  k,  ph  and  kh  respectively;  and  the  dj  at  the  bottom 
of  the  last  column  does  not  occur  at  the  beginning  of  words ; see  5,  ( d ),  above. 


EXAMPLES  OF  fiautoerfd)tcbung. 

(Note.  — Examples  from  Lat.  unless  otherwise  specified.) 

1 . Linguals  : (a ) t — th  — d ; as : tectum  — thatch  — $adf) ; tenuis  — 
thin  — buntt;  tu— thou  — fcu;  ties— three  — fcret;  frater  — brother 

— 23ntfoer ; ( b ) th  — d — t,  as : tliygater  (Gr.)  — daughter  — £od)ter; 
thyra(Gr.) — door  — £iire;  ther  (Gr.)  — deer  — £ier;  ( c ) d — t — z,  s, 
ss,  sz,  as:  domus  — timber — giminer;  dakr-y  (Gr.)  — tear  — gd^re; 
sedere  — sit  — fifccn;  edere  — eat  — effen. 

2.  Labials:  (a)  p—  f — f,  as:  pugno  — fight  — fed)tcn;  pedem  — 
foot  — $$?u6»  piscis  — f ish  — gifd);  {b)  ph  (Lat.  f) — p — b,  as:  frater 

— brother  — JBniber;  fagus  — beech  — *8ud)e;  (c)  b — p — f,  as  : can- 
nabis — hemp  — £auf. 

3.  Palatals:  ( a ) k (Lat.  c)  — h — dj  (h  if  initial),  as : canis  — hound 
- — §itnb;  octo  — eight  - - ad)t;  noc-tem  — night — 9?ad)t;  ( b ) kh  (Lat.h) 

— g — g,  as : hostis  — guest  — ©aft;  hortus  — garden  — ©arten;  {c) 


380 


LESSON  LII. 


[§326 


g — k (c)  — (f)  (k  if  initial)  as;  gelidus  — Cold  — fait;  genu  — knee 
$rtie;  jugum  — yoke  — Sod);  frango  — break — bredjeu. 

Note.  — A further  class  of  exceptions  is  caused  by  the  fact  that  the  mutes  are  some- 
times protected  from  change  by  an  adjacent  consonant,  as:  wander — tnattiiern;  stone  — 
©tein  ; haste  — §afi ; night  — 5Radf)t ; craft  — Kraft.  There  are  also  other  deviations 
from  the  strict  rule  too  numerous  to  be  mentioned  here. 

326.  Umlaut. 

1.  Umlaut  is  the  modification  of  an  accented  a,  0,  U,  ttU  into  d (e), 
8,  it,  du  respectively,  and  is  caused  by  the  influence  of  an  i or  j in  the 
following  syllable. 

Remarks. — 1.  The  vowels  a,  0,  tl,  with  the  diphthong  au,  are  guttural 
or  “back”  vowels,  and  approach  the  sound  of  the  following  i,  which  is 
a palatal  or  “ front  ” vowel. 

2.  This  i or  j appears  in  Old  High  German,  but  has  disappeared  — • 
with  some  exceptions,  as  under  (d),  (<?),(./),  below — in  Modern  Ger- 
man, and  even  in  Middle  High  German.  The  following  are  a few  exam- 
ples of  the  origin  and  working  of  this  law : 

(a)  In  the  plur.  of  Substantives  of  the  @oI)n  Model  (§  21),  the  ter- 
mination is  in  O.  H.  G.  -i,  as:  ©dfte,  O.  H.  G.  gast-i;  ^rdftc, 
O.  H.  G.  krafti. 

Note.  — Not  all  substantives  with  Umlaut  in  the  plural  have  this  origin  ; a number  of 
them  (e.  g.,  ©ofjlt),  which  originally  belonged  to  declension-forms  without  an  -i,  having 
followed  the  analogy  of  the  others. 

(b)  In  the  plur.  of  the  2)orf  Model  (§  36),  the  ending  *et  is  in 
O.  H.  G.  -ir,  as:  $dlbcr,  O.  H.  G.  kalbir. 

(c)  In  diminutives  in  (orig.  -kin)  and  Atltt  (orig.  -Tin),  asi 

$ndbd)en,  $ndbleht,  from  $nabe. 

(d)  In  fern,  appellatives  in  Tit,  as  ©rdftn,  from  ©raf. 

(e)  In  substs.  in  -nt#,  as  23egrdbiti§,  from  graben. 

(/)  In  adjs.  in  Tg,  as  giitig,  tfydtig,  from  gut, 

(g)  In  the  impf.  subj.  of  strong  verbs,  the  final  =e  is  in  O.  H.  G.  -i, 
as:  gdbe,  O.  H.  G.  gabi. 

3.  Sometimes  the  Umlaut  of  u is  represented  by  e instead  of  d,  as  in 
©ngel  (angel),  from  angil,  Gr.  angelos  ; ©Item,  parents,  from  alt. 

4.  Instances  of  Umlaut  occur  in  English  also,  as  in  mouse,  mice, 
goose,  geese;  old,  elder;  but  they  are  comparatively  rare,  and  the  in 
fluence  of  Umlaut  ceased  in  English  at  a very  early  period.  In  German 
on  the  contrary  it  is  still  an  active  principle. 


APPENDICES, 


A.  Substantives  of  dialer  Model  with  Umlaut  in  Plural. 


(Lesson  V,  § 17.) 


Masculine. 

£afeit,  harbour 

Stage!,  nail 

Slcfer,  field 

Sabert,  shop 

©attel,  saddle 

SBruber,  brother 

Dfen,  stove 

©d&nabel,  beak 

jammer,  hammer 

6d)aben,  damage 

23ogel,  bird 

©djiroager,  brother-in-law 

— 

Feminine . 

Slater,  father 

Stpfet,  apple 

Shutter,  mother 

23oben,  bottom,  loft 

£ammel,  wether 
^artbel,  affair,  quarrel 

dodder,  daughter 

^abett,  thread 

fBtantet,  cloak 

Neuter. 

©arten,  garden 
©rabert,  ditch 

Siabel,  navel 

JUofter,  cloister 

Masculine  Monosyllables  of  §unb  Model  (without  Umlaut) 

(Less.  VII,  § 22,  1.) 

2TaI,  eel 

ilalf,  lime 

Duarj,  quartz 

Star,  eagle 

$orf,  cork 

Du  aft,  tassel 

Strut,  arm 

^raljrt,  crane 

©cf)uft,  mean  fellow 

S3orb,  board,  shelf 

£adf)5,  salmon 

©djuf),  shoe 

SBortt,  well 

JSacE,  lac 

©pat,  spar  (mineral) 

S)ocf)t,  wick 

£aut,  sound 

©taar,  starling 

Sold),  dagger 

£ud)§,  lynx 

©taf)I,  steel 

S)om,  dome,  cathedral 

Sftold),  salamander 

©toff,  material 

2>rucf,  pressure,  print 

SDtonb,  moon 

©uttb,  strait,  sound 

©rab,  degree 

SJtorb,  murder 

Saft,  taffeta 

©urt,  girth 

Drt,  place 

Sag,  day 

Jgag,  hedge 

$art,  park 

Soft,  tact,  bar  (in  music) 

£aH,  sound 

Slfab,  path 

Saif,  talc 

$alnt,  blade  (of  grass),  etc. 

SPfau,  peacock 

Sfyratt,  train-oil 

£au<f>,  breath 

$ol,  pole 

S^rou,  throne 

£orft,  eyry 

$ul§,  pulse 

Sorf,  peat 

4?ort,  refuge 

SSuitft,  point 

Sufd),  flourish  of  trumpets 

$uf,  hoof 
$unb,  dog 

SPunfd!),  punfii 

3oll,  inch 

382 


APPENDICES. 


C.  Feminines  of  ©oljtt  Model. 

(All  with  Umlaut;  Less.  VII,  § 22,  3.) 


SIngft,  anguish 
2lu£flud)t,  evasion 
2l£t,  axe 
83anf,  bench 
33raut,  bride 
S3ruft,  breast 
f$rauft,  fist 
$rud&t,  fruit 
©art§,  goose 
©ruft,  grave 
#cmb,  hand 


£aut,  skin 
Jllitft,  cleft 
itvaft,  strength 
5lu(),  cow 
Jlunft,  art 
£au§,  louse 
Shift,  air 
Shift,  desire 
9Jlacf)t,  power 
sJttagb,  maid-servant 
2Jlau§,  mouse 

Also  those  ending  in  -ni§  and 


Sftadjt,  night 

9fal)t,  seam 

9iot,  need 

Sftufc,  nut 

©au,  sow 

©djltur,  string 

©tabt,  town 

SGBanb,  wall 

SBurft,  sausage 

gunft,  guild 

.gufammeufunft,  meeting 


D.  Irregular  Foreign  Substantives. 

(Less.  VII,  § 22,  6.) 

1.  ©er  ftaplatt,  chaplain,  pi.  £aplane. 

2.  The  following  foreign  substs.  with  accent  on  last  syll.  follow  the  ^uttb  Model:  bet 
^Dlonolog',  soliloquy;  ber  dialog',  dialogue;  also  those  in  -or  accented,  as:  ber 
^juntor',  humour;  ber  9ftctjor/,  major. 

3.  The  following  are  mixed  (DIjr  Model) : ber  SlQiga'tor,  alligator;  ber  ©amott, 
demon;  ber  ilon'ful,  consul ; ba§  ©tereoff op',  stereoscope ; ba§  ©eleffop',  telescope ; also 
those  from  the  Lat.  in  -or  unaccented,  as : ber  ©oftor,  ber  s4!rofeffor. 

4.  The  following  are  weak  or  mixed  (Dfyr  Model):  ber  SlbamanF,  adamant;  ber  ©ia* 
want'  (or  ©ernant),  diamond;  ber  -Dragnet',  magnet. 


£.  Neuter  Monosyllables  of  guitt)  Model. 

(Less.  VII,  § 22,  5.) 


S5eet,  flower-bed 

©ift,  poison 

9J?oo§,  moss 

©d()ilf,  rush 

S3etl,  hatchet 

©Iei§,  rut 

net 

©d^rot,  shot 

53ein,  leg 

£eft,  handle 

Dl,  oil 

©cbtnetn,  pig 

S3ier,  beer 

£ont,2  horn 

$ferb,  horse 

©eil,  rope 

S3led(),  tin-plate 

3odj,  yoke 

$funb,  pound 

©ieb,  sieve 

©let,  lead 

Jtnie,  knee  ' 

$ult,  desk 

©piel,  game 

©oot,1  boat 

ilreuj,  cross 

9te<f)t,  right 

©tiicf,  piece 

©rot,  bread 

Sanb,2  land 

SRelj,  roe-deer 

©au,  cable 

©ittg,2  thing 

CidEjt,2  light 

S^eid^,  empire 

©eil,  share 

©rj,  ore 

£oo§,  lot 

Sftiff,  reef 

2Bet)r,  weir 

geH,  hide 

aKa(a)I,  mole,  mark; 

S'tof},  horse 

28  erf,  work 

t^eft,  festival 

time 

©ctlj,  salt 

SBort,2  word 

^ett,  fat 

measure 

©djetf,  sheep 

3elt,  tent 

%loW  raft 

2Jloor,  moor 

©<f>iff,  ship 

3eug,  stuff 
3iel,  goal 

APPENDICES, 


3»3 


Also  eight  in  -f  t 
4?aar,  hair 
£eer,  army 


year  ipaar,  pair  2ier,  animal 

2JI  eer,  sea  Sftofjr,  reed  2$ or,  gate 

1 Also  with  Umlaut,  2 See  also  App.  G.* 


F.  Weak  Masculines  not  ending  in  -e. 

(Less.  XIV,  § 57,  2.) 


S3ar,  bear' 

83aier,  Bavarian 
S3ulgar',  Bulgarian 
Surfdfj,  lad 
thrift,  Christian 
f$fin!,  finch 
giirfi,  prince 


(See!,  fop 
©efeU,  fellow 
©raf,  count 
4?ageftoIj,  old  bachelor 
§elb,  hero 
$err,  master 
4jirt,  herdsman 


Laffer,  Caffir  IjBrinj,  prince 


2ftenfcf),  man 
2ftoljr,  Moor 
2iarr,  fool 
2ierD,  nerve 
Dc§3,  ox 


©pa§,  sparrow 
©teinmefc,  stone- 
21)  or,  fool  [mason 
Un gar,  Hungarian 
S3orfa§r,  ancestor 


Sommer,  Pomeranian 


G . Substantives  of  Mixed  Declension. 
(Less.  XV,  §§  61-63.) 


(a)  91am e Model  (Masc.). 


ffialfe(tt),  beam 

fi3u<f)ftabe,  letter  of  the  alphabet 
^elf(en),  rock 
t^riebe,  peace 
©ebanfe,  thought 


©laube,  faith 
§aufe,  heap 
2lame,  name 
©ante,  seed 


©djabe,  injury  (pi.  ©#ciben) 
©d)recf(en),  fright 
2ropfe(n),  drop 
2Bille,  will 


Also  one  neut. : ba3  ^erj,  G.  be3  $er$en§. 


(£)  9laipar  Model. 

1.  Masculines: 

SBauer,  peasant  Sorbeer,  laurel  #^antoffeI,  slipper  #©tiefel,  boot 
©eoatter,  godfather  9lad)bar,  neighbour  ©tadjel,  sting  Setter,  cousin 
Hon'ful,  consul 

s.  Neuters : 2luge,  eye  ©nbe,  end 

* Also  after  2ftaler  Model. 


s.  Masculines? 
Sltyn,  ancestor 
t^orft,  forest 
©au,1  district 
£ufar,2  hussar 
s.  Neuters: 


(c)  Dljr  Model. 


9Dt  aft,  mast 
ipfau,1  peacock 
©ctymerj,  pain 
©ee,  lake 
S3ett,  bed 


©porn,  spur 
(also  ©poren) 
©taat,  state 
©trafyl,  beam 
£emb,  shirt 


©traufj,8  ostrich 
ttntertljan,2  subject 
3ierat,  ornament 
3in§,  interest 
Dl;r,  ear 


1 Also  after  £unb  Model.  * Also  after  ffrtabe  Model. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  foreign  substantives  in  App.  D.  8 See  also  App.  G.# 


384 


APPENDICES. 


G*  Double  Plurals  with  different  meanings. 


(Less.  XV,  § 64.) 


ba§  23anb : 

SBdnber,  ribbons 

SSanbe,  ties 

bie  Sanf : 

SSdnEe,  benches 

SBnnfen,  commercial  banks 

ba§  Sing : 

Singe,  things 

Singer,  creatures 

ber  Sorn : 

Some  or  Sdrner,  thorns 

Sorneii,  thorns  (collectively) 

ba§  ©efid&t: 

©efidjter,  faces 

@eficf)tc,  visions 

ba3  §orn : 

Corner,  horns 

§orne,  kinds  of  horn 

ber  Saben: 

Sdben, shops 

Cnben,  shutters 

ba§  Sanb : 

2anbcr,  separate  countries1 

£flrtbe,  provinces  or  districts... 

ba§  £id)t : 

£icf)te,  candles 

£icf)ter,  lights 

ber  3Jlann: 

banner,  men 

Wanncn,  vassals 

ber  21lonb : 

Won  be,  satellites 

Wonben,  months  (poetic) 

ber  Drt : 

Or  ter,  (single)  places* 

Orte,  places  (collectively) 

bie  ©au : 

©due,  sows 

©fluetv,  wild  boars 

ber  ©traufc : 

©traufje  or  6traufcen,  os- 
triches 

tr dufje,  nosegays 

ba§  £u$ : 

STitc^er,  cloths 

SEudje,  kinds  of  cloth 

ba§  SEort : 

SBorter,  single  words 

SEerte,  coherent  words 

ber  3oH : 

3oIIe,  inches 

3d  He,  tolls 

1 For  instance  — bie  Scinber  @uropa§,  the  countries  of  Europe  (individually  consi* 
dered);  but  bie  Seutfujen  £anbe,  the  German  districts  or  provinces;  bie  Hlieberlanbe, 
the  Netherlands.  Poets  use  the  latter  form  also  in  the  sense  of  the  former. 

2 For  instance  — ttx  alien  Drtern  ber  ^rooinj,  in  all  (inhabited)  places  of  the  province; 
but  an  alien  JOrten,  in  all  places  generally,  everywhere. 


ff,  Nouns  ( mostly  abstract ) which  form  their  Plural  by  means  of 
a derivative  or  of  a compound  form  — which  itself 
is  used  both  in  the  Singular  and  Plural. 


(Supp.  Less.  B.,  § 66,  3,  Note.) 


Singular. 
ber  23au,  building 
(ber  33au,  burrow,  etc. 
ba§  23eftreben,  effort 
ber  SSetrug,  deceit,  fraud 
ber  23unb,  alliance 
ber  SanE,  thanks 
ba3  Csrbe,  inheritance 
ber  ^riebe,  treaty  of  peace 
bie  ©etoalt,  force,  violence 
bie  Gunft,  favour 
ber  Summer,  affliction,  trouble 
ba§  Sob,  praise 
ber  Worb,  murder 
ber  9iat,  counsel,  advice 


Plural* 
bie  S3auten 
bie  23aue) 
bie  SBeftrebungeit 
bie  Setriigereiett 
bie  23unbniffe 
bie  Sanffagttngen 
bie  @rb[c|aften 
bie  ftriebenSoertrage 
bie  ©etoalttl;atig!eite» 
bie  ©tmftbejeugungen 
bie  Aiimmerniffe 
bieSobfprii^e 
bie  Worbtfjaten 
bie  9iatfc§lage 


APPENDICES. 


385 


Singular, 

(ber  SR  at,  councillor 
ber  IRaub,  robbery 
ber  ©egett,  blessing 
ber  ©treifc,  quarrel,  dispute 
bcr  Sob,  death,  decease 
ba§  UnglucE,  misfortune 
ber  ICerbrujj,  vexation 
ber  ,3ant,  quarrel 


Plural. 

bie  SRate) 
bie  SRdubereictt 
bic  ©egnungett 
bie  ©treitigleiteit 
bie  Sobe^falle 
bie  UngludSfalTe 
bie  SSerbriepic^feitett 
bie  3an!eveieit 


/.  Exceptions  to  the  Rules  on  Gender. 


(Less.  XVII,  XVIII,  §§  80,  89,  90.) 

80.  1.  (a)  Fern.:  bie  2Rann§pcvfon,  male-person.  Neut:  all  diminutives  in-l$ett 
and  -leilt. 

a.  (a)  Neut.:  ba§  2Bei6,  woman;  ba§  3Renfdj,  wench;  ba§  ^rauenjintmer,  woman, 
and  all  diminutives  in  -dfjett  and  -lettt. 


(b)  Trees,  etc. ; 


ber  2llj  orn,  maple 

ber  2(pfel,  apple 

ba§  @pf>eu,  ivy 

ba§  ©eranium,  geranium 

ber  £afer,  oats 

ber  ,£anf,  hemp 

ber  $lee,  clover 


ber  $of)l,  cabbage 

ber  $oE)(rabi,  Brussels-spouts 

ba§  I?orn,  grain 

ber  £aud),  leek 

ber  Sorbeer,  laurel 

ber  9Rai§,  maize 


ba§  2Roo§,  moss 
ber  SRoggen,  rye 
ber  ©pargel,  asparagus 
ber  ©pinat,  spinach 
ber  Saba!,  tobacco 
ber  SSeijen,  wheat  \ 


Also  Compounds,  as:  ber  ©djroar^borrt,  blackthorn;  ba§  ©eiftblatt,  honey-suckle; 
ba§  SBergifjmemnidjt,  forget-me-not;  ba§  Saufenbfdjon,  daisy;  and  diminutives,  as:  ba§ 
S3eilcf)en,  violet. 


3.  (a)  Metals  — Masc. : ber  Cobalt,  cobalt;  ber  ©taljl,  steel;  ber  Sombadt,  pinch- 
beck; ber  2£*3mut,  bismuth;  herein!,  zinc.  Fem.:  bie  Spiatina,  platina. 

( b ) Countries,  etc.  — Masc. : ber  SpeloportneS,  Peloponnesus;  ber  £aag,  the  Hague; 
also  those  in  -gau,  as:  2largau.  Fem.:  bie  $rim,  Crimea;  bie  Seoante,  the 
Levant ; bie  Ufraiite,  the  Ukraine  ; and  those  in  -ei,  -flU,  -3. 


89.  1.  ( a ) Neut. : ba§  SReffirtg,  brass. 
{b)  Feminines  in  -el  t 


2ld)fel,  shoulder 
2lntpel,  lamp 
Slmjel,  black-bird 
2lngel,  fish-hook 
SSibel,  bible 
23ucfel,  boss  (of  a 
shield) 

Gtymbel,  cymbal 
Mattel,  date 
$eid>fel,  carriage- 
pole 


Siftel,  thistle 
SDroffel,  thrush 
Gidjel,  acorn 
$abel,  fable 
^acfel,  torch 
$effel,  fetter 
§ibel,  spelling-book 
^ormel,  formula 
©abel,  fork 
©eifcel,  scourge 
©onbel,  gondola 


©urge!,  throat 
pummel,  humble- 
bee 

^nfel,  island 
Aansel,  pulpit 
$artoffel,  potato 
$oppel,  leash ; brace 
(of  dogs) 

£ugel,  ball 
$uppel,  cupola 
SRartbel,  almond 


SRattgel,  mangle 
SRiftel,  mistletoe 
SRufdjel,  shell 
Slabel,  needle 
Sleffel,  nettle 
Drgel,  organ 
Rappel,  poplar 
^arabcl,  parable 
Sjkimel,  primrose 
SHafpel,  rasp 
Siegel,  rule 


386 


APPENDICES. 


Shmjel,  wrinkle 
©d)acf)tel,  band-box 
©djaufel,  shovel 
©djaufel,  swing 
©djinbel,  shingle 
©djiiffel,  dish 
In  -cr : 

Slber,  vein 
Sifter,  aster 
Slufter,  oyster 
SBlatter,  blister 
SGutter,  butter 
©eber,  cedar 
2)auer,  duration 
(Sifter,  magpie 
^•afer,  fibre 
$eber,  feather,  pen 
ft-eier,  celebration 


©emtttel,  roll  of  bread 
©icf)  el,  sickle 
©pinbel,  spindle 
©taffel,  step  of  a 
ladder 

©toppel,  stubble 


£afel,  table 
£robbel,  tassel 
trommel,  drum 
$£riiffel,  truffle 
2Bad;tel,  quail 


goiter,  rack 
$alfter,  halter 
hammer,  chamber 
belter,  wine-press 
liefer,  pine 
Klammer,  cramp-iron 
iHapper,  rattle 
Sauer,  lurking-place 
Seber,  liver 
Seier,  lyre 
Seiter,  ladder 


Smarter,  torture 
SJlauer,  wall 
Shutter,  mother 
Scatter,  adder 
Shimmer,  number 
Dper,  opera 
Dtter,  otter 
Shifter,  elm 
©d)euer,  barn 
©effleuber,  sling 
©coulter,  shoulder 


SBaffel,  waffle 
SBinbel,  swaddling- 
cloth 

SBurjel,  root 
3roiebel,  onion 


©teuer,  tax 
£od)ter,  daughter 
Xrauer,  mourning 
S3e§per,  even -tide, 
vespers 

SBimper,  eyelash 
3iffcr,  cipher 
3it§er,  guitar 


Note.  — The  names  of  rivers  ending  in  -er  or -el  are  also  feminine,  e.g. : bie  Dber,  bie 
Kefer,  bie  SJlofel. 


Neuters  in  -cl : 
S3iinbel,  bundle 
SJunEet,  darkness 
©gempel,  example 
In  -cn : 

2Umofen,  alms 
SBecfen,  basin 
©ifert,  iron 

In  -er : 

2lbenteuer,  adven- 
ture 

2Uter,  age 
83auer,  bird-cage 
©iter,  pus 
©uter,  udder 
f^enfter,  window 
$euer,  fire 
t^ieber,  fever 
$uber,  load 
gutter,  fodder 


Slubel,  herd,  flock  ©iegel,  seal 

6d)armu§el,  skirmish  libel,  evil 
©egel,  sail  SBiefel,  weasel 


$apitet,  chapter 
2JlitteI,  means 
Drafel,  oracle 

$iillen,  colt 
Jtiffen,  cushion 


Safen,  sheet  (bed- 
clothes) 

Seljert,  fief 


SBappen,  coat-ot- 
arms 

3eicf>en,  token 


And  all  infinitives  when  used  as  substantives. 


©after,  grate,  rail- 
ing 

©itter,  trellis 
Softer,  cloister 
$upfer,  copper 
Sager,  couch 
Softer,  vice 
Seber,  leather 
Suber,  carrion 
Walter,  a grain  m 
sure 


SJleffer,  knife 
SDheber,  bodice 
SJhifter,  pattern 
Dpfer,  sacrifice 
^3  flafter,  plaster 
^olftcr,  cushion 
^ulper,  powder 
9tegifter,  register, 
index 

Sftuber,  oar 
©djauer,  shower 


©cepter  or  3epter, 
sceptre 
©ilber,  silver 
©teuer,  helm 
Sweater,  theatre 
lifer,  shore 
SBaffer,  water 
SEetter,  weather 
SEuitber,  wonder 
3imnter,  apartment 


Note.  — 2Kiinfter,  c minster,’  occurs  both  as  masculine  — from  its  present  form  — and 
as  neutei — from  its  derivation  from  the  Latin  monasterium. 


(c)  Feminines  : 
2lcf)t,  proscription 
2lrt,  manner,  kind 
$Baf)n,  path 


23artl,  bench 
93ai,  bay 
S3raut,  bride 


Sruttft,  conflagration  93urg,  castle 
S3rut,  brood  expedition 

83ud)t,  bay  $lud}t,  flight 


APPENDICES.  387 


fthtr,  field 

JTraft,  strength 

©<f)am,  shame 

©$at,  deed 

glut,  flood 

JtuE),  cow 

©dbar,  host,  troop 

©btir,  door 

gorrn,  form 

&'ur,  (obsolete),  elec- 

©d)au, show 

©rad)t,  load,  cos- 

gracfyt, freight 

tion 

©dfyeu,  dread 

tume 

grau,  woman 

Saft,  load 

©d)id)t,  layer,  stratum  ©rift,  pasturage 

grift,  time 

Sift,  cunning 

©d)lacf)t,  battle 

UI)r,  watch 

gurcfyt,  fear 

SDlarf,  boundary 

©d)lucbt,  ravine 

2Bad)t,  guard 

guvt,  ford 

HJlarfd),  marsh,  fen 

©d;mad),  disgrace 

SBabl,  choice 

©etfj,  goat 

HJlautf),  excise 

©d)rift,  writing 

SBefjr,  defence 

©id()t,  gout 

SDlilcb,  milk 

©djulb,  guilt,  debt 

SBelt,  world 

©ier,  eagerness 

Sftabt,  seam 

©dEjnntlft,  swelling 

SBudjt,  bulk,  heavy 

©lut,  glow 

91uU,  zero 

©ee,  sea 

weight 

©unft,  favour 

SPein,  torment 

©id)t,  sight 

SBulft,  pad 

^aft,  custody 

SPflidbt,  duty 

©preu,  chaff 

SBut,  rage 

£aft,  haste 

SPoft,  post 

©pur,  trace 

3al)l,  number 

^ulb,  grace 

SPra  d;t,  splendour 

©tatt,  stead,  place 

3eit,  time 

£ut,  guard 

Clual,  torment 

©tint,  brow 

3ier,  ornament 

$agb,  chase  , 

HI  aft,  rest 

©treu,  litter  [sion 

3ucf)t,  discipline 

Jloft,  food 

©aat,  seed 

©ud)t,  longing,  pas- 

3unft,  guild 

Also  those  in 

App.  C. 

Neuters  l 

2la§,  carrion 

©liicf,  luck 

Seib,  suffering 

©df)ilb,  sign-board 

9Imt,  office 

©olb,  gold 

Sieb,  song 

©cf)lof},  lock;  cas- 

S3ab, bath 

©rab,  grave 

Sob,  praise 

tle 

S3anb,  ribbon 

©rad,  grass 

Sod),  hole 

©cfimalj,  grease, 

S3ett,  bed 

©ut,  property,  estate 

Soljn,  wages 

lard 

23ilb,  picture 

§ar§,  resin 

Sot,  plumb-line 

©d)roert,  sword 

S3latt,  leaf 

4?aupt,  head 

SKaljl,  meal,  repast 

©tift,  foundation 

S3lut,  blood 

^aud,  house 

Hftalj,  malt 

©trof),  straw 

S3ud),  book 

4?eil,  prosperity 

Uttar!,  marrow 

©bal,  valley 

S3urtb,  bundle 

£emb,  shirt 

Uttaul,  mouth  (of 

©udE),  cloth 

©ad),  roof 

£erj,  heart 

beasts) 

SSieb,  cattle 

©ittg,  thing 

$eu,  hay 

2Jlef)f,  flour 

S3olf,  nation 

©orf,  village 

§irn,  brain 

Uttenfdf),  wench 

SBadf)3,  wax 

®i,  egg 

4>ol$,  wood 

aftud,  pap,  jam 

SBamrnS,  jacket. 

©id,  ice 

§uf)lt,  fowl 

eft,  nest 

vest 

gad),  compartment 

flalb,  calf 

Dbft,  fruit 

SB  el),  woe 

gafj,  cask 

$inb,  child 

D^r,  ear 

SB  eib,  woman 

gelb,  field 

tfirtit,  chin 

Sped),  pitch 

SBerg,  tow 

gleifd),  flesh 

$leib,  garment 

SPfaitb,  pledge 

SBilb,  game 

©arrt,  yarn 

ilont,  corn 

Slab,  wheel 

SB  obi,  wellbeing 

©elb,  money 

$raut,  herb 

IReid,  twig 

SBort,  word 

©lad,  glass 

Samrn,  lamb 

Sttiejj,  ream 

SBracf,  wreck 

©leid,  groove,  rut 

Saub,  land 

Sttinb,  head  of  cattle 

3elt,  tent 

©lieb,  limb 

Saub,  foliage 

©d)eit,  log  of  wood 

3inn,  tin 

Also  those  in  App.  E. 


t.  («)  ©cr  forming,  February;  fca3  ipetfd)aft,  seal 
( b ) ©cr  2lbenb,  evening ; bad  ©ufcenb,  dozen. 


APPENDICES, 


3^3 


(c)  Masculines : 
SucfjftaBe,  letter  of 
the  alphabet 
f^riebe,  peace 
ffunfe,  spark 
©ebante,  thought 


©laube,  faitb 
£aufe,  heap 
Svante,  name 
©ante,  seed 
©cfjabe,  injury 


SBiGe,  will 
2Iffe,  monkey 
©radje,  dragon 
$al!e,  falcon 
£afe,  hare 


SBroe,  lion 
GtaBe,  raven 
Jtafe,  cheese 


And  names  of  males,  as:  ber  Sote,  messenger;  ber  Jfcnabe,  boy,  etc. 


Neuters:  Sluge,  eye;  ©nbe,  end;  ©r&e,  inheritance. 


(e)  2)cr  ^atijoIU',  Catho 
3.  (b)  Masculines:  ^rrtum, 
(c)  Feminines  in  — nt3  : 
♦Sebriingnig,  distress 
#Sefugnig,  authority 
Setiimmernig,  sorrow 
Seforguig,  apprehension 
SetriiEmig,  affliction 
Seroaubtuig,  conjuncture 
©mpfanguig,  conception 
©rfenntuig,  cognition 


error ; Rectum,  wealth. 

©rlau&nig,  permission 
©rfparnig,  savings 
^auhtig,  putrefaction 
^Jorberuig,  furtherance 
§inftemig,  darkness 
$enntnig,  knowledge 
#©djrcc!tnig,  terror 
£ro<frtig,  drought 
* Also  neuter. 


♦Serbantmnig,  damnation 
Serberbnig,  corruption  (is 
also  used  as  neuter) 
Serfciumnig,  neglect, 
omission 

SKilbnig,  wilderness 


Feminines  in -fal : ©rangfal,  tribulation;  SRufjfal,  trouble;  £rii&fal,  affliction. 
MasculiTte  itt  — fcl ! ©topfel,  stopper,  etc. 

90.  4.  Feminine  compounds  of  3Rut ! 2lnmut,  grace ; S5emut,  humility;  ©rofcmut, 
generosity;  Sangmut,  long-suffering;  ©anftmut,  meekness;  ©dOtnermut,  melancholy; 
SBcfymut,  sorrowfulness. 


/.  Nouns  which  have  a double  Gender. 
(Less.  XVIII,  § 91.) 


ber  Sartb  (pi.  Sanbe),  volumes 

ber  Sunb  (pi.  Siirtbe),  confederacy 

ber  Sauer  (pi.  Sauern),  peasant 

ber  ©E»or  (pi.  ©pre),  chorus 

ber  ©r&e  (pi.  ©rBen),  heir 

bie  ©rfemttnig,  intuition 

ber  ©eifel,  hostage 

bie  ©ift  (Sftitgift),  dowry 

ber  £arj,  Hartz  mountains 

ber  §eibe  (pi.  §eiben),  heathen 

ber  £ut  (pi.  £>iite),  hat 

ber  liefer,  jaw 

ber  ftunbe,  customer 

ber  Setter,  guide 

ber  ^Rangel,  want 

bag  9Rarf,  marrow 

ber  DReffer,  measurer,  surveyor 

ber  Reig,  rice 


bag  Sanb  (pi.  Sanber),  ribbon 

bag  Snub  (pi.  Siinbe),  bundle 

bag  Sauer,  cage 

bag  ©E;or  (pi.  ©f>ore),  choir 

bag  @rbe,  inheritance 

bag  ©rEemttnig,  verdict 

bie  ©eifjel,  scourge 

bag  ©ift,  poison 

bag  §arfi,  resin 

bie  #eibe,  heath 

bie  ^jut,  heed,  guard 

bie  liefer  (pi.  iliefern),  pine-tree 

bie  $unbe,  knowledge,  tidings 

bie  Seiter,  ladder 

bie  fJRangel,  mangle 

bie  2Jiarf  (pi.  'JRarfen),  border-land 

ba§  SReffer,  knife 

ba§  ReiS  (pi.  Reifer),  twig 


APPENDICES. 


3^9 


ber  S<$ilb  (pi  Sd&itbe),  shield 

ba§  Sdjilb  (pi.  Sdjilber),  sign-board 

ber  See  (pi  Seen),  lake 

bie  See,  sea,  ocean 

ber  Sproffe,  offspring 

bie  Sproffe,  step  (in 

a ladder) 

bie  Steuer,  tax,  duty 

ba§  Steuer,  helm 

ber  Stiff,  pencil,  tack 

ba§  Stift,  pious  foundation 

ber  £eif,  part 

ba§  5£eil,  share,  portion 

ber$ljor  (pi  SCfjoren),  fool 

ba<3  2f)or  (pi.  gate 

ber  S3erbienft,  gain 

ba3  SBerbienft,  merit 

K.  Monosyllabic  Adjectives  without  Umlaut. 

(Less.  XXV,  § 125.) 

barfd),  harsh  fyofyl,  hollow 

platt,  flat 

fcbroff,  rugged 

brao,  good  ^olb,  favourable 

plump,  clumsy 

ftarr,  stiff 

bunt,  variegated  fdf)I,  bald 

rafd;,  quick 

ftolg,  proud 

bumpf,  dull  (said  f.arg,  stingy 

rof),  raw 

ftraff,  tight,  stretched 

of  sound)  fnapp,  tight 

ruub, round 

ftumpf,  blunt 

falb,  fallow  lame 

fad;t,  gentle,  low 

toll,  mad 

falfd),  false  Iajj,  tired 

fanft,  soft 

oofl,  full 

flad),  fiat  matt,  wearied 

fatt,  satiated 

mal;r,  true 

fro§,  joyful  morfcf),  rotten 

fd;Iaff,  slack 

ja^m,  tame 

glatt,  smooth  nacft,  naked 

fdjfctnf,  slender 

The  practice  varies  with  bang  or  bange,  afraid ; blafj,  pale ; fromm,  pious ; gefunb. 

sound;  flar,  clear;  nafc,  wet;  5avt,  tender. 

L.  Strong  Verbs  not 

GIVEN  IN  THE  LISTS. 

(Less.  XXXII,  §192.— 

Rare  forms  in  [ ].) 

1.  bingen  (W.),  hire 

— 

gebunger 

2.  ga(b)ren  (W.),  ferment 

gor 

gegoren 

3.  gebdren,1  bear,  bring  forth 

gebar 

geboren 

4.  feifen  (W.),  chide,  scold 

Jiff 

gefiffen 

5.  flieben  (W.),  split,  cleave 

Hob 

geflobett 

6.  fnetpen2  (W.),  pinch 

fnipp 

gefnippen 

7.  pflegen,3  practise 

( Pflog  ) 
( Ipflcxg]  ) 

gepflogert 

8.  jaugen4  (W.),  suck 

fog 

gefogcn 

9.  fc§inben  (W.),  flay 

J [fc^anb]  > 
( [fd;unb]  ) 

gcfd;unbett 

lO.  fdjleifjen  (W.),  fray 

gefdjliffen 

11.  fdjnaitben  (W.),  snort 

fd;nob 

gefcbnoben 

12.  fdjrauben  (W.),  screw 

fdirob 

ge[a;robett 

13.  j d;w  dr  en, 5 fester 

( id; mor  ) 
( [fdjnmr]  ) 

gefdjrooren 

14.  fpleifcen  (W.),  split 

f m 

gefpliffen 

15.  ftecfen8  (W.  N.),  stick,  be  stuck 

ftaf 

[geftoden] 

16.  ftieben  ( W.  N.),  scatter 

ftob 

geftoben 

17.  ftinfen,  stink 

ftanf 

geftunfen 

1 gebierft,  etc.  2 Rarely  strong.  3 Weak  in  other  meanings, 

. 4 fdugft,  fdugt,  cr 

faugft,  faugt.  6 fdjroiert.  8 ftictft,  etc.;  generally  weak. 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION, 


Explanations. — i.  References  are  to  the  §. 

2.  Words  in  Italics  are  not  to  be  translated. 

3.  Words  connected  by  w,  if  followed  by  a note,  are  included  in  that  note;  otherwise 
Buch  connected  words  are  to  be  rendered  by  a single  word  in  German. 

4.  The  gender  is  not  given,  where  it  is  according  to  rule. 


I.  One  may1  say  of  the  metaphysicians 2 what  Scaliger 
said  of  the  natives 3 of  the  Basque 4 Provinces 6 : “lam  told 6 
that  they  understand  eachwother,  but  I do  not  believe  it.” 

1 ‘ can/  2 2ftetapf)t)fifer.  Her  (Singcborene.  4ba§fijd).  5 s#roirin^  /*. 

6ii3>2.  

II.  “A  friend  of  mine,” 1 says  Lord  Erskine,  “suffered 
from2  continual3  sleeplessness.4  Various5  means6  were  tried7 
towsend_himwto^sleep 8 — but  in^vain.9  Atjast  his  physicians 
resorted10  to  an  experiment11  which  succeeded  perfectly.12 
They  dressed 13  him  in  a watchman’s^coat,11  put 15  a lantern 
into  his16  hand,  placed17  him  in  a sentry-box,18  and  — he  was 
asleep 19  in  ten  minutes.” 

1 119, 3 (c).  2nn  + dat.  3 fortrodfjrenb.  4 @ri)(aflcftgfeit.  5 t>evfcf)teben. 
6 Sftittel,  n.  Hevfittfjen.  8Ujn  einguf d) lcif crn.  9m*geben8.  xo  uerfatten  auf 
+ acc.  11  $$erfucf),  m.  12  UoHftdnbig.  13  atqiefjen  + dat.  of  pers.  and 
acc.  of  thing.  14  9Iad)ttt)dd)terfittef,  m.  15  ftecfen.  16  44,  6 (b).  17  fteEeiu 
18  SE3ad)tf)dn$d)en.  19  eingefd)fafetu 


III.  The  great  Goethe  was  not  particularly 1 fond 2 of  music. 
When  a pianist3  once,  at  a Court^concert  in  Weimar,  was 
inwthewmiddle6  of  a very  long  sonata,6  the  poet  suddenly 7 rose8 
up  and,  to  the  horror 9 of  the  assembled10  ladies  and  gentle- 
men, exclaimed 11 : “ If  it  lasts  12  three  minutes  longer,  I shall 
confess 13  everything.” 

xbejonbrr,  adj.  2greitnb.  3 $(atrierfpiefer.  4 §of,  m. ; use  compound 
word.  5 mitten  in.  6 donate,  /.  7 plo^ficf).  8 ftet)eu.  90d)recfeit,  m. 
10  mlauuneln.  xxritfeu.  X2baueru.  13  gefte^en. 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


391 


IV.  In  the  first  piece 1 Theodore  Hook  wrote  for  the  stage,2 
a traveller3  comes  upwto4  the  door  of  an  inn,5  and  says: 
“ Excuse  me,  my  friend,  are  you  the  master  of  this  house  ? ” 
— “ Yes,  sir,”  is 6 the  reply  ; “ my  wife  has-been7  dead  these 8 
three  weeks.” 

1 ©tiicf,  n.  2 SBiifjne.  3 ber  Stofenbe.  4 auf . . 224,  4.  5 ©afifyauS. 

6 lautet.  7 257,  4,  Note.  8 4 for  the  last  three  weeks  ’ ; 46. 


V.  “Ven  you’re  a married  man , Samivel,”  said  old1  Wel- 
ler, “ you’ll  understand  a— good— many— things 2 as 3 you  don’t 
understand  now ; but  vether  it’s  worth-while 4 going^through 6 
so  much  to  learn  so  little,  as  the  charity— boy 6 said  ven  he 
got— to— the— end-of 7 the  alphabet,  is  a matter— o’— taste.8  I 
rayther  think  it  isn’t.9” 

1 a proper  name  preceded  by  an  adj.  takes  the  art.  2 $tele§.  3 4 that,’ 
96,5*  4 ber  9ftiif)e  rnert.  5 burdj'madjeit.  6 SfvmenfdjiUev.  7 fertig  fein 
mit.  8 ©e{d)ntacfsfad)e.  9 ‘ I scarcely  think  (glcutben)  it.* 


VI.  George  Selwyn’s  morbid 1 passion 2 for  public  executions  * 
and  similar4  horrors6  was  notorious.6  He  paid— a^visit— to 
Lord  Holland  while  the  latter  lay  on  his7  deathbed.8  When 
his— lordship 9 was  told10  that  Mr.  Selwyn  had  called,11  he  said  : 
“ Should  he  come  again,  please  bring  him  up.12  If  I am  still 
alive 13 1 shall  be— happy  14  to  see  him.  If  I am  dead  he  will 
be  happy  to  see  me.” 

1 franf^aft.  2 geibenfdjaft.  3 §inridjtung.  4 afynlidj.  5©rduet, 
6allgemetn  befannt.  7 44,  6 (a).  8©terbebett.  9©e.  ©ttabeit.  I0benad)* 
ridjtigen.  11 4 been  there/  12  210,  3,  (< b ).  13  am  Eebett.  X4  fid)  freuen. 


VII.  At1  the  time  when  Napoleon  the  Third  lived  as  an 
exile  2 in  London,  he  was  always  a welcome  guest  at3  Lady 
Blessington’s,  at4  Gore  House.  Very  soon  after  his  return* 


392 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


to  Paris,  while  his  political6  prospects7  were  still  rather* 
doubtful,9  her— ladyship10  paid— a-visit-to 11  that  capital,  and 
met 12  the  Prince  driving 13  in  the  Bois  de  Boulogne.  It  was  an 
embarrassing  14  encounter,15  for  the  future 16  Emperor  of  the 
French  had  shown17  himself  anything— but 18  grateful  for  her 
ladyship’s10  courtesy.19  He  saluted20  her,  however,21  with 
forced  politeness,22  and  asked : “ Countess,23  shall  you  stay 
long  in  Paris?”  — “I  really 24  cannot  say,”  answered  Lady 
Blessington,  with  a bewitching25  smile  ; “ and  you  ? ” 

1 227,  (< b ),  2.  2ber  SBerbcmnte.  3 bet.  4 in.  5 Sftiidfefjr,/.  6politifd). 
7 2lit§fid)t,/.  83iemUcf).  10 4 the  lady.*  11  befurfjen.  12  tref* 

feit  {trans.).  13  auf  ciner  ©pagierfal)rt.  14  uedegeit.  15  3itfantmcntrcffen. 
16  gufiinftig.  17  erroeifcrt.  I8nid)t8roenigerate.  19  ftreunbUdjfcit.  2°griigen. 
“iubcffcn*  22  §oflid)feit.  23  gitdbige  ©raftiu  24nrirnid).  25  be$aubentb. 


VIII.  Talleyrand  was  bored1  for2  his3  autograph4  by  a 
dull6  English  nobleman.6  At— last7  he  sent  him  the  following 
invitation8:  “ Dear  Lord, — Will  you  honour 9 me  with  your 
company10  next  Wednesday  evening,  at  eight  o’clock.  I 
have  invited  a number11  of  exceedingly  clever12  people,  and 
I do  not  like13  to  be  the  only  fool14  among  them.” 

1 $um  Ubevbrug  beftiirmen.  2 urn.  3 ‘ an.’  4 ^Cutograpf)/  *•  5 einfciltig. 
6(5belmaiut.  7enbUd).  8 ©intabung.  9beel)ren,  imper.  IO@egemnavt 
(presence).  11  ^abt,/.  12  geiftreid).  13gerne  mbgen.  I42)ummfopf. 

XI.  At  a dinner-party 1 in  Paris,  a dull 2 and  ugly 8 ba- 
ron4 sat  between  Madame  de  Stael  and  Madame  Re'camier 
(the  acknowleged  belle 6 of  the  day),  and  whispered 6 to  the 
former:  “Am  I not  fortunate  to  be7  sitting  between  beauty 
and  genius8?”  — “Not  so  very  fortunate,”  replied  the  of- 
fended authoress,9  “for  you  possess10  neither  the  one  nor 
the  other ! ” 

1 fitter  (Fr.),  n.  2bumm.  3f)a6Ud).  45Baron'.  5 @d)’ont)eit.  6in3 
Otjr  ffilftern.  7 fid)  befinben.  8 ©erne,  n.  9 @$riftffcUerin.  10  beft^eru 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


393 


X.  When  the  dramatist  Gilbert  was  one  day  descending1 
in  the  greatest  hurry 2 the  steps 3 fronting  4 the  Savage  Club,5 
a stranger,  in  a state  6 of  excitement 7 which  defied8  regular9 
construction,10  addressed  him  thus : “ Excuse  me,  have  you 
seen  a gentleman  with  one  eye  of^the^name^of  11  X. — ? ” 
Gilbert  answered 12  this  question  with  another  : “ Stop  13  a 
moment.  What’s  the  name  of  his  other  eye  ? ” 

1 beruntevfieigen.  2 (Site,  /.  3 £reppe,  sing.  4 t>or.  5 use  the  Engl, 

words.  6,3nftanb,  m.  7 Stufregmig.  8 fpotten  4-  gen.  9 regelrecfjt.  xo  2Bort» 
folge.  “ 91a mens.  12  beantmorten.  13  erfaubcn. 


XI.  When  Charles  Lamb  was  still  a cierk1  in  the  India- 
House,2  he  was  one  day  rebuked3  asjollows  4 by  a superior5 : 
“ I have  remarked,  Mr.  Lamb,  that  you  always  come  to  6 the 
office7  very  late.”  — “ That’s  true,  towbewsure,8”  answered 
Elia ; “ but  you  must  not  forget  that  I always  go  away  very 
early.”  Of^course9  such  an  explanation10  was  more  than 
enough.11 

1 ©djreiber ; 44,  5.  2 use  the  Engl,  words.  3gur  Sftebe  ftelten.  4 fob 
genbeumafeen.  5 ber  5Borgeic£te.  6 auf.  7 ^Bureau,  n.  8 roofjl  (after  the 
verb  ‘ is  ’).  9 natiirlid).  10  (Srflcintng.  11  fjinreicfjenb. 


XII.  I never  in  my  life  committed1  more  than  one  act  of 
folly,9”  said  Rulhiere  one  day  in  the  presence  of  Talleyrand. 
“ But  when  will  it  end3?”  inquired  the  latter. 
lbegef)en,  trans.  2£ovl)eit.  3enben. 


XIII.  While  Sheridan  was  staying1  at  the  country whouse 2 of 
a friend,  he  was  one  morning  asked 3 by  a lady  to  accompany 
her  on  a walk.  The  lady  was  neither  witty  nor  beautiful, 
and  the  author  of  the  4 School  for  Scandal  ’4  was  atwa_loss® 
for  an  excuse,  until  he  luckily6  discovered  and  announced  7 
to  her  that  it  was  raining.  His  disappointed8  persecutress9 
26 


394 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


retired,10  but  shortly11  came  back  to^announce 12  that  the 
weather  had  cleared^up.13  “ Sowit_has,14  madam,15”  said 
Sheridan,  driven16  to  despair17;  “but  it  has  only18  cleared  up 
enough  for  one  — not  yet  for  two.” 

1 ciitf  23efutf)  fein.  2 £anbfyau3.  3 bitten.  4 i&ijterfcfjule.  5 nerlegen  urn. 
6 gtiicf (idbermeife.  7 mitteilen  + dat.  8 in  ifjren  (Srmartnngen  (expecta- 
tions) getcinjd)t;  283,4.  9 $erfo(gerin.  10  fid)  gurucf^en.  11  balb* 

I2mit  ber  ^ad)rid)t.  13 fxcf)  anfflaren.  “allerbingS.  xsgndbige  gran. 
16 299,  X7$Beran)eifhtng;  use  def.  art.  I8!)od)ften$. 


XIV.  Foote,  being  annoyed1  one  day  by  an  itinerant2 
fiddler,3  who  produced4  harsh6  discords6  under  his  window, 
threw  him  down  a coin7  and  bade  him  be^gone,8  as  one 
scraper9  at10  a door  was  quite  sufficient.11 

x belaftigen ; 284,  1,  (a).  2 Ijerumgiefjenb.  3©eigenftietcr.  4 pernor- 

bringen.  5fd)rtU.  69ftif3ton,  m.  7 ©eXbftitdf^  n . 8 fid)  au$  bem  @taube 
madden.  9$ra£er.  10  an.  XIgenng. 


XV.  A certain  nobleman  was  detected1  trying2  to  cheat8 
at4  cards,6  and  turned6  out  of  the  house  with  the  threat7 
that  he  should  be  thrown  out_of  the  window  if  he  came  again. 
He  related  his  misfortune8  to  Talleyrand,  protested9  his  inno- 
cence,19 and  asked 11  him  at  the  same  time12  for13  advice.14 
“ Well,  my  dear  friend,  I advise  you  to  play  in^future 15  only 
onwthewgroundwfloor.16  ” 

xentbeden.  2 “in  the  attempt.”  3betnigen.  4itn.  5 $artenfpiet,  n. 
*lt)eifen.  73)robung.  8 2Jb6gefcf)icf,  n.  9beteuern.  10  Unfdjulb,/.  11  bit* 
ten.  X2jngleid).  13 um.  X49tat,  m.  IS!iinftig.  16  ju  ebener  (Srbe. 


XVI.  A barrister 1 entered  2 the  court 8 one  morning  with  his 
wig4  stuck  quite  on  one  side.  Not  beingwawareB  how  ridic- 
ulous6 he  looked,7  he  was^surprised 8 at9  the  observations 10 
made11  upon^it,12  and  atjength13  he  asked  Curran:  “Do 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


395 


you  see  anything  ridiculous14  in  this  wig,  Mr.  Curran?”  — 
“ Nothing  except  the  head,”  was  the  consolatory  15  answer. 

1 ^boofat'.  2 treteu  in  + acc.  3 ©eridjtSfaaf,  m.  4S£erriicfe,/.  snuffen, 
284,1  (b).  6 (dcf)er(icf).  7au3fd)en.  8 ftrf)  hntnbern.  9 iiber  4-  acc.  10  $8  e* 
merfung.  "290,2  (b).  12  bariiber.  I3enblid).  14 122,  11.  15  troftlid). 


XVII.  After  a duel 1 with  young  O’Connell,  Lord  Alvanley 
gave  a guinea2  to  the  coachman3  who  had  driven  him  to  and 
from  the  scene  of  the  encounter.4  Surprised  at 5 the  largeness 
of  the  sum,6  the  man  said : “ My  lord,7  Iwonlyw/^wyouwto 8 

” Alvanley  interrupted  him  with  the  words : “ My 

friend,  the  guinea  is  for  bringing9  me  back,  not  for  tak- 
ing 10  me.” 

n.  2@uinee/,  f 3 $ut|'d)er ; 45,  Rule  2.  4 “to  the  scene  of 
the  encounter  (@tellbid)ein,  n.)  and  from  there  back.”  5 burd).  6 “large 
sum  (©itmme).”  7 gncibiger  §en\  8 id)  fjabe  ©ie  j a nur  f)irt — . 9 277. 
10  fjinnefymen,  use  the  perf. 


XVIII.  A gentleman,  who  had  beenwworsted 1 in  a dispute 1 
with  Porson,  lost  hiswtemper.3  “ Professor,4  ” said  he,  “ my 
opinion5  of  you  is  most6  contemptible.7”  — “ Sir,”  returned 
the  great  Grecian,8  “ I never  yet  met 9 with  any 10  of  your 
opinions  that  was 11  not  contemptible.” 

1 ben  $iir$ern  jiefyen.  2 disputation.  3 bie  ©ebulb.  4 $err  ^rofeffor. 
5 9fteinung.  6 127,  2.  7 oeradjtfidj.  8 ©riedje.  9 oorfommen  (impers.  + 
dat.  of  pers.).  10  ein  (nom.).  11  plupf.  subj.;  268,  4. 


XIX.  The  English,1  says  Sydney  Smith,  are  a calm,* 
reflecting3  people ; they  are  ready  to  give  time  and  money 
as  soon  as  they  are  convinced 4 of  a thing ; but  they  love 
dates,5  names,  and  certificates.6  Inwthewmidst  of  the  most 
heartrending 7 narratives,8  John  Bull  requires9  the  day10  of 
the  month,  the  year11  of  our  Lord,  the  name  of  the  parish,13 


396 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


and  the  countersign 13  of  three  or  four  respectable 14  house- 
holders.15 As  soon  as  these  affecting16  circumstances 17 
have  been  stated,18  he  can  no  longer  holdwout,19  but20  gives 
way  21  to  his  natural  kindness  — puffs,22  blubbers,23  and  sub- 
scribes. 

1 Chtgfanber.  2 ruljig.  3 iiberfe'genb.  4 itberseu'gen.  5 3af)f,  /. 
6 23egfanbigmtg$fd)ein,  m.  7 Ijerggerreijjenb.  8 (5r$df)lung.  9 oetlangciu 
10  Saturn.  11  3al)re^af)f.  12  $ird)}piel,  n.  13  Uuteridjrift,/.  14  angefcljen. 
15  §au$l)err.  16  riif)renb.  17  Uuiftanb,  m.  18  angeben.  19  c8  ansfyalten. 
20  236,  1,  Rem.  1.  21  freien  2auf  laffcn.  22  fdjttauben.  23  ftf) hidden. 


XX.  A young  poet  once  came  to  Piron  to  read1  him  a 
couple  of  new  sonnets 2 written 3 by  him,  and  ask  him  which 
he  preferred.4  Thewmoment 5 he  had  finished  the  first,  Piron 
said  hastily6:  “I  prefer  the  other/’  and  positively7  refused8 
to  listen  even 9 to  a line  10  ofwit. 

1 Do rlc fen.  2 ©onnett',  n . 3 uerfaffen ; 290,  2 (b).  4 t>orgteI)ert.  5 ©0* 
balb  . . . nur.  6 Zaftig.  7 burd)au§.  8 fief)  meigern.  9 aud)  uur.  10  gate* 


XXI.  Wewitzer,  the  well-known  actor1  and  wag,2  was 
joking3  and  laughing  at4  rehearsal5  one  day,  instead  of 
minding6  his  part.7  Raymond,  the  stage-manager,8  took9 
him  towtask,10  saying : “ Mr.  Wewitzer,  I wish 11  you  would 
pay12  a little  attention.13”  — “ Well, 14  sir,15”  answered 
Wewitzer,  “ so  I am 16 ; I’m  paying  as  little  attention  as 
possible.” 

1 ©dbaufpieler*  22Bi£bofb,  m.  3 fdjer^en*  4auf.  5 $robe,  use  def.  art. 
6 pciffen  + entf,  with  acc. ; 224,  2,  (, b ).  7 9totte.  8 Sftegiffeur.  9 ftetten. 

10  gur  9iebe.  11  mottle.  12  geben.  13  ld)t.  14  9?un.  15  §>err  SKegiffeur. 

I6ba§  tfjue  id)  fa  aud). 


XXII.  The  younger  Dumas  once  perpetrated1  a cruel2 
joke3  at^the^expense 4 of  the  Manzanares,5  the  rivulet6  that 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


397 


runs^through 7 Madrid  and  is  called  a river  by  the  grandilo- 
quent8 inhabitants  of  this  city.  When  the  famous  dramatist9 
was 10  one  day  present 10  at  a bullfight,11  either  the  heat,  or 
some 12  revolting 13  incident 14  in  the  show,15  overcame 16  him 
towsuchwanwextent 17  that  he  fainted.18  On19  somebody  bring- 
ing him  a glass  of  water,  as  he  was  recovering,20  Dumas 
declined21  it,  saying22  in23  a faint24  voice:  “Go  and  pour 
it  into  the  Manzanares ; the  river  needs 26  it  much  more 
than  I!” 

1 madjen.  2 bitter.  3 2Bi£.  4 auf  Soften.  s masc.  6 SBadj.  7 burdj* 
Iatt'fen.  8 gro(3fprcd)erifd).  9 2)rama'tifer.  IO  behuofyneii  + dat.  11  ©tier* 
gefedjt.  12 157.  13  emporenb.  14  forfait,  m.  15  ©d)aujpicl,  n.  16  iiber* 
nml'tigeit.  17  bermofgen.  18  ol)nmdd)tig  inerben.  19  277,  Rem.  6.  20  fid) 
erfjolcn.  2XabIeI)nen.  22  284, 1 (a).  23mit.  24fd)road).  25  notig  fyaben  + acc. 


XXIII.  Frank  Talfourd,  who  rejoiced^in1  a stature2  of  six 
feet  and  several  inches,  was  playfully 3 challenged 4 at  the 
Savage  Club  one  evening  to  raise  his  foot  as_highwas5  the 
chandelier6  that  hung  in  the  middle  of  the  room.  Lifting7 
his  foot  withwratherwtoowmuchwvigour,8  he  knocked  down 
one  of  the  glasswglobes,9  which  fell  to  the  ground  and 
waswsmashed 10  to  atoms.11  Frank  rang  the  bell  instantly, 
and  asked  the  responding12  waiter  for13  the  amount14  of 
his  bill.15  “ Pray,  sir,  what  have  you  had?” — “Oh!”  said 
Talfourd,  pointing16  up  to17  the  chandelier,  “only  a glass  of 
that.” 

1 fid)  erfreuen  + gen.  2 §>ol)e.  3 im  ©djerge.  4 auffoibern.  5 bi§  git. 
6 $ronteud)ter.  7 in  bie  Jpolje  roerfeu,  284,  1 (b).  8 etiuaS  gu  fraftig.  9@laS- 
fuppel,  /.  10  gerfdjetleit,  neut.  11  “into  a thousand  pieces.”  12  erfdjeiitett. 
13  nadj.  14  23etrag,  m . 15  SKedjmtng.  16  fyirgeigen,  284,  1 (a).  17  auf. 


XXIV.  Douglas  Jerrold  once  said  to  a young  gentleman 
who  burned  with 1 an  ardent^desire 2 to  see  himself  inwprint3: 


39$ 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


" Be  advised 4 by  me,  young  man ; don’t  take  down 5 the 
shutters  until  you  have  something  in  the  window  worthwlook- 
ing^at.6  ” 

1 t>or  + dat.  2 SBegterbe.  3 gebrucf t*  4 use  taffen,  with  reft,  form, 
xi4,  (3).  sab.  6 feljenStnert,  122.  11. 


XXV.  Alexandre  Dumas  had  a well-won1  reputation  in 
Paris 2 society  as  a teller— of— anecdotes.  At  a large  even- 
ing-party, he  was 3 rather4  annoyed 3 at  the  persistent 5 efforts 
of  his  hostess  to— induce— him 6 to  exhibit7  his  power8  in  this 
accomplishment.9  At  last,  tired  of  refusing,10  he  said  : 44  Every 
one  has  his  trade,11  madam.12  The  gentleman  who  entered13 
the  room  just  before  me  is  a distinguished 14  artillery^officer. 
Let  him  bring  a cannon  here  and  fire 15  it ; then  I will  tell 
one  of  my  little  stories.” 

x ftoljf&erbient.  2 ^arifer,  122,  9.  3 ftd)  argent  + iiber  with  acc.  4 nicf)t 
toeing.  5 unablaffig.  6 if)it  bal)tn  brtngeit.  7 geigen*  8 gertigfeit. 
9 gad),  n.  10  subst.  inf.  XI  £anbtoerf.  12  gnabige  grau.  13  eintreten  in. 
14  anSgegeidjnet.  15  abfeuern. 


XXVI.  Some  brainless1  acquaintance 2 of  Rivarol’s  was 
boasting 3 of 4 his  having 6 mastered 6 four  languages.  44 1 con- 
gratulate7 you,”  said  Rivarol;  44  you’ll  have  inwfuture8  four 
words  for  one  idea.9  ” 

x gebanfenarm.  2 ber  23efannte,  122,  1,  2.  3 brafjten.  * 277,  Rem.  1. 
5 bag  clause.  6 fid)  &olIig  aneigtten.  7 gratulieren  + dat.  8 fiinftig. 
9 ©ebanfe. 


XXVII.  On  the  day  after  the  first  representation1  of 
4L’Ami  des  Femmes,2’  a comedy3  by  Alexandre  Dumas 
(the  second),  the  author’s  father  sent  him  a letter,  congratu- 
lating4 him  on6  the  success6  of  his  piece,7  and  volunteering8 
his  own  collaboration 9 on 10  some  future 11  one.13  The  letter 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


399 


closed  with  a somewhat  grandiloquent  phrase13:  “If  a gua- 
rantee 14  is  desired15  for  my  ability,16  I beg  to  refer17  you  to17 
4 Monte  Christo  1 and  4 The  Three  Musketeers.’ 18  ” The  son 
replied : 44  Even  if  I did  not  know  the  great  works  you 19 
mention,20  I should  gladly21  accept  your  offer,22  onwaccount 
of  the  high  opinion23  my  father  evidently 24  entertains25 
of  you.” 

1 $uffitf)ntng.  2 ber  grctuenfreunb.  3 n.  4 “in  which  he  con- 

gratulated.” 5 jit.  6 (Srfofg,  m.  7 ©tiicf,  n.  8 ftd)  erbieteit.  9 “to  colla- 
borate (mitarbeiten).”  10  an.  ,x  fpciter.  12 122,  4,  Note.  X3*pijrafe.  X493iivg* 
Is  ttcrlangctt.  16  gci!)tgfeit.  17  fyimueifen  nuf  + acc.  18  SJhtsfctier. 
19  96,  7.  Obs.  ^ennciljnen.  21  mit  greuben.  22  Sluerbieten,  n.  23  SDWmtng, 
24  augenfdjeinlid).  25  “has.” 


XXVIII.  Curran  happenedwtowtell 1 Sir2  Thomas  Turton 
that  he  could  never  speak  in^public8  a quarterwofwanwhour 
without  moistening4  his  lips.6  Sir  Thomas  declared  that  he 
had  spoken  for  five  hours  in  the  HousewofwCommons 6 on7 
the  Nabob  of  Oude  without  feeling8  the  least9  thirst.  44 That 
is  very  remarkable  indeed,10  ” observed 11  Curran,  44  for  every- 
body12 agrees13  that  it14  was  the  driest15  speech  of  the 
session.16  ” 

1 eqdljfte  gelegenttidj.  2 bent  ©ir.  3 bffentttd).  4 anfeitcfjten;  224,  2,  (3). 
5 Etybe,  /•  6 UuterljaitS.  7 iiber  + acc..  8 Derfpiiven.  9 gerittg.  10  ja 
(immediately  after  the  verb).  11  bemerlen.  12  2lUe  (pi. ).  13  barttt  iiber- 
cinftimmen.  X4  ba§.  15  tvotfen.  16  ©effion. 


XXIX.  A gentleman  praising1  the  personal2  charms3  of  a 
verywplain4  lady  in  Foote’s  presence,  the  latter6  said  : 44  Why 
don’t  you  lay6  claim  7 to  8 such  a beauty  ? ” — 44  What  right 
have  I to9  do  so?”  was10  the  counter- question.11  44  Every 
right,”  replied  Foote,  44  by 12  the  universal13  lawwofwnations  14 
— as  the  first  discoverer.16  ” 

1 284,  1 (a).  2 perfonUd).  3 Sietg,  m.  4 “anything  but  (241,  19,  Note) 


400 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


beautiful”  *134.  6ntad)ett.  7 8aitf  + acc.  9 bap.  xofau* 

tete.  11  ©egettfrage.  12  nad).  13  allgemeitt.  14  SSolferredjt.  15  ©ntbecfer. 


XXX.  One  day  the  poet  and  banker1  Rogers  took2 
Thomas  Moore  and  Sydney  Smith  home  in  his  carriage  from 
a breakfast,  and  insisted3  on  showing  them  bywthewway4 
Dryden’s  house  in  some  obscure 5 street.  It  was  very  wet 
weather;  the  house  looked6  very  much  like6  other  old  houses, 
and,  having 7 thin  shoes  on,  they  both  strongly 8 remonstrated9; 
but  inwvain.  Rogers  gotwout 10  himself,11  expecting12  them 13 
to  do  likewise14;  but  Sydney  Smith  leaned15  laughing  out  of 
the  window,  and  exclaimed  : “ Oh,16  now  you  see  why  Rogers 
doesn’t  mind17  getting18  out:  he  has  goloshes19  on.  But,  my 
dear  Rogers,  lend  each  of  us  a golosh ; we  will  then  each 
stand  upon  one  leg  and  admire  the  house  as  long  as  you 
please.20  ” 

1 >Bampticr  (pron.  as  in  French).  2 bringett.  3 befleljen  auf  4-acc.,  277. 
4 uittcnrcgS.  5 obfcur.  6 ausfefyett  hue.  7 284,  1 (£>).  8 ettergifd).  9 pro* 
teftieren.  10  au$fteigen.  “ 42,  3,  Rem.  12  “ and  expected.”  13  275.  I4ba§ 
©leidje.  IS  Icfjnte.  16  01)0.  17  fid)  fdjeuett  Dor  + dat.  18  277,  Rem.  3. 

19  ©afofdje,  /.  20  gefattett,  impers.,  + dat. 


XXXI.  “ When  I was  going  from  my  house  at  Enfield  to 
the  India  House  one  morning,”  says  Charles  Lamb,  “ I met 
Coleridge  on  his  way  to  pay  me  a visit.  He  was  brimful 1 
of  some2  new  idea,  and  — inwspitewof3  my  telling  him  that 
my  time  was  precious 4 — he  drew  me  into  the  door  of  an 
unoccupied 5 garden  by  the  roadside,6  and 7 there  — shel- 
tered8 by9  an  evergreen  13  hedge  11  from  observation12  — he 
rook13  me  by14  the  button^ofwmywcoat,16  closed16  his17 
eyes,  and  commenced  an  enthusiastic 18  discourse,19  waving20 
at_the_samewtime 21  his  right  hand  gently,22  as 23  the  musical24 
words  flowed  in  an  unbroken 25  stream26  from  his27  lips.  I lis- 
tened 28  entranced 2J ; but  the  striking 30  of  a church^clock  re- 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


401 


called 31  me  to  a sense  of  my  duty.32  I saw  it  was  of  no  use  to 
attempt  to  break  away53;  so34  I tookwadvantage_of 35  his  ab- 
sorption36 in  his  subject,37  quietly 38  cut  off  the  button  from  my 
coat  with  my  pen-knife  39  and  decamped.40  As  I was  passing 41 
the  same  garden  five  hours  afterwards  on  my  waywhome,42  I 
heard  Coleridge’s  voice,  looked^in,43  and  — there  he  stood, 
with  closed  eyes,  the  button  44  in  his  fingers,  gracefully  waving 
his  right  hand,  just  as  when  I had  left45  him.  He  had  never46 
missed47  me.” 

1 iiberbotl'  Don.  2 irgenb  ein.  3 tro^bem  bag.  4 foftbar.  8 linbenn^t. 
6 £anbftrage.  7 Insert  verb  and  object  here.  8fcf)itf3en,  291,  5;  299. 
9 burdb  10  immergriin.  11  §ecfe.  12  SBeobadjtung.  13  faffett.  14  228  (b). 
15  9iocffnobf.  16  fdjliegcn,  123.  17  44,  6 {a).  18  begeiftcrt.  19  Stebe. 

20l)in  unb  Ijev  betnegen,  131,^., Rem.  21  loobei.  22  anmutig  (‘gracefully’). 
23  tmifjrenb.  24  rooljltonenb.  25  miaufljaU'fam.  26  ©from.  27  44,  6 (b). 
28  gubbren.  29  entgiicf t*  30  @d)fagen,  inf.  subst.  31  erinncrn  ait  + acc. 
32  /.  33  “ I saw  (erfemten)  the  uselessness  (9frtf3fofigfcit)  of  an 

attempt  to  breakaway  (fief)  lo^reigeit) 34be$f)alb.  35  benuf$ctl  (trans.). 
36  “it  that  he  was  absorbed  (Dottig  Derfunfen  in  + acc.).”  37  (55egenftanb, 
m.  38ruf)ig.  39  gebenneffer,  n.  40  9teigau§  liefymeit.  41  oorbeifommeit  an 
+ dat.  ^einiroeg.  43 fjineingitcfen.  ^255,  2.  45  oerfaffen.  46 garnish 
47  toermifjem 


Sir  Thomas  More. 

XXXII.  Erasmus  describes1  this  great  man  thus3:  — 
“More  seems  to  be  made3  and  born  for  Friendship4 ; of  this 
virtue  he  is  a sincere 5 follower6  and  very  strict  observer.7 
He  is  not  afraid 8 to  be  accused9  of10  having  many  friends, 
which,11  according^to  Hesiod,  is  said 12  to  be  no  great 
praise.13  Every _one  may 14  become  More’s  friend  ; he  is  not 
slow15  in  choosing,16  he  is  kind 17  in  cherishing,13  and  con- 
stant19 in  keeping20  them.21  If  by^accident 22  he  becomes 
the  friend  of  one 23  whose  vices 24  he  cannot  correct,25  he 
slackens26  the  reins27  of  friendship  towards28  him,  divert- 
ing29 it  rather30  by wlittle^andwlittle,31  than  entirely32  dissol- 


402 


EXERCISES  IN  COMPOSITION. 


ving 38  it  Those 34  persons  whom  he  finds 35  to  be  sincere 3i 
and  consonant37  to  his  own38  virtuous39  disposition,40  he  is  so 
charmed41  with,42  that  he  appears  to  place43  his  chief44 
worldly46  pleasure  in  their  conversation 46  and  company. 
And  although  More  is  negligent47  in48  his  own  temporal49 
concerns,60  yet61  nowone  is  more  assiduous62  in  assisting63 
the  suits  54  of  his  friends  than  he.  What  shall  I say  more  ? If 
any^person  iswdesirous  65  to  have  a perfect 66  model^ofjriend- 
ship,  no  one  can  afford 68  him  a better  than  More.  In  his 
conversation 69  he  shows  so  much  affability60  and  sweet- 
nesswofwmanner,61  that  nowmancanbe  of^so^austere^a^dis- 
position,62  butwthat63  More’s  conversation  must64  make66 
him  cheerful65;  and  no  matter66  so  unpleasing,67  but  that 
with  his  wit68  he  can  takewaway69  from  it  allwdisgust.70 ” 

1 befcftreiben.  2 folgenbermagen.  sfcf)affen,  186;  299.  4 44, 1 (£).  5 auf* 

ridjtig  ( adv .).  6 “ to  be  a follower  of”  = nad)folgeit  + dat.  7 “ and  very 

strictly  observes  (beobadlten)  it.”  8 277;  291,  11.  9 “of  the  reproach 

(SBorttiurf)  of  having.”  10  277,  Rem,  1.  ”96,  5.  12  200,  5 (c).  I39iut)m, 

m . 14 “can.”  15  langfatn.  16  S£3al)ten,  270;  use  def.  art.  17  freunMicf). 
18 pffegerr.  19  unerf^iitterlid).  20 feftfjatten.  21  “of  his  friends.”  22 
fdUig,  239,  Rem.  2.  23 “a  man  (Siftenfd)).”  24  £after,  n.  25  oerbeffcnt. 
26locfcvn.  27  23anb;  64.  28  mit.  29ablenfen;  284,  1 (a).  30  liebcr. 

31  atlmatig.  32  gan^.  33  tofeit.  34  3Serfinben.  36  aufridjtig.  37  ent^ 

jpredjenb  + dat.  38  eigen.  39  tugenbtjaft.  40@imte§art.  4Ibegaubern.  42  Use 

as  prep,  before  “those  persons.”  43  (Men  in  + acc.  ““greatest.” 
45  toettlid).  46  Untedjaltnng.  47  gleicf)gi(tig.  48  gegen.  49  toeltlid).  50  2ln* 
getegenfyeit.  51  bod).  52  ftrebfam.  53  “in  the  support  (Unterftii^nng)  of.” 
54$ngelegenl)eit.  55  tt>iinfd)en.  56  ooUfommen.  57  3beal',  n.;  use  compound 
word.  58  liefcrn.  59  Umgang,  m.  60  £eut]eligteit.  61  SHebenSroiirbigfeit. 
62  fo  fjerbe  geftnnt,  63  bag  nid)t.  64fottte.  6S  anffyeitern.  66  ©egenftanb, 
m.  67  rotbrig.  68  m . 69  entfernen  non.  70  2lEe$  SBibertoartige* 


VOCABULARY. 


ABBREVIATIONS, 


I.  German: 


9lnm.  = Slnnterfung,  note. 

21.  2.=  SllteS  2eftament,  Old  Testament, 
o.  a.  D.  = am  angefiibrten  Drte,  in  the 
place  referred  to. 

bgl.,  bergl.  = bergleicben,  the  like, 
b.  = any  case  of  the  definite  article, 
b.  b-  = ba3  fjeijjt,  ; 
b.  i.  =b  ba3  ift,  > ' 
b.  $.=  biefe§  ^atjreS,  of  this  year, 
b.  9tt.  = biefeg  2Jtonat§,  of  this  month. 

2r.  = SDoftor,  Doctor. 

©to.,  ©tor.  = ©uer,  ©ure,  ©urer  (in  titles), 
fl.  = ©ulben,  florin. 


that  is. 


$r.  = ^rau,  Mrs. 

^r.=  ^reiljerr,  Baron. 

$rl.  = ^rciulein,  Miss. 
geb.=  geboren,  born, 
geft.  = gefiorben,  died. 

©r.=  ©Jrofcben  (a  coin), 
b.,  ^etl.  = ^eilig,  holy,  saint. 
£r.,  £rn.  = £err,  $errn,  Mr. 
i.  S*  = itn  Sabre,  in  the  year, 
flap.  = Jtapitel,  chapter. 

Jtr.  = Jtveujer  (a  coin). 

I.=  lie§,  read. 

9J1.,  M.  = 9)larf  (money). 
SKffr.  = -Dtanuflript,  manuscript. 
2ftaj.  = SOiajeftat,  Majesty. 


91./  91.  91.  = 9tame,  name. 

rt.  ©br.  = nacb  ©brifto,  after  Christ. 

91.  ©.  = 9ta<f>fcbrift,  postscript. 

91.  2.  =.  9leue§  2eftament,  New  Testa- 
ment. 

$Pf.,  ipfb.  = ipfurtb,  pound. 

= pfennig,  penny, 
pp.  = imb  fo  toeiter,  and  so  forth. 

©e.  ©r.  = ©eine,  ©einer,  his  (in  titles). 
©.  = ©eite,  page. 

©t.,  ©ft.==  ©emit/  Saint. 
f„  =•  fiebe,  see. 
f.  o.  = flebe  oben,  see  above, 
f . u.  = fiebe  unten,  ) 

f.  to.  u.  = ftebe  toeiter  unten,  ) see  e ow‘ 
2.,  2b-/  2bl.=  2eil,  2beil,  part. 

2b  lr.  = 2baler  (money), 
u.  a.  m.=  unb  anbere  tnebr, 
u.  bgl.  m.=  unb  bergleicben  mebr, 
u.  f.  f.  = unb  fo  fort, 
u.  f.  to.  = unb  fo  toeiter, 

S3.  = S3er§,  verse. 

o.  ©br.  = nor  ©brifto,  before  Christ, 
nergl.,  ngl.  = oergleu$e,  compare. 

n.  o.=  non  oben,  from  the  top. 

o.  u.  = non  unten,  from  the  bottom, 
j.  S3.  = junt  S3eifpiel,  for  example. 


et 

cas- 
ter a. 


II.  Latin  (in  addition  to  others  which  are  used  in  English  also) : 

A.  C A nno  Christi , in  the  year  of  Our  Lord  (Christ), 
a.  c.  = anni  currentis , of  the  current  year. 

S.  T.  = Salvo  Tituio,  without  prejudice  to  the  title  (used  in  addresses  where  the  proper 
title  of  die  person  addressed  is  uncertain). 


VOCABULARY; 


GERMAN  — ENGLISH. 

Explanations.  — i.  The  numerals  refer  to  the  §. 

2.  All  verbs  are  weak  and  regular,  unless  referred  to  a § ; the  conjugation  of  others  will 
be  found  under  the  § indicated. 

3.  A — indicates  that  the  word  in  question  is  to  be  supplied;  under  masc.  and  neuter 
substantives,  the  terminations  of  the  gen.  sing,  and  nom.  plur.  are  given ; thus:  2Bagen 
(-§;  — ) means  that  the  gen.  sing,  of  2Bagen  is  SBagenS,  and  the  nom.  plur.  the  same 
as  the  nom.  sing.  The  sign  indicates  Umlaut  in  the  pi.,  e.  g. : ©arten,  (-§ ; u)  means 
that  the  gen.  sing,  of  this  word  is  ©artend,  and  the  nom.  pi.  ©drten ; <3of)n  (-e§ ; -“e) 
means:  gen.  sing.  <5ot;ne3,  nom.  pi.  66§ne  ; under  fern,  substs.  the  pi.  only  is  given. 

4.  With  adjectives,  ^er  indicates  Umlaut  in  the  compar.  and  superl. 

5.  Proper  names  are  not  given  when  they  are  the  same  in  German  as  in  English. 


*. 

91b,  off. 

21'benb,  nt.  (-e§ ; -e),  even- 
ing ; §eute  — , this  evening. 
abenb§,  in  the  evening, 
abcr,  but ; however, 
abfaljren  (186;  fein),  to  set 
off,  depart,  go ; set  sail, 
abbalten  (188),  to  hinder, 
deter. 

ab^elfen  (159),  to  help,  re- 
medy; bem  ift  leidjt  abs 
juljelfen,  that  is  easily  re- 
medied. 

abljoten,  to  call  for. 
abfiifjlen  (ftd>),  to  (get)  cool, 
abreifen  (fein),  to  set  out, 
start,  depart. 

abfd;neiben  (118),  to  cut  off. 
adjt,  eight ; — Stage,  a week. 
2td)t,  f,  attention,  care ; fid; 
in  — netymen,  to  be  care- 
ful, take  care, 
abbieren,  to  add. 

Slbreffe,  / (-n),  address. 


211'gebva,  f. , algebra. 

ClUein',  adj .,  alone,  only; 
cottj but,  only. 

att(er,  e,  e§),  all,  (the)  whole ; 
a tie  £age,  every  day ; 

$ltte§,  n.  sing-.,  all,  every- 
thing. 

atterbingS',  adv .,  certainly, 
of  course. 

aI3,  than,  as ; as  a ; when ; 
al3  ob,  as  if. 

atfo,  thus,  so;  so  then,  ac- 
cordingly. 

alt  ("er),  old,  ancient, 

2tlter,  n.  (-§),  age,  old  age. 
Slmerifaner,  m.  (-3,  — •) 
American. 

an  ( dat . or  acc .,  65),  oh, 
at  (227),  to,  towards,  in, 
by,  near,  of;  er  ftarb  am 
fyieber,  he  died  of  fever 
(231,  c). 

anbieten  (131),  to  offer. 

anber,  other ; bie  2tnbern, 
the  others. 


anbern,  to  alter,  change  ; e3 
lafct  fid^  nidjt  — , it  cannot 
be  helped. 

anberttjatb,  one  and  a half. 
2Infang,  m.  (-e§ ; ue),  com- 
mencement, beginning, 
anfangen  (188),  to  begin, 
commence. 

anfang3,  in  the  beginning,  at 
first. 

angeneljm  {dat.),  pleasant, 
agreeable. 

dngftlid),  frightened,  timid, 
anxious. 

anbatten  (188),  to  continue. 
2InI;b(>e,/.  (-n),  hill, 
anfaufen  (ficb),  to  settle,  buy 
up  property, 
anfteiben  (fid;),  to  dress, 
anfommen  (167;  fein),  to  ar- 
rive ; in  33.  {dat.)  — , to 
arrive  at  B. 
anridjten,  to  cause, 
anfdjaffen,  to  provide,  pro* 
cure. 


4 o6 


VOCABULARY. 


antreffen  (167),  to  meet 
with,  find. 

Slntroort,  f.  (-en),  answer, 
reply. 

antmorten  ( dat.)}  to  answer, 
reply. 

anjieljen  (131),  to  draw  on; 
put  on  (clothes). 

Slpfel,  m.  (-§ ; 2L),  apple. 

Slpfelbaum,  m.  (-§ ; -“c), 
apple-tree. 

Sipril',  m . (-§),  April. 

Slr'beit,/:  (-en),  work;  la- 
bour; task. 

arbeiten,  to  work. 

SKrbeiter,  m.  (-3;  — •),  work- 
man. 

2lrd)iteft',  m.  (— en  ; -en). 
architect. 

Slrie  (; trisyll .),  f (-n),  air, 
song 

arm  (^er),  poor 

21rm,  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  arm. 

artig,  well  behaved;  — fein, 
to  behave  one’s  self  pro- 
perly (of  children). 

2frjt,  m.  (-e§ ; -“e),  physician, 
doctor.  [rella. 

Slfc^enputtel,  n.  (-§),  Cinde- 

2lft,  m.  (-e<5;  -“e),  bough, 
branch. 

Slftrolog',  m.  (-en;  -en), 
astrologer. 

aucf),  also, too,  even;  roer — , 
whoever ; mir  finb  e§  — , 
so  are  we. 

ftuf,  (dat.  or  acc.)  on,  upon 
(65);  for,  in  (230);  at  (227, 
3) ; to ; open ; — brei  2Bos 
dben,  for  three  weeks  ( fut ., 
229,  3,  2) ; — bafj,  in  order 
that ; — bent  Sanbe,  in  the 
country. 

aufbleiben  (120),  to  stay  up, 
sit  up,  remain  up. 

2lufentbalt,  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  so- 
journ, stay;  delay. 

&ufgabe,y.  (-n),  task,  lesson, 
exercise. 


aufgeben  (181),  to  give  up. 
aufbangen,  to  hang  up. 
aufbeben  (13 1),  to  raise  up, 
lift  up,  pick  up;  abolish, 
annul,  cancel, 
aufboren,  to  cease,  stop, 
aufmadben,  to  open, 
aufm  erf  [am,  attentive;  einen 
auf  etmaS  — madjen,  to 
call  the  attention  of  any- 
one to  anything. 
2Tufmerffamfeit,y  (-en),  at- 
tention ; kindness, 
auffdfieben  (13 1),  to  put  off, 
postpone,  delay, 
auffe^en,  to  put  up;  put  on 
(of  a hat). 

aufftefjen  (186;  fein),  to  rise, 
get  up. 

auffteigen  (120 ; fein),  to 
rise,  ascend,  mount, 
auftreten  (181 ; fein),  to  ap- 
pear. 

auf^ieljen  (131),  to  wind  up 
(of  a time-piece). 

2luge,  n.  (-3  ; -n),  eye. 
Slugenblicf,  m.  (-e§  ; -e),  mo- 
ment, instant. 

au§  (dat.,  46),  out  of ; from, 
of;  out. 

2ltt§bru<f,  m . (-e§  ; ut),  ex- 
pression. 

2tu§flug,  m . (-e§  ; ^e),  excur- 
sion, pleasure-trip;  einen 
— madjen,  to  take  a plea- 
sure-trip. 

SluSgabe,  f (-n),  edition. 
auSgejeidptet,  excellent. 
au§gleiten  (118;  fein),  to 
slide,  slip. 

au§Iaffen  (188),  to  omit, 
leave  out. 

au§Iofdjen,  to  put  out,  ex- 
tinguish. [nacb). 

a«3fef)en  (181),  to  look  (like, 
SCuSfic^t,  f.  (-en),  view,  pro- 
spect. 

au§fprec$en  (167),  to  pro- 
nounce. 


2Tu§fteITung,  / (-en),  exhi- 
bition. 

aufjer  (46),  outside  of ; conj. 

except,  besides, 
aufjerbalb  (gen.),  outside  of. 
au§roenbig,  by  heart. 
auSgeicbnen,  to  distinguish. 
anSjieben  (131;  fein),  to  re- 
move ( intr .). 

2i£t,  f.  (^e)  axe. 

35. 

bacfen  (186),  to  bake. 
SSacfftein,  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  brick. 
SBaljnljof,  m.  (-e§ ; -“e),  rail- 
way-station. 

balb  (eber,  am  ebeften),  soon, 
shortly. 

23anb,  n.  (-e§ ; ,xer),  ribbon  ; 

m.  (-e<3 ; ^e),  volume. 
23anf,  f (-en),  bank;  (*e), 
bench. 

bar,  (paid  in)  cash,  ready  (of 
money). 

S3  dr,  m.  (-en ; -en),  bear. 
S3arbier,  w.  (-e§;  -e),  bar- 
ber. 

batten,  to  build. 

S3auer,  tn.  (-n  or  -§;  -n), 
peasant,  countryman. 
S3aum,  m.  (-eS ; -e),  tree. 
S3auplaij,  m.  (-e§  ; -“e),  site, 
bebauern,  to  pity;  regret; 

(id))  bebaure,  I am  sorry, 
bebenfcn  (99,2),  to  consider, 
bebienen,  to  serve,  wait  up- 
on ; fidb  — , to  help  one’s 
self. 

S3ebingung,  /,  (-en),  condi- 
tion. 

beeilen  (fidb),  to  hasten, hurry. 
33eere,  f.  (-en),  berry. 
S3efcbl,  m.  (-e§  ; -e),  com- 
mand, order ; ju  — , at 
(your)  service,  what  is 
(your)  pleasure  ? 
befeblen  (167),  to  command, 
befleifjen  (fidb,  ”8),  to  apply 
one’s  self 


VOCABULARY. 


407 


befriebigen,  to  satisfy,  con- 
tent. 

begegnen,  (dat. ; fein),  to 
meet. 

begiefjen  (123),  to  water 
(flowers,  etc.), 
begtmten  (158),  to  begin, 
begleiten,  to  accompany. 
SSegleituitg, _/I  (-en),  accom- 
paniment. 

begniigen  (fic^  — ntit),  to 
be  satisfied,  be  contented 
(with). 

SBegriff,  m.  (-e§;  -e),  idea, 
notion;  im  — fein,  to  be 
upon  the  point  of,  be  about 
(to). 

beljaupten,  to  assert,  affirm  ; 
to  maintain. 

bet  (46),  by,  at,  about ; with ; 

— £ifcf>e,  at  table ; — nteis 
ttent  Dnfel,  at  my  uncle’s; 

— mir,  with  me,  at  my 
house,  about  me;  — fd)5a 
nem  Setter,  in  fine  wea- 
ther. 

beibe,  both,  two. 
beibe§,  n.  sing •.,  both. 
Seifall,  m.  (-e  3),  applause. 
beinaf)e,  almost,  nearly. 
betfjen(n8),  to  bite, 
beifteljen  (186;  dat.),  to  as- 
sist, aid. 

Sefanntfd&aft,  f.  (-en),  ac- 
quaintance. 

befennett  (99),  to  acknow- 
ledge ; confess, 
befommen  (167),  to  obtain, 
get,  receive,  have, 
bemerlen,  to  perceive,  ob- 
serve. 

bemuben(ficb),  to  take  pains, 
try. 

bequem7,  convenient,  com- 
fortable, commodious. 

93  erg,  tn.  (-e$;  -e),  moun- 
tain, hill. 

bergen  (159),  to  hide, 
berften  (159),  to  burst. 


berufjmt,  famous,  celebrated. 
befcpuTttgen,  to  occupy,  em- 
ploy ; befcf)dftigt,  busy,  em- 
ployed. 

befinnen  (fid);  158),  to  deli- 
berate, reflect. 
befonber§,  particularly,  es- 
pecially. 

beforgen,  to  attend  to. 
befprcdjen  (167),  to  discuss, 
beffer  ( see  gut),  better, 
beft,  ( superl . of  gut,  which 
see),  best;  jum  93eften,  for 
the  benefit  of ; am  befien, 
best  (of  all). 

befteben  (186),  to  undergo, 
pass  (an  examination);  — 
(au§),  to  consist  (of) ; — 
(auf  4*  acc-)t  to  insist 
(upon). 

befteigen  (120),  to  ascend, 
beftellen,  to  order, 
beftrafen,  to  punish, 
beftreiten  (118),  to  defray. 
Sefud),  m.  (-e§;  -e),  visit, 
visitors ; — §aben, to  have 
visitors;  — e tnadjen,  make 
calls;  bei  ^emanb  auf  — 
fein,  to  be  on  a visit  at  any 
one’s. 

befudjen,  to  visit;  bie  IXnts 
nerfitat  — , to  study  at  the 
university. 

beten,  to  pray,  say  prayers, 
betragen  (r86),  to  amount  to. 
93etragen,  n.  (-§),  behaviour, 
conduct. 

betreffen  (167),  to  concern; 
roaS  micb  betrifft,  as  for 
me. 

betriig cn  (13 1),  to  cheat,  de- 
ceive. 

Settler,  m.  (-§;  ),  beggar, 

betoegen  (131),  to  induce; 
to  move. 

beroeifen  (120),  to  prove,  de- 
monstrate. 

betounbern,  to  admire. 

I bejaljlett,  to  pay  (acc.  qf 


thing ; dat.  of  person  and 
acc.  of  thing  when  both 
are  Present,  otherwise  acc . 
of  person). 

SejaIjlung,_/.(-en),  payment 
Stoliotfjef7,  f (-en),  library, 
biegen  (131),  to  bend. 

93ier,  n.  (-e§  ; -e),  beer,  ale. 
bieten  (131),  to  offer. 

93ilb,  n.  (-e3  ; -er),  picture, 
portrait. 

Silbung,  f (-en),  education. 
Sillet7  ( pron . bill-yett),  n. 

(-te§ ; -te),  ticket. 
biHig,  cheap. 

binben  (144),  to  bind,  tie, 
fasten. 

binnen  (dat.),  within. 
bi§  (34),  till,  until,  up  to,  as 
far  as;  jroei  — brei,  two 
or  three ; — ju  (dat.),  — 
nacf)  (dat.),  as  far  as. 
Sifdjof,  m.  (-e§,  -e),  bishop, 
bitten  (181 ; for,  um),  to  ask, 
beg;  (id))  bitte,  if  you 
please,  please  (tit.,  I beg, 
pray);  roenn  i$  — barf,  if 
you  please  (lit.,  if  I may 
ask). 

blafeit  (188),  to  blow. 

Slatt,  n.  (-e§;  *er),  leaf, 
blau,  blue. 

bleibeu  (120;  fein),  to  re- 
main. 

Sleiftift,  n.  (-e§ ; -e),  lead- 
pencil, 
blinb,  blind. 

Slit},  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  light- 
ning. 

blifjen,  (impers.),  to  lighten. 
Slume,y.  (-en),  flower. 
Sluntenfobl,  m.  (-§),  cauli- 
flower. 

bombarbieren,  to  bombard. 
Soot,  n.  (-e§;  Sote,  or-t), 
boat. 

bofe,  bad,  evil;  cross,  angry. 
Soferoid&t,  tn.  (— eS ; -er), 
villain. 


408 


VOCABULARY. 


83ote,  m.  (-n ; -It),  mes- 
senger. 

firaten  (188),  to  roast. 
braud)en  {gen.  or  acc.)t  to 
require,  want,  need,  use, 
make  use  of. 
ftrautt,  brown. 
brecf>ert  (167),  to  break, 
breit,  broad,  wide, 
bremtett  (99),  to  burn,  be 
burning. 

93rief,  7n.  (-eg;  -e),  letter, 
epistle. 

bringeit  (99,  2),  to  bring, 
take. 

S3rot,  n.  (-eg  ; -e),  bread; 
loaf. 

93rude,  f.  (-n),  bridge. 

93 ruber,  (-g ; 1L),  brother. 

93ud>,  n.  (-eg ; -^er),  book. 
93udjerfreunb,  m.  (-eg;  -e), 
lover  of  books. 
93ud)l;aitblcr,  7tt.  (-g;  —), 
book-seller. 

93uc^janbIung,/(-en),  book- 
shop. 

93urecm  ( pron . bii-ro'),  n. 

(-§;  -g),  (business)  office. 
93urgermeifter,  m.  (-g  ; — ), 
mayor. 

93utter,  f,  butter. 

(5. 

©I)ofolabe,  f}  chocolate. 
Gljrift,  m.  (— ert ; -en),  Chris- 
tian. 

Coufine,y!  (-n),  cousin. 

©. 

ba,  there,  in  that  place; 
here;  conj.>  as,  when,  be- 
cause, since. 

©ad;,  n.  (-eg;  -“er),  roof, 
bafiir,  for  that,  for  it,  for 
them  (of  things), 
bafycr',  thence,  hence,  there- 
fore. 

bamit,  therewith,  with  it, 
with  that. 


©ampferrinie,/.  (-n),  steam- 
ship-line. 

©ampfjdjiff,  n.  (-eg;  -e), 
steam-boat,  steamer, 
baufbai*,  thankful,  grateful, 
©anfbarfeit,  f,  thankful- 
ness. 

banfen  (< dat.)y  to  thank;  id; 
banfe  ($f)nen),  (no)  thank 
you. 

bann,  then, 
baran,  thereon, 
barauf,  thereon,  on  it,  on 
them  (of  things ),  etc. 
barirt,  therein,  in  that,  in  it. 
barii&er,  over  that,  over  it ; 

about  it,  at  it. 
barum,  therefore, 
bag,  n.  of  ber,  which  see. 
bafelbft,  there,  in  that  place, 
bafj,  that ; (auf)  — , in  order 
that. 

bacon,  thereof,  of  it. 
bein,  beine,  bein,  thy. 
benfen  (99 ; gen.  or  general- 
ly <XW  acc.),  to  think; 
fid)  — , to  imagine, 
benn,  for,  conj . 
ber,  bie,  bag,  def  art .,  the 
(4;  44);  rel.  pr.y  who, 
which,  that  (92,  93,  95) ; 
dem.  pr. , the  one,  he,  she, 
it,  that  (133  ; 140-143). 
berjenige,  biejenige,  bagjes 
nige  (135 ; 140),  that,  this, 
the  one ; he,  she,  it. 
berfelbc,  biefelbe,  bagfelbe 
(136;  i43)>  adj*  and  pr., 
the  same ; he,  she,  it,  etc. 
beg'ljalb,  for  this  or  that  rea- 
son, therefore,  on  that  ac- 
count. 

befto,  (all)  the,  so  much  the; 
— befjer,  so  much  the  bet- 
ter; je  ntebr  — bcffer,  the 
more,  the  better, 
begtoegen,  on  that  account, 
beutlid),  clear,  distinct ; 
clearly,  distinctly. 


beutfd),  German;  auf  ©eutfd), 
int  ©eutfdjen,  in  German, 
©eutfdj'lanb,  n.  (-g),  Ger- 
many. 

©iarnant',  m.  (-§  or  -en; 

-en),  diamond, 
bie,  f of  ber,  which  see. 
©ieb,  m.  (-eg ; -e),  thief, 
©iener,  rn.  (-g;  — ),  ser- 
vant. 

©icngtag,  tn.  (-eg; -e),  Tues- 
day. 

biefer,  biefe,  biefeg  (bieg), 
(6;  134,  140,  143),  this, 
that ; the  latter, 
bieg'feitg,  adv.,  on  this  side, 
bingen  (App.  L.),  to  hire, 
bicibieren,  to  divide.  , 

bod;,  yet,  however,  but,  after 
all,  pray,  well,  just. 

©of'tor,  m.  (-g ; ©of to'ren), 
doctor. 

©onner,  m.  (-g;  — ),  thun- 
der. 

bonnern,  to  thunder, 
©onncrgtag,  m.  (-eg ; -e), 
Thursday. 

©orf,  (-eg  ; ^er),  village, 
bort,  there,  yonder,  in  that 
place, 
brei,  three. 

breifad),  three-fold,  triple, 
treble. 

breimal,  three  times,  thrice, 
brei&ia,  thirty, 
brefdjen  (159),  to  thresh, 
thrash. 

bring  en  (144),  to  press, 
britte^alb,  two  and  a half, 
briibcn,  over  there,  over  the 
way. 

©rud,  m.  (-eg),  printing, 
print. 

bu,  thou,  you. 
biinn,  thin. 

burd;  (34),  through ; by. 
bitrdjaug',  absolutely,  entire- 
ly; — nid)t,  by  no  meansi 
not  at  all. 


kurdjfudj'en,  to  search 
through. 

biirfen  (196-202 ; permis- 
sion), to  dare;  be  permit- 
ted, allowed ; barf  id)?  may 

I? 

£>urft,  m.  (-e§),  thirst;  — 
Robert,  to  be  thirsty. 
2)u§'enb, «.  (-eS;  -e),  dozen. 

<S. 

Cbett,  adv.,  even,  just;  ex- 
actly ; fo — , just  now. 

©de,  f (-n),  corner. 
6'belftein,  m.  (-cS ; -e),  pre- 
cious stone,  jewel. 
el)e,  adv.  and  conj .,  ere,  be- 
fore. 

e^ren,  to  honour,  esteem. 
el)tlid),  honest ; — tuafyrt  am 
langfien,  honesty  is  the 
best  policy. 

©i,  «.  (-eS ; -er),  egg. 
©igentum,  (-e§  ; ^er),  pro- 
perty, possession,  estate, 
©tie,  f.  haste,  hurry;  tuaS 
I)aft  bu  fur  — ? what  is 
your  hurry  ? 
eilett,  to  hasten,  hurry, 
eilig,  hasty,  speedy;  eS  — 
I)aben,  to  be  in  a hurry,  be 
in  haste. 

ein,  eine,  ein  (9),  a,  an; 

one ; bie  ©inen,  some, 
eirtanber,  one  another,  each 
other. 

©inbanb,  m.  (-eS  ; *e),  bind- 
ing. 

einbinben  (144),  to  bind  (a 
book). 

einbringen  (144 ; fein),  to 
enter  by  force;  rush  in; 
press  in,  penetrate, 
eincr,  eine,  ein(e)S  (150), 
Pron .,  one  ( equivalent  of 
matt). 

einfaltig,  simple,  silly, 
©influfc,  m.  (-eS,  -“e),  influ- 
ence. 

27 


VOCABULARY. 

einige,  some,  several,  a few. 
einlaben  (186),  to  invite, 
einmal,  once. 

©inmaleinS, tt.  {indecl.),  mul- 
tiplication-table, 
einpacfen,  to  pack  up. 
einredjnen,  to  reckon  in ; 

comprise  in  account. 
einfd)Iagen  (186),  to  strike 
(of  lightning). 

einfdjreiben  (120),  to  book, 
inscribe,  check  (luggage), 
einfe^ett  (18 1),  to  perceive, 
comprehend, 
einfeitig,  one-sided, 
einfteigeu  (120;  fein),  to 
mount  into,  get  into  (car- 
riage, etc.). 

©in'trittSeEa'mcn,  «.(-§;—), 
entrance-examination,  ma- 
triculation-examination. 
©ir.iDOIjner,  m.  (-§  ; — ),  in- 
habitant. 

©iS,  n.  (-e§),  ice;  ice-cream, 
©ifen,  n.  (-S),  iron, 
©tfenbaljn,  f.  (-cn),  railway, 
elegant',  elegant. 

©He,  /.  (-n),  yard. 

©Item  (; no  sing.),  parents, 
empfetjlen  (167;  dat.ofpers.), 
to  recommend, 
empfinbcit  (144),  to  feel,  ex- 
perience. 

enblid),  at  last,  finally,  at 
length. 

engltfd),  adj .,  English;  auf 
©nglifd),  in  English. 

©nte,  /.  (-n),  duck ; ©nten* 
braten,  m.  (-§ ; — ),  roast 
duck. 

entge'gengefjen  (188;  fein; 

dat.),  to  go  to  meet, 
entge'genfommen  (167 ; fein ; 

dat.),  to  come  to  meet, 
entfcfyliefjen  (fid) ; 123),  to 
resolve,  decide, 
entfcbulbigen,  to  excuse, 
entroeber,  either;  entroeber 
. . . ober,  either  ...  or. 


409 

entroerfen  (159),  to  draw  (a 
plan,  etc.);  design, 
entjiidt,  delighted,  charmed, 
cr,  he. 

Grbfe,/  (-n),  pea. 

©rbbeben,  n.  (-S  ; — ;,  earth- 
quake. 

©rbbeere,/  (-n),  strawberry, 
©r be,  _/!,  earth,  ground, 
erfinben  (144),  to  invent, 
©rfinbung,  f.  (-en),  inven- 
tion. 

©ifolg,  nr.  (-e§;  -e),  success, 
erfrieren  (131 ; fein),  to 
freeze,  be  frozen, 
ergveifen  (118),  to  seize, 
er^alten  (188),  to  receive, 
get. 

erinnern  (ftc^ ; gen.  of  thing 
remembered),  to  remem- 
ber. 

erfalten  (fid)),  to  catch  cold, 
©rfdltung,  f (-en),  cold, 
erfennen  (99),  to  recognize, 
erflaren,  to  explain, 
erfunbigen  (fid)),  to  inquire ; 
fid)  bei  jemattb  nad)  etroaS 
— , to  inquire  of  anyone 
about  anything, 
erlauben  {dat.  of  per s.),  to 
permit,  allow, 
erleben,  to  experience, 
ernennen  (99),  to  nominate, 
appoint;  jum  (Souuerncur 
— , to  appoint  (as)  governor, 
erobern,  to  conquer,  over- 
come. 

erfebreefen  (167 ; fein),  to  be 
frightened. 

erft,  first ; fiirS  erfte,  for  the 
present ; ber  erfte  beftc, 
the  first  which  comes  to 
hand;  adv.,  first,  only,  not 
before,  not  till. 
erftenS,  first,  in  the  firstplace. 
ertrinfen  (144),  to  drown,  be 
drowned. 

ern)dl)len  (jn),  to  elect  (as), 
ernmrten,  to  expect,  wait  for. 


4io 

frwfinf<$en,  to  wish  for,  de- 
sire. 

crjaljlen,  to  relate,  narrate, 
tell. 

C§  (38,  39),  it;  they;  there; 
er  ift  — , it  is  he ; e§  firtb 
Scanner,  they  are  men. 
effen  (i8i),to  eat;  ju  3Jlittag 
— , to  dine. 

Ctroa,  nearly,  about. 

©tit>a§,  something,  any- 
thing. 

ener,  eure,  euer,  your, 
©uropa,  n.  (-§),  Europe, 
©ja'men,  w.(-S;  — ),  exami- 
nation. 

(Exemplar',  «.  (-§ ; -e),  copy 
(of  a work,  etc.). 

gabrif',  f.  (-en),  factory. 
$aben,  nt.  (-§;  L),  thread, 
faljren  (186 ; fein),  to  go, 
drive,  ride  (in  a convey- 
ance); travel;  sail. 

(-en),  journey,  voy- 
age ; ride,  drive, 
fyall,  m.  (-e§;  Me),  fall ; case, 
event;  in  bent  ^alle,  in 
that  case. 

fallen  (188 ; fein),  to  fall, 
falls,  in  case, 
ftami'lie,  f (-n),  family, 
fangen  (188),  to  catch, 
faft,  almost,  nearly ; — me, 
hardly  ever. 

§februar,  nt.  (-§),  February, 
fed&ten  (124),  to  fight,  fence, 
^eber,  f.  (-tt),  feather ; pen ; 
spring. 

feiern,  to  celebrate, 
geiertag,  nt.  (-eS ; -e),  holi- 
day. 

$einb,  nt . (-eS ; -e),  enemy. 
$elb,  n.  (-eS  ; -er),  field. 
^elf(en),  m.{-t  nS;  -en),  rock, 
ftenfier,  n.  (-§ ; — ),  window, 
gerien,  pi.  {no  sing-.),  vaca- 
tion, holidays. 


VOCABULARY. 

$erne,  f.  (-n),  distance ; in 
ber  — , at  a distance, 
fertig,  ready,  done;  — fein 
(mit),  to  have  finished 
(with). 

$eftlid)feit,/.  (-en),  festivity, 
fteuer,  n.  (-S ; — ),  fire, 
f^ieber,  n.  (-S ; — ),  fever, 
finben  (144)*  to  find  *>  meet 
with ; think,  be  of  opinion ; 
man  finbet  fid)  nid;t  leidjt, 
people  do  not  find  each 
other  easily. 

$ifd),  m.  (-eS ; -e),  fish. 
$lafd;e,  f.  (-n),  bottle. 
fled;ten  (124),  to  weave. 
$leifd),  n.  (-eS),  meat, 
fleijjig,  diligent ; industrious; 

diligently,  etc. 
fliegen(i3i;  fein),  to  fly. 
firemen  (131),  flee, 
fliefjen  (123),  flow, 
f^lote,  f.  (-tt),  flute. 

§IfigeI,  in.  (-S  ; — ),  wing. 
$Iufb  (-eS;  - e),  river, 
folgen  (fein ; dat.),  to  follow, 
^orelle,  f.  (-n),  trout, 
format',  n.  (-eS;  -e),  size  (of 
a book). 

fort,  forth;  away,  gone;  roir 
miiffen  — , we  must  be  off. 
fortgefyen  (188;  fein),  to  go 
away. 

fortmdfirenb,  perpetual,  con- 
tinual, incessant, 
frageit  (186),  to  ask  ques- 
tions ; $ragen,  n.  (-S), 
questioning,  asking  ques- 
tions (action  of). 
$ran!reidj,  n.  (-S),  France, 
franjbfifd),  French. 

$rau,  f.  (-en),  woman,  wife, 
lady,  madam,  mistress, 
Mrs. 

f^rciulein,  tt.  (-§;  — ),  young 
lady,  Miss ; mein  — , Miss, 
freigebig,  liberal,  generous, 
freilaffcn  (188),  to  set  free, 
liberate. 


freilid),  to  be  sure,  indeed,  of 
course. 

fjrreitag,  nt.  (-e§;-e),  Friday, 
fremb,  strange ; foreign. 
$rembe,  {adj.  subst.)  m.  or 
/.,  stranger,  foreigner, 
trembling,  nt.  (-e§;  -e), 
stranger. 

freffen  (181),  to  eat  (said  of 
beasts). 

^reube,  f.  (-it),  joy,  delight, 
freuen  (fid) ; at,  fiber-}- acc.\ 
to  rejoice,  be  glad ; e§  freut 
mid),  I am  glad. 

$reunb,  nt.  (-e§;  -e),  friend; 

id;  bin  ein  — non,  I like, 
^reunbin,  f.  (-nen),  friend 
(female). 

freunblid),  friendly,  kind, 
^reunbjdjaft,./'.  (-en),  friend- 
ship. 

^riebe(n),  nt . (-n§),  peace. 
^riebridE),  m.(-Z),  Frederick; 
fj-riebridjftrafje,  Frederick- 
street. 

frierett  (131),  to  freeze;  feel 
cold;  e§  friert  mid;,  I feel 
cold  ; mic§  friert,  I am 
cold. 

frifd),  fresh. 

$ri$,  nt.  (-en§),  Fred,  Fred- 
dy. 

frof),  joyful,  glad ; frozen 
IDluteS,  cheerfully, 
frbfjlid),  joyous,  merry. 

£ru (“e),  fruit, 
frfil),  early;  frfifjer,  earlier; 
formerly. 

$rfil)ling,  nt.  (-e§ ; -e), 
spring. 

frfilj'ftficfen,  to  breakfast. 
$udl)§,  in.  (-e§;  -“e),  fox. 
ffil;ren,  to  lead ; go,  lie. 
ffillen,  to  fill, 
ffinf,  five. 

ffinftef)aH»,  four  and  a half, 
ffinfsig,  funfjig,  fifty. 
$unfe(n),  nt.  (-nS ; -n), 
spark. 


VOCABULARY. 


fflr  (34),  for. 

Surest  {vox),/,  fear  (of), 
filrc&ten,  to  fear;  fid)  — nor 
(H-  dot.),  to  fear,  be  afraid 
of. 

Ouijj,  nu  (-e5  ; ^e),  foot. 

©. 

gfi(b)ren  (App.  L.),  ferment, 
ganj,  adj.y  whole,  entire ; 
the  whole  of ; adv. , quite, 
wholly,  altogether,  entirely, 
gar,  even;  — nidjt,  not  at 
all;  — ni<$t3,  nothing  at 
all. 

©arten,  m.  (-3  ; a),  garden, 
©drtner,  m.  (-3;  — ■),  garde- 
ner. 

©aft,  m.  (— c5 ; ae),  guest. 
©aftfjauS,  n.  (-e3;  ^er),  inn, 
hotel. 

gcbdren  (167),  to  bear,  bring 
forth. 

geben  (181),  to  give;  v.  im- 
pers.,  e3  giebt,  there  is, 
there  are. 

©ebot',  n.  (-e5  ; -e),  com- 
mandment. 

©eburtS'tag,  tn.  (-e§;  -e), 
birthday ; junt  — , as  a 
birthday-present. 

©ebaitfe,  m.  (-n3;  -n), 
thought. 

gebeif)en  (120),  to  thrive, 
gebenfen  (99),  to  intend. 
©ebic§t,  n.  (-e3 ; -e),  poem, 
gebrangt,  packed,  com- 
pressed, crowded, 
©ebulb,./!,  patience, 
gefciljrlid),  dangerous;  dan- 
gerously. 

gefaHen  (188),  to  please, 
suit;  roie  gefaHt  e3  3$iten 
in  Softon?  how  do  you 
like  Boston  ? 

gefaHig,  pleasing,  complai- 
sant, kind;  iff  bem  ^errn 
etn>a3  — ? will  the  gentle- 
man be  helped  to  anything? 


gefdSigfl,  if  you  please, 
©efiiljl,  ft.  (-e3;  -e),  feeling; 
emotion. 

gegeit  (34),  towards,  against, 
about ; for. 

gefjeu  (1S8;  fein),  to  go; 
walk;  nrie  gel)t  e§2>l)nen? 
how  do  you  do?  how  are 
you? 

geljoren  (<£*/.),  to belong(to). 
©etge,  f.  (-n),  violin;  ©ei* 
genfpiel,  n.  (-3),  violin- 
playing, 
gelb,  yellow. 

©elb,  n.  (-e3 ; -cr),  money, 
©elbbeutel,  m.  (-5;  — ), 
purse. 

gelegen,  convenient;  oppor- 
tune; uid)t5fonntemirgcs 
tegener  fein,  nothing  could 
suit  me  better. 

gelingen  (144;  fein),  to  suc- 
ceed; eS  gelingt  mir,  I 
succeed. 

gelten  (159),  to  be  worth, 
©erndlbe,  n.  (-3 ; — ),  paint- 
ing, picture. 

©emiife,  n.  (-3;  — ),  vege- 
tables. 

genau,  precise,  exact ; pre- 
cisely, exactly,  carefully, 
minutely. 

©eneral',  m.  (-e§  ; -e),  gene- 
ral. 

genefen  (181;  fein),  to  get 
well,  recover  (from  an  ill- 
ness). 

geniefjen  (123;  fein),  to  en- 
joy ; eat  or  drink, 
genug,  enough. 

©eometrie',  /.,  geometry, 
©epdcf,  n.  (-e3),  luggage, 
baggage. 

gerabe,  adj. , straight;  adv.t 
exactly,  just. 

©eraufd),  n.  (-e§  ; -e),  noise, 
gering,  small,  trilling,  mean; 
ni<$t  im  — ften,  not  in  the 
least. 


411 

gem  (Iieber.  am  Kebften), 
with  pleasure,  willingly, 
gladly ; etma3  — Ijaben, 
to  like  a thing;  — lernen, 
to  like  to  learn,  study ; ba3 
ift  — mogli<$,  that  is  very 
probable. 

©erfte,y!  barley, 
gefaljen,  faljen,  salt. 

©efaitg,  ttt.  (-e3),  singing, 
©efdjaft,  ft.  (-e3 ; -e),  busi- 
ness ; mercantile  establish- 
ment ; shop,  store. 
©ef$dft3angelegen§eit,  /. 
(-en),  business  matter,  bu- 
siness engagement. 
gef$et)en  (181;  fein),  to  hap- 
pen. 

©efdjenf,  ft.  (-e5 ; -e),  gift, 
present. 

©efd)ic§te,  f.  (-n),  history, 
story. 

©efdjtnacf,  fn.  (-e§),  taste. 
gef<$uIt,/./.,f<$ulen,  trained, 
cultivated. 

©efdjroifter,  //.,  brothers  and 
sisters. 

©efeUf<$aft,  / (-en),  com- 
pany, party. 

©ejtdjt,  ft.  (-e3;  -er  and  -e), 
face,  countenance ; ©efidj* 
ter,  faces ; ©efic^te,  vi- 
sions. 

©efpiele,  m.  (-n;  -n),  play- 
mate. 

geftern,  yesterday, 
©efunbfjeit,  f.  health, 
geroinnen  (158),  to  win,  gain, 
gets  if}  {gen.),  certain  (of); 

certainly,  surely, 
geroiffenf) a jt,  conscientious, 
©emitter,  n.  (-3;  — ),  thun- 
der-storm, storm, 
©erooljnljeit,  / (-en),  cu*. 
tom,  habit ; bie  — $abcn, 
to  be  accustomed  to. 
geroofynlid),  usual,  custom- 
ary; generally,  usually 
giefcen  (123),  to  pour. 


412 


VOCABULARY. 


glcingen,  to  shine,  glitter, 
glcingenb,  brilliant. 

©la§,  n.  (-c 3;  ^er),  glass, 
glatt,  smooth,  slippery, 
glauben  (dat.  of  pers.),  to 
believe ; think, 
gleicb,  at  once,  at  the  same 
time,  immediately,  directly; 
fo — , immediately,  etc. 
fileicfyeit  (118),  to  be  like,  re- 
semble. 

gleitcn  (118),  to  glide,  slip, 
glimmen  (123),  to  glimmer, 
©liid,  n.  (-e£),  (good)  for- 
tune, good  luck ; success  ; 
— nmnfdjen,  to  congratu- 
late, wish  success  to. 
gliidlid),  happy,  fortunate; 

successfully. 

©orb,  n.  (-es),  gold, 
golben,  of  gold,  golden, 
©ouoerneur',  m.  (-e3;  -e), 
governor. 

graben  (186),  to  dig. 

©rab,  m.  (-c§ ; -e),  degree, 
©raf,  m . (-en  ; -en),  count, 
earl. 

©rdftn,  f.  (-nen),  countess, 
©ramma'tif,  f.  (-en),  gram- 
mar. 

©ra§,  n.  (-e§;  ^er),  grass, 
gvatulieren  (dat.),  to  con- 
gratulate. 

grcifen  (118),  to  grasp, 
©riecbenlanb,  n.  (-§), 
Greece. 

grofj  (^er,  sup.  grbfct),  great, 
large,  big,  tali, 
griht,  green, 
griiublid),  thoroughly, 
griifjen,  to  greet,  salute,  bow 

to?  $reunb  Icifet  ©ie 

— , your  friend  wishes  to 
be  remembered  to  you. 
©uitarre,  f.  (-n),  guitar, 
gut,  good;  kind;  adv., 
well ; fo  — fein  unb,  to  be 
so  kind  as  to. 

©Uie3,  rt.,  good  (thing). 


§aar,  n.  (-e3 ; -e),  hair. 
b<ibeu  (24),  to  have;  9fted)t 
— , to  be  (in  the)  right ; Utt- 
red)t  — , to  be  (in  the) 
wrong;  ttm§  — ©ie?  what 
is  the  matter  with  you  ? 
nor — , to  intend,  propose, 
purpose. 

£>afeu,  tn.  (-§ ; r),  port,  har- 
bour, haven. 

,§afer,  in.  (-s),  oats, 
ftagelforn,  n.  (-e£ ; *er), 
hail-stone, 
pagein,  to  hail, 
balb,  half;  — brei,  half  past 
two. 

£alfte,  f.  (-n),  half. 

IjaltCtt  (188),  to  hold,  think  ; 
— fur,  consider;  id)  fjalte 
t)iel  non  ibm,  I think  high- 
ly of  him  (esteem,  value 
him  highly). 

£cmb,y.  (“e),  hand. 

§anbler,  m.  (-§;  — ),  dealer, 
shop-keeper. 

£anbfd)ub,  m.  (-e§;  -e), 
glove. 

bangcn  (188),  to  hang,  be 
suspended;  ba£  23ilb  bciugt, 
the  picture  is  hanging, 
f) (ingen,  to  hang,  suspend. 
§arfe,  f.  (-it),  harp;  £ars 
fens23egleituug,  accompa- 
niment on  the  harp. 
f)art  (~er),  hard. 

§afe,  m.  (-it;  -n),  hare, 
baffen,  to  hate, 
baueu  (188),  to  hew. 
$auptftabt,  /.  (-e),  capital. 
£au§,  n.  (-c§;  irer),  house; 
gu  £aufe,  at  home;  nad) 
£aufe,  home, 
bebcn  (131),  to  raise,  lift. 
£ecr,  n.  (-e§;  -e),  army, 
beftig,  violent,  heavy;  hea- 
vily (of  rain). 

§eibe,  m.  (— rt ; -tt),  heathen. 
£et»rid),  tn.  (-§),  Henry. 


heifer,  hoarse, 
fjcifj,  hot. 

beijjen  (188),  to  be  called,  be 
named ; mean,  signify ; mis 
beijjt  ba§  auf  £)eutfd)? 
how'  do  you  say  that  in 
German?  nne  fjeijjt?  what 
is  the  name  of?  icf)  £>eif;e 
21.,  my  name  is  A. 

§ett>,  m.  (-en;  -en),  hero. 
l)elfen  (159  ; dat.),  to  help. 
f)ell,  bright;  brightly, 
bernbfteigen  (120;  fein),  to 
descend. 

berctuSfontmcn  (167 ; fein),  to 
come  out. 

£erbft,  m.  (-e§ ; -c),  autumn. 
$erbe,  f.  (-11),  flock,  herd. 
Ijereinfommen  (167  ; fein),  to 
come  in. 

$err,  m.  (-n;  -en),  master; 
gentleman  ; Lord  ; Mr.  ; 
$f)r  — 23ater,  your  fa- 
ther. 

£erg,  n.  (-enG;  -en),  heart, 
berglid;,  heartily,  exceed- 
ingly. 

§eu,  n.  (— e§),  hay. 
beuie,  tc-day ; — 2lbettb,  this 
evening;  — Morgen,  this 
morning;  — iibev  riergebn 
Xage,  this  day  fortnight ; 
beutgutage,  now-a-days. 
bier,  here;  — *u  £aube,  in 
this  country. 

biermit,  herewith,  with  this, 
.fjimmel,  tn.  (-£  ; — ),  heaven, 
sky. 

biitnufgeben  (188;  fein),  to 
go  up. 

binctuGfebcn  (181),  to  look 
out  (at  the  window,  gum 
ftenfter). 

biucingeben  (18S  ; fein),  to 
go  in. 

bingcben  (188;  fein),  to  go 
(hence) ; go  anywhere, 
binter  (65),  behind. 

$i§e,  f.  heat. 


VOCABULARY. 


413 


§od)  {loses  C in  inflection ; 
compar . fyofyer,  sup.  Ijocljft), 
high. 

Ijoffen,  to  hope, 
fjof'fentlicf),  adv .,  (it  is)  to  be 
hoped,  I hope. 

£offnung,  f.  (-en),  hope. 
Ijoljer,  compar.  of  fjodj, 
which  see. 

tyolen,  (to  go  and)  bring, 
fetch;  get;  — laffert,  to 
send  for. 

$olj,  n.  (-e§),  wood. 

^joren,  to  hear;  listen;  fagen 
— , to  hear  say,  hear. 
5ttef<9,  pretty. 

n.  (-e§;  “er),  fowl; 
chicken. 

$unb,  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  dog. 
^unbert,  hundred. 

£unbert,  n.  (-3  ; -e),  hun- 
dred. 

hunger,  ;«.(-§),  hunger;  id) 
Ijabe  — , I am  hungry, 
ljungrig,  hungry. 

$ut,  vt.  (-e§;  “e),  hat. 
Ijiiten,  to  guard,  keep. 

3. 

t$,  I- 

i^r,  pens.  pron.,  to  her,  her 
{dat.  sing.) ; you  (nom. 
pi). 


S^retmillen,  for  your  sake, 
itn,  contr.for  irt  bent, 
intnter,  always ; at  all  times ; 
nod)  — , still. 

in  (65  ; dat.  or  acc .),  in,  at; 
into,  to. 

inbem',  while,  whilst, 
innertydlb  (gen.),  on  the  in- 
side, within. 

Snftrument',  n.  (— eS ; -e), 
(musical)  instrument, 
intereffant',  interesting, 
irgenb  einer,  — jemanb,  any 
one. 

Srlattb,  n.  (-§),  Ireland. 
Stalien,  n.  (-§),  Italy. 

3. 

Sa,  yes,  indeed,  certainiy,you 
know;  did  I (etc.)  not;  jets 
tool)!,  yes  indeed,  yes  to  be 
sure,  yes  certainly, 
jagett,  to  hunt,  chase,  pursue. 
Sagen,  n.  (-5),  hunting  (act 
of). 

Sager,  m.  (-§;  -hunter, 
huntsman. 

Saljr,  n.  (-e§ ; -t%  year. 
Sa'tob,  m.  (-§),  /fames, 
iatoofyl,  see\a. 

je,  ever  (at  any  time) ; the  (be- 
fore comparative  degree , 
126,  4);  — jtoei,  two  at  a 


iljr,  i§re,  if»r,  poss.  adj.,  her ; 
its;  their. 

Sf)r,  %f)V,  poss.  adj., 

your. 

tfjrer,  i§re, 
tE)re§, 
iljre  (ber, 
bie,  ba§), 
iEjrige  (ber, 
bie,  ba§), 

S^rer,  S^re, 

3§re§, 

Sfjre  (ber,  bie, 
baS), 

Sbvhc  (ber,  bic, 
bao), 


time. 

jebenfat(§,  certainly,  at  all 
ev^its. 

jeKr,  jebe,  jebe§,  every, 
each,  every  one,  any. 

jebermann,  everyone,  every- 
body. 

j etna  15,  ever,  at  any  time. 

jemanb,  somebody,  some  one, 
any  body,  any  one. 

jener,  jene,  jeneS,  that,  that 
one,  that  person ; yonder ; 
the  former. 

jenfeitS,  on  the  other  side, 
beyond. 

jel}t,  now,  at  present. 


Sofjann',  m.  (-5),  John. 
Su'genb,  f,  youth. 

Su'Ii,  m.  (-§),  July, 
juitg  (“er),  young. 

Simge,  m.  (-n ; -n),  boy, 
lad. 

Singling,  m.  (-e§;  -e), 
young  man,  youth. 

Su'ni,  m.  (-5),  June. 

£affee,  tn.  (-§),  coffee. 
Jtaij'er,  m.  (-§ ; — ),  emperor. 
31alb5foteIette,  f.  (-n),  veal- 
cutlet. 

fait  (“er),  cold. 

Namin',  n.  (-e§;  -e),  fire- 
place. 

tfarbinal',  m.  (-§;  -e),  car- 
dinal. 

$arl,  m.  (-§),  Charles. 
Slavte,f.  (-n),  card, 
ilartoffel,./:  (-tt),  potato. 
$dfc,  m.  (-§;  — ),  cheese, 
faufen,  to  buy. 
faunt,  hardly,  scarcely, 
feifeit  (App.  L.),  to  chide, 
fein,  feine,  fein,  no,  not  a, 
not  any. 

feitter,  feine,  fein(e)§,  pron., 
nobody,  not  anybody,  no 
one,  none. 

Jtellner,  *«:(-§;  — ■),  waiter, 
fennen  (99),  to  know,  be  ac- 
quainted with. 

JfenntniS,  f.  (-e),  know- 
ledge ; pi.  acquirements, 
attainments. 

ftinb,  n.  (-e5 ; -er),  child. 
Jlirdje,  f (-n),  church, 
flat*,  clear. 

Piaffe,  f.  (-n),  class, 
fllaf'fifer,  m.  (-5 ; — •),  classic 
writer,  classic. 

iUaoier',  n.  (-5 ; -e),  piano, 
illeib,  n.  (-e3 ; -er),  dress; 

pi.  clothes, 
f Tein,  small,  little, 
flieben  (App.  L.),  to  cleave. 


414 


VOCABULARY. 


flimmen  (123),  to  climb, 
fling eln,  to  ring  (said  of 
small  bells);  e3  flingelt, 
there  is  a ring  (at  the  door, 
etc.). 

fling en  (144),  to  sound. 
£nabe,  m.  (-n ; -n),  boy.  > 
JlnaK,  nt.  (-e<3;  -e),  loud 
quick  sound  ; clap,  thun- 
der-clap. 

Hned)t,  nt.  (-eS;  -e),  (farm) 
servant,  man-of-all-work. 
fneifeit  (118),  to  pinch, 
fneipcn  (App.  L.),  to  pinch. 
£nod)en,  nt.  (-§;  — ),  bone, 
flod),  m.  (-e§;  “e),  cook, 
hornet',  m.  (-en;  -en), 
comet. 

fomtnen  (167;  fein),  to 
come;  arrive;  — laffen, 
to  send  for ; ttrie  f ommt 
ba§  ? how  is  that? 

$tonig,  m.  (-(e)§;  -e),  king. 
flonigin,y:  (-nen),  queen. 
Jtonigftrafje,  f.  King-street, 
fonnen  (196-202;  ability, 
etc.),  to  be  able,  can; 
know,  be  versed  in,  know 
how. 

Jtonsert',  n.  (— e§ ; -e),  con- 
cert. 

Jtopf,  nt.  (-e§  ; “e),  head. 
Jtorb,  m.  (-e§ ; “e),  basket. 
Jtoften,  pi.,  expenses, 
fefien  (acc.  of  pers.  and  of 
thing),  to  cost, 
franf  (“er),  ill ; sick ; Jtranfe, 
{adj.  subst.),  sick  person, 
patient. 

$ranff)eit,  f (-en),  disease, 
illness. 

Jlrieg,  nt.  (-e5 ; -e),  war. 
fried) en  (123),  to  creep, 
flri'tif er,  m.  (-§ ; — ),  critic. 
S(\\S)l,f  (-n),  kitchen. 
Stvfy,f  (“e),  cow. 

Jtunft,  f (“e),  art. 
tfiinftler,  nt.  (-§ ; — ),  artist, 
furj  (“er),  short. 


furs  lid),  not  long  ago,  lately, 
recently. 

£utfd)er,  m.  (-3;  — ),  coach- 
man, driver. 


«. 

Iad;en  {gen.  or  fiber  -J -acc.), 
$0  laugh  (at). 

Sad)<^  m.  (— c§  ; -e),  salmon 
lab  en  ^(486),  to  load;  invite. 
Saben,  (-3 ; — and  “), 
window -Ihutter  {pi.  — ); 
shop,  store\^.  “). 

Sanb,  n.  (-eSjXu;  and  -e), 
land,  countrji^^untry  (op- 
posed to  town);  auf  bem 
— e,  in  the  country;  auf 5 
— gefyen,  to  go  into  the 
country;  511  — e,  by  land; 
f)ier  SU  — e,  in  this  country. 
Sanbfd;aft,  f (-en),  land- 
scape. 

lang  (“er),  long, 
lange,  adv.  long,  a long  time 
or  while,  for  a long  time ; 
fo  — , so  long  as ; er  iff  — 
fyier  getnefen,  he  has 
not  been  here  for  a long 
time;  er  ift  nic^t  — I)ier 
gemefen,  he  has  not  been 
here  long. 

langfam,  slow;  slowly, 
laitgft,  long  ago,  long  since. 
Sarm,  m.  (-eo),  noise, 
laffeu  (188;  200,  7),  to  let, 
allow;  leave;  have  (a  thing 
done);  fagen  — , to  send 
word ; f omnten  — , to  send 
for;  ic§  laffe  ba3  53ucf> 
einbinben,  I am  having 
the  book  bound;  e3  lafft 
fid)  uidjt  lengnen,  it  can- 
not be  denied. 

Softer,  n.  (-3;  — ),  vice. 
Satein,  n.  (-§),  Latin. 

Sauf,  nt.  (-e3;  “e),  course, 
laufen  (188;  fein),  to  run. 
lauten,  to  ring  (of  large  bells), 
toll. 


lebett,  to  live ; be  alive. 
Seben,  n.  (-3;  — ),  life. 
Sebcmobl,  n . (-3),  farewell, 
adieu. 

Seber,  n.  (-3;  — ),  leather, 
legen,  to  lay,  put,  place,  set. 
Seljrer,  m.  (-3 ; — ),  teacher, 
master. 

Ieid)t,  light,  easy ; easily, 
readily. 

leib  {only  used  as  pred.  with 
fein  and  tbun),  sorry, 
grieved ; e3  ift,  e3  tf>ut  mir 
— , I am  sorry, 
leiben  (118),  to  suffer;  an 
etiua3  — , to  suffer  from 
anything. 

leiber,  alas!  unfortunately! 
Ieif)CJt  (120),  to  lend. 

Seiftcn,  m.  (-3;  — ),  (shoe- 
maker’s) last, 
leiften,  to  accomplish. 
Settion',  f (-en),  lesson. 
Iernen,  to  learn,  study. 

Iefeit  (181),  to  read. 

Sefett,  n.  (-3),  (act  of)  read- 
ing. 

letjt,  last,  final. 

Sente,  pi.  {no  sing  ),  people, 
persons. 

Sid)t,  n.  (-e§  ; -er  and  -e), 
light, 
lieb,  dear. 

Siebe,  f love,  affection;  — 
ju,  love  of. 

Iiebeit,  to  love, 
liebcr  {comp,  of  gern);  conj ., 
rather ; id)  ge^e  — , I prefer 
to  walk. 

Sieb,  n.  (-e3 ; -er),  song, 
liegeit  (181  ; fein,  §aben),  to 
lie ; be ; be  situated, 
tinf,  left. 

linf?*,  to  (or  on)  the  left, 
loben,  to  praise. 

Sod),  «.  (-e3 ; “er),  hole. 
Soffel,  m.  (-3;  — ),  spoon. 
SoI)engrin,  nt.  (-3),  name  o! 
an  opera  by  Wagner. 


Io5,  loose,  slack;  roa§  ift  — ? 

what  is  the  matter  ? 
lofen,  to  free,  redeem;  cin 
S3illet  — , buy  a ticket. 
Iosfpringen  (144;  fexrt ; auf 
+ acc.),  to  spring  upon, 
leap  upon. 

£ouife,  f (~n§),  Louisa. 
Some,  m.  (-« ; -n),  lion. 
£ubwig,  m.  (-§),  Louis. 
Suft/w/I  ("e),  air,  atmosphere, 
liigen  (13 1),  to  lie,  utter  a 
falsehood. 

fiugner,  m.  (-§ ; — ),  liar, 
luftig,  merry;  merrily;  fid) 
iiber  einen  — madden,  to 
make  sport  of  one. 

m. 

Utac^ett,  to  make  ; arrange  ; 
cause,  give ; be  (in  arithm. 
calculations) ; id)  mad) emir 
nid)t<3  barauS,  I care  no- 
thing for  it;  etne  Seereife 
— , to  take  a voyage;  einen 
©pastergang  — , to  take  a 
walk. 

3Jldbd)en,  n.  (-§  ; — ),  girl. 
SWogb,yi  (-“e),  maid,  maid- 
servant. 

SD^ai,  m . (-e§  or  -en),  May. 
3flat,  n.  (-e§;  -e),  time  (oc- 
casion) ; $um  lenten  — , for 
the  last  time, 
ntaleit,  to  paint. 

Sflaler,  in.  (-§;  — ),  painter. 
SAalerei',,/!  (art  of)  painting, 
tnatt,  Pron.}  one,  we,  you, 
they,  people;  — fagt,  they 
say,  people  say,  it  is  said, 
tnandjer,  maucfje,  mandjeS, 
adj . and  pron.,  many  a. 
Sflangel,  m.  (-3),  want. 
Sflann,  m.  (-e§;  -“er),  man. 
Sflantel,  nu  (-§;  3^),  cloak, 
mantle. 

flflargarete,  f.  (-n§),  Marga- 
ret. 

Sflarie,^  (-n3),  Mary. 


VOCABULARY. 

aflarf,  f.  { — ■),  mark  (a  coin 
= 100  Pfennig  or  about  25 
cents). 

aflarft,  m.  (-e§;  -^e),  market, 
marfdiir.ren  (fein  or  fyaben), 
to  march. 

aflarj,  m.  (-e§),  March.  y 
aflnfent,  //.,  measles.  / 
2JiatI)ematif,./!,  mathemjmcs. 
aflatrofe,  m.  (-it;  -ti^psailor. 
Wlau5,f  (^c),  moj^e.. 
aflefyl,  n.  (-e§),  flour. 
mei)r,  more;^pid)t  — , no 
longer,  nj»now. 
meljrcre,  jBOTU ; mefirereS, 
several  thing^a  good  deal. 
tnef)rmal3,  several  times, 
metbett  (120),  to  avoid, 
afletle,  f (-n),  mile  (Ger- 
man), league, 
mein,  meine,  mein,  my. 
tneine(ber,  bie,  ba$),  mine, 
mcilteit,  to  think,  be  of  opi- 
nion, suppose,  mean;  ba§ 
follte  td)  — , I should  think 
so  {emphatic) . 

meinetmegen,  (nm)  meinets 
roiHeit,  for  my  sake;  for  all 
I care. 

meiitige  (ber,  bie,  ba§),  mine. 
tDleinuitg,  f.  (-en),  opinion, 
meift  {superl.  of  mel),  most ; 

am  — en,  most,  most  of  all. 
afleifter,  m.  (-3 ; — ),  master, 
melfeit  (124),  to  milk, 
aflelobie',  f.  (-tt),  melody, 
tune;  air. 

aflenge,/i  (-n),  great  quantity 
or  number. 

9ttenfd),  m.  (-en;  -en),  a 
human  being,  man;  per- 
son ; //.,  mankind,  people, 
meffen  (181),  to  measure, 
defter,  n.  (-3;  — ),  knife. 
afletalF,  n.  (-e3;  -e),  metal, 
mieten,  to  rent. 

Sflild),  / milk. 

31lillion/,  f (-en),  million. 
SUnute,  f.  (-n),  minute. 


415 

ajlinutenseiger,  m.  (-5 ; —), 
minute-hand, 
mir  {dat.  of  id)),  (to)  me. 
mit  (46),  with ; by  (in  multi- 
plication). 

ajmtag,  m.  (-e3;  -e),  mid- 
^ day,  noon ; ju  — effen,  to 
dine. 

3flittag3effen,  n.  (-3;  — ), 

dinner. 

mitten,  in  the  middle  or 
midst  of ; — im  SBinter,  in 
the  middle  of  winter, 
aflittrcod),  in.  (-e3),  Wed- 
nesday. 

mogen  (196-202;  preference, 
liking),  to  be  able  ; may ; 
like;  id)  mag  ba3  nid)t, 
I do  not  like  that;  id) 
mocf)te,  I should  like, 
rnoglid),  possible ; ba3  ift 
gern  — , that  is  very  pro- 
bable. 

aflonard)',  m.  (-en  ; -en), 
monarch. 

aflo'nat,  m.  (-e3;-e),  month. 
Hflontag,  vt.  (-3;  -e),  Mon- 
day. 

aflorgen,  in.  (-5;  — ),  mor- 
ning ; guten  — , good  mor- 
ning; be3  — 3 {or  mor* 
gett§),  in  the  morning, 
morgen,  to-morrow ; — friif), 
to-morrow  morning, 
miibe,  tired,  weary. 

3flttfye,  f trouble;  uicf)t  ber 
— Uiert,  not  worth  while, 
asti^le,  f (-n),  mill, 
multiplijieren,  to  multiply. 
SRnfif',  f music, 
mufifalifd),  musical. 
muf[en  (196-202;  necessity), 
to  be  obliged  or  forced, 
must. 

2flut,  m.  (-e3),  mood,  cou- 
rage, spirit ; mir  ift  fd)led)t 
ju  — e,  I feel  ill  ; frozen 
— e3,  cheerfully. 

2Jhittcr,  f.  if),  mother. 


416 


VOCABULARY. 


SR. 

nct<$  6),  after;  according 
to ; by  (of  time-piece) ; past 
(of  hour  of  day) ; to  (before 
proper  names  of  places); 
— ^jaufe,  home. 

Iftadjbar,  m.  (-3  and-n;  -it), 
neighbour. 

nad^em',  conj .,  after, 
itadjgeljen  (188;  fein),  to  go 
after ; go  or  be  too  slow  (of 
a time-piece). 

9iad;mittag,  m.  (-e3 ; -e),  af- 
ternoon ; be3  —3,  in  the  af- 
ternoon. 

9iad)ri$t,/  (-en),  news. 
ttad)ft  (superl.  of  nafy),  next. 
91ad)fte,  m.  ( adj . subst.),  fel- 
low-creature, neighbour. 
ItcidOftenS,  shortly,  soon,  very 
soon. 

91ctd;t,  f.  (-“e),  night, 
nal),  (nether,  it  3d)  ft),  near. 
Sftatye,  f , nearness  ; neigh- 
bourhood ; in  trtetner  — , 
near  me  ; in  my  neighbour- 
hood. 

Svante,  m.  (-n3 ; -n),  name, 
title. 

ttatur'Iid),  naturally,  of 
course,  I suppose, 
tteben  (65),  beside,  besides; 

near,  alongside  of,  by. 
ttebft  (51),  together  with,  in- 
cluding. 

S^effe,  m.  (-tt ; -n),  nephew, 
tte^mett  (167),  to  take ; fid)  in 
2fc§t  — / to  take  care,  be- 
ware, 
ttein,  no. 

ttennen  (99),  to  call,  name, 
netto,  net  {commercial ter m). 
neu,  new. 

Iteulidf,  lately,  the  other  day, 
not  long  ago. 

ttcuntef)alf>,  eight  and  a half. 
nid)t,  not ; — mefjr,  no  lon- 
ger; — roat)r?  is  (it,  etc.) 
not  (so)? 


nid^t‘3  ( indecl .),  nothing, 
nie,  never. 

Sftieberlanbe  (bie),  pi,  The 
Netherlands. 

nte'tttattb,  nobody,  no  one,  no 
person,  not  anybody,  etc. 
nod),  still,  yet,  even  ; — ein, 
one  more,  another ; — et? 
roa§,  something  (anything) 
more  ; — einmol,  over 
again  ; — §eute,  before  the 
end  of  the  day,  before  the 
day  is  over;  — immer,  up 
to  the  present  time,  still; 
— pop  oieraefm  SEagen, 
only  a fortnight  ago. 
Sftorb'etfenbafnt,  f (-cn), 

N orthern-Rail  way. 
notig,  necessary. 

91ot)ember,  m.  (-3),  Novem- 
ber. 

■Jiti'mero,  n.  (-3),  number, 
ttur,  only.  just. 

S&ufj,  f (*c),  nut. 
niifclid),  useful. 

O. 

ob,  whether,  if. 
oben,  above,  up-stairs ; nad) 
— , upward, 
obgleidf)',  although, 
obcr,  or. 

Dfen,  m.  (-3;  **-),  stove, 
offen,  open 

Dffijier',  m.  (-e3 ; -e),  officer. , 
offnen  (fid)),  to  open, 
oft  (aer),  often,  frequently. 
D^eirn,  m . (-e3  ; -e),  uncle. 
of)ne  (34),  without;  but  for. 
Dnf  el,  m.  (-3 ; — ),  uncle. 

V. 

$alaft,  m.  (-e3  ; -^e),  palace, 
^antoffel,  m.  (-3 ; -n),  slip- 
per. 

papier',  n.  (-e3;  -e),  paper. 
^Papft,  m.  (-e3  ; -“e),  pope. 
Paris',  n.  (non  — ),  Par 
paffenb,  fit,  suitable. 


pfeifen  (1x8),  io  whistle, 
pfennig,  m.  (-e3;  -e),  (the 
one  hundredth  part  of  a 
mark),  penny. 

^Pferb,  n.  (-e3;  -e),  horse, 
^ferbebafjn,  f (-en),  tram- 
way, tram;  street -cars, 
horse-cars. 

^flaunte,/  (-n),  plum, 
pflegen  (weak),  to  attend  to; 
to  be  accustomed,  wont ; — 
(strong,  App.  L.),  to  prac- 
tise, exercise. 

^Pfunb,  n.  (-e3 ; -e),  pound, 
^ilofopljie',/  (-n),  philo- 
sophy. 

$Ian,  m.  (-3  ; -e  or  “e), 
plan,  design. 

planet',  m.  (-en;  -en), 
planet. 

m.  (-e3;  *e),  place; 

— nefjmen,  to  sit  down,  be 
seated. 

^ra^regen,  m.  (-5;  — ), 
shower,  down-pour, 
praubern,  to  chat,  talk, 
portion'  f (-eit),  portion, 
plate  (of  meat,  etc.). 

Mt,  /'  (— eit),  post,  post- 
office. 

^oftbote,  m.  (-n ; -tt),  post- 
man. 

prad)tig,  magnificent. 
iprei3,  (-e3;  -e),  price; 
prize. 

preifen  (120),  to  praise, 
^rocent',  n.  (-e3 ; -e),  per 
cent. 

$)3rofeffor,  m.  (-3;-en),  pro- 
fessor. 

promonieren,  to  take  a de- 
gree, graduate, 
ipublifum,  n.  (-3),  public; 
audience. 

SPunft,  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  point ; 

— ae(w  U()r,  at  ten  o’clock 
precisely. 

$Pitnftlid)feit,  punctuality. 


VOCABULARY. 


417 


a. 

Ctua'berftein,  m.  (-e§  ; -e), 
cut-stone,  freestone. 
lueUen  (124;  fein),  to  gush. 

9L 

9tabatt,  m.  (-e§;  -e),  dis- 
count, abatement. 

Slanb,  in.  (-e3;  -“er),  edge, 

rim,  brim. 

SRat,  in.  (-e<3),  counsel,  ad- 
vice. 

ratert  (188),  to  counsel,  ad- 
vise. 

9taud),  m.  (-e§),  smoke. 
Sftaupe,  _/!  (-n),  caterpillar. 
9ted)nen,  n.  (-3),  arithmetic. 
9led)nung,  f.  (-eit),  account, 
bill,  reckoning  ; calcula- 
tion; ein  ©trid)  burd)  bie 
— , disappointment ; ferrets 
ben  ©ie  ba§  auf  meine  — , 
charge  that  to  me. 
red)t,  right. 

9te$t,  n.  ( indecl .),  right  ; 
— Ijaben,  to  be  right,  be  in 
the  right. 

red)t3,  to  (on)  the  right, 
recljt'jeitig,  at  the  right  time, 
punctually. 

SReb  1,  f (-n),  speech;  ora- 
tion. 

reben,  to  speak,  talk, 
^reformation',/.  (-en),  refor- 
mation. 

Slegen,  in.  (-3),  rain. 
SJte'gentropfen,  in.  (-3  ; — ), 
drop  of  rain. 

regieren,  to  reign,  rule,  go- 
vern. 

9tegierung,/  (-en),  govern- 
ment, reign  ; unter  ber  — , 
in  the  reign  (of). 
9tegiment',  n.  (-e3 ; -er),  re- 
giment. 

regnen,  to  rain, 
reiben  (120),  to  rub. 
reid),  rich,  wealthy, 
reid&eit,  to  reach,  hand. 


reif,  ripe. 

9ieife,  f.  (-n),  journey,  voy- 
age; eiite  — madden,  to 
take  a journey. 

9teifef often,  pi.,  travelling- 
expenses. 

reifen  (fein  and  fyaben),  to 
travel,  journey,  go. 
9teifenbe  {adj.  subst.),  tra- 
veller. 

reiben  (118),  to  tear,  pull, 
reiten  (n8;  fein),  to  ride, 
rennen  (99;  fein),  to  run, 
race. 

9icftaurattott',  f.  (-cn),  eat- 
ing-house, restaurant, 
retten,  to  save,  rescue;  id) 
rettete  ifym  ba3  Seben,  I 
saved  his  life. 

reuen  (infers.),  to  repent ; e3 
reut  mid)  {gen.\  I repent 
(of). 

9tt)eumati3mu3,  m.  {gen.  — ), 
rheumatism. 

rid)tig,  right,  correct ; cor- 
rectly ; — geljen,  to  be  cor- 
rect (of  a time-piece) ; auf 
bie  — e SBeije,  in  the  right 
way. 

9tid;tung,  f.  (-en),  direction, 
riedjen  (123),  to  smell. 

9liefe,  m.  (-tt ; -n),  giant. 
Stinbfleifdf),  n.  (-e3),  beef. 
Sling,  in.  (-e3 ; -e),  ring, 
ringen  (144),  to  wring, 
rinneit  (158),  to  run,  flow. 
9tocf,  m.  (-e3 ; -“e),  coat. 

91  Oman',  m.  (-3;  -e),  ro- 
mance, novel. 

9iomer,  m.  (-3 ; — ),  Roman 
(subst.). 

rot,  adj.  (— er),  red. 
9tot'fdppd)en,  n.  (-3  ; — ), 
Little  Red  (Riding)  Hood. 
9tot'mein,  m.  (-e3),  red- 
wine. 

9tiibe,  f.  (-n),  turnip;  gelbe 
— , carrot. 

9lubiit',  in.  (-e§;  -e),  ruby. 


rubern,  to  row. 
rufen  (188),  to  call, 
rufjig,  quiet. 

9tubm,  m.  (-e3),  praise, 
ruub,  round. 

9tuffe,  m.  (~n  ; -tt),  Russian, 
0. 

©aar,  **.(-e 8;  ©die),  hall. 
©ad)e,/.  (-n),  thing,  matter, 
affair,  business  ; bift  bu 
beiner  — geraiji,  are  you 
certain  of  your  information, 
etc. 

fagen,  to  say,  tell ; — fyoren, 
to  hear  say,  hear. 
©af)tte,/,  cream, 
fdmmtlid^,  complete  (of  lite- 
rary works). 

©anft  Sorens,  m.,  St.  Law- 
rence. 

©angerin,/  (-nen),  (female) 
singer. 

©ara,/  (-3),  Sarah. 

©a§,  in.  (-e3;  -e),  sentence, 
faufeu  (123),  to  drink  (of 
beasts). 

faugen  (App.  L),  to  suck. 
Sd)abc(n),  in.  (-it3 ; -^n), 
damage,  injury,  harm,  mis- 
chief; e3  ift  fd)abe,  it  is  a 
pity. 

©chafer,  m.  (-3;  — ),  shep- 
herd. 

fdjaffen  (186),  to  create. 
fd;alleu  (123),  to  sound,  re- 
sound. 

©cfjalter,  m.  (-3;  — ),  wick- 
et, ticket-office, 
fdfiimen  (fid;  ; gen.  or  fiber 
+ acc.),  to  be  ashamed, 
fdjarf  (-er),  sharp, 
fdjeibeu  (120),  to  separate. 
fd;einen(i2o;  dat.),  to  shine; 

appear,  seem, 
fdjeltcn  (159),  to  scold. 
fd)enfen  (dat.  of  person  and 
acc.  of  thing),  to  give, 
make  a present  of,  present. 


4i8 

fcfjeren  (131,  B.),  to  shear. 
fdfiicFen,  to  send, 
f cffieben  ( 13 1),  to  shove,  push, 
fdjiefjen  (123),  to  shoot. 
<Scf)iff,  n.  (-e§ ; -e),  ship, 
vessel. 

©df)ilb,  n.  (-e§ ; -er),  sign- 
board. 

©cf>Ubfrote,y;  (-it),  tortoise. 
fcf)inbett  (App.  L.),  to  flay. 
©<f>[acf)t,  f (-en),  battle. 
fcf;lafen  (188),  to  sleep;  ftd^ 
— legcn,  to  retire  to  rest, 
go  to  bed. 

©cfylafrodE,  m.  (-e§;  “e), 
dressing-gown, 
©cfjlaf'jimmer,  n.  (-§;  — ), 
bedroom. 

fdtjlagen  (186),  to  beat,  strike. 
fcf)lecf)t,  bad;  badly. 
fdE)leicf)en  (118 ; fein),  to  slink, 
sneak. 

fd&leifen  (118),  to  sharpen, 
grind. 

fd)leiften  (App.  L.),  to  slit, 
fdfjliefjen  (123),  to  lock,  shut, 
close ; conclude,  finish, 
fdjlimm,  bad. 
fdjlmgen  (144),  to  sling. 
©cf)litten,  tn . (-§;  — ), 
sleigh. 

©d&litt'fd&u^Iaufen,  *.  (-§), 

(act  of)  skating. 

©d&lofj,  n.  (-e3 ; “er),  castle, 
palace. 

fcfjmeden,  to  taste,  relish; 
rote  fd;medt  3§nen  biefe§? 
how  do  you  like  (the  taste 
of)  this? 

©djmeicfyefei',/,  flattery, 
fcfjmeidjeln  (dai.),  to  flatter, 
fc^meifjen  (118),  to  throw, 
fling. 

fcbmeIjen(i24),to  melt,  smelt, 
©camera,  »*.  (-c§  or  -en§; 
-eit),  pain. 

d^uauben  (App.  L.),  to  snort. 
©d)nee,  m.  (-§),  snow, 
fd&neiben  (118),  to  cut ; reap ; I 


VOCABULARY. 

ft#  in  bie  £anb  — , to  cut 
one’s  hand. 

©#neiber,  m.  (-§ ; —),  tai- 
lor. 

fcfjneien,  to  snow, 
fdjnell,  quick ; quickly. 
©cfjnelTjug,  m . (-e§;  “e), 
express-train. 

f#0tt,  already,  as  early  as, 
readily,  easily,  indeed;  — 
Icinge,  for  a long  time 
(past). 

fdjon,  fine,  beautiful,  hand- 
some. 

©#on§eit,  f (-en),  beauty, 
©d^otte,  m.  (-n;  -n),  Scotch- 
man. 

fdjrauben  (App.L.),  to  screw, 
fd&reden  (167),  to  be  startled, 
fcfjreiben  (120),  to  write  (to, 
dat.  or  an  -f-  acc.  of  per s.). 
fcfjreien  (120),  to  cry,  scream, 
shout. 

fcf)reiten(n8 ; fein),  to  stride, 
step,  stalk. 

©djriftfteUer,  tn.  (-§;  — ), 
writer,  author. 

©cfyritt,  m.  (-e§;  -e),  stride, 
step,  pace. 

©cfyu'bert,  m.  (-§),  Schubert 
(German  musician). 

©d)uf),  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  shoe. 
©d;ulb,/, guilt ; (— en),  debt; 
fcf>ulb  an  etroaS  fein,  to  be 
to  blame  for  anything, 
©dmle,  f.  (-n).  school. 
©dEffiler,  m . (-§ ; — ),  pupil, 
scholar,  school-boy. 
©cf)ufter,  m.  (-§;  — ),  shoe- 
maker, cobbler, 
fdjiitteln,  to  shake, 
fdjiuad)  (-er),  weak,  infirm. 
©d)it>ad)e,  f (-n),  weakness, 
infirmity. 

©cfjmager,  tn.  (-§;  “),  bro- 
ther-in-law. 

©dfnoalbe,  f (-tt),  swallow, 
fcfjnffiren  (App.  L.),  to  fester, 
fc^roars  (“er),  black. 


fcfjroeigen  (120),  to  be  silent, 
keep  silence. 

©djroeigen,  n.  (-§),  keeping 
silence,  (act  of)  silence, 
©djroeij  (bie,  gen.  ber 
©djtneij),  Switzerland, 
fd&raellen  (124;  fein),  to  swell, 
fdfjroer,  heavy,  hard,  difficult, 
fdjtuerlicl),  hardly,  scarcely, 
©cfjroefter,  f (-n),  sister. 
f$wimmen  (158),  to  swim. 
©#nriirtmen,  n.  (-3),  swim- 
ming  (act  of), 
fcfjnnnben  (144),  to  vanish. 
f#tt)ingen  (144),  to  swing ; fi# 
— , to  leap,  bound, 
fcfjtooren  (13 1),  to  swear, 
fdfnuul,  sultry,  close. 

©ee,  m.  (-§;  -en),  lake, 
©eereife,  f (-n),  voyage. 
©egelfcf)iff,  «.(-e§;  -e),  sail- 
ing-vessel, ship, 
fefjen  (181),  to  see,  perceive; 
look,  behold. 

fetyr,  very,  very  much,  ex- 
ceedingly. 

fein,  fetite,  feiit,  his,  its,  one’s, 
fein  (52;  fein),  to  be;  (as 
aux.)t  to  be,  have, 
feit  (46),  since;  — nmnn, 
since  when,  how  long;  — 
acfyt  Shagen,  for  a week 
past. 

feitbem',  conj .,  since, 
felbft,  self ; even, 
fenben  (99),  to  send, 
©ermette,  f (-n),  table- 
napkin. 

feijen,  to  set,  put,  place;  ft# 
— , to  seat  one’s  self,  sit 
down. 

fief),  fron.  refi.  acc.  and dat.y 
one’s  self,  himself,  herself, 
itself,  themselves ; to  him- 
self, themselves,  etc. ; re - 
cij>r .,  one  another, 
fie,  she,  it;  her,  it;  they; 
them. 

©ie  (for  bu  and  i^r),  you. 


VOCABULARY. 


419 


ftc&en,  seven. 

©ieb'entel,  n.  (-3;  — ),  se- 
venth part, 
ftebert  (123),  to  boil. 

©ilber,  n.  (-3),  silver, 
firtgert  (144),  to  sing, 
finfen  (144 ; fein),  to  sink, 
finnett  (158),  to  reflect, 
fitjen  (181),  to  sit. 

©flaoe,  vt.  (-n;  -n),  slave, 
©maragb,  vt.  (-e3  ; -e),  eme- 
rald. 

fo,  so,  thus,  in  such  a man- 
ner, indeed  ( not  translated 
in  the  apodosis  to  a condi- 
tional clattse ) ; — ebeit,  just, 
just  now;  — ein,  eine,  eitt, 
such  a. 

fobalb,  as  soon  as. 
fofort,  immediately,  directly, 
fogar,  even. 

©ofyn,  m.  (-e3;  /xe),  son. 
folcb(er),  adj.  and  pron ., 
such. 

©olbat',  vt.  (-en  ; — eit) , sol- 
dier. 

follen  (196-202 ; duty  or  obli- 
gation), to  be  in  duty 
bound,  be  to;  shall;  be 
said. 

©ommer,  vt.  (-3 ; — ),  sum- 
mer. 

fonbern  (after  negatives  on- 
ly), but. 

©ounabenb,  vt.  (-e3 ; -e), 
Saturday. 

©onn t,  f.  (-n),  sun. 
©omttag,  vt.  (-e3;  -e),  Sun- 
day. 

fonft,  else,  otherwise ; — 
nocfy,  any  more,  any  other, 
any  besides, 
fonftig,  other,  different. 
©opf)ic ,f.  (-n3),  Sophia, 
forg'fdltig,  careful ; care- 
fully, 
fpdt,  late. 

lpQjtereit(a/^  — geljen,  188), 
to  take  a walk,  go  for  a 


walk,  go  walking;  — fdE)s 
ren  (x86),  to  go  for  a drive, 
©pajier'gaitg,  m.  (-e3;  -“*), 
walk;  eitten — madden,  to 
take  a walk. 

©pedE,  m.  (-e3),  bacon, 
fpeiert  (120),  to  spit, 
©peifefarte,  f (— rt) , bill  of 
fare. 

fpetfen,  to  eat,  dine, 
©perling,  vt.  (-e3;  -e), 
sparrow, 
fpielen,  to  play, 
fpinnen  (158),  to  spin, 
fpleijjen  (App.  L.),  to  split. 
©prad)e,  f (-n),  language, 
©prcdjtalent',  n.  (— e3 ; — e) , 
talent  for  (learning)  lan- 
guages. 

©prad/ftubium, «.(- 3; -ten), 
linguistic  study, 
fprecfjeu  (167),  to  speak,  say, 
tell ; to  speak  or  talk  to  or 
with. 

©predjen,  n.  (-3),  speaking 
(act  of),  speech, 
©pric^roort,  n.  (-c3;  *er), 
proverb. 

fpriefjen  (123),  to  sprout, 
fpringen  (144;  fein),  to 
spring,  leap,  jump. 

©t.  So'rettj,  m.,  St.  Law- 
rence. 

©taat,  m.  (~e3;  -en),  state, 
©tabt,  f.  (ft),  town,  city, 
©tabt'tljor,  n.  (-e3;  -e), 
town-gate,  city-gate, 
©tabt'ubr,  f (-eit),  town- 
clock. 

©taf)l,  vt.  (-e3),  steel, 
©taitb,  m.  (-e3  ; ut),  stand; 
condition ; ju  — e fomntcn, 
to  be  completed,  be  done  ; 
im  — e fein,  to  be  able,  be 
in  a position  to. 
ftarf  Uer),  strong,  powerful; 
severe. 

ftatt'finben  (144),  to  take 
place,  happen. 


ftedfjen  (167),  to  sting, 
ftecfen  (App.  L.),  to  stick, 
fteljen  (186;  fein  or  fjaben), 
to  stand,  be ; be  situated, 
ftefylen  (167),  to  steal, 
fteigen  (120;  fein;  auf 
acc.),  to  climb,  mount, 
ascend , descend,  get  down 
or  off,  alight. 

©telle,  f.  (-n),  place,  spot, 
ftellen,  to  put,  place,  set  (up- 
right). 

fterben  (159;  fein),  to  die. 
ftieben  (App.  L.),  to  scatter. 
ftiU,  still ; quiet. 

©tirnme,  f (-n),  voice, 
ftinfen  (App.  L.),  to  stink. 
©tocE,  m.  (-e3;  -“e),  stick, 
cane. 

ftoren,  to  interrupt,  disturb, 
trouble. 

ftofjen  (188),  to  push,  kick, 
strike,  bump,  knock, 
©trafje,  f (-n),  street,  road, 
ftreidjeit  (118),  to  stroke, 
ftreiten  (118),  to  quarrel, 
ftreng,  severe;  severely, 
©trid),  vt.  (-e3;  -e),  stroke, 
dash;  eitt  — burcf)  bie 
SJledjnung,  disappointment, 
©front,  m.  (-e3;  -“e), 
stream,  current. 

©trumpf,  m.  (-e3;  *e), 
stocking. 

©tiicf,  m.  (-e3 ; -e),  piece, 
©tiidd^en,  n.  (-3;  — ),  little 
piece,  morsel,  bit. 
©tubent',  vt.  (-en  ; -en), 
student. 

©tubium,  «.  (-3;  ©tubien), 
study. 

ftubieren,  to  study, 
©tubierett,  n.  (-3),  studying 
(act  of). 

©tuljl,  m.  (-e3;  ae),  chair, 
©tunbe,  f.  (-n),  hour,  les- 
son. 

©tunbenjeiger,  m.  (-3;  — ), 
hour-hand. 


420 


VOCABULARY. 


©turnt,  m.  (-c§ ; ne),  storm, 
tempest. 

fubtrafyieren,  to  subtract, 
jitdjen,  to  seek,  search,  look 
for. 

©uppe,  f.  (-It),  soup,  broth. 

ta'beln,  to  blame,  find  fault 
with. 

&ag,  m.  (-e5;  -e),  day;  ac§t 
— e,  a week;  feitadjt — en, 
for  a week  past;  ein  — um 
ben  anbern,  every  other 
(alternate)  day ; alle  brei 
— C,  every  third  day. 
SEa'ge^au'brud),  m . (-e§), 
day-break. 

Saute,  /.  (-n),  aunt, 
tapfer,  brave,  valiant ; brave- 
ly, valiantly. 

Sapferleit,  courage,  va- 
lour. 

S£ajd)e,  f.  (-n),  pocket. 

Saffe,  /.  (-n),  cup. 

Saucer,  m.  (-§;  — ),  diver, 
taueu,  to  thaw. 

Seil,  m.  (-eS;  -e),  part,  por- 
tion. 

teilen,  to  divide,  share, 
teilil,  partly,  in  part;  teil§ 

. . . teit 3,  partly . . . partly. 
Selegrapl/,  m.  (-en;  -en), 
telegraph. 

Seleptyon',  n.  (-§;  -e),  tele- 
phone. 

Seller,  m.  (-§ ; — ),  plate. 
Seppid;,  m . (-e§;  -e),  car- 
pet. 

Seftament',  n.  (-e§;  -e), 
testament,  (last)  will, 
teuer,  dear,  costly. 

S&al,  n.  (-e§ ; ^er),  valley. 
Staler,  m.  (-3 ; — ),  dollar. 
SI) at,  f (-en),  deed;  ex- 
ploit, achievement, 
tfjauen,  to  thaw. 

S^ee,  tn.  (-§),  tea. 

Stjemfe,  f.t  Thames. 


SI)  or,  n.  (-e§;  -e),  gate, 
gateway. 

S^or,  in.  (-en;'-en),  fool. 
S^ron,  tn.  (-e§ ; -e),  throne, 
tfyu.n  (196),  to  do. 

Sf)Ur(e),yi  (-n),  door. 

Sier,  n.  (-e§;  -e),  beast, 
animal. 

Sifd),  m.  (-e3 ; -e),  table. 
Site!,  m . (-§;  — ),  title;  tntt 
— , with  title  (printed  on 
the  back). 

Softer,  f.  if),  daughter. 
Sod)terd)en,  n.  (-3 ; — ),  lit- 
tle daughter. 

Soroutoer,  adj.%  (of)  To- 
ronto, 
tot,  dead, 
toten,  to  kill, 
trdge,  idle,  lazy,  indolent, 
tragen  (186),  to  carry, 
traurig,  sad,  sorrowful,  me- 
lancholy. 

Srauung,  f.  (-en),  marriage 
(-ceremony). 

treffen  (167),  to  hit,  happen 
upon,  meet  with;  hit  upon, 
fall  in  with, 
treiben  (120),  to  drive. 
Sreppe,  f.  (-n),  stairs,  stair- 
case. 

treten  (181),  to  tread,  step, 
treu,  faithful,  true, 
triefen  (123),  to  drop,  drip, 
trinfen  (144),  to  drink. 
Srinfeit,  n.  (-§),  (act  or  ha- 
bit of)  drinking. 

Srinf'gelb,  n.  (-e§;  -er), 
drinking-money,  gratuity, 
tip. 

trot)  (223),  in  spite  of. 
trotjbem'  10 a<3,  in  spite  of 
what. 

Srun/fenbolb,  m.  (-e3;  -e), 

drunkard. 

Sud),  n.  (-e§  ; ■“er  and  -e), 
cloth. 

Su'genb,./  (-en),  virtue. 


tt. 

ixber,  ft.  (-§ ; — ),  evil, 
fiber  (65),  over,  above,  at, 
through,  by  way  of;  fyeute 
— brei  2Sod)en,  this  day 
three  weeks. 

fiberfyaupt',  in  general,  gene- 
rally ; as  a matter  of  fact, 
at  any  rate. 

fi'berntorgen/the  day  after  to- 
morrow. 

fiberrc'bcu,  to  persuade, 
fiberfeij'ai,  to  translate;  in3 
£>eutfd)e  — , to  translate  in- 
to German. 

iYberaiefyer,  m.  (-§;  — ), 
overcoat. 

fibrig,  remaining,  left  over; 
ba3  ilbrigc,  the  remainder, 
what  is  left;  — bleibeu,  to 
be  remaining  or  left, 
ilbung,  f.  (-en),  exercise; 
practice. 

Ufer,  n.  (-§;  — ),  bank, 
shore. 

UI)r,  f*  (-en),  clock,  watch ; 
unx  oier  — , at  four  o’clock ; 
tote  oiel  — tft  e3?  what 
o’clock  is  it  ? 

unntbg'lid),  impossible  ; id) 
famt  — , I cannot  possibly, 
ttn'redjt,  n.  (-e§),  wrong;  — 
Ijaben,  to  be  (in  the)  wrong, 
unfer,  unfere,  unfer,  our. 
unten,  below,  down-stairs, 
unter  (65),  under,  beneath, 
below  ; among;  — ber  9ie* 
gierung  (Slifabet^,  in  the 
reign  of  Elizabeth, 
unterne^'men  (167),  to  un- 
dertake. 

Unterne^'men,  n.  (-§), 
enterprise,  undertaking. 
Un'terfc^ieb,  m.  (-e3  ; -e), 
difference. 

Un'toafjrfieit,  f.  (-en),  un. 

truth,  falsehood, 
un'toa^rfd^einli^,  improba. 
ble. 


VOCABULARY. 


421 


un'roeit  (gen.),  not  far  from, 
un'gufrieben,  discontented, 
dissatisfied, 
ur'teilen,  to  judge. 

U.  f.  1©.,  abbrev.  for  tmb  fo 
ineiter,  and  so  forth,  etc. 

8. 

Safer,  nt.  (-§;  tL),  father, 
©erbergen  (159),  to  conceal, 
hide. 

©erbremten  (99),  to  burn,  con- 
sume with  fire. 

©erberben  (159),  to  spoil 
(intr.) ; — (weak),  to  spoil 
(tr.),  injure. 

©erbriefjen  (123),  to  vex. 
Sereiitigten  ©tauten  (bie), 
pi.,  The  United  States. 
©ergeben§,  in  vain. 

©ergelteu  (159),  to  requite, 
reward. 

©ergeffen  (181),  to  forget. 
Sergniigeit,  n.  (-6),  pleasure, 
delight,  amusement. 
S3erfjaltni§,  «.(-fe3 ; -fc),  cir- 
cumstance. 

©erfyei'raten  (fi$  ©tit),  to 
marry. 

©erfaufen,  to  sell  ; biefe§ 
£au3  ift  ju  — , this  house  is 
for  sale. 

©erlaffen  (188),  to  leave,  de- 
sert, quit;  fid)  — auf  (-f- 
acc.),  to  rely  upon,  depend 
upon. 

©erleiben,  to  render  disagree- 
able, spoil. 

©erlefjen,  to  hurt,  wound 
©erlieren  (13 1),  to  lose. 
JBerluft,  nt.  (~e§ ; -e),  loss, 
©erinieten,  to  let,  rent, 
©ermittelft  (gen.),  by  means 
of. 

©erveifen,  to  go  on  a jour- 
ney. 

©erreift,  absent  on  a journey, 
©erfammeln,  to  collect,  as- 
semble. 


©erfcfireiben  (120),  to  pre- 
scribe. 

©erfdjtuenben,  to  squander, 
waste. 

©crfd)iDinben  (144;  fein),  to 
disappear,  vanish. 
©erfpvecf)en  (167),  to  promise. 
©erftel)en  (186),  to  under- 
stand ; fic§  — auf  (-|-  acc .), 
to  be  a judge  (of), 
©erfiorbcn,  deceased, 
©erfudjen,  to  try. 

S3ert©anbtc,  in.  and f.  (adj . 

subst.),  relative. 

©erjeil)en  (120 ; dat.),  to  par- 
don, excuse. 

S3erjeif)ung,  f.  (-en),  pardon, 
forgiveness;  urn  — bitten, 
to  beg  pardon. 

©er$tneifelu,  to  despair. 
33ettcr,  in.  (-3 ; -n),  cousin, 
©tel  (me!)r,  meift),  much, 
many,  a great  deal  of;  t©ie 
— Uf;r,  what  o’clock. 
©ieHeicfjt',  perhaps,  possibly, 
©ielmal,  ©ielntal3,  many 
times,  frequently,  often, 
©ter,  four. 

Siertcl,  n.  (-§;  — ),  fourth 
part,  quarter. 

SSicrtelftun'be,  f.  (-n),  quar- 
ter of  an  hour. 

©icrjetyn,  fourteen;  — £age, 
a fortnight. 

Sioloncell',  n.  (— ; -e),  vio- 
loncello. 

33ogcl,  m.  (-§;  tL),  bird. 

©oil  (gen.  or  ©on),  full, 
©olfen'bcn^o  finish, complete, 
©on  (46),  of,  from,  by,  about, 
concerning. 

©or  (65),  before,  of,  in  front 
of,  ago;  — acf)t  £agen,  a 
week  ago. 

©orbei,  over,  past. 
©oibeige!)en  (188),  to  go  by, 
pass  by. 

©orberciten  (ftcf)),  to  prepare 
(for,  auf  -|"  acc.). 


©ovfa^ren  (186  ; fein), 
drive  up  to  the  door,  etc. 
©orgefjen  (188;  fein),  to  go 
(or  be)  fast  (of  a time- 
piece). 

©or'geftern,  the  day  before 
yesterday. 

©orfjaben,  to  contemplate,  in- 
tend. 

SSorfiaug,  nt.  (-e§  ; H),  cur- 
tain. 

©orig,  preceding,  last, 
©orldufig  (adv.),  temporarily, 
for  the  present. 

©orlefen  (181 ; -f-  dat.  0/ per- 
son), to  read  to. 

SSormunb,  nt.  (-e§  ; -“er), 
guardian. 

SBorrat,  nt.  (-e§;  -“e),  stock, 
provision. 

©orficbtig,  cautious,  prudent. 
S3orftabt,  f.  (~e),  suburb, 
©orftelleu,  to  present,  intro- 
duce. 

©ortcilljaft,  advantageous, 
©oriiber,  past. 

©oriiberfliefjen  (131;  fein),  to 
flow  past. 

©oriibergeljen  (188;  fein),  to 
go  past,  pass  by ; ant  £aufe 
— , to  go  by,  go  past,  the 
house. 

©orjiefjen  (13 1),  to  prefer. 

S3. 

roadjfen  (1S6),  to  grow. 
2Bagcn,  in.  (-3  ; —),  waggon, 
carriage. 

TOtigen  (131,  B.),  to  weigh. 
t©dl)len,  to  choose,  select. 
ioa§v,  true,  real ; nid)t  — ? 
am  (I,  etc.)  not?  is  it  not 
so? 

tocifjren,  to  last,  continue, 
rodljrenb  (gen. ; 223), during; 
while. 

2Baf)r))ut,  /.  (-en),  truth. 
i©af)rfd>einlid)  (adv.),  pro. 
bably. 


422 


VOCABULARY. 


®aifenfjau5,  *.  (-e§;  *er), 

orphan-asylum. 

SSalb,  m.  (-e§ ; "er),  forest, 
wood. 

SBanb,  f.  ("e),  wall. 
2Banb(e)rer,  m.  (-5 ; — tra- 
veller. 

mann?  when? 
warm  ("er),  warm, 
warten  (auf  -J-  acc.),  to  wait 
for. 

marum,  why,  wherefore. 
wa§,  what,  that  which,  which, 
that ; — fur  ein,  eine,  ein, 
what  kind  of  a,  what, 
waf  ten  (186),  to  wash. 
2Bct|]er,  n.  (-§  ; — •),  water; 

ju  — > by  water, 
webeu  (13 1),  to  weave. 
wed&felSaft,  changeable, 
mecfen,  to  wake,  awake, 
waken. 

SBed'u^r,  /.  (-en),  alarm- 
clock. 

meber,  neither;  — . , . nodj, 
neither  . . . nor. 

SBeg,  m.  (-eS;  -e),  way,  road ; 
fi<#  ouf  ben  — nta<$en,  to 
set  out,  be  off. 

wegen  {gen. ; 223),  on  account 
of,  because  of,  for  the  sake 
of,  for. 

SBeif),  n.  (-e§;  -er),  woman; 
wife. 

meidjen  (118),  to  yield. 

2Beibe,  f.  (-n),  pasturage, 
pasture. 

2Bei§na$ten,  pi.,  Christmas, 
meil,  because. 

SBcin,  m.  (-e§;  -e),  wine, 
meinen,  to  weep,  cry. 
SBeinfarte,  f.  (-n),  wine- 
card. 

JtfCife,  adj .,  wise. 

SBeife,/!  (-n),  manner,  mode, 
way;  auf  biefe  — , in  this 
way. 

meifen  (120),  to  point  out, 
show. 


meifj,  white, 
meit,  far. 

metier,  farther,  further. 
SBetjen,  m.  (-3;  — ),  wheat, 
merger,  meldje,  mel$e3,  rel. 
pron.,  who,  which,  that; 
interrogative  adj.,  which? 
what  ? ; — , adj.  (in  excla- 
mations), what  a ! what ! 
SBelt,  f (-ett),  world;  auf 
ber  — , in  the  world, 
mem,  dat.  0/ mer,  to  whom? 
menben  (99),  to  turn;  fid)  — , 
to  apply  (to,  an  -f  acc.). 
menig,  little,  few. 
menn,  when,  whenever,  as 
soon  as ; if ; — and),  even 
if. 

mer,  who;  he  who,  who- 
ever; who? 
mer&eit  (159),  to  sue. 
mer  ben  (159),  to  become, 
grow;  (as  aux.  of  the  pass- 
ive voice,  112-114),  to  be; 
— au3,  to  become  of. 
merfen  (159),  to  throw. 

2Ber!,  n.  (-e3  ; -e),  work, 
raeffen,  whose  ; whose  ? 
roe3f)alf>,  wherefore?  why? 
2Better,  n.  (-3),  weather;  6ei 
btefem  — , in  this  weather, 
tuibcr  (acc.  ; 34),  against, 
contrary  to. 

nrie,  how;  how?;  — fefyr 
aucfj,  however  much, 
mieber,  again,  once  more, 
nue'berfeljen  (181),  to  see 
again,  meet  again. 
SBte'berfeficn,  «.(-§),  meeting 
again  ; auf  — , good-bye  till 
we  meet  again, 
miegen  (13 1),  to  weigh. 
2BiU)eInt,  m.  (-§),  William. 
SBille,  m.  (-rt3),  will ; wish ; 
um  . . . miUen  (gen.),  for 
the  sake  of. 

2Binb,  m.  (-e3 ; -e),  wind, 
roiitben  (144),  to  wind, 
mittbig,  windy. 


Winter,  m.  (-3;  — ),  winter. 

mir,  we. 

mirflid),  adv .,  really,  truly. 
SBirtin,  f.  (-nen),  hostess; 
landlady. 

miffen  (196),  to  know  (said 
of  knowledge)  ; nid;t  bafj 
td;  mufjte,  not  that  I know 
of. 

2Biffenfc$aft,  f.  (-en),  sci- 
ence. 

miffentlid),  knowingly. 

U30  ? where  ; where  ? 

2Bocl)e,  (-n),  week, 
mol; I,  pred.  adj.,  well  (of 
health)',  mir  ift  nid;t  — gu 
3Hut,  I do  not  feel  well;  — , 
adv.>  well,  then,  indeed,  I 
suppose  ; ja  — , yes,  to  be 
sure. 

mofynen,  to  dwell,  live,  reside. 
2Bo^nung,/  (-en),  dwelling, 
house,  residence, 
motten  (196-202),  to  will,  de- 
sire, wish,  want,  intend, 
mean,  like;  — ©ie  ein 
©Ia3  SBaffcr?  will  you 
have  a glass  of  water  ? 
moran,  whereon,  on  which, 
on  what,  of  wdiat. 
morauf,  whereon,  on  which, 
for  which,  on  what. 
morau3,  wherefrom,  from 
what,  of  what. 

morin,  wherein,  in  which,  in 
what. 

2Bort,  n.  (-e§;  tfer  and  -e), 
word. 

moriiber?  about  what?  at 
what  ? over  what  ? 
munbern  (fid&),  to  wonder,  be 
astonished  (at,  ii&er  -j- 
acc.) ; e3  munbert  mi<# 
(imjers.),  I wonder. 

SBuufd;,  (-e§ ; H),  wish, 
mitnf  d;en,  to  wish,  desire, 
want ; ©liicf  — , to  congra- 
tulate, wish  success. 

2Burnt,  m.  (-c§;  ^er),  worm. 


VOCABULARY. 


423 


SBurjel (-n),  root. 

2B ut,f,  rage,  fury, 
nrutenb,  furious. 

3. 

jaf)Ien,  to  pay. 

3afj;t,  m.  (-e§;  u e),  tooth. 
3abnroel),  u.  (-e§),  tooth- 
ache, 
geljn,  ten. 

3eid)en,  n.  (-§  ; — ),  sign, 
geigen,  to  show, 
geiljen  (120),  to  convict. 

3eit,  f.  (-cn),  time  ; ju  alien 
— ett,  in  all  ages. 
3eititnfl,y!  (-cn),  newspaper, 
gevreifjen  (118),  to  tear  (to 
pieces). 

jerrinnen  (158),  to  vanish, 
run  away  (of  liquids). 


jiefjen  (131),  to  draw;  pull, 
take. 

3immer,  n.  (-§  ; — ),  room, 
ju  (46),  to,  at ; — meinem 
Dnfel,  to  my  uncle’s;  — 
berfelben  3ett/  at  the  same 
time;  adv.,  too;  closed, 
shut. 

gubringeit  (99),  to  pass,  spend 
{said  of  time). 

3ucfer,  m.  (-§),  sugar. 
§ucrft,/  first,  first  of  all. 
gufolge  {gen.  or  dat. ; 223), 
in  consequence  of,  accord- 
ing to.  [fied. 

jufrieben,  contented,  satis- 
3ng,  m.  (-e§  ; -“e),  train, 
guntadjen,  to  shut,  close, 
juriidbringen  (99),  to  bring 
back. 


guriidbleiben  (120;  fein),  to 
remain  behind;  remain  at 
home. 

juriieff ommen  (167), to  return, 
come  back. 

guriidlcgcn,  to  put  by,  layup, 
jufammen,  together, 
gufammeuftofjen  (188),  to  col- 
lide. 

gufdjiden,  to  send  to  {dat.). 
jufebliefjen  (123),  to  lock  up, 
fasten,  shut. 

3med,  m.  (-e§ ; -e),  aim,  ob- 
ject. 

gwei,  two. 
jroeiten§,  secondly, 
jnrittgen  (144),  to  force, 
jtnlfdjen  (65),  between, 
jtnolf,  twelve. 


ENGLISH  — GERMAN. 


Note.  —The  government  < 

A. 

able,  faf)ig,  gefd)idt;  to  be 
— , fottnen,  196 ; im  ©tarts 
be  fein. 

about,  prep,  (around),  um, 
34,  226,  {a) ; (the  person), 
bet,  46,  226,  {d)  ; adv., 
(nearly),  ungefciljt* ; etrna, 
226,  {b),  {c)\  to  be  — to, 
im  Segriffe  fein. 
above,  prep .,  liber,  65. 
absent,  abruefenb  ; — -mind- 
edly,  j erftr eut. 
abuse,  v.,  mifjljan'belu. 
accept,  annefymen,  167. 
accompany,  begleiten 
(tr.). 

account;  on  — of,  roegen, 
223;  Ijalb(en),  briber,  223 ; 


of  verbs  is  given  only  where  it 

on  that  — , beSroegen,  be§s 
Ijalb. 

accusation,  21nflage,_/!  (-n). 
accuse  (of),  aitflageit  {gen. 
of  thing),  befd;ulbigen 
{gen.  of  thing). 
accustomed,  geroofynt ; to  be 
— , bie©eu>of)nfyeit  fjabert. 
acknowledge,  atterfennen, 
(99)- 

acquaintance,  93e!anntfd;aft, 
f.  (-en);  to  make  the  — 
of,  fennett  lernen. 
acquit  (of),  Io3fpred;en  (167; 

gen.  of  thing). 
act;  to  — amiss, tnifj'Ijaubeln. 
add.  abbieren. 
address,  subst .,  2lbreffe,  f- 
(-n). 


differs  from  English  usage. 

address,  v.,  aitreben. 
admire,  beunutbem. 
advance,  uorriiden  {intr.). 
advantage,  SSorteil,  m.  (-e<3  ; 

-e). 

advantageous,  oor'teilljaft. 
advice,  9iat,  in.  (-e§). 
advise,  raten  (188 ; dat.). 
affair,  ©acfje,  f.  (-n). 
afraid;  to  be  — (of);  fic§ 
fiirdjten  (oor  -j-  dat.). 
after,  nad),  46. 
afternoon,  !Kad)mittag,  tn. 
(-e§  ; -e). 

afterwards,  ttadjfjer,  fjentad), 
barauf. 

again,  roicber,  normal*, 
against,  ttriber,  gegen,  34. 
ago,  uov  {Prep.  -{*  dat.),  65  ; 


424 


VOCABULARY. 


many  years  — , cor  oielcn 
Safyren ; a week  — to-day, 
§eute  nor  a<f)t  £agen. 
agreeable,  angenelmt. 
ail,  fetyleit;  what  — s you? 

toaa  fetylt  $l)nen? 
alas!  ad) ! 

all  (the),  all,  21  Ilea ; aller,  aHe, 
allea ; — the  same,  einerlei. 
allow,  evlanbcn(dat.) ; laffen, 
188;  to  be  — ed,  biirfen,  196. 
Alma  (river),  2llnta,  f. 
almost,  faft,  beinal)e. 
alone,  allein. 

along,  Idnga,  entlang  (223, 
18,  19). 

alphabet,  Sllpljabet',  «.  (-ea; 
-e). 

already,  fcf)0n. 
also,  au$. 
always,  immer. 

America,  Slmerifa,  n.  (-a), 
amiss ; to  act  — , nufj'^ans 
beln,  209. 

among,  amongst,  unter,  65. 
a,  an,  eitt,  eine,  ein. 
ancient,  alt ; the  — s,  bie 
Sllten  ,pl. 
and,  ttnb. 

anecdote,  Slnefbote,  f.  (-tt). 
angry,  bbfe;  be  — at,  bofe 
feitt  auf  (+  acc.). 
animal,  £ier,  n.  (-ea  ; -e). 
another  (a  different  one),  dll 
anberer;  (one  more),  nod) 
ein,  etne,  ein. 

answer,  subst.,  Slntroort,  f. 
(-en). 

answer,  v.,  antioorten  ( dat .) ; 
beantroorten  {acc.  of 
thing , dat.  of  Pers.). 
answering  (act  of),  Slnttoor* 
ten,  n.  (-a), 
ant,  Slmeife,  y (-n). 
any  ( partitive , 2,  2) ; irgenb, 
ein,  eine,  ein ; —thing,  ir* 
genb  ettoaa,  ettcaa;  — 
thing  but,  nid)ta  iceniger 
«U;  pi .,  tceld)e,  einige; 


not  — body,  not  — one,  me* 
tnanb ; not  — , fein,  feine, 
f ein. 

apartment,  ©emad),  n.  (— eS ; 
•“er). 

appear,  f<f)einen,  erfcl)einen, 
120. 

apple,  Slpfel,  m.  (-§ ; •“) ; 

tree,  Slpfelbaum,  m. 

(-e§ ; *e). 

apply  to  anyone,  fid)  an  je* 
rnanben  (acc.)  toenben,  99. 
appoint  (as),  ernennen  (99; 
gum,  gur). 

approval,  23eifall,  m.  (-ea). 
April,  Slpril',  m.  (-§). 
architect,  2lrd0iteft',  nt.  (-en; 
-en). 

arm,  2lrm,  m.  (-ea;  -e); 

— s,  pi .,  SBaffen. 
army,  Slrrnee,  f (-n). 
arrival,  Slnfunft,  f (ue). 
arrive,  aulommeit  (167;  fein). 

art,  Jlunft.y.  (^e). 

article,  Slrti'fel,  m.  (-§  ; — ). 
artillery,  Slrtillerie,  f ; ©e* 
fdOiifc,  n.  (-ea). 

artist,  jfiin  filer,  m.  (-§  ; — ). 
as  (241,  8-n),  ala ; toie ; fo  ; 
ba;  — soon  — , fobalb 
(icie) ; — a,  ala  ; — . . . 
— , (eben)fo  . . . trie  or  ala. 
ascend,  auffteigen,  fteigen, 
120. 

ashamed;  to  be  — of,  fi<f) 
fdjdmen  (gen.  or  iiber  -f- 
acc.). 

ask,  fragen  (1S6) ; — for, 
bitten  (181,  um);  oerlangen 
(nacb). 

asking  questions  (act  of), 
ftragen,  n.  (-a), 
assert,  bel)aupten. 
assist,  beifte^en  (186;  fein; 
dat.). 

astonish ; to  be  — ed  (at),  fi<$ 
nmnbern  (uber  -f  acc.). 
astonishing,  erftaunenb. 
at  (of  locality),  in,  an,  auf, 


gu,  227  (a) ; (oj  time)  um, 
gu,  bei,  227,  (b)\  (of  price) 
um,  227,  (c);  not  — all, 
gar  nid)t ; — my  brother’s, 
bei  meinem  83ruber; — 
last,  — length,  enblid). 
attack,  v .,  angreifen,  118. 

2litgriff,m.(-ea;-e). 
attempt,  subst.,  SSerfud),  m. 

(-cs ; -e). 

attendant,  23egleiter,  m.  (-a ; 
-). 

attention,  Slufmerffamfeit; 
to  pay  — , 2ld;t  geben 
(181 ; auf  + acc.). 
attentive,  aufmerffam. 
August,  Sluguft',  m.  (-a), 
aunt,  £aitte,  f.  (-n). 
author  (of  a particular  work), 

SSerfaffer,  m.  (-a;  — ). 
autumn,  £erbft,  m.  (-ea ; -e). 
avoid,  nteiben,  cermeiben, 
120. 

away,  fort,  abioefenb ; — 
from  home,  con  §aufe. 

B. 

back,  adv.,  guritdf. ' 
bad,  badly,  fd^ledE )t. 
bag,  ©ad,  m.  (-ea;  ^e). 
bank,  93anf,  f.  (-en). 
bark  0>f  trees,  etc.),  23aunt* 
rinbe,/ 

basket,  £orb,  m.  (-ea ; ^e). 
battery,  S3aiterie,  f.  (-n). 
battle,  ©d;lad;t,y  (-en). 
be,  fein  (52);  iccrben  (159; 
as  aux.  of  passive , 112, 
R.  5);  fteljcn  (186);  there 
is,  there  are,  ea  giebt,  ea 
iff,  etc.,  220;  (of  health) 
fid^  beftnben  (144);  how  are 
you?  mie  ge^t  ea^^nenii 
I am  to,  idf)  foil, 
bear,  subst.,  S3  dr,  m.  (-en; 
-en). 

bear  (bring  forth),  v.t  ge# 
baren  (167). 
beat,  v.,  fd()lagen  (186). 


VOCABULARY. 


425 


beautiful,  fd^iJtt;  the  — , b ct§ 
©djone. 

beauty,  ©c^on^ei t,  f.  (— en). 
because,  roeit ; ba. 
become,  toerben  (159) ; fteben 
(186;  dot.). 

bed,  Sett,  n.  (-e3;  -en);  to 
go  to  — , ju  Sette  gefyen, 
fid)  fcfdafen  legett;  in  — , 
ju  Sette. 

bee,  ^8iem,f.  (-n). 
beef,  Stinbfleifcb,  n.  (-e§). 
beer,  Sier,  n.  (-e3;  -e). 
before,  prep.,  nor  (65 ; dat. 

or  acc.)]  conj beoor; 
ebe  (bafj). 

beg  (ask),  bitten  (181 ; for, 
um);  to  — pardon,  urn 
Ser^eibung  bitten;  — (for 
alms),  betteln. 

beggar  (-man),  Settler,  m. 
(-5;  — •);  — woman,  Sett? 
Ux\w,f  (-nen). 
begin,  anfangen  (18S);  be? 
ginnen  (158). 

behave,  fid)  betragen(i86). 
behind,  Winter  (65 ; dat.  or 
acc.). 

believe,  glaubett  (dat.  of  per- 

SOfl). 

belong  (to),  geboren  (dat.). 
beloved,  geliebt,  inert, 
below,  prep.,  unter  (dat.  or 
acc. ; 65) ; unterbalb  (gen.] 
223) ; adv.,  unten. 
besides,  adv.,  aufjerbem. 
between,  jmifc^en  (dat.  or 
acc. ; 65). 

beverage,  ©etrauf,  n.  (-e§; 
-e). 

bid,  v.  (order),  fyeifjen  (188). 
big,  grofs. 

bill,  9lecbnung,  /.  (-en). 
bird,  Sogel,  in.  (-3;  u). 
bird-cage,  Sogelbauer,  n. 

H;  -) 

birth -day,  ©eburtStag,  m. 
(-c3 ; -e) ; as  a — -present, 
Sum  ©eburtStag. 

28 


bishop,  Sifdjof,  m.  (-e3 ; ^e). 
bite,  v.,  beifjen  (118). 
bitter,  bitter, 
black,  adj.,  fcbtnarj  (utr). 
black,  v.  (0/ boots),  inidjfen. 
blame,  v.,  tabeln. 
blindly,  blinblingS. 
blow,  v.,  blafen  (188). 
blue,  blau. 

board ; on  — (of  a ship),  am 
Sorb. 

boat,  Soot,  n.  (-eS;  -e  or 
Sote). 

bodily,  forperlicb. 
bombard,  bombarbieren. 
bone,  £nod)en,  m.  (-3;  — ). 
book,  SudE),  n.  (-e3 ; *er). 
bookseller,  Sudjfjanbler,  m. 
Hi  -)• 

born,  part.,  geboren  (167). 
borne;  having  been  — down 
by  the  stream,  com  ©tro? 
me  fortgeriffen. 
botanist,  Sota'nifer,  m.  (-3; 
-). 

both,  beibe;  alle  beibe,  bei? 
be3. 

bough,  21ft,  m.  (e3;  -“e). 
Boston,  Softon,  «.(-§);  the 
— train,  ber3ug  non(nad)) 
Softon. 

boy,  £nabe,  m.  (-n;  -it), 
brave,  tapfer. 
bread,  Srot,  n.  (-e3  ; -e). 
break,  bredEjeit  (167);  — 
through,  einbred)eit. 
breakfast,  v.,  friibftucfen; 

subst.,  ^rubftucf,  n.  (-e3). 
bridge,  Snide,  f.  (-11). 
bring,  bringen  (99);  bolen; 
to  — with  one,  — along, 
mitbringen;  to  — in,  ber? 
einbringett;  to  — up,  ber? 
aufbringen. 
broad,  breit. 

brother,  Sruber,  m (-3;  a). 
brother-in-law,  ©d^mager,  m. 
(-*;  *). 

build,  bauen. 


building,  ©ebaube,  n.  (-3; 
— )i  (act  of),  Sauen,  n. 
(-3). 

bullet,  flugel,  f (-n). 
burn,  brennen  (99;  intr.)] 
oerbremten  (99;  tr.  and 
intr.). 

business,  ©efdEjaft,  n.  (-e§ ; 

-0. 

business -matter,  ©efdfjaftS* 
angelegeubeit,/.  (-en). 
but,  aber;  allein  (241,  1); 
foitbern  (only  after  a ne- 
gative, 236,  R.  1). 
button,  jlnopf,  m.  (-e§;  -“e). 
buy,  faufen. 

buying  (action  of),  JTaufeu,  n. 
(-*)■ 

by,  228 ; (near  by),  bei  (dat.) ; 
(of  agent  with  pass,  voice ) 
non  (dat.)’,  (of  means  or 
instrument)  buret)  (acc.), 
mit  (dat.) ; — rail(way), 
mit  ber  ©ifenbafjn. 

C. 

call  (out),  rufen  188;  (name), 
neitnen,  99 ; be  — ed,  bei* 
fjeit,  188. 

call,  subst.  (visit),  SefudEj, 
m.  (-e3 ; -e). 
can,  fbnnen,  196-202. 
cannon,  Jtanone,/.  (-n). 
capable,  fat)ig  (gen.,  or  -f- 
ju). 

capital,  subst.,  ^auptftabt,/! 
(*e). 

cardinal-point  (see  point), 
care,  21c$t,  f. ; to  take  — , fidE) 
in  2ldC)t  netjmen  (167) ; do 
you  — to?  §aben  ©iefiuft? 
for  all  I — , meinetmegen. 
carpet,  £eppid),  m.  (-e3;  -e). 
carriage,  SBagen,  m.  (-3; 
-). 

carry,  tragen,  186 ; to  — up, 
binauftragen. 
case,  [fall,  m.  (-e3;  ce). 
castle,  ©cblofc,  n.  (~e3;  ^er) 


426 

cat,  Jlafce,  f.  (-n). 
catch,  fangen,  188;  — cold, 
fief)  erfalten. 

cause ; to  — to,  Ictffen  (188 ; 
-f-  in/in.). 

celebrate,  feiern;  — d,  be* 
riifjmt. 

century,  ^a^rbunbert,  n. 
(-e3;  -e). 

certain,  — ly,  gemijj,  feben* 

falls. 

chair,  (Stub!,  (-e3 ; -“e>. 
chancellor,  dangler,  m.  (-3; 
->. 

change,  v.  tr.,  anbern  ; v. 

intr. , fid^  (ittbevn. 

Charles,  $arl,  m.  (-3) ; little 
— , ^arlcben,  ».  (-3). 
charming,  adj.,  reijenb 
cheap,  biUig. 
cheese,  &afe,  m.  (-5  ; — 
cherry,  -ftirfdjc,  (-n). 
chicken,  §u§tt,  n.  (-e3  ; *er). 
child,  £inb,  k.  (-e3;  -er). 
Christmas,  2Beif)nacf)ten,  pi* 
church,  £ird)e,  f.  (-it). 
Cinderella,  Sffc^enputtel,  »., 
(-5). 

city,  Stabt,  f (“c). 
claim  to  be,  mollen,  196. 
clear,  Elar. 
clever,  gefc^icft. 
climate,  JMitttct,  #.  (-3). 
climb  up,  f)inauf!Iettern. 
cloak,  Sftantet,  «t.  (-3 ; *). 
clock,  Ufyv,  f.  (-en). 
close,  jumaefjen;  fcblie&en, 
SufdjUe&en,  123. 
cloth,  ^ud),  *.(-e3;-e  or“er\ 
clothes,  ilfeiber,  n.  pi-  {see 
&U  ib). 

cloud,  %&oVte,f.  (-n). 
coachman-,  $utfd)er,  m.  (-3; 

coal,  Rofylt,  f.  (-11). 
coat,  9tod,  m.  (-e3 ; He). 
coffee,  ilaffee,  in.  (-3). 
cold,  fait  ( :Ler) ; to  catch  — , 
fid)  erfcUtttt* 


VOCABULARY. 


colour  f$farbe,  f.  (-n). 
combat,  Jlampf,  w.  (~e3  ; -“e). 
come,  f ommen  (167;  fein); 

— in,  ^ereinfommeit;  — 
here,  bierberEommcn  ; — 
down,  beruntertommen  ; 

— out,  f>erau$f ommen ; — 
back,  jitriteff  ommen  ; — 
again,  roieberf  ommen ; what 
is  to — , ba3  23e»orftef)enbe. 

coming  (act  of),  fommen,  n. 

(-*)• 

command,  v.,  befeljlen  (167  ; 
dat .). 

commandment,  ©ebot,  n., 
(-CS ; -e). 

company,  ©efellfdjaft, 

(-en). 

complain,  flagen  (ttber  -4- 

acc .). 

complete,  noHftanbig. 
concert,  ^on^ert',  n.  (-e3 ; 

-e). 

condition,  35ebingung,  f 
(-en). 

confusion,  SSermirrung,  f. 

(-en);  23efiiirjung,/.  (-en). 
congratulate,  ©liicf  tounfdjen, 
grain lieren  {dal.). 
conscious,  beroufjt  (4"  gen.\ 
consequence ; in  — of,  $Us 
forge  (223). 

consider,  betrad)ten;  fjalten 
fiir,  188. 

consist  (of),  befiefien  (auo), 
*86. 

contented,  jufrieben. 
contradistinction,  ©egenfa§, 
m.  (-e3 ; -“e). 

contrary  j on  the  — , im  ©e* 

genteif. 

convent,  JUofter,  n.  (-3  ; •“). 
convince  (of),  iiberjei^gen 
{gen.  of  thing). 
cool,  adj, , Eii£)[. 
copy,  snbst.y  exemplar*,  ». 

(-e3;  -e);  v .,  abfd)reiben, 
120. 

corner,  <Scfex  f.  (-nj. 


correct,  adj.,  rtc$Hg. 
cost,  v.,  foften  (-f-  acc.  or 
dat.  of  person). 
counsellor,  Jiatgeber,  m.  (-3; 
-). 

Count, subst.,  ©raf,  m.  (-en; 
-en). 

Countess,  ©rcifiu,  f.  (-nen). 
country,  £anb,  n.  (-e3 ; -“er); 
in  the  — , auf  bem  Sanbe ; 
— man,  S3auer,  m.  (-n 
or  -3  ; -n). 

couple,  s4$aar,  n.  (-e3 ; -e). 
courtier,  £ofling,  m.  (-e3 ; 

-e). 

cousin,  Setter,  m.  (-3;  -n). 
cover,  v.,  beefen. 
create,  fd)affen,  186. 
creditor,  ©laubiger,  m.  (-3  ; 
-). 

creep,  frieefyen,  123. 
crime,  Serbrec^en,  n.  (-3 ; 
-). 

crop,  crops,  ©rnte,  f 
cry  (call),  rufen,  188;  (weep), 
meinen. 

cup,  ^affe,  f.  (-n). 
curtain,  Sor^ang,  in.  (-e3  ; 
■“c). 

cut,  fcbneiben,n8 ; — off,  aD* 
fd;netben ; to  — one’s 
hand,  fid)  in  bie  &anb 
fd>neiben. 

D. 

danger,  ©ef a br,  f (-en). 
dangerous,  gefabrUcf). 
dare,  ftdb  unterfteben,  180; 
bitrfen,  196. 

daughter,  £od)ter , f.  (-). 
day,  Sag,  in.  (-e3 ; -e) ; in 
broad  — light,  bei  belUn* 
Sage, 
dead,  tot. 

deal ; a great  — of,  mel. 
dealer,  &iinbler,  tn.  (-3,* 
-). 

dear,  lieb,  teuer. 
dearly-bought,  teuer. 


VOCABULARY. 


427 


decide,  intr .,  ftd)  entfcbliefjen, 
123 ; — d,  adj .,  entfcbieben. 
defence,  S3erteibiguug,  /. 
(-cn). 

definition,  definition,  /. 
(-en). 

deserve,  oerbienen. 
desire,  Serlangen,  n.  (-3; 

-);  2uft ,f(H). 
desperate,  nersweifelt. 
devote,  roibmen. 
diamond,  diamant',  m.  (-3 
<?r-en;  -en). 

dictionary,  2BijrterE>udj,  n. 
(-e3;  -^er). 

die,  fierben  (159;  fetn). 
difference,  Unterfcbieb,  nt. 

(-e§;  -e). 
difficult,  fcbwer. 
dig,  graben,  186. 
diligence,  $Ieifj,  m.  (-e3). 
diligently,  fleifjig. 
dinner,  2)littag§effen,  n.  (-3  ; 
-)• 

disagreeable,  unangenebm. 
disappoint,  enttiiufc^en. 
discover,  entbecfen. 
discoverer,  ©ntbecfer,  m.  (-3; 
— ). 

discovery,  ©ntbecfung,  f. 
(-en). 

disgrace,  ©djanbe,  f.  (-n). 
displeased,  unjufrieben. 
dissatisfied,  unaufrieben. 
distant,  entfernt. 
disturb,  ftovett. 
diver,  dauber,  nt.  (-3 ; — ). 
divide,  teilen. 
divine,  gottlid). 
do,  ttjun  (196);  (make),  nta* 
(ben  ; (as  aux.  is  not  trans- 
lated by  a separate  form  ; 
see  31,  R.  3)  ; how — you 
— ? wie  g et)t  e3  Sbnen? 
doctor,  doctor,  in.  (-5 ; 
dofto'ren) ; (physician), 
Strjt,  nt.  f-e3 ; *c) ; that  is 
Dr.  B.,  ba3  ift  ber  doftor 
to. 


dog,  £unb,  nt.  (-e3;  -e). 
dollar,  dealer,  nt.  (-3 ; — ). 
door,  dE)iir(e),  f.  (— cit) ; at 
the  — , an  ber  df)ur(c). 
doubt,  subst.t  gweifel, 

(-*;  -)• 

doubt,  v.,  jioeifeln  (an  -f  j 
dat.)\  I have  no  — of  it, 
id;  l;abe  feinengweifel  bas 
ran. 

down,  bentnter ; — -stairs, 
unten. 

dozen,  du|enb,  n.  (-e5;  -e). 
draw,  jiebeit,  131;  jeidbnen. 
dress,  $leib,  n.  (-e3  ; -er). 
dress,  v.  tr.,  anfleiben;  v. 

intr.,  fid)  anfleibeit. 
drink,  trinfen,  144 ; — (of 
beasts'),  faufen,  123. 
drive,  v.  tr.,  treiben,  120; 
intr.,  (go  in  a conveyance), 
fabren  (186;  fein) ; go  for 
a — , fpajierett  fabren. 
driving  (act  of),  fabren,  «. 
(-§). 

drop,  dropfen,  nt.  (-3 ; — ). 
drown,  intr. ; be  — ed,  ers 
trinfen,  144. 

duke,  £eraog,  in.  (-e3 ; -e  or 
*e). 

during,  toabrenb  (gen. ; 223). 
duty,  ^flidjt,/.  (-en). 
dwelling-house,  2Bobltbau3, 
n.  (-e3;  *er). 

E. 

each,  jeber,  jebe,  jebe3 ; — 
other,  einanber. 
eagle,  2tbler,  m.  (-3 ; — •). 
ear,  £f)V,  n.  (-e3 ; -en). 
early,  friib. 
earn,  oerbienen. 
earth,  ©rbe,  f. ; — -quake, 
©rbbeben,  n.  (-3;  — ). 
east,  Oft(en),  nt. 
easy,  — ily,  leicbt. 
eat,  effen,  181;  frcffett,  i8r, 
(said  of  beasts). 

effort,  Ulnfirengung,/  (-en), 


93etniibung,  f.  (-en) ; 23er* 
fucb,  m.  (-3;  -e). 
either,  entroeber ; — ... 

or,  entweber  . . . ober. 
elect  (as),  ermablen  (sum), 
elm,  Ulutc,  f.  (-n). 
else,  or  — , fonft. 
embarrassment,  33erlegen# 
beit,  f.  (-en). 

emperor,  &aifer,  m.  (-3;  — ). 
endure,  au3fteben,  186. 
enemy,  §eiub,  m.  (-e3; 
-e). 

engaged,  oerfagt;  I have  an- 
other engagement,  I am  — 
elsewhere,  icb  bin  anber3* 
wo  nerfagt. 

English,  englifd);  — (lan- 
guage), ©nglifcb  (be3  ©ng* 
liftben);  into  — , in3  ©ng* 
fil'd)  e. 

Englishman,  ©nglcinber,  nt. 

H;  -). 

enjoy,  geitieften  (123 ; gen. 

or  more  generally  acc.). 
enough,  genug  ; be  — , suf- 
fice, geniigen. 
err,  irren. 

escape,  entflieben  (13 1 ; dat.). 
esteem,  acbten. 
etc.,  U.  f.  n).  (abbreviation 
for : unb  fo  roeiter). 
Europe,  ©uropa,  n.  (-3). 
even,  adv.  fogar,  felbft;  not 
— , nicbt  einmaF;  — if, 
tnenn  aud). 

evening,  2lbenb,  m.  (— e§ ; — e). 
ever,  je,  female, 
every,  jeber,  jebe,  jebe3 ; 
—body,  —one,  jebermann, 
jeber,  jebroeber,  jeglidjer ; 
— week,  aHe  acbt  dage. 
everywhere,  iibcralf. 
evil,  subs t.,  93ofe3,  n. 
exactly,  gerabe,  eben. 
examination,  ©jarnen,  n.  (-3 ; 
~). 

examine,  unterfudb'en,  beob'« 
acbten. 


428 


VOCABULARY. 


exceeding,  — ly,  §5cf)ft,  fe§r, 

(iufjerft. 

except,  aufjer  (dat. ; 46). 
excuse,  v.,  entfdjulbigen  (tr.), 
perjeiljen  ( dat .) ; subst. , 
Gntfdjulbigung,./!  (-en). 
exercise,  subst.,  2lufg  abe,  f. 
(-n). 

expect,  enparten. 
expense,  Soften,  pi. ; at  the 
— of,  auf  ftofien. 
eye,  Sluge,  n.  (-3;  -n). 

F. 

fail  (in  business),  faHieren. 
fall,  fallen  (x88;  fein). 
family,  f^awilie,  _/.  (-n). 
famine,  £un'ger3not,  f 
far,  roeit;  as  — as,  bi3  na<$ 
(dat.) ; not  — from,  unfern, 
unroeit  (gen. ; 223, 23,  24). 
farewell,  Scbetpoljl,  n.  (-3). 
fast  (quick),  gefc^nunb, 
fcbneU. 

father,  Slater,  m.  (-5;  ^). 
favour,  Gef alien,  m.  (-3 ; — ). 
fear,  *yurd)t,  f. ; for  — , au3 
$urd)t. 

feather,  'J-eber,./*.  (-n). 
February,  ^ebruar,  m.  (-3). 
feel,  ffifylen  ; (perceive),  etnps 
finben,  144;  v.  intr . (of 
health ),  fi$  befinben ; gu 
Sttute  fein;  I — ill,  ntir  ift 
fd)lecl)t  ju  2Jhtte. 
few,  tnenig,  tpenige;  a — , 
einige,  ein  paar. 
field,  $elb,  n.  (-e3 ; -er). 
fight,  fedjten,  124;  ftreiten, 
118. 

fill,  fallen. 

find,  finben,  144 ; — out,  au5* 
finben;  — again,  tmebers 
finben. 

fine,  fd&on. 

finger,  finger,  m.  (-3 ; — ). 
finish,  pollen'ben  ; to  have 
— ed  (with),  fertig  fein 
(mit) ; — ed,  fertig. 


fire,  fetter,  «.  (-3 ; — ). 
first,  adj .,  ber,  bie,  ba3  erfte; 
adv .,  juerft,  erften3 ; — of 
all,  juerft. 

fish,  $ifcf),  m.  (-e3 ; -e). 
fishing,  ^yifdjen,  n.  (-3). 
fit  for,  — to,  gut  ju. 
five,  fiinf. 

flatter,  fcfmteidjeln  (dat.). 
flatterer,  o$meic§ler,  m.  (-5; 

fleet,  subst.,  $lotte,  f (-n). 
floor,  ^ufiboben,  m.  (-3  ; **). 
flour,  2ftel)l,  n.  (-e3). 
flow,  v.,  fliejjen,  123,  fein. 
flower,  S3lunte,  f.  (-n). 
fly,  fliegen  13 1,  fein;— away, 
roegfliegen. 

follow,  folgen  (fein  ; dat.). 
foot,  f^ufj,  m . (_e§ ; -^e). 
for,  229,  prep,  (in  behalf  of), 
far,  acc.,  34  ; (of  purpose) 
8U,  dat.,  46;  — reading, 
jurn  JSefen;  (of  past  time) 
feit,  dat.,  46 ; — three  days 
(past),  feit  brei  Sagen;  (of 
fit.  time)  auf,  acc.,  229, 
(b),  2;  — three  days  (to 
come),  auf  brei  Sage, 
forbid,  »erbieten(i3i;  dat.y. 
force,  jroingen,  144 ; to  be 
— d,  obliged  (to),  miiffen, 
196-202. 

ford,  f$?urt,  f.  (-en). 
forest,  23alb,  m.  (-e3 ; -“er). 
forgery,  S3erfalfcfmng,  f. 
(-en). 

forget,  pergeffen,  181. 
forgive,  pergeben  (181;  dat.). 
former,  jener,  jene,  jene3. 
fort,  %t\tt,f  (-n). 
fortieth  (part),  Sierjigftel,  n. 

Hi—)- 

fortnight,  nierje^n  Sage, 
fortunately,  glficflid&enpeife ; 
glfidlid&er  SBeife. 

fortune,  good , Glfid,  n. 

(-e  3). 
four,  pier. 


fox,  $uc§§,  m.  (-e3;  *e). 
France,  ^ranfreic^,  n.  (-3). 
Francis,  ^ranj,  m.  (-en3). 
Fred(dy),  grife,  m.  (-en3). 
Frederick,  §riebricf),  m. 
H)  ; Frederick-street,  bie 
$riebrid)ftrafje. 
free,  frei. 

freeze,  13 1,  frieren. 

French,  frangofifd);  — (lan- 
guage), ^ranjbfifdfj,  n. 
(be3  ^ranjofifdjen). 
fresh,  frifd). 

Friday,  ftreitag,  m.  (-e3; 

-e). 

friend,  $reunb,  m.  (-e3 ; 
-e). 

friendless,  freunblo3. 
friendly,  freunblid). 
friendship,  $reunbf(f)aft,  f. 
(-en). 

frighten  (terrify),  erfdjrecfen ; 

to  be—  ed,  erfdjrccfeit,  167. 
frog,  $rofd;,  w.  (-e3;  ut). 
from  (direction),  pon,  au3 
(dat.  ; 46) ; (cause)  au3  ; 
(time)  fiber  + acc.,  65; 
a week  — to-day,  I)eute 
fiber  ac§t  Sage ; (disease) 
an,  dat.,  65;  er  ift  an 
biefer  ^ranf^eit  geftor* 
ben,  he  died  of  that  dis- 
ease. 

front;  in  — of;  por  (dat. 

or  acc. ; 65). 
fully,  gang. 

funeral,  S3egrcibni3,  n.  (— fe3; 
-fe). 

furious,  -ly,  ipfitenb. 
future,  $utunit,f. 

G. 

gallop,  galoppieren. 
garden,  Garten,  m.  (-3;  *). 
gardener,  Gartner,  m.  (-3 ; 
-)• 

gather,  fantmeln. 
general,  General',  m.  (-e8; 
-e). 


VOCABULARY. 


429 


generally,  gembplicp 
generous,  freigebig. 
gentleman,  £err  tn.  (-it  ; 
-ett). 

George,  ©corg,  tn.  (-§). 
German,  adj.,  beutfd;  ; — 
(language),  £>eutfcp  tt. 
(beS  S)eutfd§en);  in  — , 
auf  SDeutfd);  into—,  itt3 
£>cutfcp. 

Germany,  $)eutfcpanb,  n. 
(-*). 

get  (become),  toerben,  159. 
girl,  SDlabcpn,  n.  (-§;  — ). 
give,  geben,  181;  — up,  auf* 
geben. 

glad,  frol)  (gen.) ; be  — , fid; 
fveuett ; lam—,  eS  freut 
mic§ ; I should  be  — to, 
should  like  to,  id;  ntbcpe 
gern. 

glass,  ©ta§  n.  (-e§;  “er). 
glove,  £anbfcpp  tn.  (-e§  ; 

-e). 

go,  gepn  (188;  fein);  reifen; 
— away,  toeggepn,  forts 
ge^en;  — back,  juriicf* 
gel;en;  —out,  (pn)au§s 
ge^ett;  — down,  I;  in* 
untergepn;  — up,  pn* 
aufgepn;  — past  the 
place,  an  einern  Sptafce  nor* 
iibergepn;  —for,  fetch, 
plen. 

goal,  3iel,  n.  (-e§  ; -e). 

God,  god,  ©ott,  tn.  (-e§; 
“er). 

Goethe,  ©oetp,  tn.  (-5). 
gold,  subst. , ©olb,  n.  (-e§). 
gold,  adj .,  golden,  golben. 
good,  gut  ; be  — enough, 
pben  ©ie  bie  ©iite ; — 
morning,  guten  SJlorgen. 
goodness,  ©life,/! 
graceful,  -ly,  aitmutig. 
grand-parents,  ©rofjeltern, 
//• 

grapes,  £rauben,  pi. 
grass,  ©ra§,  n.  (-e§;  “er). 


grateful,  banfbar. 
great,  groB  (“er,  groBt). 
green,  griin;  subst.,  ©riln, 
*.  (-§). 

grind,  f<f)Ieifen,  118. 
ground,  SBobcit,  tn.  (-5); 
©rbe,/. 

grow,  itmdifen,  186;  toerben, 
159- 

guess,  erraten,  188. 
guest,  ©aft,  m.  (-e§;  “e). 

H. 

habit,  ©etooppit,./:  (-en); 
to  be  in  the  — of,  bie  ©es 
tooppit  pben  ju,  etc. ; 
pfregen. 

half,  adj.,  plb  ; — an  hour, 
eine  plbe  ©tunbe. 
half,  subst.,  £cilfle,  f.  (-n). 
hand,  §anb,  f.  (-“e). 
handsome,  fd;on. 
handwriting,  ^anbfcpift,  f. 
(-en). 

hang,  v.  tr.,  pngen;  v. 

intr .,  pngen,  188. 
happy,  glucHicp 
harbour,  $afen,  nt.  (-§ ; “). 

hard,  fdjtoer. 
hardly,  faunt. 

hare,  £afe,  tn.  (-n;  -n). 
harvest,  subst.,  Csrnte,  f. ; v., 

ernten. 

haste,  ©ire,/;  to  make—, 
eilen. 

hat,  £ut,  tn.  (— e§ ; “e). 
have,  pben,  24;  fein,  52,53; 
laffen,  188,  200,  7;  to  — 
to,  be  obliged  to,  miiffen, 
196-202  ; will  you  — a cup 
of  tea?  mollen  ©ie  eine 
£affe  £pe? 
hay,  §eu,  n.  (-e§). 
he,  er  ; ber;  — who,  berje* 
jenige  toelcpr,  etc.,  toer. 
head,  flopf,  tn.  (-e§ ; “e). 
health,  ©efunbpit,_/! 
hear,  pren;  to  — say,  fagen 
pren. 


hearing,  ©ePr,  n.  (-eS). 
heart,  §era,  n.  (-en§  ; -en); 

by  — , auStoenbig. 
heat,  §ip,  f. 
heath,  £eibc,  f.  (-n). 
heaven,  £>immel,  tn.  (-§;  — ). 
heavy,  farcer;  — ily,  farcer; 
(of  rain)  ftarf ; heaviest  of 
all,  am  allcrfd;ioerften. 
help,  subst.,  §ilfe. 
help,  V.,  plfen  (159;  dal.); 
it  cannot  be  — ed,  e§  Id^t 
fidf)  nidp  dnbern. 

Henry,  §einricp  tn.  (-§). 
her,  pers.  pron.,  fte  (acc.)\ 
ip  (dat.). 

her,  pass,  adj.,  ip,  ipe,  ip. 
here,  per. 

hide,  v.,  oerbergen,  159. 
high,  pep  I;opr,  pd;ft  (loses 
C in  inflexion);  to  think 
— ly  of,  oiel  fatten  non, 
188. 

him,  ip  (ace.),  if»m  (dal.). 
himself  (he),  er  felbft  ; (to) 
— , fid)  (acc.  or  dat.). 
his,  pass,  adj.,  fein,  feine, 
fein. 

his,  poss.  pron.,  feiner,  fei* 
ne,  feine§;  ber,  bie,  ba3 
feine;  ber,  bie,  ba8  fei* 
nige. 

hoarse,  pifer. 

hold,  plten,  x88;  — toge- 
ther, apammenplten. 
holiday,  ft-eiertag,  tn.  (-e§ ; 

-e);  — s,  geri en,//. 
home,  £eim  at,  f.  ; adv ., 
nac§  £aufe;  at  — , ju 
^aufe;  to  go—  ,na$  §aufe 
gepn,  188. 

honest,  eplicp  reblicp  auf* 
rid^tig. 

honey,  £onig,  tn.  (-e§). 
hope,  subst.,  Jooffnung,  f 
(-en);  t/.,  pffen. 
horse,  ^Pferb,  n.  (-e§ ; -e). 
hospital,  ^ofpital,  ©pital, 
n.  (-eS;  “er). 


43° 


VOCABULARY. 


hostess,  ©irtin,./!  (-nen). 
hot,  §eife. 

hour,  ©tunbe,  f.  (-it) ; — 
-hand,  ©tunbenjeiger,  tn. 
H;  -). 

house,  £au3,  n.  (-e3  ; -“er) ; 

at  your  — , bei  lyljnen. 
how,  tuie  ; — do  you  do  ? 
tote  gebt  e5  wie 

beftitben  ©ie  fid^  ? 
however,  aber;  jebod). 
howl,  ^eulen. 

human,  menf^Iid; ; — being, 
2Jtenf$,  tn.  (-en ; -en). 
hundred,  fjunbert  ; subst 
4?unbert,  n.  (-e3;  -e). 
hunger,  hunger,  tn.  (-3). 
hungry,  §ungrig;  be  — > 
hunger  tyaben. 
hunter,  ^dger,  m.  (-3;  — ■). 
hunting  (act  of),  $agen,  n. 
(-3);  (chase)  Sagb,/.;  g° 
— , auf  bie  ^agb  gefjen. 
huntsman,  S^Ser/  (-8* 
-)• 

hurry,  @ile,  f.  ; I am  in  a — , 
id)  bin  in  ber  @iie,  id)  fyabe 
e3  eilig. 

hurt,  v.f  oerlefcen. 
husband,  2Jlann,  tn.  (-e5; 
■“er). 

hussar,  §ufar,  tn.  (— cit  or  -5; 
-en). 

2. 

I,  i<*. 

ice,  Cri3,  n.  (-e5). 

idea,  3bee,y".,  ©ebanfe,  tn. 

(-n3;  -n). 
idle,  faul,  trage. 
idleness,  idling,  9)tufjiggang, 
tn.  (-e3). 

if,  tnenn ; (whether),  ob. 
ignorant,  unnriffenb. 

ill,  EranE; health,  fd)Ied)te 

©efunb^eit,  yi 
illness,  flranEEjeit,  f.  (-en). 
imagine,  fid)  (< iat .)  benfen  (99, 

a)* 


immediately,  (fo)gleid). 
importance,  2Bid;tigEeit. 
important,  midjtig,  bebeu* 
tenb. 

impossible,  unmogltd). 
in,  in,  dat .,  65;  auf,  dat.y  65, 
230,  («)  ; — the  country, 
auf  bem  Sanbe. 
inch,  goll,  m.  (-e 3). 
induce,  beraegett,  131,  B. 
industrious,  — ly,  fleifjig. 
industry,  $Ieifj,  tn.  (-e3). 
inform,  mitteilen. 
inhabitant,  ©inniofyner,  m. 
(-8  5 -)• 

ink,  £inte  or  ®inte,  f. 
innocence,  Unfcf)ulb,  _/! 
inquire,  fid)  erEunbigen,  fra* 
gen,  186. 

inside  of,  innerfyalb  {gen. ; 
223). 

insist  on,  beftel)en  (auf  ~\~ 
acc.). 

instead  of,  ftatt,  anftatt 
{gen. ; 223). 

intend,  beabfidE)tigen,  nor'* 
Ijabeit,  gebenfen  (99,  2). 
intention,  9lbfid)t,  f.  (-en). 
interrupt,  unterbred&'en,  167. 
into,  in  {acc. ; 65). 
invent,  erfinben,  144. 
invitation,  ©inlabung,  f. 
(-en). 

invite,  einlaben,  186. 
iron,  (Sifen,  n.  (-3);  adj ., 
eifern. 

it  (38;  39),  e8;  er ; fie  ; ber, 
bie,  ba3felbe ; in — , bavin ; 
for  — , bafitr ; of  — , ba* 
non  ; with  — , bamit ; to 
— , baju. 

its,  joss.  adj.,  fein,  il)r. 
itself,  e3  felbft. 

J. 

James,  lyafob,  m-  (-5). 
January,  ^anuar,  m.  (-3). 
John,  lyobann' m.  (-3). 
journey,  Jieife,/.  (-n). 


j oyou9,  fvofdid). 

July,  gu'li,  w.  H). 
jump,  fpvingen,  144; 
down,  (leruntevfpringen, 
Elinunterfpringen. 

June,  ^u'ni,  m.  (-3). 
just,  gevabe,  eben ; — now, 
foeben,  — as,  ebenfo. 
justify,  redjtfertigen. 

K, 

kick,  ftofjen,  188. 
kind;  what  — of,  nm3  fiir 
(ein,  eine,  ein) ; of  many 
— s,  melerlei;  adj.,  gut, 
freunblid) ; to  be  so  — as 
to,  fo  gut  fein  unb. 
kindness,  ©ute,  ©iitigEeit, 
tfVeunblidjEeit,  f. 
king,  $onig,  tn.  (-e3;  -e); 
King-street,  bie  ftottig* 
ftrafje. 

kingdom,  $5nigreid), «.  (-e3; 

-c). 

knife,  3Jieffer,  n.  (-3; — ). 
knock  down,  l)erunterfd)la* 
gen,  186. 

know  {of  acquaintance ),  fens 
nen,  99;  {of  knowledge 
acquired  by  mental  effort) 
tuiffeit,  196;  — how,  foits 
nen,  196. 

knowledge,  $enntni3,  f. 

C-fe),  2Biffenf(^aft,/  (-en). 
known,  beEannt. 

Li. 

lady,  Same,  f.  (-n);  young 
— (Miss),  $rciulein,  n. 
(-§;-). 

lake,  ©ee,  tn.  (-3 ; -en). 
landscape,  £aubfd)aft,  f. 
(-en). 

language,  ©prad)e,  f.  (-n). 
lantern,  £aterne,  f.  (-n). 
large,  grofj  (^er,  grofjt). 
last,  Ie§t,  norig ; at  — , enb* 
fid>;  v .,  bauern. 

late,  fpdt. 


VOCABULARY, 


43  I 


lately,  neulidj,  litralid). 

Latin,  subst.,  Satein',  n.  (-§)* 
latter,  the  — , jetter. 
laugh,  la$en>  — (at),  lacfjett 
(gen*  or  fiber  -J-  acc.) ; he 
— s at  (makes  sport  of)  you, 
er  madjt  fi$  fiber  <Sie 
luftig. 

lawyer,  2lbr>olat',  m.  (-en ; 
-en). 

lay,  legett. 
lazy,  faul,  trcige. 
lead,  23lei,  «•  (-e§). 
lead,  v.,  ffil)ren. 
lead-pencil,  23leiftift,  m. 

(-e*;  -e). 

leaf,  matt,  ».  (-e§ ; “er), 
learn,  lenten, 
learned,  adj .,  geleljrt. 
learning  (action  of),  Semen, 
*•  (-§)• 

least ; at  — , t»enigften§. 
leave,  laffeit,  188  ; — behind, 
desert,  abandon,  oerlaffen ; 
— out,  auSlaffen. 
left,  Unf ; be  — , fibrig  blei* 
ben. 

leg,  23eitt,  it.  (-e§;  -e). 
lemonade,  Simottabe,./!  (-n). 
lend,  leiljen,  120. 
lesson,  Slufgabe,./.  (-it) ; Sefs 
tion,  f (-en). 
let,  laffen,  188. 
letter  {0/  alphabet') , 23ud?* 
ftabe,  m.  (-n§;  -n);  (epis- 
tle), S3rief,  m.  (-e§;  -e). 
liar,  Siigner,  m.  (-5;  — ). 
library,  Sibliot^et',/  (-en). 
lie  (be  recumbent),  liegen 
181;  — down,  fief)  tfinlegen. 
life,  Seben,  n.  (-3  ; —). 
lighten  (flash),  bliijcn. 
lightning,  SQlifc,  in.  (-e§;-e). 
like,  mogett,  196-202 ; gent 
Ijaben,  24 ; I should  — , id? 
mod?te  (gent) ; to  — to 
learn,  gent  lenten;  I — 
music,  id)  bin  eiu  'fttcunb 
non  2)iufi! ; how  do  you  — 


London  ? tuie  gefdHt  2$nen 
Sonboit? 

lily,  Silie,  / (-n). 

Limburg,  adj.,  Simbttrger. 
lion,  Some,  (-it;  -it), 
listen  to,  cm£)breit  ( tr .). 
literature,  Siteratur',  /. 
little  {of  size),  ileilt  ; {of 
quantity ) luenig. 
live,  leben ; (dwell),  roo^nett. 
living,  le'benb,  leben'big. 
locality,  ©egettb,  f (-en). 
London,  Sonboit,  it.  (-§) ; 

adj.,  Soitboner. 
long,  adj..  Icing  (“er);  adv., 
laitge  (“r);  have  you  been 
here  — ? fiitb  6ie  fdjon 
laitge  l?ier  ? he  has  not 
been  here  for  a — time,  er 
ift  laitge  nid?t  Ejiex*  geroe* 
fen;  three  months  — er, 
nod)  brei  SRonate ; no  — er 
{lit.,  not  more),  itidjt  rneljr. 
long  for,  v.,  fid)  fefjtten  nad). 
look  for,  fudjen,  fudjen  nad?; 

— like,  au§fel?eit  (toie  or 
tiad?),  181 ; it  — s (appears, 
seems)  like  rain,  e3  fiel?t 
nad)  Siegen  au3 ; — up, 
Ijinauffefjeii,  181. 

lose,  nerlierett,  13 1. 
lost,  oerloren. 
loud,  — ly,  laut. 

Louisa,  Souife  f.  (-n§). 

love,  v.,  lieben. 

lower,  unter,  nieber  ( adjs .). 

M. 

magnificent,  prddjtig. 
majesty,  9ftajeftat',  f.  (-en). 
make,  maefyen. 
man,  3Rann,  in.  (— eS ; uer); 

— (human  being),  -Dlenfd), 
m.  (— eit ; -en);  — kind, 
2Jlenfd),  m. ; men  (soldiers), 
©olbaten ; little  — , Sttann* 
lein,  n.  (-§ ; — ). 

manikin,  9ftannlein,  n.  (-§; 

-). 


manner,  SSeife;  in  that — , 
auf  bie  2Beife. 

many,  oiele;  — a,  — a one, 
manner,  manege,  mandjeS. 
March,  SJlarj,  tn.  (-e§). 
Margaret,  Uftargarete,  f. 

(-nS). 

market,  SJiarlt,  m.  (-e§ ; 
*e). 

marriage  (-ceremony),  £rau* 
ung ,f.  (-en). 
married,  oerf)eiratet. 
marry,  Ijeirateit,  nerljeirateit 
(fid?  mit). 

marsh,  <3utttpff  m.  (-e§ ; -“e). 
Mary,  fUtaric,/  (-it 3). 
matter,  ©ad>e,j^  (-it) ; what 
is  the  — ? roa$  gicbtS  ? toaS 
ift  loS  ? what  is  the  “with 
you?  roaS  fefjlt  lyljnen? 
May  (month  of),  9ttai,  m . 
(-e3  or  -en). 

may,  v.,  bfirfett ; fonnen  ; 

mogett,  196-202. 
mayor,  SBfirgermeifter, 

H;  -). 

me,  mid)  {acc.),  mir  {dat.). 
mean ; in  the  — time,  unter* 
beffen  ; by  — s of,  permit* 
telft;  uermbge, gen.,  223. 
mean,  v.,  meinen;  to — to, 
intend  to,  molleit,  196-202. 
meat,  ^leifd?,  it.  (-e§). 
meet,  v .,  begegnen  {dat.  ; 
fein);  to  go  to  — , entge* 
gen  ge^en  (188;  dat.). 
meeting,  S3erfamntlung,  f. 
(-en). 

mental,  geiftig. 
merchant,  $aufntanit,  in . 

(-e§;  -leute). 
mere,  — ly,  blog, 
merry,  merrily,  luftig. 
messenger,  93ote,  m.  (-n» 
-n). 

metal,  SJletaU',  n.  (-e3  ; -e). 
microscope,  SRifroffop',  «. 
(-e§ ; -e). 

middle,  2RU te,  _/l ; in  the  — 


432 


VOCABULARY. 


of  summer,  mitten  im 

©ommer. 

mile,  93?eile,y.  (-n). 
milk,  9J?ild),  f 
mine,  rneiner,  meine,  meineg ; 
ber,  bie,  bag  meine;  ber, 
bie,  bag  meinige, 
minute,  9)?inute,  f.  (-n);  — 
-hand,  2JZinutenjeiger,  m. 
(~®»  — )• 

misfortune,  Ungliicf,  n. 
(-e§). 

Miss  (young  lady),  ^raulein, 
m.  (-g;  — ). 

mistake,  gebler,  m . (-g; 

-). 

mock,  fpotten  {gen.  or  iiber 
4*  acc. ) . 

moisten,  beneijen. 
moment,  5lugenblicf,  m. 
(-e§;  -e). 

monarch,  99?onardb/,  w*.(-e n; 
-en). 

Monday,  99?ontag,  m.  (-g; 
-e). 

money,  ©elb,  n.  (-eg;  -er). 
month,  9D?onat,  m.  (-eg ; -e) ; 
a — ago,  nor  einem  93?o? 
nat. 

more,  rnefir;  nod);  one 
nod)  einer. 

morning,  93?orgen,  m.  (-eg; 
— );  in  the  — , beg  9)1  or* 
geng ; good—,  guten 931or? 
gen. 

mostly,  meifteng. 
mother,  Gutter,  f (a). 
mountain,  93 erg,  m.  (-eg; 

-e). 

mourning,  £ratter,  f. 

Mr.,  £err,  m.  (-n;  -en). 
much,  ciel;  very  — , feljr; 

as  — , eben  fo  niel. 
music,  93?  it  fit',  f. 
musician,  TOu'fifer,  in.  (-g ; 
-)• 

must,  miiffen,  196-202. 
my ,poss.  adj mein,  meine, 
metn  {also  expressed  by 


dat.  of  pers.  pron.  -f-  def 
art.). 

myself  (I),  (id&)  felbft. 


N. 

name,  subst .,  9?ame,  m.  (-ng; 
-n);  nennen,  v .,  99;  what 
is  the  — of?  trie  beifjt? 
what  is  your  — ? trie  beifjen 
<Sie  ? 

nation,  9iation,y  (-en). 
native  town,  ©eburtsftabt,/ 
(*e). 

natural,  natiirlid). 
naughty,  unartig. 
near,  prep.,  neben  (dal.  or 
acc. ; 65). 
necessity,  9?ot,  f. 
need,  v.,  braudben  ; be  in 
— of,  bebiirfen  (196;  gen. 
or  acc 0 ; in  — of,  bebiirf* 
tig  (gen.). 

neglect,  v.,  oernadblafftgen. 
neighbour,  9? a d) bar,  m.  (-g ; 
-n);  — (fern.),  Dladbbarin 
(-nett). 

neither,  meber;  — . . . nor, 
toeber . . . nod), 
nest,  9?eft,  n.  (-eg;  -er). 
never,  nie ; niemalg ; — yet, 
nodb  nie. 
new,  neu. 

news,  9?adE)ricbt,  f.  (-en). 
newspaper,  geitung,/;  (-en). 
next,  nad)ft  (see  nabe). 
Niagara  Falls,  bie  Niagara? 
$alle. 

niece,  9?id()te,  f.  (-n). 
night,  9?adbt,  f (-^e);  at  — , 
naebtg,  beg  9?ad)tg. 
no,  adj.,  fein,  feine,  feitt; 
adv.,  nein;  — body,  — 
person,  niemanb,  feiner, 
feine,  feineg ; — more,  — 
longer,  niebt  mebr  ; — , 
thank  you,  i<f)  banfe  (%\)s 
nett). 

noble,  ebel. 
noise,  Sarrn,  m.  (-es). 


noon,  HJlittag,  m.  (-eg ; -e). 
north,  9?orb,  m.  (-eg)  ; 9?or* 
ben,  m.  (-g). 

not,  nid&t;  — a,  fein,  feine, 
fein ; — yet,  nodb  nicfjt ; — 
at  all,  gar  nid^t ; are  (you, 
etc.)—?  nid)t  inabr? 
nothing,  ni<J)tg. 
notwithstanding,  ungea^tet, 
gen.,  223. 

novel,  subst.,  Sfomatt',  m. 

(-e«;  -e). 

November,  9?oocmber,  nt. 

(-*). 

now,  jefct. 
nowhere,  nirgenbg. 
nut,  9?uB,y  (H). 

O. 

oak,  @idbe,y  (-n). 
obey,  gebor<5)en  (dat). 
oblige,  oerbinben,  144;  be 
— d or  compelled  (to), 
miiffen. 

occasion,  subst.,  ©elegenbeit, 
f (-en);  v.,  nerurfadjeit. 
o’clock,  Ubr  (invariable)  ; 
what  — is  it?  trie  niel  Ubr 
ift  eg „ 

of  (231),  non,  dat.,  46,  231; 
(material)  aug,  dat. , 46; 
(cause)  an,  dat. ; 231. (^); 
the  treaty  — Paris,  ber 
93ertrag  ju  $arig ; the  bat- 
tle — W aterloo,  b i e S d)  l a d;  t 
bei  2Baterloo ; — the  Alma, 
an  ber  2llma. 
off,  ab. 

offer,  bieten,  13 1,  dat.  of 
pers.-,  anbieten,  131,  dat. 
of  pers. 

officer,  Dffijter,  m.  (-e§  ; 
-e). 

often,  oft  (-‘‘er),  oftmalg, 
maitdbmal. 
oh!  D!  ob! 
old,  alt  (“er). 

on,  232,  auf,  an,  dat.  or  acc., 
65 ; (of  time)  an,  dat.. 


VOCABULARY. 


433 


*32,  (a)  j ( about ) iiber, 

acc.y  65. 
once,  einrnal. 

one,  einS ; ein,  eiite,  eirt ; 
the  small  — , ber,  bie,  ba3 
Jtleine ; — and  the  same, 
ein3;  — and  a half,  cn* 
bertfialb. 

only,  nur;  {of  time)  erft; 
not  — ...  but  also,  nid)t 
nur  . . . fonbern  aud). 
open,  adj.y  offert ; v.,  auf* 
madden. 

opinion,  SDleinmtg,  f (-en). 
opportunity,  ©elegenljeit,  f. 
(-en). 

oppressive,  briidenb. 
or,  ober;  three  — four,  brei 
bi3  trier;  either  ...  — , 
entroeber  . . . ober;  — 
else,  fonft. 

orator,  9iebner,  m.  (-3;  — ). 
order,  v.  (command),  be* 
fefjlen,  167,  dat.  of  pers.  ; 
(prescribe),  oerorbnen ; be? 
ftellen. 

other,  anber  ; every  — day, 
eiiten  Sag  um  ben  unbent, 
otherwise,  fonft ; aitber3. 
our,  adj .,  unfer,  unfere, 
unfer. 

ours,  pron .,  unfer,  unfere, 
unfereS;  ber,  bie,  ba3 
unfere;  ber,  bie,  ba3 
unfrige. 

out  of,  au3  {dat.  ; 46)  ; 

(or  at)  the  window,  junt 
^enfter  f)inau3. 
over,  iiber  {dat.  or  acc. ; 65); 
— there,  — the  way,  briis 
ben. 

overcoat,  U'berrocf,  m.  (-e3  ; 

“e);  U'berjieljer,  m.  (-3; 
own,  adj.t  eigen.  [ — ). 

P. 

paint,  malen ; to  — (other 
than  pictures),  anflreidjen, 

1x8. 


painter,  SDlaler,  m.  (-5  ; — ■). 
painting  (art  of),  'Jttalerei7,./! 
palace,  ^Salaft',  m.  (-e3; 

■“e) ; ©d&Iofc,  n.  (-e3 ; ^er). 
pale,  bleid(). 

paper,  papier,  n.  (-e3;  -e); 

news—,  geitung,/  (_en)- 
paradise,  ^3arabie37,  n.  (-e3). 
pardon,  S3erjei§ung,y. 
parents,  ©Item,  pi.  only. 
Paris,  <£ari37,  n.  {von  $pari3). 
Paris,  adj.  (=  Parisian), 
^arifer. 

part,  Seil,  m.  (-e3,  -e) ; for 
the  most  — , meifien3, 
meiftenteilS. 

party,  ©efellfd;aft,./l  (-ett). 

pass,  v.y  tr.,  {of  time , to 
spend,  etc.),  jubriitgett 
(99,  2);  — (an  examina- 
tion), be ftefyen,  186;  intr.> 
nergefien  (188,  2,  feiit) ; 
oerfliefjeit  (123;  feir) ; — 
through,  burc^fommen 
(167;  fein). 

passing,  adj.y  ooriibergeljen. 

past,  nergangen,  t)oriiber, 
norbei ; to  go  — the  house, 
am  $aufe  uoritbergeljen, 
norbeigefien. 

patient,  jlranfe,  adj.  subst.  y 

m.  f. 

pay,  bejafylen  {acc.  of  thing , 
dat.  of  Pers. \ acc.  of  per s. 
when  pers.  only  is  men- 
tioned) ; — attention,  2ld)t 
geben;  — a visit,  eineit 
23efud;  rnadjcn  {dat.  of 
pers.)  ; bcfudjen  {acc.  of 
pers.). 

paying  (action  of),  SBega^Un, 

n.  (-3). 

peace,  ^riebe(n),  m.  (-n3). 
pear,  93irne,yi  (-n). 
peasant,  S3auer,  m.  (-n  or 
-3 ; -n)l 

pen,  fteber ,f  (-n). 
people  {pl.)y  Seute,  pi.  {no 
sing.)  \ — {indef),  man; 


— say,  man  fagt ; — , na. 
ti®n,  S3oIf,  (-e3 ; -“er). 
pepper,  ^3f effer,  m.  (-3). 
perfect,  — ly,  ganj,  tiolL 
tommen. 

perhaps,  rrieHeidjt7. 
permission,  (5rlaubni3,yi 
permit,  erlauben  {dat.  of 
Pers.). 

person,  ^Serfo n' ,f.  (-en). 
personal,  perfonlid;. 
philosopher,  ^Ijilofopfj7,  m. 
(-en;  -en). 

physician,  SIrjt,  m.  (— e3 ; ^e). 
pick  up,  aufl;ebeit,  13 1. 
picture,  33ilb,  n.  (-c3  ; -er); 

©emalbe,  n.  (-3 ; — ). 
piece,  (Stud,  (-e3;  -e). 
pigeon,  Saube,  f.  (-n). 
pinch,  Ineifen,  118. 
pity,  v.y  bebauern;  it  is  a — , 
e3  ift  fd;abe. 

place,  subst. y ipia§,  m.  (~c3; 
■“e) ; Drt,  m.  (-e3 ; -e  or 
■“er) ; to  take  — , ftattfina 
ben,  144;  in  that  — , ba, 
bajelbft,  bort(cit). 
place,  v.y  ftellen,  feijen. 
plant,  ^Pflanje,^  (-it), 
plate,  Seller,  in.  (-3  ; — ). 
play,  v.y  fpieleit. 
pleasant,  attgeneljm. 
please,  gefallcn  (x88;  dat.); 
(if  you)  please.,  (id;)  bitte, 
menu  icf)  bitten  barf,  ges 
falligft. 

pleasure,  Sergnugen,  n. 
(-3); trip,  (short)  ex- 

cursion, 2Iu3flug,  m.  (-e3; 
■“c) ; to  take  a (short)  — 
-trip,  eiiten  Slusflug  ma< 
d)cn. 

plum,  iflflaume,  f.  (-it), 
poem,  ©ebid)t(  n.  (-e3 ; -c). 
poet,  Sifter,  m.  (-3  ; — ). 
point;  cardinal  — (of  tha 
compass), ^immel3gegent), 
f.  (— en) ; to  be  upon  the  — 
of,  im  SBegriffe  fein. 


434 


VOCABULARY. 


poison,  subst .,  ©ift,  n.  (-e§; 

-e;;  v.,  oergiften. 
policeman,  ^olijeibiener,  m. 
(-§;  — );  ©d)u$mann,  m. 
(-e§;  -leute). 
poor,  arm  (-er). 
position,  ©telle,  f (-n); 

©tettung,/:  (-en). 
possess,  befiljen,  181. 
possible,  moglid). 

post, office,  ^oft,  f — 

-man,  gSoftbote,  m.  (-n; 
-n);  by  return  — , mit 
umgetyenber  $oft. 
postage-stamp,  SBriefmarfe, 
/ (-«)• 

postpone,  anffdjieben,  13 1. 
pound,  Spfunb,  n.  (-e<5). 
power,  £raft,yi  (-^e). 
praise,  v.,  loben;  preifeit, 
120. 

pray,  v.,  beten;  inter j. , bitte! 
precise,  — ly,  geitau. 
prefer,  oorjiefycn,  13 1;  I — 
to  walk,  id)  cjetje  lieber. 
prepare  ; to  — for,  fid)  nor s 
bereiten  auf  ( acc .). 
presence,  ©egemoart,./! 
present,  adj .,  gegemoartig  ; 

for  the  — , fur’s  Csrfie. 
present,  subst.,  ©eid)en!,  11. 
(-eS;-e). 

president,  ifSrafibent',  m. 
(-en ; -en). 

press,  v .,  bringert,  144. 
pretty,  fyiibfcb,  fd)btt;  adv. 

(tolerably),  giemlid). 
prevent,  oerljinbertt. 
price,  ^reiS,  m.  (-e<3 ; -e). 
prince,  ^iirft,  m.  (-en ; -en) ; 

^rinj,  in.  (— eit ; -en). 
prison,  ©efdngni<3,  n.  (-feS  ; 

-fe). 

probable,  probably,  toafir* 
fd)einlid);  probably,  roof)!, 
professor,  ^3rofefjor,  m.  (-3; 
-en). 

promise,  v oerfpred()ett, 

167. 


propose,  norfcblagen,  186. 
proud  (of),  ftolj  (auf  -{- 
acc.). 

proverb,  ©pri^nnort,  m. 
(-e§;  -er). 

province,  ^rooinj',/1  (-en). 
prudent,  norfid^tig. 

Prussia,  ^reufjen,  n.  (-5). 
Prussian,  subst.,  iflreufje,  m. 

(-«;  -n). 

public,  bffentlid). 
punish,  beftrafen,  ftrafen. 
punishment,  ©trafe,  f.  (-n). 
pupil,  ©cfyiiler,  m.  (-§;  — ). 
pure,  rein. 

put  on  (coat,  etc.),  anjie^en, 

13 ! ; (hat),  aufs 

fe^en. 

Q- 

quality,  ©igenfc^aft,  f.  (-en). 
quarrel,  v.,  ftreiten,  n8;fid) 
ftreiten  (mit). 

quarter,  SSiertel,  «.  (-5;  — ■); 
— of  ar.  hour,  S3iertels 
ftunbe,/  (-n). 
queen,  Jlbnigiit, /!  (-nen). 
quick, — ly,  fdptell;  quickly, 
flug§. 

quit,  v.,  oerlaffen,  188. 
quite,  gan$. 


K. 

railway-station,  33aI)nI)of,  in. 
(-e$;  -^e). 

rain,  subst.,  Regen,  m.  (-§) ; 

v.,  regnen. 
raise,  Ijebeit,  131. 
rather,  cl)er,  lieber. 
raven,  Rabe,  m.  (-n  ; -n). 
read,  lefcn,  181 ; to — to, 
oorlefeit  ( dat .), 
reading  (act  of),  Sefen,  n. 
(-§). 

ready,  fertig,  bereit;  readily, 
leic^t. 

reason,  ©rur.b,  in.  (-e§ ; -^e). 
receive  (get),  erljalten,  188; 
befommen,  167  ; — (as  a 


host),  aufnel)men,  167 , by 
receiving,  burd)  Relpncn. 
recover  (from  illness),  ge* 
nefen  (181 ; fein). 
red,  adj.,  rot(-er);  subst.. 
Rot,  n. 

Reformation,  Reformation, 
/ (-en). 

refuse,  intr.,  fief)  toeigern. 
regard,  anfeljen  (x8i;  fur  -j- 
acc .);  betracfyten  (al§). 
regret ; I regret,  e§  tf)Ut  mit 
leib. 

reign,  Rcgierung,/.  (-en). 
relate,  ergatylen. 
related,  nertoanbt  (dat.  or 
mit). 

rely  upon,  fid)  oerlaffen  (188; 
auf  -|-  acc.). 

remain,  bleiben  (120;  fein); 
— at  home,  — behind,  jit* 
ritcfbleibeit;  — over,  ilbrig 
bleiben ; — standing,  fteljen 
(186)  bleiben. 
remarkable,  merftoiirbig. 
remember,  fid^  er  in  item 
(gen.) ; I wish  to  be  — ed 
to  him,  id)  Iaffe  ifpt  grit* 
ten. 

remind  of,  erinnern  an  (-f* 
rent,  v .,  oermieten.  [acc.). 
repeat,  toieber^o'leit. 
reply,  subst.,  Slnttoort,  f. 
(-en). 

reply,  v .,  anttoorteu,  ertoi* 
bern,  oerfe^en. 
report,  v.,  beridljten. 
representation,  23orftelIung, 
/ (-en). 

resemble,  dtjnlidE)  f ein  (dat.) ; 

gleic^en  (118;  dat.). 
reside,  tool) nen. 
resist,  toiberfte'l)en  (186; 
dat.). 

resolve,  v.,  fidl)  entfcfjlieten, 
123. 

rest ; all  the  — , ade  an  bern  ; 
retire  to  — , fi$  fc^Iafen 
(188)  legen. 


VOCABULARY. 


return,  nergelten  (159);  — 
good  for  evil,  oergelte  93o* 
fe3  mit  ©utem ; by  — of 
post,  mit  umgebenber  $oft, 
umgeljenb. 

reward,  subst.,  fioljn,  tn. 
(-e  9). 

rheumatism,  9il)eumati3mu3, 
tn.  (be3  — ). 

ribbon,  33anb,  n.  (— c3 ; “er). 
rich  (in),  reidb  (an  -f~  dat.). 
rid,  lo3;  to  get  — of,  lo3 
roerben  (-j-gen.  or  acc.). 
ride,  reiten(n8);  ( in  a con- 
veyance), faljren  (186). 
riding  (act  of ; not  in  a con- 
veyance), Steitcn,  n.  (-3). 
right  {adj.),  red)t,  (correct), 
ricfjtig;  in  the  — way,  auf 
bie  ridjtige  ©eife;  subst ., 
9ied)t,  n.  (-e3 ; -c) ; to  be  (in 
the)  — , 9led)t  baben. 
righteous,  geredjt ; the  — 
(man),  ber  ©ered)te. 
ling,  subst.,  9ling,  tn.  (— c§ ; 
-e);  — , v.,  lauten  (of  a 
large  bell),  flingelu  (of  a 
small  bell) ; there  is  a — 
at  the  door,  e3  flmgelt. 
ripe,  re  if. 

rise  (get  up),  aufftcfjen,  (186 ; 
fein);  (ascend),  auffteigen 
(120;  fein). 

river,  fttufj,  tn.  (-e3  ; ae). 
road,  ©eg,  in.  (-e3  ; -e); 

©trafje,/;  (-n). 

Roman,  Corner,  tn.  (-5; — •). 
room  (apartment),  ©tube,  f. 

(-n) ; 3immer,  ».(-3;  — ). 
rose,  9tofe,  f.  (-n). 
row,  v.,  rubern. 
run,  laufen  (188;  fein);  — 
after,  nadjtaufen  (i*63; 
fein;  dat.);  — away,  b as 
non'laitfen. 

Russia,  SHufetanb,  n.  (-3). 
Russian,  subst.,  9hlffe,  tn. 
<-n;  -n). 


S. 

sad,  traurig. 
safe,  fitter. 

sailing-ship,  ©egelfdjiff,  n. 
(-e3 ; -e). 

sale;  for  — , ju  uerfaufen. 
same,  adj.  and  pron.,  ber, 
bie,  ba3felbe;  ber,  bie, 
baSjelbige;  ber,  bie,  ba3 
namlidje;  at  the  — time, 
ju  gleidjer  3e't i the—, 
one  and  the  — , eiiterlei. 
Sarah,  6ar a,/.  (-3). 
satisfied,  jufrieben. 

Saturday,  ©onnabenb,  tn. 
(-e 3;-e);  ©am3tag,  tn. 
(-e3;  -e). 

save,  rettcn ; I — d his  life, 
id)  rettete  itym  ba3  Seben. 
say,  fngen;  to  hear  — , fa  gen 
Ijoren;  (assert,  claim  to 
be),  rooUen  (196-202);  to 
be  said,  follett  (196-202). 
scholar  (pupil),  ©djiiler,  in. 

H;  -)• 

school,  ©d)ule,/!(-n); — boy, 
©djuler,  tn.  (-3;  — ). 
scold,  fdjelten,  159. 

Scotland,  ©djottlanb,  n. 
(-3). 

scream,  fdjreiett,  120. 
search  (for),  fudjen. 
seat  one’s  self,  sit  down,  fid) 
fefcen. 

second,  num.  adj.,  jmeite. 
second  (of  time),  subst , ©es 
cunbe,  f.  (-n). 
secret,  — ly,  gel)eim,  ^eim? 
lid). 

see,  fefjcn,  181. 
seek,  fitd)en. 
seem,  fdjeinen,  120. 
self,  felbft. 
sell,  nerfanfen. 
send,  fdjidcn;  — to,  ju? 
fcbiden;  — word  to,  be? 
uadjridjtigen  (acc.of pers.)\ 
— for,  boleit  laffen  (188), 
fd&icfen  na$. 


43  s 

September,  September,  in. 
(-§). 

servant,  ©iener,  tn.  (-3 ; 
— );  3)ienftbote,  tn.  (-n; 

-n);aRagb,/.(*e). 

serve,  bienen  {dat.)  ; — (of 
a meal),  feruieren. 
set,  tr.  (of  a time-piece),  ftels 
len ; intr.  (of  the  sun),  un'» 
tergeljen  (188;  fein);  — 
free,  befreien. 

settler,  Stnfiebler,  tn.  (-3; 

seven,  fieben. 
several,  einige;  etlidje; 

mcljrere. 
shake,  fdjiitteln. 
shall,  foUen  (196-202). 
she,  ftc. 

shield,  ©d)ilb,  tn.  (-e3;  -e). 
ship,  ©d)iff,  n.  (— e3 ; -e). 
shoe,  ©d)uf),  tn.  (-e3;  -e). 
shoemaker,  ©djufter,  tn.  (-3; 
— );  ©d;uljmacf)er,  tn.  (-3; 
-)• 

shoot,  fdjiefjen,  123. 
shop,  Saben,  tn.  (-3;  “). 
shore,  Ufer,  n.  (-3;  — ). 
short,  fur j ; — ly,  ndd)ften3. 
shout,  fctyreien,  120. 
show,  j eigen. 

shutter,  Saben,  tn.  (-3;  — •). 
shy,  intr.  (of  horses),  fcfjeu 
roerben,  159. 

sick,  frattf;  the  — (man),  ber 
Jirnnfe. 

side,  ©cite,  f.  (-n) ; on  this 
— oi,prep.,  bie3feit  (£■*«.; 
223) ; on  that  — of,  prej., 
jenfei t{gen. ; 223);  on  this 
— , adv.}  bie3feit3;  on  that 
— , adv.,  jenfeit3. 
sign,  subst.,  3eid)en,  n.  (-3; 

— );  v.,  unterjeid/nen. 
silence,  ©d)ioeigen,  n.  (-3). 
silent,  fturnm. 
silly,  einf ditig. 
silver,  ©ilber,  n.  (-3). 
since  (241,  12),  prep.,  feit. 


43^ 


VOCABULARY. 


da/.,  46;  adv.,  feitbem; 
conj .,  ba. 
sing,  fingen,  144. 
singer,  ©angering  (-nen). 
single,  einjig. 
sink,  finfen,  144. 
sister,  ©djioefter,./!  (-n). 
sit,  fitjen  (181 ; feirt) ; — 
down,  fid^  fe^en;  — up, 
remain  up,  aufbleiben,  120. 
six,  fecf)3. 

skate,  v.,  ©<f)littfd)ulj  lau* 
fen,  188. 

skill,  ©efd)idlic§feit,/ 
slave,  ©flaoe,  m.  (-n;  -n). 
slay,  toten. 

sleep,  v.,  fcblafen,  188; 

subs/.,  ©d)laf,  m.  (-e3). 
sleighing,  ©d)littenbal)n,  f. 
(-eu). 

slipper,  ^Santoffel,  m.  (-3; 
-n). 

slow,  — ly,  Ian gf ant. 
small,  flein. 
smelt,  fcbmelsen,  124. 
smile,  v.,  lad)  ein;  subst., 
Sad)  ein,  n.  (-3). 
sneak,  fd)Ieid)en  (118;  fein). 
snow,  subs/.,  ©djnee,  m.  (-3); 
v.,  fdjneien. 

so,  fo; — are  we,  mir  finb 
e3  aucf). 

soldier,  ©otbat',  m.  (-en; 
-en). 

some,  einige,  etlidje,  roeldje, 
manege ; etroa3 ; irgenb  ein, 
eine,  ein;  — one,  — body, 
jentanb,  — thing,  — what, 
etroa3;  — where,  irgeubs 
too;  — of  it,  bacon;  for  — 
time  {past),  feit  einiger 
Beit. 

son,  ©of)n,  in.  (-e3;  -“e); 
little  — , ©bfyncfjen,  n.  (-3; 
-). 

song,  Sieb,  ft.  (-e3;  -er). 
soon,  balb  {comp,  sf)cr, 
super l.  am  e^eften);  as  — 
as,  fobatb. 


Sophia,  Sophie,  f.  (-n3). 
sorry;  I am  — , e3  iff  tttir 
leib,  e3  tfjut  mir  Ieib. 
sound,  — ly,  feft. 
sour,  fauer. 

South,  ©iib(en),  m.  (-3). 
Spain,  ©panien,  n.  (-3). 
speak,  fprecfjen,  167,  reben; 
— with  or  to,  fpred)en  ( acc . 
of  pers.). 

speaking  (act  of),  ©predf)en, 

*.  (-*). 

spectacles  (pair  of),  33riUe,/. 
(-«)• 

speech,  9iebe,  f.  (-it), 
spite  ; in  — of,  tro§  ( gen.  ; 
223,  16). 

spoil,  v.  tr .,  ocrleiben. 
sport ; to  make  — of  any  one, 
fief)  iiber  jemanb(en)  {acc.) 
Iuftig  maefyen. 
spread  out,  fid)  oerbreiten. 
spring,  V .,  fpringen  (144; 
fein);  subs/.,  ^riifding,  m. 
(-e3;  -e). 

square  (in  a town),  $Ia§,  m. 
(-e3;  *e). 

St.  Lawrence,  ©anct  Sorenj, 

m. 

stand,  ftetyen,  186. 
start  (for),  abreifen  (nad)). 
state  (condition),  3uftanb,  m. 
(-e3;  H). 

statesman,  ©taat3mann,  m. 

(-e3;  -manner), 
stay,  bleiben  (120 ; fein) ; — 
up,  aufbleiben;  — away, 
fortbleiben. 
steal,  ftefylen,  167. 
steam-engine,  SDampfmafd^is 
n t,f  (-n). 

steamer,  2)ampffdf)iff,  «.(-e3 ; 

-e). 

steel,  ©tafjl,  m.  (-e3). 
stick,  subs/.,  ©tod,  in.  (— e§ ; 

ae). 

still,  adv .,  nocf),  bod^;  nod) 
immer. 

sting,  fted;en,  167. 


stocking,  ©trumpf,  m.  (-c§; 
•^e). 

stop,  v.  intr.,  auffjoren. 
storm,  Sturm,  m.  (-e3;  -e). 
story,  ©efd)id)te,  f (-n). 
stove,  Dfen,  in.  (-3 ; JL). 
stranger,  trembling,  m.  (-e§ ; 

-e);  ^rembe  {adj.  subs/.). 
stream,  ©trom,  m.  (-e3;  -“e). 
street,  ©trafje,  f.  (-n). 
strong,  ftarf  (~er). 
student,  ©tubent',  m.  (-en; 
-en). 

study,  subs/.,  ©tubium,  n. 
(-3;  ©tubien);  (room), 
©tubierjimmer,  n.  (-3 ; — ) ; 

v .,  ftubieren;  — (pre- 
pare) for,  fid)  corbereiten 
auf  (+  acc.). 

studying  (act  of),  subs/.,  ©tu* 
bieren,  n.  (-3). 
submit,  fi^untermer'fen,i59. 
subscribe,  unterfdjrei'ben, 
120. 

succeed,  gelingen,  impers ., 
144;  I — , e3  gelingt  mir. 
such,  f old),  folder,  f oId)e3 ; fo. 
sudden,  — ly,  plofclid). 
suffer,  leiben,  118. 
suffice,  geniigen  {da/.). 
sufficient,  I)inreicf)enb. 
summer,  ©ommer,  m.  (-3; 
-). 

sun,  ©Otttte,  f.  (-n); dial, 

©onnenuljr,  f.  (-en)  ; — 
-set,  ©onnenuntergang,  in. 
(— eS). 

Sunday,  ©omttag,  m.  (-e3; 

-e). 

support,  unterftu§'en. 
sure,  ficfjer;  to  be  — , frei* 
m;  Stoar. 

Switzerland,  bie  ©d^roeij  (bet 
©d)tt>eij). 

T. 

table,  £ifcfj,  m.  (~e3;  -e) 
tailor,  ©djneiber,  m.  (-3;  — ). 
take,  nefjmen,  167;  — a walk, 


VOCABULARY. 


437 


etnen  ©pagiergang  m as 
djen;  fpagieren  gel)en,  188; 
— a voyage,  eine  ©eereije 
madden;  — up,  (bin)aufs 
nel)men;  — care,  fid)  in 
2Id)t  nebmen ; — place, 
ftattfinben,  144;  — cold, 
fid)  crfaltcn. 

talk,  fpred)en  (167;  mil). 

tall,  grofj  (— er,  superl.  grbfjt). 
tea,  Xfyet,  m.  (-3). 
teacher,  Sefyrer,  m.  (-§ ; — ). 
tear  (to  pieces),  gerreifjen, 

1 18. 

telegram,  subst.,  3^epefd^e,_/I 

(-«). 

tell,  fagen  (dat.  of  Per s.  or 
gu) ; crgaf)Icn  {dot.  of 
per  si). 

teller,  ©rgabler,  m.  (-§;  — ). 
tempest,  ©turm,  m.  (-e§ ; 
*e). 

ten,  3el)n. 

terrible,  — ly,  fiird^tcrlid^. 
than,  a 15;  al§  bafj. 
thank,  banfen  (dat.);  no  — 
you,  id)  banfe  (^bnen). 
that,  demonstr.  adj.,  biefer, 
biefe,  biefeS;  fener,  jene, 
jene§;  rel.  pron .,  ber, 
bie,  ba§;  welder,  meldbe, 
tueld)e5 ; demonstr.  pron., 
ber,  bie,  ba§;  conj.,  bafj. 
the,  ber,  bie,  ba5;  adv.,  je, 
befto;  um  fo. 
their,  i$r,  il)re,  ibr. 
them  ( acc .),  fie;  (dat.)  if)nett. 
then,  bann;  since  — , feits 
bent. 

there,  ba ; — is,  — are,  e§  ift, 
e5  finb;  e3  giebt,  220. 
therefore,  barunt. 
thereupon,  barauf. 
they,  fie,  e3  ; ( indef. ),  man. 
thief,  2>ieb,  m.  (-e3 ; -e). 
thin,  biinn. 

think,  benfen,  99,  2;  — of, 
benfrn,  gen.  or  an  -f-  acc. ; 
(believe),  glaubeit;  I should  i 


— so,  id;  foUte  e§  meinen; 

— highly  of,  esteem,  etc., 
riel  f)alten  (188)  non. 

third,  britte. 
thirst,  £)urft,  m.  (-e§). 
thirsty,  burftig  ; to  be  — , 
SDurft  tyaben. 
thirty,  breifjig. 
this,  adj.  and  pron.,  biefer, 
biefe,  biefe£. 

those,  biefenigen;  bie;  jene. 
though,  obgleid;. 
thousand,  taufenb  ; subst., 
£aufeub,  «.  (-e5;  -e). 
three,  brei. 

through,  burd),  acc. ; 34. 
throw,  m erf  en,  159;  fd)mei* 
fjen,  1 18;  — away,  megs 
merfen. 

thunder-storm,  ©emitter,  n. 
(-« ; -)• 

Thursday,  2)onner3tag,  m. 

(-e§;  -e). 
tie,  binben,  144. 
till,  bi§,  34. 

time,  Beit,  /•  (~en)»  (occa- 
sion), 2JiaI,  n.  (-e§;  -e); 
what  — is  it?  mie  riel  Utjr 
ift  e5?  for  the  third  — , 
gum  britten  2JlaIe;  at  the 
right  — , redjtgeitig  ; at  the 
same  — , gu  glei<$er  £eit. 
tired,  miibe. 

title,  £itel,  m.  (-5  ; — ). 
to,  233,  gu  (dat. ; 46) ; (with 
names  of  places)  nad)  (dat.] 
46);  an,  auf,  in  (acc. ; 65, 
233,  2);  — the  concert,  in§ 
£ongert;  (before  inf)  gu, 
272-274;  (of  purpose ) tint 

8»/  273. 
to-day,  §eute. 

to-morrow,  morgen;  — mor- 
ning, morgen  friil). 

too,  gu;  (also),  aud). 

top,  ©ipfel,  m.  (-5;  — ). 
tortoise,  © djilbfr cte,  f 

(-n). 

towards,  gegen  (acc. ; 34). 


town,  ©tabt,./!  (-“e);  — hall, 
fRatl)au§,  n.  (-e5;  ^er). 
tragedy,  £rauerfpiel,  n.  (-e§; 

-e);  £ragobie,  f (-n). 
train  (on  a railway),  3U9/ 

(— eS ; -“e);  Boston  — , ber 
Bug  non  (nad))  23ofton. 
translate,  iiberfe^'en. 
transparent,  burcb'ficbtig. 
travel,  reifeit  (baben,  fein). 
traveller,  SReifenbe,  adj . 
subst. 

treasure,  ©d )a$,  m.  (-e§;  -“e). 
treaty,  SSertrag,  m.  (-e5 ; 

*e). 

tree,  23aunt,  m.  (-e5;  -“e) ; 
little  — , 35aumd;en,  n.  (-5; 

triumph,  Eriumpb',  m.  (-e3; 

-e). 

true,  mabr  ; (faithful),  treu 
(dat.). 

trunk  (of  a tree),  23 aunt* 
ftamm,  m.  (-e§;  -^e). 
trust,  v.,  trauen  (dat.). 
truth,  SBabr^eit,  f (-en). 
try,  uerfudien. 

Tuesday,  $>ien§tag,  m.  (-e3; 
-e). 

two,  gmei;  beibe;  — at  a 
time,  je  gmei ; — and  a 
half,  brittebalb. 

U. 

umbrella,  fRegenfd)irm,  m. 
(-e§;  -e). 

uncle,  Dbeirn,  m.  (-e§  ; -e); 

Dnfel,  m.  (-§;  — ). 
under,  unter  (dat.  or  acc . ; 
65). 

understand,  begreifen,  118 ; 
nerftcben,  186;  to  make 
one’s  self  understood,  fid) 
nerftiinblid)  tnadjen. 
undertaking,  Unterneb'men, 
«.(-§). 

unfortunate,  Uttglttcflid) ; — ly, 
Iciber. 

unhindered,  ungebinbert. 


433 


VOCABULARY. 


United  States  (The),  bie  SSer* 
einigten  ©taaten. 
university,  Itnioerfitat',  f. 

(-C1T). 

until,  conj .,  bi§  (bab). 
untruth,  Unraabrbeit,_/l(-en). 
upon,  ctttf  ( dat . or  acc.  ; 65); 
upper,  ober. 

up -stairs,  oben,  nadb  oben, 
binauf. 

use ; of  no  — , un'rtiiij. 
useful,  niiijlid;;  the  — , ba§ 
Sftuijlicbe. 
utmost,  moglid;ft. 

V. 

vainly,  in  vain,  nergeblicb; 
oergeben§. 

valley,  £ba*/  »•  (-e3;  *er). 
venture,  v.,  raagen. 
verse,  33er§,  m.  (-e§;  -e). 
very,  f eE)r ; recbt;  — much, 
fef>r. 

vex,  argent;  be  — ed  (at),  fid; 

argent  (uber  + acc.). 
victory,  <Sieg,  m.  (-e§;  -e). 
village,  S)orf,  n.  (-e§;  ^er). 
vinegar,  ©ffig,  nu  (-§;  -e). 
violet,  S3eild;ert,  «.(-§;  — ). 
virtue,  Xugenb,  f.  (-en). 
visit,  23efud;,  m.  (~e§;  -e); 
to  be  on  a — at  any  one’s, 
bei  jemanb  auf  23efud;  feirt ; 
v.,  befud;en;  einen  SBefucb 
abftatten,  mac^en  {dat.  of 

pers.). 

visitor;  to  have  — s,  SBefud) 
jjaben. 

voice,  ©timme,  f.  (-n). 
voyage,  9leife,  ^ (-n),  ©ees 
reife,/  (-«). 

W. 

wait  for,  marten  auf  {acc.). 
waiter,  Kellner,  m.  (-§;  — ■). 
walk,  suhst.,  ©pajiergang, 
m.  (-e§  ; 11  e)  ; take  a — , 
einen  ©pajiergang  madden; 
ftmjiereu  geben,  188. 


walk,  v.,  geben,  188 ; fpa* 
giereit  geben. 

walking  (act  of),  ©eben,  n. 
(-§);  <Spa§ierengeben,  n. 

H). 

want,  roiinfcben ; raollen  (196). 
wanting;  to  be  — , fcl;Ien 
{dat.),  ntangeln  {dat.). 
war,  Jtrieg,  m.  (-e§;  -e). 
warm,  — ly,  roarrn  (-er). 
warning,  SBarnung,  f.  (-en ). 
waste,  oerfcbreenben. 
watch,  suhst . , TLf)V,f.  (-en); 
gafcbenubr,  f.  (-en);  v.t 
beraadjen. 
watchful,  raad;fam. 
watch-key,  Ubrfdfjliiffel,  vt. 

H;  -)• 

water,  Staffer,  n.  (-§;  — ). 
waver,  fdbraanfen. 
way,  SB  eg,  m.  (-e§  ; -e) ; 
(manner),  SBeife,  f.  (-tt); 
in  this  — , auf  biefe  SBeife. 
we,  mir. 

weak  (in),  fcbmadb  (an  -f* 
dat.). 

wear,  v.  intr.  (of  clothes),  ftdE) 
tragen,  186. 

weather,  SBetter,  n.  (-§)  ; in 
fine  — , bei  fd^onem  SBet* 
ter. 

Wednesday,  Sbttttraocb,  m. 

H). 

week,  SBocbe,  f.  (-n) ; adbt 
Xage;  for  a — past,  feit 

ad^t  £agen. 

weigh,  intr.,  ttriegen,  131. 
welcome,  raiUfonv'men. 
well,  pred.  adj .,  raobl,  gc* 
funb;  adv.y  gut;  as  — as, 
foraobl  a!3;  — known,  be» 
fannt. 

West,  SBeft(en),  m.  (-§). 
wet,  na§  ("er). 
what,  interrog.  pron.y  raa§  ? 
interrog.  adj.y  raelcber, 
raelcbe,  raelcbeS;  — kind 
of,  raa§  fiir  (cin,  eine,  eitt); 
rel.  pron.  (=  that  which), 


raa§  ; — a!  raelcb ! — is 
that  in  German  ? rate  beifjt 
ba§  auf  SDeutfcb  ? 
when,  interrog. , raann?  JU 
raelcber  $eit?  conj.y  racnn; 
als,  58. 
where,  rao. 
whether,  ob. 

which,  interrog.  adj.y  reels 
dber,  roeld;e,  raeld;e§;  rel. 
pron.,  raelcber,  reel <be,roeL 
cbe§;  ber,  bie,  ba§;  that 
— , raa3. 

while,  whilst,  rodl;reub  (bab), 
iitbeffcn. 

whistle,  pfeifen,  118. 
white,  raeib* 

who,  interrog. , raer  ? rel. 
pron.y  melcbcr,  raelcbe, reel* 
djeS;  ber,  bie,  ba3;  he  — , 
the  one  — , raer. 
whole,  gang;  the  — of, 
ganj. 

whom,  raen  {acc.),  raem 
{dat.). 

whose,  interrog .,  raeffen? 
rel.,  beffen,  tn.  n.  sing.; 
beren,  f.  sing. ; pi. 
why,  raarum  ? xvztyalb  ? 
wide,  breit. 
will,  raoUen,  196-202. 
William,  SBilbelm,  m.  (-§). 
willing ; to  be  — , rao  Hen, 
196. 

wind,  SBinb,  m.  (-e§;  -e). 
windup,  aufjieben,  131. 
window,  ^enfier,  n.  (-§;  — ). 
windy,  raiitbtg. 

wine,  SBein,  m.  (-e§;  -e). 
wing,  ^liigel,  M • (“^  ; — ). 
winter,  Sinter,  m.  (-§;  — ■). 
wise,  roeife;  flug  ("er). 
wish  (for),  raiinfcben. 

with,  234,  mit  {dat. ; 46) ; bei 
{dat. ; 46). 

without,  obne  {acc. ; 34). 
witty,  raifcig- 

wolf,  2Bolf,  m.  (-e§ ; ae). 
woman,  frrau,  f.  (-en). 


VOCABULARY. 


439 


wonder,  ©unber,  n.  (-§;  — ); 
I — , eg  tnunbert  mic§,  id) 
tnunbere  mid)  ; — of  the 
world,  ©ettrnunber, «.  (-g; 
-)• 

wood,  ©alb,  m.  (-eg ; ^er). 
word,  ©ort,  n.  (-eg;  -e  or 
Mex);  to  send  — , Ben afys 
rid)tigen. 

work  (labour), 2lrbeii,_/l(-en); 
(thing done),  ©erf,  n.  (-eg; 
-e) ; v.,  arbeiten. 
world,  ©clt,  f.  (-en) ; in  the 
— , auf  ber  ©elt. 
worth,  adj.t  inert;  — while, 
ber  3JUil)e  inert, 
wound,  vH  nertounben. 


wring,  ringen,  144. 

write  (to),  fd)reiben  (120 ; 

dat.  or  an  acc.  offers.). 
writing  (act  of),  ©cfireiben,  n. 
(-§). 

wrong  ; tc  be  (in  .he)  - , Un* 

red)t  §aben. 


Y. 

yard  (measure),  @Ue,_/.  (-n). 
year,  Safjr,  «•  (-e§ ; -e). 
yellow,  gelb. 

yes,  j a. 

yesterday,  ge'ftern;  — *s,  non 
geftern,  geftrig. 

yet,  no$;  not—,  ttO(§  tu<§fc, 
yonder,  bort» 


you,  38,  40,  t^r ; ©ie;  bu; 

end);  ©ie;  bic^. 
young;  jung;  — man,  $iings 
ling,  m.  (-eg ; -e). 
your,  40,  43,  euer,  eure,  euer; 
bein,  beine,  bein ; 3l)r, 
S^re,  S^r. 

yours,  ber,  bie,  bag  eure,  eu* 
rige;  ber,  bie,  bag  $bre, 
SBnge ; ber,  t>ie,  bag  beine, 
beittige  ; eurer  ; beiner  ; 
$f>rer. 

youth  (time  of),  ^ugenb,  f. ; 
(young  man),  bungling,  m» 

(-eg;  -e). 


INDEX 


*#*  The  references  are  to  the  sections  and  subsections; 
N.  = Note ; R.  = Remark ; O.  = Observation;  p.  = page. 


Abbreviations,  p.  404. 

cbcr,  conj.,  236. 

Ablaut,  105,  R.,  110. 

‘ About/  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  226. 

Absolute  accusative,  255;  ab- 
solute superlative,  of  adjs., 
127,2;  of  advs.,  190,  4-6. 

Abstract  substs.,  take  article, 
44,  1 (b);  plural  of,  66,  3; 
App.  H. 

Accentuation,  p.  10 ; in  com- 
pound verbs,  117,  3,  204, 

205,  3,  208,  209,  212;  of 
compound  adv.  prefixes, 

206,  2,  N.  1. 

Accusative,  use  of,  3,  252- 
255;  place  of,  296,  4;  af- 
ter preps.,  34,  50,  65, 
223,  19,  R.  2 ; expresses 
time,  184,1 ; measure,185, 
4 ; after  reflexive  verbs, 
216;  after  impers.  verbs, 
217, 2, (a),  219, 220;  after 
adjs.,  replacing  gen.,  244, 
R.  1,  2;  double  acc.,  253; 
after  intrans.  verbs,  254; 
cognate  acc.,  254,  1;  ad- 
verbial acc.,  255;  absolute 
acc.,  255,  2;  before  advs. 
of  direction,  224,  1. 

Address,  modes  of,  40,  43, 
47. 

Adjects,  place  of,  296,  1, 
297,  R.  1. 

Adjectives,  when  spelt  with  a 
capital,  pp.  11,  12;  predi- 


cative, not  declined,  14, 
100 ; place  of,  18,  20,  O. 
3,  295,  296,  8 ; attributive, 
decl.  of,  101;  strong,  102, 
weak,  115,  mixed,  116,  ta- 
ble, 121,  general  remarks, 
122  ; place  of,  290,  (b), 
N.  2,  298,  1,  299;  in- 
declinable in  ser,  122,  9; 
as  advs.,  122,  8 ; of  colour, 
122,  3;  in  sel,  sett,  ser, 
122,  6 ; a succession  of, 
122,  5 ; after  pers.  prons., 
122, 10;  after  indef.  prons. 
and  numerals,  122,11,  32; 
after  tnelcf)e,  122,13;  used 
as  substs.,  122,  2;  compa- 
rison of,  125-127 ; without 
Umlaut,  App.  L. ; incapa- 
ble of  comparison,  161, 
N. ; adjs.  used  as  attri- 
butes only,  160  ; as  predi- 
cates only,  161;  as  pre- 
fixes to  verbs,  206,  4, 212 ; 
governing  gen.  and  acc., 
244,  dative,  251;  preps., 
281;  possessive  adjs.,  43, 
44,  G,  {a)\  interrogative, 84- 
83  ; appositive  adj.,  280  ; 
concord,  288  ; derivation, 
by  suffixes,  313;  by  pre- 
fixes, 316  ; composition, 
320. 

Adverbial  clauses,  306. 

Adverbial  conjunctions,  co- 
ordinating, 237 ; throw  the 
subject  after  the  verb,  R.  1. 


unless  otherwise  specified; 


Adverbial  expressions,  place 
of,  45,  297. 

Adverbs,  187  ; place  of,  45, 
297 ; formation,  182,  ( a ), 
183,  ( c ),  189  ; compari- 
son, 128,  180  ; numeral 
adverbs,  182,  183;  idio- 
matic uses  of  certain  ad- 
verbs, 195  ; advs.  with  an 
accusative,  224,  1;  with 
preps.,  224,  3,  4. 

sage,  substs.  in,  gender,  89, 

2,  (*). 

Agent,  with  passive,  112, 
R.  3. 

sal,  foreign  substs.  in,  de- 
clension, 22,  6. 

‘all  ’ expressed  by  ganj,  170, 
1;  ‘at  all/  157. 

affeirt,  conj.,  236,  241, 1. 

after,  -e,  -e§,  169;  afters  be- 
fore superlatives,  127,  1, 
N. ; allc$  of  a number  of 
persons  or  things,  162,  2; 
before  adjs.,  122,  12. 

Alphabet,  German,  pp.  1,  5 
i3- 

al§,  conj.,  239,  3 (3);  after 
a comparative,  126, 1 ; dis- 
tinguished from  menn  and 
rcann,  58,  241,  G,  8 ; 
‘but/  241,  19;  al§  clause 
replaces  Engl.  part,  of  time, 
284,  1,  (a)  ; introducing 
an  apposition,  289, 6 ; wdth 
comparative  clauses,  303, 
R.  4. 


INDEX. 


441 


«I§  bafj,  after  adjs.  with  ju, 
273,  N. 

al§  ob,  al£  roenn,  239, 3,  (3), 
and  R.  4. 

ant,  before  a super!.,  127,  1, 
(3),  128,  190,  3. 

an,  prep.,  65  ; expresses 
date,  184,  2,  (, a );  of  loca- 
lity, 227,  (a),  2,  232,  (c), 

2,  233,  (c)t  2;  of  cause, 
with  diseases,  231,  (c) ; 
with  names  of  battles,  231, 

• ( d ),  2 ; after  verbs  and 
adjs.,  244,  245, 1,  291,  6, 
8,  9,  12. 

•an,  foreign  substs.  in,  de- 
clension, 22,  6. 

anber,  ordinal  numeral,  166, 
1,  N. ; anberfeitS,  238  ; 
anbertljalb,  183,  (b),  R.  2. 

angeft$t§,  223,  20. 

anftatt,  223,  14;  governing 
an  infin.  or  bafj  clause,  276. 

‘any,’  how  rendered  in  Ger- 
man, 2,  2,  157,  180. 

Apposition,  appositive  sub- 
stantive, 289  ; participle, 
280,  (£),  281,  R.  3;  ad- 
jective or  participle,  290; 
clauses,  304. 

•ar,  foreign  substs.  in,  de- 
clension, 22,  6. 

Article,  not  used  before  words 
in  partitive  sense,  2, 2 ; de- 
finite, declension,  4;  agree- 
ment, 5,  1;  repetition  of, 
5,2;  use,  44 ; contraction 
with  preps.,  34,  R.,  46, 
R.  1,  p.  83,  O.,  65,  R. ; 
with  proper  names,  44,  2, 

3,  73,  76,  2,  5,  78;  for 
poss.  adj.,  44,  6. 

Article,  indefinite,  declen- 
sion, 9;  use,  44,  4,  5. 

Aryan  languages,  322,  2,  3. 

1 as,’  how  rendered  in  Germ., 
162,  4,  241,  8-11. 

Associatives,  how  formed, 
315,  2,  (b). 


•aft,  foreign  substs.  in,  de- 
clension, 22,  6. 
sat,  foreign  substs.  in, declen- 
sion, 22,  2,  6. 

* at/  of  time  of  day,  184,  3, 

( c );  how  rendered  in  Germ. , 
227;  after  verbs,  etc.,  291, 
1. 

* at  all *;  see  * all.* 

Attributive  adj.,  see  Adjec- 
tive. 

audj,  adv.,  after  rel.  prons., 
96,  6,  idiomatic  use  of, 
195,  9;  conj.,  236,  237, 
R.  2,  238. 

auf,  prep.,  65 ; with  abs. 
superl.  of  advs.,  190,6;  of 
locality,  227,  (a),  3,  230, 
(a),  232,  (c),  233,  (c),  2; 
of  future  time,  229,  (b), 
2 ; after  adjs.  and  verbs, 
245,  1,  291,  2,  7, 10  ; after 
reflexive  verbs,  215, 1,  (b). 
auf  b at,  239,  3,  (6),  268,  3. 
au§,  prep.,  46  ; of  cause, 
229,  (c). 

aufjen,  adv.,  189,  3;  com- 
parison, 130. 
aujjer,  prep.,  46. 
aufjerljalb,  223,  3. 
iiufjerft,  with  absolute  superl., 
127,  2,  190,  4. 

Auxiliary  is  verb  in  com- 
pound tenses,  26,  32. 
Auxiliary  verbs  of  mood,  see 
* Modal  Auxiliaries.* 
Auxiliary  verbs  of  tense,  25, 
53;  place  of,  with  Modal 
Auxiliaries, 199, 3;  omitted 
in  dependent  clauses,  287. 

balb,  comparison  of,  190; 

balb  . . . balb,  238. 

•bar,  suffix  of  adjs.,  313, 1. 
‘be,*  with  p.  part.,  how  ren- 
dered in  Germ.,  112,  R.  5. 
bes,  insep.  prefix,  85,  R.  6, 
204 ; meaning  of,  S14,  1. 
bei,  prep.,  46;  = ‘with,* 


1 about,’  226,  (d) ; of  time, 

227,  ( b ),  3;  idioms,  228, 
0 b ),  (c),  232,  (d)\  of  bat. 
ties,  231,  ( d ),  1. 

beibe,  beibe§,  165,  3. 

beifcen  Model,  118. 

beoor,  241, 13, 14. 

btnnctt,  51, 1. 

bi§,  prep.,  34,  60,4;  conj., 
239,  3,  (b). 

bleiben  Model,  120. 

93Iume  Model,  66. 

‘both  . . . and,*  238. 

‘but,*  rendered  by  al§,  241, 
19. 

‘by,*  with  passive,  112,  R. 
3 ; how  rendered  in  Germ., 

228. 

Capitals,  use  of,  p.  11 ; 122, 
2,  9,  N.,  11,  O. 

Calling,  verbs  of,  242,  3, 
253;  with  p.  part.,  281,  6. 

Cardinal  numerals,  163,165 ; 
gender  as  substs.,  80,  2, 
(c),  165,  10. 

Cases,  use  of,  8 ; syntax  of, 
242-255;  place  of,  296. 

Cause,  adverbial  expressions 
of,  284,  1,  0 b ),  306,  R.  2 ; 
their  place  in  a sentence, 
45,  Rule  5. 

•djen,  substs.  in,  declension, 
16,  17  ; gender,  89, 3,  {a) ; 
subst.  suffix,  312,  2;  pro- 
duces Umlaut,  326,  R.  2, 
(c). 

Choosing,  verbs  of,  242,  3, 
N.,  253. 

Clauses,  conditional,  59, 267, 
293,  (a),  3;  proportional, 
see  ‘Comparative  clauses/ 
below;  dependent,  preced- 
ing principal,  293,  ( b ),  R. 
4,  294,  (b),  R.  2,  306; 
with  bemt,  241,  18,  298, 
(c),  R.  \ ; incomplete  or 
elliptical,  299 ; order  of 
clauses,  302-306;  apposi- 


29 


442 


INDEX, 


tive,  304;  relative,  305; 
subjective,  objective,  ad- 
verbial, 306. 

Cognate  accusative,  254, 1. 

Collectives,  declension  of 
those  with  prefix  ©es,  16, 
17,  2 ; gender,  89,  3,  ( d ) ; 
concord  of  with  verb,  285, 
R.  4;  formation,  315,  2, 
(«). 

Colour,  adjs.  of,  used  as 
substs.,  122,  3L 

Comma,  before  dependent 
sentences,  98,  3,  N.,  301, 
N.  5 ; before  infin.  clauses, 
273,  R.  2. 

Comparative  degree,  125, 
126;  declension  of,  126,  5. 

Comparative  clauses,  with 
befto,  etc.,  126,  4,  293, 
(3),  R.  4,  N.  3;  306,  R.  4 
and  N. 

Comparison,  of  adjs,,  125- 
130;  of  equality,  126,  3, 
241,  8;  irregular,  129;  de- 
fective, 130 ; of  aavs., 
128,  190  ; adjs.  incapable 
of,  161,  N. 

Compass,  points  of,  p.  104, 
top;  gender,  80,  1,  (c). 

Complex  sentences,  302- 

306. 

Composition  of  words,  318,- 
321;  of  numerals,  165, 
5-7,  182,  183;  of  Verbs, 
203-213 ; of  substs.,  3X9 ; 
of  adjs.,  320  ; of  advs., 
321. 

Compounds,  accentuation  of, 
p.  11 how  formed,  318r- 
321 ; primary  and  secon- 
dary, 319, 1,  N.  1,  2 ; spu- 
rious,. 319,  2,  N. 

Compound  substantives,  of 
irregular  declension,  68  ; 
of  irregular  gender,  90,  4, 
App.  I.,  p.  388  ; how 
formed,  319. 

Compound  tenses,  formation. 


25,  108 ; construction,  26, 

33. 

Compound  sentences,  302. 

Compound  verbs,  203-213, 
separable,  109, 117,  205- 
207 ; inseparable,  35,  R. 
6,  109,  204;  compounded 
with  substs.,  206,  3;  with 
adjs.,  206,  4,  212;  sepa- 
rable and  inseparable,  208; 
with  double  prefixes,  207, 
213  ; with  lttifj*,  209 ; with 
fier*  and  f;ius,  210  ; from 
compound  substs.,  211. 

Concord,  of  Subject  and 
Verb,  285;  other  concords, 
288. 

Conditional  clauses,  59,  239, 
R.  1,  2,  4,  267,  283,  ( a)r 
3,  {]))>  R.  4,  N.  1,  2;  ellip- 
tical, 268,  2,  N.,  293,  (c)}, 
R.  2 ; use  of  fo  in,  59,  N. ; 
293,  (£),  R.  4,  N.  2. 

Conditional  conjunctions,  59, 
239,  R.  1,  2,  4. 

Conditional  mood,  formation 
of  tenses  ©f,  25,  2,  3; 
shorter  forms.  111,  112, 
R.  1 ; in  Modal  Auxilia- 
ries, 199, 4 ; use,  263, 267 * 

Conjugation  of  verbs  ; see 
“ Verbs,”  “Modal  Auxili- 
aries. w 

Conjunctions,  235-241 ; co- 
ordinating, proper,  236 ; 
not  counted,  293,  (b)}  R. 
2;  adverbial,  237,  293, 
(£),  R.2 ; correlative,  238  *, 
place  of,  298,  3. 

Conjunctive  Mood,  see 
“ Subjunctive.” 

Considering,  verbs  of,  242, 
3,  253. 

Consonants,  pronunciation,, 
p.  9,  top;  digraphs  and 
trigraphs,  pp.  5,  8,  14; 

doubling  of,  in  verbs,  118, 
R.  1, 123,  R.  1, 167,  A., 
R.2, 181*0.6. 


Construction  of  Sentences, 
292-306  ; principal,  20, 
26,  293,  (3),  294,  (3), 
285,  2,  297,  R.  1,  2;  de- 
pendent, 32,  33,  293,  (c), 
294,  (^,295, 2,297,  R.  2, 
306;  direct  interrog.,  23, 
293,(^,1,294 ,(*),  285, 

2,  300;  indirect  statements, 
87,  283,  (c),  R.  1 ; indirect 
questions,  88  ; relative 
sentences,  98,  305  ; im- 
perative, 293,  (a),  2 ; of 
clauses  with  berm,  293, 
(<r),  R.  4;  of  incomplete 
clauses,  299  ; general  re- 
marks, 301 ; compound  and 
complex,  302,  303 ; see 
also  “Clauses,”  “Condi- 
tional clauses.” 

Contracted  form  of  strong  de- 
clension, 70,  R.  3. 

Contraction  of  def.  art.  and 
preps.,  84,  R.,  46,  R.  1, 
p.  83,  O.,  65,  R. 

Coordinating  Conjunctions, 
proper,  236,  adverbial, 
237,  correlative,  238. 

Copula,  292 ; place  of,  293, 
301, 1. 

Correlative  prons.,  43,  R.  3, 
4;  conjunctions,  238;  clau- 
ses, 241,  9,  293,  (b),  R.  4, 
N.  3. 

Countries,  names  of,  gender, 
80, 3,  (r);  see  also  “Places, 
names  of.” 

sb,  suffix  of  substs.,  312, 1. 

bet*  adv.,with  prep,  annexed, 
38,.  R.  5,  142;  conj,,  239, 

3,  {b) ; various  uses  of, 
241,  12,  {d)>  20;  with 
preps.,  representing  an  in- 
fin.  or  bafj  clause,  277 ; re- 
places Engl.  part,  of  time 
and  cause,  284. 

batmt,,  conj.,  expresses  pur« 
pose,  239,  3,  ( b\  268,  3. 


INDEX, 


443 


ba§  before  the  verb  fein,  141; 
of  a number  of  persons  or 
things,  162,  2. 
baft,  conj.,  omitted,  87,  3, 
241,3, 13,  266,  R.  2;  use, 
239,  (3),  241,  3;  express- 
ing purpose,  268,  3. 
baft  clauses  governed  by 
preps  , 224,  2,  {a)]  for  in- 
fin.,  272,  R.  1,  275,  276, 
R.  2,  277. 

Date,  how  expressed,  184, 

2,  (*). 

Dative,  use  of,  3,  248;  place 
of,  296,  4 ; ethical  dat., 
249;  dat.  after  verbs,  250  ; 
after  adjs.,  251  ; after 
preps.,  46,  61,  65,  223  ; 
after  reflexive  verbs,  210, 
2 ; after  impersonal  verbs, 
217,  2,  (3),  219,  1;  after 
fein  and  tuerben,  217,  2, 
( c ) ; after  interjections,  240, 

4,  0). 

baudjten,  see  beudjteu,  bun* 
fen. 

*be,  subst.  suffix,  312, 1. 
Declension  ; see  “ Substan- 
tives,” “Adjectives,”  “Pro- 
nouns,” “Numerals.” 
Definite  Article;  see  “Arti- 
cle.” 

Degrees  of  comparison;  see 
“Comparison.” 
bent  after  fein,  250,  ( e ), 
268,  C. 

Demonstrative  pronouns;  see 
“ Pronouns.” 

benn,  conj.,  236;  adv.  conj., 
237,  239,  241,  7, 18, 293, 
(c),  R.4. 

bennod),  adv.  conj.,  237, 
Dependent  sentences  ; see 
“ Construction,”  “ Sen- 
tences.” 

Dependent  questions  ; see 
“ Construction,”  “ Sen- 
tences,” “ Indirect  ques- 
tions.” 


ber,  bie,  ba§;  see  “Article, 
definite”;  demonst.  pron., 
132,  133,  135,  2,  140,  1, 
(*),  (3),  142,  143,  1,  2; 
after  trier,  162  \ relative 
pron.,  declension,  93  ; use, 
95, 140,  2 ; replaced  by  mo 
before  preps.,  95,  2 ; used 
for  roer,  306,  R.  3,  N. 
berglei<$en,  rel.  pron.,  97 ; 
demonstr.  pron.,  132, 
139,  2. 

berett,  gen.  pi.  of  demonstr. 
pron.,  when  used,  133, 
2,  N. 

Derivation,  307-317 ; of  nu- 
merals, 1S2, 183 ; of  advs., 
189;  see  also  “Adjective,” 
etc. 

berjenige,  132,  135,  140, 
1,  (3). 
bero,  49. 

berfelfc(tg)e,  132,  136  ; re- 
places poss.  adjs.  and  pers. 
prons.,  143,  2-4. 
beSgleicfien,  rel.  pron.,  97; 
demonst.  pron.,  139,  1; 
adv.,  139, 1,  N. 
beffen,  used  for  gen.  of  met* 
d)er,  95,  1,  (a);  precedes 
its  case,  95,  3;  of  neut. 
pers.  pron.,  143,  1;  for 
poss.  adj.,  143,  2. 
beffemntgeadjtet,  adv.  conj., 
237,  241,21. 

befto,  126,  4,  237,  241,  2, 
293,  (3),  R.  4,  N.  3. 
beud;ten,  99,  2. 
biefer  Model,  6. 
biefer,  declension,  6;  use, 
132, 134, 140, 1,  (a),  141 ; 
replaces  pers.  prons., 143, 3. 
oieSfeit^),  223,  12,  R. 
Digraphs,  consonantal,  pp.  4, 

8,  14. 

Diminutives,  gender,  89,  3, 
(a);  formation,  812,  2; 
origin,  826,  R.  2,  (c). 
Diphthongs,  pp.  4,  6,  14.  I 


Direct  objects,  clause  or  neut. 
pron.  as,  250,  R.  2;  infin. 
as,  272,  R.  2;  see  also 
“Accusative,”  “ Cases,” 
“ Object.” 

Direct  questions;  see  also 
“ Questions,”  “ Interroga- 
tive Sentences.” 

Direction,  expressed  by  ftin* 
and  fjers  before  verbs, 
210;  with  an  accusative, 
224,  1. 

Distance,  measure  of,  185, 4. 

bod),  adv.,  idiomatic  use, 195, 
8 ; adv.  conj. , throws  subj. 
after  verb,  237,  R.  3,  293, 
(3),  R.  3 ; in  questions, 
300,  2,  N.  1. 

2)orf  Model,  36,  37 ; origin 
of  Umlaut  in,  326,  R.  2,(3). 

Double  Accusative,  253. 

“ Gender,  91 ; App.  J. 
" Plurals,  64 ; App.  G.* 
“ Prefixes,  207,  210, 
213. 

M Vowels,  pp.  4,  6,  14; 
do  not  take  Um- 
laut, p.  12. 

brei,  declension,  165,  2. 

biinfen,  99,  2. 

burdj,  prep.,  34 ; prefix,  208. 

biirfen,  conjugation  of,  196- 
199;  use,  200,  1. 

e,  in  conjugation  of  verbs, 
31,  R.  1,  35,  R.  2-4, 107, 
R.  1;  in  imperative,  etc., 
167,  B.,  R.  3,  181,  O.  4; 
in  subjunctive,  31,  R.  2, 
107,  O.  3 ; in  dat.  of 
substs.,  21,  (a),  O.  4,  46, 
R.  2;  in  adjs.,  102,  R. 
2,  122,  6,  125,  R.  5,  0, 
126,  5;  in  poss.  adjs.,  43, 
R.  2;  in  poss.  prons.,  119, 
(a)  Obs.,  ( c\  N.  1;  re- 
presents Umlaut  of  a,  326, 
R.  3. 

*1,  adjs.  in,  declension,  102, 


444 


INDEX, 


R.  2 ; comparison,  125, 
R.  6. 

*e,  substs.  in,  declension,  54, 
57,  1,  61;  gender,  89,  2, 
(c);  subst.  suffix,  312,  4. 
ebeit,  195,  2. 
ebenfo,  237,  241,  8. 
elje,  con].,  241,  13,  14;  com- 
parison, 130. 

*ei,  substs.  in,  gender,  89,  2, 
{a)\  subst.  suffix,  312,  5. 
tilt,  see  “Article,  Indefi- 
nite.” 

tin,  numeral,  163,165,  1; 

with  def.  art.,  165,  1,  (c), 
rinanber,  42,  2.  [and  N. 
einer,  indef . pron.  ,145, 150 ; 
cardinal  numeral,  163, 
165,  1,  (b). 
einerlei,  182,  (c),  N. 
etnerfeitS,  238. 
eir.ige,  einigeS,  etlid&e,  ttlu 
dje§,  indef.  pron.,  145, 
152;  numeral,  168,  173, 
180  ; before  adjs.,  122, 12. 
eimnal,  182,  (a),  N.  2,  3. 
CinS  in  counting,  165,  1,  ( d ). 
einft,  182,  (a),  N.  2;  187, 

1,  w- 

•el,  substs.  in,  declension, 
16,  17  J ferns,  in,  57,  R. 
2;  gender,  89, 1,  (a)>  App. 
I.;  adjs.  in,  declension, 
122,  6;  comparison,  125, 
R.  6 ; subst.  suffix,  312,  6. 
*el,  verb-stems  in,  drop  e,  35, 
R.  4. 

#elcf;en,  diminutive  suffix, 
812,  2,  N.  2. 

Elliptical  constructions,  59, 
239,  R.  2,  4,  266,  N.  4, 
267,  6,  N.,  268,  2,  N., 
269,  R.  6,  278,  293,  (3), 
R.  4,  N.  2,  299. 

*eln,  verbs  in,  conjugation, 
85,'R.4;  formation, 311,1. 
ftm,  substs.  in,  declension, 
16, 17,  69, 1 ; gender,  89, 
> <*)•  - 


etnp«,  insep.  prefix,  35,  R. 

6,  204;  meaning,  314,  2. 
?en,  substs.  in,  declension, 
16, 17  ; gender,  89, 1,  ( a ), 
App.  I.;  adjs.  in,  declen- 
sion, 122,  6 ; comparison, 

125,  R.  6 ; not  used  as 
predicates,  160;  ad  vs.  in, 
189,  3;  subst.  suffix,  312, 
7;  adj.  suffix,  813,  2. 

sen  for  se§  in  gen.  sing,  of 
adjs.,  102,  R.  1. 
senb,  substs.  in,  gender,  89, 
2,  (3);  subst.  suffix,  312, 
18. 

Endings  of  weak  verbs  in 
simple  tenses,  35  ; of  strong 
do.,  107  ; of  substs.,  70; 
of  adjs.,  121. 

English,  its  relations  to  Ger- 
man, 322. 

Enlarged  form  of  strong  de- 
clension, 70,  4. 
sen§,  termination  of  advs., 
183,  (c),189, 1,  (d),  190, 7. 
ents,  insep.  prefix,  35,  R.  6, 
204  ; meaning,  314,  2. 
entgegen,  51,  2. 
entlang,  223,  19,  R.  2. 
entroeber . . . ober,  238, 285, 
R.  6,  N.  1. 

senj,  foreign  substs.  in,  gen- 
der, 89,  2,  (e). 

er*,  insep.  prefix,  35,  R.  6, 
204;  meaning,  314,  3. 

*er,  substs.  in,  declension; 
16, 17  ; ferns,  in,  67,  R.  2, 
gender,  89, 1,  (a),  App.  I.  ; 
adjs.  in,  declension,  122, 
6;  comparison,  125,  R.  6, 

126,  N.  ; subst.  suffix, 
312,  8. 

ser,  verb-stems  in,  drop  C, 
85,  R.  4. 

*er,  Plural  ending,  36;  ori- 
gin, 326,  R.  2,  (b). 

*erei,  subst.  suffix,  312,  5, 
N.  2. 

•ent,  Adjs.  in,  not  used  as 


predicates,  160;  adj.  suf- 
fix, 313,  2. 

?ern,  Verbs  in,  conjugation, 
35,  R.  4;  formation,  311,2. 
erft,  adv.,  idiomatic  use, 
195,  4. 

erftenS,  adv.,  distinguished 
from  juerft,  195,  5,  N. 
©rjs,  subst.  prefix,  315, 1. 
e3,  neut.  pron.,  uses  of,  39; 
omission  of,  118,  2,  N.  ; 
for  a number  of  persons  or 
things,  162,  2 ; as  subject 
of  impersonal  verbs,  217, 
220,  2,  R.  2,  N.;  after 
adjs.  governing  gen.,  244, 
R.  1;  representing  a fol- 
lowing infin.,  272,  R.  2. 
e§  giebt,  e§  ift,  etc.,  220. 
effen  Model,  181. 

Ethical  dative,  249. 
ctlic^e ; -eS,  see  einigc. 
etnm,  187,  III.,  226,  (c). 
etnmS,  indef.  pron.,  145, 
149 ; indef.  numeral,  168, 
177  ; before  adjs.,  122, 11. 

* even/  rendered  by  felbfi,  42, 

3,  R. 

* ever,’  after  rel.  prons.,  96, 6. 
Exclamatory  clauses,  269, 

R.  6,  293,  (b),  R.  3,  300, 

N.2. 

ssfacfj,  sfcilttg,  form  multiple 
cative  numerals,  182,  ( b ). 
fallen  Model,  188. 
faU§,  subord.  conj.,  239,  3, 
(*)• 

*faltig;  see  *fa$. 

Factitive  accusative,  253. 
Factitive  predicate,  253, 
254,  3. 

Family  names,  74,  76,4,  6. 
fecfyten  Model,  124. 

‘few,’  how  rendered  inGer., 
145,  152,  168,  173,  175. 
‘for/  how  rendered  in  Ger., 
229;  after  verbs,  substs. 
and  adjs.,  291,  2-4. 


INDEX. 


445 


Foreign  substs.,  accentua- 
tion, p.  io,  bottom ; de- 
clension, 22,  6,  37,  4, 
App.  D.,  57,  5,  63, 3, 77 ; 
gender,  89,  2,  ( e ). 
Fractional  numbers,  183,  (a)t 

(4 

freilidj,  187,  IV. ; does  not 
count  as  a member  of  a 
sentence,  293,  (3),  R.  2, 
N. 

Frequentatives,  how  formed, 
315,  2,  (c). 
frieren  Model,  131. 

‘from,’  after  verbs,  291,  5. 
fur,  prep.,  34;  not  used  of 
purpose,  229,  (a) ; after 
verbs  of  considering,  253. 
Future  Tense,  how  formed, 
25,2;  use,  261;  replaced 
by  present,  257,  5. 
Future-perfect  Tense,  how 
formed,  25,  3;  use,  262; 
replaced  by  perfect,  259, 4. 

ganj,  indef.  numeral,  168, 
170. 

ges,  prefix  of  p.  part.,  30  *, 
when  omitted,  35,  R.  6,  6, 
109,  112,  R.  2,  204  ; of 
verbs,  35,  R.  6,  204,  314, 
4 ; with  sep.  verbs,  117,2, 
205,2;  with  mips,  209;  of 
substs.,  315,  2 ; of  adjs., 
316 ; declension  of  substs. 
beginning  with  ges,  16, 17, 

2,  36,  37,  3;  gender,  89, 

3,  (J). 

gegen,  prep.,  34. 
gegeniiber,  61,  4. 
geljen  with  infin.,  271,  (r). 
gemafc,  51,  5. 
gen,  50,  2. 

Gender  of  substs. , according 
to  meaning,  80,  and  form, 
89;  of  compound  substs., 
90,  4,  App.  I.,  p.  383 ; 
double  gender,  91,  App. 
J. ; general  remarks  on, 


90  ; exceptional  gender, 
App.  I. 

Genitive,  use  of,  3,  243 ; af- 
ter adjs.,  244 ; after  verbs, 
245 ; adverbial,  of  time 
and  manner,  184,  2,  (b), 
189,2,  246;  of  place,  246; 
after  reflexive  verbs,  215, 
216 ; after  impers.  verbs, 
219,  2,  (a)\  after  interjec- 
tions, 240,  4,  (a):  after 
preps.,  222,  223  ; ur.in- 
flected  appositive  genitive, 
289,  3,  N.  2 ; position  of 
in  a sentence,  296,  4-7. 
genug,  indef.  num.  and  adv., 
168,  178  ; followed  by 
inf.,  273,  3. 

German  language,  its  rela- 
tions to  English,  322 ; his- 
torical sketch,  322-326. 
Germanic  languages,  322, 
323;  diagram  of,  p.  376. 
gern,  comparison  of,  190, 1; 

idiomatic  use  of,  195,  3. 
Gerunds,  or  infin.  in  -ing, 
not  to  be  confounded  with 
pres,  part.,  277,  R.  3, 4, 6. 
Gerundive,  282. 
glauben,  infin.  after,  275, 
gleid),  prep.,  51,  6.  [R.  3. 

*glei<$en,  48,  97,  139. 

©raf  Model,  55. 

Grimm’s  Law,  325. 
grofj,  comparison,  125,  5. 
©runbfpradje,  322. 
gut,  comparison,  129;  as 
adv.,  195, 10,  N.,  293,  (b), 
R.  2,  N. 


mute  before  consonants, 
after  vowels  and  after  t,  p. 
9;  when  rejected  after  t, 
p.  12. 

Ijaben,  conjugation,  24 ; use, 
25;  with  infin.,  271,  ( b ), 
and  R.  1,  272,  R.  2 ; omis- 
sion of  in  dependent  sen- 
tences, 287,  293,  (4  R.  5. 


*ljaft,  suffix  of  adjs.,  313,  3. 
J)alb,  numeral,  183,  ( a ),  N. 
2,  (3). 

^alb(en),  father,  prep.,  222, 
223, 1. 

* half,’  how  rendered  in  Ger., 

183,  (*),  N.  2 J (4 
half-hours,  184,  3,  {a). 
Ijeifjen  with  in  fin.,  271,  (</). 
substs.  in,  gender,  89, 
2,  (a);  subst.  suffix,  312,  9. 
Ijelfen  Model,  159. 
jjer,  prefix,  210. 
fyter,  187,  II.,  (a)  ; before 
preps.,  142. 

High  German,  history  of, 
324. 

f)t»,  prefix,  210. 
fjirtten,  adv.,  189,  3;  com- 
parison, 130. 

Winter,  prep.,  65;  sep.  and 
insep.  prefix,  208. 
f)0d),  declension,  122,  7 ; 

comparison,  129. 
f)od)ft,  with  absolute  superl., 
127,  2,  190,  4. 

* however,’  adv.  conj.,  how 

rendered  in  Germ.,  241, 
15. 

Hours  of  the  day,  184,  3. 
£unb  Model,  21,  (b). 
^unbert,  165,  8, 10,  (c). 
Hyphen,  its  use  in  com- 
pounds, 318,  3,  N.,  and  4. 

t,  produces  Umlaut,  326. 
Ad),  substs.  in,  declension, 
22,  2;  gender,  89,  1,  (a). 

subst.  suffix,  312,  18; 
adj.  suffix,  313,  4. 
ste,  foreign  substs.  in,  gen- 
der, 89,2,  (4 
sier,  foreign  substs.  in,  de- 
clension, 22,  6. 
siereit,  foreign  verbs  in,  taka 
no  ges  in  p.  part.,  35,  R. 
5;  verb  suffix,  311,  3. 

‘if,’  when  rendered  by  06, 
1 241,4. 


446 


INDEX. 


»ig,  substs.  in,  declension, 
22,  2 ; gender,  89, 1,  ( a ); 
adjs.  in,  not  used  as  predi- 
cates, 160;  ad  vs.  in,superl. 
of,  190,  5;  suffix  of  poss. 
prons.,  119,  ( c ) ; subst.  suf- 
fix, 312,  18;  adj.  suffix, 
813,  5;  before  *!eit,  312, 
10,  N. ; after  ,$aft,  313, 
3,  N. ; produces  Umlaut, 
326,  (/). 

3&ro,  49* 

Al,  foreign  substs.  in,  gen- 
der, 89,  2,  (<?). 

Immer,  adv.,  187,  I.,  (<?); 
after  rel.  prons.,  96,  6. 

Imperative  Mood,  true  forms 
of,  31,  R.  4;  endings,  in 
weak  verbs,  85  ; in  strong, 
107  ; expressed  by  laffen, 
200,  7,  (a)\  replaced  by 
subjunctive,  268,  1;  use 
of,  269.  [196. 

Imperfect-Present  Verbs, 

Imperfect  Tense,  formation, 
in  weak  verbs,  30  ; in 
strong,  104 ; endings,  in 
weak  verbs,  35  ; in  strong, 
107. 

Imperfect  Indicative,  use, 
258;  distinguished  from 
Perfect,  259, 2,  3;  replaced 
by  present,  257,  3. 

Imperfect  Subjunctive,  for 
conditional,  111,  263,  2, 
N.;  in  hypothetical  peri- 
ods, 267,  2;  to  express 
wish,  268,  2 ; to  express 
possibility,  268,  5;  origin 
of  Umlaut  in,  826,  ( g ■). 

Impersonal  Verbs,  217 ; con- 
jugation, 218 ; govern- 
ment, 219;  * there  is,* 
etc.,  220;  impersonal  use 
of  passive  voice,  113,  2. 

*in,’  how  rendered  in  Germ., 
230,  291,  6,  7. 

in,  prep.,  65  ; rendered  by 
‘at/  227,  ( a ),  i,  and  4. 


Aw,  substs.  in,  declension, 
57,  R.  3;  gender,  89,  2, 
(a)  ; subst.  suffix,  312, 11; 
produces  Umlaut,  326, 
(d). 

Indefinite  article,  see  “Arti- 
cle, Indef.  ” [180. 

Indefinite  numerals,  168- 

Indefinite  pronouns,  145- 
157. 

inbent,  subord.  conj.,  239, 
241,  16 ; replaces  Engl, 
participle,  284,  1,  ( a ),  ( b ). 

inbeffen,  conj.,  237,  239, 
241, 15. 

Indicative  mood,  use,  256; 
tenses  of,  257-262;  in  in- 
direct statements,  2C6,  R. 
3 ; in  hypothetical  periods, 
267,  R.  5. 

Indirect  statement,  87,  265; 
tense  of,  266;  construction 
of,  293,  (4  R.  1. 

Indirect  or  dependent  ques- 
tions, 88,  293,  (c);  object- 
ive, with  infin.,  275,  R.  4; 
use  of  ob  in,  277,  R.  5. 

Indo-European  or  Indo-Ger- 
manic  languages,  322. 

Infinitive,  place  of,  26,  33, 
295,  3,  299  ; endings,  85 ; 
for  p.  part,  in  Modal  Auxi- 
liaries, etc.,  199,  2;  with 
passive  sense  after  (affen, 
200,  7,  (c),  N. ; for  im- 
perative, 269,  R.  5 ; as 
subst.,  270;  without  ju, 
271;  with  ju,  272;  of 
purpose,  273 ; after  substs., 
274;  accusative  with  inf., 
noi:  used  in  Germ.,  275 ; in 
objective  indirect  questions, 
275,  R.  4;  governed  by 
preps.,  276,  277;  infin.  in 
“ing,  or  gerund,  277,  R. 
3-6 ; in  elliptical  construc- 
tions, 278  ; replaced  by  p. 
part.,  281,  R.  6,  7;  as 
part  of  predicate,  295. 


'-mg,*  infinitive  in,  or  gerund, 
277,  R.  3-6. 

?ing,  substs.  in,  declension, 
22,  2;  gender,  89,  1,  (d)\ 
subst.  suffix,  312, 18. 
inmitten,  223, 21. 
inn en,  adv.,  189,  3;  compa- 
rison, 130. 

innerlpalb,  223,  4,  and  R. 
Inseparable  prefixes,  35,  R. 
6,  109,  203,  204,  207, 
209,  212,  213 ; meaning 
of,  314. 

Interjections,  240. 

Inversion,  inverted  sentence, 
301,2,  N.  1,2. 
Interrogative  pronouns  and 
adjs.,  81-86. 

Interrogative  sentences,  con- 
struction, direct,  23 ; 293, 
(a),  1,  294,  (a),  295,  2, 
300,  301,  N.  2 ; indirect 
or  dependent,  88,  275,  R. 
4,  277,  R.  5,  293,  (4 
Intransitive  verbs,  used  only 
impersonally  in  the  passive, 
113,  2;  accusative  after, 
254. 

sion,  foreign  substs.  in,  gen- 
der, 89,  2,(4 
siren,  verbs  in ; see  siereit. 
irgenb,  157. 

sijd),  adjs.  in,  not  used  as 
predicates,  160;  adj.  suf- 
fix, 313,  6. 

Italics,  not  used  in  Germ., 
p.  12. 

‘it,’  when  rendered  by  er,  fie, 

13. 

produces  Umlaut,  326. 
jet,  idiomatic  use,  195,  11. 
ja,  jawoljl,  not  counted  as 
member  of  sent.,  293,  (3), 
R.  2,  N. 

jc,  before  cardinal  numerals, 
165,  9. 

je  . . . befto,  126,  4,  239, 
3,  (3),  293,  (3),  R.  4,  N.  3. 


INDEX, 


447 


fe(maI3),  adv.,  187,  I.,  (*). 
jcbcr,  declension,  6;  indef. 
pron.,  145,  153  ; indef. 
numeral,  168, 171 ; jebeS, 
of  a number  of  persons  or 
things,  162,  2. 
jebermann,  145,  147. 
jebod),  237. 

Jebmeber;  see  jeber. 
jeglxdjer;  see  feber. 
jentanb,  145, 148. 
jencr,  declension,  6 ; use, 
132, 134,  140,1,  (c),  141, 
142. 

ienfeit(§),  223,  13,  and  R. 
iefct,  187, 1.,  (*). 

lein,  declension,  8;  indef. 

numeral,  168,  172. 
leiner,  indef.  pron.,  145; 

used  for  niemanb,  151. 
•feit,  substs.  in,  gender,  89, 
2,  (<z);  subst.  suffix,  312, 
10. 

fenneit,  196,  R.  4,  N.  i 
St nabe  Model,  54. 
fommen,  with  p.  part.,  281, 
R.  5. 

lonneit,  conjugation,  196- 
199  ; use,  200,  2,  202. 
Iraft,  prep.,  223,  7. 

forms  fractions,  183,  (a). 
IdngS,  223, 18,  and  R.  1. 
Language,  German,  histori- 
cal sketch  of,  322-826. 
Language-names  from  adjs., 
122,  R.  2. 

Languages,  Indo-Germanic, 
etc.,  322,  2,  3;  Germanic, 
323. 

lafjett,  its  use,  for  passive 
voice,  114,  ( b)\  as  Modal 
Auxiliary,  200,  7. 
laut,  223,  8. 
&uttuev)d;iebung,  325. 

*let,  forms  variative  nume- 
rals, 182,  (c). 

•Icin,  substs.  in,  declension, 


16,  17  ; gender,  89,  3, 
(a);  subst.  suffix,  312,3; 
produces  Umlaut,  326,  R. 
2,  (c). 

Letters,  German,  shape  and 
pronunciation  of,  see  In- 
troduction, pp.  I— 12. 

Ie$t,  130. 

Heute,  plurals  in,  68, 1. 

Hid),  adjs.  in,  not  used  as 
predicates,  160 ; superl.  of 
advs.  in,  190,  5 ; suffix  of 
advs.,  189, 1,  (<5);  of  adjs., 
313,  8. 

lieber,  compar.  of  gern,  190 ; 
use,  195,  3. 

sling,  substs.  in,  declension, 
22,  2 ; gender,  89,  1,  (a)  ; 
subst.  suffix,  312, 12. 

*Iing§,  suffix  of  advs.,  189, 

1,  (c). 

lobeit,  paradigm  of,  active, 
31 ; reflexive,  41 ; passive, 

112. 

*m,  substs.  in,  declension, 
69  ; gender,  89, 1,  (a). 

irregular  compounds 
of,  68,  2. 

smat,  forms  numeral  advs., 
182,  (a). 

Staler  Model,  16,  17,  App. 
A. 

man,  indef.  pron.,  for  passive 
voice,  114,  ( a );  use,  145, 
146  ; replaced  by  einer, 
150 ; with  imperative,  269, 
R.  2. 

manner,  indef.  pron.,  145, 
154 ; indef.  numeral,  168, 
174 ; before  adjs.,  122, 12. 

•rnann,  substs.  in,  declen- 
sion, 68, 1. 

Manner,  advs.  of,  189; 
their  place  in  a sentence, 
45,  Rule  5. 

Materials,  names  of,  take 
art.,  44,  1,  (£);  plural  of, 
66,  2. 


*may,’  when  expressed  by 
biirfen,  200,  3,  ( b\  N. 

1 meanwhile,'  how  rendered 
in  Germ.,  241, 15. 
Measure,  expressions  of, 
185;  advs.  of,  187,  III. 
meljr,  when  used  in  compari- 
son of  adjs.,  126,  2,  161, 
N. ; adv.  of  quantity,  129, 
N.  1 ; indef.  numeral,  168, 
179. 

meljr  ere,  -e3,  indef.  pron., 
145,  152  ; indef.  numeral, 
168,  175  ; before  adjs., 
122, 12. 
mein  Model,  8. 

Middle  High  German, 324, 2. 
■UHHion,  declension,  165, 10, 

w- 

Minutes  of  the  hour,  184,  3, 

V). 

mifjs,  verb-prefix,  204,  209, 

314,  5;  subst.  prefix, 

315,  3. 

mit,  46 ; after  reflexive  verbs, 
215, 1,  (a). 

mittel,  comparison,  130. 
mittelft,  see  nermittclft. 
Mixed  declension,  of  substs., 
60-63,  70;  of  adjs.,  116, 
121,  III. 

Modal  auxiliaries,  196-202 ; 
peculiar  forms,  196,  R.  1- 
3 ; paradigms,  198 ; fur- 
ther peculiarities,  199 ; idi- 
omatic use,  200-202. 
Modern  High  German, 324, 3. 
Modification  of  vowels  ; see 
Umlaut. 

mogen,  conjugation,  196- 
199  ; use,  200,  3,  202. 
Monosyllables,  declension, 
22,  1,  3,  5,  App.  B.,  C., 
E.,  37  ; gender,  89,  1,  (a). 
Month,  day  of,  how  ex- 
pressed, 166,  3. 

Months,  names  of,  p.  104, 
top;  gender,  80,  1,  ( b ). 
Moods  of  the  verb,  their  use, 


44? 


INDEX. 


256-278;  see  also  “Con- 
ditional,”  “ Indicative,” 
etc. 

* most/  with  absolute  super- 
lative, 127, 2. 

Motion,  neuter  verbs  of,  con- 
jugated with  fein,  58,  (.5). 
milffen,  conjugation,  196- 
199;  use,  200,  4,  202. 

fem.  compounds  of, 
App.  I,  p.  388;  gu  SDiute 
fein,  merben,  250,  (e). 
Mutes,  progression  or  shift- 
ing of,  825. 

nadj,  prep.,  46,  184,  3,  (b), 
233,  (c),  1 ; after  adjs., 
244 ; after  verbs,  etc.,  291, 
3 ; after  reflexive  verbs, 
215,  1,  (a). 

9iacf)bar  Model,  62,  63. 

!?  ad)  bent,  subord.  conj.  clause 
with,  replaces  Engl.  perf. 
part.,  284,  R.  1. 
ttac^ft,  5J,  7. 
tta^e,  comparison,  129. 

21ame  Model,  60,  61. 

Names,  see  « Materials,” 
“ Persons,”  “ Places,” 
**  Proper  Names.” 
ttchnlid&c,  ber,  132, 137. 
itebett,  prep.,  65. 
nebft,  51,  8. 

nemtett,  infin.  with,  271,  (d). 
Neuter  verbs  conjugated  with 
fein,  53. 

New  High  German,  324,  3. 
nicf)t,  place  of,  12. 
nid)t  nur  . . . fonbern  aud), 
238. 

ttic£)t  foroo^l . . . a[$,  238. 
nid)t§,  indef.  pron.,  145, 
149  ; before  adjs.,  122, 11. 
ttid&tSbeftoroeniger,  coord. 

adv.  conj.,  237. 
nidjtS  roeniger  al§,  241, 19, 
N. 

tlib,  obsolete  adv.,  compari- 
son, 130. 


me(mal§),  187, 1.,  (e). 
ttieber,  130. 

niemanb,  145,  148;  re- 
placed by  feiner,  151, 1. 
trimmer,  187, I.,(*). 

*tti§,  substs.  in,  declension, 
22,  4 ; gender,  89,  2,  (d), 

3,  (c);  subst.  suffix,  312, 
13  ; produces  Umlaut,  326, 
«. 

ttoc^,  adv.,  idiomatic  use,  195, 
7 ; conj.,  237,  238. 
Nominative,  use  of,  3,  242. 
Number,  in  Substs.,  3;  ex- 
pressions of,  185. 
Numerals,  cardinal,  163, 
165  ; ordinal,  164,  166 ; 
Roman,  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  106,  2,  N.;  indefi- 
nite, 168-180 ; derivative, 
182,  183  ; multiplicative, 
182,  (b) ; variative,  182, 
( c )J  fractional,  183,  (a), 
(*)• 

nun,  195, 1. 
nur,  195, 12. 

06,  prep.,  51, 10 ; conj.,  241, 
4;  when  omitted,  239,  R. 

4,  267,  R.  6,  N.;  in  in- 
direct questions,  277, 
R.  5. 

ob  and),  239,  R.  3,  4. 
obett,  adv.,  189,  3;  compari- 
son, 130. 
oberf)alb,  223,  5. 
obgleid),  obfcfyon,  obtt>oI)l, 
239,  R.  3,  4. 

Object,  direct,  see  “Accusa- 
tive”; indirect,  see  “Da- 
tive '* ; remote,  with  reflex- 
ive verbs,  216. 

Objects,  place  of,  45,  296, 
297,  R.  1,  2. 

Objective  clause  before  the 
verb,  306. 

Objective  genitive,  243,  3. 
ober,  236,  238. 

1 ‘of,’  how  rendered  in  Germ.,  I 


8,  46,  R.  3 ; 231  ; omitted 
before  infin.  clauses,  277, 
R.  1;  after  verbs,  etc., 
291,  8-11. 

of)ne,  prep.,  34;  governing 
infin.  or  bajj  clause,  224, 
2,  (*),  276. 
o^nebem,  50,  3. 

D$r  Model,  62,  63. 

Old  High  German,  324,  1. 
son,  foreign  mascs.  in,  de- 
clension, 22,  6. 

‘ on,’  how  rendered  in  Germ., 
232  ; after  verbs,  etc., 
291,  7. 

‘one,’  rendered  by  e§,  39,  R. 
3;  indef.  pron.,  145,  146, 
150;  not  expressed  after 
adjs.,  122,  4. 

sor,  foreign  substs.  in,"  de- 
clension, 22,  6,  63,  3. 
Ordinal  numerals,  164,  166. 
Origin,  genitive  of,  243, 1. 
Orthography,  p.  n ; recent 
changes  in,  p.  12. 

paar  (cin),  indef.  numeral, 
173,  3,  N. 

Participial  constructions, 
English,  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  284;  English  pres, 
part,  after  ‘ come,’  281,  R. 
5;  not  to  be  confounded 
with  inf.  in  -ing,  or  ge- 
rund, 277,  R.  3. 

Participle,  past,  how  formed, 
in  weak  verbs,  30;  in 
strong,  105  ; of  Modal 
Auxiliaries,  199,  2. 
Participles,  place  of,  26,  33, 
283,  4,  295, 1,  3,  and  N., 
298,  299 ; endings,  30, 
35;  used  as  adjectives, 
122,  1;  as  substs.,  122,2; 
comparison  of,  125,  4 ; iso- 
lated strong,  194,  N. ; use 
of,  279-284;  present  part., 
280 ; not  used  with  ‘ to  be,’ 
31,  R,  3;  past,  281;  with 


INDEX. 


449 


Imperative  force,  269,  R.  5; 
fut.  pass,  part.,  or  gerund- 
ive, 282  ; general  remarks, 
283;  no  perfect  part,  in 
Germ.,  284,  R.  1;  apposi- 
tive  participles,  280,  (3), 
281,  R.  3,  283,  3,  290. 

Partitive  genitive,  243,  6. 

Partitive  sense,  words  used 
in,  take  no  art.,  2,  2. 

Passive  voice,  112-114;  pa- 
radigm, 112 ; agent  with, 
R.  3;  limitations  of,  113; 
substitutes  for,  114;  pass- 
ive of  transitive  verbs,  113, 
1 ; of  intransitive  verbs, 
113,  2. 

Past  participle,  see  “ Parti- 
ciples.” . 

‘people/  indef.  pron.,  145, 
146. 

Periphrastic  forms  of  conju- 
gation, English,  31,  R.  3. 

Perfect  participle,  none  in 
Germ.,  284,  R.  1. 

Perfect  tense,  formation,  25, 
1 ; use,  259  ; replaced  by 
present,  257,  4. 

Personal  pronouns,  declen- 
sion, 38  ; use,  39-42,  44, 
6,  (3) ; place  of,  45,  Rules 
3,  4,  294,(0,  N.,  296,3, 
4 ; replaced  by  demonstra- 
tives, 143 ; after  gleid)en, 
48;  after  I)alben,  roegen, 
223,  1,  2,  R.  3 ; omitted 
with  imperative,  269,  R.  1. 

Persons,  before  things,  45, 
Rule  2,  296,  5;  names  of, 
how  declined,  73,  74,  76, 
2-7 ; article  with  names  of, 
73,  1,  2,  76,  2,  5,  78. 

Place,  advs.  of,  187,  II.; 
position  in  a sentence,  11, 
45,  Rule  5,  297,  3,  and 
R.  1. 

Places,  proper  names  of,  72, 
76,  1 ; article  with,  44,  3. 

Pluperfect  tense,  formation, 


25,  1;  plupf.  indicative, 
use,  260;  plupf.  subjunc- 
tive, used  for  conditional, 
263,  267,  2,  and  R.  4;  to 
express  a wish,  268,  2. 

Plural,  see  ” Concord,” 

“ Number,”  “ Substan- 
tives.” 

Possessive  adjs.,  43;  agree- 
ment, 43,  5 ; replaced  by 
def.  art. , 44,  6. 

Possessive  case,  rendered  in 
Germ,  by  the  genitive,  3, 
243,  4. 

Possessive  dative,  44,  6,  249. 

“ pronouns,  119. 

Possibility,  advs.  of,  187, 
VI.;  expressed  by  impf. 
subj.,  268,  5. 

Predicate,  definition  of,  292, 
1,  295;  place  of,  295  ; fac- 
titive pred.,  253,  254,  3. 

Predicative  nominative,  242. 

Predicative  adj.,  not  de- 
clined, 14,  100;  place  of, 
18,  20,  O.  3,  295,  3,  296, 
8;  factitive,  254,  3. 

Prefixes,  of  verbs,  203-213, 
314;  inseparable,  35,  R. 
6,  109,  204,  207,  208, 
209,  212;  meaning  of, 
314 ; separable,  117,  205- 
208,  210,  295  ; separable 
and  inseparable,  208;  com- 
pound, 206,  2;  double, 
207  ; accent  of,  204,  205, 
3;  place  of,  117,  295,  3, 
and  N. ; subst.  prefixes, 
315  ; adj.  prefixes,  316. 

Prepositions,  governing  accu- 
sative only,  34,  50 ; dative 
only,  46,  51 ; dat.  or  acc., 
65  ; genitive,  222,  223  ; 
contracted  with  def.  art., 
34,  R.,  46,  R.  1,  p.  83, 0., 
65,  R. ; general  remarks 
on,  224;  joined  to  advs., 
224;  governing  the  infin., 
224,  2,  (3),  276,  277 ; ; 


English  preps,  and  their 
Germ,  equivalents,  225- 
234 ; place  of,  46,  51, 
223,  298,  2;  after  verbs, 
etc.,  291. 

Present  participle  ; see 
“ Participial  Construc- 
tions, English,”  and 
“ Participles.” 

Present  tense,  endings,  in 
weak  verbs,  35,  in  strong, 
107 ; pres,  indicative,  257, 
267,  R.  5 ; pres,  subj.,  re- 
places imperative,  268,  1, 
269,  and  R.  2. 

Preterite,  see  “ Imperfect.” 

Primary  Form  of  strong 
declension,  70,  R.  2. 

Principal  assertive  sentences, 
construction,  20,  26,  59, 
N.,  293,  (3),  294,  (3). 
295,  2,  297,  R.  1,  2,  301, 
2,  302,  R.,  303. 

Principal  parts  of  a verb, 
28. 

Progression  of  mutes,  325. 

Pronouns,  agreement  of,  13; 
place  of,  45,  296,  2-4; 
personal,  declension,  38; 
use  of  e§,  39;  use  in  ad- 
dress, 40,  47,  49  ; dative 
of,  replaces  poss.  adj.,  44, 
6,  (3);  reflexive,  41,  42; 
reciprocal,  42  ; interroga- 
tive, 81-83 ; relative,  92- 
97,  place  of,  98;  posses- 
sive, 119  ; demonstrative, 
132-143  ; indefinite,  145- 
157;  remarks  on,  162. 

Pronunciation,  Introduction, 
pp.  1-12. 

Probability,  expressed  by 
future,  261,  2 ; by  future- 
perfect,  262. 

Proper  names,  declension  of, 
66,  1,  72-74,  76. 

Proportional  Clauses  ; see 
“ Comparative  Clauses.” 

Purpose,  conjs.  of,  239,  \ 


450 


INDEX. 


(b)\  expressed  by  gu,  229, 
(a)  ; by  subj.  with  bafj, 
etc.,  268, 3 ; by  infin.  with 
gu  or  urn  . . . ju,  273,  R. 
1,  276,  1. 

Quality,  genitive  of,  243,  5. 

Quantity  of  vowels,  pp.  9,  10. 

Quantity,  expressions  of, 

186. 

Quarters  of  the  hour,  184, 3, 
(«). 

Questions,  direct,  construc- 
tion of,  23,  293,  (a),  1, 
294,  {a),  295,  2,  300;  in- 
direct or  dependent,  88, 
293,  (c). 

Question-word,  begins  sen- 
tence, 23,  O.  2,  293,  (a), 
1,  294,  (*). 

Reciprocal  pronouns,  42. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  41,  42, 
44,  6,  (3),  N. ; used  in  re- 
ciprocal sense,  42 ; place 
of,  294,  (c),  N. 

Reflexive  verbs,  paradigm  of, 
41 ; for  passive,  114,  (b) ; 
use,  214  - 215  ; govern- 
ment, 216. 

Relative  clauses,  replace  Engl, 
part.,  284,  2,  {a)\  place  of, 
305,  306,  R.  3,  and  N., 
R.  4. 

Relative  pronouns,  92-97 ; 
place  of,  98,  294,  (c),  305  ; 
introduce  dependent  clau- 
ses, 98 ; not  omitted  in 
Germ.,  96,  7,  O.;  concord 
of,  95, 1,  (b),  283,  2,  N. 

Relative  superlative,  of  adjs., 
127 ; of  advs.,  190,  3. 

Roman  numerals,  how  read 
in  Germ.,  166,  2,  N. 

r§,  plurals  in,  77,  5. 

*3,  suffix  of  advs.,  189,  1,  2, 
321, 1,  N. ; suffix  in  subst. 
compounds,  319, 1,  N.  2, 3. 


*f(tl,  substs.  in,  declension, 
22,4;  gender,  89,  3,  (c) ; 
subst.  suffix,  312, 14. 
sfatrt,  adj.  in,  superl.  of,  190, 
5;  adj.  suffix,  313,  9. 
famt,  51,  9. 

sfcfyaft,  substs.  in,  gender, 
89,  2,  (a) ; subst.  suffix, 
312, 15. 

fdflefjen  Model,  123. 
fdjlagett  Model,  186. 
fdjon,  idiomatic  use,  195,  6. 
Script,  German,  pp.  13-16. 
feljr,  with  absolute  superl., 
127,  2, 190,  4. 
fein,  ‘to  be,’  use  as  auxilia- 
ry, 25,  4 ; conjugation, 
62 ; verbs  conjugated  with, 
53;  with  past  part.,  112, 
R.  5,  (b) ; as  impersonal, 
217,  220;  with  dat.,  250, 
(e) ; with  infin.,  272,  R.  2 ; 
omitted  in  dependent  sen- 
tences, 287. 

feit,  prep.,  46,  241,  12,  ( a ) ; 

conj.,  239,  241,  12. 
feitbcm,  adv.  conj.,  237  ; 
subord.  conj.,  239,  241, 
12,  (c). 

*fel,  substs.  in,  gender,  89, 
3,  (c);  subst.  suffix,  312, 
14. 

felber,  felbft,  42,  3,  and  R. 
felbig,  136,  N. 
felbft;  see  felber. 

Sentences,  construction  of, 
292-806 ; essential  parts 
of,  292  ; construction  of 
assertive  principal,  20,  26, 
59,  N.,  293,  (b)}  294,  (b), 
295,2,  297,  R.  1,  301, 
2,  306 ; of  dependent, 
32,  33,  98,  293,  (c),  294, 
(c),  295,  2;  relative,  98, 
305,  306,  R.  3 and  N., 
R.  4 ; interrogative,  23, 
88,  293,  («),  I,  293,  (c), 
294,  (a),  295,  2,300  ; ex- 
clamatory, 293,  ( b ),  R.  3 ; 


expressing  command  or 
wish,  293,  ( a ),  2 ; condi- 
tional, 69,  293,  ( a ),  3 ; po- 
sition of  verb  in,  293 , ot 
subject,  294  ; of  predicate, 
225 ; of  objects,  etc.,  296; 
of  advs.,  etc.,  297  ; of 
other  members,  298;  in- 
verted, 301,  N.  1,2  ; com- 
pound and  complex,  202- 
306. 

Separable  prefixes,  when  se- 
parated, 117  ; place  of, 
295,  3 and  N.,  303,  4. 

‘ shall,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  201. 

Shifting  of  mutes,  325. 

‘ since,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  241,  12. 
ftngeu  Model,  144. 

Singular,  see  “ Concord, 

“ Substantives.” 

‘ so,’  rendered  by  c5,  39,  3. 
fo,  after  conditional  and  ad- 
verbial clauses,  69,  239, 
R.  2,  267,  R.  3,  293,  (b\ 
R.  4,  N.  1,  2,  294,  (b),  R. 
2;  replaces  fold)  before  ein, 
138,  N.  2 ; adv.  conj., 
237. 

fo.  . . fo,  241,9. 
fo  ein,  followed  by  tote, 
162,  4. 

fogar,  adv.  conj.,  237,  R.  2. 
©oljn  Model,  21  ; origin  of 
Umlaut  in,  326,  R.  2,  (a). 
fold)(er),  demonstr.  pron., 
132,  188  ; followed  by 
toie,  162,  4 ; before  adjs., 
122,  12. 

follen,  conjugation, 196-199; 

use,  200,  5,  201,  202. 
‘some,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  2,  2,  150,  152, 
155,  168,  173,  177,  180. 
fonber,  50, 1. 
fonbern,  236,  R.  1. 
fott>ol)l . . . al§  (au$),  288; 
285,  R.  6. 


INDEX. 


45 1 


fptnn§n  Model,  158. 
fpredjen  Model,  1G7. 

HI/  1b  P-  5 » in  verbs,  118, 
R.  2,  123,  R.  1,  181,  O. 
1, 188,  R.  3. 
ftatt,  see  anjtatt. 

*ft,  subst.  suffix,  312,  1. 
ftefjen,  withinfin.,  272,  R.  2. 
Stem  of  verbs,  27. 

Strong  declension;  see  “ Sub- 
stantives, declension  of.” 
Strong  conjugation ; see 
“Verbs,  conjugation  of.” 
Subject,  definition  of,  292  ; 
place  of,  294 ; in  principal 
sentences,  20,  59,  N. ; 
in  direct  questions,  23, 
O.  1;  in  dependent  sen- 
tences, 33,  N.;  inver- 

sion of,  301,  2,  N.  i,  2; 
expressed  by  nom.  case, 
3,  242,  1 ; agreement  with 
verb,  285;  repetition  of, 
286. 

Subjective  clause,  306;  rela- 
tive, 306,  R.  3. 

Subjective  genitive,  243,  2. 
Subjunctive  Mood,  use,  264- 
268,  for  conditional,  111, 
263,  N. ; in  indirect  state- 
ments, 87,  265,  266  ; in 
indirect  questions,  88  ; in 
hypothetical  periods,  239, 
R.  1,  267  ; for  imperative, 
31,  R.  4,  268,  1,  269; 
expressing  a wish,  268,  2 ; 
of  purpose,  268,  3 ; after 
a negative,  etc.,  268,  4;  of 
possibility,  268,  5;  origin 
of  Umlaut  in  impf.  subj., 
326,  ( g ). 

Substantives,  their  declen- 
sion, SJlaler  Model,  16, 
17;  ©obn  do.,  21,  (#),  22, 
App.  C. ; £unb  do.,  21, 
(£),  22,  App.  E. ; £>orf  do., 
86,  37;  Jlnabe,  ©raf, 
23Iume  do.,  64-57,  App. 
F. ; Ulame,  Sftad&bar, 


do.,  60-63,  App.  G. ; with 
double  plurals,  64,  App. 
G.#;  Summary  and  tables, 
7 0 ; essential  parts,  7 1 ; 
anomalous,  66-69 ; substs. 
without  plural,  66 ; without 
sing.  ,67 ; of  measure,  weight 
and  number,  185  ; as  verb 
prefixes,  206,  3,  212;  ir- 
regular compound  substs., 
68;  appositive  subst.,  289; 
derivation,  by  internal 
change,  310;  by  suffixes, 
312 ; by  prefixes,  315  *, 
composition,  319;  see  also 
under  “ Accentuation,” 
“ Compound  Substan- 
tives,” “ Foreign  Substan- 
tives,” “Gender.” 
Suffixes,  of  verbs,  311;  of 
substs.,  312 ; of  adjs., 
313. 

Superlative  degree,  of  adjs., 
relative,  127,  1;  absolute, 
127,  2;  of  advs.,  190, 
3-7. 

st,  substs.  in,  gender,  89,  2, 
(( h );  subst.  suffix,  312,  1. 
stat,  foreign  substs.  in,  gen- 
der, 89,  2,  (e). 
taufenb,  165,  8,  and  10,  ( c ). 
teil§  . . . teilS,  238. 

Tense,  in  indirect  state- 
ments, 87  ; in  indirect 
questions,  88;  auxiliaries  of, 
use,  25,  53  ; place  of  with 
auxiliaries  of  mood,  199,  3. 
Tenses,  simple,  how  formed 
in  weak  verbs,  30  ; in 
strong,  104-107,  110; 
endings  of,  in  weak  verbs, 
35  ; in  strong,  107  ; com- 
pound, how  formed,  25, 
108  ; construction,  26, 
33  ; sequence  of  tenses  in 
indirect  statements  and 
questions  not  observed  in 
I Germ.,  87,  2,  88,  2,  266, 


4 ; of  the  indicative,  how 
used,  257-262  (see  also 
under  the  various  tenses) ; 
of  the  conditional,  263, 
N.;  the  tense  in  indirect 
statements,  87,  2G6 ; in 
hypothetical  periods,  267. 

Terminations ; see  “ End- 
ings.” 

* than  ’ after  the  compara- 

tive, 126,  1,241,  7. 

‘that,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  140. 

‘ the  . . . the  ’ before  compa- 
ratives, 126,  4. 

* there/  rendered  by  e§,  39, 

1,  R.  ; ‘ there  is,  there  are/ 

220. 

‘they/  indefinite,  145,  146. 

stl)um;  see  stum. 

Time,  expressions  of,  184; 
place  of,  11,  45,  297,  2, 
306,  R.  2;  advs.  of,  187, 
I. ; English  participial  con- 
structions of,  how  rendered 
in  Germ.,  284,  (<2);  time 
of  day,  184,  3,  285,  R.  6, 
N.  2. 

Titles  of  rank,  49  ; 76,  5,  6. 

‘ to/  how  rendered  in  Germ., 
46,  R.  4;  233. 

Towns,  names  of,  gender, 
80, 3,  ( c ) ; see  also  “Places, 
names  of.” 

Transitive  verbs,  English, 
with  object  unexpressed, 
rendered  by  reflexive  verbs 
in  Germ.,  215,  2;  often 
intrans.  in  Germ.,  250,  R. 
1,  252,  R. 

Trigraphs,  consonantal,  pp. 
4,  8,  14. 

tro£,  223,  16,  and  R.  2. 

stunt,  substs.  in,  declension, 
37 ; gender,  89,  3,  (3) ; 
subst.  suffix,  312,  16. 

fiber,  prep.,  65  ; after  inter- 
jections, 240,  4,  («);  after 


452 


INDEX. 


verbs,  etc.,  291, 1;  prefix, 
208  ; after  reflexive  verbs, 
215, 1. 

um,  prep.,  84,  184,  3,  ( c ), 
226,  («),  (6),  227,  (3),  i ; 
after  verbs,  291,  4;  go- 
verning an  infin.  of  pur- 
pose, 224,  2,  (b),  273, 
276;  prefix,  208. 

Urn  fo,  before  comparatives, 
126,  4,  241,  2,  293,  (b), 
R.  4,  N.  3.  [12. 

um...  wittcn,  223, 22, R.  1, 
Umlaut,  pp.  3,  6,  12,  14;  in 
declension  of  substs.,  17, 
(a),  21,  (*),  22, 36,  70,  R. 
6,  App.  A.,  C. ; in  subj. 
mood,  107,  O 2;  in  com- 
parison of  adjs.,  125,  R.  1, 
in  strong  verbs,  186,  188, 
192,  R.  1 ; in  Modal  Aux- 
iliaries, 196,  R.  1 ; in  deri- 
vation, 308,  N.,  309,  311, 

1,  2,  312,  2-4,  8,  11-13, 
313,  5 ; origin,  326. 

Ut\s,  subst.  prefix,  315,  4. 
unb,  236. 
unfern,  223,  23. 

«ung,  substs.  in,  gender,  89, 

2,  ( a ) ; subst.  suffix,  312, 
17. 

ungeadjtet,  prep.,  223,  15; 

conj.  239,  3,  (3),  241,  21. 
units,  before  tens,  165,  7. 

* unless,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  241,  18. 
unten,  adv.,  189,  3;  com- 
parison, 130. 

unter,  prep.,  65;  prefix, 
208. 

unterbeffen,  adv.  conj.,  237  ; 
subord.  conj.,  239,  3,  (3), 
241,  15. 

unterljalb,  223,  6. 
wmoeit,  223,  24. 
ur s,  subst.  prefix,  315,  5. 
••ur,  substs.  in,  gender,  89, 
2,  (eb 

rfpra^e,  322. 


Variative  numerals,  182,  (^r) . 

net's,  insep.yerb  prefix, 35,  R. 
6,  204  ; meaning,  314,  6. 

Verb,  place  of,  20,  32,  33, 
87,  2,  88,  2,  266,  R.  2, 
267,  R.  2,  292,293,301; 
English  periphrastic  forms 
of,  how  rendered  in  Ger., 
31,  R.  3;  tenses  of,  256- 
262,  263,  266  (see  also 
under  the  various  tenses) ; 
moods  of,  256-278  (see 
also  under  the  various 
moods);  concord  of,  285; 
when  omitted,  269,  R.  6, 
287. 

Verbs,  stem  of,  27;  principal 
parts  of,  28;  weak  conjuga- 
tion of,  30,  31 ; endings  of 
simple  tenses,  35 ; verbs 
conjugated  with  fein,  53  ; 
neut.,  of  motion,  etc.,  63  ; 
irregular  weak,  99  ; strong, 
103-108,  App.  L. ; beiften 
Model,  118;  bleiben  do., 
120;  fc^iefjen  do.,  123  ; 
feefyten  do.,  124;  frieren 
do.,  131 ; fingen  do.,  144  ; 
fpimteit  do.,  158 ; Ijelfen 
do.,  159;  fprecfjcndo.,  167; 
effeu  do.,  181;  fdjlagen 
do.,  186  ; fallen  do.,  188; 
table  of  strong  verbs,  192; 
passive  voice,  112-114  ; 
reflexive  verbs,  paradigm 
of,  41 ; use,  214-216;  im- 
personal verbs,  217-220  ; 
compound  verbs,  insep., 
35,  R.  6,  109,  204,  207- 
209,  211-213 ; separable, 
117,  205-208,  210; 

auxiliaries  of  tense,  25, 
63  ; irregular  strong,  194, 
196;  auxiliaries  of  mood, 
196-202  ; verbs  with  two 
nominatives,  242,2, 3;  with 
genitive,  245 ; with  dative, 
250;  with  accusative, 252, 
253 ; verbs  of  choosing, 


242,  N. ; of  calling,  con- 
sidering, 253 ; verbs  fol- 
lowed by  the  subjunctive, 
265 ; by  the  infin.  without 
JU,  271;  with  jit,  272; 
prepositions  after,  291 ; 
derivation  of,  without 
change,  308  ; with  in- 
ternal change,  309  ; by 
suffixes,  311;  by  prefixes, 
314. 

cermittelft,  223,  9. 

cermoge,  223, 10. 

Diet,  comparison  of,  129 ; 
indef.  pron.,  145  ; ir.def. 
numeral,  168,  176;  before 
adjs.,  122,  11,  12. 

Vocative,  242,  1. 

coll,  prefix,  sep.  and  insep., 
208;  adj.,  244. 

non,  prep.,  46,  228,  (a), 
231,  (b),  234;  used  for 
genitive,  46,  R.  3;  with 
passive  voice,  112,  R.  3; 
with  names  of  places,  72, 
3,  4;  with  names  of  per- 
sons, 76,  6;  replaces  geni- 
tive of  quality,  243,  5,  N. ; 
after  partitives,  243, 6,  N.; 
after  coll, 244  ; after  verbs, 
245,  2 

cor,  prep.,  65,  184,  3,  (b), 
234 ; after  verbs,  etc.,  291, 
5,  11 ; after  reflexive  verbs, 
215,  1,  ( b ). 

corn,  adv.,  189,  3;  compari- 
son, 130. 

Vowels,  modified,  pp.  3,  6, 
12,  14;  double,  pp.  4,  6, 
12,  14;  importance  of,  p. 
8,  bottom ; long  and  short, 
pp.  9,  10;  see  also  “ Um- 
laut.” 

toabrenb,  prep.,  75,  2,  223, 
17;  conj.,  239,  3,  (b),  241, 
13;  replaces  Engl,  participle 
of  time,  284,  1,  (a). 

watut,  68,  187,  I.,  (d). 

tcarum,  83,  R.  3,  N.„ 


INDEX 


453 


ttm3,  interrog.  pron.,  declen-  I 
sion  and  use,  83;  some- 
times — * why,’  83, 6, 162, 
3;  used  for  ettua§,  149, 
1;  relative  pron.,  92,  96; 
followed  by  ba§,  162,  1 ; 
of  a number  of  persons 
or  things,  162,  2 ; not  gov- 
erned by  preps.,  83,  3, 
96,  7 ; construction  of  sen- 
tences with,  98,  3. 
n>c3  ftir  (ein),  86, 

*we,’  indef.,  146. 

Weak  conjugation,  see 
“ Verbs  ” ; declension,  see 
“ Substantives,”  “ Adjec- 
tives.” 

roeber  . . . nod),  238. 
roegen,  75, 1,  223, 2,  and  R. 

3. 

Weight,  expressions  of , 185. 
weil,  239,  3,  (*),  241,  17. 
tueld)er,  interrog.  pron.  and 
adj.,  6,  81,  82,  84,85; 
in  exclamations,  85,  1,2; 
relative  pron.,  92,  94,  95; 
indefinite  pron.  and  numr 
eral,  used  for  ‘ some,” 
145,  155,  180;  before 
adjs.,  122, 13. 

toenig,  comparison  of,  129; 
indef.  pron.,  145;  indef. 
numeral,  168,  176 ; before 
adjs.,  122, 12. 

tuenn,  58,  239,  3,  (£),  R.  1- 

4,  2G7  ; omission  of,  239, 
R.  2-4,  267,  R.  2,  3,  6, 
N.,  293,  (a),  3,  R.  4,  N. 
2,  (r),  R.  2,  294,  (3),  R. 
2. 

wertn  au$,  rocnn  0lei$,n)enn 


fdjon,  239,  3,  (<$),  and  R. 
3,  N. 

raemt . . . me §t,  239,  3,  (b), 
241, 18. 

tuer,  interrog.  pron.,  81,  83; 
relative  pron.,  92,  96,135, 
(b)y  N. ; followed  by  ber, 
162,  1;  replaced  by  ber, 
306,  R.  3,  N. ; construc- 
tion of  sentences  with,  98, 

3. 

roerben,  pres,  and  impf.  of, 
19  ; conjugated  with  feitt, 
53,  (a);  use  as  auxiliary 
of  tense,  25,  2;  as  auxili- 
ary of  passive  voice,  112, 
113;  conjugation,  112; 
as  impersonal  verb,  217, 
2,  ( c );  with  dat.,  250,  ( e ). 

‘when,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  58. 

‘ whether,’  expressed  by  tttos 
gen,  200,  3,  (c). 

‘ while,  whilst,’  how  rendered 
in  Germ.,  241,  15, 

‘ whole,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  168,  170. 

tniber,  prep.,  34  ; prefix, 
204. 

tt)ie,  in  comparisons,  126,  3, 
241,  6,  8;  after  fold)  ein, 
fo  eitt,  162,  4;  subord. 
conj.,  239,  3,  ( b)\  in  com- 
parative clauses,  306,  R. 

4,  N. 

tmeber,  prefix,  208,  N.  2. 

tmeoielfte,  ber,  164,  166,  3, 

N.  2. 

* will,’  how  rendered  in 
Germ.,  201. 

Wish,  expressed  by  the  Sub- 


junctive, 268,  2;  construc- 
tion of  sentences  express- 
ing, 293,  {a),  2. 
toiffen,  196,  and  N.  1. 
too,  187,  II.,  (c);  before 
preps.,  replacing  interrog. 
prons.,  83,  3,  and  relative 
prons.,  95,  2,  96,  7. 
toof)l,  comparison  of,  190; 

idiomatic  use,  195, 10. 
tooilett,  its  conjugation,  196- 
199 ; its  use,  200,  6,  201, 
202. 

toorbett,  for  getoorben,  in 
passive  voice,  112,  R.  2; 
when  omitted,  112,  R.  4. 

* you,’  how  rendered  in  Ger., 
40 ; indef.  pron.,  146. 

sjeljtt,  in  compound  num- 
erals, 165,  5. 

jer^,  insep.  prefix,  35,  R.  6, 
204;  meaning,  314,  7. 
sjig,  in  numerals,  165,  6. 

3U,  prep.,  46, 227,  (a),  4,  (b), 
2,  (c),  228,  (c),  229,  (a), 
230,  (c),  232,  (b),  233,  (3), 
( [c ),  2,  (ii)  ; with  Infinitive, 
272-277;  place  of,  109, 
117,  R.  2;  with  insep. 
verbs,  205, 2 ; followed  by 
al§  bafj  or  urn  ju,  with 
verbs  of  choosing,  242,  3, 
N.,  253;  after  adjs.,  244. 
juerft,  195,  5. 
jufolge,  223, 11,  R. 
junac^ft,  51,  7. 
junriber,  51,  3. 
jiuei,  declension  of,  165,  2. 
atoife^en,  prep.,  65. 


1 

i 


I 

I 


